^ 


03 

'5/ 


7f^ 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/frenchconversatiOOottorich 


)]. 


STANDARD   EDUCATIONAL    WORK'S. 


Borel.     O'urs  de  Tli^mes.    i2mo S^o  73 

E  jrel.     Grammaire  Fraii?ai>e.     i2mo i  60 

Delille.  '  Condensed   French  Instruction.     181110  5'^ 

Fisher.     Easy  French  Reading.     With  Vocabulary.     i6mo 95 

Fleurf     Histoi  e  de  France.     i2mo  14° 

Fleury.     Ancient  History.     Translated,  with  Note.*;.     i2mo.. 85 

Gasc.     French  English  Dictionary.     8vo 3  75 

Do  do  i8mo.      Pocket  edition,  $1.40 ;  2  vols,     i  60 

Translator.     (English  into  Frenci) 125 

Gibert.     Introductory  French  Manual.     i2mo 85 

Janes'.     French  Grammar.     i2mo 1^5 

Lacombe.     Histoire  liu  Peuple  Frangaise. 75 

Le  Jeu  des  Anteurs,     (Game  of  Authors)  ii  a  box i  00 

Maistre  (X.  de).     rEuvres  C:omulfeie.'i         140 

Ma  sire  (X.  de  )     Voyage  autour  de  ma  Chambr.i.     lamo.     Paper 40 

Mussjt.     IJn  Capncp  cSni'fdip.     i2nio.      Paper 3° 

Otto,     p'rench  Conversation  Gramm.tr.     ismo.     Roan,  ^1.60 :   Key 75 

Mocher's  French  R  ader.     i2nio.     Roan   140 

First  Hook  in  Frenc  t.     i6mo.      Hoards 40 

I  iitroductorv  Frencfi  I^esso  is i  25 

Introductory  Fremih  Rea  er.     12010.     I'.otirds 100 

Pariez-vous  Frdn<;ais'^r,  Do  \ou  Spe«k  Frcncii?     18m  >.     Hoar  Is 50 

Plays.      CoLl'-ge  Serirs  of  M  -litrn  French  Plays.     With  Knslisli  .Notes  by 

Piof.  I<6jhir.  i2m->.  Paper  La  Joie  lait  Feur,  ,^o  cents  ;  I,a  Hat  .ille 
des  Dames.  35C-i»«9:  La  Miisoi  <ie  Penarva.i.  35  c.nt. ;  La  Poudre 
aux  Veui<,  35  cents  ;  Les  Petis  Oiseaux,  35  cents  :  Ma.lemoi.xel'.c  de  la 
.Seiglifere,  35  cents  ;  Le  Roman  d'un  Jeune  Homnic  Panvre,  5  cents; 
Les  Doigts  de  F^e,  35  Cc-Sts  :  Jean  Haudry.  35  cents.     Ihe  foregoing  in 

two  volumes,     lamo.     Cloth,     Each  vol 160 

Modern  Fretuk  Comedit^s.  Le  Village,  ascents  ;  La  Cagnotte.  35  cents: 
L"s  Femmes  qui  pleurent,  25  cents  :  Les  Petites  Misircs  de  la  Vie 
Humaine,  25  cents  ;  La  Niaise  de  St.  Fljur.  25  (St.sv  :  'J'rois  Proverhes, 
30  ^pts  ;  Vakrie,  30  cents  ;  Le  Collier  de  Pedes,  jo  cents.  The  three 
lastiivned  h^ve  vocabularies.  » 

French.  Plays  for  Children.  With  Vocabularies.  i2mo.  Paper.  La 
Vieille  Cousine :  I>es  Ricochets.  25  cents  ;  Le  Testament  de  Madame 
Patunal ;  La  Mademoiselle  de  St.  Cyr,  25  cents  ;  La  Petite  Maman  ;  Le 
Hrncel^t,  25  cents  ;  La  Loterie  de  Francfort  ;  Jeune  Savante,  25  c€nts. 
Siudenis'  ColUction  of  Classic  Fr>'>ich  Pluys.  i2mo.  Paper.  With  full 
Notes,  by  Prof.  E.  S  Joyne.  Oorneill  j.  Le  Cid,  50  cents.  Raciae. 
Athalie,  50  cents.     Moliere.     Le  Misanthrope,  50  cents.     The  foregomg 

in  0!ie  vol.     i2mo.     Cloih 1  50 

Pylodet's  Hcqinning  French.     i6mo.      Hoards... 55 

• Hegjnner's  French  Reader.      With  illustrations.     i6mo.     Hoards 55 

Second  French  Reader.     With  illustrations 1   10 

l..a  Literature  F  angaise  Classique      i2mo \  C 

La  Literature  Fran<;a:se  Coiitemporainc.     i2mo   i  40 

Gouties  de  Rosie.     Fren  h  T,yric  Poetry.     i8mo 65 

•  Mere  L'Oie.     lUustnittd.     8vo.     Hoards 50 

Riodo.     Lucie.     Frencli  an  \  EnsiH-^  1  Conversations.     i2mo : 75 

Badler.     Translnting  I'.nEhsh  into  I-'rench.     i2mo i  25 

SauvcRir.     Introduction  to  Teaching.      i2mo.     Paper 25 

lOntretiens  sur  la  Or 'mmaire.      i2mo i  75 

■  Causeries  avcc  mcs  liUeves.     lamo.     Illustrated - i  50 

'  2 


/ 


i/y 


lJla'€ 


^  |\-0>\-A!  5      V  C 


OTTO'S     FRENCH     READER. 


A  Collection  of  Progressive  Extracts  from  French 
Literature,  with  Annotations,  by  Prof.  Ferdinand 
BocHER.     12mo.     I?1.40. 

Although  the  grammatical  references  in  this  Reader  arc  to 
Otto's  French  Grammar,  it  will  be  found  suitable  for  use  with 
any  system. 


SPECIMEN  COPIES  WILL  BE  FORWARDED  TO  TEACHERS  FOR 

EXAMINATIOX,  ON    RECEIPT    OF    ONE-HALF 

OF   THE   RETAIL   PRICE. 

HENRY  HOLT  &  CO.,  Publishers, 

New  York. 


*^*Avy  one.  dif^coveHng  an  error  in  any  of  Mmin'ii.  Henry  Holt  <fc  Co.^sp?jbli- 
eat.iQn-9,  will  confer  a  great  favor  by  reporting  it  to  the  pvUi^hers  immediately. 

If  the  teacher  vaing  th£  book  in  which  this  notice  is  jTi-infed  will  har,e  the  kind- 
ne.v.<i  to  notify  the  pvblishers  of  the  fact,  he  will  confer  a  favor  on  tJiem,  ana 
enable  them  to  send  directly  to  him  information  of  new  books  in  his  department. 


THE     BOC/IER-OTTO     FRENCH     COURSE 

•  FRENCH 

ConversatioiN-Crammar 

DR.    EMIL    OTTO 

t  • 

RKVISED     BV 

FERDINAND    bOCHER 

Iratntctor  in  French  at  fiarvard   Utiiveriity 
NEW  EDITION,  ENLARGED  BY  FULL  VOCABULARIES 

BY 

L.   PYI.ODET 


NEW  YORK 
HENRY  HOLT  AND  COMPANY 

F.    W.    CIIRISTERN 
BOSTON  :    CAliL   SCao^'UOF 


OT) 


fin^ 


Enteib<i  According  to  Act  of  Congnjsa.   in  the  yoar  18B4.  by 

S.    R.    URBINO, 

In  the  Clerk's  Ulfice  of  the  District  Court  of  the  District  of  Masaachuaettn. 


Copyright,  1875,  bi 
HENRY  HOLT. 


PREFACE 


The  first  edition  of  Dr.  Emile  Otto^s  "  French 
Conversation  Grammar  "  appeared  at  Heidelberg  Id 
1859.  A  second  edition  was  issued  in  1863,  upon 
which  tliis  first  American  edition  is  based.  The  pres- 
ent edit(»r  has  not  hesitated  in  making  such  changes 
as  he  deemed  proper  in  the  l)ody  of  the  work,  abandon- 
ing, among  other  tilings,  the  names  of  the  Latin  cases, 
genitive,  dative,  etc.,  which,  although  they  may  be  of 
help  to  the  German  student,  can  only  confuse  the  Amer- 
ican learner.  The  names  of  the  tenses  have  also  been 
changed,  and,  it  is  hupt^d,  simplified.  A  few  lessons 
have  been  added  to  Part  I.,  and  the  chapter  upon  the 
Past  Participle  has  been  rerwritten.  The  preliminary 
'^sson  upon  Pronunciation  is  also  entirely  new,  and  an 
English  and  French  Vocabulary  of  the  words  that 
occur  in  the  Themes  has  been  added. 


Bo«TOK,  Aagiut,  18M. 


43C341 


CONTENTS 


PRONUNCIATION. 

Paos. 

The  Alphabet 13 

Division  of  Syllables 14 

Syllabic  Accent,  or  Stress 14 

Accents  —  Orthograpluc  Marks 15 

Simple  Vowels 15 

Compound  Vowels 18 

Diphthongs 18 

Nasal  Vowls 19 

Consonants. —  General  Rules ?I 

Consonants.—  Special  Rules  .  .  .  .  ^ 22 

Linking  of  Final  Consonants 20 

Obser\'ations  on  E  mute 26 


1?ART     I. 

I<BCtO«.  Paoi. 

I.  The  Article 28 

II.  Formation  of  the  Plural 30 

III.  Case  — .1  — D/? 33 

IV.  Prepositions 36 

V.  The  Partitive  Article 39 

VI.  Further  use  of  r/*? 43 

VII.  Proper  Nouns 44 

VIII.  Conjugation  of  avoir,  to  have  — affirmatively 48 

IX.  Idiomatic  use  o^  avoir  .  ,  .' 51 

X.  Conjugation  of  Hre,  to  be  —  afiirniativnly 54 

XI.  JJegations.  —  The  Negative  and   Interrogative  forms  of  the  Aux-  *■ 

Uiaries df 

IX 


X  CONTENTS. 

Istnon.  FA«a. 

XJI.  Demonstrative  and  Interrogative  Adjectives (Sa 

XJII.  Possessive  Adjectives 64 

XIV.  Cariliaa]  Numbers 67 

XV.  Ordinal  Numbers 71 

XVI,  Indofiuite  Adjectives 75 

XVII    Adj''ctiv(\s,  —  Formation  of  the  feminine  and  of  the  plural  ,  ,  .  ,  78 

■'.\'III    riie  place  of  Adjectives 82 

XIX.  Degrees  of  Comparison 80 

XX.  Regular  Verbs.  —  First  Conjugation.  —  Z)o?i»er 88 

Reading  Lenson :  Le  chameau  et  le  chat 95 

XXI.  Remarks  on  the  Orthography  uf  some  Verbs  of  the  First  Conjugar 

tion ' 96 

XXII.  Second  Conjugation:  Finir 100 

Keading  Lesson  :  Le  Moiueau  et  ses  I'etits 104 

XXIII.  Third  Conjug:ition  :  Fendre 105 

Reading  Lesson :  Le  roi  de  Perse 110 

XXIV.  Disjunctive  I'ersonal  Pronouns 110 

Reading  I-esson:   Le  Rosier 113 

XXV.  Conjunctive  Personal  Pronouns 114 

Reading  Lesson:  sjuite  du  Rosier 118 

XXVI.  Demonstrative   Pronouns 119 

XXVIl.  Interrogative  Pronouns 122 

XXVIII.  Possessive  and  Itelative  Pronouns 125 

XXIX.  Indetinite  Pronouns 129 

Reading  Lesson :  i'uissance  «le  la  Concorde 1.32 

XXX.  Passive  and  Neuter  Verbs 133 

XXXI.  Reflective  Verbs 138 

Reading  Lesson:  Le  Sansonnet 144 

XXXII.  Impersonal  Verbs 146 

Reading  Lesson :  Productions  de  divers  climats 150 

XXXIII.  Formation  of  Adverbs 151 

XXXIV.  Adverbs  of  Place  and  of  fiiue 166 

XXXV.  Adverbs  of  Number,  of  (iiiality,  of  Negation,  etc 158 

XXXVI    Coujuuctions Ifi2 

Reaihug  Lesson  :    Lalitte 166 

XXXVII.  Conjunctive  Plirases 167 

XXX VI U.  Irregular  Verbs.— First  Class 170 

XXXIX.  Irregular  Verbs. —  First  Class  continued 174 

XL.  Irregular  Verbs. —  F^rst  Class  continued ,  ,  ,  177 

XIA.  Irregular  Verbs.  —  First  Class  continued •  .  .  180 


CONTENTS.  XI 

Lweoa.  Fio«. 

XLII.  rrrejyular   Verbs.  —  Second  Class 1K3 

XLIII.  [mjrular  Verbs. ~ Tliird  Class 186 

XLIV.  Irregular  Verbs.  — Third  Chi-ss  continued 189 

XLV.  Irregular  Verbs.  —  Third  (^Jhiss  continued  . 1&4 

XLVI.  Defective  Verbs 197 

Alphabutioal   l^ist  of  Irregular  and   Defective  Verbs 198 

ILTII.  Uow  to  Tonihr  (Jo,  di'l,sluUl,  irill,  etc 201 

Suppiemeutiiry  Tenses «  «  .  <  2M 


PART     II. 

EUsion 806 

I.  On  the  Gender  of  Substantives 206 

n.  Plural  of  Nouns 214 

Rendin*,'  !.esson:  Le  Castor 216 

m.  Use  of  the  Arti<Me .    218 

Heading  Le.^son :  Demosth^ne 22e 

TV.  Special  use  of  de  and  n 228 

V.  Peculiarities  in  the  use  of  names  of  Countries,  Towns,  etc. .  .  .   236 

Reading  Lesson:  Charles  XII 238 

VI.  Possessive  Adjectives 239 

Rending  Lesson :  Eudamidas 242 

VII.  Numerals 244 

VIII.  Adjectives 246 

Heading  Lesson:  L'^lephant 253 

IX.  1.  Personal  Pronouns ••.••••••..    256 

2.  Particular  use  of  en  and  y  ; 258 

3.  The  supplying  Pronouns  le,  ladles 260 

Reading  Lesson  :  L'^h^phant  (_contintiation) 262 

X.  Interrogative  I'ronouns 2G3 

Reading  Lesson :  bervilius  se  dc^fend  devant  le  pouple ,   266 

XI.  Hel:itive  Pronouns .267 

Reudiug  Lesson:  Suite  de  "  Servilius," 273 

XII.  Indefinite  Pronouns 271 

XIII.  Indetiuite  Pronouns,  continued .    278 

XIV.  Adverbs 284 

Ecadlug  Lesson :  Le  Cona^table  de  Bourbon  et  liayard 288 


Xn  CONTENTS. 

Lesson.  Page 

XV.  Syntax  of  Negations 289 

Reading  LePHon :  Le  Conn^table  de  Bourbon  et  Bayard.  (Suite)  .   295 

XVI.  Remarks  on  some  Prepositions 296 

XVII    Different  uses  of  the  Conjunction  que 307 

Reading  Lesson:  Le  Connetable.de  Bourbon  et  Bayard.   (Fin).   311 

JLVlll.  Use  of  tlie  Tenses  of  the  Indicative 313 

Reading  Lesson :  Alexandre  Selkirk 324 

XIX.  The  Subjunctive  Mood 825 

Reading  Lesson :  Alexandre  Selkirk.  (Suite) 336 

XX.  The  Infinitive 338 

*'  "         preceded  by  de 312 

"  "         preceded  by  d 347 

*•  "         preceded  by  other  Prepositions 354 

Reading  Lesson  :  Alexandre  Selkirk.  (Suite) 365 

XXI.  The  Present  Participle 357 

Reading  Lesson  :  Gesler  conduit  Tell  k  Kusnach 360 

XXII.  The  Past  Participle 363 

XXIII.  The  Participle  Absolute 367 

Reading  Lesson  :  Gesler  conduit  Tell  k  Kusnach 309 

XJCIV.  Government  of  Verbs 371 

XXV.  Idiomatlcal  Expresaioni «...   380 

French-English  Vocabulary 385 

English-French  Vocabulary 441 


FRENCn  .GRAMMAR. 


PRONUNCIATION. 


TTTK  ALPHABET. 

1.  The  written  French  alphohet  is  the  same  as  thp  English  w 
and  K  are  found  only  in  words  hon'owcd  from  other  lant^uajjoii. 

The  names  of  the  lottors  are  niven  below  in  the  Frciirh  (»|H'llint:  as  they 
are  of  little  or  no  valui'  to  the  U'trinncr.  In  the  new  nrtnii>>  tin-  »•  in  V.  Ice., 
cU',  f/ue,  etc.,  is  only  soumletl  en«m};h  to  allow  the  utt»'niiucof  the  consonant 
that  prerede^  it.  as  in  ^rlo/"",  caX-f:,  ma^/e,  fatiyMf;;  j  is  sounded  ass  in  /*/«/.<c?ir«. 
The  vowels  have  their  normal  French  sounds.  —  VV  when  spoken  of  is? 
Cdllod  double  V. 


OLD  MAMBS.     NEW  NAJ1B8. 


OLD  MAMRS.     NEW  KAMBS. 


A 

a 

a 

a 

N 

D 

eune 

ne 

B 

b 

U 

be 

0 

0 

0 

0 

C 

0 

c6 

ke(8e) 

P 

P 

P^ 

pe 

D 

d 

d^ 

de 

Q 

q 

ku 

ke. 

E 

e 

4> 

e 

R 

r 

erre 

re 

F 

f 

effe 

fe 

S 

a 

esse 

se  (ze) 

G 

g 

g^ 

gueCje) 

T 

t 

t4 

te 

H 

b 

ache 

he 

U 

u 

u 

u 

I 

i 

i 

i 

V 

V 

v^ 

ve 

J 

J 

ji 

je 

X 

X 

ics 

kso 

K 

k 

ka 

ke 

Y 

y 

igrec 

i 

L 

1 

elle 

le 

Z 

z 

zede 

ae 

M 

m 

eimne 

me 

18 


14  ..,■.■.  ^   ^  \'  :     PRDJJtkciATlON. 


DIVISIOJN   OF  SYLLABLES. 

2.  Words  are  generally  divided  as  in  English;  but  whenever  il 
possible  a  syllable  must  begin  with  a  'consonant.  Henco,  verbal 
Slid  othor  terminations  beginning  with  a  trowel  must  be  joinjd  to  (he 
consonant  that  precedes ;  thus  ai-mer^  but  ai-me-rai ;  chan-ter, 
chan-te-^rai,  chan-te-rons. 


18 


As  to  X  equal  to  gs,  cs,  its  compound  nature  prevents  its  separation  from 
the  vowel  that  precedes  :  hence  the  following  division  ex-em-ple. 

In  writing,  silent  h  apparently  begins  a  syllable,  as  in  in-h^-rent;  but  in 
the  spoken  syllables,  silent  h  has  no  value  whatever ;  and  a  consonant  be- 
tween a  ^'■C'Wei  and  a  silent  h  is  separated  from  that  vowel  in  the  spoken 
though  not  in  the  written  language ;  hence  the  following  divisions. 

Written.  Pronounced, 

in-hu-main  i-nhu-main 

in-ha-bi-le  i-nha-bile 

in-he-rent  i-nhe-rent 

bon-heur  bo-nheur 

If  these  words  were  pronounced  according  to  the  written  divisions,  they 
would  begin  with  a  nasal  sound ;  but  they  do  not.     (See  Nasal  vowels,  37.) 


SYLLABIC   ACCENT,   OR  STRESS. 

As  compared  with  English,  French  is  generally  said  to  have  no  syllabic 
accent.  Such  a  stress  of  voice  as  is  heard  in  the  words  acfcent  and  accent 
does  not  occur  iu  French ;  but  the  following  rule  explains  the  uniformity 
of  the  English  accent  on  the  last  syllable  in  words  newly  introduced  from 
the  French,  such  as  barouche,  swiout,  machine,  fatigue,  etc. 

3.  In  French  each  syllable  of  a  word  must  be  pronounced 
smoothly,  the  voice  resting  upon  the  last,  unless  it  ends  in  e  mute, 
In  which  case  the  syllable  before  the  last  is  slightly  accented.  Ex. 
constitution,  indubitable. 


ACCENTS  —  SIMPLE   VOWELS.  16 


ACCENTS,  —  ORTHOGRAPHIC   MARKS. 

4.  Three  ortbographio  marks,  the  cicute  ('),  the  grave  ('),  and 
the  circumflex  (*),  have  received  the  name  of  accionts. 

These  marks  never  affect  a  syllable ;  they  can  only  modify  the  sound  of 
a  vowel  over  which  they  are  placed.  Sometimes  they  have  a  mere  oitho- 
graphic  value.     They  must  never  be  neglected  in  writing. 

5.  The  ACUTE  (')  is  used  only  over  the  vowel  e  (e),  which  then 
has  the  stmriil  of  a  in  dale.     Ex.  tie,  donne, 

().  The  (iKWE  (')  or  open  accent  is  used  principally  over  e  (c), 
which  then  h;is  the  sound  of  e  in  ehh  or  of  e  in  there.  Kx.  five, 
pere.  Over  a  and  u  it  is  only  used  to  distinguish  words  otherwise 
similarly  sjjclled,  and  does  not  affect  the  pronunciation.  Ex.  la, 
the  ;  la.,  there  ;  a,  has  ;  a,  to  ;  ou,  or ;  oii,  where. 

7.  The  CiROU.vfFLEX  (")  is  used  over  all  the  vowels,  which  are 
then  long.      Ks.  dife.  cote,  sur. 

The  circumflex  denotes  that  a  contraction  has  taken  place  ;  thus  age  and 
nir  were  formerly  spelled  aiuje  and  stnir.  Often  an  s  htis  l)ecn  dropped  in 
modem  Fren<'h  which  still  remains  in  the  Kn;;lish  word  taken  from  the  old 
French.     Ex.  ile,  ts/e;  hate, /lasfe ;  (ordt,  furest ;  t&iupdUi,  tempest. 

8.  The  Cedilla  is  placed  under  the  c  (9)  when  it  has  the  sound 
of*  before  a,  o,  u.      Kk.  facade,  (/argon,  regu. 

9.  The  DiiEKESis  (  •  Trema)  is  used  over  c,  i,  and  u ;  in  which 
ease  these  letters  do  not  coalesce  with  the  preceding  vowel,  but  be- 
gin a  new  syllable.  Ex.  hair,  Noel,  aiyu'e^  are  pronounced  ha-ir, 
No-el  J  ai-gu-e,  (the  last  e  is  silent.) 


SIMPLE    VOWELS. 
A. 
10.   A  long  has  the  sound  of  a  in  far.     Ex.  &me,  soul;  pftte, 
paste;  cas,  case. 

11     Short  a  differs  from  long  a  principally  in  quantity.     It  has 


16  PRONUNCIATION. 

tho  sound  of  a  in  the  Interjection  ha  f  pronounced  quick.     Ek.  la, 
the ;  patte,  paw. 
A  is  silent  in  Saone,  taon,  aofit,  aoriste,  Cura9ao. 

E. 

12.  E  unaccented,  wben  it  ends  a  syllable  in  the  middle  of  a 
word,  and  in  the  raonosyllables  ce,  de,je,  le,  me,  ne,  que,  $e  and  <d, 
has  the  indistinct  sound  of  e  in  Battery.  Ex.  lever,  to  raise;  re- 
gard, look. 

13.  E  unaccented  final  is  mute.     Ex.  table,  table. 

14.  E  with  an  acute  accent  (e)  has  the  sound  of  a  in  date.  Ex- 
^te,  summer  ;  donnd,  given. 

K  unaccented  takes  the  sound  of  ^  (a  in  date)  before  final  d,  r,  z,  rante, 
also  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  before  a  double  consoni^nt.  Ex.  pied,  /bo/  ; 
donner,  to  give ;  assez,  enough  ;  effet,  effect ;  et,  and,  is  always  pronounced  tT. 

15.  E  with  the  grave  (e)  or  with  the  circumflex  accent  (e)  is 
more  or  less  open,  varying  between  e  in  ebb,  and  e  in  where.  Elx. 
reve,  dream;  lihre,  father  ;  ^ovet,  forest  ;  apres,  after. 

E  unaccented  takes  the  sound  of  ^  (e  in  ebb)  when  preceding  c,f,  I,  r,  s,  t, 
or  X  in  the  same  syllable  and  in  the  middle  of  a  word  before  any  doulile 
consonant.  Before  r,  the  sound  is  more  open  than  before  the  other  letters. 
Ex.  fer,  iron;  dessert,  dessert ;  terre,  eurth ;  tcndrosse,  tenderness :  sonnc^tte, 
hell :  chef,  chief;  mes,  my  ;  est,  is  ;  esprit,  spirit.  In  the  last  words  the  e  is 
pronounced  by  many  persons  very  nearly  like  ^  especially  in  rapid  conver- 
sation.    Even  e  often  loses  its  broad,  long  sound. 

16.  E  takes  the  sound  of  French  a  in  femme,  solen  lel,  indamniser^ 
and  in  all  adverbiy]  tonninations  in  emment. 

17.  E  is  silent  Ix'tweun  y  suid  a  or  o.  Ex.  pigeon,  pigeon  ; 
mangeons,  {we)  eat ;  rnangi'aiii,  eating.  In  these  wurdr*  the  6 
iinercly  serves  to  prevent  g  from  havin;j;.  the  hard  sound  of  g  in  go. 

Eot  farther  observations  on  e  mute,  see  page  26. 

I. 

18.  I  has  only  one  sound,  that  of  z  in  machine  ;  —  long  in  vio, 
life  ;  rire,  to  laugh;  — shon  in  ^m,  finished ;  ici,  here. 


SIMPLE   VOWELS.  17 

o. 

19.  0,  when  loog,  has  the  sound  of  o  in  rose.  Ex.  o6t^,  side , 
dose  dose. 

20.  O  short  ha?  a  sound  between  the  o  in  rob  and  the  u  in  rub. 
Ex.  Rome,  robe,  mode. 

21.  O  before  final  re  or  r  and  a  final  consonant  has  the  sound  (4 
0  in  lord      Kx.  aurore,  dawn  ;  alors,  then;  bord,  border. 

O  in  dilcQt  in  Laun,  pauii.  and  faon. 

U. 

22  Fri^neh  u  h:is  no  equivalent  in  English.  To  acquire  the 
sound,  pla(^f  the  lip."*  as  if  alxjut  to  wbistle,  leaving  the  aperture  very 
small ;  keeping  the  lijjs  in  this  position  try  to  utter  c  as  in  me. 
Ex.  murmure,  murmur. 

U  may  be  long  as  in  m(ir,  ripe ;  or  short  as  in  vertu,  virtue. 

23.  U  is  silent  after  q  and  between  g  and  e  or  i.  Ex.  guide, 
guide;  question,  question:  quatre, /owr  ;  iB.\.\^\xvi,  fatigue. 

Exceptions.  —  U  is  sounded  when  the  vowel  after  it  is  marked  with  the 
disercsis,  as  aigue,  ac^Ue ;  also  in  arj^uer,  to  aryue ;  aiguille,  ueetl/e ;  ai^uiser, 
tosfuirjim:  etc.  Qu  is  sounded  as  in  Knj^lish  in  a  few  words  <1ircctly  de- 
rived from  the  Latin.  These  words  are  alike  or  nearly  alike  in  French  and 
English  Ex.  e(iu:iteur,  e(juuti(m,  quadrupede,  etc.  In  equitation, 
abiquitc,  and  a  few  other  words,  u  retains  the  proper  French  sound. 

Y. 

24.  Y,  initial,  or  between  two  consonants,  has  the  sound  of 
Fieoch  I.      Kx    .style,  sti//e :  y,  tJtere. 

25.  Y  b(;tweeti  two  vowels  Ls  equivalent  to  it,  the  first  i  frrm'ng 
R  diphthong  with  t.he  preceding,  the  second  with  the  following  vow« 
cl.  Thus,  essayer,  to  try;  royal,  royal;  appuyer,  to  Uan;  are 
pronounced  as  if  written  essai-ier,  roi-ial,  appui-ier.  (See  ai  and 
oi) 

In  \^Ay)i,  country ;  p&js&^o,  landscape ;  p&jaaoi,  peasatU ;  ay  is  eqoivalcat 
to  oi-i. 


18  PRONUNCIATION. 

COMPOUND  VO\VEI.S. 
-      AI  and  EI  (ay). 

26.  Ai  and  ei  are  equivalent  sometimes  to  e,  sometimes  to  d 
Ai  final  is  always  like  e ;  in  other  cases  it  takes  the  sound  of  ^,  — 
whenever  e  unaccented  would  have  that  sound.  (See  under  E.) 
Ex.  reine,  queen;  j'aimai,  I  loved;  j 'avals,  I  had;  lait,  miJk, 

Ay,  followed  by  a  vowel,  is  equivalent  to  ai4.     Ex.  rayer. 

Ai  in  the  present  participle  of  the  verb  faire  and  in  the  corresponding 
syllables  of  all  the  forms  derived  from  it,  has  the  indistinct  sound  ofein 
battery.  Ex.  fiiisant,  je  faisais,  tu  faisais,  il  faisait,  je  defaisais,  bienfaisant, 
etc.  These  forms  were  all  writtx>n  formerly  as  they  are  pronounced  :  fesant^ 
je  d^fesais,  etc.;  compare  the  future  of  the  same  verb,  which  iajeferai  aud 
notjairai. 

AU. 

27.  Au  and  eau  sound  like  o  in  note.  Ex.  haut,  high;  beau, 
Iiandsome. 

EU   OEU,  (ce.) 

28.  Eu  (oeu)  has  no  exact  equivalent  in  English  ;  it  is  some- 
what like  the  u  in  fur.  It  is  longer  in  joune,  fast,  pour,  featf 
coeur,  heart,  than  in  jeune,  young,  hu.,Jire,  and  ceuf,  eyg. 

CE  has  the  sound  of  eu  before  liquid  /,  — as  in  oeil,  eye. 

Eu,  whenever  it  o(;curs  in  the  cor!Ju<^ation  of  the  verb  avoir,  to  have,  has 
the  sound  of  simple  French  u,  so  that  J'eus,  tu  cus,  il  cut,  etc.,  must  be  pro- 
nounced as  if  written  J* us,  tu  us,  il  ut,  etc. 

OU. 

29.  Ou  has  the  sound  of  oo  in  poor.  Tt  is  long  in  roue,  vheel ; 
toule,  baU ,   short  in  ujju,  soft;  »j«>u,  neck. 

DlPIITHONCiS 

80.    The  vowels  t,  u,  ou,  o,  preceding  a  vowel  sound,  may  co- 
alesce with  it  and  produce  a  diphthong. 
These  vowel  sounds  (i,  u,  ou,  o,)  are  the  only  ones  that  can  be  initial  In 


NASAL   VOWELS.  19 

a  true  diphthong;  i.  «.  one  in  which  two  vowels  are  heard  but  coalesce  into 
une  syllable. 

31.  In  French  di])hthongs  the  first  vowel  (t,  m,  o.<,  o)  is  uttered 
quick  an  3  short  and  the  voi(*e  rests  upon  the  second  vowel  element. 
Tlie  di|)thcin«yal  conihinations  are  :  i-n.  i-e  (i-ai),  —  i-o  {i-au),  i-eUy 
i  ou,  —  o-a,  o-e,  <>-i  ( wa ),  —  ou-a,  our-ai,  ou-e,  ot*-t,  —  Ura,  itr€,  wi. 
1  he  e  in  these  comhinatiouH  u*  not  the  e  mute. 

Dy  pafmg  attention  to  the  ahove  remark  the  diphthonf^s  present  no  dif- 
ficu'ty,  <ia  each  vowel  retains  it*  [)roper  sound,  the  first  being  very  short ;  oi 
Lb  the  on  ly  axception. 

01.  (oy.) 

32.  Oi  is  nearly  like  iva  in  water ;  more  accurately  oi  is  equiva- 
lent to  French  a  preceded  hy  a  w  sound.  The  a  (ah)  is  raore  pro- 
longed in  voir,  to  see  ;  poire,  pear  ;  than  in  roi,  king  ;  raoi,  me, 

Oy,  followed  by  a  vowel,  is  ecjuivalent  to  oi-i.     Ex  royal. 


NASAL  VOWEI.S. 

33.  M  and  N.  following  a  vowel  in  the  same  syllable,  lose 
their  power  as  consonants,  and  form  with  that  vowel  a  nasal  sound 
which  is  in  every  respect  a  vowel. 

34.  The  nasals  form  four  groups,  viz.:  — 

A.  E,   AL  O.  EU. 

an,  am.  ain,  aim.  on,  om.  eun. 

en,  em.  in,  im.  (ym.)  un,  um. 

To  acquire  the.se  sounds  the  organs  of  speech  should  be  kept  in  the  ganu 
position  as  they  are  in  uttering  the  simple  vowel  that  is  to  be  nasalized ;  th« 
back  part  of  the  tongue  being  raised  enough  to  close  the  passage  between 
the  couth  and  the  nose.  The  siirae  is  done  in  English  in  such  words  as 
anger,  ink,  want;  \nn  in  English  the  misal  sound  is  not  detached  from  the 
next  consonant,  while  in  French  rt  is.  No  m  or  n  consonant  sound  must 
be  heanl.  To  avoid  this,  the  tip  of  the  tongue  must  be  kept  motionless 
and  the  lips  disposed  to  articulate  a  vowel.  French  a,  thus  uttered,  will 
give  an;  —  e  (ai),  (not  i  in  machine)  gives  in  (ain) ; — ogives  on; — eu 
(not  Ficnch  m)  gives  un  (eun). 


20  PRONUNCIATION. 

The  nasa!  sounds  may  coalesce  with  a  previous  i,  u,  ou,  or  o,  and 
form  a  nasal  diphthong,  to  which  all  that  has  been  said  of  the  other 
diphthongs  is  applicable. 

35     The  following  list  presents  the  nasal  combinations. 

N.  B.  The  EDfilish  equivalents  of  the  Frenrh  nasal  vowels  are  all  neces- 
sarily imperfect,  as  no  rmisonant  m  or  n  must  be  heard  in  the  French  sound 
they  are  meant  to  explain. 

an    1  f  dans,  lance,  manger,  vanter. 

am    I  aw  in  j  camp,  ambre,  ample,  hunpe. 

en     j  wawt  |  en.  enfant,  mentir,  dent. 

em  J  [  temps,  empire,  membre,  trembler. 

ian  )  is  equivalent  to  \  viiiiide. 

ieo  )  i-an  j  ]»ationt.     (See  special  rule  for  tc».) 


ID 

im 

ym 

ain 

aim 

em 


an  m 


pm,  crin.  vm,  nncer. 

inijiic.  iiiiporte,  imposcr,  imbu. 

tbym,  nyn;|;be,  symphonic. 
«wgcr  I  sain,  baiji.  <3nint,  crainte. 

faini,  essaim.  daim. 
{  scin,  pi'iiidre,  fi.'indre,  ceinture. 
ien  is  equivalent  to  i-in,  rien.     (See  special  rule  for  icn.) 
oin  **         **         "  w-iyi.  foin.  coin,  point,  moins. 
on    )   on  in      non,  conte.  chanson,  ronde. 
ora  )    sowg    I  nom,  conite,  plomb,  compris. 


ion  is  equivalei.t  to  i-oji,  action,  passion,  question, 
un    )      no  equivalent       (  un,  i)rua,  tribun,  chacun. 
um   >•  in  English,  French  ^  parfum,  humble, 
eun  )  eu  navsal.  (  h.  jcun. 

The  nasal  dijjhthongs  ian,  ion,  are  the  simple  sounds  an,  on^ 
preceded  by  a  short  French  i ;  oin  is  in  preceded  by  a  tr  sound. 
All  other  combinations  may  be  decomposed  in  the  same  manner,  as 
(m-in,  ou-en,  etc. 

36.  Ien  final,  and  in  verbs  in  enir,  is  equivalent  to  i-in  or  y?w, 
(yan  in  yankee),  Ex.  ckieti,  bleu,  viendrai,  tiendront ;  in  other 
cases,  when  followed  by  a  consonant  (not  «),  it  is  equivalent  to  i-an 
iyan)  nasal,  Ex.  science,  audience,  patient,  and  all  words  in 
lent 


CONSONANTS.  21 

RBKA.BK.  In  compound  words,  as  bientSt,  chiendent,  im  retains  the  sonnd 
of  the  primitive  words  bien,  chien. 

37.  M  and  N  are  not  nasal  when  double  or  when  l>etween  two 
fowels  or  a  vowel  and  a  silent  h.  Ex.  annee,  innocent,  homme, 
ane,  inoui,  inutile,  inhuraain. 

Exceptions.  The  na-^al  sonnd  is  heard  in  mnui  and  its  derivatives ;  in 
«mmener  and  all  words  beginning  in  emm  ;  in  enivrer  and  enorgneilUr. 

38.  Ent  in  the  third  person  plural  of  verbs  is  silent.  Ex-  ila 
wment,  they  love ;  ils  unirent,  etc.  In  other  cases  ent  final  ia 
equivalent  to  nasal  an.  Ex.  content,  contented ;  president,  presi- 
dent ;  —  while  in  the  verbs,  ils  content,  tfiey  relate,  ils  president, 
they  preside,  ent  is  silent. 

39.  En  and  em  in  a  few  foreign  names  have  t^e  sound  of  t/», 
nasal.  Ex.  Benjamin,  Memphis.  Em  final,  and  sometimes  am 
and  im  in  foreign  proper  names,  are  not  nasal.  Ex  Jerusalem, 
Abraham,  Selim.  Urn  in  words  that  still  preserve  their  Latin  fornj 
is  not  na.sal,  u  having  the  sound  of  o.  Ex.  album,  triumvir.  In 
many  other  foreign  words  m  and  n  final  are  not  nasal.  EjL.Eden^ 
Hymen^  amen^  etc. 

CONSONANTS 

GENERAL     RULES. 

40.  Final  consonants  are  silent  except  c,  f,  I,  r.  Ex.  itait 
apres,  croix,  pronounced  as  if  written  etai,  apre,  croi. 

Remark.  When  several  consonants  occur  at  the  end  of  a  word  with  no 
vowel  after  them,  they  are  all  silent,  except  c,  J",  I,  r.  Ex.  €8t,fait8,  ils, 
dards,  pronounced  as  if  written  k,/a{,  il,  dar. 

Ex  JEPTION8.  In  foreign  proper  names  the  final  consonant  is  generally 
■oanded.     Ex.  BnUus,  Job. 

41.  A  double  consonant  is  pronounced  as  one  letter.  Ex.  oiW, 
frajyper,  pronounced  as  if  written  Orbe,  fra-per. 

42.  B,  0,  d,  f,  1,  m.  n,  p,  (ph,)  q,  v,  and  z  aro  prouounoed  as 
in  English. 


22  PRONUNCIATION. 

Exceptions  to  tfia  above  general  rules  will  be  given  under  the  various  lot 
ters. 

43.  In  English,  consonants  in  the  middle  or  at  the  beginning  of 
words  are  often  silent,  as  p  and  /  in  psalm ;  g  in  phlegm  ;  I  in  calm. 
In  French,  consonants  in  a  lilce  position  retain  their  proper  sound. 
Thus  in  psaumey  Jlegme,  calme,  the  /),  the  g,  and  the  /  are  fallj^ 
founded. 

SPECIAL     RULES. 

B  final  is  pronounced  in  rculoul^,  mwh. 

C  has  the  sound  of  g  in  second  and  its  derivatives. 

44.  C  is  pronounced  as  c  infm^ade.     Ex.  gart^on,  le^on. 

45.  Ch  has  the  sound  of  ch  in  machine.     Ex.  chaise,  chercher. 

Ch  in  many  words  derived  from  the  Greek  and  in  several  proper  names 
has  the  sound  of  k.  Ex.  chnos,  chmir,  Michd-Ange.  But  ck  has  the  sound 
of  .sA  in  Achi/le,  patriarche,  archet-eque.     It  is  silent  in  alinannrh. 

Cc  before  e,  i,  and  y  [^  equivalent  to  k-s.     Ex.  acces,  accident. 

C  final  is  silent  after  n.  Ex.  batw.  It  is  silent  in  accroc,  broc,  clerc, 
estomac,  lacs,  tahac. 

D  final  is  heard  in  axd. 

Dd.  Two  d's  axe  heard  vvhen  ad  precedes  a  syllable  beginning  with  a  rf. 
Ex.  addition. 

F  final  is  silent  in  def,  rhef'<f'Eiwre,  banifs,  mifs;  though  sounded  in  rkef, 
bceuf,  c£uf.  F  is  silent  in  nenf,  nine,  only  when  the  next  word  l»egins  with  a 
consonant,  before  a  vowel  it  has  the  sound  of  w.     Ex.  neuf  hoinmes. 

G  before  a,  o,  u,  sounds  like  g  in  game.     Ex.  garc^on. 

46.  G  before  e,  i,  and  y,  sounds  lilie  s  in  pleasure.  Ex.  genre^ 
gihet,  general. 

47.  Gn  has  a  liquid  sound  something  like  ni  in  union.  Ex. 
(tgneau.,  magnijique.  This  sound  is  produced  with  the  body,  not 
with  the  tip  of  the  tongue  against  the  roof  of  the  mouth. 

G  is  hard  before  n  at  the  beginning  of  a  word.  Ex.  gnomon ;  also  in  ste/f- 
ttant,  inexpugnable,  and  in  several  words  in  eg  and  ig  that  seldom  occur. 

Og.  Two  g's  are  heard  iu  suggei'ei' :  the  first  hard,  the  last  like  8  in 
plC'iH/ire 

U  final  is  sounded  xwjoug 


CONSONANTS. 


28 


48.  H  is  said  to  be  mute  or  aspirate.  When  mute  it  is  entirely 
disregarded  in  pronunciation,  and  the  vowel  that  comes  after  it  is 
pronounced  with  the  preceding  consonant,  or  causes  the  preceding 
vowel  to  be  elided  as  if  no  letter  intervened.  Ex.  Vliomme,  detix 
habits. 

49.  When  h  is  aspirated  no  real  aspiration  is  heard  as  in  Eng- 
lish ;  but  the  vowel  that  comes  aft^r  it  is  pronounced  strongly.  H 
aspirate  prevents  liDking  and  elision.     Ex.  le  heros,  deux  heros. 

50.  There  are  about  800  words  beginning  with  h  aspirate. 
These  comprise  many  marine  terms,  foreign  words,  and  the  words  in 
the  following  list,  and  their  derivatives. 

Remark.  The  derivatives  ofh^os — heroine,  ft&roique,  heroism, — are  not  as- 
pirated. But  fuibleur,haine,  haiisser,  etc.,  follow  the  anology  of  their  prim* 
itiws  habler,  hair,  haul,  which  alone  are  given  in  the  list. 


habler 

hameau 

hargneux 

hennir 

hache 

hanche 

haricot 

Henri 

hagard 

hangar 

haridelle 

h^raut 

haiv 

hanneton 

hamais 

h^risson 

haillon» 

hanter 

harpe 

h^risser 

hair 

harangue 

harpie 

heron 

haire 

haras 

hasard 

h^ros 

hale 

bara^ser 

hate 

herse 

halle 

harceler 

haut 

heurter 

hdllebarde 

hardes 

have 

hibou 

hallier 

hardi 

havre 

hideux 

halte 

hareng 

havresac 

hierarchie 

horuani 

houblon 

houx 

humer 

hont«? 

houille 

huche 

huppe 

horde 

houlette 

ha<Se 

hure 

hors 

hoappe 

huguenot 

hurler 

hotte 

housse 

huit 

hussard 

51.  J  is  pronounced  like  «  in  pleasure;  it  is  never  silent  nor 
double.     Ex.  dejd,  joujou, 

L  when  not  liquid  sounds  as  in  English.     Ex.  livre. 

52.  lU  not  initial,  and  il  final,  have  a  liquid  sound  somewhat  like 
U  in  WiUiam,  brilliant.     This  sound,  still  prevalent  in  the  soutbeni 


iA  PBONHNCIATIOIS.   ' 

and  central  parts  of  France,  has  been  softened  down  to  nearly  a  ^ 
in  the  north  and  especially  in  Paris,  so  that  there,  ill  in  tnilleur  is 
scarcely  more  audible  than  i  in  pa'ien.     Ex.  Jille,  famille,  gentiUe, 

53.  The  vowel  that  pr^icedes  liquid  ill  or  il,  retains  its  proper 
sound  and  does  not  coalesce  with  the  i  ;  ue  and  <b  are  then  equivalent 
to  eu.     Ex.  muraille,  patrouille,  orgueil,  ail. 

64.    ///  is  not  liquid,  that  is,  I  retains  its  proper  sound, in  words 
that  begin  with  il.     Ex.  illustre,  illisihle  ;  also  in  miUe^  ville,  tran- 
quiUe,  pupille,  Achille,  osciller,  vaciller,  etc. 
//  is  not  liquid  in  mil,  fil,  civil,  profil. 

L  final  is  silent  in  baril,  chenil,  coutil,fournil,  fusil,  gril,gentil,  sonrcil,per- 
til,  outil  It  is  also  silent  in  soul,  pouls,  fils,  and  in  the  terminations  auld, 
ault,  ould,  oult. 

M  and  N,  when  not  nasal,  are  prononnced  as  in  English.    Ex.  rnanier. 

M  is  silent  in  damner,  automne,  and  their  derivatives. 

P  is  silent  in  bapteme,  sept,  compte,  dumpier,  exempter,  sculpter. 

Q  is  always  followed  by  m  except  in  C07  and  chiq,  when  it  sounds  like  k. 
(Tor  grusee  u,  23.)    In  cinq  before  a  consonant  it  is  silent. 

55.  R  is  rolled,  but  with  less  force  at  the  end  than  at  the  begin 
ning  of  a  syllable.  Ex.  grand,  saeur  ;  rr  and  rh  are  generally  pro- 
nounced with  more  force  than  r  alone.     Ex.  arriver,  rhume. 

In  the  future  and  conditional  of  the  verbs  acqu^rir,  to  acquire,  conrir,  to 
run,  mourir,  to  die,  the  two  r's  must  be  distinctly  heard  to  distinguish 
them  from  other  forms  that  have  but  one  r.  Thus  nous  courrons,  vous 
acquerrez,  tls  mourraient,  must  not  be  pronounced  like  nous  courons,  vous 
acqu^rez,  ills  mouraient. 

R  final  is  generally  prononnced,  but  final  er  is  equivalent  to  €.  Ex. 
parler,  aimer.  In  monosyllables  in  er  the  r  is  sounded.  Ex.fer,  cher,  mer. 
It  is  also  sounded  in  amer,  enfer,hier,  hiver,  and  in  a  few  words  of  forei^ 
origin,  as  magister,  etc.     B  is  silent  in  monsieur. 

56.  S  is  generally  sounded  as  ?n  English  j  but  in  words  ending 
isme,  asme,  etc.,  it  has  not  the  sound  of  z.    Ex.  prisme,  miasme, 

57»^  S  between  two  vowels  has  the  sound  of  z.    Ex.  rose,  base% 
wwe.    % 
4^  has  ailsp  the  somid  of  2  in  '1tt>rds  compounded  with  the  Latin  prepoei- 


CONSONANTS.  25 

tion  trans  followed  by  a  rowel.  Ex.  transitif,  transition.  TtTias  the  same 
Bonnd  before  b,  d,  t%  and  after  I.     Ex.  preshi/tere,  svelte,  balsamique. 

As  5  initial  has  the  hissing  sound  as  in  English,  —  when  a  word  beginning 
with  an  s  takes  a  prefix,  the  s,  though  between  two  vowels,  retains  its  hiss- 
ing sound.  Ex.  vraisemblable  Ccompounded  of  i^rai  and  semblaUe),  mono- 
sylbhe. 

fSch  is  generally  pronounced  like  $h.  Ex.  scMsme.  It  has  the  sound  of 
ak  in  a  few  words. 

S  final  is  sounded  in  words  that  have  been  taken  from  Greek  and  Latin 
without  any  change  of  orthography.  Ex.  atlas,  blociis,  tjratis,  etc.  S  is 
also  sounded  in  cens,  en-sns,  mais,  moeurs,  vis,  Rheims.  fds,  sens  ("in  some  of 
its  meanings),  lis  (not  in  Jleur-de4is),  tous  (when  used  without  a  noun). 

T  is  generally  sounded  as  in  English. 

58.  In  words  corresponding  in  form  to  those  in  which  t  has  in 
English  an  sh  sound,  it  has  in  French  the  sound  of  ss.  This  occurs 
in  tial,  tiel,tier,  tion,  not  initial  or  preceded  by  x  or  8.  Ex.  partial^ 
essentiel,  initier,  nation.  But  bestial,  bastion,  mixtion,  have  the 
pure  t  sound. 

59.  T  has  also  the  sound  of  s  in  words  in  tie,  that  have  in  Eng- 
lish cy,  or  tta,  in  which  t  sounds  like  sh.  Ex.  prophetic,  democror 
tie,  minutie,  initier,  —  also  in  balbutier.  In  other  words  in  tie 
and  tier,  t  retains  the  proper  sound.     Ex.  moitie,  metier. 

Th  is  never  pronounced  as  in  English,  bat  always  like  t  alone,  as  patJuf- 
tique. 

T  final  is  heard  in  brut,  chut,  correct,  dot,  direct,  deficit,  fat,  exact,  net,  sus- 
pect, strict.  In  sept  and  huit,  t  is  silent  only  when  they  precede  a  noun  com- 
mencing with  a  consonant.  Ex.  huit  gargons.  In  Christ,  s  and  t  are  both 
pronounced ;  but  in  .Ustis-  Christ  they  arc  both  silent.  In  vingt,  t  is  pro- 
nounced only  in  the  series  between  20  and  30.     Ex.  vingt<inq. 

X  has  the  sound  of  gs  in  words  beginning  with  x  or  ex  before  a  vowel  or 
an  h  mute.     Ex.  Xavier,  ear',  exhumer. 

In  a  few  proper  names .»  has  the  sound  of  ss.  Ex.  Bruxelles,  Auxem;  it 
has  also  this  sound  in  sofxante,  —  and  in  six  and  dix  when  standing  alona 
In  dix-huit  and  dix-neuf,  x  sounds  like  z. 

X  in  other  cases  has  the  sound  of  ks.    Ex.  luxe,  Aix-la-ChapeUe. 

Z  is  pronounced  in  gaz.  When  final  in  proper  names  it  baa  the 
sound  of  B.     Ex.  Metz^  Suez,  etc. 


26  PEOIOJNCIATION. 


UNKING  0^  FINAL  CONSONANTS. 

60.  The  final  consonant  of  a  word,  closely  connected  in  sense 
with  the  next  word  beginning  with  a  vowel  or  silent  h  must  goneral- 
Ij  be  carried  over  In  that  case  s  and  x  are  sounded  like  z  ;  d  like 
t,  and  g  (seldom  linked)  like  k.  Elx.  un  gravd  homme,  vous  avez. 
ils  ont,  aux  armes. 

No  general  rule  can  be  given  embracing  all  the  rases  in  which  a  final  coo- 
sonant  must  be  thus  linked.  In  poetry  and  in  impressive  reading,  the  link- 
ing must  be  made  in  many  cases  where  it  would  sound  unnatural  and  af- 
fected in  daily  conversation.  It  may  be  stated  in  general  terms  that  the 
more  closely  connected  the  words  are  in  sense,  the  more  imperative  it  is  to 
link  them  together  in  pronunciation.  Certain  words,  such  as  d,  riz,  clef, 
plomb,  loup,  etc.,  can  nevci  be  linked.  Words  ending  in  a  nasal  sound  are 
seldom  linked,  except  short  words  that  recur  frequently,  such  as  on,  en,  ii.'i, 
man,  ton,  son,  bien,  ban,  etc.  When  a  nasal  n  is  linked,  either  the  annoi 
sound  is  heard  and  an  additional  n  pronounced  before  the  next  vowel,  or 
the  nasal  is  dropped  altogether,  thus  un  homme,  on  a,  as  if  written  un 
nhomme,  on  na ;  or  u-nhomme,  o-na  In  rapid  speech  the  nasal  sound  almost 
always  disappears ;  many  omit  ii  altogether.  In  some  combinations,  such 
08  bon  homme,  bien  heureux,  it  is  never  heard. 


OBSERVATIONS   ON  B  MUTE 

We  have  seen  that  e  unaccented  when  final  is  mute,  and  that  in  the  words 
ce,  de,  je,  le,  me,  ne,  que,  se  and  te,  and  when  it  terminates  a  syllabic  not 
final,  it  has  the  indistinct  sound  of  e  inbattery.  In  rapid  utterance,  however, 
even  this  feeble  sound  is  not  heard  whenever  the  articulation  connected  with  it 
can  be  distinctly  uttered  without  it. 

Hence  the  following  rule  :  — 

61 .  E  unaccented  ending  a  syllable  is  silent  whenever  the  con- 
sonant before  it  can  be  pronounced  either  with  a  vowel  that  precedes 
or  one  that  comes  after  it  in  the  next  syllable  or  word. 

Practice  and  oral  teaching  only  can  make  this  law  of  euphony  perfectly 
clear.  In  the  following  examples  the  (^s  printed  in  italics  are  not  pro- 
aoanc«d. 


OBSERVATIONS,  ETC. 


27 


Voilk  \e  chemva.  d«  fer. 

Je  \e  sais. 

Je  nc  te  \e  donn^  pas. 

Beaucoup  de  monde. 

Je  ue  me  \e  propose  pas. 

Etrc  attentif. 

Nobl«  ardeur. 


There  is  the  railway. 

I  know  it. 

I  do  not  give  it  to  thee. 

Many  persons. 

I  do  not  propose  it  to  mysolf. 

To  be  attentiye. 

N^oble  ardor. 


In  the  last  two  examples  the  r  and  /  that  precede  the  e  are  ATrtually  cur- 
neJ  over  to  the  next  word  as  if  no  e  inten'ened,  and  fr  and  bl  were  final. 

Note.  Care  must  be  taken  not  to  pronounce  tre,  dre,  hie,  pie,  ere,  etc.,  ae 
they  arc  in  Enjrlish,  that  is  as  ter,  der,  bel,  pel,  etc.,  in  order,  temple,  noble. 
Id  French  the  /  and  r  must  not  be  separated  by  any  intervening  sonnd  from 
the  consonant  that  pret^ea.     Ex.  ordrr,  aimable,  qnatre,  nacre,  poupla. 


V 


I.    PREMIERE    LE9ON 


THE    ARTICLE. 


1.  In  ^.be  French  language  there  are  only  two  genders,  tiz  , 

the  mascvUne  and  the  feminine.     This  distinction  applies  also  to 
inaniniate  objects,  which  are  either  masculine  or  feminine. 

2.  The  definite  article  has  a  peculiar  form  for  each  gender  :  le 
before  a  masculine,  la  before  a  feminine  substantive ;  Us  is  the  plu- 
ral of  both  genders.     Ex. :  — 

Masc.  Le  rot,  the  king.  Fern.  La  reine,  the  qneen, 

le  pere,  the  father.  la  mere,  the  mother. 

3.  Le  and  la  in  the  singular  lose  their  vowels  and  take  the  apos- 
trophe (r)  before  a  noun  beginnmg  either  with  a  vowel  or  h  mute. 
Ex.:  — 

Masc.  L'ami,  the  friend.  Fern.  L'amie,  the  (female)  friend. 

Vhonime,  the  man  I'kistoire,  (the)  history. 

4.  The  indefinite  article,  answering  to  the  English  a  or  an,  is 
un  for  the  masculine  j  une  for  the  feminine.     Ex.  : 

Masc.  Un  roi,  a  king.  Fern.   Une  reine,  a  queen. 

un  pere,  a  father.  une  mere,  a  mother. 

un  ami,  a  friend.  une  amie,  a  (female)  friend. 

VOCABULARY. 

Le  livre,  the  book.  un  chapeau,  a  hat,  bonnet. 

le  pain,  the  bread.  la  rose,  the  rose. 

le  cheval,  the  horse  lajleur,  the  flower. 

le  chien,  the  dog.  la  plume,  the  pen,  feather. 

I'oncle,  the  uncle.  la  tante,  the  aunt. 

I'enfzjit,  the  child.  une  poire,  a  pear. 

I'or,  m.  tlie  gold.  une  pomme,  an  apple. 

unjardin,  a  garden.  «f,  and. 


THE  ABTICLB.  av 

B.  Jfai,  I  have.  Ai-je,  bare  1 1 

tu  as,  thou  hast.  as-tu,  hast  thou  1 

il  a,  he  has.  a-t-il,  has  he  1 

effe  o,  she  has.  a-t-elle.  has  she  ? 

PL  rums  avons,  we  have.  avons-nous,  have  we  ? 

«ott«  avez,  you  have.  ave-z-yous,  have  youl 

Us  <mt,  they  have.  ont-ils,  have  they  ? 

eMcs  ont,  they  (fem)  have.  ont-elles,  have  they  ? 

Remark  1.  J^ai  is  for  je  ai.  The  e  of  je,  I,  is  elided  when  the  verb 
begins  with  a  vowel  or  silent  h. 

2.  Observe  the  hyphen  by  which  the  verb  and  pronoun  are  always  joined 
in  interrogations. 

3.  .  The  t  in  a-t-il,  a-t-elle,  is  merely  euphonic.  It  is  inserted  to  prevent 
the  hiatus  between  two  vowel  sounds,  when  the  third  person  singular  of  a 
verb  ends  in  a  vowel,  and  is  followed  by  il,  die,  on. 

4.  The  use  of  the  2d  person  singulai'  is  much  more  frequent  in  French 
than  in  English.  It  generally  denotes  familiarity  and  intimacy.  In  ad- 
dressing inferiors,  it  denotes  authority;  in  poetry,  its  use  is  the  same  as  in 
English. 

5.  When,  in  a  question  not  beginning  with  an  interrogative  pronoun  or 
adverb,  the  subject  is  expressed  by  a  svd)stantive,  it  must  begin  the  sen- 
tence, and  the  pronoun  still  be  put  after  the  verb.  Ex. :  — L' enfant  a-t-U? 
has  the  child  1    La  mere  a-t-elle  f  has  the  mother  1 

BEADING  EXERCISE    X. 

J'ai  le  livre.  Tu  as  un  livre.  J'ai  la  rose.  As-tu  la  rose  ? 
II  a  le  cheval.  Ello  a  le  pjun.  Le  pere  a  un  cheval.  La  mere  a 
on  jiirdin.  L*enfant  a  une  poire.  Nous  avons  un  chien.  Avez- 
V0U3  un  chapeau  ?  lis  ont  un  oncle  et  une  tante.  Elles  ont  une 
tante.  L'  infant  a-t-il  une  plume  ?  La  mere  a-t-elle  la  fleur  1  Le 
roi  art-ii  un  cheval  V  II  a  le  cheval.  Les  amis  (j)lu.)  ont  les livres. 
Les  enfants  ont  les  plumes. 

THEME    1. 

1.  I  have  the  horse.  2.  I  have  a  friend.  8.  Thou  hast  the  book. 
4.  He  has  a  dog.  5.  She  has  the  bonnet.  6.  The  father  has  a 
garden.     7.  The  mother  has  the  rose,     8.  The  king  has  the  gold. 


30 


II.  DEUXI^MB  LEpON. 


9.  The  uncle  has  a  friend.  10.  We  have  the  bread.  11.  Yon 
have  a  pear.  12.  They  (masc.)  have  an  apple.  13.  They  (/em.) 
have  a  flower.  14  Has  the  friend  a  horse  ?  15.  The  friend  hsF 
a  horse  and  a  dog. 


CONYEESATION. 


Ai-je  la  rose  ? 
As-tu  le  pain  ? 
A-t^Uelafleur? 
L'enfant  a-t-il  le  livre  ? 
Avez-vous  un  cheval  ? 
L'enfant  a-t-il  une  poire  V 


Vous  avez  la  rose, 

J'ai  le  pain. 

EUe  a  la  fleur. 

H  a  le  livre. 

Nous  avons  un  cheval  et  un  chien. 

L'enfant  a  une  poire  et  une  pomme 


II.    DEUXIEME    LE9ON, 


FORMATION   OF   THE   PLURAL. 

1.  General  Rule.     The  plural  is  formed  in  French  as  in  Eng 
fish,  by  the  addition  of  an  «  to  the  singular.     Ex. :  — 


Lend, 

Plur.  les  Tois. 

la  potnme. 

Plnr.  ks  pommes. 

le  livre, 

les  livres. 

l'enfant, 

les  en/ants. 

Pfumme, 

'  leshommes. 

Pami, 

les  amis. 

N.  EXCEPTIONS. 

2.  NSmis  ending  in  s,  x,  z,  in  the  singular,  remain  unchanged. 

Lejils,  the  son.  Plur.  les  JUs,  the  sons. 

la  noiXf^he  walnut,  les  noix,  the  walnat&. 

le  nez,  the  nose.  les  nez,  the  noses. 

3.  Words  ending  in  au,  eu,  form  then-  plural  by  adding  x  in^teaxi 
^f  8,  as :  — 

Le  chapeau,  the  hat  or  bonnet.      Plur.  les  chapmtix. 
le  feu,  the  fire.  les  feux.  ' 

le  lieu,  the  place.  les  lieux. 


FORMATION  OP  THE  PLURAL.  33 

Rekabk.     Seven  nouns  in  ou  take  x  in  the  plural,  viz. : 
Le  chou,  the  cabbage  le  pou,  the  louse.  { 

fc  W/ou,  the  jewel.  te  ^enou,  the  knee.  : 

le  caillou,  the  pebble  te  joujou,  the  plaything. 

le  kibou,  the  owl. 

Plural  •  les  choux,  les  bijoux,  les  cailloux,  etc. 

The  others  ending  in  ou  follow  the  general  role  and  take  s  in  the  plural 
as    le  chu,  the  naif;  plur.  ies  dous ;  le  trou,  the  hole ;  plnr.  les.  trous,  etc. 

4.  Nouns  ending  in  al,  ail,  change  these  terminations  into  aux, 
to  form  the  plural,  as  : 

Le  cheval,  the  horse.  Plur.  Les  chevaux. 

Vanimal,  the  animal.  les  animaux. 

le  travail,  the  work.  les  travaux. 

Remabk.  This  rule,  however,  has  a  few  exceptions,  which  follow  the 
general  rule,  simply  taking  s  in  the  plural,  as  :  le  bal,  the  ball ;  le  camaval, 
the  cemival ;  le  portail,  the  doorway ;  le  gouvemail,  the  helm  ;  V€ventail,  the 
fan.  etc.     Plur.  les  hah,  les  camavals,  etc. 

5.  The  following  words  form  their  plural  irregularly.  (The  first 
three  have  also  a  regular  plural.     See  Part,  ii,  L.  ii.) 

Le  del,  heaven.  Plur.  L^  deux,  heavens. 
Vail,  the  eye  les  yeux,  (h^  eyes. 

I'aleul,  the  great-grandfather.  les  aietix,  tl^e  ancestors. 

le  bOail,  the  cattle.  les  bestiaux,  the  cattla 

i  ^  ■ 

VOCABULARY. 

Lecanif,  the  penknife.  le  feu,  the  play,  game. 

lefrere,  the  brother.  la  souris,  the  mouse. 

la  sceur,  the  sister.  le  nam,  the  name. 

la  parte,  the  door,  gate.  le  chameau,  the  camel. 

la  maison,  the  house.  le  couteau,  the  knife. 

le  chateau,  the  ca.<tle.  man,  m.  ma,  f.  me^,  pi.  my. 

lepalais,  the  pala<-e.  tm,  seen,    ou,  on 

un  tableau,  a  picture.  deux,  two.     trois,  three. 

U  chat,  the  cat.  quatre,  four,     dnq,  five. 

U  g€niral,  the  general.  le  bras,  the  arm. 

la  iwix,  the  walnui.  aussi,  also. 


32  n.  DEUxrfeME  LE90JI. 

Void,  here  is,  this  is,  here  are,  tliese  are. 

Voi/a,  tliere  is,  tiiat  is,  there  are,  those  are. 

Void  is  compounded  of  tlie  imperative  of  voir,  to  see,  and  tct,  here.  II 
means  therefore  Uterally,  see  here.  Voila  maans  see  there.  They  both  gov- 
ern the  obiective  case.    Ex.  me  void,  here  am  I ;  literally,  Deltoid  me  here. 

S  J'avais,  I  had.  Avais-je,  had  I? 

tu  avais,  tliou  hadst.  avais-tu,  hadst  thou  ? 

il  avail,  he  had.  avait-il,  had  he  1 

die  avail,  she  had.  avail-elk,  had  she  ? 

PI.  nous  avians,  we  had.  avions-nous,  had  we  1 

tx)us  at'jez,  you  had.  aviez-vous,  had  you  ? 

i7«  avaient,  they  had.  avaienl-ils,  had  they  ? 

«22«s  avaient,  they  had.  avaient-elles,  had  they  1 

READING  EXERCISE  2 

Ncns  avons  un  canif.  Vous  aviez  deux  canifs.  Mon  frere  a  lets 
couteaux.  La  maison  a  deux  portes.  Avais-je  les  noix  ?  Aviez- 
vous  les  joujoux?  Oui,  nous  avions  les  joujoux.  Le  roi  avail  trois 
chateaux.  La  reine  a  les  bijoux.  Voici  quatre  souris.  Les  enfante 
avaient  trois  pommes.  Mon  oncle  avait  deux  chevaux.  Ma  tante 
a  cinq  tableaux.  Les  chameaux  ont  une  bosse  (hump).  Ma  mere 
a  deux  soeurs  et  trois  freres. 

THEME  2. 

1.  I  have  three  brothers.  2.  (The)*  man  has  two  arms.  3.  I 
bad  four  horses.  4.  Hadst  thou  the  flowers  ?  5.  I  had  the  roses. 
6.  There  are  the  apples,  the  pears,  and  the  walnuts.  7.  There  aie 
also  the  games  and  the  pictures.  8.  Have  you  seen  the  houses,  the 
castles,  and  the  gardens?  9.  IMy  uncle  has  four  pictures.  10.  ] 
have  seen  five  horses  and  two  camels.  11.  The  children  have  three 
aiice.     12.   Have  you  seen  the  games  of  the   (des)  children? 

•  In  the  themes,  words  placed  in  parentheses  ( — )  must  be  expressed  in 
French,  though  redundant  in  English.  Eughsh  words  printed  in  italics 
OHifft  be  omitted  in  French. 


OASB. 


38 


13.  Has  my  aunt  three  dogs  or  tbroo  cats  ?  14.  She  has  three  dogs 
and  two  cats.  15.  The  eye  is  blue  {est  bleu).  ^  16.  I  have  two 
eyes.     17.  My  brother  hks  two  knives,  and  I  have  two  penknives. 

CONVERSATION. 


Ave^vous  un  canif  ? 
Avai.5-jo  les  coutoaux? 
A&^tu  vu  les  chameaux  ? 

Avez-vous  aussi  vu  les  cha- 
teaux ? 

Avez-vous  les  bijoux  ? 

Les  enfants  ont  ils  les  habits 
{coats)  ou  les  chapeaux? 

Avaient-ils  vu  les  feux  ? 

Avez-vous  les  tableaux  ? 

Mon  pere  a-t-il  un  chat? 

Combicn  de  {how  many)  freres 
avez-vous  ? 

Combien  do  soeurs  avez-vous  ? 

Avez-vous  vu  les  amis  ? 


J'ai  deux  canifs. 

Vous  aviez  les  coutoaux. 

J'ai  vu  les  chameaux  et  les  oho 

vaux. 
J'ai  vu  les  chateaux   et  les  pa- 

lais. 
Ma  tante  a  les  bijoux. 
Los  enfants  ont  les  habits  et  les 

chapeaux. 
lis  avaicnt  vu  les  feux.    . 
Je  n'ai  pas  {not)  les  tableaux, 
n  a  un  chat  et  un  chien. 
J'ai  trois  freres 

J'ai  deux  soeurs. 

Nous  n'avons  pas  va  les  amis. 


-•♦•- 


IIL    TROISlfiME    LE9ON, 


CASF  — ^  — i)X 

1.  French  nouns  have  no  vaiiation  of  termination  to  indicate 
the  nominative  and  objective  are,  as  in  English,  alike  in  form, 

and  the  possessive  is  expressed  by  the  preposition  de  {of)  and  its 
object. 

2.  The  possessor  must,  in  French,  follow  the  object  possessed, 


34  in.      TR0I8IEMB   LEgON. 

and  be  preceded  by  the  article,  t.  g.  The  king's  throne,  must  be 
transposed  as  if  it  were,  the  throne  of  the  king ;  Le  trone  du  y-oi. 

3.  The  preposition  de  (of,  from,)  appears  either  unchanged  or 
ooutraeted  with  the  article,  A  contraction  takes  place  whenever  d* 
occurs  before  the  article  le  or  les ;  in  the  first  case,  it  takes  the  fonr 
du  (singular),  in  the  vsecond  des  (plural).     Elx. 

S.  du  roi  (instead  of  de  le  roi,j  of  the  king,  or  the  king's. 
du  pere  (instead  of  de  le  pere,)  of  the  father,  or  the  father's 

PI.  des  rois  (instead  of  de  les  rois,)  of  the  kings,  or  the  kings'. 
des  meres  (instead  of  de  les  meres,)  of  the  mothers. 

4.  Before  la  and  /',  de  remains  unaltered,  as  :  — 

de  la  mere,  of  the  mother,  or  the  mother's. 
de  I'ami,  of  the  friend,  the  friend's 
de  Vhommt,  of  (the)  man,  the  man's 

5.  Before  the  indefinite  article  un,  une,  art  apostrophe  Is  put  in- 
stead of  the  e  of  de,  as  :  — 

d*un  roi,  of  a  king.  d^une  reine,  of  a  queen. 

(Tun  ami,  of  a  friend.  d*une  amie,  of  a  female  ftiend. 

6.  Before  le,  the  preposition  k  (to)  is  contracted  with  this  article 
to  au  ;  and  before  les  into  aux ;  as :  — 

au  (a  le)  roi,  to  the  king.  aux  (k  les)  rois,  to  the  kings. 

au      "     ^erc,  to  the  brother         aux      "     ^^eres,  to  the  brothers. 

7.  The  definite  article  must  be  used  in  French  before  all  nouns 
used  in  a  general  sense  or  denoting  a  whole  species  of  objects,  though 
in  English  the  article  is  not  employed  ;  as  :  — . 

Man,  I'hmmae..  nature,  la  nature 

life,  la  vie.  summer,  /'  ^tf, 

fortune,  lafortum.  dinner,  le  diner. 

Hence,  of  man,  of  life,  of  fortune,  etc.,  are  to  be  translated  io  French 

de  l'?iomme,  de  la  vie,  de  la  fortune,  etc. ;  to  man,  to  life,  to  nature,  etc  ,  h 

fhomme,  a  la  vie,  a  la  nature. 

8.  In  French  the  article  is  to  be  repeater!  before  eacU  Hubstautiv«» 
■>f  a  sentence.  a.«  :  — 


CASB.  35 

The  salt,  pepper  and  vinegar, — le  sd,  k  poivre  et  le  mnaign. 

The  men,  women  and  <  hildrew,  — les  hommes,  les/einjnes  et  les  enfastls 

VOCABULARY. 

Dieu,  Grod,  lafenetrey  the  window. 

le  cr^teur,  the  creator  le  cmm7i,  the  coosin. 

le  monde,  the  world  la  cousine,  the  cousin,  f 

Vennemi,  the  enemy  lajille,  the  daughter. 

le  sommeil,  sleep.  la  mile,  the  town. 

I'imagc,  f.  the  image  je  donne.,  I  give. 

lamort,  death.  le  voisin,  the  neighbor. 

lafeuWe,  the  leaf.  est,  is.  (belongs)     ^ont,  an 

a  qui,  to  whom,  whose  1  ot«',  yes.     non,  no 

I'oiseau,  the  bird  Monsieur,  Sir. 

twfrf,  your  Madame,  Madam. 

Parbre,  m.  the  tree.  Mademoiselle,  Misa 

READING    EXERCISE   3- 

Le  pere  de  Tenfant  La  mere  des  enfants.  La  port<i  de  la  raai 
son.  Les  portes  des  maisons.  Les  fenetres  du  palais.  Le  chat 
est  uri  aQiinal.  Les  chats  sont  les  ennerais  des  souris.  Le  sommeil 
st  I'image  de  la  mort.  Le  chateau  est  au  roi  et  k  la  reine.  Je 
l!\nne  la  plume  h  I'enfant  Je  donne  le  jou  aux  enfants  Lc  jar- 
I'n  est  aux  freres  et  aux  soBurs  Les  images  des  rois  Les  feuillep 
ics  arhres.     Les  fenetres  de  la  maison. 


THEME  3. 

I.  The  father  of  the  son  2.  The  mother  of  the  daughter 
S  The  mother  of  the  children  4.  The  door  of  the  house  5.  The 
gates  of  the  town.  0.  The  houses  of  the  towns.  7.  The  windows 
of  the  houses  8.  God  is  the  creator  of  the  world.  9.  The  dog  is 
the  eneniy'of  the  cat  10  I  give  the  book  to  the  brother.  11.  I 
give  the  coats  to, the  brothers  and  sisters.  12.  The  dog  is  the  fiiend 
of  man  13.  The  feathers  of  the  birds.  14.  My  cousin's  bonnet. 
15.  My  cousins'  bonnets  (the  bonnets  of  my  cousins).  16.  Sleep 
tA  the  brother  of  death.     17.  Of  the  trees  of  the  gaKlen      18.  Thf 


S6  TV.      QUATRIEMB    LEgOM. 

syes  of  the  horses  are  large  (grands).  19.  The  friend's  name 
20.  1  he  windows  of  the  castle.  21.  The  neighbor's  house  and 
garden.  22.  I  give  the  roses  to  the  sister  of  the  general:  23a  Give 
(donnez)  the  pen  to  the  father.  •      ^ 

CONVERSATION- 

Airje  le  Kvre  du  cousin  ?  Tu  as  le  livre  iu  cousin. 

As-tu  I'image  de  la  tante  ?  Oui    M — *  j'ai  I'image  de   la 

tante. 
A-t-il  vu  le  jardin  du  roi  1  Non  M  —  il  a  vu  le  chateau  du 

roi. 
Les  enfants  ont-ils  les  jeux  ?         Oui    M  —    les    enfants  ont  les 

jeux. 
Qui  (who)  a  les  ciseaux  (scis-    Voici  les  ciseaux  de  votre  soeur. 

sors)  de  ma  soeur  ? 
A  qui  sont  les  noix  If  Elles  sent  k  I'enfant. 

A  qui  sont  les  poires  ?  Elles  sont  aux  enfants  du  voism 

A  qui  est  ce  (this)  jardin  ?  II  est  au  roi  et  k  la  reine. 

Avez-vous  vu  le  chien  de  Ton-     Voilk  le  chien  de  I'oncle. 

cle? 
A  qui  sontces  (these)  roses  ?        Elles  sont  k  ma  cousine. 


IV.    QUATRIEME    LE9ON. 

f>  . 

PREPOSITIONS. 

1.   The  following  list  includes  the  French  prepositions  of  most 
frequent  occurrence. 

a,  to,  at,  in.  dans,  in,  into.  par,  through,  by 

apres,  after.  de,  of,  from.  parmi,  among. 

*  Tnis  M — ,  which  will  always  be  inserted  after  Oi//and  Non  should 
be  read  Monsieur,  Madame,  or  Mademoiselle,  as  the  case  xaay  reqpdre. 


PREPOSmOSS. 


37 


avarU,  before,  (time).  devant,hefore,(ip[sL(ie). pendant,  daring. 
avec,  with  dernere,  behind.  pour,  for. 

ckez,  at,  with,  at  the  en,  ia.  sans,  without. 

house  of.  entre,  between  sous,  under. 

contre  against  envers,  vers,  towards,   sur,  on,  upon. 

As  to  the  contraction  of  a  and  te  into  au,  of  a  and  les  into  aux,  ofde  with 
f  into  du,  ofde  with  /ej*  into  des,  see  page  34. 

2.  After  prepositions  no  article  is  used  whenever  the  noun  is  taken  in  a 
wide  and  indeterminate  sense,  and  forms  with  the  preposition  a  sort  of  ad- 
verbial phrase,  as  :  avec  plaisir,  with  pleasure  ;  sans  crainte,  without  fear. 

3.  Chez  means  at  the  house  of.  It  governs  the  noun  or  pro- 
noun as  any  other  preposition.  EIx.  chez  moi,  at  my  house,  (at  the 
house  of  me);  chez  vaus,  at  your  house ;  chez  mon  onck,  at  my 
mclo's,  (at  the  house  of  my  uncle). 

For  remarks  on  the  employment  of  some  prepositions,  see  P.  ii.»  L.  16 


VOCABULARY. 


La  cour,  the  court,  yard. 

"^cole,  f.  the  school. 

le  maitre,  the  master,  («acher. 

I'eau,  f.  the  water. 

la  main,  the  hand. 

la  pluie,  the  rain. 

le  toil,  the  roof. 

ok,  where,  ton,  thy,  ce,  this 

9.  Je  suis,  I  am. 
tu  es,  thou  art. 
il  est,  he  is. 
eOe  est,  she  iB. 

PI.   nous  sommes,  we  are. 
vous  etes,  you  are 
ilssont,  they  are. 
-  tiles  sont,  they  are 


la  chambre,  the  room. 
l'€glise,  f.  the  church 
la  nuit,  the  night. 
lejour,  the  day. 
la  cuisine,  the  kitchen. 
la  poche,  the  pocket. 
demeure,  lives,     notre,  our. 
qui,  who,  whom  1 

Suis-je,  am  I ! 
es-tu,  art  thou  ? 
est-il,  is  he  ? 
est-elle,  is  she  1 

tommes-nous,  are  we  ? 
ites-voua,  are  you  1 
$ont-ils,  are  they  ? 
stou-eUcs,  are  thejr  f 


38  [V.       QUATRIEMB   LE^OK 

BEADING  EXERCISE  4. 

Je  suis  dans  la  cour.  L'oiseau  est  sur  le  toit.  Es-tu  au  jardln 
(dans  le  jardin)  ?  Louis  est  chez  mon  pere.  Les  chevaux  sont  do- 
vant  la  porte.  Apres  la  pluie.  Pendant  la  nuit.  Avant  le  jour. 
L'enfant  est  sous  I'arbre.  Parmi  les  enfants.  Nous  sommes  dor 
liere  les  arbres.  lis  sont  entre  la  porte  et  la  fenetre.  Ce  livre  est 
pour  mon  frere.  Ma  tante  est  a  I'^glise.  Sans  argent  {money,} 
Avee  les  chevaux  de  mon  oncle.  Centre  I'ennemi.  Notre  ami 
demeure  k  Paris  dans  la  maison  de  sa  tante. 

THEME  4. 

1.  In  the  yard.  2.  During  the  night.  3.  I  am  before  the 
house.  4.  Louis  is  in  the  garden.  5.  Are  you  in  the  yard  ?  6. 
Before  night.  7 .  I  speak  (je  parte)  of  the  house,  —  of  the  coat,  — 
of  the  flowers,  —  of  my  father,  —  of  my  mother.  8.  The  two  knives 
are  in  my  pocket.  9.  Where  are  the  cats  ?  10.  They  are  in  the 
kitchen.  11.  The  bu-ds  are  on  the  roof.  12.  The  three  children 
of  my  cousin  (m.)  are  in  (the)  town.  13.  Against  the  rain.  14. 
With  my  father.  15.  Without  a  master.  16.  Louis  is  in  his  («a) 
room.  17.  The  book  is  for  my  ^ster.  18.  Between  the  two  win- 
dows. 19  Under  the  roof  of  the  house.  20.  Are  they  before  the 
door  of  the  church  ?  21.  No;  they  are  behind  the  church.  22. 
The  children  are  at  (the)  school. 

CONVERSATION. 

Oh  est  Louis  ?  II  est  dans  la  cour. 

Oh  est  mon  fils  ?  II  est  au  jardin. 

Oil  sont  les  enfants  V  Es  jouent  {play)  devant  la  mai- 

son. 

Votre  eousine  es^elle  a  I'^cole  ?    Non  M  — ,  elle  est  k  I'eglise. 

Rtes-vous  dans  le  jardin  ?  Non  M  — ,  nous  sommes  dans  la 

cour. 

Ton  pere  est-il  au  jardin  ?  Non  M  — .  il  est  dans  sa  cbam- 

bro. 

Sont-ils  k  la  fenetre  ?  Oui  M  — ,  ils  sont  k  la  fenAtre. 

Avez-vous  vu  les  canards  Nous  avons  vu  les  canards  et  les 
(dtieks).  dans  la  eo«r  ?  oies  {geese^. 


THE   PAETITIVE    ARTICLE .  39 

V.    CINQUIEME    LEgON. 


THE  PARTITIVE  ARTICLE. 

1.  The  partitive  article  answers  to  the  English  some  or  any^  ex- 
pressed in  French  bj  du  before  a  noun  masculine  beginning  with  a 
consonant,  by  de  la  before  a  noun  feminine  beginning  with  a  conso- 
nant, and  by  de  f  before  a  noun  of  either  gender  beginning  with  a' 
vowel  or  an  A  mute.     Ex. : . 

Du  pain,  some  or  any  bread.  de  la  biere,  some  beer. 

du  vin,  (some  or  any)  wine.  de  La  viande,  some  meat 

de  VaTgent,  some  money  (Silver).        de  I'huile,  some  oil. 
In  the  plural  the  partitive  article  is  des  for  both  genders.    Ex. 

Des  livres,  (some)  books.  desjleurs,  flowers. 

des  enfants,  children.  des  roses,  roses. 

Some  is  not  always  used  in  English,  whereas  du,  de  la,  de  V,  des,  must 
always  be  expressed  in  French 

2.  In  questions  the  English  use  any  instead  of  some  ;  in  French 
it  must  be  hindered  by  the  saipe  article,  as :  — 

Have  you  any  bread  ?  avez-vous  du  pain  7 
Is  there  any  water  **  y  a-t-U  de  I'eau  9 

3.  The  partitive  article  must  be  used  whenever  in  English  some 
or  any  is  expressed  or  understood  before  a  substantive ;  it  must  be 
repeated  before  every  substantive  in  a  sentence.     Ex. :  — 

Have  you  bread  and  cheese  ?    Avez-mus  du  pain  et  dujromagef 
Bring  me  some  mustard,  oil  and  vinegar. 
Appcrtez-moi  dc  la  moutarde,  de  I'huile  eJ  du  vinaigre. 

4.  However,  when  the  sub.stantive  is  preceded  by  an  adjective, 
the  simple  preposition  de  or  cT  takes  the  place  of  the  partitive  arti 
cle,  in  the  singular  as  well  as  in  the  plural,  as :  — 

S.  de  bon  vin,  some  or  any  good  wine. 
de  bonne  viande,  some  w  any  good  meat. 
de  mauvais  caf€,  some  or  any  bad  coffee. 
^  excellentefarine,  some  or  any  excellent  flour. 


40 


V.      CINQUIEME  LEgON. 


PL  de  hons  Uvre3,  some  or  any  good  books. 

de  belles  fieurs,  some  or  any  beautiful  flowers 
cT  excellents  vaisseaux,  some  or  any  excellent 


VOCABULARY. 


Lafartne,  the  flour.  ^ 
fe^,  (the)  iron.*^ 
Pargent,  m.  silver.^ 
fe  papier,  the  paper.  ''^ 
Vencre,  f.  the  ink.-^ 
lefromage,  the  cheese., 
legar^on,*  the  boy. 
leplomb,  the  lead. 
fe  se/,  the  salt.   - 
fe  canard,  the  duck, 
rcew/,  m.  the  egg. 
ily  a,  there  is,  there  are. 

8.  Taurai,  I  shall  have 
iu  auras,  thou  wilt  have. 
il  aura,  he  will  have. 
elle  aura,  she  will  have 

PI.  nous  aurons,  we  shall  have. 
vous  aurez,  you  will  have. 
Usauront,  they  will  have. 
dies  auront,  they  will  have 


le fruit,  the  fruit. 
/e  Sucre,  the  sugar, 
fe  ca/^,  the  coffee. 
la  prune,  the  plum.      , 
le  beurre,  the  butter.  K 
fe  crayon,  the  penciL 
/e  Soulier,  the  shoe, 
fe  6as,  the  stocking. 
ac/i€j;^,  bought,  t^ 
que,  what,     maw,  but. 
la,  there,    six,  six. 
c'est,  this  is,  that  is. 

Aurai-je,  shall  I  have  ? 
auras-tu,  wilt  thou  ha\e? 
aura-t-il,  will  he  have? 
aura-t-elle,  will  she  have  1 

owrons-nojis,  shall  we  have  t 
aurez-vous,  will  you  have  ? 
auront-ils,  will  they  have? 
auront-elles,  will  they  have  1 


READING  EXERCISE  6. 

J'avais  de  la  farine  et  du  sel.  Aviez-vous  aussi  du  sel  ?  Le  roi 
a  de  Tor  et  de  I'argent.  II  a  aussi  des  bijoux.  Tu  auras  du 
fromage.  Louis  a  achet6  du  papier  et  de  Tencre.  Nous  aurons 
des  livres,  des  plumes  et  des  crayons.  Avaicnt-elles  dos  fieurs  et 
des  fruits  ?  Je  donne  a  ton  cousin  des  noix  et  des  pommes.  Dana 
la  cour  il  y  a  des  canards.  Mon  cousin  avait  des  chevaux  et  des 
ohiens.  Ma  cousine  aura  des  chats,  mais  ma  tante  aura  des  ciseaux 
Dans  les  jordins  il  y  a  des  arbres,  des  fruits  et  des  fieurs. 

♦  Gar^on  means  waiter  and  bachelor  as  well  as  6oy.    Petit,  Bmall,  is  therf* 
rtr>re  generally  prefixed  in  speaking  of  a  young  boy. 


-t-t^ 


PREPOSmONS. 
THEME  0. 


41 


1.  We  had  some  butter  and  (some)  cheese.  2.  Yon  had 
butter  and  eggs.  3.  Here  is  (L.  n.)  bread.  4.  There  is  some 
bread.  5.  My  father  has  bought  lead  and  iron.  6.  The  child  has 
flowers.  7.  My  cousin  (/.)  will  have  some  flour  and  bread.  8. 
There  are,  eggs  and  fruits.  9.  The  man  has  sugar  and  coflTee. 
10.  The  queen  has  gold  and  silver.  11.  I  give  {to)  the  boys 
books,  pencils  and  pens.  12.  They  will  also  have  some  paper  and 
ink.  13.  Louis  has  horses  and  dogs.  14.  My  sister  will  have 
shoes  and  stockings.  15.  I  give  {to)  the  boy  stockings,  clothes, 
(habits)  and  hats.  16.  Have  you  (any)  friends  (m).  17.  They 
(f.)  will  have  friends  (f.).  18.  At  my  uncle's  (L.  iv.  3.)  house 
there  are  books  and  pictures.  19.  Will  you  have  (voulez-^'ous) 
some  money?  20.  No;  gire  me  {donnez-moi)  some  bread. 
21.  Read  {lisez)  good  books.  22.  This  is  bad  coffee.  23.  We 
have  seen  beautiful  roses. 

CONVERSATION. 


Avons-nous  de  la  farine  V 
Avons-nous  aussi  du  sel  ? 
Aurons-nous  du   beurre  et  du 

pain? 
Qu'avez-vous  Ik  {there)  V 

A-t-elle  des  crayons  ? 

Les  enfants  ont-ils  des  poires  1 
Qu'as-tu  sous  le  bras  {arm)  'i 
Pour  qui  sont  ces  li vres  ? 
Ta  soBur  a-t^lle  du  sucre  ? 
Tod  cousin  a-t-il  du  papier? 

^N^Jui  a  du  fromage  ? 
Xa-tril  des  fruits? 
'  Qu'y  art-il  chez  mon  oncle  ? 


Nous  avons  de  la  farine. 
Nous  avons  aussi  du  sel. 
Non  M — ,  mais  vous   aurez  des 

fruits. 
Nous  avons  de  h.  viande  et  d« 

pain. 
Non    M — ,    mais     elle    a    des 

plumes. 
Non  M — ,  lis  ont  des  ponunes. 
J'ai  des  livres. 
lis  sont  pour  mon  maitre. 
Elle  a  du  sucre  et  du  caf^. 
Mon    cousin    a    du    papier,    doe 

plumes  et  de  I'encre. 
Le  gargon  a  du  fromage. 
Oui  M — ,  il  y  a  des  fruits. 
n  y  a  des  livres  et  des  ima^B. 


▼I.      8IXIEME   LEgON. 

VI.    SIXlilME    LE9ON 


FURTHER   USE  OF  DE, 

De  is  used  without  the  article. 

1.  After  nouns  expressing  measure,  weight,  numbfr/ ,  jai^i : 

Une  bouteilk  de  vin,  a  bottle  of  wino.'    C7ne  livre  de  sucre,  a  pound  of  siigaz 
Un  m&rceau  de  pain,  a  piece  of  bread.    Une  paire  de  his,  a  pair  of  stockings 

2.  After  adverbs  of  quantity. 

Ai^sez,  enough.  moins,  less,  fewer. 

beaucoup,  much,  many,  a  great  many,        ne  —  rien,  nothing. 

a  great  deal.  qudque  chose,  something. 

combien,  how  muoh,  how  many.  trop,  too,  too  much,  too  many.   . 

ne — guere,  but  little,  but  few.^  trop  peu,  too  little,  too  few. 

peu,  little,  few.  tant,  so  much,  so  many. 

plm,  more.  aiitant,  as  much,  as  many. 

Ex. :  — Assez  de  vin,  wine  enough,  {assez  before  the  noun  and  adjective) 

ConMen  d'argent,  how  much  money  ? 

Tant  dejleurs,  so  many  flowers.       Trop  defautes,  too  many  mistakes. 

Bbmabk.     But  after  hien,  much,  many,  and  /a  plupart,  xaost,  the  article 
must  be  used.     Ex. :  —  >»^ 

Bien  des  kommes,  many  men   ^  La  plupart  du  temp*,  most  of  the  time 

3.  After  pas,  point,  jamais,  rfe  alone  must  be  used  instead  of 
the  partitive  du,  de  la,  des.     Ex.  :  — 

Je  n'aipasde  sucre,  I  have  no  sugar.  N^avez-vous  point  d'encre,  have  yon  no 

ink? 

4     De  is  used  as  a  connective  of  a  word  denoting  a  material. 

Une  bague  d'or,  a  gold  ring.  Une  cuiller  d' argent,  a  sflver  spoon. 

Une  bourse  de  sate,  a  silk  purse.  Une  table  de  bois,  a  wooden  table. 

Un  chapeau  de  velours,  a  velvet  bonnet 


PREPOSITIONS.  43 

VOCABULARY. 

(Jne  feuHle,  a  sheet  I'aune,  f.  the  ell,  yard. 

un  verre,  a  glass.  tme  douzaine,  a  dozen. 

le  th^,  tea.  In  botte,  the  boot. 

une  boite,  a  box.  la  personne,  the  person. 

la  moiilr&,  the  watch  .        .       le  bois,  the  wood. 

le  drap,  the  cloth.  /^WJUA*      que,  than. 

rept^  received.  bu,  drank. 

la  chaine,  the  chain  heureux,  happy 

READING  EXERCISE  6. 

Voici  une  bouteille  de  vin.  Nous  avons  trois  livres  do  sucre. 
Nous  auroDS  aussi  deux  livres  de  caM.  La  reine  avait  beaucoup  de 
bijoux  Aviez-vous  assez  d 'argent?  Men  oncle  aui*a  une  douzaine 
de  bas  A.vez-vous  regu  la  boite  de  crayons?  Vous  aurez  une 
feuille  de  papier  *  Aviez-vous  assez  de  pain  ?  Les  enfants  avaient 
moins  de  poires  que  de  noix.  Je  donne  asscz  d'argent  k  men  fils. 
II  a  bu  trop  de  vin.  Nous  aurons  une  chaine  d 'argent.  Vous  au- 
rez une  montre  d'or.  Ma  mere  a  un  chapeau  de  velours.  La  plu- 
part  des  hommes  sont  heureux. 

^  /  THEME  6. 

1.  I  have  a  dozen  (o/*)  pens.  2.  Thou  wilt  have  h  sheet  of  pa- 
per. 3.  She  has  cheese  and  butter  enough.  4.  We  had  a  glass  of 
wine.  5.  T  shall  have  also  a  piece  of  meat  and  two  glasses  of  wine. 
6.  He  had. a  bottle  of  oil.  7.  We  had  two  pounds  of  sugar,  six 
poimds  of  coffee,  and  five  pounds  of  tea.  8.  You  will  have  a  great 
many  pencils  and  books.  9.  I  have  bought  a  dozen  stockings  and 
two  pairs  of  shoes.  10.  In  this  {ceite)  box  there  are  six  yards  of 
^loth.  11.  I  had  a  silver  watch  and  a  gold  ring.  12.  This  is  a 
'vooden  table  13.  How  many  persons  have  you  seen  {vuet)  'i 
We  have  seen  few  persons.  15.  My  cousin  had  a  wooden  nox 
It).  Have  you  drunk  a  bottle  of  wine?  17.  Give  me  a  sheet 
of  papei.  18.  My  brothet  will  have  something.  19.  My  sis- 
ter has  bought  two  gold  rings  and  three  silver  spoons.  20.  The 
obild  haw  a«?  many  pears  as  (^que  de)  apples. 


44 


n.     8IXIEME  LEgon. 


mOD 


Qu'avez-vous  Ik  ? 
Qu'avcz'vous  achet^  ? 
A.vez-vous  aussi  du  cafe  ? 
Avez-vous    de    I'argent, 

fils? 
Combien  d'argent  avez-vous  ? 
Est-co  assez  pour  vous  ? 
Oil  avez-vous  vu  le  maitre  de 

musique  ? 
Avaitril  des  fleura  ? 

Combien  de  chevaux  avez-vous  ? 
Avez-vous  une  paire  de  bottcs  ? 


OONVEBSATION. 

Nous  avons  un  verre  d'eau. 

J'ai  achet^  deux  livies  de  sucro. 

Oui  M — ,  j'ai  du  cafe, 

Oui  mon  pere,  j'ai  de  I'argent. 


J'ai  six  francs. 

C'est  assez  pour  moi  (me). 

J'ai  vu  mon  maitre  de  musique 

au  jardin. 
Oui  jM — ,  il  avait  des  fruits  et  des 

fleurs. 
Nous  avons  trois  chevaux. 
J'ai  une  paire  de  bottes  et  denx 

paires  de  souliers. 


} 


VII.    SEPTIEME    LE9ON.   ^. 


PROPER  NOUNS. 

A  distinction  must  be  made  between  names  of  persons  and  towns, 
and  names  of  countries,  provinces,  mountains,  rivers,  lakes, 
1.  The  former,  as  in  English,  take  no  article,  such  are  :  — 


CmUSTIAN    NAMES. 


OuiUaujne,  William. 
Henri;  Henry. 
George,  George. 
Jean,  John. 


Vterme,  Vienna. 
Gtankve,  Genenra. 


Frangois,  Francis. 
Elise,  Eliza. 
Edem,  Helen,  Ellen. 
Jeanne,  Jane. 


NAMES  OF  TOWNS. 


Lyon,  Lyons. 
Bruxelles,  Bross^. 


PROPEB   NOUNS.  46 

2.  We  must  except  from  the  above  rule  the  fiames  of  several 
Italian  authors  before  which  the  article  is  used  :  h  TassCy  Tasso  (du 
Tasse,  etc)  ;  VArioste,  Ariosto  ;  le  Dante,  Dante  ;  —  titles  of  books 
or  plays,  as  :  le  Telemaque  de  Fmelon,  VAthalie  de  Racine ,  etc. ; 
some  names  of  towns,  as :  le  Havre,  Havre ;  le  Caire,  Cairo ;  la 
Nouvelle  Orleans,  New  Orleans. 

3.  Before  proper  names  of  countries,  provinces,  rivers  and  moun- 
tains, the  definite  article  is  used  in  French,  as  :  — 

La  France,  France.  la  Pnisse,  Prussia. 

la  Belfjiqne,  Belgium.  .V Europe,  Europe. 

VAnyleterre,  England.  I'Afrujue,  Africa. 

V Italic,  Italy.  I'Asie,  Asia,     '^^vil/ 

la  Suisse,  Switzerland  V Amirique,  America. 

V Allenuyjne,  Germany.  *;  ,^ .  -<  •  /  la  Seine,  the  Seine. 

VEsjHvjne,  Spain.  le  Rliin,  the  Rhine. 

la  Sued',  Sweden.  hs  Alpes,  the  Alps,  etc. 
la  Russie,  Kussia. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

4.  The  names  of  countries  and  provinces  take  no  article  when 
they  are  preceded  by  the  preposition  en,  which  corresponds  to  both 
to  and  in.     Ex.:  — 

Je  vais  en  ItaJie,  I  am  going  to  Italy. 

n  demeure  en  Allenuiffne,  he  lives  in  Germany. 

5.  To  and  at  or  in,  before  names  of  cities,  towns,  and  vil- 
lages,  are  rendered  by  a.     Ex.:  — 

yous  aVxms  a  Londres,         it  Pans,         a  Bade,  etc. 

We  go  to  London  to  I^aris,       to  Baden,  etc. 

Mon  oncle  demeure  a  Berlin  a  Lyon,  etc 

My  uncle  lives  at  (in)  Berlin,      at  (in)  Lyons,  etc. 

(Further  explanations  will  be  given  in  the  second  part.) 
Most  names  of  towns  are  spelled  in  French  as  in  English,  with  a  few  ex- 
ceptions. 

VOCABULARY. 

Le  cahier,  the  copy-book.  la  ville,  the  city,  town. 

h  carte,  the  map  le  cours,  the  course. 

la/able,  the  fable.  k  marckand,  the  dealer,  tradeemaa. 


46  VTI.    8BPTIEME   LEgON. 

le  tnanteau,  the  cloak.  le  n^gociant,  the  mei  chant. 

le  gant,  the  glove.  la  capitate,  the  capital. 

fejoa^s,  the  country  ^y'^"^  donnez,  give,     votre,  joxiT. 

ott,  where.    Zu,  read.    '  Aait,vfas.    ^iez-vous,  were yxmt 

READING  EXERCISE  7. 

J'ai  le  cahier  de  Frederic.  Voici  les  fables  de  La  Fontaine. 
J  'ai  vu  le  chateau  du  roi  de  Belgique.  Donnez  la  boite  a  Sophio. 
Donnez  la  plume  a  Henri.  Oil  est  Monsieur  H?  C'est  le  chs' 
poau  de  mademoiselle  Elise.  C'est  le  canif  de  George.  Nous 
sommes  a  Paris.  Etiez-vous  k  Vienne?  Mon  cousin  est  en 
Amerique.  Le  cours  du  Khin  est  long.  Voici  une  carte  d'Alle- 
magne.  Louis  Phillippe,  roi  de  France,  est  mort  (died)  en  Angle- 
terre.  Voici  les  chevaux  de  Charles.  Avez-vous  lu  les  oeuvres 
(the  works)  de  Comeille  If     Donnez  ces  gants  k  Henri. 

THEME  7. 

1.  William  is  my  friend.  2.  I  am  William's  friend  (the  friend  of 
William).  3.  Here  is  John's  brother.  4.  Where  is  my  sister  Ellen  ? 
5.  She  is  with  Caroline.  B.  Where  are  Eliza's  gloves?  7.  Speak 
(parlez)  to  Henry  and  Francis.  8.  I  have  received  the  book  from 
Paris.  9  Brussels  is  the  capital  of  Belgium.  10.  Florence  is  a 
city  in  Italy.  11.  I  am  going  to  Switzerland.  12.  The  merchants 
of  New  York.  13.  My  uncle  lives  in  Germany.  14.  Are  you  go- 
ing (allez-vous)  to  Berlin  or  to  Vienna  V  15  I  am  going  tu 
Frankfort  and  to  Vienna.  16.  Paris  is  the  capital  of  France.  17. 
Is  your  aunt  in  America?  18.  Yes;  she  is  in  New  Orleans. 
19.  My  brother  has  travelled  (voyage)  in  Russia,  in  Sweden,  and 
la  Germany.  20.  This  is  John's  hat.  21.  I  have  seen  Geneva, 
Lyons,  and  Rome.  22.  Give  me  Mary's  copy-book  and  George's 
pencil.     23.  I  have  seen  the  apple- vender  (dealer  in  (de)  apples). 

OONVEESATION. 

Oh  ^tiez-vous  ?  J'^tais  h.  Paris. 

Gt  ton  frere  ou  ^tait-il?  H  ^tait  aussi  k  Paris. 


PROPER   NOUNS. 


47 


Oil  8ont  les  gants  d'Helene  ? 

Quelle  est  la  capitale  do  la 
Belgique  ? 

Quelle  est  la  capitalo  de  la 
Prusse? 

Qui  est  la  ? 

A  qui  donnez-vous  ces  livres? 

A  (jui  est  ce  chapeau? 

Oil  tix)uve-tron  {is found)  beau- 
coup  d'or? 

Oil  trouve-tK)ii  dc  bon  fer? 

Quels  pajrs  avez-vous  vus  ? 
Avez-vous  lu  les  potimes  de  B^ 

ranger  ? 
Combion  de  crayons  Carolino 

a-trclle  achet^s  ? 

Ou  sont  les  enfants  de  Ma- 
dame L? 

Donnez-moi  (me)  mes  gants 
b'iI  vous  plait  ({/*  you 
please  ) . 

A.Te2-voua  lu  cette  (this)  fe- 
bk)Y 


Ds  sont  BUT  la  table, 
C'est  Bruxelles. 

C'est  Berlin. 

Les  enfants  de  madame  1?. 
Jc  les  (them)  doune  k  Marie. 
Co  chapeau  est  k  Guillaume. 
En  Californie. 

En  Suede  {Sweden)  et  en  An- 

gleterre. 
J'ai  vu  la  Sxiisse  et  I'ttalie. 
Nun  M — ,  mais  j'ai  lu  les  poemes 

de  Victor  Hugo. 
Caroline  a  achete  quatre  crayona 

et    Jeannette    a    achet^    six 

plumes. 
Bs  sont  au  jardin. 

Les  voici,  M — ,  (^JSere  they  are\ 


Oui  M — ,  j'ai  lu  toutos  (aU)  lee 
fkbieH  de  La  Fontaine. 


.% 


48 


Vm.      HUITlftMB    LE9ON. 


VIII..  HUITlfiME    LE9ON 


CONJUGATION  OF  AVOIR,  TO  HAVE,  —  AFFIRMATIVELY. 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

COMPOUND  or  TnB  PRESENT. 


PRESENT. 

J'ai, 

I  have 

Tuas, 

thou  hast 

11  a  (elle  a,  on  a),                      lie  has 

Nous  uvons, 

we  have 

Vous  avez. 

you  have 
ihet/  have 

lis  ont, 

IMPERFECT. 

J'avais,  I  had 

,  toas  having,  or  used  to 

have 

Tu  avals. 

thou  hadst 

11  avait, 

heliad 

Nous  avions. 

we  had 

Vous  aviez. 

youluid 
they  had 

£l8  avaient, 

PRBTXRITB. 

J'eus, 

I  had 

Tu  cus. 

thou  hadst,  etc. 

I)  cut, 

he  had 

Nous  eflmes. 

we  had 

Vous  eutes, 

you  had 

lis  eurent. 

they  had 

FUTURE. 

J'aurai, 

/  shall  or  will  have 

Tu  auras, 

tftou  wilt  have 

11  aura, 

h^  will  have 

Nous  aurons. 

we  shall  have 

Vous  aurez. 

you  will  liare 
tney  will  have 

llsauront. 

CONTITIO? 
PRESENT. 

•Taorais, 

/  shoidd  have 

Tu  auraia. 

thou  won/dst  hare 

11  aurait, 

he  would  fin  re 

Nous  aurions. 

we  shoit/d  linre 

Vous  auriez. 

you  would  hare 

lis  auraienty 

they  would  luive 

J'ai  eu, 
Tu  as  eu, 
II  a  eu. 

Nous  avons  eu, 
Vous  avez  en, 
lis  ont  eu. 


1  have  had 

thou  hast  had 

he  Lis  had 

we  have  had 

you  have  had 

they  liave  had 


COMPOUND  OF  THE  IMPERFECT. 

J'avais  eu,  /  had  had 


Tu  avais  eu, 
II  avait  eu. 
Nous  avions  eu, 
Vous  aviez  eu, 
lis  avaient  eu. 


thou  hadst  had 

he  had  had 

we  had  liad 

you  had  had 

they  had  had 


COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRETERITE. 

J'eus  eu,  /  had  had 

Tu  cus  eu,  thou  hadst  had 

11  eut  eu,  he  had  had 

Nous  eflmes  eu,  uv  hmi  had 

Vous  eiltos  eu,  vou  had  had 

lis  eurent  eu,  ikey  liad  tiad 

COMPOUND   OF   THE    FUTURE. 

J'aurai  eu,        /  sliall  or  will  have  had 


Tu  auras  eu, 
II  aura  cu, 
Nous  aurons  eu, 
Vous  aurcz  eu, 
lis  auront  eu. 


thnn  wilt  have  had 
he  wil!  have  had 
we  shall  hare,  had 
you  trill  have  had 
they  will  have  had 


iL   MOOD. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT. 

J'aurais  eu,  /  slumld  hare  had 

Tu  aurais  eu,  thou  wontdst  have  had 
II  aurait  imi,  he  n-onld  hare  had 

Nous  aurions  eu,  we  should  have  hul 
Vous  auriez  eu,  you  would  hare  had 
lis  auraicnt  eu,      they  would  /lave  had 


CONJUGATION  OP  AVOIR, 


49 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

Aie,  have  (thou), 

Ayons,  let  us  have. 

Ayez,      have  (ye  or  you). 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


PBESENT. 

Qp.8  5 'aie,  that  T  may 

Que  tu  aies,  that  ihou  nutifest 

Qu'ii  ait,  thni  he  may 

Que  nous  avons,         that  ve  mny 
Que  vous  aycz,  that  yon  nitty 

Qu'ils  aicnt,  tluit  lUey  may 

IMPERFECT. 

Que  j  'cusse,  that  T  m  ight ' 

Que  tu  casses,   thai  thou  tniyhtest 

Qn'il  ofit,  that  he  iniyht 

Que  nous  cussions,  iliat  we  miyht 

Que  vous  cussiez,  that  you  mifjht 
Qu'ils  cuiiSCDt,        t/iat  they  miyht 


COMPOUXD   OP    THE    PBESKNT. 

Quej'aiecu,  that  I  may 

Que  tu  iiies  on,  that  thou  mayest 
(^u'il  ait  eu,  that  he  way  I   « 

Que  nous  a3-ons  en,  that  we  may 
(^iic  vous  aycz  cu,  that  yon  may 
Qu'ils  aient  cu,         that  they  may 

COMPOUND   OF   TUB    IMPERFECT. 


g* 


Que  j'cusse  cu. 
Que  tu  cusses  eu, 


tliat  J  miffht 

that  thou 

miffht  est 

Qu'il  cfit  cu,  that  he  mii/ht 

Que  nous  cussions  cu,       that  ire 

miyht  \mi(]ht 

Que  vous  eussiez  cu,         that  you 

i  Qu'ils  eusscnt  cu,   that  they  might 


Avoir, 


INFINITIVE   MOOD. 
FBESENT.  COMPOUND   OF   THE    PRESEMTT. 

to  have  |  Avoir  eu,  to  have  had 


Ayant, 


PARTICIPLE. 

COMPOUND. 

having  \  Ayant  cu,  having  had 


PAST    OR    PASSIVE. 

En,  had 


|r.  It  would  be  a  good  plan  to  conjugate  the  whole  verb  avoir  together  with 
a  noun,  as;  J^ai  une pomme,  favais  une pomme,  etc.  —  After  that,  with  tho 
pronoun  /'  (/e),  it,  and  les,  them,  as  :  je  I'ai,  I  have  it;  tu  Vas,  U  /'a,  etc^ 
j(  les  aiirui,  tu  lea  auras,  itc. 


50  Vni.      HUITIEME  LEgON. 

VOCABULARY. 

Le  temps,  time.  demain,  to-morrow. 

le  courcge,  the  courage.  I't^ncrier,  m.  the  inkstand. 

le  plaisir,    the  pleasure.  la  regie,  the  ruler,  •fc-^-^^t^ 

la  voiture,  the  carriage.  perdu,  lost,  ^te,  been.^-A-w^SvA^   '>V  * 

la  bourse,  the  purse^,  t  /^t;  • :.  .              aujourd'lmi,  to-daj."*!^  --^^^'ft^ 

Aicr,  yesterday,  c'esf,  it  is.  et,  and.        «e,  if.        V'^-*-  •^^  fUi- 

THEME  8. 

Pres.  1.  I  have  a  book.  2.  He  Las  a  hat.  3.  "We  h&vo  a 
house  and  (a)  garden.  >»4.  They  (masc.)  have  a  horse.  5.  They 
(^fem.)  have  flowers  and  fruit. — Impehf.  6.  I  had  a  friend.  7. 
Thou  hadst  a  friend.  8.  Louisa  had  two  cats.  9.  You  had  money 
enough.  10.  The  children  had  bread.  —  Pret.  11.  He  had  the 
courage.  12.  You  had  the  pleasure.  13.  The  son  of  the  king  had 
a  carnage.  —  Put.  and  Cond.  14.  I  shall  have  apples.  15.  He 
would  have  seen  the  castle.  16.  We  shall  have  some  coffee  to-day. 
17.  We  would  have  some  sugar.     18.  You  will  have  two  horses. 

19.  They  would  have  an  inkstand  and  a  ruler.  —  Compound  Tenses. 

20.  We  have  had  much  trouble  (^peine).  21.  You  have  had  a  gi-eat 
{grand)  pleasure.  22.  She  has  had  a  great  many  nuts.  23. 
They  had  had  two  copy  books.  24.  I  shall  have  paper  and  pens. 
25.  You  will  have  had  my  horse.  26.  Charles's  sisters  will  have 
many  flowers.  27. \ I  should  have-  had  a  great  deal  of  (beaucoup 
de)  trouble.  28.  Thou  wouldst  have  had  more  pleasure.  29.  You 
would  have  had  a  good  frieud.  30.  The  boy  would  have  had  a 
penknife. 

ADDITIONAL    THEME    UPON    AVOIR. 

1.  My  (ma)  aunt  has  apples,  I  have  many  plums  and  you  ha\o 
flowers  enough  (L.  VI.  2).  2.  Tlie  merchant's  cousin  will  have  a 
bill  to-morrow.  3.  Yesterday  I  had  money,  but  I  have  lost  my 
puree  to-day.  4.  To-morrow  I  shall  have  the  pleasure  of  seeing 
{de  voir)  my  cousin,  (f)  my  aunt  and  my  sister ;  I  sliould  have  had 
the  pleasure  of  seeing  them  {de  les  voir)  yesterday  if  I  had  been  in 
{en  without  article)  town.  5.  We  shall  have  time  enough  to-mor- 
row.    6.  We  had  too  much  time  yesterday.     7.  Have  the  poop. 


IDIOMATIC  USB   OP  AVOIB.  61 

age  to  do  it  (de  lefaire)  ;  you  have  time  enough.  8.  Let  us  have 
the  carriage  and  we  shall  have  much  pleasure.  9.  Wo  should  have 
had  the  carriage  yesterday  if  we  had  wished  (^voulii).  10.  Though 
{quoifjue)  you  may  have  had  time,  you  have  not  had*  the  couiago. 
11.  Though  we  have  (pros.  Subj.)  two  horses,  we  have  not 
(ji'avons  pas)  the  courage  to  ride  them  (^de  les  morder).  12.  We 
have  money  to-day,  and  to-morrow  we  shall  have  bread,  meat,  mid 
\^'ine.  13.  It  is  you,  who  (jjui)  will  have  the  most  (le  plus  de) 
pleasure.  14.  I  do  not  think  (^je  ne  crois  pas)  that  he  would  have 
had  the  ccurage.  15.  During  the  night  ^e  had  lost  his  {sa)  purse, 
lo.  If  he  had  had  an  inkstand  he  would  have  had  ink.  17.  They 
will  have  silver  spoons  on  the  table.  18.  They  would  have  jewels 
if  («')  they  had  money. 


>" — - 

^     IX.    NEUVlfi 


ME    LE9ON:. 


IDIOMATIC  USE  OF  AYOIK.       ^ 
1.   Avoir  is  used  idiomatically  with  the  nouns  chau^,  ^aijaibr*- 
froid,  cold;    /am, •hun^opq   50?/*, •,thirstM,  rai5ow,   v^timytortf 
wrong ;,  joewr,  t|w^; '  nante^a'dm^  envie^  (jcsh'ttj;   sommetl,  sleep , 
besoinf&ed  ;  as :  —  " 


v^   sommeilf  sleep  fj 


J'ai  chaatJ.  I  am  warm. 

J'avais  froid.  I  was  cold. 

II  aura  faira.  Ho  will  be  hungry^ 

EUe  aurait  soif.  Sho  would  be  tliirstyw 

Nous  avons  raison.  AVc  are  right. 

Vous  avcz  tort.  You  are  wrong. 

Nous  avons  cu  pcur.  Wc  were  (havft  been)  afraiJL 

lis  ont  honte.  Tliov  are  ashamed. 

EUes  avaicnt  envie.  They  were  desirous. 

Avez-vous  somraeil  ?  Arc  you  sleepy  1 

Nous  avons  besoin.  We  need.     We  wanfc. 
•  VouB  n'avcz  pas  eu. 


52  IX.      NEUVIEME  LEpOK. 

2.  Avoir  quelque  chose,  literally,  to  have  something,  is  also  jsed 
idiomatically  in  the  sense  of  io  he  the  matter  laith  ;  thus  :  — 

Qn'  avez-vous?  What  is  the  matter  with  you  ? 

J'ai   quclquc  chose.  Something  is  the  matter  with  me. 

Vous  avcz  quelque  chose.  "  "     "         "         "     you. 

II  a  "  "  ^  «*  "     "        "        «•     hiia.  ^^ 

Ellca  "  "  "  **    "        "        "     her. 

Nous  avions     "  "  "  wa3  the  matter  with  us.  • 

Vous  aviez      "  "  "  *'     "         "        "     yoa. 

lis  auront        "  "  "  will  be  the  matter  with 

them. 
Remark.     The  opposite  of  avoir  quelque  chose  is  n'avoir  rien  (ne  before 
the  verb  and  ri^n  after  it.     Sec  L.  XI.  2).    As  :  — 

Je  n'ai  ricn.  Nothing  is  the  matter  with  roe. 

Vous  n'avcz  rien. 

II  n'a  rien. 

Elle  n'a  rien. 

Nous  n 'avions  rien 

Vous  n'avicz  rien. 

lis  a'auront  rien. 

3.  Avoir  Vair  means  to  have  the  appearance,  to  look  ;  —  avoir 
V intention  de,  to  have  the  intention,  to  intend;  —  avoir  soin  de,  to 
take  care  of;  — avoir  mal  a,  to  have  a  sore,  an  ache,  or  a  pain  in. 
As;  — 

II  avait  I'air  content.  He  looked  glad. 

Vous  avez  I'air  heurcux.  You  look  happy. 

Ilsont  I'air  malhcureux.  They  look  unhappy. 

A-t-elle     I'intcntion     d'allcr  en    Does  she  intend  to  go  to  France  1 

France? 
Non,  Monsieur ;   elle  a  I'intention    No,  sir ;  she  intends  to  go  to  Italy. 

d'allcr  en  Italic. 

Ayez  aoin  de  raon  chapeau.  Take  care  of  my  hat. 
J'aurai  soin  de  votro  chapeau  ct  de    I  shall  take  care  of  your  hat  and  cane. 

votre  canne. 

j'ai  inal  a  ia  tete.  I  have  a  headache. 

Avez- vous  mal  aux  dents  1  Have  you  the  toothache  ? 

J'avais  mal  au  bras.  I  had  a  sore  arm. 

II  avait  mal  an  genoxu  He  had  a  sore  knee. 


<(      a           tt 

yuu. 

"    him. 

«      ((           ,t 

"    her. 

was  the    " 

"    ns. 

<(        <(          <€ 

"    you. 

will  be  the  matter  with  them. 

/DIOMATIC   USE  OP  AVOIR.  63 

VOCABULARY. 

Lechien,  the  dog.  conterU,  glad,  pleased. 

la  tete,  the  head.  vialade.  sick,  iD. 

le  bras,  the  aJin.  oiler,  to  go* 

ia  (jorge,  the  throat.  votre,  your,  won,  my. 

/fl  dejn.t,  the  tooth.  fe  demoiselle,  the  young  lady, 

2s  manteau,  the  cloak-  fc  parapluie,  the  umbrella. 

BEADING  EXERCISE  9. 

A-til  peur?  Oui  Madame;  U  a  peur.  Avez-vous  bonte  de 
parler  (to  speak)  fran(,'ais?  Non,  Mademoiselle;  niais  j'ai  peur  de 
parler  fran(;ais.  Aviez-vous  froid  hicr  ?  Oui,  Monsieur,  j'avais  froid 
hier  mais  j'ai  cbaud  aujourd  'bui.  Avez-vous  cu  peur  du  cbien  ? 
Non,  nou3  avons  cu  peur  du  cheval.  Votre  ami,  a-t-il  quelqua 
chose  ?  Oui,  il  a  quelque  chose.  Qu'  a-tril  ?  II  a  mal  a  la  tete. 
Qu'  avez-vous  ?  J'ai  sommcil.  Votre  ami  a-t-il  besoin  de  moi  ?  Au- 
rez'vous  soin  do  mon  cbeval  ?  Oui,  Monsieur  j  j'aurai  soin  de  votre 
cbeval.  Qui  a  besoin  de  rencrier?  Votre  cou.sine  a-t-elle  mal  au 
bra,s  ?  Elle  a  mal  au  bras.  Lc  negociant  a  Tab:  content.  Mon 
frere  a  Tintention  d'aller  k  Pai*is  et  k.  Londi-es.  Votre  fr^re, 
qu'  a-t-il  ?    II  a  honte. 

,\  \y  THEME  9. 

1.  Where  do  you  intend  to  go  to-morrow?  2.  I  intend  to  go 
and  see  (voir)  the  merchant.  3.  I  was  wrong  and  you  were 
right.  4.  Was  be  sleepy?  5.  He  was  sleepy.  6.  Were  you  cold? 
7.  I  was  cold.  8.  What  is  the  matter  with  your  father  ?  9.  Noth- 
ing is  the  matter  with  him.  10.  What  was  the  matter  with  that 
(cc)  boy?  11.  He  was  ashamed.  12.  Was  be  afraid  of  the 
horse?  13.  No,  sir;  be  Wjis  afraid  of  the  dog.  '14.  Do  Hook 
sick  ?  1 5.  Yes,  sir ;  you  look  sick..  - 16.  Have  you  a  headache  ?  17. 
No,  sir;  I  have  a  sore  throat.  -18.  Has  that  youn^  ladj-'the  tooth- 
ache? 19.  She  has  the  toothache.  20.  Take  care  of  my  watch. 
21,  We  shall  take  care  of  your  watch,  your  cloak,  and  your  um- 
brella. .  V 


64 


X-      DIXIEME   LEgON. 


X.    DIXIEME    LE9ON. 


CONJUGATION  OF  ETRE,  TO   ^j^— AFFIRMATIVELY. 


^■.. 


INDICATIVE   MOOD./ 


FBESEKT. 

Je  81118,  /  am 

Tu  es,  thou  art 

II  est  (elle  est,  on  est),  he  is 

Nous  somrnes,  we  are 

Vous  etes,  ye  or  you  are 

lis  sent,  thej/  are 

'EBFBCT.  '. 

/  iDos  or  tisedto  be 

Viou  wast 

he  uxis 

we  were 

you  were 

they  were 


JMtais, 
Tu  etais, 
II  dtait. 
Nous  Jitions, 
Vons  etjez, 
lis  etaient, 


'r 


COMPOUND   OP  THB   PBE8EWT. 


J'ai  etd, 
Tu  as  et4, 
II  a  et€, 

Nous  avons  4ti, 
Vous  avez  et6*, 
lis  ont  ete. 


/  have  beer 
thou  hast  6ft 

he  has  bet:\, 

we  have  been 

yon  haiie  been 

tfiey  liave  been^ 


COMPOUND   OP   THE   IMPERFECT. 


T^ksTBBITB. 


Je  fug, 
Tu  fus, 
II  fut, 

Nous  filmM, 
Vous  futes, 
lis  furent. 


Je  serai, 
Tu  seras, 
II  sera, 
Nous  serons, 
Vous  serez, 
Ha  acront. 


/  was 

thou  wast 

he  was 

we  were 

you  were 

they  were 


PUTUBB. 


/  shall  be,  will  be 
thou  wilt  lie 
he  will  be 
we  shall  be 
you  will  be 
they  tmll  be 


J'avais  ^i4, 
Tu  avals  e't^, 
II  avail  e't^. 
Nous  avions  4x4^ 
Vous  avie^  dt<S, 
lis  avaient  et^ 


/  had  been 

thou  hadst  been 

he  had  fjeen 

we  held  been 

you  had  been 

they  had  been 


COMPOUND   OP^HB   PBllTERITH. 


V 


J'eus  4t4, 
Tu  eus  e't^, 
II  eut  ete', 
Nous  eumes  ^t^, 
Vous  eutes  et^, 
lis  eurent  ete, 


/  had  been 

thou  hadst  been 

he  had  been 

wv  had  been 


you 


had  been 


they  had  been 


COMPOUND   OP  THB    FUTURE. 


J'aurai  ete, 
Tu  auras  et^, 
II  aura  etd. 
Nous  aurons  et^, 
Vous  aurez  ete. 
Us  {luront  et^. 


/  shall 
thou  wilt 

he  will 
we  shall 
you  will 
they  mil 


r 


^^ 


PBSSBNT. 


CONDITIONAL   MOOD. 

COMPOUND   OP   THB    PREBENI. 


Je  serais, 
Tu  serais, 
II  serait, 
Kous  serions, 
Vous  scriez, 
Us  soraient. 


T  should  be 

thou  icouldst  be 

he  would  be 

we  shoidd  be 

you  would  be 

tAey  uxndd  be 


J'aurais  et^, 
Tu  auruis  et^, 
II  aiu-aite'te, 
Nous  aurions  4t4, 
Vous  auriez  et^. 
Us  auraient  4t4, 


I  should 

ou  wouldst 

he  would 

tve  should 

you  would 

they  would  ^ 

r 

I" 


CONJUGATION  OP  EIRE,  TO  BE. 


65 


impesatiVb  mood. 


Sois, 

Soyons, 

Soyez, 


BUBJUNCTIVB  MOOD. 


be  (thou). 

let  us  be. 

be  (ye  or  you). 


PRESENT* 


Qne  je  soia, 
Qrc  tu  sois, 
Qu'il  soil, 
Que  nous  soyons, 
Que  vous  soyez, 
Qu'ils  soient,    • 


that  I  may  be 

that  thou  may  est  be 

that  he  may  be 

that  we  may  be 

tliat  you  may  be 

that  they  may  be 


IMPEBFECT. 


Que  je  fnsse, 
Que  tu  fusses. 


tJiat  I  might  be 
that  thou  miglUest  be 


^ :.  Qu'il  fQt  thai  he  miqht  be 

Quo  nous  fussions,  that  we  might  be 

Que  vous  fussiez,  that  you  might  be 

Qu'ils  fossent,  that  they  might  be 


COMPOUND  OP  THE   PIIBSSIIT. 

Que  j'aie  6t6,  that  I  may 

<iue  tu  aic3  6t6,  that  thou  mayest 
Qu'il  ait  et^,  that  ha  may 

Que  nous  ayons  dtd,  that  we  may 
Que  vous  aycz  etc,  that  you  may 
Qu'ils  aicnt  c'te,     tliat  they  may 


COMPOUND  OP  THE   IMPEKFECT. 

Que  j'eusse  dt6,       that  I  miqht 
Que    tu   eusses  €t6,  that  thou 

mightest 
Qu'il  cflt  4t6,  that  he  might 

Que  nous  eussions  <5tc,  that  we 

mi  glut 
Quo  vons  enssiez  dtd,  that  you 

might 
Qu'ils  eussent    ^te,   thai    they 

might 


EtlOf 


INFINITIVB  MOOD. 

I        COMPOUND  OP  THE   PSE8BNT. 

tobe\  Avoir  dtd,  to  have  hem 


itasit. 


PABTICIPLE, 

COMPOUND. 
Ing  I  Ayant  ^ttf,  hamvg  been 


■&t&. 


PAST  OR  PASSIVB. 
Cinrariable} 


VOCABULARY. 


i&rJi«,  rich. 

appliqu€,  diligent. 
malheureux,  unhappy. 
content,  pleased,  contented. 
faibUy  weak,  tret,  very. 
le  gouvemail,  helm. 


paresseux,  lazy,  idler. 

heureiix,  happy. 

jetme,  young. 

tage,  good,  comment,  how, 

encore^  still,  again*. 

Juleg,  Julius. 


/ 


56  _  Z.      DIXI£M£  LEgON. 

THEME  10. 

T  am  ilL  Thou  art  young.  Charles  is  my  friend.  We  aro  hap- 
py. You  are  also  happy.  The  child  will  be  good.  Louisa  was  ill. 
WUliam  and  JuHus  have  also  been  ill.  This  boy  has  been  idle. 
This  gnl  was  very  good.  He  will  be  contented.  You  would  also 
bo  contented.  She  has  been  at  Paris.  Her  (sow)  brother  has  been 
in  London.  We  have  been  in  France.  Your  mother  may  {pent) 
have  been (Comp. Inf.)  ill.  Yes,  indeed  (en  effet)  she  has  been  ill 
long.*  Who  was  (has  been)  with  (chez)  your  father  ?  A  merchant 
has  been  with  my  father.  He  had  been  before  (auparavanC)  with 
my  uncle. 

ADDITIOXAL  THEME   ON   ETRB   CONJUGATED   AFFIRMATIVELT. 

1.  Having  been  sick,  he  is  still  weak.  2.  The  spoons  were  on 
the  table.  3.  We  were  still  sick.  4.  The  young  boy  was  at  the 
helm.  5.  I  am  among  my  (jnes)  friends.  6.  I  shall  be  with  my 
friends  to-morrow.  7.  I  was  at  your  {votre)  father's  house  yester- 
day (L.  IV.  3).  8.  She  is  in  the  room.  9.  My  neighbor's  name 
is  William.  10.  I  should  be  happy  if  you  were  pleased.  11.  If 
you  are  unhappy,  how  can  you  {pouvez-vous)hQ  (inf.)  contented? 
12.  I  shall  be  pleased  to  see  you  {de  vous  voir)  to-morrow.  13. 
The  merchant  has  been  here  (J.ci)  to-day.  14.  He  had  been  at  hia 
friend's  yesterday.  15.  Be  at  my  house  (chez-moi)  to-morrow. 
16.  Let  us  be  happy.  17.  Though  he  is  (Pres.  Subj.)  rich,  he  is 
mora  (^plus)  unhappy  than  you* 

♦  Translate,  she  is  ill  since  a  longtime  (.dqpuis  longtemps). 


WvO->'' 


jj|/  NEGATIONS.  57 

JS^"^  XI.    ONZIEME    LE9ON. 


NEGATIONS.— THE    NEGATIVE    AND    INTERIIOQA. 
TIA^E  FORMS   OF  THE  AUXILIARIES. 

1.  The  negation  not  is  rendered  by  the  two  words  ne  . . ,  pas.  Ne 
iu  placed  before  the  verb  and  becomes  rC  before  a  vowel  or  silent  h  ; 
pas  is  placed  immediately  after  the  verb.  In  compound  tenses  pas 
is  placed  between  the  auxiliary  and  the  participle.  In  the  mfinitiyo 
ne  and  pas  generally  both  precede  the  verb.     Ex. 

Je  ne  suis  pas.  I  am  not. 

Je  n'ai  pas  ea.  I  haves  not  had. 

Ne  pas  etre,  less  frequently,  n'Stre  pas.  Not  to  be. 

2.  The  words  jamais,  ever,  personnel  person,  and  rien,  any- 
thing, used  with  a  verb  preceded  by  ne  mean  respectively  never^ 
nobody,  nothing.  WTion  the  verb  is  understood,  as  in  answers,  the 
ne  is  omitted,  and  they  have  none  the  less  a  negative  meaning. 
When  used  with  a  verb  not  preceded  by  ne  they  are  always  affirma- 
tive.    Ex. 

Avez-vous  jamais  rien  vn  de  pareil  1  Have  you  ever  seen  anything  similar  1 

Je  n'ai  rien.  I  have  nothing. 

II  n'a  jamais  tort.  He  is  never  wrong, 

Pei^onne  n'a  somracil.  Nobody  is  sleepy. 

Cost  line  pcrsonne  qui  a  sorameiL  It  is  a  person  that  is  sleepy^ 

Qui  a  sommcil  ?     Personne.  Who  is  sleepy  1     Nobody. 

Qu'  avez-vous  1    Bien.  What  is  the  matter  with  yon f  Notli- 

ing. 

3.  The  words  aucun,  ntd,  no ;  nuUement,  nowise,  not  at  all ;  ni  .  •  • 
ni,  neither  .  .  .  nor ;  guere,  but  little,  but  few ;  and  que  in  the 
eense  of  but  or  only  ;  also  requure  the  verb  to  be  preceded  by  n«, 
Nc  (the  verb)  plus  means,  no  more,  not  any  more  left.     Ex. 

Je  n'ai  plus  de  pain.  I  have  no  more  bread. 

II  n'a  ni  pain  ni  vin.  He  has  neither  bread  nor 

£llc  n'a  gucre  de  padeucAi  6ho  has  bat  little  patienf»« 

Kal  n'est  parfiut.  ^-s  3Ho  ono  ia  perfect 


68  XI.      ONZIEME  LEgON. 

Hemark.    After  ni  .  .  .  ni  nouns  used  in  a  partitive  sense  take  neither 
preposition  nor  article  ;  as,  ni  pain  ni  vin.. 
For  further  rules  on  the  negative  see  P.  I.  L.  33,  and  P.  II.  L.  15. 

4.  In  interrogations  the  pronoun  wbich  is  the  subject  of  the  verb 
is  placed  after  it,  and  both  are  joined  by  a  hyphen,  as :  aurez-vou&  ? 
avez-vous  eu  f  When  the  verb  ends  with  a  vowel,  -t-  is  placed 
between  the  verb  and  i7,  elle,  or  on,  as :  aurort-iU  a-t-on  ?  See  also 
L.  I.  Rem.  5. 

6.    AVOIB    AND    ]&TBE    CONJUGATED    NEGATIVELY. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 
PBESENT   TENSB. 


Je  n'ai  pas,  /  have  not 

Tu  n'as  pas,  thou  hast  not 

11  n'a  pas,  ,          he  lias  not 

Nous  n'avons  pas,  '       toe  have  not 

Vous  n'avez  pas,  you  have  not 

lis  n'ont  pas,  they  have  not 


Je  ne  suis  pas,  I  am  not 

Tu  n'es  pas,  thou  art  not 

II  n'est  pas,  he  is  not 

Nous  ne  sommes  pas,  we  are  not 

Vuus  n'etes  pas,  you  are  not 

lis  ne  sont  pas,  they  are  not 


COMPOUND   OP   THE   PRESENT. 

Je  n'ai  pas  ea,     /  have  not  had,  etc.  |  Je  n'ai  pas  6t4,     I  have  not  been,  etc. 

IMPERFECT. 

Je  n'avais  pas,  I  had  not  or  did  not  I  Je  nMtais  pas,  I  was  not,  etc 

have,  etc.  ^  \ 

COMPOUND  OF  THE  IMPERFECT. 

Je  n'avais  pas  eu,  T  had  not  had,  etc.  |  Je  n'avais  pas  4t4,  I  had  not  been,  etc 
And  thus  with  all  compound  tenses. 

PRETERITE. 

Je  D*ous  pas,  J  had  not,  etc.  |  Je  ne  fas  pas,  I  vxu  not,  eta 

rUTUBB. 

Je  n'aarai  pas,  etc  |  Je  ne  serai  pas,  etc 

CONDITIONAL   MOOD. 

Je  u'aurais  pas,  etc,  |  Je  nc  serais  pas,  etc. 


NEGATIONS. 


59 


Que  je  n'aie  pas,  etc 
Qac  jo  n'eusse  pas,  etc. 
N'aie  pas,  etc 


Ne  pas  aToir. 
(N'avoir  pas.) 


BUBJUNCTTVE   MOOD. 
PRESENT. 

I  Que  je  ne  sois  pas,  etc 

IMPERFECT. 

I  Que  je  ne  fusse  pas,  etc 

IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 

I  Ne  sois  pas,  etc 

INTINITTTB   MOOD. 

INe  pas  etre, 
(N'etre  pas.) 


PABTICIPLE3. 


N'ayant  pas. 
N'ayant  pas  eu. 


N'dtant  pas. 
N'ayant  pas  ^ttf. 


INTERROGATIVE  CONJUGATION. 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 
PRESENT   TENSE. 

Ai-ja,  ^^  ^'^  I  Suis-je, 

As-tu,  ^^  ^^o«  ?    Es-tu, 

A-t-il,  A<M  Ac?  etc.  I  Est-il, 

COMPOUND   OP  THE   PRESENT. 

Ai-je  eu,  havt  Ihadl  txc.\  Ai-je  dt€, 

IMPERFECT. 

Avais-je,  eta.  I  Etais-je,  etc 

PBETERITB. 

Exu-je,  etc  I  F^-J«»  «*«• 

FUTURE. 

Aarai  jc,  etc  Serai-je,  etc 

CONDITIONAL  MOOD. 
Anrais-je,  etc  I  Serais-je,  etc 


ami? 

artthoul 
is  he?  etc. 


have     been?  etc 


60 


XI.      ONZI^ME  LEgON. 


NEGATIVE  AND  INTERROGATIVE  CONJUGATION. 


PRESENT. 


N'al-je  pas, 
N'as-tu  pas, 
N'a-t-0  pas. 


N'arais-je  pas,  etc. 
N'eus-je  pas,  etc. 
N'aurai-je  pas,  etc. 
N'aurais-je  pas,  etc. 


have  I  not  ? 

hast  thou  not  ? 

has  he  not  ?  etc. 


Ne  suis-je  pas, 
N'cs-tu  pas, 
N'est-il  pas. 


am  I  notf 

art  thou  not  1 

take  not?  etc. 


IMPERFECT. 

I  N'e'tais-je  pas,  etc 

PRETERITE. 

I  Ne  fus-je  pas,  etc 

FUTURE. 

I  Ne  serai-je  pas>  etc 

CONDITIONAL. 

I  Ne  serais-je  pas,  etc 


La  nouveRe,  the  news. 

la  lettre,  the  letter. 

le  chagrin,  the  grief.  ^ 

les  parents,  the  parents.  W^^Vy^^^ 

le  tailleur,  the  tailor. 

ie  bottler,  the  boot-maker. 

la  cerise^  the  cherry. 


VOCABULARY. 

tres,  very,  du  tout,  at  aU. 
pauvre,  poor. 
m^content,  discontented. 
tfiang€,  eaten. 
autrefois,  formerly. 
longtemps,  long,  a  long  time 
ros,  plural  of  txrfrc,  your. 


THEME  11. 

1.  I  havo  a  friend.  2.  Hast  thou  also  a  friend  ?  3.  We  havo 
friands.  4.  Have  you  also  friends?  5.  I  am  happy.  6.  lam 
not  happy.  7.  Are  you  happy?  8.  Are  you  not  happy?  9. 
No,  we  are  not  happy  ;  wo  are  poor.^  10.  Formerly  we  were  very 
happy.  11.  You  are  not  rieh.^  12.  Thou  hast  been  poor.  13. 
8he  has  been  rich.  14.  Have  you  had  any  chenies?  15.  You 
have  been  idle.  16.  Hast  thou  been  ill  ?  No,  I  have  not  been 
ill  at  all.  17.  Thay  have  not  received  the  letter.  18.  Were  you 
(have  you  been)  at  {chez)  the  tailor's  ?  19.  I  have  not  been 
at  the  tailor's.     20.  I  have  been  at  the  boot-maker's;  but  (mais) 


ThGs^e  adjectives  take  s  in  the  plural  (pauvres—Hches). 


NEGATI0K9. 


61 


he  was  not  at  borne  (a  la  maison) .  21.  How  many  horses  had 
you?  22.  I  had  two  horses.  23.  Chaiios  would  not  have  been 
ill,  if  he  had  not  eaten  too  much  (trop).  24.  Be  contented.  25. 
Take  care  of  your  books.    , 


CONVERSATION. 


Quand  (when)  avez-vous  6i^ 

au  spectacle  (theatre)  ? 
Charles,  scras-tu  content  ? 
Avez-vous  un  ami  ? 
Avez-vous  re9u  une  lettre  ? 
Oil  ^tait  ton  ami  Louis? 
Vos  parents  sont-ils  riches  ? 
Oil  avez-vous  dt6  hicr? 
Oil  serez-vous  deinain  ? 
Ta  soDur  a-t-cllo  ^i^  malade  ? 
Avez-vous  dcs  affaires  (business)^ 

N'etes-vous  pas  contents  ? 

Pourquoi  (why)  etcs-vous  m^- 

contents  ? 
Pourquoi  avez-vous  du  chagrin  ? 
Berai»-tu   content,    si    tu  avais 

beaucoup  do  livrcs  ? 


Nous  avons  Hi  bier  au  spectacle. 

Qui,  M — ,  jo  serai  content. 

Nous  avons  beaucoup  d'amis. 

J'ai  rc9u  une  lettre  de  Paris. 

D  ^tait  ^  Berlin. 

Non,  M — ,  ils  sent  pauvres. 

Nous  avons  ^t^  h  I'c^glise. 

Nous  serons  a  I'ecole. 

Oui,  ello  a  6te  longtcmps  malado. 

Oui,  M — ,  nous  avons  beaucoup 

d'affaires. 
Non,  M — ,  nous  sommes  m^con- 

tcnts. 
Nous  avons  cu  une  triste  (sad) 

nouvcllc. 
Notre  mere  est  tres -malade. 
Oui,  M — ,  je  serais  bien  oontonfc. 


•bN 


Zn.      DOUZI&ME  LEgON. 

XII.    DOUZIEMB    LEgON 


DEMONSTRATIVE  AND  INTERROGATIVE  ADJEC- 
TIVES. 

Adjectives  in  French  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  nouns  they 
limit ;  — form  the  plural  according  to  the  rules  given  for  nouns  (L.  ii.) ;  — 
form  the  feminine  by  adding  c  mute  to  the  masculine.  K  the  masculine 
ends  in  c,  the  feminine  is  the  same.  Irregular  formations  will  be  given  in 
the  vocabularies  until  the  full  rules  are  given,  L.  xvn. 

1.   The  Demonstrative  Adjectives  are  :  — 

Ce^  fem.  cefte,  this,  that ;  plur.  ces,  these,  those. 
Ce — ciy  fem.  cette — a,  this  (here) ;  plur.  ces — ex. 
Ce  —  /a,  fem.  cetU  —  la,  that;  plur.  ces  —  la,  those. 

*  2.  As  ce  means  either  this  or  «Aa^ ;  whenever  in  English  the 
words  this,  that,  these,  those  are  emphatic,  either  ci  (abbreviated  form 
of  id,  here)  or  la  (there)  are  appended  to  the  noun.     Ex. :  — 

Ce  chapeau,  this  hat.  ces  hommes,  these  men. 

cette  ville,  this  town.  ce  meme  livre,  this  same  book. 

Ce  gargon-ci,  this  boy  (here).  cegargon-la,  that  boy. 

cette  femme-ci,  this  woman  (here).  cette  feinme-la,  that  woman. 

ceihrhres-ci,  these  trees.  ces  arbres-ia,  those  trees. 

3.  Before  a  masculine  noun  which  begins  with  a  vowel  or  h  muto. 
oet  is  used  instead  ce.     Ex. ;  — 

Cet  arhre,  this  tree  (instead  of  c«  arhre.) 

Cet  habit,  this  or  that  coat  (instead  of  ce  habit). 

4.  The  Interrogative   Adjective  is,  in  the  singular,  qicel,  fem, 
quelle;  plur.  queU,  quelles,  which  or  what?     Ex.;  — 

Quel  livre,  which  book  1  plur.  quels  livres,  which  or  what  booka  I 
Quelle  Jieur,  which  or  what  flower  1 
It  answers  also  to  the  exclamative  what  a  —  /    Ex. :  — 

Quel  beau  tableau  I  what  a  beautiful  picture  I 


DEM0N8TRATIVB  ADJECTIVES,                             63 

VOCABTJLART. 

Zfl  plante,  the  plant.  I'f^nf,  m.  the  egg. 

le  champ,  the  lield.  haut,  f.  haute,  high. 

la  cuuleitr,  the  color.  beau,  f.  heJle,  beautiful. 

lajilie,  the  jcirl.  jrran^,  f.  ffrande,  large,  great. 

2e  /xbm/",  the  ox.  bon,  f.  hanne,  good. 

/a  iKirJir.,  the  cow.  trop,  too.     mais,  but. 

I'ketire,  f.  the  houT.  eonnaissez-vous,  do  you  know  1  -t  i  c 


^  ro6e,  the  dress. 


READING  EXERCISE  12. 

Ceverre.  Cette  poimne-ci.  Cethomme.  Cesbas.  Ceshottes- 
]k.  Cette  boite  est  haute.  Ces  enfants  sont  pauvres.  Le  fr^re  da 
ce  gar9on.  Deux  livres  de  co  cafe.  Je  donne  ces  poires  h  cette 
fille-ci.  La  meme  couleur.  Nous  avons  achet6  Ics  inemes  pluraes. 
J'ai  vu  ces  chiens-li.  Quels  chiens  avez-vous  vus  ?  Quel  beau 
cheval  I  Quelle  belle  maison  I  Le  fils  de  cet  homrae-lk  est  tr^a 
grand.  Quelle  heure  est-il  ?  II  est  trois  beuros  (o'cfoc^).  Best 
une  heure. 

THEME  12. 

1.  This  king  is  rich.  2,  This  queen  is  also  rich.  3.  This  man 
is  poor.  4.  These  men  are  poor.  5.  That  child  is  not  good  (aa^e). 
6.  That  woman  is  not  contented.  7.  This  troe  is  very  high.  8. 
Those  trees  are  not  very  high.  9.  Whose  (a  qui)  is  tbl>s  pencil? 
10.  Whose  are  these  pens?  11.  The  color  of  that  dress  is  beauti- 
ful {belle).  12.  The  field  of  that  man  is  large.  13.  These  oxen 
are  larger  {plus  grands)  than  those  cows.  14.  I  give  the  bread 
to  this  boy.  15.  I  give  these  flowers  to  those  girls.  16.  The 
parents  of  those  children  are  very  good.  17.  Which  boy?  18. 
Which  apples?  19.  What  a  beautiful  picture  I  20.  The  pleasure 
of  those  girls  was  not  very  great.  21.  What  o'clock  is  it  {transL 
which  hour  is  it?)  22.  It  is  four  o'clock  {traml.  four  hoars).  23. 
We  have  read  {lu)  the  same  books.      / 


64 


Xra.       TREIZEME   LBgON. 


CONVERSATION. 


A  qui  (whose)  est  ce  canif  ? 

A  qui  sont  ces  gants  ? 

Oil  est  la  fille  de  cettc  fcmme? 

0  Jimalssez-vous  cette  flcur  ? 

Connaissez-vous  le  pere  do  ce 
gar9on-la  ? 

Quel  papier  voulez-vous  ? 

Ces  plumes-ci  sont-elles  bonnes  ? 

Cette  ^glise  est-elle  haute  ? 

A  qui  donnez-vous  ces  fleurs  ? 

A  qui  donnez-vous  ces  crayons  ? 

Trouve-t-on  de  Tor  dans  ce 
pays  ? 

Vouloz-vous  (do  you  wish,  lit- 
erally, wish  you)  ces  bas-ci 
ou  ces  gants-la  ? 

Trouvez-vous  ces  couleurs  belles  ? 

Quelle  heure  estril  ? 


H  est  ^  ma  soeur. 

lis  sont  h,  Mademoiselle  Julie. 

Elle  est  au  jardin. 

Cost  une  rose. 

Non  ]M — ,   mais  je    connais  (/ 

know)  sa  mere. 
Donnez-moi  ce  papier-lk. 
Oui,  M — ,  elles  sont  tres-bonnes* 
Oui,  elle  est  tres-haute. 
Je  Ics  donne  h.  cette  fiUe-ci. 
Je  les  donne  h  ce  gar9on-la,. 
Oui,  M — ,   ce  pays-ci   est  riche 

en  or. 
Donnez-moi  ces  gants-lk. 


Oui,  ces  couleurs  sont  tres-belles. 
H  est  quatre  heures. 


XIII.    TREIZIEME    LE9OK 


POSSESSIVE  ADJECTIVES. 

1»  The  Possessive  Adjectives  are  :  — 

mon,  fem.  ma,  plur.  mes,  my, 
ton,      "    ta,      "     tes,  thy. 
son,     "    sa,      "     ses,  his,  her,  its# 
ruotre   "    rwtfe,  "     nos,  our. 
votre,  "     v^re,  "      vos,  your. 
leur,     "    leur,   *'      leurs,  their. 
Bx-  s —  Mon  p^,  ta  m^,  ses  frbres,  notre  ami,  tos  livres,  leurs  parents* 


P0SSE88IVE   ADJECTIVES.  '  65 

2.  The  possessive  adjectives  are  repeated  in  French  before  each 
substantive,  and  agi'ee  with  it  in  gender  and  number :  — 

Monfrere  et  ma  saur,  my  brother  and  sister. 

3.  Mon,  (on,  son,  are  used  instead  of  ma,  ta,  sa,  before  femlmno 
wordi  he  fanning  with  a  vowel  or  h  mute,  in  order  to  avoid  the  hiutus 
which  would  result  from  the  meeting  of  the  two  vowels.     Ex.  :  — 

Mon  amie,  xay  (female)  friend ;  son  ame,  his  soul. 

4.  Son,  sa,  ses,  each  mean  his,  her,  and  its ;  they  agree  in  gen- 
der with  the  following  noun,  as :  — 

Le  pare  aime  sonJUs,  the  father  loves  his  son. 

La  mere  aime  sonfds  et  saJUle,  the  mother  loves  her  son  and  her  daughter. 

6.  In  French,  voire  is,  from  politeness,  often  preceded  by  the 
words :  Monsieur,  Madame,  Mademoiselle ;  plur.  Messieurs,  Mes- 
dames,  Mesdemoiselles,  which  are  not  expressed  in  English,  as,  — 

Monsieur  votre  perc,  your  father. 
Mademoiselle  votre  samr,  your  sister. 
Messieurs  vosfreres,  your  brothers. 

6.  In  expressions  such  as  "  a  friend  of  yours,"  the  possessive  ad- 
jective must  be  used  in  French,  preceded  by  de,  as,  un  de  vos 
amis,  une  de  mes  tantes,  an  aunt  of  mine. 

7.  A  posi^Ajssive  adjective  must  always  precede  a  noun  denoting  a 
degree  of  relationship  when  a  relative  or  friend  is  addressed,  though 
none  is  used  in  English.  Ex.  Bonjour  ma  sceur,  good  morning, 
sister;  adieu,  mon  cousin,  good-by,  cousin.  The  words  papa, 
maman,  and  a  few  terms  of  endearment  are  excepted,  as,  bonjour 
papa,  bonsozr  maman. 

VOCABULARY. 

La  demoiselle,  the  young  lady.  la  yrnnd'mere,  the  grandmother. 

la  tante,  the  aunt.  la  jwrhe,  the  pocket. 

la  canne,  the  cane.  arrive,  e,  arrived. 

la  casffxtette,  the  cap.  parti,  e,  departed,  gone. 

le  ffrand-pere,  the  grandfather,  perdu,  lost. 

viaix,  old.  trouvtf,  found. 
6 


66  Xni.      TREIZIEME  LE^OW. 

BEADING  EXERCISE  13. 

Mon  pere  est  bon.  Ma  mere  est  bonne.  Ton  frere  est  grand. 
Ta  soDur  n'est  pas  grande.  Notre  oncle  a  ete  riche.  Votre  tante 
est  pauvre.  Leiirs  parents  seront  contents.  Mos  cousins  et  me3 
cousines  sont  arrives.  Les  peres  airaent  (love)  leurs  enfants.  No- 
tre grand 'mere  a  perdu  sa  bourse.  J'ai  trouve  la  bourse  do  votro 
grand 'mere.  Mon  araie  est  an'iv^e.  Madame  votre  mere  est-clle 
ici  {here)  ?  Non,  elle  n'est  pas  ici ;  elle  est  h,  Londres.  Mesde- 
moiselles  vos  soeurs  sont  paities. 

'^  THEME  13. 

1.  My  dog  is  old.  2.  Thy  book  is  good.  3.  My  book  and 
(my)  pen.  4.  My  books  and  pens.  6.  Your  garden  is  beautiful. 
6.  Your  flowers  are  beautiful  (heUes).  7.  My  sister  has  lost  her 
watch.  8.  Our  sisters  have  found  their  letters.  9.  These  childi-en 
have  lost  their  father.  10.  These  parents  have  lost  their  children. 
11.  Here  is  (void)  thy  stick.  12.  Your  cousins  (/.)  have  been 
in  our  garden.  13.  My  soul  is  immortal  {immortelle).  14.  We 
have  received  this  letter  from  our  aunt.  15.  Our  uncle's  horse  (the 
horse  of  our  uncle)  is  old.  16.  Where  is  your  father  ?  17.  Where 
is  your  sister?     18.  I  have  found  the  purse  of  your  mother. 

CONVERSATION. 

Oil  est  mon  frere  ?  II  est  all(5  (gone)  au  jardio. 

Oil  est  ton  livre  ?  Le  voila  sur  la  table. 

Qui  a  perdu  sa  casquette  ?  Charles  a  perdu  sa  casquette. 

Qui  a  trouv^  nos  crayons?  Henri  les  (them)  a  trouv^a. 

Que    cherchez-vous    (are  you  Je  cherche  mes  plumes. 

looking /or)  ? 

A  qui  est  cette  canne  ?  Elle  est  h  Monsieur  votre  oncle. 

A  qui  sont  ces  gants  ?  lis  sont   h    Mademoiselle    votre 

soeur. 

Vculez-vous  mes  crayons?  Non,  merci  (thank you). 

Connaissez-vous  mon  amie?  Oui,  je  k  connais  (know  her). 


CARDINAL   NUMBERS. 


67 


Oh  6t3lt  Monsieur  votre  pere  ?      II  ^tait  k  Berlin. 

Oil  as-tn  trouve  ta  bourse?  EUe  etait  daas  ma  poche. 

Qui  est  arriv^  aujourd'bui  ?  La  dlle  do  mon  oncle. 

A^cz-vous^t^  dans  voire  champ?  Non,    Monsieur,  nous  av»ons   4te 

dans  notre  jardin. 
Do  qui  avez-vous  re5U  cette  belle  Cost  un  cadeau  (j)reseni)  de  rai 
canne  ?  grand '  mere. 


XIV.    QUATORZIEME 


LE9ON. 


CARDINAL  NUMBERS. 


1,   The  Cardinal  Numbers  arc  :  — 


Un,  une,  one. 

deux,  two. 

trois,  three. 

quntre,  four. 

aw/,  five. 

nx,  pix. 

aept,  seven. 

hnit,  eight. 

neuf,  nine. 

dix,  ten. 

onzc,  eleven. 

douze,  twelve. 

treize,  thirteen. 

q^ifitnrze,  liurtcen. 

qttinze.,  fifteen. 

seize,  sixteen. 

dix  sept,  seventeen. 

dix-huit,  eighteen. 

diz-nenf,  nineteen. 

vingt,  twenty. 

vinqt  et  un,  twenty- one. 


vincft-denx,  twenty- two. 
vivfjt-trois,  twenty-three. 
vingt-qnaire,  twcnty-fonr. 
tnvgt-cmq,  twenty-five,  etc 
trente,  thirty. 
guarante,  forty. 
cinquante,  fifty. 
Boixante,  sixty. 
toixante-dix,  seventy. 
soixante-onze,  seventy-one. 
9oixante-douze,  seventy-two. 
8oixante-treize,  seventy-three. 
soixa7ite-qu(rtorze,  seventy-four. 
soixantc-qninze,  seventy-five. 
Boixante  sfize,  seven ty-sLx. 
soixante-dix-f-cpt ,  se  vcn ty-se  von, 
soixante-iUx-huit,  seventy-eight. 
8oixante-<lix-nexif,  s*"  -'"•^'^v-nine. 
quatre-viTiffts,  eighty. 
quatre-viTifft-un,  eigiity-one. 
qtiotre-vinfft-deiux,  eighty- two. 


68  XIV.      QUATORZI^MB     LEgON. 

qitatre-vingi-dix,  ninety.  cent  deux,  a  hundred  and  two,  etc* 

quatre-vingt-onze,  ninety-one.  deux  cents,  two  hundred. 

qnatre-vingt-douze,  ninety-two.  trois  cents,  three  hundred,  etc. 

qiiatre-vinfjt-treize,  ninety-three,  etc.  quinze  cents,  fifteen  hundred. 
cent,  a  hundred.  mille,  mil,  a  thousand. 

cent  un,  a  hundred  and  one.  un  million,  a  million. 

Ex.:  Cinq  enfants,  five  children. 

Trente-six  chevaux,  thirty-six  horses. 
Trois  cent  qnatre-vimjt-qiunze  aiines,  395  yards. 
L'an  mil  huit  cent  soixante-cinq,  the  year  1865. 
Et,  and,  must  be  expressed  before  un  after  vinr/t,  trente,  quarante,  cinquante^ 
soixante,  as  :  vingt  et  un,  etc.     Et  is  also  often  used  in  soixante  et  onze. 

2.  The  cardinal  numerals  do  not  admit  of  c]ianf];e  in  their  terrai' 
nations  except  un,  wliich  takes  an  e  in  the  feminine,  and  cent  and 
quatre-vingts.  Cent  takes  an  s  wlien  several  hundreds,  not  followed 
by  another  number,  are  mentioned,  as  :  — 

Trois  cents  francs,  300  francs. 

Sept  ceiits  personnes,  700  persons.— But: 

Sept  cent  vingt  personnes,  720  persons. 

3.  Quatre-vingts  loses  its  5  when  followed  by  another  numeral. 

Ex.:  — 

Quatre-vingts  €coliers,  80  pupils.  —  But: 
Quatre-vingt-deux  aunes,  82  yards. 

4.  Cent  and  mtlle  arc  not  accompanied  by  the  indefinite  article 
as  in  English.     P]x.:  — 

A  hundred  or  a  thousand  pounds,  cent  ou  mille  livres. 

5.  When  one  thousand  is  used  for  dates  it  is  rendered  in  French 
by  mil,  with  one  /  only,  thus  :  — 

L'an  or  en  mil  huit  cent  cinqnante-huit,  in  the  year  1P58. 

6.  The  expression,  *' I  am  20,  30,  40,  etc.,  years  old,"  jannct 
be  rendered  literally,  but  must  be  expressed  thus :,  J^ai  vingt  an»,  — 
ircntc  ans,  etc.  How  old  arc  you  ?  is  translated  thus :  Quel  age 
Qvcz-vo  us?     Ex . :  — 

Quel  age  a  votrefrere,  how  old  is  your  brother  1 
II  a  dix-huit  ans,  he  is  eighteen  years  old 


CARDINAL   NUMBEBS* 


69 


7.    CoDective  numbers  are : 

Une  huitaine,  a  scries  of  cifjht. 
line  dizaine,  a  series  of   ten, 

half  a  score. 
Unc  douzainef  a  dozen. 


Une  vinqtair.e^  a  score. 

Une  centaine,  a  hundred^ 
Un  millier,  a  thousand. 
Un  million^  a  million. 


VOCABULARY. 


Txz  Jille,  the  daughter. 

U  vm.xi,  the  calf.  / 

lecochon,  the  pig,  swine.  /*^  T 

la  brebis,  the  sheep. 

le  iievre,  the  hare. 

le  chevreuil,  the  deer,  the  roe. 

n^,  f.  n<re,  bom. 

la  me,  the  street.  - 

V habitant,  m.  the  inhabitant, 

fdg€y  m.  the  age. 

la  seinaine,  the  week. 

encore,  still,    fcis,  times. 

compte,  contains. 

environ,  about. 


^/pchasse,  hunting, 
lejour,  the  day. 
h.  nnit,  the  night. 
le  mois,  the  month. 
Injievre,  the  fever, 
/'a^i,  ra.  and  I'annee,  f.  the  jeaz* 
Vhcure,  the  hour. 
/a  minute,  the  minute. 
fe  ;>/a/,  the  foot. 
vivait,  lived,     monrut,  died. 
combien,  how  much,  how  many, 
ybwf,  make,     ou,  or. 
vendue,  sold.  &■?<  »^-€,  was  bom 
«r»,  in.    en,  of  them. 


READING  EXERCISE  1*. 

J'ai  trois  fils.  Vous  avez  quatre  fiUos.  Mon  oncle  a  eu  dix  en- 
fants.  11  a  perdu  ciaq  fils  et  deux  filles.  Nous  avons  vu  35  bocufs, 
42  vacbcs,  88  veaux,  ct  76  coebons.  Notre  voisin  a  eu  495 
brelns.  Combien  de  lievres  avcz-vous  tues  (killed)  "I  Nous  avons 
tu^  '23  lievres  et  14  cbevreuils.  Sept  ct  buit  font  quinze.  24  et 
3G  font  GO.  —4  fois  8  font  32.  —7  fois  9  font  03.-21  fois  32 
font  072.  Je  suis  n^  en  1814,  et  mon  frere  en  1818.  Ma  mere 
est  n6e  en  1829.  La  ville  de  Londres  compte  10,000  rues,  GOO 
^glises,  249,500  maisons  et  plus  do  (more  f/tan)  deux  millions 
d'habitants.  Lycurguc  vivait  en  880  avant  Jesus-Christ.  Qu«I 
Ag3  avcz-vous?     J'ai  <juiiizc  ans. 

TUEME  14, 

1.  T  have  bad  tbree  borses  and  five  dogs.  2.  My  cousin  bas  34 
eheep.     3.  My  neighbor  (jn.)  had  30  oxen.     4.  A  week  has  7 


70 


XIV.      QUATORZIEMB  LE9ON. 


days.  5.  30  days  make  a  month.  6.  12  months  or  52  weeks 
make  a  year.  7.  A  year  has  365  days.  8.  I  was  (je  suis)  bom 
m  the  yeai'  {m)  1828.  9.  I  am  35yearoold.  10.  My  sister  was 
born  (f.)  in  the  year  1841;  she  is  17  years  old.  11.  How  much 
is  ifont)  three  times  nine  ?  12.  3  times  9  make  27.  13.6  times 
8  iue  48.  14.  35  anl  42  are  77.  15.  How  much  is  125  and 
261  ?  16.  My  mother  has  had  the  fever  during  6  weeks.  17.  A 
(the)  day  has  24  hours,  an  (the)  hour  60  minutes.  18.  Give 
(to)  Charles  32  florins  and  (to)  Louis  33  florins.  19.  Here  are 
200  pounds  of  sugar. 

CONVERSATION. 

voire  oncle    II  a  encore  trois  fils. 


Combien   de    fils 

a-t-U? 
Combien  d'enfants  a-t-il  eus  ? 
Oil  sent  vos  deux  cousines? 
Quelle    est    la    hauteur    (the 

height)  de  cette  eglise  ? 
Combien  font  5  et  7  ? 
Combien  font  15  et  25? 
Combien  font  20,  35  et  45  ? 
Combien  font  6  fois  8  ? 
Combien  font  12  fois  24? 
Quel  age  avez-vous  ? 
Quel,  age  a  votre  soeur? 
Combien  de   florins   avez-vous 

reijus  de  votre  pere  ? 
Combien  de  jours  a  une  annee  ? 

C)mbien  de  semaines  font  un 

mois  ? 
Combien  de  mois  font  une  an- 

nde? 
Avez-vous     et^    k   la    cl 

hier? 


H  a  eu  sept  enfants. 
Elles  sent  a  I'eglise. 
Elle  a  327  pieds  de  hauteur. 

5  et  7  font  12. 
15  et  25  font  40. 

20  et  35  et  45  font  cent. 

6  fois  8  font  48. 

12  fois  24  font  288... 
J'ai  quatorze  ans. 
Elle  a  18  ans. 
J'ai  re^u  50  florins. 

Une  annee  a  365  jours  et  six 

heures. 
Qaatre  semaines  et  deux  ou  tsoia 

jours  font  un  mois. 
Douze  mois  font  une  ann^e. 


Oui,   Monsieur, 
{cUday). 


toute  la  joum^ 


ORDINAL   NUMBERS. 


71 


Avez-vous    tug  beaucoiip   de     Kous  avons  tiiC  35  lievres. 

li&vres  ? 
Chalks  a-t-il  assez  d'argent  ?      Oh,  oui,  il  a  23  francs. 


XY.    QUINZIEME    LE9ON 


ORDINAL  NUMBERS. 

1.  Except  le  premier  and  le  second,  the  ordinal  numbers  are 
formed  from  the  cardinal  by  changing  e  mute  into  ieme  ;  and  by  add- 
ing this  syllable  to  those  which  end  in  another  letter.  But  n?iq 
takes  u  before  ieme  (cinqvidme),  and  neuf  changes  the  /  into  v 
{neuvieme).     They  are  as  follows  : — 

le  vingtieme,  the  20th. 


the  first. 


Le  premier,  > 

la  premiere,  ) 

le  second,  '\ 

la  neconde,  )-  the  second. 

le,  la  deuxieme,  ) 

le  troisieme,  the  third. 

le  quaXrieme,  the  fourth. 

le  cimjuieiiie,  the  fifth. 

U  sirieme,  the  sixth. 

le  gepti'eiiw.,  the  seventh. 

le  huitiewe,  the  cit;hth. 

le  fieuvieme,  the  ninth. 

le  dixicme,  the  tenth. 

U  onzieme,  the  eleventh. 

le  douzieme,  the  twelfth. 

le  treizieme,  the  thirteenth. 

le  quatorzieme,  the  fourteenth 

le  quinzihne,  the  fifteenth. 

le  seizieme,  the  1 6  th. 

Ic  dix-sepiieme,  the  17  th. 

le  dix-knitieme,  the  1 8th. 

le  dix-neuviesve.  the  19th. 


le  vingtet  unietne,  the  21st. 

le  vingt-deuxieme,  the  22d,  etc 

le  trentieme,  the  30th. 

le  quarantieme,  the  40th. 

le  cinquanti'eme,  the  50tit. 

le  soixantieme,  the  60th. 

le  soiiranfe-dixieme,  the  70th. 

le  soixante.-onzieme,  the  7l8t. 

le  soixante-floxizihnt,  the  7 2d,  etc. 

le.  (fiiatre-rinffti'eme,  the  dOth. 

le  qnatre-vingt-unieme,  the  81  St. 

le  quail  e-vimjt-dixieme,  the  90th. 

le  centieine,  the  100th. 

le  cent  et  unieme,  the  lOlst. 

le  cent  deuxieme,  the  1 02d,  etc 

le  cent  vim/tieme,  the  120th. 

le  deux  centieine,  the  20Cth. 

le  six  cent  soixante-quinzieme,   the 

6  7.5th. 
le  millihne.  the  1000th. 
le  dernier,  the  last. 


72  XV.      QUINZIBMB  LEpOU. 

2.  Unteme  is  used  only  after  rnngt,  trente,  qiiarante,  etc.  ^  oai 
Charles  est  le  vingt  et  unieme  de  sa  classe. 

3.  Lays  of  the  month  (except  le  premier  and  h  dernier)  are 
expressed  by  cardinal  numbers,  as :  — 

The  first  of  April,  le  premier  Avril.  —  But : 

Ihe  2d,  3(1,  4th,  etc.,  of  May,  le  deux,  trois,  qnatre,  etc..  mat  Cor  de  msi)* 

The  eleventh  of  March,  le  onze  (without  apostrophe)  mars. 

The  twentieth  of  June,  le  vingt  juin. 

The  question,  **  What  day  of  the  month  is  it  to-day?  "  is  trans- 
lated :  Qfiel  guantieme  avons-nous  aujourdliui  ?  or,  Quel  jour  dii 
mots  avons-nous  f 

The  English  "on  the  sixth,"  etc.,  is  rendered  in  French,  without  prepo- 
sition, le  six Ex. :  On  the  sixth  of  May,  le  six  mai. 

4.  Proper  names  of  princes,  etc.,  take  in  French  the  cardinal 
numbers  without  the  article,  except  the  first  and  sometimes  the  sec- 
ond, as :  — 

Henri  premier,  Henry  the  first. 
Henri  second  or  deux,  Henry  the  second. 
Henri  quatre,  Henri  the  fourth. 
Louis  quatorze,  Louis  the  fourteenth. 

Note.  The  German  Emperor,  Charles  V.,  bears  In  French  the  name  of  Charles- 
Quint,  and  the  Pope  Sixtus  V.  that  of  Sixte- Quint, 

5.  Numeral  adverbs  are  formed  from  ordinal  numbers  by  adding 
•^ment  or  -ertient  to  the  final :  — 

Premierement,  firstly.  Deuociemement,  secondly.    Troisiemement,  thirdly,  etc. 

6.  Fractional  numbers  are  expressed  by  ordinal  numbers,  as  ia 
English,  but  only  from  five  upwards,  as  :  — 

Un  dnquieme,  a  fifth.  Un  sixieme,  a  sixth. 

Un  huitihne,  an  eighth.  Un  dixieme,  a  tenth. 

The  others  are  as  follows :  — 

Half  (adj.),  dani.  f.  detnie.     The  half,  la  moiti€  (noun). 
A  third,  un  tiers.     A  quarter  or  fourth,  un  quart. 
One  pound  and  a  half,  ur^  livre  et  demie. 


ORDINAL   NUMBEB8.  73 

7.  The  hours  of  the  day  or  night  are  expressed  thus  :  — 

Two  o'clock,  deiix  henres. 

A  quarter  j^ast  two,  detx  heitres  et  (iin)  quart. 

Half  past  two,  deux  henres  et  dcmie. 

A  (juarter  to  three,  trots  /mires  moins  nn  quart- 

At  twelve  o'clock  (at  noon),  a  nidi. 

At  twelve  o'clock  (midnight),  a  mimiit 

8.  Proportional  numbers  which  express  a  quantity   muhiplied, 

ore:  — 

Simple,  simple.  quadruple,  fourfold. 

double,  dou!)le,  twofold.  centuple,  centuple,  a  hundred-fold. 

triple,  triple,  threefold. 

VOCABULARY. 

Janvier,  January.  Dimanche,  Sunday. 

Fcvrier,  February.  Lundi,  Monday. 

Mars,  March.  Mardi,  Tuesday  (and  on  Tuesday). 

Acril,  April.  Mercrcdi,  Wednesday. 

Mai,  May.  Jeudi,  Thursday. 

Jain,  .Juno.  Vendredi,  Friday. 

Jnillet,  July.  Samadi,  Saturday 

Aout,  Aujj^ust.  le  siecle,  the  century. 

Septemhre,  September.  Vinccndie,  m.  a  fire,  conflagration. 

Octoi>re,  October.  la  jHirtie,  the  part,  portion 

Novcinhre,  November.  la  place,  the  place. 

D€cemhre,  December.  la  classe,  the  class. 

en  Janvier,  in  January.  a  present,  ut  present.  • 

nous  viwns,  we  live.  numero,  numlicr  (denoting  order,  as 
nombre,  number.  number  of  a  house,  of  a  rule,  of  a 

page). 

9.  Rule  for  il  and  ce  as  expletive  subjects  op  ctre.  Use  il 
if  the  verb  is  followed:  1.  by  an  adjective  Wmii'ing  something  which 
coraes  after  it  in  the  sentence  ;  2.  by  temps  or  by  the  hour  of  the 
day.  In  all  other  cases  use  ce.  Ex.  Faites  cela,  c'est  facile,  do 
that,  it  is  easy.  But,  II  est  facile  de  faire  cela,  it  is  easy  to  do 
that.  II  est  temps  de  Ic  faire,  it  is  time  to  do  it.  //  est  six  heurcs, 
it  is  six  o'clock.     C'est  voits,  ce  n' est  pas  moi,  it  is  you,  it  is  liofc  t. 


71  XV.      QUINZI^ME  LEgON. 

READING  EXERCISE  16. 

Je  suis  dans  ma  soixante-douzieme  annee.  Charles  ^sst  le  pre- 
mier de  sa  classe.  Louis  est  le  neuvieme,  Henri  le  dix-huitieme  et 
Jules  le  dernier.  Le  pape  (  pope)  Grdgoire  VII  4tait  I'ennemi  de 
Henri  IV.  Nuns  vivons  dans  le  dix-neuvieme  siecle.  Romulus 
hit  le  premier,  Numa  Pompilius  le  second  roi  de  Rome.  Pierre 
premier  fut  sumomme  {was  surnamed)  le  grand.  Avril  est  le 
qiiatrieme,  Juin  le  sixieme  et  Decembre  le  dernier  mois  (k  I'annee. 
La  semaine  est  la  cinquante-deuxieme  partie  de  I'annee.  Ma  soeur 
Elisabeth  est  nt^e  le  vingtrhuit  juillet,  mil  huit  cent  trente-cinq. 
J'ai  re9u  trois  Uvres  et  demie  de  cafe  et  cmq  livres  et  un  quart  de 
Bucre.  Charles  XEL  etait  roi  de  Suede.  Le  27  (de)  septembre 
1829,  un  inccndie  detruisit  {destroyed)  k  Constantinople  11,000 
maisons;  700  personnes  perirent  {perished)  dans  les  flammes. 

THEME  15. 

1.  A  month  is  the  twelfth  part  of  a  year.  2.  What  day  of  the 
month  is  it  to-day?  3.  It  is  the  24th  [of]  June.  4.  I  am  the 
third,  my  cousin  John  the  seventh.  5.  January  is  the  first,  Febru- 
ary the  second,  March  the  third  month  of  the  year.  6.  Napoleon 
died  at  St.  Helena  {Sainte-Helene)  the  5th  of  Blay,  18217  7.  My 
grandmother  is  at  present  in  her  78th  year.  8.  What  o'clock 
{quelle  heure)  is  it  now  ?  It  is  four  o'clock,  or  half  past  four. 
9.  Louis  the  Sixteenth,  king  of  {de)  France,  was  beheaded  (fut  di' 
capite)  at  Paris  the  21st  of  January,  1793.  10.  Frederick  the 
Second  was  king  of  Prussia,  ir  11.  Peter  the  Great  of  Russia  died  at 
St.  Petersburgh  {St.  Petershodrg)  the  8th  of  February,  1725,  in 
the  53d  year  of  his  age.*  12.  We  have  received  6}  pounds  of  ccf 
fee,  11  pounds  of  sugar,  and  2  J  pounds  of  tea. 

CONVERSATION. 

Qnand  etes-vous  arrive  ?  Je  suis  arriv^  le  premier  jam. 

Quand  avez-vous  vu  votre  mere  ?   Hier  k  cinq  heures. 
Mademoiselle  Sophie  est-elle  la   Je  crois  (/  think)  qu'elle  est  la 
premiere  ou  la  deuxieme  ?  deuxieme. 

*  Tranalate,  in  his  53d  year. 


INDEFINITfi   ADJECTIVES. 


75 


Quel  age  a-t-elle  ? 

Dans  quelle  ann^e  est-elle  n^e  ? 

Dans  quel  niois? 

Quel  jour  ? 

De  quel  roi  parlez-vous  ? 

Quand  raourut-il  ? 

Quelle  heure  est-il  ? 

A  quelle  heure  etcs-vous  parti  ? 

Quel  quanti^me  avons-nous  au- 

jourd'hui? 
Corabien  d'aunes  vouloz-vous? 
Quand  mourut  Charlemagne  ? 
Quel  age  a  votre  grand-pere  ? 


Elle  a  quinze  ans. 

Elle  est  n^e  en  1851. 

Au  raois  d'Octobre. 

Le  onze. 

Nous  parlons  de  Louis  XVI. 

En  1793. 

H  est  sept  heures  et  (un)  quart  oa 

sept  heures  et  deraie 
Je  suis  parti  a  huit  heures  moinB 

un  quart. 
(  Nous  avons  ie  vingt-cinq. 
)  C'est  le  vingt-cinq. 
Donnez-raoi  seize  aunes  et  demie 
D  mourut  en  814,  le  28  Janvier. 
D  est  h  present  dans  sa  quatre 

vingtieme  ann^e. 


XVI.    SEIZIEME    LE9ON 


^0^^^  y^ 


Cw» 


INDEFINITE  ADJECTIVES. 

1.  The  Indefinite  adjectives  precede  the  noun  to  which  they  !»• 
loDg,  and  agree  with  it  in  number  and  gender.  They  are  sometiaaaa 
used  pronominally  without  a  no^n.     They  are  as  follows :  — 

Chaque,  m.  and  f.  >  quelques,  pi.  Bome. 

totit,  f.  toute,  >  every,  aU.^  certain,  e,  a  certain. 

aucun,  e,     )  ^^^  ^^^^  ^^  plusieurs,  pi.  m.  and  f.  several 

nul,  nvUe,    )  '  divers y  f.  -€«,  )    i  ^'^ 

itiaint,  e,  many  a.  diff&enU,  f.  -te»,    >  ™' 

gwc^,  some,  any.  7 JK»r|Js)U  A    " 


dififerenL 


76  XVI.      SEIZURE   LEgON. 

Ex.  Chaque  mnrson,  every  house.  quelqves  pommes,  some  apples.   ' 

toute  ville,  every  tOAvn.  plusieurs  ecoliers,  several  pupils. 

auciin  pays,  no  (country.  certains  mots,  certain  words, 

miUe  rer/le,  no  rule.  diff€n-ntrs  hitreprises,  different  en- 
ma/";)/  liommti,  mnny  a  man.  terprisea. 
qvelque  argent,  sonic  money. 

2.  Tout  has  the  double  mcr/ning  of  every  and  all  or  whole  ;  in 
tlic  latter  case  it  is  accompanied  by  an  article  or  a  possessive  adjec- 
tive, loide  ville  (without  article)  signifies  ever?/  town  ;  touts  la 
ville  means  all  the  town  or  the  whole  town.  The  plural  of  tout  is 
masc.  tous,  fem.  toutes.  Ex.  :  Tous  les  kommes,  all  men ;  touted 
Us  lettres,  all  the  letters ;   Tous  ses  enfants,  all  his  children. 

3.  Aucun  and  nul  can  only  be  used  of  individual  things,  and  an- 
swer to  the  English  not  one.  Thej  require  the  particle  ne  to  bo 
prefixed  to  the  verb.  (In  most  cases  the  English  no  is  translated 
point  de  ov.pas  de.)     Ex.  :  — 

Je  n'ai  aiicnne  faxite,  I  have  not  one  mistake. 

Je  n'ai  pas  de  (or  point  de)faute,  I  liavc  no  mistake. 

4.  Quelconque,  whatever,  takes  its  place  after  the  noun.  Ex. 
Un  livre  quelconque,  a  (any)  book  whatever. 

VOCABULARY. 

L'^pijie,  f.  the  thorn.  mortel,  -le,  mortal. 

la  chose,  the  thing.  la  few  me,  the  woman. 

le  temps,  time,  weather.  le  motif,  the  motive. 

la  nouvdk,  the  news.  Vennemi,  m.  the  enemy. 

le  nom,  the  name.  rare,  rare. 

h  ftaysan,  the  peasant.  froid,  e,  cold. 

prStez,  lend.  le  vieme,  the  same. 

Ufaute,  tho  fatdt,  uptake.  depuis,  since. 

Verreur,  f.  the  error.  aime,  loves. 

A3  va-dcn,  the  translation.  quelque  chose,  something. 

READING  EXERCISE   16. 

Nallti  rose  n'ost  sans  opines.  Notre  maitrc  de  rausique  donno 
chaqie  jour  -i^  Iccoiis.  Plusieurs  pcrsonncs  sent  arrivees  de  Vien- 
re.  D'lvv.  est  le  p-'jre  de  tous  les  homines.  Chaque  age  a  ses  plai- 
sirs  et  ses  cliagrins.  Tous  les  hommes  sont  mortels.  Tout  ce  payg 
est  pauvre.     Toute  chose  a  son  temps.     Je  n'ai  aucune  nouvelle  do 


INDEFiNITE   ADJECTIVES.  77 

mon  fr^re.  Je  connais  quelques  families  riches  dans  cette  villo. 
Nous  avons  ret;u  aujourd'hui  diverses  lettres.  Plusieurs  bomnies 
'jnr  le  meuifi  nom.  Maint  paysan  est  tres-pauvre.  On  a  pari^ 
{spoken)  de  differentcs  entrepiises.     Pretez-nioi  quclques  livrcs. 

THEME  16. 

1  Every  child  lilies  playing  {Ic  jeu).  2.  Each  town  has  a 
oh'irch.  3.  You  have  several  faults  in  your  translation.  4.  Every 
man  is  liable  {sujet)  to  eiTor.  5.  My  brother  has  found  some  pen- 
cils, whose  (a  qui)  are  they?  G.  The  whole  house  was  cold 
{froide).  7.  All  the  houses  of  this  town  are  very  high  (Jiautes). 
8.  I  do  not  know  the  names  of  all  animals.  9.  John  has  lost  sev- 
eral pens.  10.  The  king  had  different  motives.  11.  This  father 
has  lost  all  his  children.  12.  No  rule  without  exception  (excep- 
tion). 13.  Certain  books  are  not  good  for  young  people  (Ja  jeun- 
esse).  14.  I  have  not  one  enemy.  15.  Every  mother  loves  her 
children.  16.  All  the  children  love  (aiment)  their  parents.  17. 
It  is  rare  to  (cT)  have  several  good  friends.  ^ 

CONVERSATION. 

Ai-je  des  fautes  dans  ma  ver-  Oui,  mon  ami,  vous  avez  plusieurs 

sion  ?  fautes. 

Quelles  sent  les  fautes  ?  Les  voici. 

Qui  a  dit  cela  {said  so)  ?  Tous  les  enfants  Tout  dit. 

Oil  trouve-t-on  cette  plante?  On  la  (^it)  trouve  dans  tous  leg 

pays  de  1' Europe. 

A  qui  sont  ccs  malsons?  Toutes  ces  maisons  sent  k  monon- 

cle. 

Quels  motifs  avez- vous  eus?  Nous  avons  eu  divers  motifs. 

As-tu  bcaucoup  de  Giutcs  ?  Non,  IM  — ,  jc  n'ai  aucune  fante« 

Qui  est  mortel  'I  Tous  les  homnies  sont  mortels. 

A-t-elle  trouve  quelque  chose?  Oui,  elle  a  trouv^  unc  bourse. 

Ou   avc^vous   ete  la  semaino  J'ai   ^t^   dans  plusieurs  ondioits 

demiere?  {places). 

A  quoi  {to  what)  lea  hommes  Es  sont  sujets  ^  rerreur. 

eoDtrils  sujeta  ? 


XVII.      DIX-SEPTIEME   LEQON. 


XVII.    DIX-SEPTIEME    LE9ON 


ADJECTIVES.— FORMATION  OF  THE  FEMININE 
AND   OF  THE  PLURAL. 

1.    General  rule.      The  feminine  of  adjectives  is  formed  by 
adding  an  e  to  the  masculine  termination,  if  this  does  not  end  in  e 
mute.     Ex. :  Petit,  small,  little,  fern,  "petite ;  jolij  pretty,  fern 
Jolie ;  applique,  diligent,  appliquee, 

2. .  Particular  rules.  Adjectives  which  end  in  e  mute  are 
alike  in  the  masculine  and  feminine  gender :  facile,  easy,  fem.  for 
die  ;  sage,  wise,  fem.  sage, 

3.  Adjectives  ending  in  el,  eil,  andn,  —  further,  monosyllableg 
ending  in  s  and  t,  double  their  final  consonant  before  e  mute  of  the 
feminine,  as:  Cruel,  cruel,  fem.  cruelly  ;  par  eil,  like,  such,  fem.  pa- 
reiUe  ;  bon,  good,  fem.  bonne ;  gros,  big,  fem.  grosse ;  ba^,  low, 
fem.  basse ;  sot,  stupid,  fem.  sotte. 

4.  Adjectives  which  end  in  f  becosie  feminine  by  changing  f 
into  ve,  as :  vif  quick,  lively,  f.  vive  ;  neuf,  new,  f.  neui^e  ;  actif^ 
active,  f.  active;  bref,  short,  f.  breve. 

5.  Adjectives  ending  in  x,  change  this  x  into  se,  as :  Heurtntx^ 
happy,  lucky,  f.  heureuse ;  jaloux,  jealous,  f.  jalouse. 

6.  Adjectives  which  end  in  er  and  et,  take  in  the  feminine  the 
grave  accent,  as  :  Leger,  light,  f.  legere  ;  complet,  complete,  f.  com' 
plete.  Those  in  gu  have  guii  in  the  fem.  to  preserve  the  sound  of  u 
(gee  p.  17,  Excep.),  as:  aigu,  acute,  f.  aigu'e. 

7 .  Of  the  adjectives  entling  in  c,  three  change  this  c  into  che^ 
viz  :  Blanc,  white,  f.  blanche  ;  franc,  frank,  f.  franche  ;  sec,  dry, 
f.  ssche. 

The  others  ending  in  c  take  -que,  as :  Turc,  Turkish,  f.  turque  ; 
public,  public,  f.  publique  ;   Grec,  Greek,  has  in  the  fem.  grecque* 


ADJECTIVES.  79 

8.  The  following  adjectives  do  not  quite  agree  with  the  foregomg 
rules:  — 

Long^  long,  f.  longue.  expris,  express,  f.  exprftsse, 

*  Jrais,  fresh,  f.  Jraiche.  muet,  dumb,  mute,  f.  muette» 

€pais,  thick,  f.  €paisse.  «M/^>  subject,  f.  sujette. 

doux,  sweet,  soft,  f.  doxice,  malin,  wicked,  f.  maligne, 

faux,  false,  f.fausse.  h€nin,  benign,  f.  b€nigne. 

9.  The  following  are  more  irregular  in  the  formation  of  their  fem- 
inine, as :  — 

Beau  (hd),  beautifal,  f.  belle, 
nouveau  (nouvel),  new,  f.  rumveUe^ 
mou  (mol),  soft,  f.  molle. 
fou  (fol)y  mad,  foolish,  i.fodt, 
vieux  (vieil),  old,  f.  vieille. 

Note.  The  forms  in  parentheses,  bel,  noiivd,  etc.,  are  used  before  mascu- 
line nouns  beginning  with  a  vowtl  or  h  mute,  as:  unbel arbre,  &  fine  tree; 
un  nouvel  ordre,  a  new  order;  un/ol  espoir,  a  mad,  wild  hope. 

1^      10.   The  rules  given  for  the  plural  of  substantives  apply  also  to 
A  adjectives.     Ex. :  — 

1  Grand,  f.  graitde;  plur.  grands,  f.  grandes. 

J  appliqu€,  f.  appUqu€e ;  plur.  ajypUqu^s,  f.  appliqu^et. 

H^  gras,  f.  grasse,  fat ;  plur.  gras,  f.  grasses. 

1  roya/,  f.  royale,  royal ;  plur.  royaux,  f.  royalea. 

beau,  f.  belle,  beautiful ;  plur.  beaux,  f.  bdles. 
vieux,  f.  vieille,  old ,  plur.  vieux,  f.  vieiUes. 
Fou,  mou,  and  bleu  make  in  the  plural  fous,  mous,  and  bleu$. 

11.  The  adjective  must  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  dia 
Bobstantive  which  it  qualifies,  as :  — 

La  grande  maison,  the  large  house. 

La  maison  est  grande,  the  house  is  large. 

La  jdie  rose,  the  pretty  rose. 

Ces  roses  sont  tres-jolics,  these  roses  are  very  pretty. 

The  a4Jectivo  is  more  frequently  used  substantiyely  in  French  than  in 
Elnglish.    £x.  Le  paresset^  the  lazy  (one). 


80  XVn.      DIX-SEPTIEME    LE^ON. 

VOCABULARY. 

La  m^rlecine,  the  medicine.  agrf^able,  agreeable."' 

Viioire,  m.  ivory.  amer,amere,  hitter, 

la  violette,  the  violet.  v.ur,  e,  ripe. 

la  montngne,  the  mountain.  aimable,  amiable. 

ia  ltbert(f,  lil^crty.  immortel,  -le,  immortaL 

la  robe,  the  dress,  gown.  cher,  chere,  dear. 

Vherbe  f.  the  grass.  6b€issani,  e,  obedient. 

wui,  e  true.  .-,       precieuz,  -se,  precious.  • 

la  voix,  the  voice.  //^  corps,  m.  body. 

utile,  useful.  p  \  oie,  f.  goose.                 j  r^J^- 

KEADi:t;G  EXERCISE  17. 

Get  arbre  est  trcs-gros.  Void  deux  gros  arbres.  La  m^deeino 
n'etait  pas  bonne ;  elle  dtait  tres-aniere.  Nos  cnfants  sont  heurcux. 
Vos  fillcs  ne  sont  pas  hcureuscs;  elles  sont  tres-malheureuses. 
Vous  sericz  aimable,  si  {if)  vous  etiez  appliquee.  Voici  une  tres- 
jolie  maison,  elle  est  encore  neuve.  Cette  eglise  est  vicille.  Vos 
chcvaux  sont  vieux.  Les  chateaux  royaux  sont  tres-beaux.  Los 
dents  longues  et  blanches  de  I'elephant  fournisscnt  {furnish) 
I'ivoire.  La  fille  de  notre  voisin  est  muctte.  lis  ne  sont  paa 
obcissants.     J'avais  une  oie  qui  {which)  etait  grosse  et  grasse. 

THEME  17. 

1.  Tbe  rose  is  pretty ;  the  violets  are  also  pretty.  2.  My  room 
is  small ;  your  house  is  large.  3.  This  news  is  not  true.  4.  My 
father  is  good ;  my  motlicr  is  also  good.  5.  These  geese  are  big 
and  fat.  6.  What  beautiful  houses  !  7.  Henry's  books  are  useful 
n-nd  agreeable.  8.  Your  windows  are  very  small  and  low.  9.  My 
brly  is  mortal  but  my  soul  is  immortal.  10.  Our  town  is  very  eld. 
11.  Ilcr  sister  is  not  handsome.  12.  This  house  is  well  situated 
(^bien  situee).  13.  Tliis  apple  is  not  ripe,  but  these  pears  are  too 
{trop)  lipe.  14.  Is  this  butter  fresh  ?  15.  The  grass  is  vei-y  thick. 
}Jj.  Ivory  is  white  ;  my  teeth  are  not  so  {si)  white.  17.  Her  voice 
h  very  sweet.  18.  I  have  received  a  long  letter  from  my  father. 
19.  What  a  foolish  (§  9,  Note)  hope  !    20.  That  medicine  was  very 


81 


bitter.  21.  Louisa's  dress  is  beautiful,  but  ber  bonnet  is  not  very 
beautiful  ^.  My  shoes  are  very  old.  23.  The  leaf  is  dry.  24. 
My  mother  is  happy ;  my  sisters  are  also  happy.  25.  Your  letter 
was  too  short.     26.  That  girl  is  very  foolish  and  idle. 

CONVERSAnON. 

L'&me  de  I'homme  cst-elle  mor-    Non,  elle  est  immortelle. 

telle  V 
Qui  est  malade  chez  vous  ? 
Prend-cUe  {does  she  take)  do  la 

m^deeine  ? 
Qui  est  arriv($  ? 
A-t-il  apporte  quclque  chose  ? 


Etes-vous  heureux  ? 

Comment  trouvez-vous  (how  do 

you  like)  cette  rose  ? 
Votre  robe  est-elle  vieille  ou 

neuve  ? 
Notre  version  estrelle  longue  ? 
CommgHftMuvez-vous  ces  deux 

^fierii? 
Sont-ils  ob^sjsants? 


C'est  ma  tante  qui  est  malado. 
Oui,  M — ,  elle  prend  uno  m^de- 

cino  tres-am^re. 
Mon  oncle  Richard. 
II  a  apporte  un  bel  oiseau,   un 

perroquet  (parrot). 
Oh !  non»  nous  sommes  malheu- 

reux! 
Jo  la  trouve  tres-bolle. 

Elle  n*est  pas  vieille;    elle  est 

toute  neuve. 
Non,  elle  n'est  pas  bien  longue. 
Us  sont  tres-paresseux. 


Non,  M — ,  ils  ne  sont  pas  ob^is- 
sants. 
A vez'vous  perdu  quelque  chose  ?    Oui,   Monsieur,  j*ai    perdu  ma* 

vieilie  easquctte  (cap)* 


^ 


\ 


82  XVm.      DIX-HUITIEME   LE^ON. 

XVIII.    DIX-HUITIEME    LE9ON. 


THE  PLACE  OF  AI)JECT:IVES. 

1.  Genekal  rule.      Adjectives   GENERAiltii^  follow   THjnB 
NOUNS.  '    , 

2.  Particular  rules. 


substantive : 

.    iwiiuniii^     Kcuciaijy    ^i  ^\, 

Beau,  fine. 
bon,  good. 
grand,  great,  large. 
gros,  big. 
jeune,  young. 
mauvais,  l^^d. 

m€ckant,  wicked.  "^ 

meilleur,  better.    — 

moindre,  less,  least* 

petit,  little. 

saint  holy. 

vimr,  old.    rroi,  true. 

Ex. :  —  Un  beau  pays,  a  fine  country. 

Une  gramle  ville,  a  large  town  or  city. 
t^n  jmne  lion,  a  young  lion. 
Un  mauvais  lit,  a  had  bed. 
Un  meilleur  avis,  a  better  advice. 
Un  vieux  soldat,  an  old  soldier,  etc. 
Note.     Grand  is  placed  after  its  noun,  when  it  signifies  tall :  un  hommt 
gnmd,  a  tall  man. 

N.  B.  It  is  to  be  observed,  that  substantives  preceded  by  an  adjective, 
when  used  in  the  partitive  sense,  take  only  de  before  them,  instead  of  du,  de, 
h,,  or  des.  (See  L.  v.,  4.)  Ex. :  De  bon  vin,  (some)  good  wine;  de  belles 
Jleurs,  beautiful  flowers. 

Note.  Exceptions  to  this  rule  are:  du  bon  sens,  good  sense;  des  jeunea 
gms,  young  men ;  des  petitspois,  green  peas ;  and  other  expressions  in  whic!^' 
the  noun  and  adjective  form  really  but  one  compound  word.   A^M    V  r 

8.  Monosyllabic  adjectives,  except  those  denoting  some  physical 
property  (color,  taste,  form,  eUi.),  precede  the  noun.  Ex.:  Uh 
long  discours,  un  fol  amour. 

4.  Adjectives  qualifying  a  noun  followed  by  a  limiting  phrase  or 
clause,  precede  th-?  noun.  Ex. :  LHmmortel  auteur  du  Paradis 
jm-da 


THE   PLACE   OP   ADJECTIVES.  83 

f5.  Many  adjectives,  when  taken  in  their  literal  sense,  follow, 
when  taken  figuratively,  prejede  the  substantive,  as  :  — 

FIGURATIVELY.  LITERALLY. 

Une  tendre  amili^,  a   tender  friend-    De  la  vinnde  tendre,  tender  meat. 

ship. 
mofi  pauvre  en/ant,  my  poor  chjld.        un  enfant  pauvre,  a  poor  (indigent) 

child. 
un  prqfond  sHencA,  a  deep  silence.         un  foss^  profond,  a  deep  ditch. 

6  Many  adjectives  take  their  place  sometimes  before,  sometimes 
after  the  noun,  without  changing  their  signification,  simply  for  the 
sake  of  euphony  or  stress.  This  is  mostly  to  be  seen  when  the  ad- 
jective is  preceded  by  the  definite  article  or  by  ce,  cette.  ■  We  say, 
for  instance :  une  verite  affreuse,  a  frightful  truth,  but,  Maffreuse  Oit 
telle  affreu9e  verite: 

Uinjlexihle  duret€  des  riches. 

The  inflexible  hardness  of  the  rich. 

Cett.e  affligeante  nouvelle  se  r^paiuiit  dans  la  viUe. 

This  afflicting  news  spread  (soon)  in  the  town. 

7.  Some  adjectives  have  a  different  meaning,  according  as  they 
stand  before  or  after  their  noun  :  — 

Mon  cher  ami,  my  dear  friend  (de-     Un  Hvre  cher,  a  dear  book  (denoting 

noting  affection).  the  price). 

un  brave  homme,  a  worthy  man.  un  homme  brave,  a  brave  (eourageous) 

man. 
iM  honnite  homme,  an  honest  man.        un  fiomme  honnete,  a  civil  or  polite 

man. 
2a/<iem^e  ann^e,  the  last  year  (of  a    Vann^  demiere,  last  year  (the  past 
certHin  space  of  time).*  year). 

VOCABULARY. 

Le  soldat,  the  soldier.  am^ricain,  e,  American. 

les  gens,  people.  simple,  simple. 

attentif,  -ve,  attentive.  modeste,  modest. 

vert,  e,  green.  vertueux,  -se,  virtuous. 

bltu,  e,  blue,    j  laborieux,  -se,  laborious 

>    Vorfnatieaux:  He  npeot  the  last  year  of  his  life  at  Paris,  Q passu  la  derniert 
antcU  de  sa  vte  a  Paris, 


84  rvm.    dix-huiti^mb  LEgoN. 

aveuffh,  blind.  naturd,  -le,  natural. 

la  n.usiiue,  the  music.  le  sentiment,  the  sentiment. 

noir,  e,  black,  rond,  round.  la  fum^c,  the  smoke. 

romain,  e,  Roman.  incroyable,  incredible. 

I'arm^e,  f.  the  army.  V application,  f.  the  applliitlon 

le  malheur,  misfortune.  d^'a,  already. 

le  vaisseau,  the  vessel.  nuisihle,  hurtful. 
Note.    Adjectives  denoting  nationality  are  not  written  with  a  capital 
Ex.:  Lalanguefrangaise. 

READING  EXERCISE  18. 

J'ai  des' raisins  doux.  Ce  sont  des  jeunes  gens  attentifs.  La 
co4Mflk|^t6  est  la  couleur  de  la  nature.  Notre  voisin  a  un  habit 
bleiUHme  casqucttc  rouge.  Voici  une  jeune  fille  avcugle.  Vou- 
loz-^ous  cette  petite  boite?  Elle  a  re9u  une  lettre  amusante  do 
sa  vieille  (oW)  cousine.  Avez-vous  de  bonne  encre?  J'aime  la 
musi(jue  italienne.  Voici  deux  aunes  do  drap  vert  et  quatre  aunea 
de  drap  noir.  Les  soldats  remains  etaicnt  trcs-braves.  Un  ^t^  sec 
est  tres-nuisible  aux  plantes.  Mon  maitre  de  musique  est  un  brave 
homme.  Voici  de  grands  vaisseaux  americains.  Les  colibris 
(humming  birds)  sont  de  beaux  petits  oiseaux.  J'aime  les  jeunes 
fiUes  deuces,  simples  ct  modestes. 

THEME  18. 

1.  France  is  a  fine  country.  2.  We  bave  a  large  bouse. 
3.  Henry  has  a  bad  pen.  4.  My  aunt  is  a  virtuous  woman.  6.  She 
is  al;5o  very  active  and  laborious.  6.  Frank  is  an  attentive  boy. 
7.  Miss  B.  is  an  amiable  young  lady.  8.  Is  Mr.  A.  a  polite  man? 
9.  Yes,  he  Is  very  polite.  10.  The  wasp  (la  guepe)  is  a  hurtful 
inspect,  11  Our  neighbor  has  three  small  horses.  12.  This  is  a 
natural  sentiment.  1 3.  The  young  man  studies  (etudie)  with  (an) 
incredible  application.  14.  I  have  bought  a  round  table.  15.  Give 
me  some  red  paper  and  four  black  pencils.  16.  Yesterday  we  had 
an  easy  translation,  but  our  exercise  for  to-morrow  is  difficult.  17.  I 
like  the  blue  sky,  (tlie;  high  trees  and  (the)  green  fields.  18.  Have 
you  ripe  pears?'     19.  No,  sir,  the  pears  are  not  yet  (pcLS  eneore} 


THE  PLACE   OP  ADJECTTViS. 


85 


ripe,  bat  we  have  ripe  cherries.  20.  Italian  music  is  very  agreea* 
blc.  21.  The  French  soldiers  under  N'apoleon  the  first  were  very 
brave.  22.  Here  are  beautiful  flowers  and  beautiful  fruit  (^pl.). 
2)1  The  English  have  large  vessels.  24.  The  rose  and  [the]  lily 
are  beautiful  flowers. 


CONVERSATION. 


Avez-Tous  des  noix  mures  ? 
Qaand  seront-cllcs  mures? 
Aimcz-vous  la    musique    alle- 

raande  ? 
Ce    marchand    a-t-il    de    bon 

bcuiTC  ? 
Comment      trouvez-vous      ces 

jeunes  lions? 
Votre  theme  est-il  difiicile  ? 
Combien  coutc  cct  habit  ? 

Oil  est  men  cher  ami  Lucicn? 
A  qui  est  ce  livre  amusant  ? 
Qui    a    perdu    une   casque tte 

rouge  ? 
Avcz-vous  de  bon^un  et  da 

fromage?      ^     k^ 


^ 


Ellcs  ne  sent  pas  encore  mures. 

Dans  huit  jours. 

J'aime  mieux  (better)  la  mosiqae 

italienne.  ^^ta» 

Son  bcurre  n^est  pas  ^^^pais  sa 

crcme  {cream)  est  n3che. 
lis  sont  tres-bcaux. 

Non,  Monsieur,  il  est  facile. 

II  coiite   cent  francs.     C'est  Tin 

habit  chcr. 
II  est  alltS  au  concert. 
II  est  i\  mon  oncle. 
C'est  Jules  qui  I'a  perdue. 

Voici  un  gros  morceau  de  pain  et 
du  firomage. 


86  XIX.      DIX-NEUVIEME  LEQON. 

XIX.    DIX-NEUVIEME    LE9ON 


DEGREES  OF  COMPARISON. 

1 .  The  comparative  is  cbrmed  by  placing  tbe  adverb  plus^  more, 
before  an  adjective.  Tbe  superlative  by  placing  tbe  article  before 
the  comparative,  as : 

Haut,  e,  high;  comp.  plu3  haut,  higher;  sup.  le  plus  haut,  the  highest; 
fern,  haute,  comp.  plus  haute,  sup.  la  plus  haute. 

Mauvais,  e,  bad ;  comp.  plus  mauvais,  e,  worse ;  sup.  le  plus  mauvais,  f.  la 
plus  mauvaiser  '.he  worst. 

Rem.  When  a  possessive  adjective  is  placed  before  the  superlative,  tho 
article  le,  la,  les,  is  dropped,  as :  Mon  plus  jeunefrere,  my  youngest  brother 

2.  There  is  in  French  also  a  lower  and  lowest  degree  which  is  ef 
fected  by  the  words  moins,  less,  for  the  comparative  degree,  and./f 
moins,  f.  lamoins,  the  least",  for  the  superlative,  as: 

Cruel,  -le,  cruel ;  comp.  moins  crud,  f.  moins  crudle,  less  cruel  or  not  80 
cruel ;  sup.  le  moins  cruel,  f.  la  moins  crueUe,  the  least  cruel. 

3.  The  following  adjectives  have  an  irregular  comparison : 

Bon,  f.  bonne,  good ;  comp.  meilleur,  e,  better ;  sup.  le  meilleur,  f.  la  meU< 
leure,  the  best. 

(Mauvais,  e,  in  the  sense  of  wicked^,  comp.  pire,  worse ;  sup.  Upire,  f.  la 
fire,  the  worst. 

(Petit,  e,) ;  comp.  moindre,  less ;  sup.  le  moindre,  f.  la  moindre,  the  least 

Petit  and  mauvais  are  also  regular. 

4  As  before  an  adjective  is  rendered  aussi  ;  as  after  it,  and  than 
are  both  translated  que.  ^  Ex. :  —  //  est  aussi  keureux  que  mot,  he 
is  as  happy  as  I  am.  GJiarles  est  plus  fort  que  son  fr ere,  Charles 
is-strongcr  than  his  brother. 

6.  In  after  a  superlative  and  before  the  name  of  a  place  is  ren- 
dfereyi  by  de  and  not  by  dans.  Ex. :  Les  plus  belles  eglises  db 
Paris,  the  finest  churches  in  Paris. 


DEGREES   OF   COMPARISON.  87 

VOCABULAJIY. 

La  HoUande,  TTolland.  foi-f.,  e,  strong.  ^ 

Vabeille,  f.  t])e  bee.  ckmid,  warm. 

le  m^al,  the  metal.  enrore,  still. 

V^phmit,  the  elephant.  toHJours,  always. 

Jiflefe,  faithful.  l'antre,  the  other. 

peupli.  e,  peopled,  populooa.  le  tmitin,  the  morning. 

le  f>at/s,  the  couutry.  le  aoir,  the  evening. 

petard,  e,  heavy.    ...CpH^\  ^^.  coan,  short. 

READING  FXERCISE  19. 

L'Europe  est  plus  petite  que  IWsie.  L'Allcmagne  est  pi  as  for- 
tale  que  la  Hollande.  L'abcille  est  I'insecte  le  plus  utile.  L'oi  est 
le  metal  le  plus  pcsant.  Ta  robe  est  rnoins  belle  que  la  robe  de  ta 
BODur.  Monsieur S est  un  homme  tres-fort.  Son  frere  ain^  {elder) 
e.-^t  encore  plus  fort ;  c'est  rhomnie  le  plus  fort  que  {iha£)  je  con- 
naisse.  L'elephant  est  le  plus  grand  de  tous  les  anirnaux  terrestres. 
Les  livres  d'Einilie  sent  plus  aniusants  que  les  notres  {ours).  Los 
chats  sont  moins  fideles  que  ies  cliiens.  Ces  poniines-ci  sont  meil- 
leures  que  vos  poires.  Les  notres  sont  les  meilleures.  Votre  tante 
est  plus  laboricuse  que  sa  fille.  Lonrlres  et  Paris  sont  les  villes  les 
plus  grandes  et  les  plus  peuplees  de  1' Europe. 


;  THEME  19. 

l.,The  coffee  wag^  warm ;  the  tea  was  still  warmer.  2.  This 
church  is  higher  than  the  other.  3.  Mary  is  the  happest  girl  in  the 
world.  4.  She  is  prettier  than  Louisa ;  she  is  tho  prettiest  of  the 
sisters.  5.  This  house  is  not  so  {si)  old  as  {que)  the  other.  6. 
This  mountsdn  is  very  high,  higher  than  all  the  other  mountains  of 
this  country.  7.  The  22d  [of]  June  is  the  longest,  and  the  22d 
of  Dacember  the  shortest  day  of  the  year.  8.  The  rose  is  the  finest 
of  all  (the)  flowers.  9.  This  wine  is  worse  than  water.  10.  Have 
you  any  {de)  better  wine?  11.  Yes,  the  red  wine  is  better.  12, 
My  wine  is  the  best.     13.  John  is  my  best  friend. 


88 


XX.      VINGTlfilTE   LEgON. 


Mademoiselle  Ma.ie 

heurcuse  "i 
Votre  voisia  est-il  malbeureux  *? 

Qiifl  est  Ic  m^tal  lo  plus  iitllo? 
Quels  rnetaux  sont  Ics  plus  po- 

sants  ? 
Quelle  est  la  plus  attentive  do 

toutes  vos  (^coliercs  ? 
Quel  est  Ic  plus  fort  dcs  ani- 

maux  terrestres. 

Quel  est  le  mois  le  plus  froid  de 

Tannce  ? 
Votre  robe  cst-olle  aussi  belle 

que  la  robe  de  Julie  ? 
Le  tigi'e  est-il  cruel? 

Oil  trouve-t-on  le  meilleur  fer  ? 


CONVERSATION. 

etes-vous     Ob  ! 


oui,  jo  suis  tres-beuieuBe, 
plus  ncureusc  que  ma  sosur. 

II  est  moins  malhcureux  que  son 
fie  re  qui  est  en  Amerique. 

Cost  le  fer. 

L'or,  le  platine  et  le  plomb  sent 
Ics  plus  pcsants. 

C'est  Madeleine,  la  fiUe  de  Mon- 
sieur B. 

C'est  r^lepliant;  c'est  le  plus 
grand  et  lo  plus  fort  de  tous  les 
animaux  terrestres. 

C'est  le  mois  de  Janvier. 

Non,  elle  est  moins  belle. 

Oui,  c'est  le  plus  cruel  de  tousles 

animaux. 
Le    meilleur  fer  se  trouve    (is 
found)  en  Suede. 


XX.    VINGTIEME    LE9ON 


RSGULAR  VERBS.  — FIRST   CONJUGATION.— 
DONNER. 

1.  There  lire  in  French  three  regular  conju_<:^ati.ons,  viz. :  in  er,  tV,  anil  re. 
"Verjo  in  -olr  beloni^  to  the  irrc.gular  ones,  as  their  root  undergoes  manifold 
changotj.*     The  Infinitive  mood  is  to  he  considered  as  the  radical  part  or 


♦Only  iix  other  verbs  are  conjug-ated  like  recevoir,  which  is  often  given  as  the 
mod^l  of  one  conjugation.    They  will  all  be  found  L.  XLIV.  p.  189. 


REGULAB   VERBS,  89 

gronnd-fonn  on  which  the  conjugation  depends.  What  precedes  the  ter- 
mination cr,  ir,  cr  re,  is  the  root,  which,  with  regular  verbs,  always  remaina 
uiialrcrcd.  To  this  are  added  the  different  terminations,  l)y  which  persona, 
tenses,  and  moods  arc  distinguished,  ;«nd  which  arc  common  to  all  the  vcibs 
cf  tbnl  bamc  conjugation. 

FORMATION    OP   THE   TENSES    OF    REGULAR    VERBS. 

2.  There  are  primitive  tenses  and  derived  tenses.  The  primitive  tenses 
ftjTj :  tho  injinitive,  the  participle  present,  the  past  paii.ic.iple,  the  present  indica- 
tive, the  preterite. 

3.  From  the  present  infinitive  are  formed  :  the  future,  hy  adding  ai,  and 
the  rvnd it ional,  by  adding  ai^r,  as:  Inf.  donner:  Fut.  je  donnerai,  and  Cond. 
je  donnerais;  finir :  Fut.  je  finirai,  Cond.  je  finirais.  In  the  third  conju- 
gation the  final  e  is  dropped :  vendre:  Fut.  je  vendrai,  CoxiCi.  je  vendrais. 

4.  From  the  participle  present  are  formed  :  the  present  of  the  subiunctive^ 
by  changing  ant  into  c,  as  :  donnant:  quaje  donne;  finissant:  que  je  finisse; 
vendant :  que  je  vende ;  and  the  Imperfect  Indicative  by  changing  ant  into 
ais,  as  :  finissant:  jefinissais,  etc. 

5.  With  the  participle  past  are  formed  all  the  compound  tenses,  by  means 
of  the  auxiliaries  avoir  or  etre,  as:  Part,  past;  donn^,  fini,  vendu  — :  j'ai 
donn€,  j'arais  fini,  j'aurai  vendu,  etc. 

6.  From  iha  present  of  the  Indicative,  viz. :  from  its  1st  person  singular 
and  the  1st  and  2d  persons  plural,  the  Imperative  is  formed,  by  suppress- 
ing the  pronouns  je,  nous,  vous,  as;  donne  (give),  donno:is,  donnez;  finis  {&ur 
ish), fin issons,  fin issej:,  etc. 

7.  From  the  preterite  is  formed  the  Subjunctive  imperfect,  by  changing  the 
final  ai  into  asse  for  the  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation,  and  is  into  isse  for 
the  second  and  third  conjugations.  Ex.:  je  donnai:  que  je  donnasse;  je 
finis:  que  je  finisse;  ji  vendis:  queje  vendisse. 


CONJUGATION  OF  Z)aV.V£i2,  — TO   GIVE. 

INDICATITE. 
PSESEXT  TENSE. 

Jc  tliinn|b,  T  give  J  nous  donnfons,  we  give. 

tu  (lonnlcs,  thou  givest.  vous  donnez,  i/ou  give. 


11  donrte,  he  gives,  ils  donncnt,         (    , 

oUe  doDoe,  she  give*.  elles  donnent.     f 


give. 


90  XX.      VINGTifiME  LEgON. 

IMPERFECT. 

Je  donnas,  T gave  or  was  giving,  nous  donnions,  we  gave. 
tu  donnfeiis,  thou  gavest.  vous  dontiiez,  you  gave. 

il  donnkit,  he  gave.  ils  donnaient,  they  gave. 

PRETERITE. 

Je  donuai,  T gave  or  did  give.      nous  doniiimes,  we  gave. 
tu  donnap,  thou  gaiwst.  vous  doni^fites,  you  gave. 

il  donna,  he  gave.  ils  donnerent,  they  gave. 


Je  doni]|eifai,  I  shall  give.  nous  doniierons,  we  shall  give. 

tu  donr/eiias,  thou  wilt  give.  vous  donnerez,  you  will  give. 

il  donaeira,  he  will  gii^e.  ils  donneront,  they  will  give. 

CONLITIONAL. 

Je  donner^is,  I  should  give.  nous  donnerions,  we  should  give» 

tu  donnerais,        etc.  vous  donneriez,  etc. 

il  donnerait,         ete.  ils  donneraient,  etc. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Ponne,  give.  donnons,  let  us  give. 

(donnes-en),*^ive  {of  it).  donnez,  give. 

INFINITIVE. 

Donner,  to  give.  (de  or  k  dormer),  to  give, 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
PRESENT. 

Que  je  donnje,  that  I  (may)  give,  que  nous  donnions,  that  we  (may) 
que  ^.u  donnes,  etc.  que  vous  donniez,        etc.      [^ive. 

qu'il  doniie,  etc.  qu'ils  donnent,  etc. 

*  The  Imperative  mood  of  the  first  conjugation  takes  an  s,  !n  the  singular,  when 
followed  by  en  ^of  it,  of  them,  some)  or  y  (to  or  o*"  it,  to  them),  Ex. :  qfres-ea^ 
offer  sova/t ,  penses^,  think  of  it. 


REGULAR   VERBS.  91 

IMPERFECT. 

Qiie  je  donnasse,  that  I  (mighty  quo  nous  d'-nnaBfiiona. 
fj'Uo  tu  donnasses,      etc.      [give,  que  vous  donnassiez. 
qu'i!  donnut,  etc,  qu'ils  dormassent. 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT.  PABT. 

f)onaanf,5ritn/igr.  Donn6,  f.  donate,  given. 

(en  doQQaaij,  by  or  in  giving,  etc. 

COMrOUND  TENSES. 

hi  active  verbs  these  are  funned  with  the  Part,  past  and  the  aiudliaij 
avoi/    to  have. 

•     INFINITIVB. 

Avtir  donnd,  to  have  given. 

INDICATITB. 
COMPOUND   OF   THE    PRB8BWT. 

J'ai  donnd,  /  have  given. 

to  as  donno,  thou  hast  given. 

U  a  donne,  he  lias  given. 

nous  avons  donue,  we  have  given^  etc. 

COMPOUND  OP  THE  IMPERFBOT. 

J'avais  donnd,  /  htui  gii^en,  etc. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE    PRETERITS. 

J>an8  donn^,  /  had  given,  etc. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   FUTURB. 

J'aorai  donnd,  /  ihall  haoa  given,  etc 

CONDITIONAL. 

J'aurais  donn^,  I  j  .f,^  j^  ^^ 
J'eoiMiK:  donne,    ) 


92  XX.      VINGTIEME   LEiJON, 


8UBJUNCTIVB. 
COMPOUND    OF   THE    PRESENT. 

Que  j'aic  donnd,  that  I  (maij)  liave  given,  etc. 

Que  tu  aies  donne,  that  tltou  (mai/est)  have  given,  dc* 

COMPOUND   OF   THE    IMPERFECT. 

Que  j'eusse  donad,  that  I  (might)  have  given,  fie. 

PARTICIPLE. 
Ayant  donnd,  e,  having  given. 
Remark  1.     There  is  but  one  waj  to  render  the  expressions:  I  give,  1 
do  give,  I  am  giving ;  viz. :  jc  donne  :  —  /  was  giving ;  jc  donnais,  etc. 

*'     In  the  interrogative  and  negative  form   the  auxiliary  do  is  not  ex- 
pressed.    (See  also  the  ilth  Lesson,  4.)     Ex. : 

PRESENT. 

INTERROGATIVELY. 

Est-cc  que  jc  uonnc,  do  I  give?  donnons-nous,  dow€git>ef 

donnes-tu,  dost  thou  give?  donnez-vous,  do  gmi  give? 

donne-t-il,  does  he  give  f  donnent-ils,       ">    ,     ,        .     ^ 

donne-t-elle,  does  she  give  ?  donnent-elles,  j 

NEGATITELY. 

Jc  no  donnc  pas,  /  do  not  give. 

tu  nc  donnes  pas,  thou  dost  not  give. 

ii  nc  donne  pas,  he  docs  not  give,  etc. 

NEQATIYE-TNTERROGATIVB. 

Est-ce  que  je  ne  donne  pas,  do  I  not  give? 

nc  donnes-tu  pas,  dost  thou  not  give  ? 

ne  donnc-t-il  pas,  does  he  not  give? 
3.  The  forms  donne  je  (acute  on  the  e),  donnais-je,  donnai-je,  are  liltle 
used  except  in  poetry  and  in  studied  prose;  they  are  replaced  by  Eat  re  gtui 
(is  it  that)  prefixed  to  the  common  form,  as:  est-ce  que  je  donne.,  do  I  give; 
est-cp.  que  je  donnais,  did  I  e^ive  (was  I  giving),  etc.  The  future  and  condi 
lional  donnerai-je,  donneraisje  arc  more  common,  though  est-ce  (ptc  may  be 
used  in  all  cases  to  form  an  interrogation,  especially  in  common  convcrsa- 
ticn.  as  :  est-ce  que  je  donnerai,  shall  I  give;  est-ce  qu*il  donne,  does  he  give; 
tst-ce  que  vous  donnez,  esi-ce  que  tu  ne  do7-kt»9  ^fi^j  etc 


REGULAR    VERBS.  93 

COMPODND    OP   THE    PKE8BNT. 

Ai-jedonnd?     as-tudoimd?     a-t-il  donnd?  etc 
Je  n'ai  pas  donnd,     tu  n'as  pas  donne,  etc. 
N'ai-je  pas  donne?     n'as-ta  pas  donne? etc. 
Conjugate  in  the  same  manner :  parler,  to  speak ;  porter,  to  carry,  to  take; 
ndmirer,  to  admire;  aimer,  to  love,  etc. 

VOCABULARY. 

Lt  prochain,  the  neighbor.  marjnijiqufi,  magnificent 

apporter,  to  bring,  to  take.  nuinfjer,  to  eat. 

tomber,  to  fall.  cherr/ier^  to  look  for. 

Vescalifr,  m.  the  stairs.  tronrer,\Xi)  find. 

la  sant€,  health.  penscr ^to  think. 

le  carnr,  the  heart.  jouer,j,o  play,     pleurer,  to  cry. 

le  canlf,  the  penknife.  arrivcr, xto  arrive. 

Us  (/ens,  the  people.*  pn>r,no  pray. 

la  chasse,  the  chase.  I'autre,  the  other. 

le  chasseur,  the  hunter.*  pas  encore,  not  yet.       ^  -> 

la  poste,  the  post-office.  /^^^^^--vW^-A^     "^^  -Zc^-n/^.    ^  * 
READING  EXERCISE  20.     ^  {/^..^C-^^^Zft^   ^^^"f^ 

Aimez  Dieu  et  votre  prochain.  Lcs  parents  almcnt  leurs  enfants. 
Portez  cette  lettre  ^  la  p.ste.  Tu  poi-tcras  cette  robe  h  ta  soeur. 
J'apport«rai  ces  livrcs  h  mon  raaitre,  Apportcz-lui  {Jam)  aussi 
cette  boite.  L'enfant  tomba  de  rescalier.  J'ai  |jen3e  a  raon  ami. 
Penscz  a  voire  cousin.  Jouons.  Nou.s  cherchinns  longteiups  votre 
chien  Vous  ne  le  {Jam)  trouverez  pas.  Les  jeunes  gens  parlaient 
Bouvcnt  de  leurs  amis.  Les  chasseurs  parlerent  de  la  chasse.  Tu 
no  mangeras  pas  cette  poirc-ci ;  elle  n'est  pas  mure.  Qui  a  mang6 
i'autre  '\     N'admirez-vous  pas  cette  maguifir|ue  couleur  '\ 

.  THEME  20. 

1.  I  love  my  father.     2.  Thou  lovest  thy  mother.     3.  lie  lores 
his  sister.     4.   We  love  our  parents.     5.   Do  you  like  flowers?     0. 
I  giye  an  apple  to  my  brother.     7.   We  were  speak^£pf  ybur  aunt. 
y  8    1  arlmired  thp  beautiful  palace  of  ^(^ing.     SfT  We  played  yes- 
terday.    l^The  child  cried.     ir:fhe  children  cried,     12.  The 


94 


XX.      VINGTIEME   LEgON. 


boy  will  look  for  his  copy-book.  13.  The  boys  will  look  for  theii 
copy-books.  14.  I  have  found  my  knife.  15.  Have  you  found 
your  gloves?  16.  We  have  not  found  our  gloves.  17.  Play,  my 
child.  18.  Eat  these  apples.  19.  Do  not  eat  these  pears ;  they 
are  not  ripe.  20.  She  would  fall.  21.  We  should  admire  your 
garden.  22.  They  would  have  eaten  some  bread  and  butter.  23. 
1  think  that  our  friends  will  amve  te-day.  24.  They  will  ar- 
rive to-morrow.  25.  Will  you/TaKe  this  letter  to  the  post-office  ? 
20.  Pray  to  God  every  morning  and  every  evening.  27.  Why 
do  you  cry  'I     28.  Why  have  you  not  brought  your  money  ?     29.  I   / 

/ 


have  not  brought  my  purse. 


CONVEKSATION. 


Avez-vous  cherch^  votre  mon- 

tre  d'or  ? 
Qu'avez-vous  apport^  ? 

Voulez-vous  (will  you)  manger 

du  pain  ? 
Votre  mere    parle-trclle    fran- 

^ais  ? 
Quel     commandement     J^susr- 

Chiist  a-t-il  donn^  ? 
Qui  est  notre  prochain  ? 
Qui    prtera   cette  lettre   k   la 

poste,  Antoine  ou  Theodore  ? 
Qu'apporte  le  chasseur?  ^ 

Avez-vous  audsi  ^t^  k  la  chasse  ? 

A  quoi  pensez-vous  ? 
A  quel  jeu  jouerons-nous  de- 
main  ? 
Que  cherchez-vous  ? 
Qu'adniirez-vous  Ik  ? 


Jo  la  (it)  cherche  encore. 

J*ai  apporte  les  gants  de  Ma- 
demoiselle Mathilde 

J'ai  dejk  mange  un  gros  morceau 
de  pain. 

Oui,  elle  parle  fran9ais  et  anglaia. 

H  a  dit:   Aimez  Dieu  et  votre 

prochain. 
Tons  les  homraes. 
Ce  sera  Theodore. 

H  apporte  d'^ux  lievres. 

Oui,  Monsieur,  nous  avons  ^t^  k 

la  chasse  hier. 
Je  pense  a  mon  theme  fran^'ais. 
Nous  jouerons  h  la  balle  (hall). 

Je  cherche  mes  gants. 
Nous     admirons    ce     magn^^qne 
vaisseau  anglais. 


REGULAB  VERBS.  95 


READING  LESSON. 
LE   CHAMEAU   ET   LE    CHAT. 

Le  chat  au  chameau.     Soyez  le  bion*veim,  mon  frere. 

Le  chameau.     Comment,  moi  (/)  ton  frere  ! 

Le  chat.  Oui,  certes.  Voyez  un  pen  {see  a  little) :  ne  pnis-j« 
pas  {cannot  /)  faire  une  aussi  jolie  bosse  que  vous  ? 

Le  chameau.  Cela  pent  {can)  etre ;  mais  peut-elle  aussi  porter 
autant  que  la  mienne  {mine)  ? 

Le  chat.  La  sotte  demande  !  donnez-moi  seulement  {only)  votre 
petit  paquet,  je  le  porterai,  comme  si  ce  n'etait  rien. 

Le  chameau.  Mais  penses-y  bicn :  n'est-il  pas  trop  gros  pour  toi 
(you) ? 

Le  chat.     Ah  !  quel  conto  !  donnez-moi,  vous  dis-jo,  donnez. 

Le  chameau.     C'est  bien  ;  approcho  un  peu,  le  voil^ 

Le  chat.     Ab  !  quelle  charge  !  je  suis  ecrase  ! 

Le  chameau.     Tu  as  ce  que  {what)  tu  ra^rites  ! 

Celui  qui  veut  entreprendre  de  grandcs  choses,  doit  (^must)  an- 
aravaat  eprouver  ses  forces. 

Le  chameau,  the  camel.  y,  of  it  Cto  it). 

le  chat,  the  cat.  le  conte,  the  tale."* 

le  bien-venu,  e,  welcome.  approcher,  approach. 

comment,  how.  la  charge,  the  weight<^ 

ceites,  to  be  sure.  €cnis€,  cru.shed.t 

faire,  to  make. '  m€riter,  to  deserve. 

une  bosse,  a  hump.  entreprendre,  to  undertake,  v. 

la  demande,  the  question*  auparavant,  before.  ♦ 

le  paquet,  the  pack.  Eprouver,  to  try.  "^ 

oomme  si,  as  if.  laforce^  the  strength. 


96  XXI.      yiNGT  ET  UNE^ME   LEgON. 

XXI.    VINGT  ET  UNlfeME    LEgON, 


REJiIARKS  ON  THE  ORTHOGRAPHY  OF  SOME 
VERBS  OF  THE  FIRST  CONJUGATION. 

Some  regular  verbs  in  -«r  are,  for  the  sake  of  euphony,  liable  to  the  fol 
lowing  modifications : 

I.  Some  Verbs  ending  in  -ter,  as :  jetir,  to  throw ;  rejeter,  to  throw  back; 
and  those  polysyllabic  verbs  ending  in  eler,  as:  appeler,  to  call;  renouvder. 
to  renew,  etc.;  double  the  t  or  /,  when  they  are  followed  by  an  e  mute. 

This  is  the  caae  in  some  persons  of  the  Present,  Future,  and  Imperative, 
viz.:  — 


PRE8EKT. 

IMPERATIT*. 

PUTURB. 

Je  je«e  —  nous  jctons. 

Je«e. 

Je  je«erai. 

tu  JGitGB  —  vous  jetez. 

pi.  jetons. 

tujetteras. 

il  je«e    —  ils  jettent. 

jetfiz. 

etc. 

J*appe/7e    —  nous  appelons. 

Appe/fe. 

J'appe/Zerai. 

tu  appc//es —  vous  appelez. 

pi.  appelons. 

tu  appe//eraa. 

il  appe/Ze    —  ils  appe//ent 

appelez. 

etc. 

Except  the  verb  acheter,  to  buy,  and  a  few  others  that  seldom  occur, 
which  never  double  the  t,  but  take  the  grave  accent  i  : 

Pres.  J'achbtc,  tu  achetes,  il  achete,  nous  achetons,  vous  achetez,  Us 
ach^tent. 

Fut.  J'ach^terai.    Imper.  achate,  pi.  achetez. 

2.  iMssyllabic  verbs  ending  in  -der,  as  :  geler,  to  freeze,  and  all  others 
that  have  an  e  mute  in  the  last  syllable  but  one,  such  as :  server,  to  sow ; 
mener,  to  lead  ;  lever  to  lift  up,  take  the  grave  accent,^,  when  the  final  con- 
sonant of  the  root  is  followed  by  an  «  mute : 

Infinitive:  Mener,  to  lead,  to  conduct. . 

Pres.  Je  m^ne,  tu  mfenes,  Q  m^ne,  nous  menons,  vous  menez,  ils  mteen* 

Imperf.  Je  racnais,  tu  menais. 

Fut.  Je  mineral,  tu  raeneras.     Imp.  m^ne,  menons,  m«nez. 

The  same  change  takes  place  with  tiiose  verbs  which  have  €  in  the  last 
syllable  but  one.  They,  however,  retain  the  /in  the  Future  and  Condi- 
laonaL 


OETSOGRAPHY  OF  SOME  VEEBS.  '^1 

I  n  f  i  n  i  1 1 V  e :  Esperer,  to  bope. 

Pres.  tTesp^,  tu  esperes,  il  espere,  nous  esp^rons,  vous  esp^rez,  Wt  »■ 
p^nt.     Imperf.  J'esperais. 

Im^ter.  Espere,  esperons,  esp^rez.    Fut.  J'esp^rerai. 

Verbs  in  ^ger  retain  the  e,  as :  je  protege, 

8,  In  verbs  ending  in  -ger,  as  :  juger,  to  judge ;  partager,  to  share,  divide, 
the  e  is  retained  in  those  tenses  where  g  is  followed  by  the  vowels  a  or  o,  in 
order  to  give  the  g  the  same  soft  sound  as  in  all  other  tenses  and  persons. 
Ex.: 

Infinitive:  JUaw^cr,  to  eat. 

Pres.  Je  mange ;  pL  nous  mang^ons.    P.  pr.  Mang(?ant. 

Imp/.  Je  mangcais,  tu  mangcais,  il  mangeait,  nous  mangions,  vous  man 
giez,  ils  mangcaient. 

Pret.  Je  mang«ai,  tu  mangeas,  il  mangea,  nous  mangeamcs,  vous  man- 
geates,  ils  mangbrent.     Imp.  Mangcons. 

4.  In  verbs  ending  in  -cer,  as  :  commencer,  to  begin,  a  cedilla  must  be 
placed  under  the  c,  when  this  letter  is  followed  by  a  or  o.    Ex. :  — 

Infinitive:  P/iacer,  to  place. 

Pres.  Je  place,  tu  places,  etc.;  pi.  nous  plajrons,  etc. 
Imp/.  Je  plafais,  tu  plafais,  il  playait,  nous  placions,  voua  placiez,  ils 
placaient.     Imper.  Plafons,  etc. 
Pra.   Je  placai,  tu  plafas,  il  plafa,  nous  plaf times,  etc. 

5.  Verbs  ending  in  -ayer,  -oyer,  -uyer  change  the  y  into  t,  whenever  the 
letter  y  would  be  immediately  followed  by  an  e  mute.     Such  are :  — 

Payer,  to  pay.       <^i^i^ytV.  «n/>/<?y«r,  to  employ.  / 

effraypT,  to  frighten.        •  essuyer,  to  wipe.  •  ffi^>40^  \, 

Pres.  J^a/e,  tu  paics,  il  paie,  pi.  nous  payons,  vous  payea*  fls  patent 
Part.  pr.  Payant. 
J'emploie,  tu  emploies,  il  emploie,  pi.  nous  employons  voos  em 

ployez,  ils  eraploient.    P.  pr.  Employant. 
J'essuie,  tu  essuies,  etc.;  pi.  ils  essuient. 
^Jff'  Je  payais,  etc.;  pi.  nous  payions,  vous  payiez,  etc 
J'employais,  etc.;  pi.  nous  employ  ions,  etc. 
J'essuyais,  etc.;  pi.  nous  essuyions,  etc. 
Fid.     Je  paierai,  etc.;  j'emploicrai,  etc.;  j'essuierai,  etc. 
Imper.  Paie  —  payez.     Emploie — employez.    Essuie — cssuyez. 
%.   Verbs  which  in  the  Infinitive  end  in  -ier,  as :  prier,  to  pray;  cruTf  to 
cry/i^  iQ  some  cases  spelled  with  a  doubld^it^    This  takes  place  in  the  \Bi 
r 


98  XXI.      VINGT  ET  UNIEME  LEgON. 

ind  2(1  persons  plural  of  the  Imperfect  of  the  Indicatire,  anri  of  the  E*ie«nf 
of  the  Subjunctive :  — 

I  n  f  i  nYil  v  e :   OuhUer,  to  forget. 

Ind.  Imperf.  pi.  nous  oubluonv^FOjis  oubhVez,  ils  oubliaient. 


1.  Fres.  p^.  que  nous  pntons,  que  vDttSs^njez.  etc. 

VOCABULAEY. 

Lavertu,  virtue. 

la  force,  strensrth. 

la  beauts,  beauty. 

le  bruit,  the  noise. 

prif^rer,  to  prefer. 

la  servante,  the  servant 

Vamiii^,  f.  friendship. 

la  chambre,  the  room. 

U  vent,  the  wind. 

le  cheniin,  the  way,  road. 

la  pluie,  the  rain. 

nettoyer,  to  clean. 

la  terre,  the  earth. 

la  pierre,  the  stone 

dever,  to  biing  up,  to  educate.             la  cuisiniere,  the  cook. 

sicker,  to  dry. 

poss^der,  to  possess. 

bien,  well. 

lejardinier,  the  gardener. 

READING  EXERCISE  21. 

Le  sage  pr^fere  la  vertu  k  la  beauts.  L'amiti^  se  paie  (is paid) 
par  I'amitie.  Les  parents  ^levent  leurs  enfants.  Tl  gelera  cette 
nuit.  D  a  geM.  Elle  achete  iin  b'vre.  Les  vents  sechent  la  terre 
tremp^e  (wet)  par  la  pluie.  Nous  achetons  des  fruits.  Vous 
acheteriez  cette  maison,  si  elle  n'etait  pas  si  chere  Appelez  Jean. 
Nous  partageons  avec  nos  amis  tout  ce  que  {aU  that)  nous  avons. 
Ce  jeune  homme  emploie  bien  son  temps.  Nous  emploierons 
toutes  nos  forces.  Cela  m'effraie.  Ce  bruit  m'a  efFray^.  La  ser- 
vante nettoie  les  charabres.  Les  maitres  aiment  les  ^coliers  qui 
emploient  bien  leur  temps. 

\  THEME  21. 

'^  1.  The  boy  throws  a  stone.  2.  You  always  throw  (throw  al- 
ways) stones.  3.  Call  thy  brother.  4.  Call  the  servant.  6.  I 
shall  call  John.  6.  The  cook  buys  eggs.  7.  I  buy  a  horse.  8. 
My  father  will  also  buy  a  horse.  9.  Where  dost  thou  taJie  ^  this 
horse?     10.  I  hope  to  see  you  (votis  voir)  to-morrow.     11.  What 

1  Mener  is  applied  to  what  moves  of  itself,  porter,  to  what  is  carried  by  iiftliig 
{h)m  the  ground. 


ORTHOGRAPHY   OP  SOME   VERBS. 


99 


uldr 

/ 


do  yon  hope?  12.  "We  hope  nothing.  13.  What  are  you  eating 
there  (la)  ?  14.  The  child  ate  an  apple.  15.  You  ale  walnuts. 
16.  I  placed  the  books  on  the  table.  17.  I  pay  everything  (tout) 
18.  ThOu  payest  nothing,  19.  Let  us  well  employ  'our  ^time. 
20.  My  .sons  pay  [for]  what  (ce  oue)  they  buy.  21.  My  uncle  po* 
Besses  a  large  garden.  22.  Tne  gardener  cleans  the  ways.  23, 
Wipe  your  tears  {larmes).  24.  The  dog  frightens  the  cliildren 
25.  We  wiped  the  table.     26.  I  prefer  coffee  to  cea  {the), 

CONVERSATION. 

Ton  pere  a  appel^. 

Pas  encore;    je  les  nettoierai  oe 

soir. 
Dieu  te  prot^gera. 
Je  nettoie  toute  la  maison. 
J'appelle  cela  tres-cher. 
Je  mangeais  des  noix. 
On  le  mene  chez  le  mar4chal-fei^ 

rant  {farrier). 
H  a  dejji  gel^. 


Qui  a  appel^  ? 

Avez-vous  nettoy^  les  chemins  ? 

Qui  me  protc^gera  {protect)  f 
Nettoies-tu  la  charabre  ? 
Trouvez-vous  cela  cher  ? 
Que  mangeais-tu? 
Oil  mene-t-on  ce  cheval? 


qu'il 


Crois-tu  {do  you  think) 

gelecette  nuit? 
Acheterez-vous  du  tb^  ou  du 

cafd? 
Oil  achetez-vous  cette  farine  ? 
Qui  a  jet^  cette  picrre  ? 
Que  fit  {did  —  do)  un  jour  xm 
pore  ? 


Je  n'airae  pas  le  thd,  j'ach^terai 

du  cafe. 
Chez  le  meunier  {miller). 
Je  crois  quo  c'est  Richard. 
D  partagea  ses  biens  entre  sea  ttoU 


fils. 


>c 


V    V 


100  XXn.      VINGT-DEUXIEMB   LEgON. 

XXII.    VINGT-DEUXIEME    LEgON 


SECOND   CONJUGATION:  Fmm. 

INDICATIVB. 
PKESENT  TENSB. 

Je  fims,  I  finish.  nous  finissons,  we  finish. 

tu  fi^is,  thou  finishest.  vous  finissez,  you  finish, 

m  f[.mt,  he  finishes.  ils  finisscnt,     )    ,      ys   •  i 

^Q  ^miy  she  finishes.  elleBfinissent,  )         "^ 

IMPERFECT. 

Je  finissais,  I  finished  {was  fin-  nous  finissions,  we  finished. 
tu  finissais,         etc.       [ishing) .  vous  finissiez,  etc. 

il  fimissait,  etc.  ils  finissaient,  etc. 

PRETERITE. 

Je  finis,  I  finished  (did  finish),  nous  finimes,  we  finished. 


ta  finis, 

etc. 

vous  finites, 

etc. 

ilfinit, 

etc. 

ils  finirent, 

etc. 

FUTURE. 

Je  finirai, 

I  shall  finish 

nous  finirons, 

we  shall  finish 

tu  finiras, 

etc. 

vous  fini-'ez. 

etc. 

il  finj*A, 

et4i 

ils  finiront, 

ele. 

CONDITIONAL. 

Je  finirais,  I  should  finish.  nous  finirions,  we  should  finish 

tu  finirais,  etc.  vous  finiriez,  etc. 

il  finirait,  etc,  ils  finiraient,  etc. 

mriNiTivB. 
J'inir,  to  finish.  de  or  k  finir,  to  finish 


SECONJ)  C</^J^aATION.     ,  101 

Viina,  finiiJu  finissons,  let  us  finish. 

finissez,  finish, 

8UBJUNCTIVB. 
PBESENT. 

Qne  je  finisse,  that  I  {may)  Jin-  que  nous  finissions,  that  we  finish 
que  tu  finisses,  etc.    \ish.  que  vous  finissiez,  etc. 

qu'il  finisse,  etc.  qu'ils  finissent,  etc. 

IMPERFECT. 

Que  je  finisse,  thai  I  (might)  que  n.  finissions,  thai  we  (might) 
que  tu  finisses,  etc.  [Jinish.  que  vous  finissiez,  etc.  [finish. 
qu'il  finit,  etc.  qu'ils  finissent,  etc, 

PABTICIPLES. 
PBE8SKT.  PAST. 

Pinissant,  finishing.  Fini,  f.  finie,  finished. 

en  finifisant,  hy  finishing. 

COMPOUND  TENSES. 
INPINITIVH. 

Avoir  fini  ^  to  have  finisbed. 

•  INDICATTVl. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE  PBSSBST. 

J'ai  fini,  /  have  finished. 

ta  as  fini,  thou  hcu^t  finislied. 

il  a  fini,  he  has  finished. 

noos  avons  fini,  we  have  finished,  etc. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   IMPSKFBOT. 

J'avais  fini,  /  Iiad  finished,  etc. 

COMPOUND  OP  THE  PBETEWTB. 

J'eus  fini,  /  had  finished,  etc. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   FUTUKB- 

J'aorai  fini.  /  ghali  have  finished,  etc. 


102  «:pi.    y^GT-j>ieTTKiEMB  LBgos. 

'*'«.<' fioirpi'fiioJJAtij 

J'anrais  fini,  >  ^^^^^  havejinished,  ^. 
J  eusse  nm,   ) 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT. 

Que  j'aie  fini,  that  I  (may)  have  finished,  etc. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE    IMPERFECT. 

Que  j 'eusse  fini,  that  I  (might)  havejinished^  etc. 

PARTICIPLE. 
Aynnt  fini,  hai-ing  finished,  etc.  ^,y>^ 

Conjugate  in  tlie  same  manner :  hatir^  to  build ;  choisir^  to  cbooso  remplir 
to  fill,  etc. 

Rem.  1.  The  verb  hair,  to  hate,  loses  in  the  Present  and  Imperative  sin 
gnlar  its  diaeresis.     Otherwise  it  is  quite  regular  and  retains  the  two  dots. 

Pres.  Je  hais,  tu  hais,  il  hait,  nous  haissons,  vous  haissez,  etc. 

Imper.  Hais ;  pi.  haissons,  haissez.     Prct.  Je  hais,  I  hated. 

Eem.  2.  The  verb y?eunr,  to  flourish,  has  a  second  form  for  the  Imperfect 
tense  :  Je  fiorissais ;  and  also  a  second  for  the  Part,  present :  fiorissant,'e,-^ 
both  of  which  are  only  used  in  a  figurative  sense,  as :  une  villefiarissantei 
etc.  '  ' 

VDCABULAET. 

Nourrir,  to  feed,  nourish.  saisir,  to  seize. 

cib^ir,  to  obey.  rendre,  to  render,  return. 

remplir,  to  fill,  fulfil  la  tdche,  the  task. 

bdiir,  to  build.  la  pomme  de  terre,  the  potato. 

embeUir,  to  embellish.  Voccasion,  f.  the  opportunity. 

punir,  to  punish.  saJir,  to  soil. 

le  vice,  vice.  le  palais,  the  palace. 

le  devoir,  the  duty.  choisir,  to  choose. 

lafiatlerie,  flattery.  la  ccndeur,  the  color. 

le  menteur,  the  liar. 

V  READING  EXERCISE  22. 

Le  pain  noijrrit  \es  homm^s.  Les  bons  cnfants  obt5issent  h,  leurs 
parents  et  h  leurs  raaities.  Ilem|)li&  ce  veiTe.  Rein£lisse?  ces  vci^ 
res.     Qui  a  lempli  les  Louleilles  ?     Kojiiulus  et  Remus  batireut 


SECOND  CONJUGATION.  108 

la  ville  cle  Rome,  Van  753  ayapt  Jesus-Christ.  Les  flenrs  emhel- 
lisserit  les  jardins  et  les  prairies.  On  puniraJes  enfants  qui  n'oheia- 
sent  pas  h  leur  vnaitre.  J'esp^re  que  vous  aurez  pujiLce  mt^chant 
garr^on  Le  maitre  a  puni  je  f)etit  menteur.  Notre  voisin  batit  une 
grande  maison.  Nos  voisins  batissent_  de  grandes  maisons.  Je 
batirais,  aussi,  si  j'avais  plus  d'ai-gent.  Je  hais  le  vice,  j^aimerai 
fcoujours  la  vertu.  Haissez  le  vice,  il  vous  rend  malheureux.  J'ai 
toujours  hai  le  vice.  "NouThai'ssions  la  flatterie.  Ne  salissc^pas 
vos  habits.  Les  science^  nouriissent  la  jeunesse  et  rejouissent  la 
vieillesse. 

\fj      J  THEME  22. 

ySj..  I  finish  my  exercise.  2.  The  pupils  finish  their  translations. 
/S.  We  seize  th6  opportunity.  4.  We  seized  the  opportunity.  5. 
Why  have  you  not  seized  the  good  opporfunity  ?  6.  The  chil- 
dren sojl  their  clothes.  7.  Bread  and  [)otatoes  nourish  a  great- 
many  men.  8.  Do  not  punish  Heriry ;  he  has  been  ill.  9  Fill 
the  glasses.  10.  We  should  fill  the  bottles,  if  we  had  wine  enough. 
11.  The  king  builds  a  new  palace.  12.  Will  you  build  a  house  V 
13.  I  should  build  a  large  house,  if  I  were  rich.  14.  Here  are 
two  colors :  choose.  15.  WTiich  (Jaquelle)  will  you  choose  ?  16.  I 
shall  choose  the  blue.  17.  If  I  had  to  («)  choose,  I  should  choose 
the  green  color.  18.  Obey  your  (a  vos)  parents  and  (your)  ipaS' 
ters.  19.  I  hate  nobody.  20.  Hate  nobody.  21.  We  hate  vice. 
22.  We  have  always  hated  vice.  ^    \/      (1,^^^^       ''       f>  ^ 

conversation/     ^ 

Voici  doux  coutcaux  :  un  grand  Je  choisirai  lo  petit  qui  est  le  pljus 

et  un  petit.     Lequel  {which)       joli. 

choisirez-vous  ? 
Get    homme    remplit-0   sea  de-  Pas  toujours. 

voirs? 
Avez-voos  rempli  toutcs  les  bou-  Non.  Monsieur,  je  n'avai.s  pas  as- 

tcilles  V  scz  'le  vin  pour  les  reraplir. 

'Q,vii  O&tit  cette  belle  maisou?       C'ust  mon  voisin  qui  la  b^tit. 


104 


XXII.      VINGT-DE  UXl^MB  LEgON. 


Ne  batirez-vons  paa  aussi  ? 

Pourquoi  ne  batissez-voua  pas  k 

present  (jiowyt 
Qui  a  sali  ce  livre  ? 
Comment  as-tu  fait  (done)  cela  ? 

Avez-vous  fini  voire  tli^me  'i 
Qui  a  bati  la  ville  de  Rome  ? 
Qui  a  puni  mon  fils  ? 
Ne  trouvez-vous  pas  quo  j'ai  em- 
belli  mon  jardin  ? 

Bfaissez-vous  le  vice  ? 
Pourquoi  haissez-vous  votre  voi- 
sin? 


Oui,  je  batirai  ansa  Taiin^  pro- 
chaine  {next). 

Je  batirais  encore  cette  ann^e,  ai 
j'avais  assez  d'argent. 

C'est  Martin. 

La  plume  est  tomb^e  dessus  {up- 
on it). 

Nous  finirons  notre  theme  ce  soir. 

Romulus  et  R^mus. 

Le  maitre  de  musique. 

Certainement,  ce  jet  d'eau  (foun- 
tain) embellit  beaucoup  votre 
jardin. 

Oui,  je  hais  tons  les  vices. 

Je  ne  le  (him)  hais  pas;  je  hais 
seulement  ses  flatteries. 


BEADING  LESSON. 
LB  MOINEAU   ET   SES   PETTES. 

Un  moineau  avait  plac^  son  nid  dans  le  trou  d'un  mur.  H 
^levait  tranquillement  sa  famille.  II  aurait  et^  bien  heureux,  si  ses 
petits  eussent  voulu  I'^couter :  mais  k  chaque  instant  ils  venaient 
Bur  le  bord  du  nid.  Le  pauvre  oiseau  trerablait  dans  la  crainte  de 
les  voir  tomber.  II  leur  disait  de  rester  dans  le  fond  du  nid,  mais 
ils  ne  le  voulaient  point  (would  not  do  so.) 

Un  jour  qu'il  ^tait  sorti,  ils  profiterent  de  son  absence  et  s'avan- 
G^rcnt  tant  qu'ils  tomberent  k  terre.  lis  n'avaient  pas  encore  de 
plumes  aux  ailes ;  ainsi  ils  ne  purent  (could  not)  se  sauver.  Un 
gios  chat,  qui  passait  par-Ik,  les  vit  (saw  them);  il  n'avait  pas  din^, 
il  les  saisit  et  les  mangea  sur-le-champ.  C'est  ainsi  qu'ils  f'urant 
2}U7ii9  de  (for)  leur  desobeissance. 


THIBD  CONJUGATION. 


106 


Ia  nuinsaut  the  sparrow. 
les  petits,  the  young  ones. 
U  nid,  the  nest. 
U  froty  the  hole. 
ie  mur,  the  wall. 
tranquillement.  quietly. 
stouter,  to  listen,  obey. 
Vinstant,  m.  the  moment 
U$  venaietU,  they  came. 
la  crainte,  the  fear. 


rester,  to  remain.  ' 

lefond,  the  bottom. 

tant,  so  much. 

I'aile,  f.  the  wing.  • 

iauver,  to  save  ;  «c— ,  to  fly  away, 

passer,  to  pass  by. 

par-la,  there. 

rfiner,  to  dine. 

sur^e-champ,  at  once,  imracjdiately. 

la  d^ob^issance,  disobedience. 


'4«^ 


XXIII.    VINGT-TROISlfiMB    I^EgON 
^^j^P'   •      THIRD  CONJUGATION:    VEN^E, 


INDICATIVE. 
FBESSNT  TENSB. 


Je  vend^,  IteU. 

tu  vcnd^,  thou  seUest. 

il  vend,  he  sells. 


nous  ven^ns,  we  sell. 
vous  vendpz,  you  sell. 
ils  ventqsnt, 


ello  (on)  vend,  she  (one)  sells,     elles  vendent>> 


f  they  sell. 


IHPEBFECT. 

Je  vendjais,  Isold  (was  selling),  nous  ven(^ons,  we  sold. 
tu  vcndais,  thou  soldst.  vous  vencliez,  you  sold. 

U  vendait,  he  sold.  ils  venciiient,  Mey  sold. 

PBETEBITB. 

Je  vendis,  /#oW  (did  seH).         nous  vendjmes,  trc  sold. 
ta  ven*s,     c^c.  vous  vendhes,      etc. 

il  Ten<$t,      fte.  ils  vendtrent,        eio^ 


106  XXIIl.      VINGT-TROISr^ME  LEgOK. 


Je  vend^ai,  I  shall  sell.  nous  vencfrons,  we  skaU  sell. 

tu  ven(]|'as,  etc.  vous  venc^ez,  etc. 

il  vencn-a,  etc.  ils  vcntfront,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL. 

Je  vcnarais,  I  should  sell.  nous  ventjrions,  we  should  seU 

tu  venlrais,  etc.  vous  vencpiez,  etc. 

il  vencfrait,  etc.  ils  vent|(i-aicnt,  etc. 

IMPEIIATIVE. 

Vendt,  sell.  voncf)ns,  let  us  seU. 

vendjez,  sell. 

SUBJUNCTIYE. 
PRESENT. 

Que  je  vendb,  that  I  (may)  sell,  que  n.  veuc|ipns,  that  weimay)seV. 
que  tu  vendifcs,  etc.  que  vous  vcncyez,  etc. 

qu'il  vend^,  etc.  qu'ils  vcndint,  etc. 

IMPEKFECT. 

Que  je  vendfisse,  that  I  might  sell,  que  nous  venc^ssions. 
que  tu  VGndjisses.  etc.  que  vous  vcndlssiez. 

qu'il  venoit,  etc.  qu'ils  vendlssent. 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT.  PAST. 

Vendant,  selling.  Vendu,  f.  vendue,  sold. 

on  vendapt,  by  selling. 

COMTOUKD  TENSES. 
INFINITIVE. 

Avoir  vendu,  to  have  sold. 

INDICATIVE. 
COMPOUND    OF    THE    PBEFr!:^T. 

J'ai  vendu,  /  have  sold. 

tu  as  vendu,  thou  hast  sold. 

il  a  vendu,  he  has  sold. 

nous  avous  veudu,  we  have  sold,  eie.  * 


THIRD  CONJUGATION.  107 

''  COMPOUND   OF   THP   IMPERFECT. 

J'avais  vendu,  /  had  sold,  etc. 

COMPOUND   OF    THE   FRETEKITB. 

J'eos  vendu,  /  had  sold,  etc, 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   FUTURE. 

J'aurai  vendu,  /  sliall  have  sold^  etc. 

CONDITIONAL. 

J'anrais  vendu,  )  ^  ,     , , .  , , 

T'««oo«  .r^r^,^ .,      f  ^  sfioiUd kuve  sold,  etc. 
J  eusse  vendu,    )  ' 

PARTICIPLE. 
Ajant  vendu,  having  sold. 

8UBJUNCTIVB. 
COMPOUND   OF   THE    PRESENT. 

Que  j'aio  vendu,  that  J  (may)  have  sold,  etc. 

COMPOUND  OF  THE  IMPERFECT. 

Que  j 'eusse  vendu,  that  I  (might)  have  soid,  etc. 

Conjugate  after  this  model:  perdre,  to  lose;  attendre,  to  wait,  to  expect; 
r^pondre,  to  answer,  etc. 

Rem.  1.  The  verb  Ixittre,  to  beat,  is  regularly  conjugated,  except  that  in 
the  singular  of  the  Present  Indicative  and  in  the  fmf>eratire  it  loses  one  t. 

Prcs.  Je  bats,  tu  bats,  il  bat^^ous  buttons,  vous  buttez,  etc.  Imp.  bats, 
Part,  battu. 

Rem.  2.  The  verb  rompre,  to  break,  is  conjugated  in  the  Pres.  Indicative 
as  follows : 

Je  romps,  tu  romps,  U  rompt,  nous  roinpons,  etc.      (All  the  rest  is  regular.) 

Rem.  3.  The  verb  rire,  to  laugh,  is  of  the  3d  conjugation  :  Pres.  Je  ris, 
bx  vis,  il  rit,  nons  rions,  etc.  But  the  Pait.  /Hist  is  n,  and  the  Pret.  Je  ris,  tu 
ria,  il  rit,  nous  rimes,  vous  rites,  ils  rirent.     Put.  Je  rirai,  etc. 

Rem  4.  Condure,  to  conclude,  is  regular,  as :  Pres.  Je  conclus,  tu  con^ 
dus,  il  conclut,  ttous  cimcluons,  etc\j  Put.  Je  conclur^i.  Except  that  in  the 
Pnierite,  it  has  j<j  conclus  {notje  couduis). 


108  xnn.    viNGT-TEoisrfiMB  LugoK. 

VOCABULAKT. 

La  lague,  tlie  ring.  droit,  e,  right 

r^ndre,  to  spread,  to  shed.  les  armes,  the  arms. 

h  bruit,  the  report,  the  noise.  la  sagesse,  wisdom. 

^^         la  mort,  death.  la  Grece,  Greece. 

^  d€fendre,  to  forbid,  to  defend.  I'honneur,  m.  the  honor. 

entendre,  to  hear.  perdre,  to  lose. 

Jumer,  to  smoke.  attendre,  to  wait  for,  ezpeet 

r€pondre,  to  answer.  unpen,  a  little.  ^ 

le  sang,  the  blood.  le  tonnerre,  the  thunder. 

Voeil,  the  eye.  le  travail,  the  work. 

gauchi,  left,  prendre^  to  take.  d^sirerj  to  wish. 

BEADING  EXERCISE  23. 

J'd  vendu  mon  cheval.  Nous  avons  vendu  nos  chevaux.  J« 
perdis  hier  ma  bourse.  Vous  perdites  votre  bague.  La  vieille 
femme  vendait  dcs  cerises.  Nous  vendions  du  fromage  et  du  beurre. 
On  a  r^pandu  le  bruit  de  la  mort  du  roi.  E  est  d^fendu  de  fumer 
ici.  Qui  defend  cela  ?  Eutendez-vous  le  bruit '?  Qui  a  battu  men 
cbien?  H  bat  son  cheval.  R^pondez-moi  (me),  mon  fils.  R^- 
ponds  k  ton  maitre.  Je  r^pondis  que  j'etais  malade.  Ce  tyran 
cruel  a  r^pandu  beaucoup  de  sang  innocent.  Jules  a  dejk  perdu 
son  ceil  gauche,  il  pordra  aussi  son  ceil  droit.  Tu  perds  ton  argent. 
Nous  perdons  tout  notre  temps.  Le  bataillon  prit  les  armes  et  d6- 
fendit  la  ville.  Socrate  r^pandit  beaucoup  de  sagesse  k  Athenes  et 
dans  toute  la  Grece.  Pourquoi  riez-vous  ?  Je  ne  ris  pas.  Je  n'ai 
pas  ri. 

k  THEME  88. 

*"*T''^  1.  I  sell  my  dogs.  2.  My  friend  sells  his  horses.  3.  We  sell 
our  houses.  4.  I  defend  my  honor.  5.  Do  you  defend  your 
friends  ?  6.  Thou  losest  thy  time.  7.  You.  lose  your  time.  8.  I 
lost  my  money.  9.  My  brother  has  lost  his  cane.  10.  Ho  will 
lose  everything.  11.  The  pupils  will  lose  their  places.  12.  We 
expect  a  letter  from  our  grandfather.  13.  Do  you  also  expect  a 
letter?  14.  No,  sir,  I  expect  nothing.  15.  James  {Jacques)  and 
William  expect  (a)  good  news,     16.  Wq  liave  waited  an  bouR 


THIBD   CONJUGATION. 


109 


17.  Wait  a  little.  18.  Why  don't  you  wait?  19.  Do  yon  heai 
fcbe  music?  20.  I  hear  nothing.  21.  I  did  not  hear  the  thunder. 
22.  Have  you  answered  (to)  her  letter  ?  23.  I  have  not  yet  an- 
Bwered.  24.  I  shall  answer  to-morrow.  25.  Answer  me  {moi) 
26.  When  (quand)  I  heard  the  thunder,  I  came  down  fromf  the 
mountain.  27.  The  poor  children  have  lost  theii'  father.  28. 
They  will  lose  also  their  mother ;  she  is  very  ill.     29.  Do  not  break 

Qui  a  perdu  cette  bourse  ? 


A-t-il  aussi  .perdu  de  I'argent? 
Pourquoi      perdez-vous     v^tre 

temps  ^  jouer? 
A  quoi  (at  what)  yjuez-YOiB't 
Qui  defend  Ics  brebis  (sheep)  f 
As-tu  fini  ton  travail  V 
Ton  frere  a-tril  lini  sa  version  ? 

Ayez-Tous  ciatendu  le  bruit  du 

vent  (wind)  ? 
Qui  a  defenJu  de  manger  de 

ces  pommes? 
Comment  etes-vous  descendu  ? 


salisscz-vous      vos 


Pourquoi 

mains? 
Pourquoi   ne   punit^n  pas  ce 

m^chant  enfant. 
Qui  (whom)  attendez-vous  ? 
A  ttendiez-vous  quelqu'un  (some 

one)? 

t  J«  sols  desoendn  d«. 


Je  crois  (/  think)  que  Jules  a 

perdu  une  bourse. 
Je  crois  qu'il  a  perdu  deux  francs. 
Nous  n'avons  rien  k  faire  (to  do), 

nous  a  von  8  fini  notre  tache. 
Nous  battons  le  cerceau  (hoop). 
Le  chien  du  bcrger  (shepherd^. 
Oui,  M — ,  mon  travail  est  fini. 
Je  ne  cro's  pas;  il  la  (it)  finira 

demain. 
Le  vent  est  terrible. 

Notre  m^re  Ta  defendu  ce  matin. 

Je  suis  descendu  par  I'escalier 

(stairs). 
Nous   ncttoyons  la  cage  de  noe 

oiseaux. 
H  sera  puni  apr^s  la  lejon. 


J 'attends  Monsieur  le  professeur. 
J'attendais  mon  cousin  de  Paris 


110  XXIV.      nNGT-QUATRIEMB  LEgOU. 

READING   LESSON. 
LE     ROI      DE     PEESB. 

CJn  roi  de  Perse  certain  jour 
Chassait  avec  toute  sa  cour  ; 
H  eut  soif,  niais  dans  cette  plaine 
On  ne  trouvait  point  de  fontaine, 
Pres  de  h\  seulement  etait  un  grand  jardin 
Reuipli  de  beaux  cedrats,  d'oranges,  de  raisins : 
"A  Dieu  ne  plaise  que  j'en  mange  !*' 
Dit  le  roi ;  "  ce  jardin  courrait  trop  de  danger : 
Si  je  rae  permettais  d'y  cucillir  une  orange, 
Mes  visirs  aussitot  mano;eraient  le  vero^er." 
Certain  jour,  one  day.  le  c^drat,  tlie  leraoii 

chasser,  to  go  a  hunting.  a  Dieu  tie  plaise,  God  foibid 

la  soif,  thirst.  courrait,  would  run. 

seulement,  only.  permettre,  to  permit. 

la  plaine,  the  [)lain.  cueiliir,  to  gather,     y,  there. 

la  fontaine,  fountain,  spring.  aussitot,  immediately.         * 

pres  de  la,  in  the  neighborhood.  le  verger,  the  orehard. 


XXIV.    YINGT-QUATRIEME    LEgON 


DISJUNCTIVE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS  * 

With  personal  pronouns  it  must  be  observed  whether  they  axe  intimatel) 
connected  with  or  governed  by  a  verb,  as  :  /  speak,  we  go,  I  give  you,  etc. ;  if 
this  be  the  case,  they  are  conjunctive  (pronems  conjoints) ;  or  if  they -are  eln* 
ployed  by  Ihetrisdves  or  with  a  preposition ;  in  this  c!ase  they  are  termed  di»' 
junctire  (pronoiiis  disjoints).     We  begin  with  the  latter.  { 

1.  The  disjunctive  personal  pronouns  are:  mot  (I  or  me),  toi 
(thou  or  thee),  nous  (we  or  us),  twus,  (you),  lui  (be, or  him),  eSe 
(she  or  Iber),  eux  (^thej  or  them,  masculine) ,  ,c/Zes  (tbey  or  them, 

*  See  P.  Ii»  L.  IX. 


DISJUNCTIVE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS.  Ill 

feminine),  and  soi  (self,  one's  self).  These  pronouns,  it  "will  be 
perceived,  do  not  change  then:  form  to  indicate  case,  the  nominativo 
and  objective  being  the  same. 

Ex. :  Qui  a  dit  cela  1        Moi,  lui,  elle,  nous,  etc. 
Who  has  said  this  ?     I,  he,  she,  mtc,  etc. 
C*esi  poll"  moi,  pour  toi,  pour  elle,  etc.     ' 
That  is  for  me,  for  thee,  for  her,  etc. 
Je  parte  de  toi,  de  vous,  d'elles,  d'eux,  etc. 
I  speak  of  thee,  of  you,  of  them,  of  them,  etc 
Nous  ftensons  a  lui,  a  vous,  a  eux,  etc. 
We  think  of  him,  of  you,  of  them,  etc. 

2.  AH  these  disjuurtive  pronouns  may  take  the  word  -meme,  pi.  -mhnet, 
whenever  in  English  the  word  se//"  is  joined  to  a  pronoun.     Ex. :  — 

8.  moi-meme,  (I)  myself.  'P\.  noua-memes,  ourselves. 

toi-meme,  thyself.  vouft-nuhnes,  yourselves. 

lui.meme,  himself.  eux-u,eme^,    )  ^^^^^^^^^^ 

dte-meme,  herself.  elles-memes,  y 

aoi-meme,  one's  self. 

3.  TWien  a  stroas  is  laid  upon  personal  pronouns,  they  are  often  preced 
ed  by  c'est,  c'itait,  etc.,  as  in  English :  — > 

8.  c'est  moi,  it  is  I.  *  PI.  c'est  nous,  it  is  we. 

c'esi  toi,  it  is  thou.  c'est  i^ous,  it  is  you. 

c'est  Ini,  it  is  he.  ce  sont  eux,  }  ..  .    .■.— 

c  est  elle,  Jt  is  slje.  ce  sout  eties,  ) 

The  verb  etre  followinj^  ce  is  put  in  the  plural  only  when  the  pronoun  oi 
Qoun  which  follows  that  Vterb  is  in  the  third  person  plural:  c'^aient  mes  amit 
ce  sont  eux,  but,  c'est  nous. 

4.  Soi  is  only  used  of  mankind  in  a  general  sense,  and  of  inanimate  oh 
jocts  in  the  singular.    Ex.:  — 

Doit'On  toujours  penser  a  soi,  ought  one  always  to  think  of  one's  self  ? 

VOCAUDLABY. 

Inconfnant,  inconstant  la  balle,  the  ball. 

ressembler,  to  resemble.  venez,  come. 

envoyer,  to  send.  casser,  to  break. 

demevrer,  to  live.  sorti,  gone  out. 

la  corheille,  the  basket.  dg€,  old. 

Vaima.nt,  ra.  the  loadstone  ni  —  hi,  neither,  nor 
QSHrtBTt  to  attract. 


4 


112  XXIV.     VINGT-QUATRI^ME  LEgON. 

READING  EXERCISE  24. 

Qui  difc  (says)  cela  ?  Moi,  —  lui,  —  elle,  —  eux-mSmes,  —  ellefr 
mfemes.  Penses-tu  k  moi  ?  Je  pensc  h.  toi.  Je  pense  k  vous,  —  k  elles, 
—  k  eux.  Je  n'ai  pas  pense  a  toi,  mon  pauvre  enfant.  L'homme 
inconstant  ne^rCssettihlfi^  jamais  k  lui-meme.  Nous  nous  souvcnons 
(we  remember)  de  vous,  —  do  lui^  —  d'elles,  —  d'eux.  Envoyez- 
moi  de  rargont.  Sans  moi,  ello  serait  torab^e.  Je  suis  plus  grand 
que  toi,  —  que  lui,  —  qu'elle.  Qui  a  4t4  ici,  lui  ou  elle  I  Venez 
avec  moi,  —  avec  nous.  Joue  avec  lui.  Joucz  avec  elles.  On 
parle  de  nous.  Tu  paries  de  lui  et  d'elle.  Nous  parlons  souvent 
(often)  de  vous.  Je  defends  mon  honneur  moi-meme.  L'aimant 
attixe  le  fer  k  soi.  Nous  nous  moquons  (we  mock  at)  d'eux.  Ah  I 
vous  vous  moquez  de  nous  I 

THEME  24. 

/ 

1.  My  brother  and  I  (we)  have  heard  the  noise.  2.  Who  will 
have  the  ball,  thou  or  he  ?  3.  Who  has  broken  the  stick  ?  4.  Not 
I !  5.  You  and  he,  (you)  were  not  attentive.  6.  She  and  Emily 
have  t  gone  out.  7.  Who  hast  gone  out  with  them  ?  8.  Come  with  me. 
9.  Gome  to  om  house  (chez  nous) .  10.  Who  speaks  of  me  ?  11. 
I  speak  of  you.  12.  You  speak  of  her  and  of  her  sister.  13.  For 
whom  is  the  medicine?  14.  It  (elle)  is  for  yourself.  15.  Does 
she  live  with  you  ?  16.  She  lives  with  us.  17.  He  is  older  than 
I.  18.  I  think  of  (a)  you.  •  19.  You  do  not  think  of  me.  20. 
You  always*  think  of  yourself.  21.  One  must  not  (tl  ne  favt 
pas)  always  think  of  one's  self.  22.  Have  you  brought  the  book 
yourself?  23.  Yes,  I  myself.  24.  Does  she  play  with  us?  26. 
She  plays  with  them  (m.)  26.  Is  it  himself?  27.  Yes,  it  ib  him- 
self.    28.  It  is  I ;  it  is  not  he.  4 

CONTEKSATTON. 

Qui  a  dit  cela  ?  Moi.  —  Lui.  —  Ello.     " 

QuivientR?  C 'est  nous. 

Pensez-vous  k  vos  amis  ?  Je  pense  souvent  ^  enx. 

*  £|»  Vtvaab,  tbA  adrexb  aaaally  follows  tbe  Tttl)»  t  son^    X  «fii. 


DISJUNCTIVE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 


113 


Est-elle  tomb^e  ?  ; 

Pour  qui  sont  ces  bottes  ? 

A  qui  penscz-vous  V 

De  qui  parle-t-on  ? 

Quia  apport^  cette  corbeille '' 

Qui  a  fait  cela  ? 

Est-elle  arriveo  seule  ? 

Qui    a    ^crit   (written)   cette 

lettre  ? 
Que  fait  I'airaant? 
Qm  a  battu  cet  enfant  ? 
Qui  est  venu  avec  toi  ? 
Oil  demeure-t-il  ? 
Est-ce  vous  qui  avez  perdu  cet 
«^'  argent? 


Heureuscraent    non !    mais    gans 

moi  elle  serai  t  tomb^e. 
Elles  sont  pour  moi. 
Je  pense  a  vous  et  a  votre  mere. 
On  parle  d'^eux,  —  d'ellea. 
Ma  soeur  elle-meme. 
Ni  lui,  ni  elle,  ni  nous,  ni  eux. 
Non,  elle  est  arrivee  avec  moi. 
Mou  pere  -lui-meme. 

H  attire  lo  fer  k  soi. 
Ce  n'est  pas  moi,  c'est  Leopold. 
Mon  ami  Jules. 
H  demeure  chez  son  oncle. 
Non,  ce  n'est  pas  moi,  c'est  raa 
cousine  Emilie. 


READING  LESSON. 
LB  RtilE*.      (The  rose-bush.) 

"  Qui  vent  (wiU)  me  donner  un  petit  arbre  potir  men  jardin?" 
disait  Frederic  k  ses  freres  et  h  sa  socur. 

Leur  pere  leur  (Jthem)  avait  donnd  h.  chacun  un  petit  coin  de  terre 
k  planter. 

"  Ce  n'est  pas  moi !  "  dit  Augusto.  —  "  Ni  moi  I  "  s'^cria  Louia. 
—  **  Ce  sera  moi !  "  dit  la  bonne .  Charlotte ;  *'  de  quelle  espece  le 
(i()  veux-tu?" 

"  Je  voudrais  (/  should  like)  avoir  un  rosier,"  r^pondit  Fre- 
deric ;  "  le  mien  est  tout  jauni." 

"  C'est  bon,"  r^pliqua  Charlotte  Puis  elle  prit  (then  the  took) 
one  pelle  et  alia  (went)  le  retirer  de  terre. 

"  Que  vois-je  (what  do  I  see)  ?"  dit  Frederic,  "  tu  u'en  as  toi- 
mlme  que  (only)  deux,  et  encore  (besides)  il  y  en  a  un  si  petit  I 
Du  moins  ne  me  donne  pas  le  plus  grand." 


114  XT7.      VINGT-CINQUIEME  LE^ON. 

"Non,  Tion  !  "  s'ecria  sa  socur,  "  il  pourrait  encore  (could  arfiin) 
se  secher;  je  puis  jouir  du  pkisir  de  le  voir  flcurir  dans  ton  jardin.'^ 

(To  he  continued.) 

CJiocun,  e,  each.  puis,  then. 

un  petit  coin  de  terrey  a  comer  of  land,  la  peJle,  the  spade. 

ni  moi,  nor  I  either.  retirer,  to  take  out. 

s'^rier,  to  call  out,  to  cry.  du  moins,  at  least. 

Vespece,  f.  the  sort,  kind.  s€cher,  to  dry. 

le  mien,  mine,     tout,  quite.  se  s€cher,  to  get  dry,  to  wither- 

jauni,  e,  yellow,  withered.  je.  puis,  I  can  (from  pouvoir). 

r^pliquer,  to  reply.  jouir,  to  enjoy,    voir,  to 


c^'^ijott.r 


.> 


XXY.    YINGT-CINQUIEME    LECON. 

5^ 


I 

CONJUNCTR^E  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 


These  areyc  (I),  nous  (we),  in  (thou),  vous  (you),  il  (he),  plu. 
lis  (they,  m.),  elle  (she),  plu.  elks  (they,  f.).* 

Unlike  the  disjunctive  personal  pronouns,  these,  except  vous  and 
nous,  vary  to  express  different  cases. 

Je  has  me  when  used  either  as  the  dii'cct  or  indirect  object  of  the 
verb :  tu  has  te  in  the  same  cases 

Of  him,  of  her,  of  thera,  of  it  (ra.  or  f.),  are  each  represented  ty 
the  pronoun  en,  generally  referring  to  things :  to  him,  to  her,  each 
by  lui:  to  them  (m.  or  f.),  by  leur. 

The  objective  case  (direct  object)  of  i7,  is  le  (him),  and  of  c^e,  is 
la,  (her):  les  (them)  is  the  obj.  plu.  of  both  genders. 

POSITION  OF  CONJUNCTIVE  PRONOUNS. 

Genihral  Rule.  Conjunctive  pronouns  precede  the  verb  except 
in  the  Imperative  affirmative.  In  the  interrogative  ^rm  the  subject 
comes  after  the  verb. 

*  For  on,  of  wblch  se  is  used  aa  the  object  and  soi  as  the  disjunctive,  see  Part  xi 
hiXIU 


CONJUNCTIVB  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS.  115 

SPECIAL   RULES. 
A.    WITH   ONE   PROXOTTN. 

1.  Tho  nOTuinative  cases  je,  tu,  il,  die,  nous,  vous,  ih,  or  eHes^ 
osually  precede  the  verb  (if  vJbicb  tbcy  are  the  subject :  in  an  inter- 
rogative scDtence,  however,  they  arc  placed  immediately  after  the 
ferb.     Ex. :  — 

Je  pense,  I  think.  nous  parlous,  vrc  spcafc. 

tu  esperes,  thou  hopcst.  vous  jouez,  you  play. 

Irierrogative: 
FimS'tn,  dost  thou  finish  1 
Ment-dle,  docs  she  come? 

2^  Jho^ect  and  indirect  objects  are  placed  immediately- before 
theJeroVp  a  simple  tense,  and  ^Jbefore  tho  auxiliary  in  a  compound 

one.\   Ex. :  — 

'  Tu  me  d'ls,  you  tell  me. 

Je  vous  flonne,  I  j;ivc  you. 

Elle  Jii'a  r(fpomlu,  she  has  answered  me. 

Charles  nous  a  dit,  Charles  has  told  us. 

3.  If  tho  sentence  is  negative,  ne  is  put  directly  after  tho  subject, 
before  the  governed  pronoun,  as : 

Je  ne  vous  donne  pas,  I  do  not  give  yon. 
Vous  tie  les  airez  pas  vus,  you  liavo  not  seen  them. 
Elle  ne  m'a  pas  r€j>ondu,  she  has  not  .mswercd  me. 
Charles  ne  nous  avail  pas  dit,  Charles  had  not  told  us. 

4.  In  the  interrogative  form,  the  object  begins  the  sentence,  then 
follows  the  verb  with  its  subject.  K  the  question  is  a  negative  one, 
ne  begms  the  sentence : 

Me  connniss^vovs,  do  yon  know  me  1 

Me  bhime't-il,  docs  he  hlanie  rae? 

Les  vois-tu,  do  you  sec  them  ? 

Vous  a-t'il  r^jiomlu,  has  he  answered  you? 

A'ie  vous  aA-il  pas  r€pondu,  has  he  not  answered  you? 

6.  When  the  verb  is  in  tho  Imperative  affirmative,  the  governed 
pronouns  are  put  after  it,  in  French  as  in  English.     In  this  case  7M 


116  XXV.     vingt-cinquiSme  LEgON. 

and  te  ai*e  changed  into  moi  and  toi  for  the  direct  and  indirect 
objects.     Ex. :  — 

Donnez-moi,  give  me.  Apportez-lui,  bring  (to)  him. 

Mangez-Us,  eat  tliem.  Parlez-leur,  speak  to  them. 

6.  But  when  the  Imperative  is  negative,  the  governed  pronooQ 
precedes  the  verb.     Ex. :  — 

Ne  me  donnezpas,  do  not  give  me. 
Ne  lui  apportez  pas,  do  not  bring  him. 
Ne  les  mangez  pas,  do  not  eat  them. 
Ne  leur  parlez  pas,  do  not  speak  to  them. 

B.     WITH   TWO   PRONOUS'S. 

1.  When  a  verb,  which  is  not  in  the  Imperative  affirmative, 
governs  two  pronouns,  thej  are  both  placed  immediately  before  the 
verb,  so  that  the  indirect  object  comes  first,  and  the  direct  follows. 
Ex.:  — 

Je  te  le  donne,  I  give  it  to  thee  (you). 

Vous  Vapporte-t-dle,  does  she  bring  it   to   yon  1 

Ne  nous  Vapportera-t-il  pas,  will  he  not  bring  it  to  as  ? 

On  vous  le  dira,  they  will  tell  (it)  yon. 

On  ne  vous  le  dira  pas,  they  will  not  tell  (it  to)  you. 

2.  An  exception  to  the  foregoing  rule  are  the  two  indirect  objects, 
lui  (to  him,  to  her),  and  leur  (to  them),  which  always  follow  the 
other  governed  pronoun.     Ex. :  — 

Je  le  lui  donne,  I  give  it  to  hira  or  her. 

Je  ne  le  lui  donne  pas,  I  do  not  give  it  him. 

La  lui  donne-t-dk,  does  she  give  it  hira  % 

La  leur  donnera-t-il,  will  he  give  it  to  them? 

Je  ne  la  leur  ai  pas  donn^,  I  have  not  given  it  to  them. 

Ne  le  lui  donnez  pas,  do  not  give  it  hira. 

Pourquoi  ne  la  leur  pretez-vous  pas,  why  do  yon  not  lend  it  to  them "? 

3.  Of  two  personal  pronouns  governed  by  the  Imperative. affinna* 
dve  the  indirect  object  always  stands  last ; 

Donnez-le-nwi,  give  it  me. 

Apportez-les4ui  (leur),  bring  them  to  him  (to  them). 

4.  If  the  Imperative  is  negative,  both  of  them  precede  the  verb 


CONJUNCTIVE  PERSONAL  PBONOtJNB.  117 

according  to  §  6,  and  lui  and  leur  follow  the  direct  object,  according 
toB,  §2.     Ex.  :  — 

Ne  me  le  donnez  pas,  do  not  give  it  me. 

Ne  la  lui  apportez  pas,  do  not  bring  it  to  him. 

Ne  Us  leur  entxxyez  pas,  do  not  send  them  to  them. 

VOCABULARY.  . 

Pardonner  (k),*  to  pardon.  tailler,  to  cnt,  mend. 

preter  (k),  to  lend.  loiter,  to  praise;  to  let. 

r^compenser,  to  reward.  accompagner,  to  accompanj. 

eorriger,  to  correct.  je  promets,  I  promise. 

icouter,  to  listen  to.  I'histoire,/.  history. 

la  v&iU,  the  truth.  vdontiers,  willinjEfly. 

RPADINQ  EXERCISE  25. 

Je  vous  cntends.  E  me  pardonnora.  Elle  m'a  pardonn^.  Al- 
fred m'a  pret^  un  livre  amusant.  Pretcz-moi  votre  livre.  Je  vous 
le  preterai.  II  me  le  donne.  Tu  me  I'as  donn^.  Elle  me  les  don- 
nerait,  si  elle  les  avait  encore.  Vous  a-t-il  pardonne  ?  Lui  aa-tu 
dit  {told)  cela?  Je  le  lui  ai  dit.  Lour  a-Jt-on  rdpondu"?  Appelea 
ces  ^coliers.  Je  les  rdcompcnserai ;  je  leur  donnerai  de  belles 
images.  Tu  les  leur  donneras  domain.  Ne  te  loue  pas  toi-m§me. 
On  ne  se  loue  pas  soi-meme.  Elle  ne  voUs  dcoute  pas.  Elle  ne 
m'a  pas  ^cout^.  Nous  ^coutera-t-il  ?  Vous  ne  me  dites  pas  la 
v^rite.  Je  vous  la  dis.  Cctle  plume  est  Irop  molle  j  voulcz-vous 
avoir  la  bont^  {kindness)  de  me  la  tailler  ?  Je  vous  la  taillerai  vo- 
lontiers. 

niEME  25. 

_  praise  thee.  2.  Thou  praiscst  me.  3.  Do  yon  play?  4. 
y   d6  you  hear?     5.  Do  you  hear  me?     6.  I  hear  you.     7.  I  do  not 

Bell  my  house.     8.  I  do  not  sell  it.     9.  Do  you  sell  your  horses  ? 

10.  I  do  not  sell  them.  11.  We  hear  thee.  12.  I  call  him.  13. 
f   Will  you  accompany  me?      14.    My  father  will  accompany  you 

*  Thli  mark  (h)  deuotes  that  the  verb  after  which  it  is  placed  takes  an  iruUreat 
per$onal  otOect 


2^ 


118  XXV.      VINGT-CINQUIEME    LEgON. 

15.  Have  you  mended  my  pen?  16.  I  have  mended  it.  17. 
Lend  mo  a  pencil .j!/'^l  8.  Lend  him  a  pen.  19.  Do  not  give  him 
my  book.  20.  Do  not  give  it  him.  21.  I  promise  you.  22.  I 
promise  it  [to]  you.  23.  Tell  {dites-)  him  (to  him).  24.  Tell 
them.  25.  Tell  it  him.  26.  Do  not  tell  it  [to]  them.  27.  I 
should  give  you  some  money,  if  you  were  more  industrious  28. 
lias  she  given  him  the  gloves?  29.  She  has  given  them  to  him-. 
30.  She  has  not  given  them  to  him ;  she  has  given  them  to  his 
brother.  31.  Your  translation  is  badly  done  (malfaite)  ;  correct 
it  {fem.y  32.  Pardon  (me)  my  mistakes.  33.  Have  you  cor- 
rected them?     34.  Yes,  I  have  (corrected  them).  ^  -% 

CONVERSATION.  , 

M'entendez-vous  ?  Qui,  je  vous  entends. 

Ne  m'entendcz-vous  pas?  Je  ne  vous  ai  pas  entendu. 

Me  pardonnerez-vous  ?  Je  ne  vous  pardonnerai  pas 

De  qui  avez-vous  reju  ce  livre  C'est  Alfred  qui  me  I'a  pret^. 

amusant  ? 

Voulez-vous   preter  ce  livre   h  Je  le  lui  preterai  volontiers. 

ma  socur  ? 

Qui  veut  cette  plume  ?  Donnez-la-moi,  s'il  vous  plait  {if 

you  please) . 

Les  airaez-vous  ?  ,  Oui,  je  Ics  aiiiie  beaucoup. 

Dites-vous  la  verite  ?  Je  la  dis  toujours. 

Qui  vous  accompagnera  ?  Mon  cousin  m'accoinpagnera  jus 

qu'a  (as  far  as)  Bmxellcs. 

Vous  a-t-on  racont6  (told)  une  Oui,  notre  grand 'mere  nous  a  n- 

bistoire  ?  "     cont^  une  tres-belle  histoire. 


READING  LESSON. 
SUITE    DU    RO  SI^R, 

Frederic,  transporte  de  joie,  emporta  le  rosier;  et  Charlotfd  le 
suivit  plus  joycuse  encore  que  lui. 

Lt  jardiuicr  avait  vu  le  trait  d*amiti^  de  la  petit6  filld.  D.  &Ila 
cliercher  (he  w&rdfof)  un  beau  Bureau  d'Espagne. 


DEMONSinATIYB   PRONOUNS. 


119 


"  Voulez-vous  que  je  mette  (^puf)  ceci  a  la  place  de  votre  rosier?  " 
demanda-tril  k  Charlotte. 

**  Si  vous  n'en  avez  pas  besoin." 

"  Non,"  rejK)ndit-iI,  "  je  n'en  ai  pas  besoin."  —  H  le  planta. 

Le  mois  do  Mai  suivant,  Ic  rosier  do  Frederic  porta  les  plus  belles 
roses,  et  tous  les  matins,  Chai'lotte  rccevait  un  bouton  h.  moitie  ou- 
Tert,  pour  le  mctti-e  dans  ses  chevcux. 

Ijc  Bureau  prit  (took)  racine  aussi  et  devint  (became)  biontok  si 
grand  et  si  <5pais  que  Cbai'lotte  y  trouva  de  I'ombrage  dans  la  grande 
chaleur  du  jour. 


Transports,  enraptured. 
emporter,  to  carry  off. 
lesuivit,  followed  him. 
joyeiix,  joyful. 
le  trait,  the  trait. 
Vamiti€,  friendship. 
un  tureaa  (TEspayne,  a  lilac-tree. 
ceci,  this. 


demander,  to  ask. 
un  houton,  a  bud. 
la  moitie,  half. 
ouvert,  open,  opened- 
la  racine,  the  root. 
bientot,  soon. 
I'oijihra^je,  the  shade. 
la  chaleur,  the  heat. 


XXYI.    VINGT-SIXIEME    LE9ON* 


DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS, 

..  These  are: 

masculine. 

feminine. 

Celuf, 
pi.  ceux\ 

celle,  tlnit. 

cel/es,  those. 

celui-ci, 

celle-ci,  this,  the  latter^ 

pi.  ceiix-ci, 

ce/les-ci,  these. 

'  celui-la, 

celle-la,  that  (one),  the  foTmer> 

pi.  ceux-la, 

celks-ia,  those. 

2.  The  pronouns  he,  she,  they,  preceding  a  relative,  must  be 
translated  by  celui,  celle,  ceux,  celles.  Ex.  :  celui  qui,  he  who; 
celle  qui,  fthe  who ;  cetix  qui,  celles  qui,  they  who^ 


120  XXVI.      VINGT-SIXIEME   LE^ON. 

3.  Gelui,  ceUe,  ceux,  celles,  are  used  with  the  preposition  cfe,  in- 
stead of  the  English  possessive  case, when  the  goveniing  noun  is  not 
expressed.  Ex. :  mon  chapeau  et  celui  de  monfrere,  my  hat  and 
my  brother's ;  ma  plume  et  celle  de  ma  sceur,  my  pen  and  my 
sister's. 

KfiMARK.  Cdui,  ceUe,  ^c,  are  used  only  before  a  relative  or  the  prcpo 
sition  de;  in  all  other  cases  celui-ci,  celle-ci,  celui-la,  celle4a,  ^c,  must  be 
nsed.  Ex. :  J' at  celui-ci,  je  n'ai  pas  celui-la,  I  have  this  one,  I  have  noi 
that  one. 

4.  Ce  which  we  have  seen  as  an  adjective,  is  also  a  pronoun. 
It  is  then  invariable,  meaning  this,  that,  it.  —  It  is  used  before  the 
relative,  as  :  ce  qui  (subj,),  ce  que  (obj.),  that  which  (what)  ;  ce 
do-fit,  that  of  which. 

For  the  use  of  ce  or  //  l)efore  the  verb  to  be,  see  Rule  after  the  vocabulary 
of  Lesson  xv.     See  also  Lesson  xxiv.  3. 

5.  The  compounds  of  ce,  ceci,  this,  and  ceki,  that,  are  used  abso- 
lutely, without  reference  to  any  particular  noun. 

Ex. :  Je  ne  veux  pas  ceci,  je  veux  cela. 
I  do  not  want  this,  1  want  that. 
Ce  queje  dis,  what  I  say. 
Que  dites-vous  de  cela,  what  do  you  say  of  that  I 
Est-ce  Id  voire  plume,  is  this  your  pen  1 
C'est  ma  plume,  that  is  my  pen. 
Sont-ce  la  vos  gants,  are  these  your  gloves  1 
Ce  sont  mes  yonts,  these  are  my  gloves. 

6»  In  place  of  de  and  a  with  ce,  ceci,  cela,  ceux-ci,  and  ceitx-la, 
two  other  conjunctive  pronouns  are  used,  viz. :  en  and  y.  En  is 
rendered  in  English  by  some,  of  it,  of  them,  about  it,  aboM  them 
etc.  T  corresponds  to  the  English  to  it,  to  them,  in  it,  in  ih&ik 
there,  therein,  etc.     Ex. :  —  t 

Void  du  jamhon :  en  voulez-vous  f 

Here  is  ham,  will  you  have  some  i 

J* en  prendrai  un  petit  viorceau, 

I  shall^  take  a  little  piece  of  it* ' 

Votre  pere  est-il  au  jardin  f Om,  tl  y  ed, 

Ic  yom  fathei  in  the  garden  1    Yes,  he  \a  thane* 


N8TRATIYE   PRONOUNS. 


Ty  vais  aussi,  I  am  going  there  also. 

Doruiez-m'en  —  donnez-fui-en. 

Give  me  some  —  givii  him  some. 

Y  penses-tu,  do  you  tfank  of  that  1 

Je  lui  en  ai  donn€,  I  have  given  him  some  of  them  (it). 


121 


teporte-feuUle,  the  pocket-book 

Japeur,  fear. 

I'dme^  the  soul. 

la  nofilesse,  nobility. 

U  corps,  the  body. 

commode,  comfortable. 

U  conqit^mnl,  tlic  conqueror. 

jaune,  yellow. 

joli,  e,  nice,  pretty. 

le  commerce,  the  commerce. 


VOCABULART. 

la  recompense,  the  reward. 
b€nir,  to  bless. 
pers^citter,  to  persecute. 
sonfiaiter,  to  wish. 
etiriihir,  to  enrich. 
V agriculture,  f.  agriculture. 
^(/a/ement,  equally. 
tout  de  suite,  directly, 
promet,  pr<>iuise8. 


READING  EXXBCI8E  26. 

Voici  mon  porte-feuille  et  celui  de  mon  p^ere.  Voici  mes  gaDts 
et  ceux  de  ma  socur.  Voulez-vous  ceux-ci  ou  ceux-li  ?  Celui 
qui  reniplit  ses  devoiis  est  un  honuete  homme.  Voultr-z-vous  red 
ou  cela?  Ceux  qui  8ont  conteuts,  sont  toujours  heureux.  Heu- 
reux  celui  qui  trouve  un  vriii  ami !  Je  prefere  la  nobleSse  do 
I'ame  a  celle  «le  la  naissaucc  (birth).  On  croit  (believes)  ce  qu'on 
esj>ere.  Ce  tjue  vous  dites  me  Aiit  peur.  Qui  vieiit  la  ?  C'est 
moi.  —  Ce  sont  eux.  Ce  (jui  est  beau  n'est  pas  toujours  utile. 
Ne  parlez  pas  de  ce  qui  ne  vous  .regarde  {concern)  pas.  Alex- 
andre-le-Gran<l  et  Jules  Cesar  fureut  de  grands  conquerants  ;  ce- 
liii-la  mourut  djms  sa  jeuuesse,  celui-ci  fut  assassin^  ^urdered)* 


> THEME   26, 


^X\.  -^ 


1.  Here  is  your  hat  and  your  brother's.  2.  I  shall  sell  my 
LoTise  and  my  uncle's.  3.  We  speak  of  these,  you  speak  of  those. 
4.  Give  me  that  one.  5.  This  is  my  pen.  6.  These  (ce)  are  your 
penoila.  7.  Is  this  the  garden  of  your  aunt?  8.  Are  these  the  shoes 


122  xxvn.     vingt-septiMe  le^on. 

of  your  sister  ?  9.  No,  these  are  the  shoes  of  my  cousin  Eliza.  10. 
Ill  is  ink  {cette  encre-ci)  is  blacker  than  that.  11.  These  gloves  are 
white,  those  are  yellow.  12.  I  prefer  the  beauty  of  the  soul  to  that 
(/.)  of  the  body.  13.  Agriculture  and  commerce  are  equally  use- 
ful to  man;  the  former  nourishes  us,  the  latter  enriches  us.  14. 
Mj  mother  prefers  this  house  to  that ;  this  is  smaller,  but  that  is 
more  comfortable.  15.  Have  you  (any)  butter?  16.  Yes,  I  have 
Borao.  17.  Give  me  some.  18.  Here  is  black  cloth.  19.  I  shall 
take  ten  yards  of  it  (^fen  prendrai  .  .  .).  20.  Were  you  at  the 
theatre  yesterday?  21.  Yes,  I  was  there.  22.  Is  your  master  in 
that  room  ?     23.  Yes,  he  is  there.        i 

.-4 


IV   VINGT-SEPTI^ME    LEgON. 


INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

They  are :  I.  lequel  f.  laquelh,  which  (of)  ?  2.  qui,  who?  qtte 
and  quoi,  ^hat  ? 

1.  Lequel^  when  not  used  alone,  is  separated  by  de  from  the 
noun  with  which  it  agrees  in  gender. 

When  the  pronoun  which  is  used  interrogatively,  it  is  always 
expresged  by  lequel,  Icujuelle,  etc,  as :  — 

Void  deux  appartementSy  lequel  choisirez-vous  7 
Here  are  two  apartments,  which  will  you  choose  1 
Une  de  ses  somrs  est  mari€e,     Laqndle  est-ce  f 
One  of  his  sisters  is  man-icd.     \Vhich  is  it  1 
LnqneUe  de  vos  €coUeres  est  malade  f 
Which  of  your  pupils  is  ill  ? 

The  same  contractions  take  place  in  the  article  le  compounded  with  qud, 
as  when  used  by  itself:  thus,  by  contraction  with  the  propositions  a  and  de^ 
aru  formed  auquel,  auxquels,  auxqudles,  duquel,  desqueis,  and  degquel!e$. 


INTEREOGATTVE   PRONOUNS.  123 

2.  The   interrogative  pronoun   qui^  is  only  used  of  pei"80iis. 

Ex.:  — 

Qui  est  la,  who  is  tl.ere? 

A  qui  pretez-voxts  c(Ja,  to  whom  do  yoti  lend  this  I 
Qui  cherchez-vous,  whom  are  you  looking  fori 
Pour  qui  est  ce  crayon,  for  whom  is  this  pencil  ? 

3.  WJiose,  wben  used  interrogatively,  must  be  rendered  in 
French  by  a  qui.     Ex. :  — 

Whose  book  is  this  ?    a  qui  est  ce  livre  f 

4.  Que  and  quoi  arc  neuter.*  Quoi,  what,  is  disjunctive,  and 
used  either  by  itself  or  after  a  preposition,  as :  — 

De  quoi  parlez-rous,  of  what  are  yon  speaking  1 
Sur  quoi,  upon  what?     Avec  quoi,  with  whati 

5.  Que,  what,  is  conjunctive,  and  is  only  used  before  verbs :  it 
never  follows  a  preposition.     Ex. :  — 

Que  voulez-vous,  what  do  you  wish  or  want  I 
Que  dit-on,  what  do  people  say  ? 
Que  demarule-t-il,  what  docs  he  ask  1 

* 
VOCABULARY. 

Mari^,  e,  married.  le  rahier,  the  copy-hooV/ 

fci'/,  got  up,  risen.  la  niece,  the  niece. 

Jrapper,  to  strike,  to  beat.  le  porte-plume,  the  penholder. 

READING  EXEPXISE  27. 

Lequel  de  vos  fils  est  malade  ?  Laquelle  do  vos  soeurs  est  ma- 
rine ?  Lesquels  de  vos  dcoliers  n'ont  pas  fait  leurs  themes  ?  Voici 
plusieurs  canifs :  lequel  voulcz-vous  acheter  ?  Qui  est  arriv^  ?  Qui 
a  trouv^  ma  bourse  ?  De  qui  avez-vous  parl6  ?  A  qui  est  la  grara- 
maire  que  vous  avez  h  la  main  ?  Que  souhaitez-vous,  Monsieur  ? 
Qu'avcz-vous  port^  h  la  poste  ?  Quoi !  vous  etes  dej^  lev6 !  A 
quoi  pensez-vous  done  ?  Auquel  de  ces  ^coliers  avez-vous  promis 
une  recompense  ? 

•  The  neuter  gender  1b  recognized  as  existing  In  French  only  by  very  few  gram, 
m&rians.  But  qtie  and  gtioi,  the  pronoun  ce,  and  sometimes  te,  axe  certainly 
neither  masculine  nor  feminine. 


124 


XXVn.      VINGT-SEPTlfiME   LEgON. 


THESIE  27. 

1.  Whicb  of  your  horses  have  you  sold?  2.  Which  of  these  col- 
ors is  the  finest?  3.  Which  of  my  copy-books  will  you  have?  4. 
To  which  of  your  nieces  do  you  write  {ecrwez-vous)  a  letter?  5. 
\^'hich  of  your  pupils  are  the  most  diligent?  6.  Here  are  several 
pi'^'tures,  which  will  you  choose?  7.  Who  is  at  (a)  the  door?  8. 
Whom  do  you  love  most  {le  mieux)  ?  9.  From  whom  have  you 
received  this  ring?  10.  To  whom  do  you  speak?  11.  To  whom 
will  you  give  this  nice  pen-holder?  12.  WTiat  do  yo«  carry  under 
your  arm  (bras)  ?  13.  With  what  has  he  beaten  the  dog  ?  14. 
What !  are  you  still  {encore)  in  bed  (au  lit)  ? 


CONVERSATION. 


Lequel  de  ces  deux  porte-feuil- 

les  est  k  vous  ? 
Laquelle    de   ces   deux   robes 

prefercz-vous  ? 
Est-ce  la  votre  bague  ? 
Sont-ce  la  vos  gants  1 


Avcz-vous  regu  ma  Icttre  ? 

Le  commerce  est-il  utile   aux 

borames  ? 
Quelle  maison  vendez-vous  ? 


A  qui  donnerez-vous  ce  canif  ? 
Voici  du  jambon  et  du  pain,  en 

voulez-vous  ? 
Avez-vous  apporte  les  verres  ? 
Madame  votre  mere  est-elle  k  la 

maison  (or  chez  elle)  ? 


Celui  que  vous  avez  ^  la  main. 

Je  prdfere  celle-ci  k  celle-la. 

Oui,  M — ,  c'est  ma  bague  d'or. 
Non,  J\I — ,  ce  ne  sont  pas  mes 

gants,  ce  sont  ceux  de  ma  cou- 

sine. 
Je  n'ai  re^u  ni  la  v6tre  {yours) 

ni  celle  de  votre  pere. 
Oui,  tres-utile ;  11  les  enrichit. 

J'ai  deux  maisons  k  vendre,  celle 
de  roon  oncle  et  celle  de  men 
grand-pere. 

Je  le  donnerai  a  Guillaume. 

Merci,  nous  en  avons  dejk. 

Non,  M — ,  je  n'y  ai  pas  pens^. 
Oui,  M — ,  elle  y  est. 


K> 


POSSESSIVE   AND   RELATIVE   PRONOUNS. 


125 


;\ 


XXVIII.    VINGT-HUITIEME    LEgON 


POSSESSIVE  AND  RELATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

1     The  |X)sscssiYe  pronouns  aift*fewwdp^MM>Aa  pnnnnrniFn  niij>t ' 
tI»M»  wijiij,  tun,  Mil,  u<<.     They  are  :  — 


8INO. 

Masc. 
le  mien, 
le  tien, 
le  sien, 
le  notre, 
le  votre, 
le  leur. 


Fern. 
la  mienne, 
la  tienne, 
la  sienne, 
la  notre, 
la  vdtre, 
la  leur, 


Masc. 
les  miens, 
les  tiens, 
les  siens. 


PLUK. 

Fern. 
les  micnnes, 
les  tiennes, 
les  siennes. 


les  notres, 
les  votresj 
les  leurs, 


mine.' 
thine,  ^    ^ 
his,  hers,  «te. 
ours, 
yours, 
theirs. 


These  are  not,  as  in  English,  of  the  same  gender  as  the  possessor..    They 
agree  in  gender  and  nurabef  with  the  object  possessed.    Ex. :  — ' 
^  Cette  dame  aunon  crayon  et  le  sien. 

That  lady  h^  my  pencil  and  hers. 

Avez-vons  nia  montre  ou  la  votre  t 

Have  you  my  watch  or  yours  1 

J^ai  la  mienne,  I  have  mine. 

Ala  sceur  a  la  sienne,  my  sister  has  hers. 

2.  The  interrogative  pronouns  qui,  qiioi,  and  lequel,  serve  at  the 
same  time  as  relative  pronouns,  when  they  have  a  reference  to  some 
other  noun  or  pronoun  preceding. 

3.  As  a  relative  qui  is  a  subject  and  que  the  direct  object.  Qui 
and  que  are  ased  for  persons  and  things  of  both  genders  and  num- , 
bcrs.     Ex. :  — 

Un  enfaM  qui  pleure,  a  child  that  cries.  • 

Laporte  qui  est  ouverte,  the  door  which  is  open. 
Le  vcyageur  qiw.  fai  qnitt^,  the  traveller  whom  I  have  left. 
Lechapeauquej'ai  ac/iet^,  the  hat  (which)  I  have  bought. 
Les  maisons  que  vous  avez  vues,  the  houses  (which)  you  have 
The  relative  que,  whom,  which,  or  that,  is  sometimes  understood  in  Eng»- 
lish,  but  it  must  always  bo  expressed  in  French. 


O 


^■A 


126  XXVm.      VINGT-HTJITIEME   LEgOIf. 

4.  Dont,  whose,  of  which,  is  used  for  persons  and  things  of 
both  genders  and  numbers ;  but  de  qui,  from  whom  or  of  whom, 
which  is  sometimes  requu-ed  instead  of  dont,  has  only  reference  to 
persons. 

Remark.  When  dont  signifies  whose  the  nonn  which  it  limits  must  be 
preceded  by  the  article ;  if  the  noun  is  the  object  of  a  verb  it  must  come 
after  that  verb,  and  not  immediately  after  dont  as  in  English.    Ex. :  — 

Je  connais  lafemme  dont  vous  avez  regit  la  lettre. 

I  know  the  woman  whose  letter  you  have  received. 

Je  connais  lafemme  de  qui  vous  avez  regu  la  lettre. 

I  know  the  woman  from  whom  you  have  received  the  lett». 

L'homme  —  les  Jiommes  dont  vous  parlez. 

The  man  —  the  men  of  whom  you  speak. 

La  lettre  —  les  lettres  dont  vous  parlez. 

The  letter  —  the  letters  of  which  you  speak. 

5.  After  prepositions,  qui,  refers  to  persons,  lequel,  to  things  and 
animals.     Ex. :  — 

Le  marchand  avec  qui  fai  voyag€. 

The  merchant  with  whom  I  travelled.    But  J 

Uarhre  sur  lequel  (not  sur  qui)  je  montai,  x 

The  tree  upon  which  I  climbed. 

La  clef  avec  laquelle  on  ouvrit  la  parte. 

The  key  with  which  they  opened  the  door, 

Voila  Vhomme  a  qui  fai  pret€  mon  livre. 

There  is  the  man  to  whom  I  have  lent  my  book« 

C*est  le  chien  auqud  vous  avez  donn€  a  manger. 

That  is  the  dog  to  which  you  gave  to  eat. 

6.  Lequel,  laquelle,  etc.,  must  also  be  used  instead  of  qui  m  thd 
Nominative,  when  the  relative  is  separated  from  its  noun  by  another 
substantive  to  which  it  might  seem  to  relate.     Ex.  ;  — 

Im  tante  de  mon  ami  laquelle  demeure  a  Paris* 

My  friend's  aunt  who  lives  at  Paris. 

(qui  demeure  a  Paris  might  relate  to  mon  ami.) 

7.  TTiai  which,  and  whal,  meaning  the  thing  whi4ih%  are  ex- 


POSSESSIVE  AND   aELATIVE  PRONOUNS.  127 

pressed  by  ce  qui  for  the  Nominative,  and  ce  que  for  the  Objective, 
AU  that  is  rendered:  Nom.  tout  ce  qui,  Obj.  tout  ce  que.     Ex.  :  — 

What  renders  men  miserable,  is  cupidity. 
Ce  qui  rend  les  hommes  mis&ables,  c'est  la  cupidity, 
I  like  all  that  is  fine,  faime  tout  ce  qui  est  beau. 
Do  what  I  teU  jon,faites  ce  queje  vous  dis. 

VOCABtU^RY. 

V^gr^mt,    m.    the   comfort,  inviter,  to  invite. 

pleasure.  chatier,  to  chastise* 

le  tigre,  the  tiger.  demeurer,  to  live. 

le  talent,  the  talent.  vanter,  to  praise. 

I'amiral,  the  admiral.  fertiUser,  to  fertilize. 

la  victoire,  the  victory.  d€chirer,  to  tear. 

le  propriaaire,  the  owner.  gagner,  to  win,  gain. 

Us  mceurs,  f.  the  manners.  s'appelle,  is  called. 

le  repas,  the  meal.  '  tout,  adv.  quite. 

c^ebre,  celebrated.  trop,  adv.  too  much. 

amsi,  as.  maintenant,  —  a  present,  now. 
n^ligeTf  to  neglect. 

READING  EXERCISE  28. 

]\Ion  fr^re  est  aussi  grand  que  le  ticn.  IMa  socur  est  du  merce 
fige  que  la  votre.  Vos  roses  sonu  tres-belles,  mais  ellcs  sent  moins 
belles  que  les  micnnes.  Nos  chicns  sent  aussi  fidelcs  que  les  leurs. 
Chaque  plante  a  sa  propriete  {peculiarity^  ;  la  violctto  a  la  sicnne, 
les  roses  ont  les  leurs.  Le  petit  gar(;on  dont  le  pcre  est  mort,  do- 
meure  maintonant  chez  nous.  Les  raoours  des  anciens  peuples 
etaient  tr(is-diffurcntes  des  nOtrcSi  La  ville  a  ses  agrdmcnts,  et  la 
campagne  a  les  sicns.  Le  marcliand  que  vous  avez  vu  hier  chee 
moi,  et  chez  qui  demeuro  mon  ami  R.,  est  parti  pour  Paris. 

THEME  28. 

1.  Your  house  is  finer  than  mine,  but  my  garden  is  finer  than 
yours.  2.  I  have  read  (Ju)  your  letter  and  his.  3.  Do  you  prefer 
your  Tcnife  to  mine  ?  4.  Yes,  I  prefer  mine  to  yours.  5.  Which 
bonnet  is  thine  ?     6.  Your  rooms  are  more  spacious  (j^andei)  than 


128 


XXVm.      VINGT-HUTTI^ME   LEgON. 


OUTS,  but  ours  are  higher.  7.  I  think  (trouve)  your  garden  very 
small.  8.  I  beg  your  pardon  (^je  vous  demande  pardori).  Sir,  it  is 
not  smaller  than  yours;  it  is  quite  as  (aussi)  large  as  that  of  my  rtigh- 
bor.  9.  Where  is  your  pen  and  where  is  mine?  10.  Which  one? 
11.  That  which  I  have  made  {tailUe)  this  morning.  12.  The  man 
of  whom  you  are  speaking,  is  dead  (morf).  13.  Is  this  the  book 
(which)  you  have  lost?  14.  No,  it  was  a  French  book.  15.  You 
speak  of  the  lady  whose  husband  {le  man)  has  been  so  ill.  16. 
The  horse  to  which  you  have  given  some  drink  (a  hoire)  is  mine, 
17.  The  window  upon  which  you  lean  (yous  vous  appuyez)  is 
broken. 

COI^VERSATION. 


Trouvez-vous  mon  jardin  plus 

grand  que  le  v6tre? 
Est-il  aussi  plus  petit  que  celui 

de  votre  tante  ? 
Comment  s'appelle  cet  amiral 

qui  a  remport^  la  victoire  do 

Trafalgar? 
Que  fait  le  tigre  ? 
Ta  soeur  est-elle  plus  ^g^e  quo 

la  mienne  ? 
Quel  age  a-t~elle  done  ? 
Avec  quoi  le  voleur  a-t-il  ouvert 

(opened)  la  porte  ? 
Comment    s'appelle    le   fleuve 

dont     les     eaux     fertilisent 

I'Egypte? 
Avez-vous  r^ellement  une  bonno 

intention? 


Au  contraire,  je  le  trouve  p\ua  pe- 
tit que  le  mien. 
Non,  le  sien  est  moins  grand. 

Le  nom  de  ce  c^lebre  amiral  an- 
glais est  Nelson. 

n  d^chire  la  main  qui  le  chatio. 
Elle  est  plus  jeune  que  la  votre. 

Elle  a  onze  ans  et  demi. 

D  I'a  ouverte  avec  une  fausse  clef. 

Ce  fleuve  s'appelle  le  Nil. 


Je  vous  assure  que  mon  intention 
est  aussi  bonne  que  la  vdtro. 


A^n' 


6, 

INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS.  129 


XXIX.    VIXGT.NEUYIEME    LEgON. 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS. 

1.  These  are  used  by  themselves,  without  a  noun.    They  are :  — 

On  or  Von,  one,  they,  people. 

Chacun,  f.  cJiaaine,  each,  every-one. 

Aucun,  f.  aucune  (with  ne),  none,  not  one. 

Quelqu'un,  f.  quelfpi'tine,  Bome  one,  eonnjbody,  anybody,  pi.  qadqw^* 

uns^  f.  quciques-unes,  eoniQ. 
Personm,  (with  ne),  nobody. 
L*un,  e  —  I'a'Ure,  the  one  —  the  other.  pL  let  utu  (unea) — lea  autres, 

the  one«  —  the  others. 
L'un  (I'une)  ft  Vantre,  both. 
JJun  (I'une)  cu  I'autre,  either. 
JVit  l'un  (I'une)  ni  I'autre,  neither. 
L'un  (I'une)  I'autre,  —  pi.  lea  una  (lea  unea)  lea  oUtTta,  each  Other,  One 

another. 
Un  autre,  f.  une  autre,  another. 
Lfautres,  pi.  others,  other  people. 
Autrui,  others,  another. 
Tel,  f.  telle,  many  a  man. 
J^lusieurs,  several. 
Xa  plupart,  most,  followed  by  de  with  the  def.  arf.,  aff:  la /^upaTf  cle6 

fwnimes,  most  men. 
Qtticonque,  wh(x;ver. 

Tout,  f.  toute,  all,  everything,  pi.  tous,  t&utea,  all. 
Quelque  chose,  f.  something,  anything :  when  followed  by  cle  and  aa 

adj.  it  is  masc. 
Bien  (with  ne),  nothing. 
Le,  la  mime,  the  same. 

2.  L^on  is  used  for  euphony  instead  of  on  after  e(,  ou,  oil,  st,  unless 
the  next  word  begins  with  / ;  also  after  que  if  the  next  word  begins 
with  a  c  or  ^.  Ex. :  si  Von  voit,  if  one  sees ;  et  Von  dit,  and  they 
say.     But :  ti  on  le  voit,  not  si  Von  le  voit. 

L'on  is  also  sometimes  nsed  after  maia,  ni,  qui,  and  other  vowel  sonit^^f  ^ 


130  XXIX.      VINGT-NEUVIEME  LEgON. 

3.  Several  of  the  indefinite  adjectives  have  been  enumerated  here, 
again  among  the  indefinite  pronouns,  because  they  may  be  used  aa 
such,  viz. :  aucun,  plusieurs,  touty  and  le  meme.     Ex. :  — 

Combien  de  plumes  avez-vous,  how  many  pens  have  you  ? 

Je  n'en  ai  aucune,  I  have  none. 

J^en  ai  plusieurs,  I  have  several. 

Avez-vous  appeU  tons  les  en/ants,  have  you  called  all  the  children  f 

Out,  je  les  ai  appel^s  tons,  yes,  I  have  called  them  all. 

4.  When  persorine  and  Hen  are  used  by  themselves,  they  do  not 
take  ne,  but  they  retain  their  negative  meaning,  as : 

Qui  avez-vous  rencontr€f    Personne. 
Whom  have  you  met  1     ]Soi)ody. 

VOCABULARY. 

!  Le  d(ffaut,  the  fault.  duxnter,  to  sing. 

'  le  verbe,  the  verb.  bldiner,  to  blame. 

le  camaradf;  the  comrade.  nVe,  to  laugh. 

;  la  conjiance,  the  confidence.  arriver,  to  arrive. 

jT  venu,  come  (part.  p.).  gdter,  to  spoil.  ** 

m^chant,  e,  naughty.  secourir,  to  assist. 

jaloux,  -se,  jealous.  nuire,  to  hurt,  injtiro- 

r^gvlier,  -ere,  regular,  je  veux,  I  will.  i 


V 


rencontrer,  to  meet.  poum,  e,  rotten. 

READING  EXERCISE  29. 


On  chante,  on  joue  et  Ton  danse.  Tout  le  monde  vent  (wislies) 
§tre  heureux.  Chacun  veut  avoir  raison.  L'un  ^tait  riche,  I'autro 
^tait  pauvre ;  l'un  et  I'autre  ^talent  malheureux.  Los  unes  dan- 
saient,  les  autres  jouaient.  Ne  blamez  pas  les  travaux  d'autrui. 
Avez-vous  vu  quelc|>u'un?  Je  n'ai  vu  porsonne.  Nous  avona 
quelque  chose  de  meilleur.  Tel  rit  aujourd'hui  qui  ne  rira  plus  de- 
main.  Chacun  a  ses  defauts.  Tout  le  monde  {everybody^  a  son 
faible  (weakness).  La  plupart  de  ces  pommes  sont  pourries.  Ne 
gavez-vous  (do  you  knotv)  rion  de  nouveau?  Nous  ne  savons 
(Imow)  i-ien.  Nous  n'avons  rencontr^  personne.  Quiconquo  salira 
Bcs  cahiers,  sera  puni.  Donnez-moi  quelquos-unes  de  vos  belles 
poires.     Quelques-uns  de  mes  camarades  sont  malades. 


/ 


INDEFTNITE   PE0N0UN3. 
THEME  29. 


131 


1.  One  is  happy  when  one  is  contented.  2.  Tliey  speak  cf 
peace  {de  la  paix).  3.  They  say  so  (/e).  4.  Everyhody  likes 
him.  5.  Evei-y  one  thinks  of  himself  (rt  50?').  6.  Evoryboflj  has 
bid  [own]  faults.  7.  Somebody  has  told  {dit)  it  to  me.  8. 
Those  apples  are  fine,  I  will  take  some.  9.  WTjoever  knows  (co»- 
nait)  this  man,  has  little  {peu  de^  confidence  in  him.  10.  No- 
body knows  that  woman.  11.  Henry  thinks  of  (a)  nobody.  12. 
(The)  one  arrives,  the  other  sets  out  (^pctrt  ).  13.  These  two 
girls  love  one  another.  14.  I  do  not  know  them  all,  but  I  know 
several  of  them  (en).  15.  Most  verbs  are  regular.  16.  The 
princes  were  jealous  of  one  another.  17.  Will  you  have  anything  t 
18.  I  thank  you,  I  will  have  (je  ne  vetix)  nothing.  19.  These 
people  (gens)  speak  ill  (mal)  of  one  another  (i.  e.  the  one  of  the 
other).        Tj^y 

CONVERSATION. 


Quefait-onl^? 

Qui  a  dit  cela  ? 

Qui  veut  ce  papier? 

Vos    deux     neveux      sont-ils 

riches  ? 
As-tu  vu   quolqu'un  dans  ce 

jardin  ? 
Qa  y  a-t-il  de  nouveau? 

Ou  flont  vos  deux  fils? 

Voulez-vous  quel  que  chose  ? 
Avez-vous  retrouv6  los  lettres 

perdues  1 
Avec  qui  etes-vous  venu  ? 
Quiestlji? 
Avez-vous  touteg  les  boites  ? 


On  joue  et  Ton  danse. 

Tout  le  monde  le  dit. 

Chacun  le  veut. 

L'un  est  richo,  I'autre  est  panvre. 

Non,  jo  n*y  ai  vu  personne. 

Jo  ne  sais  (know)  rien  du  tout 

{at  all). 
lis  sont  partis  tous  les  deux.    (Ha 

sont  partis  Tun  et  I'autre.) 
Non,  raerci ;  je  ne  veux  rien. 
J*en  ai  retrouv^  quelqucs-unes;« 

la  plupart  sont  perdues. 
Je  ne  suis  venu  avec  personne^, 
Personne. 
Je  n'on  ai  auoonow        ^:^ 


132 


XXIX.      VINGT-NEUVIEME    LEgON. 


Comment  ^tsdent  les  princes  ? 

Avez-vous  d'autres  plumes  ? 
Avez-vous      rencontr^      quel- 
qu'un  ? 


lis  ^tazent  jaloux  I'un  de  Tautre 

(or  les  uns  des  autres.) 
Non,  ce  sont  encore  les  m^mes. 
Je  n'ai  rencontr^  personne. 


READING  LESSON. 
PUISSANCE   DE    LA   CONCORDE. 

Ud  homme  qui  avait  douze  fils,  les  fit  (had  them)  rassembler  au- 
tour  de  son  lit  de  mort,  et  comme  (as)  ils  attendaient  sa  demiere 
benediction,  il  leur  montra  un  faisceau  de  fleches  et  ordonna  k  cha- 
cun  d'essayer  de  les  rompre  ainsi  liees,  toutes  k  la  fois.  Aucun 
d'eux  ne  put  (could)  y  parvenir.  H  leur  dit  ensuite  de  faire  le 
meine  essai,  en  les  prenant  (h/  taking  them)  I'une  apres  I'autre. 
Us  les  rompirent  de  cette  maniere  avec  facility.  Le  pere  les  rendit 
alors  attentifs  a  cet  embleme  du  pouvoir  de  la  Concorde.  "  Ob- 
eervez,  mes  enfants,"  leur  dit-il,  "qu'aussi  longtemps  que  voua 
resterez  unis,  personne  ne  pourra  (will  be  able)  vous  vaincre.'* 

Le  pouvoir,  the  power,  might. 
rassembler,  to  assemble. 
autour  de,  round,  about. 
le  lit  de  mort,  the  death-bed. 
la  benediction,  the  blessing. 


un  faisceau,  a  bundle. 
lafieche,  the  arrow. 
rompre,  to  break. 
nitm  lie,  thus  bound  together* 


a  la  fois,  at  once. 

parvenir,  to  succeed. 

ensuite,  at  length,  finally. 

Vessai,  the  attempt. 

la  facility,  (the)  easiness. 

alors,  then. 

I'embleme,  the  emblem. 

unir,  to  unite. 

vaincre,  to  conquer,  Tanqaidftj 


PASSIVE  AND   NEUTER  VERBS.  133 


XXX.    TRENTIEME    LEgON 


m^     ^M^ 


(/ 

PASSIVE  AND  NEUTER  VERBS. 

1.  Passive  verbs  are  formed,  in  French  as  in  English,  by  joining 
the  Participle  past  of  an  active  verb  to  the  auxiliary  verb  etre,  to  be ; 
for  instance,  of  the  verb  donner^  the  passive  voice  is  etre  donne,  to 
be  given;  of  Jinir:  etre  Jini,  to  be  finished,  etc.  The  Participle 
past  varies  according  to  the  gender  and  number  of  the  noun  or  pro- 
noun which  stands  as  the  nominative  to  the  verb. 


CONJUGATION  OF  A  PASSIVE  VERB. 

INFINITIVE. 

Etre  hue  J  to  be  praised. 

INDICATIVB. 
PRESENT   TEN8K. 

Je  8ni8  lon^  or  louee,  /  am  praised. 

tti  es  loue  or  louee,  thou  art  praised, 

il  est  loue,  he  is  praised. 

elle  est  louee,  she  is  praised. 

nous  somracs  louc's  or  loue'es,  toe  are  praueiL 

V0U8  Stes  louds  or  loue'es,  you  ire  praitecL 


ils  sont  loucs, 
elles  sont  louces 


j'ea     p%  «^«  P^«*»«'' 


IMPERFECT. 

vT^taifl  \ou4  or  \ou6e,  I  voas  praised,  ete. 

PRETERITB. 

Je  fciB  lon^  or  Ioa€e.  /  teas  praised,  etc, 

FUTURE. 

Je  serai  loue  or  louee,  1  shall  he  pnaUed,  etc. 


134  XXX.      TRENTlfiME  LEgON. 

CONDITIONAL. 
Je  serais  loutf  or  louee,  1  should  be  praised^  etc 

IMPERATIVE. 

Sois  loud  or  lou(^e,  be  praised. 

soyons  loues  or  louees,  let  us  be  praised, 

soyez  loues  or  louees,  be  praised. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 

Que  je  sois  loud  or  loude,  that  I  (may)  be  praised^  tic 

IMPERFECT. 

Que  je  fusse  loud  or  loude,  that  I  (might)  be  prahed,  eto» 

PARTICIPLE. 
Etantloud  or  loude,  being  praised, 

COMPOUND  TENSES. 

INFINITIVE. 

Avoir  ^t^  lou^,  e,  to  have  been  praised. 

INDICATIVE. 
COMPOUND  OP   THE   PRESENT. 

J'ai  6t4  loud,  e,  /  have  been  praised,  etc. 

COMPOUND   OP  THE   IMPERFECT. 

J'avais  dtd  loud,  e,  /  had  been  praised,  etc. 

COMPOUND  OF  THE  PRETERITH. 

J'eus  dtd  loud,  e,  /  Iiad  been  praised,  etc, 

COMPOUND   OP   THE   FUTURE. 

J'aurai  dtd  loud,  e,  I  shall  have  been  praised,  eto. 

CONDITIONAL. 

J'aurais  dtd  loud,  e,  7  ^  ^    ,  ^      _       , , ,       .  •    »  ^« 

,,,      /        y  I  should  or  T  frould  hftve  been  praixM,  ft4:. 
J'eusse  dtd  loud,  e,    ) 


PASSIVB^ND    NEUTER    VERBS.  136 


]  COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT. 

Qne  j'aie  dte  loue,  e,  that  I  [may)  have  been  praised^  dc. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE    IMPERFECT. 

Que  j'eusse  dte  loue,  e,  that  I  (miyht)  have  been  prained. 

PARTICIPLE. 
Ayant  6td  lou6,  e,  having  been  praised. 

2.  The  English  preposition  hy,  with  the  passive  va*ce,^is  to  be 
rendered  by  de,  when  the  verb  denotes  a  sentiment  or  an  inward 
act  of  soul,  and  by  par,  when  it  expresses  an  outward  action. 
Ex. :  He  is  esteemed  by  everybody,  II  est  estime  de  tout  le  monde  ; 
the  city  of  Troy  was  taken  by  the  Greeks,  La  ville  de  Troie  Jut 
prise  par  les  Grecs. 

NEUTER  VERBS. 

3.  There  are  about  six  hundred  neuter  verbs  in  French,  of  which 
about  five  hundred  and  fifty  are  conjugated  with  avoir  in  the  com- 
pound tenses.  Of  the  remainder,  some  take  eitlier  etre  or  avoir^ 
according  as,the  idea  expressed  is  condition  or  state,  or  action. 

4   The  following  neuter  verbs  invariably  require  etre  : 

Alter,  to  go.  venir,  to  come. 

arriver,  to  arrive,  to  happen.  devenir,  to  become. 

choir,  to  fall  (rarely  used).  ititervenir,  to  intervene. 

d^^der,  to  decease.  parvenir,  to  succeed. 

Colore,  to  hatch.  provenir,  to  arise. 

mourir,  to  die.  revenir,  to  come  back. 

naitre,  to  be  bom.  sttrvenir,  to  happen. 
tombeTy  to  fall. 

Eramples: 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT. 

Je  Buis  arrivd  or  arriv4e,  /  have  (am)  arrived, 
tn  es  arrive  or  arrivee,  etc. 

COMPOUND   OF   TITB    IMPEBFBOT. 

J'^taia  arriv^  or  arriv^,  /  had  arrived,  cfc 


136  XXX.      TRENTIEME   LEgON. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   FUTUKB. 

Je  serai  arrive  or  arrivee,  /  shall  Jiave  arrived,  etc, 

CONDITIONAL. 
Je  serais  arriv^  or  arrivee,  /  should  have  arrived,  etc, 

5  A^courir,  cesser,  croitre,  dechoir,  degcn(?rer,  descendre,  disparaitre, 
^r;happer,  ^choir,  empirer,  entrer,  grandir,  monter,  partir,  passer,  pcrir, 
Tester,  sortir,  vieillir,  and  a  few  others,  are  conjugated  with  avoir  when  it  is 
the  action  or  fact,  with  etre  when  it  is  the  state  or  condition  expressed  by  the 
verb,  which  is  uppermost  in  the  mind.  Ex. :  La  riviere  a  mont^  rapidement, 
the  river  has  risen  rapidly.    II  est  mont€,  he  has  (is)  gone  up. 

VOCABULARY. 

La  hataiTle,  the  battle.  offenser,  to  offend. 

la  loi,  law.  envoyer,  to  send. 

le  voleur,  the  thief.  mordre,  to  bite. 

le  voyageur,  the  traveller.  blesser,  to  wound. 

lejiatteur,  the  flatterer.  d^molir,  to  demolish. 

la  la7igue,  the  language.  rehdtir,  to  rebuild. 

la  cour,  the  court.  tnaltraiter,  to  treat  ill,  abuse. 

le  chemin,  the  road.  enlever,  to  take  away 

vertneux,  -se,  virtuous.  sauver,  to  save. 

inconnu,  unknown.  attaquer,  to  attack. 

tester,  to  remain.  assassin^,  murdered. 

ttier,  to  kill.  parce  que,  because. 

enra^€,  mad. 

READING  EXERCISE  30. 

Men  fils  Theodore  est  aim^  et  loue  de  ses  maitres,  parce  qn'il  est 
appliqu^  et  attentif.  Gustave  Adolphe,  roi  de  Suede,  fut  tu^  a  la 
bataille  de  Lutzen,  h.  I'age  de  trente-sept  ans.  Si  vous  ^tes  ver- 
tneux, vous  serez  aim^s  et  estiraes  de  tout  le  monde.  Ayez  soin 
que  le3  lois  soicnt  ponctuelloment  observees.  Quiconque  les  ^rans- 
gresse,  sera  puni.  Le  soldat  qui  a  (^te  blesse,  est  mort.  La  mai- 
eon  qui  a  ^t^  demolie,  a  et^  rebatie.  Ce  pauvre  chien  est  bien 
maltraite  par  son  maitre.  Hier  je  fus  attaque  par  un  voleur.  Mon 
argent,  ma  montre,  tout  me  fut  enleve.  Deux  des  voyageurs  sont 
rest^  en  chemin ;  ils  ne  sont  pas  encore  arrives. 


PASSIVE    AND   NEUTER   VERBS.  137 

THEME  30. 

1.  T  am  loved  by  my  parents.  2.  Mr.  Bell  is  esteemed  by 
everybody.  3.,  The  French  language  is  spoken  in  all  the  courts  of 
Europe.  4.  Charles  was  bitten  by  a  mad  dog.  5.  Tliat  dog  must 
(rfo/V)  be  killed.  6.  This  ring  was  given  me  by  my  grandfather. 
7.  By  whom  was  this  letter  written  (^ecrite)'i  8.  It  was  written 
by  a  little  boy.  9.  Frederic  has  been  punished  by  his  teacher.  10. 
Have  you  been  invited  to  the  ball?  11.  No,  sir,  I  have  not  been 
invited.  12.  I  shall  perhaps  (^peut-etre)  be  invited  to-monow. 
13.  This  letter  must  be  sent  to  the  post-office.  14.  Flatterers  are 
not  esteemed.  15.  The  child  has  not  been  saved.  16.  It  would 
have  been  saved,  if  it  had  cried  for  help  {au  secours).  17.  The 
castle  was  built  in  the  year  1620.  18.  Those  brave  soldiers  will  be 
praised  and  rewarded.  19.  Will  jMr.  B.'s  garden  be  sold?  20.  It 
is  already  sold.        y 

CONVERSATION. 


\  I 


I    I 


Etes-vous  aim^s  de  vos  amis  ?       Nous  avons  toujours  ^t^  aim^s  de 

tons  nos  amis. 
Croyez-vous    que    mcs    ordres    Je  ne  le  crois  pas. 
1    soient  executes  ? 

nPar  qui  as-tu  ^t6  offens^  ?  Par  un  homme  inconnu. 

/  Les  bons  rois  sontrils  aim^s  ?         Us    sent    toujours    aim^s   et  es- 

tim^s. 
Ces  objets  seront-ils  vendus  ?         Non,  31  — ,  ils  ne  seront  pas  ven- 

dus. 
Par  qui  Henri  IV  fut-il  assas-    H  fut  assassin^  par  Ravaillac. 

sine  {murdered)  ? 
Dnns  quelle  annee  ?  Henri  IV.  fut  assassin^  en  1610. 

Quel  fut  le  sort  de  Charles  X  *?     Ce   roi  fut  exil^  {banished)   de 

France  en  1830. 
Par  qui  ces  jeunes  gens  ont-ila    Je  crois  qu'ils  ont  ^t^  blames  par 
^t^  blames?  leur  m:utre. 


138 


XXXI.     TRENTE  ET  UNTEME  LEgON. 


La  bataille  de  Leipsic  fiitrelle 
sanglanto  {bloody)  ? 


Voyez  cette  pauvre  fille  !  Qu'a- 

t-elle  done  ? 
N'a-t-on  pas  tu^  ce  chien? 

Qae  va-fron  (are  they  going) 
faire  de  cette  vicille  maison  ? 
A-vez-vous  bien  dormi  ? 


Tr^s-sanglante.  Boaucx)Tip  de 
soldats  et  d^officiers  furent  tu^s, 
et  encore  {still)  un  plus  grand 
nomlire  furent  blesses. 

Elle  a  ete  mordue  par  un  chien 
enrage. 

On  ne  Fa  pas  encore  tue,  mais  il 
sera  tue  tout  de  suite. 

Elle  sera  demolie  et  puis  rebatie 
h.  neuf  {anew). 

Non,  je  n'ai  pas  bien  dormi. 


-^ 


XXXI.     TRENTE    ET    UNI^ME    LE9ON 


REFLECTIVE  VERBS. 

Some  verbs  are  called  reflective,  because  tbeir  subject  and  object 
are  the  same  person  or  thing,  so  that  the  subject  acts  upon  itself, 
and  is,  at  the  same  time,  the  agent  and  the  object  of  the  action. 
Reflective  verbs,  therefore,  have  always,  besides  the  subject,  another 
personal  pronoun,  viz.  :  me,  te,  se,  myself,  thyself,  himself,  herself, 
itself,  for  the  singular ;  nous^  vous,  se,  ourselves,  youi'selves,  them- 
selves, for  the  plural.  But  it  frequently  happens  that  in  Elnglish 
the  second  pronoun  is  only  implied,  whereas  it  must  be  expressed 
in  French.  Ex. :  to  repent,  se  repentir ;  Pres.  I  repent,  je  im 
repent,  etc. 

Observe  that  all  reflective  verbs,  without  exception,  are  conjugat- 
ed with  the  auxiliary  etre,  as :  I  have  hurt  myself,  je  me  suis 
Hesse,  and  notje  m'ai  hlesse. 

The  conjugation  of  the  following  verb  may  serve  as  a  model  foT  all  the 
reflective  verbs. 


Kliaj'LECTIVE    VEKU3.  139 

Se  rejouir,  to  rejoice. 

INDICATIVK. 
PRESENT   TENSE. 

Je  me  r^jouis,  /  rejoice. 

tu  te  rejouis,  thou  rejoicest. 

il  (ellc)  BC  rcjouit,  fie  (she)  rejoices* 

nous  nous  rojouissons,  we  rejoice. 

vous  vous  rejouisscz,  you  rejoice. 

ils  (eilcs)  sc  rcjouisscnt,  tliey  rejoice. 

IMPERFECT* 

Je  me  n^ooissais,  /  rejoiced,  etc. 

PRETERITE. 

Je  me  rejouis,  /  rejoiced,  etc. 

FUTURE. 

Jd  me  r^ouirai,  /  shall  rejoice,  eto. 

^  CONDITIONAL. 
Je  me  rc^otiirais,  /  sixould  rejoice,  etc. 

IMPERATIVE. 

R^ouis-toi,  rejoice. 
n?jouissons-noiis,  let  us  rejoice, 
r^jouissez-vous,  rejcice. 

8UBJDNCTIVB. 
PRESENT. 

Que  je  me  rc^oubse,  that  I  {may)  rejoice,  etc. 

IMPERFECT. 

Que  je  me  rc^ouisse,  that  I  (might)  rejoice,  etc, 
PARTICIPLE. 

Se  (me,  te,  etc.)  rc^ouissant,  rejoicing, 

COMPOUND  TENSES. 
INFINITrVJfc 

8'#tre  r^joui,  e,  to  have  rpjoired. 


140  XXXI.      TRENTE   ET   UNIEME   LEQOS; 

INDICATIVE. 
COMPOUND    OF    THE    PRESENT* 

Je  me  suis  rejoui,  e,  /  have  rejoiced, 

tu  t'es  rejoui,  e,  thou  hast  rejoiced, 

fl  s'est  rejoui,  he  has  rejoiced. 

elle  s'est  rejouie,  she  has  rejoiced. 

nous  nous  sommes  rejouis,  ies,  we  have  rejoiced. 

Tous  vous  etes  rejoui(s),  ie(s^,  you  haverejoicedt 

ils  se  son t  rejouis,      ) 

eUes  86  sont  rejouies,  \  '^^^  '^""^  ^^^'^^^^^ 

COMPOUND   OF   THE    IMPERFECT. 

Je  m'^tais  rejoui,  e,  /  had  rejoiced. 

ta  t'etais  rejoui,  e,  thou  hadst  rejoiced,  etc, 

COMPOUND   OF   THE    PRETERITE* 

Je  me  fus  rejoui,  e,  I  had  rejoiced. 
ta  te  f us  rejoui,  e,  etc. 

COMPOUND   OP   THE   FUTURE. 

Je  me  serai  rejoui,  e,  /  shall  have  rejoicedm 
ta  te  seras  rdjoui,  e,  etc 

CONDITIONAL* 

Je  me  serais  rejoui,  e,  I  should  have  rejoiced, 
ta  te  serais  rejoui,  e,  etc, 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
COMPOUND   OF    THE    PRESENT* 

Que  je  me  sois   rejoui,  e,  that  I  (■may)  have  rejoioei, 
que  tu  te  sois  rejoui,  e,  etc. 

qu'il  se  soit  rejoui,  (qu'elle  se  soit  rejouie),  etc, 

COMPOUND   OF   THE    IMPERFECT. 

Que  je  me  fusse  rejoui,  e,  that  I  (might)  h&ve  rejoiced* 
que  tu  te  fusses  rejoui,  e,  etc. 

PARTICIPLE. 
SMtant  (m'^tant,  etc.)  r^oui,  e,  having  rejoiced. 


REFLECTIVE   VERBS.  141 

WITH   INTERROGATION. 
PRlsSENT. 

(Me  r^ouis-je),  better:  est-ce  que  je  me  r^ouis,  do  T rejoice? 
te  rejouis-tu  (or  est-ce  que  tu  te  rejouis),  dost  thou  rejoice  f 
Be  rejouit-il  [or  est-ce  qu'il  se  rejouit)  3  etc, 

nous  rejouissons-nous  1  etc. 

vous  rejouissez-vous  ?  etew 

se  r€jouissent-ils  (elles)  1  eftr, 

COMPOUND   OP   THE    PRESENT. 

Me  suis-je  n^oui,  e,  have  T  rejoiced  f 

t'es-tu  rejoin,  e,  hast  ifiou  rejoiced  f 

B'cst-il  rcjoui,  has  he  rejoiced  f 

s'esi-clle  rcjouic,  has  she  rejoiced  1 

nous  sommes-uous  rcjouis,  ics,  have  we  rejoiced? 

WITU  NEGATION. 

PRESENT. 

Je  ne  me  n^ouis  pas,  /  do  not  rejoice^ 
tn  ne  te  rejouis  pas,  etc, 

il  (elle)  ne  se  rejouit  pas,        etc. 
nous  ne  nous  r^jouissons  pas,  e/c. 

COMPODND   OF   THE    PRESENT* 

Je  ne  me  suis  pas  rc^joui,  e,  /  have  not  rejoioei» 
tu  ne  t'es  pas  rdjoui,  e,  etc, 

il  (elle)  ne  s'est  pas  rcjoui,  e,  etc, 

nous  ne  nous  sommes  pas  nfjouis,  ies,  etc^ 

IJIPERATIVK. 

Ne  te  rcfjouis  pas,  do  not  rejoice. 

ne  nous  rdjouissons  pas,  lei  us  not  rejoice, 

ne  vous  rejouisscz  ])us,  do  not  rejoice* 

INFINITIVE. 

Ne  pas  se  rdjouir,  not  to  rejoice. 

ne  pas  s'ctre  rcjoui,  e,  ncd  to  have  rejoiced* 


WITH   NEGATION    AND    INTEnKOQATION" 
PRESENT. 
Est-ce  que  je  ne  me  rcjouis  pas,  do  f  not  rejoioa? 
ne  te  rejouis-tu  pas,  (lost  thou  not  rejoice  t 
ne  se  r^jouit-il  pas,  doe»  he  not  rtjoicei  etc. 


142 


XXXI.      TRENTE   ET  UNIEME  LEgON. 


COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT. 

Ne  me  suis-je  pas  rejoui,  e,  have  I  not  rejoiced  f 
ne  t'es-tu  pas  rejoui,  e  1  etc. 

ne  s'est-il  (-cUc)  pas  rejoui,  e?  etc. 

ne  nous  somnies-nous  pas  rcjouis,  ies  ?  etc. 

Many  verbs,  neuter  or  passive  in  English,  have  in  French  the  reflective 
forni.    The  principal  are  :  — 


S'affliger,  to  be  sorry. 
s'aperccvoir,  to  perceive. 
s'approclier,  to  come  near. 
s'arreter,  to  stop. 
s'asseoir,  to  sit  duion. 
'se  baisser,  to  stoop. 
EC  coucher,  to  go  to  bed. 
86  dcpecher,  to  make  haste. 
s'ecrier,  to  exclaim,  cry  out. 
a'en  aller,  to  go  axvay. 
e'endormir,  to  fall  asleep. 
e'enrhumer,  to  catch  cold. 
8*entretenir,  to  discourse  with. 
s'etonner,  to  wonder. 
s'dvciller,  to  awake. 
Be  fier,  to  trust. 


I  to  fancy, 
f  to  make  haste. 


se  figurer, 

s'imaginer, 

Be  hater, 

Be  depecher. 

Be  lever,  to  rise,  to  get  up. 

8C  marier,  to  marry. 

Be  moquer,  to  mock,  scoff. 

Be  plaindre,  to  complain. 

Be  proraecfcr,  to  UJce  a  walk, 

se  repentir,  to  repent. 

Be  reposer,  to  rest. 

Be  soumettre,  to  submit. 

Be  souvenir,  to  remember 

Be  taire,  to  be  silent. 

Be  tromper,  to  be  mistaheiu 

se  vanter,  to  boast. 


Ex.  —  I  rise,  I  get  up,  /e  me  leve. 

I  have  risen  or  got  up,  je  me  suis  lev^. 

We  have  perceived,  nous  tious  sommes  aperpa,  etc. 

Observe  also  these  expressions  :  — 

How  are  you,  comment  vous  portez-vous  1 

I  am  well,  je  me  parte  bien. 

I  am  mistaken,  je  me  trompe. 

I  have  been  mistaken,  je  me  suis  tromp€. 

He  is  silent,  il  se  tait. 


VOCABULARY, 


La  conduite,  the  behavior. 
la  foret,  the  forest. 
U  boulet,  the  ball. 
te  titre,  the  right. 
la  Boheme,  Bohemia. 


vaillamment,  bravely.  r 

fondre,  to  cast,  .  -  •'^^  -'  -  ^ 
bien,  well ;  mieux,  better. 
se  venger  de,  to  revenge  on. 
Be  conduirCf  to  behave.      ^ 


li  u 

''  REFLECTIVE  VERBS. 

tard,  late.  se  distingxier,  to  distinguish. 

le  mal,  the  evil.  en/ermer,  to  shut  in. 

se  rendre,  to  surrender.  aauver,  to  save. 
se  coucher,  to  go  to  bed. 

READING    EXERCISE    31. 

Vous  vous  trompez,  Monsieur.  Je  me  suis  tromp^  aussj.  H  y 
i  (it  is)  tres-Iongtemps  que  nous  lie  "nous  (each  other)  somraes 
vns.  Le  general  Ostennann  s^est  distingud  beaucoup  a  Faffaire 
(battle)  de  Culm.  S'il  ne  s'^tait  pas  defendu  si  vaillamment,  Tar- 
mde  alliee  aurait  ^te  enforme^e  dans  les  montagnes  de  la  Boheme, 

Dan^iine  bataille  ou  les  .boulets  ennemis  volaient  (fleio)  autour 
de  lui,  Napoleon  s'ecria:  Le  boulet  qui  doit  (is  to)  me  t^er,  n'est 
pas  encore  fondu  (cast) .  Pourquoi  vous  eteS*-vous  leve  si  tard  ?  Je 
me  suis  levd  k  sept  beures.  Ne  vous  affligez  pas  tant,  mes  amis'; 
habituez-vous  h.  souflfrir'  avec  courage  les  maux  'de  la  vie.  VoUs 
auriez  et^  sauve,  si  vous  vous  etiez  refugid  au  camp. 

THEME  31. 

1.  I  rejoice  greatly  (heaucoup)  to  see  you  (de  vous  voir). 
2.  Charles  has  wounded  himself  with  a  penknife.  3.  The  enemies 
have  surrendered.  4.  A  good  Christian  does  not  revenge  himself 
on  (de)  his  enemy.  5.  The  soldier  has  distinguished  hunself ;  he 
will  be  rewarded.  6.  Get  up  I  7.  I  shall  get  up  directly.  8.  Has 
my  brother  got  ug?  9.  H^  (has)  got  up  at  six  o'clock.]  10.  Be 
not  sorry,  children,  exclaimed  he,  we  shall  all  be  saved !  11.  You 
are  mistaken.  Sir.  12.  Yes,  it  i§  true  (vrai),  I  have  been  mista- 
ken. 13.  Why  do  you  rejoice  at  the  (du)  misfortune  of  others  ? 
14.  When  do  you  go  to  bed?  15.  I  go  to  bed  at  eleven  o'clock; 
but  yesterday  I  went  (have  gone)  to  bed  at  ten  o'clQck.  16.  Make '^ 
haste  !  17.  Where  is  your  mother?  18.  She  is  not  at  home  (a  la 
maison)  ;  she  is  taking  a  walk.  19.  I  have  taken  a  walk  this 
morning.  20.  When  will  you  take  a  walk?  21.  I  shall  take  a 
walk  this  evening..  22.*^  How  are  you  to-day?  23.  I  am  well,  but 
my  brother  is  not  well.  24.  I  (have)  sto'ffpcd  at  the  gate  (porte), 
25.  Rest  a  little, -^4 <50Die  near  the  fire  (du  feu). 


144 


XXXI,      TEKNTE   ET   DKIEMB   LEgOK. 


OONYERSATION. 


Vons  vons  ^tcs  troinp6,  mou  ami, 

n'est-ce  pas  ? 
Quand  vous  couchcrez-YOUs,  mes 

enf  ants  ? 
A   quelle   heure  yous    €tes-YOUS 

couch ^  liicr  ? 
EtYotrefi-ere? 

Monsieur  Yotre  pSre  est-il  d6j^ 
lev6? 

Oh  ctes-vous  done  restSs  si  long- 
temps  ? 

Ta  soeur  s'est-elle  la^Se  (washed)  ? 

Qui  s'est  lav6  dans  cette  eau  ? 
Pourquoi  vous  gtes-vous  levCs  si 

tard? 
Qui  veut  se  promener  avec  moi  ? 
Vous  6tes-Yous  bien  amus6  ? 


Je  ne  me  suis  pas  tromp6. 

Nous  nous  coucherons  tout  de 

suite. 
Je  me  suis  coucli6  ^  dix  heures. 

Mon  fr6re  s'est  coucliG  d  onze 
heures. 

Oui,  il  s'est  lev6  aujourd'hui 
de  bonne  heure  {early). 

Nous  nous  sommes  ^garSs  (went 
.  astray)  dans  la  foret. 

Je  crois  qu'elle  ne  s'est  pas  en- 
core lav6e. 

Moi. 

Nous  ne  nous  sommes  pas  Sveil- 
16s  plus  tot  {earlifir). 

Ma  soeur  et  moi. 

Oui,  assez  (pretty)  bien. 


BEADING  LESSON. 


LB  SANSONNET. 


Levieux  chasseur  Maurice  avait  dans  sa  chambre  un  sansonnet 
qu'il  avait  61ev6,  et  qui  avait  appris  (learned)  si  articuler  qualques 
mots.  Quand  il  disait  par  exemple :  "  Sansonnet,  o\X  es-tu  ? "  I'oi- 
scau  r^pondait  tou jours  :  "  Me  voild !  " 

Le  petit  Charles,  fils  du  voisin,  aimait  beaucoup  I'oiseau  et  lui 
iaisait  (jyaid)  sou  vent  des  visites.  Un  jour  il  vint  voir  le  sansonnet 
pendant  que  le  chassem  6tait  absent;  il  s'empara  bien  vite  de  I'oi- 
Beau,  le  mit  (put  it)  dans  sa  poche  et  voulait  s'esquiver  avec  son 
larcin. 

Mais  dans  ce  moment  le  chasseur  entra  chez  Ijgj^^  II  crut  (thought) 


TMPESSONAL  VERBS.  14S 

fkire  plaiar  an  petit  gaicpn  en  demandant  (ty  ashing)  comme  de 
coutume :  **  Sansonnet,  ou  es-tu  ?  "  —  "  Me  voilk  !  "  cria  de  toutes 
ses  forces  (Aw  might)  I'oiseau  qui  ^ait  cach4  dans  la  poche  du 
petit  garden. 

C'est  ainsi  que  le  petit  voleur  fiit  trahi. 

Le  sansonnet,  the  starling.  vite,  quick. 

fe  mot,  the  word.  la  poche,  the  pocket. 

me  voila,  here  I  am.  s^esquiver,  to  run  away, 

U  vint,  he  came.  le  larcin,  the  larceny. 

pendant  que,  whilst.  de  coutume,  as  he  used  to  ^t 

s'emparer,  to  lay  hold  of  trahir,  to  betray. 


N 


XXXII.    TRBNTE-DEUXIEME    LE9ON, 


IMPERSONAL    VERBS. 

1.  Verbs  which  are  always  impersonal  form  their  compound  tenses 
by  means  of  the  auxiliary  avoir.     The  principal  are : 

Netger,  to  snow ;  Pros,  il  neige,  it  snows. 

pleuvoir,  to  rain ;  il  pleut,  it  rains. 

greler,  to  hail ;  i7  grele,  it  hails. 

tanner,  to  thunder ;  t7  tonne,  it  thunders. 

/aire  des  Eclairs,  to  lighten ;  il  fait,  des  Eclairs,  it  lightens. 

geler,  to  frcei^e  ;  U  gele,  it  freezes. 

d€geler,  to  thaw ;  tV  d^gele,  it  thaws. 

importer,  to  matter ;  il  imporie,  it  matters. 
Third  singular  negative  is  n*importe,  no  matter. 

2    Other  verbs  may  become  impersonal.     Ex. : 

J7  stiffit,  it  suffices.  il  convient,  it  is  convcnienf. 

il  semble,  it  seems.  U  arrive,  it  happens  (takes  itre). 

t2  v^a^mieux,  it  is  better.  il  g'agit,  it  is  the  question,  etc. 

U  me  tarde,  I  long.  U  rette^  there  remains. 
10 

1 


146  xxxii.    tbente-deuxiMb  LEgoir. 

MODELS    OF    CONJUGATION. 

1,  Neiger,  to  snow. 

INDICATIVE,  ,  8UBJTJNCa!rVE 

Present.  Tl  neige.  Qu'il  ndge. 

Imperfect,  77  neigeait.  qu'il  neigedt. 

Preterite.  Tl  neigea. 

Future.  77  neigtra. 

Comp.  of  Pres.  77  a  nAg€.  qu'il  ait  neig€. 

"       "  Imp.  77  avail  neig^.  qu'il  cut  neigf. 

"       "  Pret.  77  mt  neig^. 

"      "  Fut.    77  aura  neig€. 

Interrogatively:  Neige-t-ilf  neigeait-Uf  Ort-Undgii  etc 

CONDITIONAL. 
Pros.  Uneigerait.  Comp.  E  aurcUt  neigf. 

PARTICIPLE. 
Ftes.  Neigeant.  Comp.  Ayant  neig€. 

2.  D  y  a,  there  is,  there  are. 

INFINITIVE    MOOD. 
Y  avoir,  there  to  be. 

Ikdio.    Present.  II  y  a,  there  is,  there  are. 

Imperfect.  77  v  avail,  >  ^, 

■D  \    -^  Tl       .      f  there  was,  there  were. 

Preterite.  llyeut,     ) 

Future.  77^  a\ira,  there  will  be. 

Comp.  of  Pres.     77  y  a  eii,  there  has  or  have  been. 

"        Imp.     77  tl  avail  m,  }    ,        .    ,  , 
.<       T>    *      n       .  r  there  had  been. 

"        Pret.     flyeuleu,     ) 

COND.     Present.  77  y  aurait,  there  would  be. 

Comp.  77  y  aurait  eu,  there  would  have  beon. 

Interrogatively :  V  a-t-il,  is  there  ?  are  there  ? 

Negatively :  77  n'y  a  pas,  there  is  or  are  not. 

Negat.  interrogat. :      N'y  a-t-il  pas,  is  or  are  there  not  ? 
SUBJ.      Present.  Qu'il  y  ait,  that  there  (may)  be. 

Imperfect.  Qu'il  y  eut,  that  there  (might)  be. 

Comp.  of  Pres.    Qu'il  y  ait  eu,  that  there  (may)  have  been. 
"     Imp.   Qu'U  yeuieu,  that  there  (might)  have  been. 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS.  147 

Note  1.     This  verb  in  English  is  used  in  the  plural,  when  followed  by  a 
plural  substantive;  in  French,  it  remains  always  in  the  singrdar;  as, 
There  are  birds  which,  etc.  ;  il  y  a  des  oiseanx  qui,  etc. 

Note  2.    It  often  happens*  that  the  verb  il  y  a  is  rendered  ago,  these,  or 
for  these.     Ex. : 

I  saw  him  two  months  ago. 
Je  I'ai  vu  d  y  a  deux  mois.         • 

II  y  a  hult  jours  que  je  suis  malcuh. 
I  have  been  ill  these  eight  days. 

Ilest  ia  also  used  impersonally,  particularly  in  poetry,  in  the  senm  of 
ily  a. 

3.      //  fait  froid. 

Present,  //  fait  froid,  it  is  cold. 

Imperfect.  //  faisait  froid,  \  . 

r.  •.  /;    .-.   X-    -1  (It  was  cold. 

Preterite.  //  Jit  fruid,        ) 

Future.  //  fern  froid,  it  will  be  cold,  etc. 

Comp.  of  Pres.     //  a  fait  froid,  it  has  been  cold,  etc. 

Thus  other  expressions  denoting  the  state  of  the  weather :  77  fait  beauy 
it  is  fine  weather;  d  fait  chaud,  it  is  warm  ;  d  fait  jour,  it  is  daylight,  etc. 

The  English  "  it  is  said  "  is  rendered  in  French,  on  dit. 

4.  Ilfaut. 
INFTNITITE I  Falloir,  to  be  needful,  necessary. 
Indio.     Present.       //  faut,  it  is  necessary. 

Imperfect.    11  falldit,  )  ..  ^^„„  „„««eoo«r 
_  '  ,,      .'  yii  was  necessary. 

Preterite.     II  fa/lat,    ) 

Future.  77  faudra,  it  will  be  necessary. 

Comp.  of  Present.  77  a  fallu,  it  has  been  necessary. 

"       "  Imperfect.  7/  avait  fdlu.  >  j^  ,^^^j  ,^^^^  necessary. 

"       "  Preterite.  11  eut  fallu,       i 

'*       "  Future.  77  aura  fallu',  it  will  have  been  necessary. 

COND       Present.  11  fnut^ait,  it  would  be  necessary,  (  .  .  .  ought  to). 

Comp.  //  aurait  fallu,  it  would  have  been  necessary. 

INTEKROQATIVELY. 

Faut-Uf  fallait-il?  fallut'U?  a-t-d  fallu  ?  (is  it  necessary  ?  was  it  necessa- 
ry 1  has  it  been  necessary  ? ) 
ScBJ.        Present.      Qu'd  faiVr,  that  it  (may)  be  necessary. 

Imperfect.  Qu'd  fall  if,  that  \t  (might)  be  necessary. 
Comp.  of  Present.      Qu'd  aitfdlu,  that  it  (may)  have  been  necessajy. 

"       "  Imperfect.  Qu'il  eitt  fallu,  that  it  (might)  have  been  necessary. 


148  XXXII.      TRENTE-DEUXIEME  LEgON. 

PARTICIPLE. 
Present,  wanting.  Compound.  Ayant  faUu. 

Eeji.  1.  The  Tcrb  falloir  is  absolutely,  impeisonal  throughout  all  its 
tenses.  When  its  subject  is  a  p(^onal  pronoun,  as  :  /  must,  you  must,  etc., 
we  may  add,  for  the  first  person  me,  for  the  second  te,  for  the  third  /«?,  in 
the  plural  nous,  vous,  leur.  More  frequently,  however,  que  with  the  Sub- 
(imotive  mood  is  prefcn*ed.    Ex. :  — 

I  must  read :  il  mefaut  lire,  or  {/  faut  queje  Use. 
thou  must  read  :  il  te  faut  lire,  or  il  faut  que  tu  Uses. 
he  must  read  :  ]  {  il  faut  qu'il  Use. 

she  must  read :  )  '^  ^"'>"^  ^^'''  «^  |  il  faut  qu'elle  Use. 
we  must  read :  il  nous  faut  lire,  or  il  faut  que  nous  lisions. 
you  must  read :  il  vous  faut  lire,  or  ilfaut  que  vous  lisiez. 
they  must  read  ■  U  leur  faut  lire,  or  il  faut  qu'ils  Usent. 

I  have  been  obliged  to  read  :  il  m'a  fallu  lire,  etc. 

2.  When  the  subject  is  a  noun,  que  with  the  Subjunctive  mood  must  be 
ased.  It  must  further  be  o])ScrA-cd  that,  when  the  verb  falloir  is  used  in  the 
Present  or  Future  tense,  the  following  verb  must  be  put  in  the  Present  of 
the  Subjunctive ;  but  when  it  is  in  the  Imperfect,  Preterite  or  Conditional, 
the  verb  following  it  must  be  rendered  by  the  Imperfect  of  the  Subjunctive. 
Ex.:  — 

The  boy  must  work,  il  faut  que  le  gargon  travaille. 
The  boy  will  be  obliged  to  work. 

II  faudra  que  le  gargon  travaille. 
The  soldiers  were  obliged  to  retire. 

77  fallait  or  il  fallut  que  les  soldats  se  rettrassent. 

3.  When  the  verb  il  faut  is  followed  immediately  by  a  noun  substantive, 
it  signifies  to  want ;  here  also  one  of  the  pronouns  me,  te,  lui,  nous,  vou&,  leur, 
according  to  the  person,  must  be  inserted.     Ex. :  — 

I  want  (must  have)  a  hat,  il  me  faut  un  chapeau. 
lie  wants  some  money,  il  lui  faut  de  I'argent. 
We  want  some  bread,  il  nou^s  faut  du  pain. 
Did  you  want  some  books,  vous  fcUait-il  des  tivres  f 

VOCABULARY. 

Le  cmipte,  the  account,  bill  la  chaise,  the  chair. 

la  rethrigote,  the  coat.  cesser,  to  leave  off,  to  ceaso 

k  depart,  the  departure.  quitter,  to  leave. 


V 


^  IMPEESONAL  VERBS.  149 


la  rue,  the  street.  dessiner,  to  draw. 

le  sort,  (the)  fato.  partir,  to  set  out,  depart. 

la  chambre,  the  room.  honnete,  hoQcst. 

manquer,  to  be  wanting.  m^conient,  e,  discontented. 

gouvemer,  to  govern.  sageinent,  adv.  wisely. 

READING  EXERCISE  82. 

II  plent.  Je  crois  qu'il  pleuvra  demain.  J'entcnds  tonner.  H 
raut  mieux  (it  is  better)  qu'il  pleuvo.  II  a  neIg(S  toute  la  nuit. 
U  y  a  des  horames  qui  sonfc  toujours  m^contents.  II  fait  chaud  j 
II.  faisait  trop  chaud  dans  votre  chambre.  II  n'y  avait  ni  horames, 
ni  ferames,  ni  enfants;  II  faut  partir.  II  vous  faut  partir.  II 
fallait  venir  plus  tot  (earlier).  No  faudj:a-l>il  pas  lui  pardonner ? 
II  faut  que  Charles  reste  h.  la  maison.  II  fallut  que  Charles  rest^t 
k  la  maison.  II  me  fallut  lui  pardonner.  H  y  aura  cette  ann^e 
beaucoup  de  cerises.  II  faut  que  les  enfants  obi^issent  h  I'instant 
(instantly) .  II  y  a  eu  de  (at)  tout  temps  des  flatteurs.  H  a  fallu 
qu'elle  payat  son  compte.  II  y  a  un  Dieu  qui  -gouverne  tout 
sagement.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  vous  faut  ?  II  me  faut  une  autre  cham- 
bre. 

THEME  82. 

^  1.  Does  it  snow?  2.  No,  it  does  not  snow,  it  rains.  3.  It  is 
cold  to-day.  4.  I  shall  not  leave  the  room.  6.  Yesterday  it  was 
(has  been)  ver;^  cold,  and  it  (has)  srtowcd  a  great  deal  (beatccoup). 
6.  It  thunders  and  lightens.  7.  TIiotc  are  too  many  chairs  in  this 
room.  8..  There  was  nfuch  wine  on  the  table.  9.  Is  there  money 
in  the  pur^?  10.  There  are  six  francs  (francs)  in  it.  11 
There  will  be  a  great  many  nuts  this  yeai*.  12.  There  are  streets  ha 
London,  which  are  very  long.  13.  It  is  necessary  to  begin.  14. 
It  was  necessary  to  set  out.  /  15.  You  must  begin.  10.  Ho  must 
read.  17.  We  were  obliged  to  set  out.  18.  He  has  been  obliged 
to  speak.  19.  The  boy  must  work.  20.  The  gu:ls  must  draw. 
21.  My  father  has  been  obliged  to  go  to  Paris.  22.  Your  uncle 
will  be  obliged  to  leave  London.  23.  The  soldiers  were  obliged  to 
leave  the  town.     24.  I  want  a  good  pen.    25.  Do  you   want  an- 


150 


XXXII.      TRENTE-DEUXifiME  LEgON. 


other  room?     26.  Yes,  I  want  a  larger  room.     27-  What  do  yon 
want?     28.  I  want  or  I  must  have  {<h  V)  money.  \ 

CONVERSATION. 


Quel  temps  fait-il  aujourd'hui  ? 

Pleut-il? 

Pleuvra-t-il  ? 

La  pluie  a-t-elle  cesse  ? 

Que  vous  faub-il  ? 

Y  a-tril  assez  de  vin? 

Y  avait-il  de  I'ai'gent  dans  cette 
bourse  ? 

As-tu  paye  le  compte  ? 
Fautril  que  je  me  leve  mainte- 

nant  ? 
Vous   a-t-il  fallu  partir  de   si 

bonne  heure  (so  early)  ? 
Qui  a  pay^  le  diner  ? 
Faut-il  lui  rendre  (return)  I'ar- 

gent? 


II  fait  beau  (raauvais)  temps. 
Oui,  il  pleut  tres-fort. 
Je  ne  crois  pas  qu'il  pleuve. 
Pas  encore  ;  il  plout  sans  cesse. 
D  me  faut  une  redingote  neuve. 
Oui,  ^lonsieur,  il  y  en  a  assez. 
H  y  avait  deux  francs 

Oui,  il  m'a  fallu  le  payer. 

Oui,  il  faut  vous   lever   tout  de 

suite. 
Le    depart    4tait    fix4   k   quatre 

heures  et  demie. 
Mon  pere  I'a  pay^. 
Oui,  rendez-le-lui. 


READING  LESSON. 
PRODUCTIONS   DE   DIVERS    CLIMATS. 

La  providence  a  si  sageraent  arrange  toutes  choses,  que  chaqne 
climat  fournit  aux  habitants  ce  qui  leur  est  le  plus  indispensable. 
Dans  les  contr^es  poluires  il  fait  si  froid,  qu'il  ne  pent  y  croitre  ni 
fruits,  ni  cdrdales,  ni  legumes.  La  nature  y  a  suppl(5^  par  la 
grande  quantity  de  poissons  que  Ton  peche  dans  la  mer  et  dans  les 
lacs,  et  par'l'abondance  des  quadrupedes  qui,  a  la  vdrit^  (indeed), 
sont  la  plupaii;  (mostly)  sauvages  et  fc^roces,  mais  qui  fournissent  aux 
habitants,  aguerris  (accustomed)  h  les  poursuivre  a  la  chasse,  de 
tres-belles  fourrures,  de  la  chair  mangeable,  des  os  et  des  nerfs  qw'ilp 
emploient  pour  leurs  arcs  (hows)  et  pour  divers  ustensiles. 


FORMATION  OP  ADVERBS.  151 

Lcs  peuples  des  climats  chauds  ont  le  ver  k  soie  (^silkworm)  f 
qui  se  noun-it  des  fcuilles  du  ruuricr  et  qui  Icur  file  (spins)  un  1^ 
ger  tissu  dont  on  fait  des  etoffes  convcnables  h  la  tempdrature  du 
pays. 

Le  cotonnier  porte  des  gousscs  renfcrmant  le  coton  dont  le  tissu 
fournit  dgalcmont  {likewise)  les  plus  beaux  veteraents.  Et  pour 
preserver  lcs  habitants  de  la  zone  torride  de  rinflararaation  d'un 
sang  ti'op  dehauffe,  leurs  canipagncs  et  leurs  jardins  leur  fourn'ssent 
les  oranges,  les  citrons  ct  les  olives  qui  les  rafraichisscnt. 

Foiimir,  to  supply,  furnish.  la  chair,  the  flesh,  meat 

le  besoin,  the  need,  want.  I'os,  the  bone. 

la  contr^e,  the  region.  I'ustensile,  the  tooL 

croitre,  to  grow.  le  murier,  the  mulberry-tree. 

les  c&(fales,  com.  jUer,  to  spin.     %er,  light. 

les  letjumes,  vegetables.  le  tissu,  the  texture. 

pedier,  to  fish,    la  mer,  the  sea.  convenahle,  convenient,  fit. 

sauvage,  wild.  le  cotonni^,  the  cotton-plant. 

f€roce,  ferocious.  la  go^tsse,  the  [)od,  husk. 

aguerris,  hardened.  le  velement,  clothing. 

poursuivre,  to  pursue.  ^ItauJJ'i,  heated,  hot. 

UxfouTTure,  fur,  pelt.  rafraichir,  to  cool,  refresh. 


XXXni.    TRENTE-TROISIEME    LE9ON. 


FORMATION  OF  ADVERBS. 

Most  of  the  French  adjectives  become  adverbs  by  adding  the  syl- 
lable -went,  according  to  the  following  rules :  — 

I.    Adjectives  ending  in  a  vowel,  simply  add  the  final  syllable 
-mentj  as  :  — 

Facile,  easy ;  adv,  facilement,  easily. 
poll,  polite ;  adv.  polimerd,  politely. 
vrai^  true  ;  adv.  vraimentf  truly. 


152 


XXXni,     TRENTE-TROISLgME  LEgON. 


2  Adjectives  which  do  not  end  in  a  vowel,  add  the  syllable 
-ment  to  their  feminine  termination,  as  :  — 

Haul,  f.  haute,  high ;  adv.  hautement,  aloud. 
douxyf.  douce,  soft,  mild;  adv.  doucement,  softly. 
Ji-anc,  f./ranche,  frank;  &dY./ranchement,  frankly,  freely. 
heureux,  f.  heureuse,  happy ;  adv.  hcureusement,  happily. 

So  also  the  adjectives,  nouveau,  new ;  fou,  foolish,  and  mou,  soft ;  adv. 
nouveUement,  foliement,  molleiuent. 

3.  Adjectives  which  end  in  -ant  or  -ent,  become  adverbs  by 
changing  the  final  -ant  into  -amment,  and  -ent  into  -emment,  as  :  — 

Constant,  constant ;  adv.  constamment. 
prudent,  prudent ;  adv.  prudemment. 
patient,  patient ;  adv.  patiemment. 
Exceptions  to  this  rule  are:  lent,  slow,  adv.  lentement;  andpr^*«rrf,  pres- 
ent, adv.  presentement,  actually,  at  present. 

4.  The  folio wiijg  adjectives  take  an  e  accented  before  the  final 
•ment.  Profond,  deep,  profondcment ;  commode,  comfortable, 
commodement ;  commun,  common,  communement ;  precis,  precise, 
precisement;  enorme,  enoimous,  enormement;  expres,  express, 
expressement ;  impuni,  unpunished,  impunement. 

5.  All  these  derived  adverbs,  as  well  as  some  others,  are  oom- 
pai-ed,  as:  — 

COMP. 

Facilenient,  plus  facilement, 

commodement,  moins  commodement, 

souvent,  often ;  plus  souvent, 

longtemps,  long ;  plus  longtemps, 

loin,  far ;  plus  loin, 

6.  The  following  adverbs  are  irregular  in  the  formation  of  their 
oomparatives  and  superlatives  :  — 


SUP. 

le  plus  facilement. 
le  moins  commodement. 
le  plus  souvent. 
le  plus  longtemps. 
le  plus  loin. 


COMP.  SUP. 

Bien,we\l;  mieuar,  better;  lemieux,  (ih&)  best 

mal,  badly ;  pis,  worse  ;  le  pis,  the  worst. 

peu,  little ;  moins,  less  ;  le  moins,  the  least. 

beaucoup,  mnch;  plus,  more;  le  plus,  most, 

tant  mieux  is  rendered :  so  much  the  better. 
tant  pis,  80  much  the  worie- 


FORMATION  OP  ADVERBS.            163 

7.  When  either  le  plus  or  le  vioins  qualifies  a  verb,  adverb,  or  participle 
not  used  adjectivcly,  le  retains  the  masculine  form.  Ex. :  Une  lettre  dcriU 
le  plus  soigneusement. 

8.  The  following  adjcctivea  are  used  adverbially  without  taking  an  addi- 
tional termination,  as :  — 

Vite,  quick,  fast,  fort,  very.  expres,  purposely. 

haut,  loudly.  soiulain,  suddenly. 

bas,  in  a  low  voice.  droit,  straightways. 

VOCABULABY. 

L*Aai,  m.  the  state.  ponctudlement,  punctually. 

jach€*  sorry,  angry.  avouer,  to  confess. 

€yal,  equal.  mtretenu     (part.),   entertained, 

g^n^reuseineiit,  generously.  propre,  clean.                [amused. 

€toquemment,  eloquently.  rareinetU,  seldom. 

Aemel,  eternal,    agir,  to  act.  mafheuretisement,  unfortunately. 

marcher,  to  walk.  modestement,  modestly. 

n^gliger,  to  neglect.  probablement,  likely. 

occuj)€,  occupied.  extremement,  extremely. 

dessiner,  to  draw.  la  fortune,  property. 
oublier,  to  forget. 


REIDINQ  exercise  33. 

Vous  lo  trouverez  facilement.  Loff  gens  paresseux  negligent 
ordinaircment  leur^  affaires.  Agisscz  g^nereusenient  en  vers  vos 
ennernis.  Dieu  a  sageraent  distribud  ses  dons.  Parlez  modestement 
de  vos  merites.  Get  homme  a  parle  tics-elaquemment.  Henri 'lY. 
etait  constatnment  occupe  de  la  prosperitt^  dc  ses  ($tats.  Le  voleui 
marcha  doucement ;  il  avait  probablement  pear  d'etre  entendu.  Je 
suis  extremement  facbd  d'apprendro  cette  nouvelle.  Nettoyei 
mieux  vos  habits.  Vous  n'etes  pas  proprement  habill^.  Ne  ma^ 
chez  pas  si  lentement.  Les  enfants  qui  aiment  passionndment  lo  jeu, 
negligent  souvent  leurs  taches  (^taslcs). 

*  When  mimntng,  tony,  it  UUms  de  before  its  oU- :  meanlmg,  angry,  OMire. 


154 


XXXni.      TRENTE-TROISIEME  LEgON. 


THEME    33. 

1.  This  pupil  learns  (apprend~)  easily,  but  he  forgets  as  (aussi) 
easily  that  which  ho  learns.  2.  The  king  has  generously  pardoned 
(to)  his  enemies.  3.  Nobody  is  constantly  happy  in  <his  world. 
4.  The  name  of  Shakspeare  will  live  (vivra)  eternally.  5.  Speak 
frankly.  G.  My  brother  is  constantly  oecui)ied.  7  Confess  freely 
your  faults.  8.  Unfortunately  I  have  not  found  liim  at  home. 
9.  Speak  softly.  10.  The  artist  plays  admii-ably  (well).  11.  I 
have  seldom  received  letters  from  my  brother-in-law  (J)cau-frere). 
12.  Everybody  must  punctually  observe  the  laws.  13.  If  you  fulfil 
faithfully  your  duties,  you  will  be  esteemed  by  {de)  everybody. 
14.  You  have  stayed  longer  than  your  brother.  15.  The  little  girl 
draws  very  well ;  she  draws  better  than  her  sister. 


CONVEKSATION. 


Comment  parle  cet  homme  ? 

Avez-vous  des  nouvcUes  de  votre 
frere  h.  Paris? 


A-t-il  perdu  quelque  chose  'i 

.>Ionsieur  II.  est-il  fach^  ? 
Pourquoi  estril  fuche  V 

Comment    fjiut-il    agir  ?      (^IIow 

must  people  act?) 
Charles,  tu  es  malade  ;  qu'as-tu  ? 


Vous  ^tes  probablement  le  frere 
de  Monsieur  Kichard  ? 


n  parle  tres-eloquemnaenl  et 
tres-franchement. 

D  m'ecrit  {writes)  rareraenl 
Ileureusement  jc  sais  (know) 
par  un  de  ses  amis  qu'il  se 
porte  bien. 

n  a  probablement  perdu  unt- 
parti e  de  sa  fortune. 

Oui,  il  est  extrempment  fuch^. 

II  est  fTich^  centre  son  fils  qui 
a  ^te  mochant. 

n  faut  toujours  agir  prudem 
ment  et  honnet'^ment. 

J'ai  mal  a  la  tete  {head-ache) ; 
mais  heureu.sement  ce  n'est 
pas  grand'choee  {conse- 
quence) . 

Non,  Madame,  mais  ju  sois  son 
cousin. 


ADVERBS  OF  PLACE   AND  OF  TIME. 


166 


Comment  ce  g(5n^ral  a-t-il  agi  en-   II  a  agi  tres-g(5n^reusement. 

vers  ses  ennemis  ? 
Pourquoi   marchez-vous  si   lente-,    J'ai  mal  au  pi6d, 

ment? 
Cette  loi  eslrelle  observee  V  Ella  est  ponctuellement  obser- 

vee  de  tout  le  ^onde. 

V 


KXXIV.     TRENTE-QUATRIEME    LE9ON 

ADVERBS  OF  PLACE  AND  OF  yiME. 

1.  The  principal  adverbs  of  place  are  : 


Oh,  where  ?  whither  ? 
par  oiu,  which  wny  ? 
ici,  here,     d'ici,  hence, 
/a,  there,     de  la,  thence. 
Vi-^Kts,  llU'tTJ  IJUlUW,  yuilflcr. 
y,  there,  therein. 

par  ici,  this  way.    par  la,  that  way. 
par-ci,  par-la,  hei'e  and  there. 
~fa  el  la,  to  an<l  fro. 
aiUeurs,  elsewhere. 
dessous,  underneath. 
dessus,  above. 


within,  inside. 

f  doors 


en  luiut,  up,  up  stairs. 

ai  has,  down  stairs,  below. 

qtidque  part,  somewhere. 


2.  The  principal  adverbs  of  time 

Quand,  when  ? 

aujourd'hni,  to-day. 

hier,  yesterday. 

avani-hier,  the  day  before  yesterday. 

demain,  to-morrow. 


d'ou,  whence  1 
dedans, 
en  dedans, 
dehors,  without^jO] 
demere,  bcnind. 
devant,  before. 
de(;a,  en  dega,  on  this  side 
^jy,  r,i,ri,Jh^  r>l^  ^]im  nidi 
pres,  au})ris,  near. 
proche,  close  by. 
alentour,  round, about. 
/mill  11^,  ||\i  ijjiiihiimi    " 
"nulle  part,  nowhere. 
justpt'll,  as  far  as. 
jus(pt'ou,  how  far? 
loinjJaXfSMt  oiFr' 

are: 

un  j'ot/r,  one  day. 
autrefois,  jadis,  formerly. 
auparavant,  previously,  beforo, 
alors,  puis,  then. 
aprh»,  after,  afterwards. 


156  XXXIV.     TRENTE-QTTATRlfiME  LEgO^ 

aprha^emain,  the  day  after  to-mor-    jusqu'a,  until. 

row.  ensuite,  afterwards. 

enjiri,  at  last,  at  lcnp:th.  a  present,     \ 

,.,  7     ....  .  >  now,  at  present. 

tot,  soon,    plus  tot,  sooner.  maintenant,  ) 


bientot,  soon,     trop  tot,  too  soon.  qnehfOFfois,  someumes 

"Taiitot,  by  and  bj.  souvent,  often. 

aussitot,  directly.  longteinps,  long. 

tare/,  late.  toujours,  always. 

d'abord,  at  first.  deniih  iiUimt 


■**"""""'    {he'^forth.  '^^"^'•''' 


lately,  of  late. 


dor€navant,  )  deja,  already. 

des-lors,  from  then.  em>re^jiiill,..yot^ 

depuis,  since.  jamais,  everj^    ne jamais,  never 

JFAen  and  /«  toAic/i  are  rendered  by  ou,  after  a  noun  signifying  time  or  place. 

PLACE   OP   ADVERBS. 
Rem.  1.  In  the  simple  tenses,  the  adverb  is  generally  placed  immediately 
sifter  the  verb  which  it  modifies  : 

She  always  cries,  die  pleure  toujours. 
I  often  take  a  walk  with  my  friend. 
Je  me  promene  souvent  avec  nion  ami. 
Rem.  2.  When  the  verb  is  in  a  compound  tense,  the  adverb  generally 
comes  between  the  auxiliary  and  the  participle  ;  as, 

Je  I'ai  toujavcTS  respects,  I  have  always  esteemed  him. 
Je  me  suis  souvent  promen€  avec  mon  maiti'e. 
I  have  often  taken  a  walk'with  my  master. 
N.  B.  —  IJier,  avant-hier,  aujourd'hui,  demain,  apres-deinain,  tantdt,  t6t,  and 
uird,  always  follow  the  participle,  unless  placed  before  the  auxiliary. 

VOCABULARY. 

Le  temps,  the  weather.  le  hrou'dlard,  the  fog,  wS&t, 

le  village,  the  village.  I'ouvrage,  m.  the  work. 

la  grammaire,  the  grammar.  diner,  to  dine. 

content,  satisfied.  venir,  to  come. 

le  chevf,in  de  fer,  the  railroad.  laisser,  to  leave.     ^ 

READING    EXERCISE   34. 

Le  temps  estbiendoux  aujourd'hiii.    Mon  cousiu  est  enfin  arriv^ 
L'autre  jour  je  me  suis  ^gar6  dans  la  foret.     Travaillez  d'ubord  ei 


ADTEEBS  Ot  PLACE  AND   OP  TIME. 


157 


ensuite  joucz.  Avez-vous  jamais  vu  un  enfant  comme  celui-lk  ?  En 
effet,  iJ  est  extremement  gros.  Le  brouillard  aura  bientot  dispani. 
D'ou  vonez-vous  niaintcnant,  et  oil  avez-vous  ete  hior  ?  Voyez-voug 
CO  village  LVbas  ?  Eh  bien  (well) ,  j'y  ai  ete  bier  et  aujourd'huL 
J'y  vais  quelquefois.  M'avez-vous  apporte  la  grammaire  dout  jfl 
vous  aj  parle  ?  Voulez-vous  venir  diner  avec  nous  demain  "i  De- 
main  jc  ne  serai  pas  iei,  mais  apres-demain  ou  plus  tard.  Enfir. 
men  ouvra^e  est  fini. 


/ 


THEME    34. 


1.  Where  is  my  brother?  2.  He  is  not  here  ;  he  is  elsewhere, 
he  is  perhaps  yonder.  3.  I  will  go  (^firai)  that  way.  4.  Carry 
all  that  up  stairs.  5.  How  far  did  you  go  yesterday?  6.  I  went 
as  far  as  London.  7.  I  shall  go  nowhere  to-day.  8.  That  village 
is  not  far ;  do  you  see  (voyez-vous)  it  yonder  ?  9.  Where  is  my 
srammar?  10.  I  have  left  it  somewhere.  11.  Is  Edward  here? 
12.  No;  he  is  below.  13.  My  friend  will  not  stay  here  long.  14. 
I  saw  (have  seen)  your  sister  yesterday  at  the  play  (aw  spectacle) . 
15.  He  will  always  be  satisfied.  16.  Come  back  (^revenez)  soon. 
17.  Did  you  know  [have  you  known  (conim)'\  him  .formerly  ?  18. 
Yes,  I  have  known  him  long.  10.  Whence  does  the  letter  come? 
20.  It  comes  firom  America.  21.  Your,  dog  is  out  of  doors.  22. 
How  is  {se  porte)  your  aunt  to-day  ?  23.  She  is  better  to-day  than 
[she  was]  yesterday.  24.  I  hope  you  will  dine  with  us  to-morrow. 
25.  I  shall  go  soon  into  the  country  (a  la  campagne').  26.  We 
expected  him  the  day  before  yesterday.  27.  Formerly  there  were 
no  railroads.     28.  Henceforth  I  shall  be  very  diligent. 


L  snaji  oe  very  oi 

Til 


U 


158 


XXXV.      TEENTE'CINQUlfiME  LEgON. 


KXXy .    TRENTE-CINQUIEME    LE9ON 


ADVERBS    OF    NUMBER,   OF    QUANTITY, 
NEGATION,   ETC. 
The  adverbs  of  9nmber  are  : 


OF 


Premierement,  firstly. 

deuxiemement,  \  ,, 

(■  secondly. 
secondemeM,     > 

troisiemement,  thirdly. 

qiiatriemeinent,  fourthly. 

cinquiemement,  fifthly. 

The  piincipal  adverbs  of  quantity  and  comparison  are 


sixiemement,  sixth'.y,  etc. 

combien  ^e  fois,  how  often  ? 

une  fois,  once. 

deux  fois,  twice. 

trois  fois,  three  times,  etc 


about. 


at  most. 


Comment,  how"? 

combien,  how  much  ?  how  many? 

beaucoup,  much,  many. 

bien  (with  du,  de  I',  des  following)  a 

great  deal  or  many. 
trop,  too  much,  too  many. 
tant,  so  much,  so 'many. 
assez,*  enough,  pretty. 
peu,  little,     un  peu,  a  little. 
ne — giiere,  hardly. 
bien,  \ 
tres,  >  very. 
fort,)      '     . 
plus,  more. 
davantage,  still  mor^ 
mmn;,  less. 
tout, 
tout  a  fait, 

The  adverbs  of  aflfirmation  and  negation  are  : 
Out,  yes.    «',  yes.  ne  —  pflw,  not. 

certes,  certainly.  ne — plus,  no  more. 

peut-etre,  perhaps.  non  ptus,  nor  —  either. 

*  Assez  precedes  in  Frenob  the  noon  or  adjective  It  limits.    Ex. :  Assec  de  vln 
asaez  bon.    Bee  p.  32. 


presqxie,  almost. 

environ, 

a  pen  pres, 

si,  so.     ainsi,  thus. 

aussi,  as. 

€gcdement,  likewise.' 

autnnt,'SiS  much,  as  many. 

d'autant  plus,  so  much  the  moie 

plutot,  rather. 

surtout,  above  all.  * 

{  au  plus, 
\  tout^  au  plus, 

du  mains,  au  moins,  at  Iea£t. 

seulement,  }      . 
only. 


quite,  wholly,  entirely. 


ne  —  que 
meme,  even. 
pas  meme, 
pas  seulement, 


not  even. 


ADVERBS  OP  NUMBER,  OP  QUANTITT,  ETC.     159 

certainement,  I       ^  .  .  ,  ne  —  point,  not  (at  all). 

^         '  (  certainly,  to  be  sure.  »   .    .     . 

cusur^ment,     »  pas  du  tout,     (  .. 

.      ,  ( not  at  all. 

non,  no.  p<nnt  du  touty) 

presque  jamais,  scarcely  ever.  ne  —  rien,  nothing. 


There  are  dany  adverbial  locutions ;  those  most  in  use  are 

A  peine,  scarcely.  tout  a  coup,  suddenly. 

en  effet,  really.   " .  tout  d'un  coup,  all  at  once. 

stir  le  champ,  diroctjy.  "  a  droitt,  to  tJie  ri^ 

peu  a  peu^  hy  dt^p^rpfts.  a  gauche,  to  the  left. 

dans  peu  or  soi^  peu,  soon.  ensemble,  together. 

a  dessein,  on  purpose.  pele-mele,  pell-mell. 


en  meme  temps,  at  the  same  time.  -^^vance,  beforehand,  in  advance. 

a  la  fois,  at  once,  at  a  timgL    „  sans  doute,  no  doubt. 

de  bonne  heure,  early.  ,  tout  a  I'heure,  Vdircctly,  immediate- 

de  meilieiire  heure,  earlier.  tout  de  srtite,    \      ly. 

a  ban  march^,  cheap.  par  hasard,  by  chance, 

a  fond^^^QiQUQhif en  attendant,  meanwhile. 


par  mois,  monthly.  de  temps  a  autre, 


tune. 


par  an,  yearly,    par  jour,  daily.  de  temps  en  temps,  )  from  time  to 

OF   NEGATION. 

1.  Not  is  translated  into  French  by  ne,  which  is  placed  before  the  verb, 
and  pas  or  point  after  it,  in  simple  tenses.     Ex. : 

Je  ne  veux  pas,  I  will  not,  I  do  not  wish. 
Je  ne  sais  pas,  I  do  not  know. 

2.  In  compoand  tenses,  ne  comes  before  the  auxiliary,  and  peu  after  it. 

Ex.  : 

Je  n'ai  pas  vu,  I  have  not  seen. 
EUe  n'o  pas  parU,  she  did  not  speak. 
Point  is  merely  a  stronger  negative  than  pas,  as  : 
Je  n*ai  ^point  parU,  I  did  not  speak  (at  all). 

3.  Ne  is  employed  without  pas,  if  there  is  in  the  sentence  a  pronoun  or 
adverb  expressing  negation,  such  as  personne,  nul,  rien,  jamais,  ni,  ne — plm. 
point,  guere.     Ex. :  ... 

Je  ne  connais  personne,  I  know  nobody. 
Je  ne  veux  rien,  I  wish  for  nothing. 
Je  ne  sais  plus,  I  know  no  more. 
EUe  n'a  jamais  dit  cela,  she  never  said  so. 

4.  If  one  of  the  negations  is  followed  by  a  noun  in  the  partitive  aenae, 
tbii  noun  is  simply  preceded  by  de: 


160  XXXV.      TRENTE-CINQUIEMB  LEgON. 

Affirmative :  Tai  du  pain,  I  have  some  bread. 
Negative  :  Je  n'ai  pas  de  pain,  I  have  no  bread. 
Affirmative :  Avez-vous  de  I'argent,  have  you  any  money  1 
Negative :  Je  n'ai  point  d'argent,  I  have  no  money, 

5.    With  the  infinitive,  ne — pas,  ne — point,  ne  —  rien,  etc.,  are  generally 
GOt  separated,  as : 

A'e  pas  se  venger,  not  to  revenge  one's  self. 

Ne  plus  €crire,  to  write  no  more. 

Ne  rien  mangir,  to  eat  nothing, 
t)     Without  a  verb,  the  negatives  stand  without  n«,  as : 

Pas  a  la  fois,  not  at  once.     Pas  moi,  not  I. 

Pas  beaucoup,  pas  trop,  pas  tant,  pas  aitjourd'hui, 

7.  Nonplus,  nor — either, requires  the  full  negation  ne — pas  before  it, as. 

Je  ne  le  veux  pas  non  plus,  nor  will  I  have  it  either. 

8.  If  nor  —  either  is  connected  only  with  a  noun  or  pronoun,  withoxit  « 
verb,  the  noun  or  the  pronoun  is  preceded,  in  French,  by  ni,  as : 

Nor  Charles  either,  ni  Cliarles  non  plus. 
9    Observe  the  expression  ne — que  for  only,  as : 

Je  n'ai  que  deux  scsurs,  I  have  only  two  sisters. 
II  n'a  qu'un  morceau  de  pain,  he  has  only  a  piece  of  bread. 
Elle  n'a  apport€  qu'une  assiette,  she  brought  but  one  plate. 
L' enfant  n'a  que  dix  ans,  the  child  is  only  ten  years  old. 
H  n'est  que  six  heures,  it  is  only  six  o'clock. 

VOCABULAEY. 
La  fois,*  f.  the  time.  inoul,  e,  unheard  of. 

le  crime,  the  crime.  amicalement,  friendly. 

travailler,  to  work.  "^     '      ^viter,  to  shun. 

laconique,  laconic.  7^^^  soci€le',  the  society. 

re/ttser,  to  refuse.  mcra,  thank  you. 

READING  EXERCISE  85. 

'Jo  crime  est  tout-^-fait  inoui.  Comment  vous  portez-vous  ?  Je 
TQ'e  porte  tres-bion.  Combien  d'aunes  de  ce  drap  vous  faut-il  ?  D 
m*eQ  faut  beaucoup;  il  m'en  faut  au  moins  trcnte  aunes.  Vous 
etes-vous  proraon^  longtemps  ?    Je  me  suis  promen^  environ  deux 

*  When  the  noon  tiroes  denotes  repetition,  as  the  number  of  timee,  it  is  trans- 
lated hyfois. 


ADVERBS  OF  NUMBER,  OF  QUANTITY,  ETC.     161 

heures ;  peut-Stre  un  pen  moins.  Votre  tante  va-t-elle  souvent  au 
spectacle  ?  Elle  n'y  va  {goes)  presque  jamais,  et  mon  oncle  n'y  va 
pas  du  tout.  Monsieur,  vous  avez  peu  de  fautes  dans  votre  traduo- 
tion.  Combien  en  ai-je  ?  Vous  en  avez  moins  que  votre  fi*ere ; 
vous  n'en  avez  que  deux  ou  trois,  tout  au  plus  quatre.  J'ai  appria 
(hamed)  ma  lejon  par  coeui'.  Habillez-vous  tout  de  suite.  C'est 
en  vain  que  vous  chercbez  k  le  sauver.  Marcbez  k  droite ;  moi,  je 
marcbcrai  ^  gauche.  Sans  doute,  cela  vaut  mieux.  J'ai  achate  oe 
tableau  k  bon  march^. 

THEME  35. 

1.  How  much  sugar  have  you  bought?  k.  How  many  lessons 
a  (  par)  week  have  you  ?  3.  You  eat  too  much ;  you  must  eat  less. 
4.  IThat  young  man  works  too  much.  5.  Give  him  a  little  money. 
6. /Give  me  more  time.  7.  There  were  many  ladies,  and  we  had  a 
great  deal  of  pleasure.  8 J  Have  you  not  played  enough?  9.  I 
think  (that)  you  will  not  have  it.  10. 1  Mr.  A.  is  a  very  laconic 
man;  he  always  answers  yes  or  no.  11.  It  is  better  not  to  reftise 
him.  12}  I  have  only  one  brother,  and  my  cousin  has  only  one  sis- 
ter. 13.  She  is  only  five  years  old.  14.f  I  have  never  seen  her. 
15.  She  never  comes  to  our  house  {chez  nous).  IQ.fWe  certjunly 
shall  go  out  {sortirons)  together.  17.  My  father  has  bought  a 
horse  very  cheap.  18.  | Have  you  seen  anybody?  19.  I  have  seen 
nobody.  20^  The  thunder-storm  came  on  suddenly.  21.  I  got  up 
early;  earlier  than  my  brother.  22 1  You  must  always  shun  the 
society  of  these  bad  people.  23.  Go  (allez)  to  the  right.  24^  I 
shall  go  to  the  loft  ;  we  shall  arrive  at  the  same  timei 


CONVERSATION. 

Oomment  trouvez-vous  le  temps  Je  le  trouve  fort  beau  (or  blen 

aujourd'hui  ?  beau) . 

Voici  du  jambon.      En  voulez-  Donnez-m'en   un    peu,   s'il  V0U5 

vous  ?  plait  (  please) . 

Rn  voulez-vous  davantage  ?  Non,  merci,  j'en  ai  a3se?!. 
U 


162 


XXXVI.      TRENTE-SIXIEMB   LE^ON. 


Serez-vous  ehez  vous  (at  home) 

deraain  matin  ? 
A  quelle  heure  avez-vous  din^ 

bier  *? 
Dinerez-vous  aujourd'hui  k  la 

m§me  heure  ? 
Que  ferez-vous  (wiU  you  do) 

pendant  ce  temps  ? 
Avez-vous  fait  cela  k  dessein  ? 
Avez-vous  fini  votre  theme  ? 

Quo  fait  cette  petite  fille  Ik-bas  ? 

Connaissez-vous  cet  ouvrage 
{work)  ? 

Avez-vous  lu  (read)  ce  livre  ? 

Quand  voulez-vous  venir  jouer 
avec  moi  ? 

Comment  vous  portez-vous  ? 

Et  Monsieur  votre  pere,  com- 
ment se  porte-t-il  ? 


% 


Assur^ment,  je  serai  chesi  moi 
toute  la  journee  (day). 

Hier  j'ai  din^  k  cinq  heures  pre- 
cises. 

Non,  aujourd'hui  je  ne  dinerai 
qu'k  six  heures. 

Je  me  promenerai  en  attendant 

Non,  je  ne  I'ai  pas  fait  expres. 
Je  ne  I'aurai  guere  fini  avant  Scpt 

heures. 
EUe   cherche  des  fraises  (straw- 

berries) . 
Cet  ouvrage  m'est  tout-k-faif  in- 

connu. 
Je  I'ai  lu  plus  de  deux  fois. 
Je  finirai  d'abord   ma  tache    et 

apres,  nous  jouerons. 
Je  me  porte  k  merveille. 
II   se   porte  assez  bien.      II   est 

sorti  hier  pour  la  premiere  foip 


^  ^XXYI. 


TRENTE-SIXIEME    LE9ON 


CONJUNCTIONS. 
The  principal  simple  conjunctions  are  :  — 


Et,  and. 

et  —  et,  both  —  and. 

ou,  or. 

ou — ou.  either — or. 


pourtant,  yet,  still. 
n^anmoins,  nevertheless. 
$i,  if,  whether. 
sinon,  if  not. 


CONJUNCTIONS.  163 

(^—ni,  neither — nor.  comme,  aa. 

que,  that,  than  (after  a  comp.\  or,  now. 

car,  for.  done,  conseqnently,  then. 

mais,  but.  puisqrte,  since,  as. 

toiUefois,     >  juoique  (with  the  Sabj.),  ihongh. 

cq^eruLint,  f  ^^owever. 

1.  Among  these  simple  conjunctions,  only  one  governs  the  Sul> 
junctivc  mood,  viz.  :  quoique,  though  or  although.  Ex. :  qtmque 
je  8ois  mdlade,  though  I  am  ill. 

For  the  Subjunctive  after  qtie,  see  P.  II.  L.  19. 

2.  Si  denotes  a  condition  or  supposition :  «'*7  vient,  if  he  comes  ; 
«'  vous  voulez,  if  you  like.  When  si  is  followed  by  an  Imperfect 
or  Pluperfect,  those  tenses  are  always  in  the  Indicative  mood.  (See 
P.  n.  L.  19.) 

If  I  had,  si  f  avals ;  If  I  were,  si  f^ais  / 
If  I  had  seen  him,  si  je  Vavais  vu. 

NoTB.  The  t  in  n  is  cut  off  before  U  and  tZs,  but  nowhere  else,  as  :  t^H 
avail,  but  si  die  avait^  etc. 

3.  The  conjunction  ni  —  ni  requires  ne  before  its  verb,  and  the 

noun  which  follows  it  takes  no  article,  if  used  in  the  partitive  sense, 

as:  — 

Je  n*ai  ni  pire  ni  mhe,  I  have  neither  father  nor  mother. 

4.  The  conjunction  que  serves  to  connect  two  ideas  so  as  to  form 
of  the  two  one  sentence,  as  : 

Je  crois  que  vous  avez  raison,  I  believe  you  are  right. 

In  English  the  conjunction  that  is  almost  always  understood,  nrhereu 
Ttie  is  not  only  always  expressed  in  French,  but  repeated  before  each  mem- 
ber of  the  proposition,  as :  — 

Je  crois  que  vous  avez  raison  et  que  vous  r€ussirez. 

I  think  you  are  right  and  that  you  will  succeed. 

5.  ^Vhen  a  conjunction  governs  several  verbs,  it  is  placed  before 
the  first  verb  only,  and  qiie  is  used  before  the  other  verbs.  Ex. : 
As  he  is  diligent  and  takes  pains,  comme  il  est  ajyplique  et  quHl 
prend  de  la  peine. 


164  XXXVI.      THENTE-SIXIEME  LEgON. 

6.  Done  is  often  used  like  the  English  auxiliary  cfo,  to  urge  or  incite.  Ex., 
Taisez^vous  done,  do  be  silent.  It  is  also  used  interrogatively :  Cert  done 
votes  qui  avez  fait  celaf 

VOCABULARY. 

Piter,  to  bend.  le  bien,  the  good. 

lever,  to  lift  up.  phis — plus,  the  more  —  ihe  more. 

raoile,  f.  the  star.  plus —  mains,  the  more  —  the  leas. 

^mV,  e,  exhausted.  mains — ma/ns,  the  less  —  the  less. 

ayare,  avaricious.  soit — swf ,  be  it -^  or. 

savant,  learned.  tantot — tantdt,  sometimes  —  some- 

rompre,  to  break.  times,  now  —  then. 

habiter,  to  inhabit.  ni  — nan  plus,  nor  —  either. 

READIN6  EXERCISE  36. 

L'ambition  et  I'avarice  sont  deux  grandes  sources  du  malheur  hu- 
main.  Les  discours  irapies  (impious')  gfitent  k  la  fois  Tesprit  et  le 
coeur.  Cette  eau  est  froide  comme  de  la  glace.  Votre  tableau  est 
pr^cieux,  mais  il  ne  me  plait  (please)  pas.  II  arriva  comme  je 
sortais.  Elle  n'est  ni  laide  ni  belle.  Vous  vous  arausez,  et  cepen- 
dant  le  temps  fiiit  (flies).  Cet  homme  est  tres-fort,  et  pourtant  il 
ne  peut  pas  lever  ce  fardeau  (weight).  Ou  vous  me  paierez,  ou 
vous  irez  en  prison.  Donnez-moi  de  I'eau,  s'il  vous  plait.  Martin 
est  encore  bien  jeune,  n^anmoins  il  est  fort  sage.  Bienheureux  sont 
coux  qui  airaent  la  paix,  car  ils  seront  appeles  les  enfants  de  Dieu. 
Vous  ne  le  savez  pas  ?  Ni  moi  non  plus.  Tantdt  il  veut  une  chose, 
tantot  il  en  veut  une  autre. 

THEME  30. 

1.  Gold  and  silver  are  metals.  2.  Silver  is  less  useful  than  iron. 
3-  Mr.  A.  is  very  inconsistent  (inconsequent)  ;  he  is  sometimes  of 
one  opinion  (avis,  m.)  and  sometimes  of  another.  4.  I  like  you,  as 
I  know  (sais)  that  you  are  always  attentive.  5.  This  man  is  es- 
teemed by  everybody,  even  by  his  enemies.  6.  I  am  very  glad  to 
see  that  you  do  pot  love  flattery.  7.  Some  one  has  done  it,  either 
you  or  your  brother.  8.  The  more  you  will  work,  the  more  you  will 
gain.     9.  This  horse  may  be  very  strong,  nevertiheless  it  does  not 


^ 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


105 


pleafie  me  10.  The  longer  the  days  (are)  (constr.  the  more  the 
d.  are  long),  the  shorter  (are)  the  nights.  11.  Though  he  said 
(dtt)  (that)  he  had  no  appetite,  yet  he  ate  all  the  meat  and  bread. 
12.  Nobody  knows  whether  the  stars  are  inhabited  or  not.  1  13.  The 
reed  bends,  but  does  not  break.  14.  Do  aot  bend  the  bow  too 
much,  jotherwise  it  will  break.  15.  The  more  I  sang,  the  less  em- 
barrassed I  was.  16.  If  you  do  (fakes)  it,  you  will  be  punished. 
17.  He  appeared  (pamissaiC)  very  modest,  although  he  was  vfery 
learned.  18.  In  order  to  be  learned,  you  must  study  much.  19. 
I  punish  him  as  he  deserves  (>t)-  20.  You  must  stay  at  home, 
since  you  are  not  quite  well. '  21.  When  he  had  done  speaking 
(Jini  de  parler),  he  was  quite  exhausted.  22.  If  I  had  had  faith- 
ful friends,  I  should  not  be  so  unhappy.  23.  You  will  be  happy, 
if  you  do  your  duty  (devoir).  24.  I  was  sleeping  when  your  se^ 
vant  entered  (enira). 


CQNVEESATIOJf. 


X 


vous  heureux,  men  ami  ? 


Je  le  serais,  si  j'avais  de 
livres. 
Si  ce  n'est  que  cela,  je  peux    Je  vou   en  serais  tr^s-obligd. 

vous  en  douner.    En  voulez- 

vous? 
Quelles  sont  les  deux  grandes    L'ambition  et  ravarice. 

sources    du     malheur    dea 

hommes  ? 
Que  faitK)n  souvent,  quand  on     On  fait  souvent  des  sottises. 

est  jeune  ? 
Que  dit  J^sus-Christ  de  ceux     II  dit  qu'ils  seront  appel^s  **en 

qui  aiment  la  paix  ?  fants  de  Dieu." 

Que  veut  cet  enfant  ?  E  vcut  tantot  ceci,  tantot  cela. 

Comment    trouvez-vous    cette     Elle  n'est  ni  belle  ni  laide. 

demoiselle  ? 
Ne  pouve2-vous  pas  lever  cette    Je  ne  peux  pas  la  lever,  quoique 

piexre  ?  je  sols  tres-fort. 


■\ 


J 


166  XXXVI.     TRENTE-SIXIEME  LE^ON. 

Comment    Dieu   traite-t-il    les  H  les  traite  comme  un  pere  traite 

hommes  ?  ses  enfants. 

Quelle  propridt^  a  le  roseau?  H  (se)  plie  et  ne  rompt  pas. 

Quand  faut-il  forger  le  fer  ?  Quand  11  est  cbaud. 


READING  LESSON. 
LAFITTB. 

Lorsque  Jacques  Lafitte  vint  (came)  k  Paris,  il  se  pr^senta  chez 
M.  Perregaux  dans  I'esperance  d'obtenir  une  place ;  mais  le  banqriier 
lui  annon^a  qu'il  ^tait  dans  rimpossibilit^  de  satisfaire  k  sa  demande, 
puisque  les  bureaux  etaient  au  complet. 

Lafitte,  d^courage  par  ce  refus,  s'eloignait  tristement,  lorsqu'en 
traversant  la  cour  de  T hotel,  il  apcr9ut  k  terre  une  ^pingle ;  il  la  rar 
massa  et  la  piqua  sur  sa  manche.  M.  Perregaux  ayant  vu  Taction 
du  jeune  solliciteur,  en  fut  frapp4  {struck) ,  et  pensa  qu'il  devait 
etre  dou^  d'un  esprit  d'ordre  et  d'^conomie.  II  le  fit  rappeler  et  lui 
dit  qu'il  pouvait  compter  sur  une  place  dans  sa  maison.  En  effet, 
pen  de  jours  apres,  le  jeune  Bayonnais  entra  chez  le  riche  banquier, 
et  chacun  salt  que,  plus  tard,  il  est  devenu  un  homme  riche  et  c^le- 
bre. 

Ves.pcrance,  hope.  ramasser,  to  pick  up. 

le  bureau,  the  office.  la  manche,  the  sleeve. 

s'f.Iolgner,  to  retire.  doue,  endowed. 

une  cpingle,  a  pin.  en  effet,  indeed. 


i^ii. 


COKJUNCTTTK  PHRASES. 


167 


XXYII.    TRENTE-SEPTIEME    LEQON. 


CONJUNCTIVE  PITRASES. 


of  these  are  adverbs  or 
yrne  require  tbe  following  verb 
the  Jnjinilive,  and  others  again 
1.    Conjunctive  phrases  with 

Ou  bien,  or,  else. 

ni — non  plus,  neither,  nor  either. 
au  contraire,  on  the  contrary. 
non  texdeinent — mai*  encore^  not 

only  —  but  also. 
de  plus,  moreover. 
autant  que,  as  much  aa. 
apres  que,  after,  after  that. 
qxiaixd  meme,  although. 
«  toutefois,  if  however. 
c'est-h-dire,  namely 
^est  que, 
parce  que 

tandis  qtie,  whereas. 
pendant  que,  while,  whilst 
tant  qtije,  as  long  as. 


propositions  united  with  que  or  dc. 
in  the  Indicative  nioodf  otherg  in 
in  the  Subjunctive. 
the  Indicative :  — 


as  soon  as. 


1 


as. 


J 


because. 


Aussi  bien  que,  as  well 

aussitot  que^  ) 

des  que,         ) 

de  mime  que. 

ainsi  que, 

au  teste,  ) 

rfu  r«f«,  r  °^«^"- 

de  la,  hence  it  follows. 

h  peine  —  que,  scarcely — aa. 

c'est  jxmrquoi,  therefore. 

par  consequent,  consequently. 

comme  si,  as  if. 

de  mime,  thus,  in  the  same  waj. 

tans  cela,  otherwise,  elsfli 

depuis  que,  since. 

tout  —  que,  however 


2.  With  the  Infinitive  mood: 
AJln  de,  in  order  to,  to. 
a  moins  de,  unless. 
am»i  c/«,  before.     , 
au  Ueu  de,  insteai^  of. 

3.  With  the  Subjunctive  mood: — 


^  \ 


depeurde,     >.     .         . 
decraintede,\^'''^^''^' 
loin  de,  far  from. 
ptutot  que  de,  rather  thaiL 


that,  in  order  that 


AJin  que 

'  pour  que 

[avant  que,  before. 

h  moins  que,  t  >       , 

r  unless,  till. 


que 


non  que,  not  that. 

nonobstant  que,  notwithstanding, 

that. 
pour  peu  que,  however  little. 
pourvu  que,  provided  (that). 


lose  marked  wUb  a  f  require  ne  before  the  following  verb. 


l68  XXXVII.      TBENTE-SEPTlfiME  htqO^. 

Hen  que, ")  though,  quelque — que,  however — thoTigh. 

quoique,  >  althongh.  sans  que,  without  that. 

jusqu'a  ce  que,  till/untU.  si  ce  n'est  qxie,  unless,  till. 

toin  gue,  ias  irom.  «oz7  (j-tic,  whether —  or. 

4.  Besides  the  above-mentioned  conjunctions,  there  are  other  con 
junctive  expressions  (locutions  conjonctives),  which  have  been 
borrowed  from  other  classes  of  words,  and  to  which  the  conjiinctici] 
que  is  added.     Such  are  : 

A  condition  que,  on  condition  that 

de  peur  que,*  t    )  ^^^^^ 

de  crainte  que,*^  )        * 

de  maniere  que,      )  ^  ^,    ^ 

^  ^  SO  as  to,  so  that 

de  or  en  sorie  que,  ) 

au  cos  que,  in  case  that.*  .... 

suppose  que,  supposing  that.*  .... 

mJcdgr€  que,  for  all  that,  notwithstanding.* 

txmtes  les  fois  que,  as  often  as. 

peut-etre  que,  perhaps  that 

attendu  que,  considering  that 

a  ce  que,  according  as,  as  far  as,  etc. 

HT.  B.  —  Those  marked  with  an  *  govern  the  subjunctive, 

VOCABULARY. 

La  suite,  the  consequence.  pret,  ready. 

la  machine  a  vapeur,  the  engine.  la  princesse,  the  princesb 

la  mimoire,  the  memory.  la  guerre,  war. 

occuper,  to  occupy.  amhitieux,  ambitious. 

mettre,  to  put,  place.  V€ducation,  f.  education. 

preserver,  to  preserve.  regarder,  to  look  at. 

READING   EXERCISE   37. 

Aussitot  que  la  machine  h  vapenr  fut  construite  (built),  elle  fof 
noise  en  mouvement  (put  in  motion),  pour  Fessayer.  Quelque 
grande  que  soit  cette  fante,  11  faut  cependant  la  pardonner.  Des 
qu'il  me  vit  (saw)  il  courut  (ran)  k  raoi.  Pendant  que  nous  etions 
occup^s  k  faire  notre  tache,  on  cria  au  feu  (fire)  I  ■  La  m<^moire  de 
Henri  IV.  sera  toujours  chere  aux  Fran9ais  parce  qu'il  mettait  sa 
gloire  k  les  rendre  beurpn-?      Que  le  ciel  vous  preserve  d'un  pare'l 


■  r^ 


r 


CONJUNCTIVE   PHRASE^.  169 

(jucK)  malheur  !  Le  malado  ne  boit  (drinks)  ni  ne  mange.  Tan? 
que  ma  mfcre  sera  k  la  campagne,  je  resterai  avec  elle.  Tandis  qm 
nous  parlons,  le  temps  fuit.  Depuis  que  j'ai  perdu  mon  pere,  toui 
me  manque. 

THEME  37. 

1.  I  am  not  sony,  on  the  contrary,  I  am  very  glad  (hien  ahe) 
to  {de)  have  done  it.  *  2.  I  will  play,  as  soon  as  I  (shall)  have 
finished  my  exercise.  3.  There  wQl  always  be  wars  among  men, 
as  long  as  they  are  ambitious.  4.  After  (that)  you  were  gone 
(sorti),  I  began  writing  (a  ecrire).  5,  As  soon  as  my  education 
is  finished,  I  shall  go  to,  Italy.  6.  In  order  to  learn  well,  we  must 
(on  doit)  study  with  a  great'  deal  of  attention.  7.  In  order  to 
have  friends,  we  must  be  honest.  8.  It  will_  be  impossible  to  learn 
French,  unless  vou  be  (Inf.)  diligent.  9.  Let  us  pray,  before  we 
begin  {Inf)mlO.  Bather  than  study,  he  loses  his  time. I  11.  Far 
from  blaming  you,  I  praised  you.  12.  Come  here,  that  I  may 
speak  .to  you.  13.  Send  me  your  book,  {in  order)  that  I  may  read 
it.  14.  I  will  be  ready  before  they  come.  15.  Unless  you  accom- 
pany me,  I  will  not  take  a  walk.  16.  Cato  killed  himself,  lest  he 
shouM  fall  into  (entre)  the  hands  of  Caesar.  VlT.  Tliough  that 
young  man  is  not  very  diligent,  [yet]  he  improves.  18.  Before 
you  begin  an  action,  consider  well  its  consequences^  19.  You  will 
uever  be  respected  unless  you  fulfil  yqur  duties:  -  20.  He  viVA  givij 
it  to  you,  on  condition  that  you  give  it  back  to  him.  4t.>.  They 
Ix-at  him  so  that  they  almost  killed  him.   -^ 


170  XXXVIII.      TRENTE-HUITIEME  LEgON. 

XXXVIII.   TRENTE-HUITlfeME   LE90N. 


IRREGULAR   VERBS.  — FIRST    CLASS. 

Those  verbs  are  commonly  called  irregular  which  deviate  from  the  thru 
regular  conjugations.     This  deviation  is  of  three  kinds. 

1.  Such  verbs  as  take  the  termination  i»rresponding  to  the  ending 
of  their  Infinitive  mood,  but  change  their  root.  Ex. :  Of  the  verb  cmidre, 
CO  sew,  the  radical  is  cond-,  this  final  d  is,,  in  some  persons  and  tenses, 
changed  into  s,  for  instance  in  the  plural :  nous  coiis-ons,  we  sew.  These  are 
the  least  difficult,  and  are  therefore  put  in  the  first  class. 

2.  Verbs  which  preserve  their  radical  syllable  throughout  unchanged, 
but  take  flexions  that  do  not  accord  with  the  ending  of  their  Infinitive' 
For  instance,  the  verb  cour-ir,  to  run,  ending  in  -ir,  ought  to  take  the  flex- 
ions of  the  second  conjugation  (Jinir).  But  this  is  not  the  case;  it  takes 
the  flexions  of  the  third  conjugation  (vendre) ;  the  Present  is  not  je  courts, 
tu  couris,  etc.,  but  je  cours,  tu  cours,  etc. ;  P.  p.  couru  like  vendu.  Verbs  of 
this  kind  we  assign  to  the  second  class. 

3.  A  certain  n  amber  of  verbs  offer  both  these  anomalies  at  the  same 
time ;  i.  e.  they  undergo  some  changes  in  their  root,  and  are  conjugated 
with  other  flexions  than  those  corresponding  with  the  ending  of  their  Infin- 
itive. For  instance,  the  verb  mourir,  to  die,  ought,  according  to  its  Infini- 
tive termination,  -ir,  to  take  the  flexions  of  Jinir.  This  is  not  the  case;  it 
is,  in  most  tenses,  conjugated  like  vendre;  and,  besides,  its  root  mour-  is,  in 
certain  tenses  and  persons,  changed  into  meur-,  as :  Pres.  je  meurs,  tu  meurs, 
etc.  Such  verbs,  among  which  are  included  those  ending  in  -oir,  consti- 
tute the  third  class. 

To  facilitate  the  study  of  the  irregular  verbs,  it  is  essential  to  dis- 
tinguish the  primitive  tenses  from  the  derived  ones.    The  latter  have'^ 
generally  a  regular  inflexion,  whereas  the  former  alone  are  subject  to 
IfTegularity.     As  already  mentioned,  the  primitive  tenses  are: 

1.  The  Infinitive  mood,  yf^^^^  •    ^-      ^^-'*^  i^'^ -  . 

2.  The  Participle  present,  tf^i^{  ^^  ^  ^   XT^^i   f 

3.  The  Participle  past.  aj£  ifJ-'-^Lft    .   ^w^' 

4.  The  Present  of  the  Indicative  mood,  ^'(U         .     -    J 
,.   ne  Preterite.    Xyj.^.   .     .,     ^^^^^ 


IRREGULAR   VERBS.  171 

From  these  the  other  tenses  and  moods  are  derived,  as  it  is  explained,  L 
XX.  The  derivative  tenses  are  formed  regularly,  and  therefore  seldoiD 
mentioned  in  the  following  list. 

To  aid  the  pupil's  memory,  the  following  hints  will  prove  useful : 

1.  The  Present  of  the  Subjunctive  may  b*^  found  by  dropping  the  final 
nt  of  the  third  person  plural  Indicative,  as :  from  Us  icrivent  —  qut  j'€cnvf 
from  Us  prennent  —  que  je  }rrenne;  from  Us  Ix.went  —  que  je  boive. 

2.  The  plural  of  the  Present  Indicative,  the  Participle  Present  and  tht 
Imperfect  of  the  Indicative  have  the  same  radical,  as :  notis  mourons,  we 
die;  P.  pr.  mourartt;  Imperf.  je  moumis;  —  nous craignons ;  P.  pr.  craignant; 
Impcrf.  ^e  craignais;  —  nous  allons ;  P.  pr.  allant;  Imperf.  fallais,  etc. 

3.  The  Future  and  Conditional  are  formed  from  the  Infinitive;  the  fol 
lowing,  however,  have  an  irregular  formation, — je  courrai  (instead  of 
eourirai),  je  mourrai,  je  verrai,  j'enverrai,  j'acquerrai,  je  pounai,  je  saurai, 
je  voudrai,  U  faudra,  je  viendrai,  je  tiendrxi,  je  ferai,  and  j'irai. 

4.  When  the  Participle  past  ends  with  the  sound  of  i  (i,  is,  it,)  the  Pre- 
terite generally  ends  in  is.  Ex. :  Part.  p.  sorti,  gone  out;  Pret.  je  sortis; 
—  Part.  p.  dit,  said  ;  Pret.  Jc  dis; — Part.  p.  pris,  taken  ;  Pret.y«  pris,  etc. 

5.  But  when  the  Participle  past  ends  in  u,  the  Preterite  usually  ends  in 
us.  Ex. :  P.  p.  cru,  believed ;  Pret.jc  crus;  P.  p,  lu,  read;  Pret.  je  lus;  — 
P.  p.  connu,  known ;  Pret.  je  connus,  etc. 


A  LIST  OF  ALL  THE  IRREGULAR  VERBS  ACCORD 
ING  TO  THE  THREE  CLASSES  OF  IRREGULARITY. 

FIRST   CLASS. 

Containing  the  verbs  in  -re  which  take  the  terminations  of  the 
third  conjugation,  but  whose  radical  is  somewhat  changed. 

o.    (1  — 7.  Insertion  of  an  s.) 

1.  Lu^g,  to  shine.     Part.  pres.  luisant.     Part,  poit,  \Mi. 
Pres.  Je  luis,  tu  luis,  il  luit,  nous  luisons,  Voua  luisez,  ils  luisent 
Suhj.  Pres.  Que  je  lui^e.     Imperj.  Je  luisais. 

Pret.  wanting.     Fui.  Je  luirai. 

Conjugate  in  the  same  manner :  Rduire,  to  glitter. 

2.  Suffire,  to  suffice.     P.  pr.  suffisant.   P.  p.  suffi, 
Pres.  Je  mi^s,  tu  suffis,  il  suffit,  nous  suffi^ons,  etc. 


t 


172  XXXVm.      TEENTB-HUITI^ME   LE^ON. 

Subj.  Pros.  Que  je  suffice.     Tfnperf.  Je  suffi«ais.^ 
Pret.  Je  suffis,  tu  suffis,  il  suffit,  nous  suflfimes,  etc. 
FuL  Je  suflSbrai. 

In  the  same  manner :  Confire^  to  presence,  to  pickle ;  and  circonctre^  to 
■'ircumcise,  except  in  the  Pan.  past.  Tlie  Participle  of  tlie  former  is  con% 
jf  tht>  latter  circoncis. 

3.    Nuire,  to  hurt..     P.  pr.  nuisant.     P.  p.  nm. 

Pres.  Je  uuis,  tu  nuis,  il  nuit,  nousnui^ons,  vous  nubez,  ils  nui 
sent.     Sulj.  Pres.  Que  je  nuise.     Iniperf.  Je  nuisais. 
tC  jSh    Pret.  Je  nuisis.     Fut.  Je  nuii-ai. 

^.ifhJ^^'    ^*'**^^'  ^^  ^o^»  ^  ^^^®  (bread).     P.  pr.  cuisanfc.     P^  p. 
- — ISf^t.  "^ 

Pres.  Je  cuis,  tu  cuis,  il  cuit,  nous  cuisons,  etc.  .^^^ 

Pret.  Je  cuisis.     Fut.  Je  cuirai.    n   ,     /   /  •<        •        t 

Thus  also :  Recuire,  to  boil  once  more. 

57  Conduire,  to  conduct,  to  lead.     Se  conduire,  to  behave. 

P.  pr.  conduisant.     P.  p.  conduit 

Pres.  Je  conduis,  tu  conduis,  il  conduit,  nous  condui«ons,  etc. 

Pret.  Je  conduisis.     Fut.  Je  conduirai. 

Thus  :  Reconduire,  to  reconduct,  to  see  home ;  d^didre,  to  deduct ;  enduire. 
to  plaster;  indnire,  to  lead  into;  introoMire,  to  introduce;  pr^duire,  to  pro- 
duce; reprodiiire,  to  produce  again frMuire,  to  reduce;  s€duire,  to  seduce j 
iraduire,  to  translate. 

6.  InstruJTCf^.  to  instrect.     P.  pr.  instruisant.     P.  p.  instruii. 
Pres,  J'instruis,  tu  instruis,  il  instruit,  nous  instruisons,  vous  in- 

"truisez,  ils  instruisent. 

Pret.  J'instmisis.     Fut.  J'instruirai.  » 

In  the  same  njanncr :  Consiruire,  to  build ;  d^ruire,  to  destroy. 

7.  Dire,  to  ^ay,  to  tell.     P.  pr.  di^ant.     P.  p.  di^ 
Pres.  Je  dis,  tU  dis,  il  dit,  nous  disons,  vous  dites,  ils  disent. 
Subj.  Pres:  Que  je  disc. 

Pret.  Je  dis,  tu  dis,  il  dit,  nous  dimes,  vous  dltes,  ils  dirent 
Imperf.  Subj.  Que  je  disse. 
FtJft.  Je  djxai .     Imper.  Dis,  dwons,  iiif.e» 


X 


IBREGULAR  VERBS.  173 

Conjugate  in  the  same  manner :  redire,  to  say  again,  to  object. 

A8  for  the  oth>ir  compounds  of  dire,  viz. :  Contrcdire,  to  contradict ;  d^ 
dircy  to  unsay ;  and  se  d^dire,  to  retract ;  interdire/^  forbid  ;  m€dire,  to  slan- 
der ;  and  pr€dire,  to  foretoll,  they  do  not  form  their  second  person  plural  of 
the  Present  Indicative  with  the  termination  -tes,  but  -sez,  as  :  vous  contrB' 
disez,  vous  in€disez,  vous  interdisez,  etc. —  Maudire,  to  curse,  takes  s$  in  the  fol- 
lowing forms  :  Pros.  plur.  nous  maudissons,  vous  maudissez,  ils  maudis9^A 
Part,  pr*  maudissant.    Imperf.  je  maudissais. 

VOCABULARY. 

i   Le  soleil,  the  snn.  modeme,  modem.     | 

\  un  rayon,  a  ray.  la  peche,  the  peach.  ( 

\Pespoir,  m.  hope.  la  v€rit€,  the  truth.  V 

J!a<fette,  the  debt.  --< 

^  THEME  38. 

1.  The  sun  sbines.  2.  Everything  shines  (glitters)  in  that 
house.  3.  It  is  not  sufficient  (if.  does  not  suffice)*  to  understand  the 
ancient  languages,  it  is  also  necessary  to  study  the  modem  ones. 
4.  We  preserve  these  peaches  in  sugar.  5.  Have  you  pickled 
cucumbers  (^des  concombres)  'i  6.  Does  he  not  hurt  you  in  this  af- 
fair? 7.  All  his  property  will  not' suffice  to  {pour)  pay  his  debts. 
8?"  Where  do  you  conduct  this  blind  [man]  ?  9.  I  conduct  him  to 
the  physician  {chez  le  medecin).  10.  I  instruct  (tlae)  youth.  11. 
We  translate  English  into  French.  12.  The  boys  behaved  very 
well.  13.  You  will  hurt  me  more  than  any  other  person.  14.  This 
bread  is  well  baked.  15.  What  do  you  say  V  IG.  I  s^  that  you 
are  (have)  right.  17.  We  say  the  truth.  18.  Tell  him  that  I  am 
here.  19.  I  shall  tell  (it)  liim  directly.  20.  Never  contradict  any 
one  (^  per  Sonne)  in  (ew)  public.  21.  We  foretold  those  disaster^^ 
(dSsastres).     22.  Let  us  curse  nobody.  ^ 

•  See  p.  343, 10. 


174  XXXIX.      TEENTE-NEUVIEME  LEgON. 

XXXIX.     TRENTE-NEUYIEME     LEgON 


ERREGULAR  VERBS. —  FIRST  CLASS   CONTINUED. 

6.     (8 — 17.  Change  of  the  final  consonant.) 

8.  Traire,  to  milk.     P.  pr.  trayant.     P.  p.  trait. 

Pres.  Je  trais,  tu  trais,  il  trait,  nous  tra^ons,  voiis  trayez,  iL 
fapident. 

Imp&rf,  Je  trayais.     Pret.  wanting.     Fut.  Je  trairai. 

Thus  also  :  DistrairCf  to  distract ;  extraire,  to  extract ;  soustraire,  to  sub- 
tract, to  withdraw.  - 

9.  Suivre^  to  follow.     P.  pr.  suivant.     P.  p.  suivt. 

Pres.  Je  suis,  tu  sui^,  il  sui^,  nous  suivons,  vous  suivez,  ils  sui 
Tent.     Subj.  Pres.  Que  je  iuive. 
Pret.  Je  suivis.     Fut.  Je  suivrai. 
Imper.  Suis,  suivons,  suivez. 
Thus :  S'ensuivre,  to  ensue ;  poursuivre,  to  pursue. 

10.  Vainer e,  to  conquer.     P.  pr.  vain^'want.     P.  p.  vaincu. 
Pres.  Je  valncs,  tu  vaincs,  il  vainc,  nous  vain^-z/ons,  vous  vain- 

quQZ,  ils  vain^zfent. 

Pret.  Je  vainywis.     Fut.  Je  vaincrai 
Imper.  Values,  vainywons,  vain^-wcz. 

In  the  same  manner:  Convaincre,  to  convince. 

11.  Coudre,  to  sew.     P.  pr.  cousant.     P.  p.  coiwu. 

Pres.  Je  couds,  tu  couds,  il  coud,  nous  cousons,  vous  cou«ez,  il 
oousent.     ^uhj.  Pres.  Que  je  couse. 
Pret,  Je  cousis.     Fut.  Je  coudrai. 

Thus :  IM:(m^,  to  unsew ;  recoudre,  to  sew  over  again. 

12.  Moudre,  to  grind.     P.  pr.  mou^ant.     P.  p.  mouZu. 
I^es.  Je  mouds,  tu  mouds,  il  moud,  nous  mou/ons,  vous  mou/ei, 

lis  mou/ent.     SubJ.  Pres.  Que  je  moufe. 
Pret.  Je  moidus,     Fut.  Je  moudrai. 


*%^ 


mSEGULAR   VERBS.  175 

In  the  same  manner:  Emcmdre,  to  grind  (knives,  etc.),  to  sliarpen,  and 
ranoudre,  to  grind  again. 

13.  Resoudre,  to  resolve,  P.  pr.  r6so/i;aiit.      P.  p.  lisolu  (orr 

Pres.  Je  r6sou3,  tu  r^sous,  il  r^sout,  nous  risolvons^  vous  rSsolvez, 
ilg  resolvent.     Subj.  Quo  je  resolve. 

Pret.  Jo  resoliis,  tu  t6soIus,  etc. 

FiU.  Je  r^soudrai.     Imper.  Resous,  resolvons,  risolvez. 

Thus :  Absoudre,  to  absolve,  and  dissoudre,  tc  dissolve. 

These  two  compounds  have  no  Preterite,  and  make  their  Participles:  aJb- 
80US,  f.  absoute,  and  dissous,  f.  dissoute. 

14.  Peindre,  to/pixmt.     P.  pr.  ipcignsint.     P.  p.  ipcint. 

Pres.  Je  pcins,  tu  poins,  il  peint,  nous  poisons,  vous  pei^;mez. 
Us  pci^nent.     Subj.  Que  je  pei^rae. 
Imperf.  Je  poi^nais. 

Pret.  Je  pci^nis,  tu  pei^mis,  il  pei^rnit,  nous  pci^wimes,  etc 
Fut.  Je  [jeindrai.     Imper.  Peins,  pciywons,  pci^7*8z. 

Thus ;  Ceindre,  to  gird.  Feindre,  to  feign  ;  ddpeindrt,  to  depict.  Teindre. 
to  dye;  d^ehulre,  to  discharge  color  ;  atteindre,  to  attain,  to  reach;  Aeindrn, 
to  extinguish.     Restreindre,  to  restrain.      En/reindre  to  infringe,  to  trans- 


15.    Oraindre,  to  tifu.     P.  pr.  cTnignimt      P.  p.craint.. 
Pres.  Je  crains,  tu  crains,  il  craint,  nous  craiynons,  etc. 
Pret.  Je  crai^wis.     Fut.  Je  craindrai,  etc. 

Thus  also :  Plaindre,  to  pity ;  ««  plaindre,  to  complain ;  contraindre,  to 
;«ompel,  to  constrain. 

■•  16.    Joindre,  to  join.     P.  pr.  joi^mant.     P.  p.  join^ 

Pres.  Je  joins,  tu  joins,  il  joint,  nous  joi^ona,  vous  joi^nez,  ib 

joiynent.     SuJ)j.  Que  je  joiywe. 
Pret.  Je  joiynis.     Fut.  Je  joindrai. 

Thus :    liejoindrey  to  rejoin ;  enjoindre,  to  enjoin ;   dlsjoindre,  to  dTSJoin ; 
Poindre,  to  dawn,  break  ;  Oindre,  to  anoint. 

■^  17.    Ecrire,  to  write.     P.  pr.  ^crirant.     P.  p.  icnt. 

Pres.  J'6cris,  tu  ^cris,  il  4crit,  nous  ^crivons,  vous  4ciirez^ils 
6crivent.    Subj.  Que  j'dcrit^,  eto. 


/ 


176  XXXIX.      TRENTE-NEUVIEME  LE9ON, 

Fret,  J'^crlins,  tu  ^criris,  il  ^cririt,  etc. 

FiU.     J'^crii-ai.     Imper.  ^ciis,  ^crivoiis,  ^rit%z» 

Thus  :  Difcrire,  to  describe ;  circonscrire,  to  circumscribe ;  inscnre,  to  In- 
scribe; prescrire,  to  prescribe,  to  order;  r^crire,  to  write  again,  to  answer  j 
sonRcrire,  to  subscribe ;  transcrire,  to  transcribe. 

VOCABULAKT. 

La  vache,  the  cow.  partir,  to  set  ont. 

le  pr^ceptmr,  the  tutor.  la  marche,  course,  the  conrse. 

la  difficult^,  the  difficulty.  la  cendre,  the  ashes. 

la  me,  the  life.  la  fum^e,  the  smoke. 

alleniand,  German.  la  chandelle,  the  candle. 

le  meunier,  the  miller.  l(^  grandeur,  the  greatness. 


THEME  39. 

1.  We  milk  the  COWS.  2.  Soldiers!  follow  me.  3.  I  will  lead 
you  to  (the)  victory.  4.  I  shall  follow  you.  5.  This  dog  follows 
me  everywhere.  6.  You  did  not  follow  the  lessons  of  your  tutor, 
7.  The  enemies  were  conquered.  8.  You  comjuer  all  the  difficul- 
ties. 9.  That  did  not  convince  me.  10.  They  pursued  (Pre^)  the 
slave,  but  in  vain  {en  vain).  11.  She  was  sowing  her  gown.  12. 
These  handkerchiefs  are  badly  sewed.  13.  I  sewed  them  myself. 
14.  Does  the  miller  grind  the  com?  15.  He  has  not  ground  it  this 
morning.  16.  lie  will  gi'ind  it  this  evening.  17.  I  fear  the  rain. 
18.  We  do  not  fear  death ;  why  should  we  fear  it?  19.  I  resolved 
{de)  to  set  out.  20.  We  pursued  our  course.  21.  1  have  at  last 
(enjin)  convinced  him  of  the  greatness  of  his  fault.  22.  The  wood 
which  is  burnt  (  qu^on  brule)  resolves  itself  {$e)  into  (en)  ashes 
and  smoke  23.  We  pity  the  unfortunate.  24.  You  paint. 
25.  The  young  girl  feigned  to  be  ill.  26.  Put  out  the  candle  and 
go  to  bed  {allez  vous  coucher),  27.  The  servant  feared  (de)  to 
displease  his  master  (a  son  maitre),  28.  Charles  wrote  his  trans- 
lation last  night  {hier  au  soir),    I 


mUEGULAE  VERBS.  177 

XL.    QUARANTlfiME    LE9ON. 


ffiKEGULAR  VERBS.— FIRST  CLASS  CONTINUBI). 

c.  Cl8 — 26.   The  rowel  of  the  root  is  changed  into  u,  in  the 
,  Part,  past  and  in  the  Preterite.) 

^^18.    ZiVe,  to  read.     P.pr.  Yxsixni.     P.p.lu. 

Pres.  Jo  lis,  tu  lis,  il  lit.  uous  lisons,  vous  lisez,  ils  lisent. 
Pret.  Je  lus,  tu  lus,  il  lut,  nous  liimes,  vous  lutes,  etc. 
Imperf.  Suhj.  Que  je  lusse. 
Fut.  Je  lirai,  tu  liras,  il  lira,  etc. 

Thus  also  :  dire,  to  elect ;  r€€lire,  to  reelect ;  retire,  to  read  over  again. 

^19.    Boire,  to  drink.     P.pr.  hiivant.     P.p.  hu. 

Pres.  Je  bois,  tu  bois,  il  boit,  nous  bwt'ons,  vous  huvez,  ils 
boirent. 

Subj.  Que  je  boire,  quo  tu  boires,  qu'il  boive,  que  nous  bMwons, 
que  vous  bwricz.-qu'ils  boirent. 

Imperf.  Je  buvais. 

Pret.  Jc  bus,  tu  bus,  il  but,  nous  bilmes,  vous  bfltes,  ils  burent. 

Fut.  Je  boirai,  tu  boiras,  etc. 

Imper.  Bois,  bwrons,  bwyez. 
im  20.^  Oroire,  to  believe,  to  think.     P.  pr.  croyant.     P.  p.  cru. 

Pres.  Je  crois,  tu  crois,  il  croit,  nous  cro^ons,  vous  croyez,  ils 
.''.roient. 

Subj.  Que  je  croie,  que  tu  croies,  qu'il  croie,  quo  nous  cro^ons, 
jue  vous  crojyicz,  qu'ils  croicnt. 

Pret.  Je  cms,  tu  cms,  il  crut,  nous  crflmes,  vous  crdtea,  ilfl 
arurcnt. 

FiU.  Je  crou'ai,  etc. 

Faire  accroire  qch.  a  qn.,  to  make  one  believe. 
IS.  B.  actroire  u  only  ascd  in  the  Infinitive- 


17S  XL.      QUARANTI^ME   LEgON. 

"^      ^ir^Oroitrey  to  grow.     P.  pr.  croissant.    P.  p.  cru. 

Pres.  Je  crois,  tu  crois,  il  croit,  nous  cromons,  vous  crois«ez,  ]k 
crol55Gnt. 

Pret.  Jo  cr^s,  tu  crus,  il  crut,  nous  crumos,  eto. 

Fut.  Jo  croitrai,  etc. 

Thus :  Accroitre,  to  increase ;  d€cr(Atre,  to  decrease ;  rearoitre,  to  grovk 
again. 
/        22.   Plaire,  to  please.     P.  pr.  plaisant.     P.  p.  plu. 

Pres.  Je  plais,  tu  plais,  il  plait,  nous  plai^ons,  voas  plai*ez,  IL 
plaiscnt     Suhj.  Que  je  plaise,  etc. 

Pret.  Jc  plus,  tu  plus,  il  plut,  nous  plumes,  vous  plutes,  ils  plu- 
rent.     Fut.  Je  plairai,  tu  plairas,  etc. 

Thus :  Se  complaire,  to  delight  in  ... ;  d^plaire,  to  displease.  (S'il  vow 
plait  —  if  you  please.) 

23.  Taire,  to  conceal.     P.  pr.  taisant.     P.  p.  tu. 

/        Pres.  Je  tais,  tu  tais,  il  tait,  nous  tai^ons,  vous  taisez,  ils  tai«ent 

Suhj.  Que  je  tai^e,  que  tu  tabes,  qu'il  taise,  etc. 

Pret.  Je  tus,  tu  tus,  il  tut,  nous  tumes,  vous  tutes,  ils  turent. 

Fut.  Je  tairai. 

Thus  :  Se  taire,  to  be  silent.  Pres.  Je  me  tais,  I  am  silent.  Imper.  Tais-toi, 
taisez-voxis.  Pret.  Je  me  tus,  I  was  silent.  Comp.  of  the*Pres.  Je  me  suis  tu, 
I  have  been  silent. 

24.  Paraitre,  to  appear.     P.  pr.  paraiwant.     P.  p.  pant. 
Pres.  Je  parais,  tu  parais,  il  parait,  nous  paraissons,  vous  parai.v 

sez,  il  paraissent.     Suhj.  Que  je  paraiwe. 

Pret.  Je  parits,  tu  parus,  il  parut,  eto. 

Fut.  Je  paraitrai. 

Thus :  Apparaitre,  to  appear ;  comparaitre,  to  appear  before  the  judgf^ 
disparaibre,  to  disappear  reparaitre,  to  reappear. 

25.  Paitre,  to  graze".     P.  pr.  paissant. 
Like  paraitre,  but  no  Pret. 
Thus :  Rq^aitre,  to  feed  ;  with  the  Pret  Je  repus.    Part.  repu. 

I     26.    Connaitre,*  to  know.     P.  pr.  connaissant.     P.  p.  connu, 

*  Connattrt  Is  used  in  connection  with  knowledge  obtained  throng h  one  of  the 
fire  Mnaet,  —  M90<r  in  other  cases. 


/ 


IRREGULAR    VERB6.  179 

Pres.  Je  connais,  tu  connais,  il  connait,  nons  connawsons,  vouf 
J0ttnai5*ez,  etc. 
Pret.  Je  connus.     Fut.  Je  connaitrai. 

Thus  :  M€connaitre,  to  mistake,  not  to  acknowledge ;  reconnoitre,  to  reoop- 
aize,  to  know  again,  to  acknowledge. 

VOCABUIiAET. 

La  conduite,  the  conduct.  lejour,  the  daylight 

triste,  sad.  sombre,  dark. 

U  traitement,  the  treatment.  impossible,  impossible 

^  THEME  40. 

^^y  1.  What  are  you  reading  there  ?  _^  2.  Why  did  you  read  my  let 
fer?  3.  I  have  not  read  it,  and  t  shall  not  read  it.  4.  Read  ovei 
again  your  lesson.  5.  Dost  thou  drink  water?  6.  No,  I  drink 
wine  and  water.  7.  When  you  are  thirsty,  what  do  you  diink ? 
8.  We  drink  fresh  water.  9.  Do  you  believe  that?  10.  No,  I  do 
not  believe  it.  11.  I  thought  (that)  you  had  written  your  exercise, 
but  I  see  {je  vois)  that  I  am  mistaken.  12.  She  grows  every  day. 
13.  Those  trees  have  grown  rapiilly  {rapi dement).  14.  He  did 
not  believe  what  I  said.  15.  I  (have)  thought  that  we  would  be 
here  before  six  o'clock.  16.  The  young  gentleman  pleased  by  his 
conduct.  17.  Be  silent,  Frederick.  18.  Tell  (to)  your  sister,  if 
you  please,  to  bring  me  her  French  grammar.  19.  Do  you  know  my 
-brother?  20.  No,  I  do  not  kno\f  him.  21.  You  appear  sad,  what 
IB  the  matter  with  you  {qu' avez-vous)  ?  22.  Such  a  trcatraeni 
(has)  appears  to  me  very  cruel.  23.  The  daylight  has  disap 
peared,      . 


"^180 


XLI.      QUARANTE  ET  tJNIEMB    LEQON. 


XLI.     QUARANTE    ET    UNlfiME    LE9ON 


rREEGULAR  VERBS.  ■— FIRST  CLASS  CONTINUED. 

21^'^aire,  to  do,  to  make.     P.  pr.  faisant,*  P.  p.  Mt 
Pres.  Je  fais,  tu  fais,  il  fait,  nous  faisons,  vous  faites,  ils  font. 
Pres.  Suhj.  Que  je  fasse,  que  tu  fasses,  qu'il  fasse,  que  nous 
fassions,  que  vous  fassiez,  qu'ils  /assent. 
Imperf.  Je  faisais  (fesais),  tu  faisais,  il  faisait,  etc. 
C      Pret,  Je  ^5,  tu  ^5,  il  Jit,  nous  ftmes,  vous  fites,  ils  firent. 
^iv      Imperf.  Suhj.  Que  je  fisse,  que  tu  fisses,  qu'il  fit,  que  nous  fis 
sions,  que  vous  fissiez,  qu'ils  fissent. 
Fut.  Je  ferai,  tu  feras,  ete. 
Tmper.  Fais,  fai5ons,  faites. 

Conjugate  in  the  same  manner  the  compounds  of  faire,  viz. :  d^faire,  to 
nudo,  to  loosen  ;  contrefaire,  to  counterfeit ;  refaire,  to  do  again ;  satisfaire^ 
to  satisfy ;  surfaire,  to  exact,  ask  too  much.      . 

2S. ^^Mettre,  to  put.     P.  pr.  mettant.     P.  p.  mis. 
Pres.  Je  mots,  tu  mets,  il  met,  nous  mettons,  vous  mettez,  ils" 
mettent.     Pres.  Suhj.  Que  je  mette. 
. '     V  Imperf  Je  mettais. 

"^    Pret.  Je  mis,  tu  mis,  il  mit,  nous  mimes,  vous  mites,  ils  tnirent, 
Imperf.  Suhj.  Que  je  misse,  que  tu  misses,  qu'il  mit,  etc. 
Fut.  Je  mettrai,  tu  mettras,  etc. 

Thus :  Admettre,  to  admit ;  commettre,  to  commit ;  d^mettre,  to  turn  out ; 
cmettre,  to  omit ;  permettre,  to  permit,  to  allow  ;  promettre,  to  promise ;  com 
pwmettre,  to  compromise,  to  expose ;  remttre,  to  put  again,  to  replace,  to 
tiand  over ;  soumettre,  to  submit ;  transmettre,  to  transmit,  to  send. 

Se  mettre  a  signifies  to  begin,  as :  L' enfant  se  mit  a  pleurer,  the  child  began 
dying.  ^,> 

^^     29.   Prendre,  to  take.     P.  pr.  prewant.     P.  p.  pm. 

*  For  tile  pronimciatioii  of  faisara  and  its  deziyfttires  see  p.  IB. 


fREEGULAB  VERBS.  181 

Pres.  Je  prends,  tn  prends,  il  prend,  nous  prenons,  vons  prenei, 
[Is  prennent.  Pres.  Subj.  Que  je  prewwe,  que  tu  prennes,  qu'il 
pre7ine,  que   nous   prewions,  que   vQus    prewiez,  qu'ils  pre»»ent 

hnperf.  Je  prenais. 

Pret.  Je  pris,  tu  pris,  il  prit,  nous  primes,  vous  prites,  ils  pri- 
rcnt.     Imperf.  Subj.  Que  je  prisse. 

Fut.  Je  prondrai      Imper.  Prends,  prewons,  prenez. 

Conjugate  in  the  same  manner  the  compounds  of  prendre:  Apprendre,  to 
learn ;  d^sapprendre,  to  unlearn  ;  rapprendre,  to  learn  over  again  ;  compren- 
dre,  to  undersland  ;  entreprendre,  to  undertake ;  m(f]>rendre,  to  mistake ;  re- 
prendre,  to  take  again,  to  reply,  to  chide;  surprendre,  to  surprise. 

30.  NcStre*  to  bo  bom.     f.  pr.  nmsskni.  \  P.  p.  ne. 

^Pres.  Je  nais,  tu  nais,  il  nait,  nous  naissous,  vous  nais«ez,  ila 
Qai<«ent.     Imperf:  Je  nais«ais.  ^ 

Pret.  Je  naquis  (I  was  bom),  tu  naquis^  il  naquit,  nous  naqut- 
mes,  vous  naquites,  ils  naquirent.  i. 

Fvi.  Je  naitrai,  tu  naitras,  etc.^  X  rw^JJl/     \>JL  \r4'VV^ 

Thus  also :  Renaitre,  to  be  bom  again. 

Remark.  When  the  person  used  as  subject  of  the  verb  is  living,  the 
present  instead  of  the  past  of  the  auxiliary  is  used  with  the  past  participle. 
Ex.  :  Mon  pere  est  n€  en  Anglet&re,  My  father  (still  living)  was  bom  in 
England. 

31.  VivrCy  to  live.     P.  pr.  vivant.     P.  p.  vecu. 

Pres.  Je  vis,  tu  vis,  il  vit,  nous  vivons,  vous  vivez,  ils  vivent. 
Subj.  Que  je  vive ;  /lence  the  expressions :  Vive  !  pi.  vivent !  lortrj 
live  / 
^  Imper.  Vis,  vivons,  vivez.     Imperf.  Je  vivais. 

Pret.  Je  vectis,  tu  vecus,  il  vecut,  nous  vecum^s,  etc. 

FtU.  Je  vivrai. 

Thus  also :  Survivre  (o  qn.),  to  survive;  revivre,  to  live  again. 

•■  Verbs  marked  tTms  •take  itre  for  an  aaxUiary,  mstead  of  cmoir. 


182  XLI.      QUARANTE    ET    UNIEME    LEgON. 

VOCABULARY. 

Vapixmidi,  f.  the  afternoon.  une  ligne,  a  line. 

le  ruhan,  the  ribbon.  un  comptignoti  de  voyage,  a   feDow 

une  fois,  once.  traveller. 

paten,  pa|2:an»  la  decision,  the  decision. 

d6sormais,  henceforward.  I'abondance,  f.  abundance 

ob^issant,  obedient 

THEME   41. 

''  1,  What  are  you  doing  there  V  2.  I  am  writing  my  exoroise 
3.  Have  you  written  it?  4,  Yes,  I  have  written  it.  5.  Charles 
will  write  it  this  afternoon.  6.  These  pupils  make  a  great  many 
mistakes  in  their  exercises.  7.  Put  this  book  on  the  table.  8. 
Where  have  you  put  your  penknife  V  9.  I  have  put  it  in  my  drawer 
{firoir,  m.).  10.  Did  your  father  permit  you  to  go  to  the  theatre? 
11.  Yes,  he  has  allowed  it.  12.  He  allows  me  to  go  there 
(d'y  aller)  once  a  {par)  week.  13.  The  servant  promised  hence- 
forward to  be  faithful  and  obedient.  14.  All  the  children  began  to 
cry.  15.  I  take  medicine.  16.  He  takes  coffee.  17.  We  take 
tea.  18.  The  children  take  milk.  19.  I  took  a  pen  and  wrote  a 
few  lines  to  ray  father.  20.  Who  has  taken  ray  pencil?  21.  1 
have  not  tiiken  it.  22.  Tiike  mine.  23.  Do  not  take  this  chau:; 
it  is  broken  (cassee).  24.  Do  3'ou  understand  what  I  say?  25. 
I  understand  every  word.  26.  I  should  undeitake  that  journey,  if 
I  had  a  fellow-traveller.  27.  We  submit  ourselves  to  your  decision. 
28.  Formerly  we  lived  in  the  country,  but  for  {depuis)  severaJ 
years  we  have  lived  {Pres.  tense)  in  Geneva  (^Geneve).  29.  Many 
rich  people  live  in  abundance.      / 


mnEGULAR  VEEBS.  183 


XLII.     QUARANTE-DEUXIEME    LE5ON 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  — SECOND  CLASS. 

(32 — 41.     Verbs  ending  in  ir,  having  the  flexions  of  the  Third 
Conjugation.) 

32.  Fuir,  to  shun,  to  flee.     P.  pr.  fuyant.     P.  p.  fai. 

Pres.  Je  fuLs,  tu  fuis,  il  fuit,  nous  fuyons,  vous  fuyez,  ils  fuiont 
Imperf.  Je  fuyais. 
Pret.  Je  fuis.     Fut.  Je  fiiirai. 

Conjugate  in  the  same  manner :  S^enfuir,  to  run  away.     Pres.  Je  m'et^^ 
/uis.     Comp.  of  the  Pres.  Je  me  suis  enfui,  I  have  run  away. 

33.  Vetir,  to  clothe.     P.  pr.  vetant.     P.  p.  wetu. 
Pres.  Je  vets,  tu  vets,  il  vet,  nous  vetons,  etc. 
Pret.  Je  vetis.     Fut.  Je  vetirai. 

Thus  also :  D€vitir,  to  divest ;  revetir,  to  invest. 

34.  Servir  (qn.),  to  serve,  to  help.     P.  pr.  servant.     P,  p. 
scnri. 

Pre*.  Je  scrs,  tu  sers,  il  sert,  nous  servons,  vous  servez,  ils  ser- 
vent      Subj.  Que  je  serve. 

Pret.  Jo  servis.     Fut.  Je  servirai. 

Thus  also :  Desservir,  to  clear  the  table ;  se  servir  de,  to  make  n«e  of,  to 
use. 

35.  Dormir,  to  sleep.     P.  pr  dormant.     P.  p.  dormi. 

Pres.  Je  dors,  tu  dors,  il  dort,.  nous  dormous,  vous  dormez,  '{\b 
domient.     Subj.  Que  je  dorme. 
Pret.  Jo  dormis,  etc.,  like  servir » 

Thus :  Endormir,  to  lull  asleep ;  s*er.dormir,  to  fall  asleep ;  se  rendormlr, 
to  fall  asleep  again. 

36.  Partir,  to  set  out,  to  leave      P.  pr.  partant.     P.  p.  parti, 
Pres.  Je  pars,  tu  pars,  il  part,  nou8  partons,  etc.,  like  servir. 

Thus:  Repartir,  to  set  pff  again,  to  reply.     Not  to  be  confounded  wilJi 
r^xutir,  to  distribute,  which  is  regular 


184  XLn.      QUARANTE-DEUXIEME   LE^ON. 

37.  Mentir,  to  lie.     P.  pr.  mentant.     P.  p.  raenti. 

Pres.  Je  mens,  tu  mens,  il  ment,  nous  mentons,  etc.,  like  sermr 

Thus  also  :  D^mentir,  to  give  the  lie. 

38.  Sentir,  to  feel,  to  smell.     P.  pr.  sentant,     P.  p.  sent!. 
J\€S  Je  sens,  tu  seiis,  il  sent,  nous  sentons,  etc.,  like  servir. 

Thus :    Consentir,  to  consent ;  pressentir,  to  foresee ;  ressentir,  to  feel. 

39.  /Se  repentir  de  qcb.,  to  repent.  P.  />r.  se  repentant.  P.p. 
repenti. 

Pres.  Je  rao  repens,  I  repent,  etc.,  like  sentir. 
^^  40.    iSbr^iV,  to  go  out.     P.  ^r.  sortant.     P.  j9.  sorti. 

-Pres.  Jc  sors,  tu  5or5,  il  50r^,  etc.,  like  servir. 

Thus :  Ressortir,  to  go  out  again.  Ressortir,  to  resort,  and  assorHty  to 
assort,  are  rc^ukirly  conjugated  like  Jinir.  "    ^ 

41.    Courir,  to  run.     P.  J9r.  courant.     P.  jo.  courw. 

Pres.  Je  cours,  tu  cours,  il  court,  nous  courons,  vous  courez,  ils 
courcnt.     Subj.  Que  je  couro. 

Pret.  Je  courts,  tu  courus,  il  courut,  nous  courumes,  vous  cou- 
rutes,  ils  coui'urcnt. 

Fut.  Je  cowrrai,  tu  courras,  il  courra,  nous  courrons,  vous  cour- 
rez,  ils  courront..     Imper.  Cours,  coui'ons,  courez. 

Thus :  Acrourir,  to  run  to ;  concourir,  to  compete ;  discourir,  to  dis- 
course ;  encourir,  to  incur  ;  parcourir,  to  run  over  ;  recourir,  to  have  ro- 
course  ;  secourir,  to  relieve,  to  assist. 

^.^--''^    42.    GueilUr,  to  gather.     P.  pr.  cucillant.     P.  p.  cueiUi. 

Pres.  Je  cuoille,  tu  cucilles,  il  cueille,  nous  cueilions,  vous  oueil- 
iez,  ils  cueillcnt.     Suhj.  Que  je  cueille. 

Pret.  Je  cueillis.     Imper.  Cueille,  cueilions,  cueillez. 

Fut.  J3  cucillerai. 

Thus  :  Accueillir,  to  receive  ;  recudlUr,  to  gather. 

/43.    Offrir,  to  offer.     P.  pr.  offraut.     P.  p.  offert. 
Pres.  J'offr/?,  tu  offres,  il  nffre,  nous  offi-ons,  etc. 
K      ftet.  J'offris      Imper.  Ofire,  offirons,  o£&ez.     Fvi.  J'oi9Birm 


44.    Souffnr,  to  suffer.     P.  pr.  soufirant.     P.  p.  souffert, 
Pres.  Je  souSre,  tu  souffi-es,  etc.,  like  qffrir. 
45     Ouvrir,  to  open.     P.  pr.  ouvrant.     P.  p.  ouvert. 
Pres.  J'ouvre,  etc.,  like  offrir. 

Thus  :    Rour^rir,  to  open  again ;   entr'ouvrir,  to  open  a  little. 
4G.    Couvrir,  to  cover.     P.  pr.  couvranb.     P.  p.  convert 
Thas;  D/coMn-jV,  to  discover;  recournV,  to  cover  over. 

47.  Tressaillir,  to  start,  to  tremble.     P.  pr.  tressaillanf      /' 
^.  tressailli. 

Pres.  Je  tressaille,  tu  tressaillw,  il  tressaillc,  etc. 
Pret.  Je  tressaillis,  etc. 
Fut.  Jc  trcssaillerai  and  je  tressalllirai. 
Thus  :    AssailUr,  to  assault. 

48.  Saillir,  to  put  out,  project.     P.  pr.  saillant.     P.  p.  sailli. 
Pres.  third  person,^  saille,  pi.  Us  saillent.      Like  tressaiUir ; 

but  it  is  used  only  in  the  third  person  singular  and  plural. 
Saillir  ( =jaillir),  to  gush,  is  regular.    / 

VOCABULARY. 

Du  numton,  mutton.  fatigv€,  tired. 

la  t}oiturt,  the  coach.  la  violdte,  the  violet 

j      /      m^priser,  to  dsspisa.  la  livre,  the  pound. 

1/  THEME  42. 

1.  The  enemy  flee.  2.  Let  us  shun  those  places.  3.  We  clothe 
the  poor,  4.  The  young  girl  was  clud  in  black.  5.  I  cannot  meet 
him ;  ho  shuns  rae.  6.  Avoid  bad  company.  7..  Your  friend,  Mr. 
A.,  does  not  servo  me  well.  8.  I  made  use  of  your  do^ch..  9, 
Tell  me  what  he  has  done  to  you  ;  but,  above  all  (mrtout),  do  not 
lie.  VO  lie  wbo  lies  deserves  to  be  despised.  11.  Igo  out  every 
day.  12.  Do  not  go  out,  Robert;  it  is  too  cold.  13.  K  I  wero 
88  iU  as  you,  I  would  not  go  out  of  ray  room.     14.  I  feel  the  cold.    4 

15.  Do  not  make  any  {de)  noise,  for  my  mother  is  asleep  (sleeps)    ' 

16.  I  hope  she  will  sleep  better  to-night  (cette  nuit).     17.  Tf  I  do 


186  XLHI.      QUARANTE-TEOISIEIIE  LE^ON. 

not  walk  a  little,  T  shall  fall  asleep.  18.  Do  you  not  repent  ol 
wbat  (^de  ce  que)  you  have  done?  19.  I  always  repent  when  I 
have  done  wrong  (mat).  20.  Do  not  run  so  fast  {vite),  you  will 
be  tiled.  21.  They  always  run  when  they  go  to  see  their  aunt 
22.  I  ran  faster  than  you.  23.  Lf  she  is  unhappy,  I  shall  relieve 
her'  24.  For  whom  are  you  gaihei-ing  these,  violets?  25.  I  gather 
thoTit  for  my  mother.  26.  The  young  lady  has  been  received  with 
t.he  greatest  kindness.  27.  I  always  offer  hira,„;n]iy  services.  28. 
He  offered  me  a  hundi-ed  pounds  for  my  gar(Mi.  20.  What  are 
you  doing  there  ?     30.  I  cover  the  plants  with  {de)  snow. 


V 


XLIII.   QUARANTE-TROISIEME   LE^ON. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.— THIRD   CLASS. 

(49  —  53.    Verbs  in  ir  changing  their  radical  vowel  and  taking  the  flexions 

of  the  third  Conjugation.) 

49,  Mourir*  to  die.     P.  pr.  mourant.     P.  p.  mort. 

Pres.  Je  meurs,  tu  meurs,  il  mdirt,  nous  ^ourons,  vous  mourez, 
lis  meuT^nt.  SubJ.  Que  je  meure,  que  tu  meures,  qu'il  meure,  que 
nous  m(%rions,  que  vous  mouricz,  qu'ils  meureni.  K 

[mpeK  Meurs,  mourons,  mourez.  p'" 

PrM.  Si  mourns,  tu  mourns,  il  morygt,  nous  mouriimes,  voa^ 
nwWIrtl,  ib  moururont. 

Fui.  Je  mourrai,  tu  mourras,  il  moi 

Thus  also :  Sc  mourir,  to  be  near  dying,  to  be  fainting.  Pres.  Je  m* 
metirs,  etc. 

50.  BouiUir,  to  boil,  neut.  v.    P.  pr.  bouillant.     P.  p.  bouilli, 
Pres.  Je  bous.  tu  boits,  il  bout,  nous  bouillons,  vous  bonillez,  ils 

bouiUent.     Siibj.  Que  je  bouille. 


IRREGULAB  VERBS.  187 

Pret.  Je  bouillis. 
FiU.  Je  bouilli'rai. 

To  boil,  as  an  active  verb,  is  rendered  ^/r«  louiUir,  as  :  To  boil  potatoes, 
fbire  bouillir  des  pomrnes  de  tare. 

51.  Venir*  to  come.     P.  pr.  venant.     P.  p.  venw. 

Pres.  Je  viens,  tu  viVns,  il  vicnt,  nous  venons,  vous  venez,  ils 
vtcnncnt.  Pres.  Subj.  Que  jc  vrenne,  que  tu  viennes,  qu'il  vtenne, 
que  nous  venions,  que  voui  veniez,  qu'ils  vzennent.  Imperf.  Je 
venais. 

Pret.  Je  vins,  tu  vins,  il  vint,  nous  vznmes,  vous  vmtes,  ils  vin- 
rent.  Imperf.  Suhj.  Quo  je  vinsse,  que  tu  vinsses,  qu'il  vint,  que 
nous  vinssions,  etc. 

Fut.  Je  viendrai,  tu  vicndras,  etc. 

Co»</.  Je  viendrais. 
.  Imper.  Viens,  venons,  venez. 

Conjugate  in  the  same  manner :  Convenir,  to  agree,  to  suit ;  devenit%*  to 
become  ;  intervenif,*  to  intervene ;  panrnir*  to  attain,  to  reach  ;  pr€venir, 
to  be  beforehand  with,  to  infonn  ;  provenir,*  to  arise,  spring  from,  to  pro- 
ceed ;  se  souvenir,  to  remember ;  survenir)*  to  happen ;  subvenir,  to  relieve ; 
revenir,*  to  come  back  ( again ).^ 

52.  Tenir,  to  hold.     P.  pr.  tenant     P.  p.  tenw. 
This  verb  is  conjugated  like  venir,  as : 

Pres.  Je  Herts,  tu  t/ens,  il  tient,  nous  tenons,  vous  tenez,  ils  Hen- 
nent.     Subj.  Que  je  tienne. 

Pret.  Je  tins,  tu  tins,  il  tmt,  nous  tiumes,  vous  ttntes,  ils  tin- 
rent.     Fut.  Je  tiendrai. 

Imper.  Tiens,  tenons,  tenez. 

Thus  also :  Appafffni§i.  to  belong;  s'abstenir,  to  abstain;  contenir^  to  con- 
tain ;  d^enir,  to  detain ;  entretenir,  to  keep  up ;  maintenir,  to  maintain ;  o6* 
tenir,  to  obtain ;  retenir,  to  retain ;  soutenir,  to  sustain,  uphold,  support. 

53.  Acquerir,  to  acquire.     P.  pr.  acqu^rant.     P.  p.  acquw. 
Pres.  J'acquiers,  tu  acquiers,  il  acquzert,  nous  acquerons,  voua 

acquerez,  ils  acquzerent.  Pres.  Subj.  Que  j'acquiere,  que  tu  ao- 
quieres,  qu'il  acqmere,  que  nous  acqudrions,  que  vous  aoqueriez, 
qu'ils  acquth'ent. 


188  KLlii.      QUAEANTE-TROISIEME  LEgON. 

Pt  et.  J 'acquis,  tu  acquis,  il  acquiV,  nous  acqumcs,  vous  acqmfoa, 
ils  acquiVen^     Impf.  Suhj.  Que  j'acquisse. 

FiU.  Z^'acquerrai,  tu  acquerras,  il  acquerra,  etc. 
Imper.  Acquiers,  acquerons,  acquerez. 

Conjugate  in  the  same  manner :  Conqu^rir,  to  conquer ;  reconqu^iiry  to 
conquer  again ;  reqxi€rir,  to  request,  and  s'enqn€nr,  to  inquire.  Qic^rir,  to 
seek,  is  used,  in  famiMar  conversation,  after  aller,  venir,  envoyer,  as  :  allez 
qu^ir,  go  and  seek.       \J 

J\     VOCABULAKY. 

Le  chagrin,  grief.  VassiduiM,  f.  assiduity. 

maladie,  f.  disease,  illness.  des  connaissances,  f.  knowledge. 

douloureux,  -se,  painful.  la  chaleur,  the  heat. 

continuer,  to  continue^^,^  la  partie,  the  part. 

la  parole,  the  word./'y''^ 

THEME  43. 

1.  Your  friend  is  dying.  2.  IMrs.  A.  died  of  (de)  grief.  3„ 
The  old  general  died  at  Paris  of  a  very  painful  disease.  4.  Take 
the  water  off  the  fire ;  it  boils.  5.  Boil  that  meat  again,  it  has  not 
boiled  long  enough.  6.  Miss  Emily  is  coming.  7.  Dost  thou 
come  ?  8.  Yes,  T  come.  9.  Why  do  you  not  come  when  I  call 
you?  10.  He  came  to  see  me  every  morning.  11.  Come  back 
soon.  12.  I  shall  be  (come)  back  in  an  hour.  13.  Mrs.  B.  would 
have  come  to  us  if  it  had  not  rained  (plu).  14.  I  hope  you  will 
keep  youi'  word  and  (will)  come  to-morrow.  15.  I  maintain,  and 
will  always  maintain,  that  you  will  not  be  happy  without  virtue.  16. 
I  agree  that  Miss  L.  is  the  prettiest  of  the  family ;  but  she  is  so 
proud,  that  I  know  {sais)  not  what  will  become  of  her  (ce  qu'elle 
.  .  .).  17.  My  uncle  will  not  come  back  to-day.  18.  Mr.  S.  will 
not  obtain  that  situation  {place}.  19.  If  you  study  much,  you  will 
acquire  knowledge.  20.  T  do  not  think  (that)  this  color  suits  (to) 
your  sister.  21,  That  hat  would  suit  you  very  well,  if  you  were  a 
little  taller.  22.  Alexander  the  Great  conquered  the  greatest  part 
of  Asia.     23.  Your  uncle  has  acquired  a  great  name  in  America. 

24.  The  young  man  did  not  survive  (outlive)  (to)  that  misfortune. 

25.  You  •will  become  a  great  man,  if  you  continue  to  study  with  the 
same  assiduity.  .1 


mtlEGtJLAR  VEBBS.  189 

XLIV.    QUARANTE-QUATRlfeME  LE9ON. 


nmEGULAR    VERBS.  — THIRD    CLASS    CONTINUED 

(54  —  66.     Verbs  in  -cir.     Contraction  of  the  root  and  the  terminations, 
Part,  past  and  Pret.  in  u.) 

^-tf>^1J4.    Devoir,  to  owe,  (ought  to),     P.  pr.  devant.     P.  p.  du. 

Pres.  Je  dois*  tu  dots,  il  doit,  nous  devons,  vous  devez,  }\e 
doivent.     Pres.  Subj.  Que  jo  doive. 

Pret.  Je  dus,  tu  dus,  il  dut,  nous  dumes,  vous  dutes,  ils  durent. 
Imperf.  Subj.  Que  je  dusse. 

Fitt.  Je  devrai,  tu  devras,  etc.     Cond.  Je  devrais.* 

Thus  also :  redevoir. 
^     55.    Recevoir,  to  receive.     P.  pr.  recevant.     P.  p.  regu. 

Pres.  Je  regois,  tu  regois,  il  regoit,  nous  recevons,  vous  recevez, 
ils  re90ivent. 

Pret.  Je^  re^iw,  tu  loqus,  il  icqut,  nous  le^umes,  vous  requtes, 
ils  re(iurent. 

Fut  Je  recevrai,  tu  rccevras,  etc. 

Thus  also  :  D^cevoir,  to  deceive ;  apercevoir,  to  perceive ;  concevoir,  to  con- 
ceive ;  percevoir,  to  collect. 

.56.    Vechoir,  to  fall,  to  decay.     (No^i^^r.)     P.  p.  dechu. 

Pres.  Je  dechois,  tu  Aochois,  il  dcchoit,  nous  d^chqyons,  vous 
i^choi/ez,  ils  deKboient.  /Subj.  Que  je  dechoie. 

Pret.  Je  dcchu^tu  Jfteclius,  il  dechut,  nous  d^chumes,  vous  d(^- 
chutes,  ils  dechurcnt. 

Fut.  Je  decherrail  tvN^herras,  ils  ddcherra,  nous  d^cherrorui, 
vous  d^aherrez,  ils  decherrow? 

\  Thus :  Echoir,  to  fall  to,  to  expire ;  P.  pr.  €ch€ant ;  P.  p.  €chu.  It  is  now 
\>nly  used  in  the  third  pcrs.  sing.:  il  or  -elle  €choit,  il  €chut,  etc.  Choir  is  only 
used  in  the  Infinitive  mood. 

•  Je  dole,  followed  by  a  verb,  correspondB  to  the  English  -,  lamto  I  must.  J« 
4eTX'al5|  1  ought  to,  J  akould. 


too  XLIT.    QUAEANTE-QUATBIBMB  liEQON. 

67.    F«/7o?r^be^necessary,  is  an  impersonal  verb,  the  conjngar 
tion  of  which  has  been  given  p.  147. 
Pres.  II  faut.     Imperf.  II  fallait,  etc. 

58.  Mouvoir,  to  move.     P.  pr.  raouvant.    P.  p.  mu. 

Pres.  Je  meits,  tu  meus,  il  meut,  nous  mouvons,  vous  mouvez, 
Qg  meuvent.  Subj.  Que  je  mewve,  que  tu  mewves,  qu'il  mewve, 
quo  nous  mouvions,  que  vous  mouviez,  qu'ils  me?^vent.  • 

Pret.  Je  mus,  tu  mus,  il  mut,  nous  mumes,  vous  mutes,  Us 
murent. 

Fut.  Je  mouvrai. 

Thus  also :  ^mouvoir,  to  move,  to  excite,  stir  up ;  s'^mmivoir^  to  be  moved, 
affected. 

59.  Pleuvoir,  to  rain  (impers.).     P.pr.  pleuvant.     P.  p.  plu. 
Pres.  II  pleut.     Subj.  Qu'il  plcuve.     Imperf.  II  plcuvait. 
Pret.  II  plut.     Subj.  Imperf.  Qu'il  plut. 

Fut.  H  pleuvrav 

60.  Pourvoir*  to  provide.    P.  pr.  pourvoyant.     P.  p.  pourvu. 
Ve5.  Je  pourvois,  tu  pourvois,  il  pourvoit,  nous  pourvoyons,  vous 

pourvo^cz,  ils  jx)urvoicnt. 

Pret.  Je  pourvus.     Fut.  Je  pourvoirai. 

Thus  :  Pr^ooir,  to  foresee,  which  makes  in  the  Pret.  je  pr^ms. 

61.  Pouvoir,  to  be  able.     P.pr.  pouvant.     P  p.  pu. 

Pres.  Je  peux  (or  je  puis),  tu  peux,  Upeut,  nous  pouvons,  vous 
pouvez,  ils  peuvent.  Pres.  Subj.  Que  je  puisse,  que  tn  puisses, 
qu'il  puisse,  que  nous  puissions,  que  vous  puissiez,  qu'ils  puissent. 

Impf.  Je  pouvais. 

Pre<.  Je  pus,  tu  pus,  il  put,  nous  pumes,  vous  putes,  ils  purent. 

Imperf.  Subj.  Que  ^q  pusse. 

Fut.  Je  pourrai,  tu  pourras,  il  pourra,  nous  pourrons,  vous 
pourrez,  ils  pourront.      Cond.  Je  pourrais. 

Note.  May,  expressing  a  wish,  is  rendered  by  the  Present  tense  of  the 
Subjunctive.    Ex.:  Puisse-t-il  etre  heureux,  may  he  be  happy  1 

*  Lik«  66— Voir,  except  the  Pret.  and  FiU. 


mBEGULAB   VERBS.  191 

-"    62.    Savoiry  to  know.     P.  pr.  sacAant.  ,  P.  p.  iu. 

Pres.  Je  sais,  tu  sais.  il  sait,  nous  savons,  vous  savez,  ils  savent. 
3ubf.  Que  je  sache,  que  tu  sacAes,  qu'il  sacAe,  que  nous  sacAions, 
que  vous  sac/nez,  qu'ils  sacAent.  Imperf,  Je  savais,  tu  savais,  etc. 
Pret.  Je  sus,  tu  sus,  il  sut,  nous  suoies,  vous  sutes,  ils  sui-ent 
Fui:  Je  sawrai,  tu  saMras,  etc. 
Imper.  Sache,  saehons,  sachez. 

When  the  word  can  means  to  know  how,  it  is  rendered  in  French  by  savoir, 
instead  of  pouvoir.  Ex.:  Savezrvous  parler  frangais?  Can  you  speak 
French  ? 

Note.  There  is  also  an  old  form  of  the  Pres.  Ind.  Je  sache.  The  Cond. 
Je  ne  saurals  (without  pas)  signifies,  I  cannot,  as  :  Je  ne  saurais  vous  dire, 
I  cannot  tell  you. 

—  63.     Vahir,  to  be  worth.     P.  pr.  valant.     P.  p.  valu. 

Pres.  Je  vaux,  tu  vaux,  il  vaiU,  nous  valons,  vous  valez,  ils  va- 
lent.  Subj.  Que  je  vaille,  que  tu  vailles,  qu'il  vaiUcy  que  nous 
valions,  que  vous  valiez,  qu'ils  vaillent. 

Imperf.  Je  valais. 

Pret.  Je  valus,  tu  valus,  il  valut,  nous  valiimes,  eto. 

Fvt.  Je  vaudrai,  tu  vaudras,  eto. 

Gond.  Je  vaudrais. 

Observe  the  expression :  //  vaut  mieux,  it  is  better,  etc.  Conjugate  in  the 
same  manner :  pr^valoir,  to  prevail ;  but  it  makes  the  Subj.  pres.:  Que  je 
prtfvale  (not  prdvaille),  que  tupr^vales,  qu'il  pr€vale,  que  nous  pr^valions,  que 
vous  pr^valiez,  qu'ils  pr€val&vt. 

-—   64.    Vouloir,  to  be  willing.     P.  pr.  voulant.    P.  p.  voulu. 

Pres.  Je  veux,  tu  veux,  il  veut,  nous  voulons,  vous  voulez,  ils 
vevleiU.  Subj.  Que  je  veuille,  que  tu  veuilles,  qu'il  veuille,  que 
ttoufl  voulions,  que  vous  vouliez,  qu'ils  veuiUent.  Imper.  (  Veuille)^ 
veuilkz,  be  so  kind  as. 

Imperf.  Je  voulais. 

Pret.  Jo  voulus,  tu  voulus,  il  voulut,  nous  voulfimes,  eto. 

J'ut.  Je  voudrai,  tu  voudras,  eto. 

Cond.  Je  voudrais,  I  should  like  to. 


^ 


192  XLrV.      QUARANTE-QUATRreMB  LBgON. 

The  firat  person,  Je  veux,  is  mostly  used  to  imply  authority,  command. 
Je  desire  is  substituted  as  a  more  polite  expression  for  the  affirmative.  Je 
ne  veux  pas,  is  used,  hpwevcr,  for  the  neg  ative. 

65.     Voir,  to  see.     P.  pr.  volant.     P.  p.  vu. 

Pres,  Je  voiSf  tu  vois,  il  voit,  nous  voyons,  vous  voyez,  Us  voient. 

Tmperf.  Je  voyais,  tu  voyais,  etc. 

Pret.  Je  vis,  tu  vis,  il  vit,  nous  vimes,  vous  vites,  etc. 

Fut.  Je  verrai,  tu  verras,  il  verra,  etc. 

Imper.  Vois,  voyons,  voyez. 

Thus  :  Revoir,  to  see  again ;  entrevoir,  to  have  a  glimpse  of.  For  pour- 
voir  and  pr€voir  see  No.  60.  ARer  voir  and  venir  voir  qn.  are  rendered  :  to 
call  upon  a  person. 

GQ^^^asseoir,  to  sit  down.     P.  pr.  s'asseyant.     P.  p.  cusis. 

Pres.  Je  m^assieds,  tu  tassiedn,  il  H^asmd,  uuua  iibiSS^sseyons, 
vous  vous  asseyez,  ils  s'asseient.    Or,  jo  m'assois,  etc. 

Imperf.  Je  m'asseyais.     Or,  je  m'assoyais,  etc. 

Pret.  Je  m'assis,  tu  t'assis,  il  s'assit,  nous  nous  assimes,  vous 
vous  assites,  ils  s'assirent. 

PtU.  Je  massieraiy  tu  Vassieras,  il  s'assiera,  etc.  Or,  je  mW 
eeierai,  tu  Vasseieras,  il  s^asseiera,  etc. 

Imper.-  Assieds-toiy  aBsepons-nons,  ass«y«?-vous. 

VOCABULABT. 

Un  panier,  a  basket.  ^a?s,  thick. 

le  danger,  the  danger.  I'herbe,  f.  the  grasi. 

fe  ressort,  the  spring.  humide,  damp. 

le  beau-frere,  the  brother-in-law.  /e  bruit,  la  noiwdle,  the  repOift 

r€p€t€r,  to  repeat.  arreter,  to  stop. 

coupable,  criminal.  Vadresse,  f.  the  direction. 

2a  ^/ace,  the  looking-glass. 

THEME  44. 

1»  I  am  to  copy  my  exercise.  2.  We  must  set  out.  3.  Yoa 
ougbt  to  come  at  two  o'clock.  4.  I  receive  a  letter  every  day.  5. 
We  receive  our  money  from  the  banker  (du  hanquier).  6.  My 
j&iend  received  a  basket  filled  with,  grapes  {de  raisins),    7.  The 


IRREGULAR  TERES.  i^t 

hunter  perceived  a  bird  on  a  tree.  8.  They  did  not  perceive  the 
danger.  9.  The  spring  which  moves  the  whole  machine  is  very 
ingenious  (ingenieux).  10.  Doea  it  rain?  11.  No,  it  does  not 
rain ;  but  it  will  rain  this  evening./^  12.  K  men  do  not  provide  for 
it  (y),  God  will  provide  for  it.  13.  Before  he  left  (avant  de  par- 
ii'r),  hQ  provided  for  (a)  all.  14".  Can  you  coipe?  15.  I  cannot 
oome,  but  my  brother  qan  (com0) .  16..  We  could  see  nothing,  for 
it  was  dark  (il  faisait  nuit)'.  17.  I  could  do  it  myself,  if  I  had 
time.  18.  May  you  be  happy  I  I  could  do  no  better.  19.~I  know 
that  he  is  your  friend,  but  I  did  not  know  that  he  was  your  brother- 
in-law  20.  Do  you  know  why  he  has  (is)  not  come?  21.  No,  I 
do  noflinow  (it).  22.  When  you  know  (Fut.)  your  lesson,  come 
and  repeat  it  to  me.  23.  These  pens  are  worth  nothing.  24.  It 
is  (vaut)  better  to  bo  unfortimate  than  gtiilty.  25.  Can't  you  see 
that  star?  26.  I  do  not  see  it.  27.  Sit  down  there  a  minute.  28. 
Whjrdo  not  you  sit  down?  29.  Let  ua  sTt  upon  thr  grass.  30.  I 
would  sit-down  u{)on  the  grass,  if  it  were  not  so  damp.  ^3|l.  Can 
you  speak  French  ?  3^.  I  can  read,  but  I  cannot  speak  [it],  ^S^ 
Is  this  report  tpie?  3^.  I  cannot  (  Cond.)  tell  (it)  you.  35.  He 
does  not  choose-to  (vill  not)  eat.  36.  If  I  chose  (would),  I  should 
tell  you  where  he  lives.  37.""Vhat  would  you  have  me  do  (that  I 
should  do)  (Imperf.  Suhj.)  ?  36^.  We  could  have  stepped  him,  if 
we  had  chosen.  39.  I  send  you  herewith' (a'^/oiW)  the  direction 
of  Mr,  L.  ^0.  I  have  found  the  ring  which  my  cousin  has  lost, 
and  I  shall  sand  it  to  her.W 


194  XLV.      QUARANTE-CINQUIEME   LEgON. 

XLV.    QUARANTE-CINQUlfiME    LE9ON. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.— THIRD  CLASS    CONTINUED. 

67.  Hire,  to  la;igh.     P. pr.  riant.     P.p.  ri. 
Pres,  Je  ris.     Imperf.  Je  rials. 

Pret.  Je  ris,  tu  ris,  il  rit,  etc.     Fut.  Je  rirai. 

68.  Envoyer,  to  send.     P.  pr.  envoyant.     P.  p.  envoy^. 
Pres.  J'envoie.     Imperf.  J'envoyais.     Pret.  J'envoyai. 
Fut.  J^euYerrai,  tu  enverros,  etc.      Cond.  J'enverrais. 

69.  AUer*  to  go.     P.  pr.  allant.     P.  p.  all^. 

Pres.  Je  vais,  tu  vas,  il  va,  nous  allons,  vous  allez,  ils  tyont. 
Pres.  Subf.  Que  yaiUe,  que  tu  aiUes,  qu'il  aiUe,  que  nous  alliens, 
que  vous  alliez,  qu'ils  aiUent. 

Imperf.  J'allais,  tu  allais,  il  allait,  etc. 

Pret.  J'allai,  tu  alias,  il  alia,  nous  aMmes,  vous  allates,  ils 
allerent. 

Imperf  StibJ.  Que  j'allasse,  que  tu  allasses,  etc. 

Imper.  Va,  allons,  allez.     Perf  Je  suis  all^,  I  have  gone. 

FtU.  J'irai  {I shall  go),  tu  iras,  il  ira,  nous  irons,  vous  irez.  ila 
iront.      Oond.  J'irais,  tu  irais,  etc. 

Conjugation  of  S'en  aUer^  to  go  away. 
We  give  the  reflective  verb  S*en  aller,  to  go  away,  at  fall  length,  because 
its  conjugation  is  rather  difficult  on  account  of  its  two  pronouns.  Observe 
that  en  is  never  separated  from  the  objective  w*,  t',  s',  nous,  etc. ;  hence  it 
follows,  tliat  the  compound  or  Perfect  must  not  be  written :  Je  me  mis  en 
oMf  but  je  m'en  suis  alii,  tu  t'en  es  cdl^,  etc. 

INDICATIVB  MOOD. 
PRE8BNT  TENSB. 

Je  m'en  vais,  I  go  away.  nous  nous  en  allons,tre  go  away. 

tu  t'en  vas,  etc.  vous  vous  en  allez,        etc. 

il  s'en  va,  eto.  ils  s'en  vont,  eto. 


IBBEGULAB   VERBS. 


195 


Keg.  Je  ne  m'en  vais  p£is. 
tu  ne  t'en  vas  pas,  etc. 


M'en  vais-je,  do  I  go  awagf  etc. 
Ne  m*en  vais-je  pas  ?  etc. 


IMPERFECT. 

Je  m*en  allais,  tu  t'en  allais.  M*en  allais-je,  did  I  go  away 


Jo  ne  m^en  allais  pas. 


Je  m'en  allai. 

Je  ne  m'en  allai  pas. 

Je  m*en  irai. 

Je  ne  m'en  irai  pas 

▲VFIBMATIVB. 

Va.t*en. 

(qu'il  s*en  aille). 
allons-nous^n. 
allez-vou&^n. 
(qu'ils  8*en  aillent). 


Ne  m*en  allais-je  pas  ? 

FRETEBITB. 

M'en  allai-je  ? 

Ne  m'en  allai-je  pas  ? 

TUTURB. 

M'en  irai-je  ? 

Ne  m'en  irai-je  pas  V 


OCPERATITB. 


ITEOATZTB. 


Ne  t'en  va  pas. 
(qu'il  ne  s'en  aille  pas), 
ne  nous  en  allons  pas. 
ne  vous  en  allez  pas. 
(qu'ils  ne  s'en  aillent  pas). 


COMPOUND   OP   THE   PRESENT. 

Je  m'en  suis  all^,  IJiave  gone  away,    nous  nous  en  sommes  all^. 


tu  t'en  es  all^. 
il  s'en  est  all^. 
elle  s'en  est  all^. 


Je  ne  m'en  suis  pas  all^. 
ta  ne  t'en  es  pas  all^. 
il  ne  s^en  est  pas  all^ 


vous  vous  en  Stes  all^(s). 
ils  s'en  sent  all^s. 
elles  s'en  sont  allies. 


NBQATrVELT. 


nous  ne  nous  en  sommes  pas 

all^s. 
vous    ne    vous    en    Stes    pas 

all^(s). 
ils  ne  s'en  sont  pas  all^. 


196 


XLV.      QUARANTE-CINQUlfiME  LEgON. 


INTERROaATIVELY. 

M'en  suis-je  all^  ?  nous  en  sommes-nous  all^s  ? 

t'en  es-tu  all^?  vous  en  etes-vous  alle(B)  ? 

s'en  est-il  all^  ?  s'en  sont  ils  alles  ? 

NEGATIVE-INTERROaATIVE. 

Ne  m'en  suis-je  pas  all^  ?  ne  nous  en  sommes-nous  p.  all^  ? 

ne  t'en  es-tu  pas  alle  ?  ne  vous  en  etes-vous  pas  all^sl 

ne  s'en  estril  pas  all4?  ne  s'en  sont-ils  pas  all^s? 

COMPOUND   OP   THE  IMPERFECT. 

Je  m'en  ^tais  all^.  M'en  ^tais-je  all^  ? 

Je  ne  m'en  ^tais  pas  aU4.  Nc  m'en  ^tais-je  pas  all^  ? 


8UBJUNCTIVB. 
PRESENT. 

que  nous  nous  en  aOions. 
que  vous  vous  en  allien, 
qu'ils  s'en  aillent. 

PERFECT. 

Que  je  m'en  sois  aJW. 

PLUPERFECT. 

Que  je  m'en  fusse  all^ 

INFINITIVE. 

S'en  etre  all^. 

PARTICIPLES. 

S'en  ^tant  allt^. 


Que  je  m'en  idlle. 
que  tu  t'en  allies, 
qu'il  s'en  aille. 

IMPERFECT. 

Que  je  m'en  allasse. 
que  tu  t'en  allasses. 
qu'il  s'en  allat,  etc. 

S'en  aller. 


S'en  allant 


VOCABULAKT. 

Oblige,  obliged.  sonner,  to  strike. 

Jeudi  dernier,  last  Thursday.  la  sant€,  health. 

la  musique,  music.  importuner,  to  importimai. 

U  pauillon,  the  flag.  kiss^,  hoisted. 


DEPECTIVB  VERBS.  197 

THEME  45. 

1.  I  go  to  London.  2.  Tbou  goest  to  Paris.  3.  He  goes  U> 
Berlin.  4.  My  brother  has  also  gone  to  Berlin.  5  Where  are 
you  going?  6.  I  am  going  to  the  play  {au  spectacle).  7.  I  would 
go  with  you,  if  I  had  tune.  8.  Why  are  they  going  away  so  soon  ? 
9.  They  are  obliged  to  go  away,  10.  Will  not  your  mother  be 
angry  (fdchee),  if  you  go  away  before  her  ?  11.  I  told  her  that  I 
would  go  away  before  her,  and  she  has  permitted  (it  to)  me.  12. 
My  sister  and  I  (we)  went  to  the  concert  last  Thursday.  13.  K 
you  had  gone  (there,  y)  uiso,  you  would  have  heard  fine  music./  14. 
These  men  went  yesterday  from  house  to  {en)  house  15.  At  what 
o'clock  will  you  go  (away)  ?  16.  I  should  have  already  gone,  if  it 
bad  not  rained  so  fast  (fort).  17.  Is  he  really  gone  (away)? 
Yes,  he  went  (has  gone)  away  this  morning.  18.  Let  us  go  (away), 
it  is  going  to  (i7  va)  strike  three  o'clock.  19.  How  is  (ya)  your 
health?  20.  Thank  you,  it  is  not  very  good.  21.  I  wish  (shoidd 
like  that)  the  boy  would  go  (away)  (Imperf.  Suhj.).  22.  I  wish 
they  would  go  away.     23.  Begone  (go  away),  you  importune  me. 


XLVI.     QUARANTE-SIXifiME    LE^ON 


DEFECTIVE    VERBS. 

Verbs  whereof  some  tenses  or  persons  are  wanting  are  def<^T« 
verbs.     They  are  as  follows :  — 

70.  Braire,  to  bray. 

Pres.  D  brait,  Us  braient.     Fut.  H  braira. 
Cond,  n  brairait. 

71.  Druire,  to  roar.     P.  pr.  bray  ant. 
Imperf.  11  bruyait,  pi.  ils  bruyaient 

72.  CAotr,  tofaU.     P.  j>.  chu. 


198  '    XLVi.      QUARANTK-SIXIfiME  LEgON. 

73.  Clore,  to  close.     P.  p.  clos. 
Pres.  Je  clos,  tu  clos,  il  clot. 

Fut.  Je  clorai,  tu  cloras,  etc.     Cond.  Je  clorais. 

74.  Eclore*  to  be  hatched.     P.  p.  ^clos. 

Pres.  D  ^clot,  pi.  Hs  4closent.  Sulj.  Qu'il  ^close,  pL  qa'ils 
Absent. 

i^M«.  H  ^clora,  pi.  ils  ecloront.  Its  compound  tenses  are  formed 
with  etre, 

75.  FailUr,  to  fail.     P.  pr.  (faillant.)     P.  p.  failli. 

Pres.  n  faut.  *  ^^ 

Pret.  Je  faillis,  tu  faillis,  il  faillit,  nous  faillimes,  vous  faillltes, 
ils  faillirent. 

Perf.  J'ai  failli,  I  had  nearly. 
Thus  :  D^faillir,  to  faint. 

76.  Ferir  is  used  only  in  the  expression:  Sans  coup  ferir, 
without  striking  a  blow. 

77.  Frire,  to  fry.     P.  pr.  wanting.     P.  p.  fnt. 
Pres.  Je  fris,  tu  fris,  il  frit.     Plur»  wanting. 

Fvt.  Je  frirai.      Cond.  Je  frirais.     Perf.  J'ai  frit,  etc. 

78.  Gesir,  to  lie.     P.  pr.  gisant. 

Pres.  cigit,  here  lies;  pi.  ci-gisent  (used  on  tombstones).     Fur 
ther :  nous  gisons,  vous  gisez,  ils  gisent. 
Imperf.  ci-gisait;  pi.  ci-gisaient. 

79.  Issir,  to  be  bom,  is  used  only  in  the  P.  p.  issu. 

80.  Ouir,  to  hear.     P.  p.  oui. 

Pret.  J'ouis,  tu  oms,  etc.     Imperf.  Suhj.  Que  j'ouisse,  etc. 
Further  the  compound  tenses,  as :  Tai  out,  etc. 

81.  Sourdre,  to  rush  out  of  the  ground,  as  water,  baa  only  the 
Infinitive  and  the  Present,  elle  sourd,  elks  sourdent. 

82.  Seoir,  to  fit.     P.  pr.  seant.     P.  p.  sis. 

Jhd.  pres.  II  sied.     Fut.  II  siera.      Cond^  II  a^rait. 

83.  Surseoir,  to  put  off,     P.  p.  sursis. 
Pres.  Je  surseois.     Pret.  Je  sursis. 

Note.  — Moat  of  Uir«»  w«.rb8  ar«- not  much  In  ase. 


IBBEGULAB  AND  DEFECTTTB  VEBBS. 


199 


AN   ALPHABETICAL    LIST    OF    ALL    THE    FRENCH 
IRREGULAR    AND    DEFECTIVE    VERBS.* 


CONTAINING   THEIR   PIVB   PRIMITIYE   TENSES. 


Injinitiv 
Absoudre 
Acqu^rir 
AUer 
I    Assaillir 
»^  S'assebir 
Atteindre 
Battre,  see  L. 
Boixe 
Bouillir 
Braire 
Bruire 
Ceindre 


!.  Pres. 

j'absouB 
j'acquiers 
je  vais 
j'assaiUe 
je  m'assieds 
j'atteins 

XXIII.,  Rem.  1. 
je  bois 
je  bous 
D  brait 

Imp.  il  bruyait 


Ceindre  je  ceins 

Choir,  see  d<^choir 
Circoncire 


Clore 

Conclure 

Concevoir 

Conduire 

Confire 

Coniudtre 

Coudre 

Courir 

Couvrir 

CraiDdre 

Croire 

Croitre 

Cueillir 

Cuire 

D^choir 

DeToir 

Dire 

Dormir 


je  circoncis 
je  clos 
je  conclus 
je  con9oi8 
je  conduis 
je  confis 
je  connais 
je  coudfl 
je  cours 
je  couvre 
je  crains 
je  crois 
je  crois 
je  caeille 
je  cols 
je  di^choiB 
je  dois 
je  dis 
je  dors 


Part.  pr. 

absolvant 

acqu^rant 

allant 

assaillaut 

s'asseyant 

atteignant 

buvant 
booillant 

bruyant 
ceigoant 


concluant 

concevant 

conduisant 

confisant 

connaissant 

cousant 

courant 

couvrant 

craignant 

croyant 

croissant 

caeillant 

coisant 

devant 
disant 
dormant 


P.p. 
absous,  te 
acquis,  e 
aU^,  e 
assailli,  e 
assis,  e 
atteint,  e 

bu,  e 
bouilli,  e 
loanting 


Prd. 

voanting 
j 'acquis 
j'allai 
j'assailliB 
je  m'assis 
j'atteignis 

jebus 
je  bouillis 
toanting 


ceint,  e       je  ceignis 


circoncis 
clos 

conclu,  e 
con9u,  e 
conduit,  e 
confit,  e 
connu,  e 
cousu,  e 
couru,  e 
convert,  e 
craint,  e 
era,  e 
crti,  e 
cueilli,  e 
cuit,  e 
d^chu,  e 
dfl 

dit,  e 
dormi 


je  circoEcis 

je  concltM 
je  con9U8 
je  conduisis 
je  confis 
je  connus 
je  cousis 
je  courus 
je  couvris 
je  craignis 
je  eras 
je  crlis 
je  cuellis 
je  cuisis 
je  dachas 
je  dus 
je  dis 
je  dormis 


No, 
13. 
53. 
69. 
47. 
66. 
14. 

19. 
50. 
70. 
71. 
14. 
56. 

2. 

73. 

L.23, 

53. 

5. 

2. 
26. 
11. 
41. 
46. 
15. 
20. 
21. 
43. 

4. 
56. 
54. 

7. 
35. 


*  Tbe  derivativeB  which  are  uot  in  this  table  will  be  found  with  the  primitives^ 
onder  tlwlr  respective  namber- 


200 


XLTI.      QUABANTE-BIXI^MB  USgOH. 


Echoir 

a  €clioit 

€ch^ant 

^chu 

il^chm 

36. 

Eclore 

il  ^clot 

— 

^clos 

— 

74. 

Ecrire 

j'^cris 

^crivant 

^crit,  e 

j'^crivis 

17. 

Envoyer 

j'envoie 

envoyant 

envoyd 

j'cnvoyai 

68. 

Faire 

jefais 

faisant 

fait,  e 

jefis 

27. 

Faillir 



faillant 

failU 

je  faillis 

75. 

Falloir 

nfaut 

— 

fallu 

il  fallut 

57. 

Feindre 

je  feins 

feignant 

feint,  0 

je  feignis 

14.i 

F<5rir 

— 

— 

— 

— 

76. 

Frire 

jefris 

— 

frit,  e 

■  — 

77. 

Fuir 

jefuis 

fuyant 

ftii 

je  fills 

32. 

Gesir 

il  git 

gisant 

— 

— 

78. 

Joindre 

je  joins 

joignant 

joint,  e 

je  joignis 

16. 

Issir 

— 

— 

issu,  e 

— 

79. 

Instruire 

j'instruifl 

instruisant 

instruit,  e 

j'instmisis 

6. 

Lire 

jelis 

lisant 

lu,  e 

jeloB 

18. 

Luire 

jeluis 

loisant 

lui 

— 

1. 

Mentir 

je  mens 

mentant 

menti 

je  mentis 

37. 

Mettre 

je  mets 

mettant 

mis,  e 

je  mis 

28. 

Moudre 

je  mouds 

moulant 

moulu,  e 

je  moulus 

12. 

Mourir 

je  meurs 

mourant 

mort,  e 

je  mourns 

49. 

Mouvoir 

je  mens 

mouvant 

mu,  e 

je  mu8 

58. 

Naltre 

je  naia 

naissant 

n^,  e 

je  naquis 

SO. 

Nuire 

je  nuis 

nuisant 

nui 

je  nuisis 

3. 

Offrir 

j'ofli© 

offrant 

offert,  e 

j'offris 

43. 

Oindr© 

j'oing 

— 

oint 

j'oignis 

16. 

Ouir 

— 

— 

GUI 

J'OUM 

80. 

Ouvrir 

j'ouvre 

onrrant 

ouvert,  e 

j'ouvris 

45. 

Paitre 

jepais 

paissant 

pu 

— 

25. 

Paraitre 

je  parais 

paraissant 

pam 

je  parus 

24. 

Paitir 

jepare 

partant 

parti 

je  partis 

36. 

Peindre 

je  peins 

peignant 

peint 

je  peignis 

14. 

Plaindre 

je  plains 

plaignant 

plaint 

je  plaignis 

15. 

Plaire 

je  plaifl 

plaisant 

plu 

je  plus 

22. 

Pleuvoir 

il  pleut 

pleuvant 

plu 

ilplut 

59. 

Prendre 

je  prends 

prenant 

prifl 

jepris 

29. 

Poindre 

je  poins 

poignant 

(point) 

(je  poignis ) 

16. 

Pourvoir 

je  pourvois 

pourvoyant 

pourvu,  e 

pourvus 

60. 

Poavoir 

jepeux(puis)  pouvant 

pu 

jepus 

61. 

Repentir,  se 

je  me  repens  repentant 

repenti 

je  me  repeutis 

39. 

Restreindre 

je  restreins 

— 

restreint 

je  restreignifl 

14. 

Rire 

je  lis 

riiuU 

Si 

jeris 

67 

SUPPLEMENTARY  TENSES. 


201 


Rompre,  tee  L. 

XXIII.,  Rem.  2. 

Salllir 

il  saille 

saillant 

sailli 

Usaiilit 

48. 

Savoir 

je  sais 

sachant 

su,  e 

je  BUS 

62, 

Sentir 

je  sens 

sentant 

senti,  0 

je  sentis 

38. 

Seoir 

flsied 

sdant 

sis,  e 

— 

82. 

Serrir 

je  scrs 

servant 

servi,  e 

je  servifl 

S4. 

Sortir 

je  sors 

sortant 

sorti 

je  sortis 

40. 

Souffrir 

je  soufFre 

Bcutfrant 

soufFcrt,  e 

jesouflOis 

44. 

Sourdre 

clle  sourd 
je  Buis 

— 

— 

— 

81. 

Suivre 

«uivant 

suivi,  e 

je  suivii 

9. 

Suffire 

je  suffis 

suflBsant 

suffi 

je  suffis 

2. 

Surseoir 

je  surseois 

sursoyant 

Bursis 

jesursis 

83. 

Tairo 

je  tais 

taisant 

tu,  e 

jotus 

23. 

Teindre 

je  teins 

teignant 

teint,  e 

je  teignis 

14. 

Tenir 

je  tiens 

tenant 

tenu,  e 

je  tins 

52. 

Traire 

je  trab 

tray  ant 

trait 

— 

8. 

Tressaillir 

je  trcssaiUe 

tressaillaiit 

tressailli 

je  tressaillis 

47. 

Valoir 

je  vaux 

valant 

valu 

je  valus 

63. 

Vaincro 

je  vainca 

vainqaant 

vaincu,  e 

je  vainqnis 

10. 

Venir 

je  vieoa 

Tenant 

venu,  e 

je  vins 

51. 

Vetir 

je  vgts 

v^taot 

v§tu 

je  v^tis 

33. 

Vivre 

je  vis 

vivant 

v^cu 

je  v^cus 

31. 

Voir 

je  vols 

voyant 

vu,  e 

je  vis 

65. 

Vouloir 

je  veua 

Toolo,  e 

]9  voolns 

64. 

XLVII.    QUARANTE-SEPTlilME    LEgON. 


HOW  TO  RENDER  BO,  DTD,  SHALL,   WILL,  ETC  -- 
SUPPLE.A1ENTARY  TENSES. 

Tho  auxiliaries  rfo,  will,  shall,  etc.,  in  answers,  are  often  used  in 
English  in  an  elliptical  manner,  when  in  French  the  principal  verb 
must  be  repeated,  and  a  noun  or  pronoun  supplied. 

Si,  "  yes/*  is  generally  used  in  answers  instead  of  out  in  replying  to  a 
question  in  which  there  is  a  negation,  or  in  contradiction  to  a  negative 
statfimoiit. 


202 


XLVn.      QUARANTE-SEPTIEME   LEgON. 


EXAMPLES  : 


Avez-voas  du  pain  1     Oui,  fen  ai 
A.vez-vous  r(?pondtt  ?      Oui,  j'ai  r^- 

pondu f 
Acheteront-ils  ce  bearre?     Oui,  ils 

I'achet&i'ont. 
Voulez  vous  le  lui  demander  ?  Oui, 

je  veux  Men. 
Etes-vous  Anglais  ?    Non  je  ne  le 

suis  pas. 
Avez-vous  ete  a  Rome  ?    Non,  je 

n*y  ai  pas  €t€. 
Est-ce  vous  qui  etes  venu  hier  soir  ? 

Non,  ce  n'est  pas  moi. 
Ce  n'est  pas  ce  peintre  qui  a  fail 

votre  portrait  1     Si,  c'est  lui. 
Lui  rendrez-vous  son  portrait  ?  Cela 

ca  sans  dire. 
Partira-t-il  1     Oui,  il  partira. 
Iriez  vous  s'il  y  allait  f    Mais  oui, 

je  le/erais. 
Est-ce  la  mode?      Oui,    c'est  la 

mode. 
Pourquci  vous  plaignez-vous  1    Je 

ne  me  plains  pas ;  c'est  mon  frere 

qui  se  plaint.    II  se  plaint !   Oui, 

vraiment,  et  il   y  a    longtemps 

qu'il  se  plaint. 
J'ai  faim.     Vraiment  ?     Oui,  bien 

faim. 
Doit-elle  venir  ce  soir  1     Oui,  elle 

doit  venir. 


Have  you  any  bread  ?     Yes^  I  have. 
Have  you  answered?     Yes,  I  have. 

Will  they  buy  ikat  butter?     Yes^thq 

will. 
Will  you  ask  him  for  it  ?     Yes,  I  will 

Are  you  an   EngliskTnan  ?     No,  I  am 

not. 
Have  you  been  in  Rome  ?    No,  I  havo 

not. 
Was  it  you  who  came  last  night  ?      No, 

it  was  not  I. 
That  painter   did  not  take  your  like- 

ness,  did  he.  ?     Yes,  he  did. 
Will  you  return  her  likeness    to    her? 

Of  course  I  will. 
Will  he  set  out  ?     Yes,  he  will. 
Should  you  go  there  if  he  did  ?      Why, 

yes,  I  should. 
Is  it  the  fashion  1     Yes,  it  is. 

Why  do  you  complain?  I  do  not 
complain;  my  brother  does. — 
Does  he?  Indeed  he  does,  and 
he  has  complained  for  a  long 
time. 

I  am  hungry.  Are  you?  Yes, 
very. 

Does  she  intend  to  come  this  even- 
ing ?     Yes,  she  does. 


In  exclamations  the  auxiliary  must  be  translated  by  some  words 
expressive  of  the  meaning  implied  by  the  English  ellipsis.    Ex. :  — 

Son  associd  est  revenu  des  Indes.     His  partner  has  returned  from  IndiA. 

Est-ce    possible,  vous    me    sur-        Has  he  ? 

prenez,  or  simply,  Ah  !  vraiment ! 
J'ai  sommeil.     Ah!  vraiment?  or,     1  am  sleepy.    Are  you! 

Allons  done,  vous  plaisantez. 


SUPPLEMENTARY  TENSES. 


208 


SUPPLEMENTARY    TENSES. 

The  <rerb8  aller,  devoir,  and  venir  de  axe  idiomatically  used,  forming,  with 
»an  infinitive,  what  some  grammarians  have  called  *'  Supplementary 
Tenses." 

Aller  and  devoir  before  an  infinitive  form  idiomatic  futures,  and  corre- 
spond to  the  English  verbs  to  go  and  to  6c  (to  bo  about  to),  in  a  like  position. 

Venir  de  forms  idiomatic  past  tenses,  and  corrcisponda  to  the  English  to 
hav«  just. 


CONJUGATION  OF  THE  SUPPLEMENTARY  TENSES. 


Je  vais 

avoir, 

Tn  vas 

chanter, 

Eva 

danscr. 

Nous  alions 

finir, 

Vous  allez 

rendre, 

Us  vont 

recevoir, 

J'allais  avoir,  etc. 

Je  dois 

avoir, 

Tu  dois 

chanter, 

11  doit 

danser. 

Nous  devons 

tinir. 

Vous  devez 

rendre. 

lis  doivent 

recevoir, 

Je  devais  avoir,  etc. 

Je  devrab  avoir,  etc. 

J'aurais  dtt  avoir,  etc. 

Je  viens  dc  (d') 

avoir, 

Tu  viens 

chanter. 

11  vient 

danser, 

Nous  venous  " 

finir. 

Vouii  vencz     " 

rendre. 

Us  vienneni 

recevoh:, 

/  am  going 

to  have. 

Thau  art  going 

to  sing. 

He  is  going 

to  dance. 

We  are  going 

to  finish. 

You  are  going 

to  render. 

They  are  going 

to  receive. 

I  was  going  to  have,  etc* 

I  am 

to  have. 

Thou  art 

to  sing. 

He  is 

to  dance. 

We  are 

to  finish. 

You  are 

to  render. 

They  are  . 

to  receive. 

I  was  to  hi 

ive. 

I  should  or  ought  to  have. 
I  should  or  ought  to  have  had 
had. 


I  have  just 
TJiou  hast  just 
He  lias  just 
We  have  j^ist 
You  liave  Just 
They  have  just 


sung. 

danced. 

finishe/i. 

rendered 

ref'^ioed. 


Je  Tonais  d'  avoir,  etc. 


/  had  just  had,  etc. 


^04:  XLVn.      QUARANTE-SEPTrijME  LEgON. 

These  last  tenses  may  be  expressed  by  /aire  preceded  by  ne  and  followed 
by  the  conjunctive  que,  with  an  infinitive  preceded  hj  de  (ne  /aire  que de). 
e.  g.  //  ne  fait  que  d'arriver.  He  has  but  just  arrited.  Je  ne  fais  que  de 
tortir.    I  have  but  just  gone  out. 

N.  B.  The  particle  de  is  here  indispensable,  because,  without  it  the  ex-  • 
pression  would  have  quite  another  sense,  and  would  denote  a  continuation 
or  a  frequent  repetition  of  the  action,  Ex. :  Vous  ne  faites  que  sortir.  Yon 
do  liothing  bat  go  oat.    EUe  ne  faU  que  jouer.    She  does  nothing  but  play. 


1>A.RT    II. 


ELISION. 

The  vowels  a, «,  t,  when  final,  are  sometimes  elided  before  a  word 
beginning  with  a  vowel  or  h  mute ;  thus :  VdmCy  Phommef  sHl,  in* 
?tead  of  la  dme,  le  homme,  si  il. 

Elision  of  a.    A  is  elided  only  in  the  word  la.   Ex. :  Vamitie. 

EliSion  of  e.  E  is  elided  in  the  nine  monosyllables  je,  me,  te, 
fe,  dCf  ne,  ce,  te  and  que.  Ex.:  faime;  c'est  Vhomme  ruHl  rCestime 
pas. 

ExcKPTiONS.  —  1.  The  vowels  of  the  pronouns  le,  la,  je,  and  ce  are  never 
elided  wnen  they  come  after  the  verb.  Ex. :  Ai-je  un  livre  ;  est-ce  elle.  The 
e  in  je  and  ce  is  not  pronounced,  however,  though  the  e  and  a  of  le  and  la 
are  in  voyez-la  aujounVhui,  voyez-le  aujourtThui. 

2.  Before  out  and  onze  no  elision  takes  place :  je  crois  que  out;  le  onze. 

The  E  is  elided  in  lorsque,  when ;  puisque,  since ;  quoiquB^ 
though,  only  before  il,  elle,  on  and  un.  Ex.:  lorsquHU  puisqu^on^ 
etc.  In  qu^lqu^  the  e  is  elided  only  before  un,  une,  and  autre.  Ex.: 
quelqu'un  ;  qu^lqu  autre.  In  entre  and  presque,  e  is  elided  only  when 
they  form  part  of  a  compound  word.     Ex.:  entr^acte  presqu^tle. 

Elision  op  i.  I  is  elided  only  in  the  conjunction  si  before  H 
and  iU.     Ex.:  s'il,  s'iU, 


206  I.      PBEMIEBE  LEgOK. 


I.    PREMIERE    LEgON. 


ON  THE  GENDER  OF  SUBSTANTIVES. 

L  RULES  ON  THE  GENDER  OF  SIMPLE  NOUNS. 
$1.  MASCULINE  BY  THEIR  SIGNIFICATION  AKE  : 

1 .  The  names  of  all  masculine  beings,  as :  Henri,  Henry ;  Vem- 
pereur,  the  emperor ;  le  maitre,  the  master ;  h  Frangais,  the 
Frenchman;  U  taureau,  the  bull,  elc. 

2.  The  names  of  metals,  trees,  shrubs,  seasons,  months,  and  days, 
as :  le  fer,  iron ;  le  chene,  the  oak ;  le  printempSy  spring ;  le  jcli 
Mai,  (the)  fine  May ;  (le)  lundi,  Monday,  etc 

3.  All  words  that  are  made  substantive  by  prefixing  the  article, 
as:  k  vert,  the  green  (color);  le  Men,  the  good;  le  hoire  et  le 
manger,  drinking  and  eating ;  le  oui  et  le  non,  the  yes  and  no. 

4.  Nouns  expressing  professions,  titles,  or  qualities  which  belong 
generally  to  men  :  philosophe,  orateur,  etc. 

5.  The  names  generally  used  in  natural  history  to  designate  the 
different  species  of  animals :  un  quadrupede,  un  mammifere,  un 
herbivore,  etc. 

6.  The  names  employed  in  Chemistry  to  designate  simple  bodies 
and  most  of  their  compounds  :  /'or,  le  cuivre,  Vhydrogene,  Voxy- 


7.  The  names  of  the  decimal  nomenclature :  le  metre,  le  franc, 
le  centime^  etc. 

52.  MASCULINE  BY  TERMINATION: 

1 .  Nouns  ending  in  a  consonant  (except  those  in  aison,  iojiy  and 
eiMr). 

2.  Nouns  endhag  in  any  vowel  except  e  mute  and  e  preceded  by 
t  or  ti. 

3.  Nouns  ending  m  e  mute  preceded  by  6,  g,  I  (not  double),  w, 


ON  THE  GENDER  OP  SUBSTANTIVES.        207 

r  (except  rr  not  preceded  by  m),  «,  t  (not  double),  ortf  (except 
those  in  iqva). 

To  any  rules  far  terminations,  there  will  be  found  many  exceptions. 
These  roles  are  general.  Most  of  the  exceptions  in  common  use,  the  pu- 
pil will  learn  as  they  occur  in  thic  grammar. 

$3.  FEMININE  BY  SIGNIFICATION: 

1 .  All  names  of  female  persons  and  animals,  as  :  Ma-ne^  Mary  j 
hx  reine,  the  queen ;  la  file,  the  girl ;  la  jument,  the  mare,  etc. 

2.  The  names  of  fruits,  flowers,  and  herbs,  as  :  la  poire,  the 
pear ;  la  pomme,  the  apple  ;  la  rose,  the  rose ;  Vherbe,  the  gi*ass. 

Except:  Le  marron,  the  chestnut;  le  citron,  the  lemon;  le  raisin, the 
grape ;  un  abricot,  an  apricot ;  tin  ceillet,  a  pink ;  le  lis,  the  lily,  and  a  few 
more,  on  account  of  their  masculine  termination. 

3.  The  names  of  countries,  places,  and  rivers  ending  in  e  mute, 
as :  la  France,  la  Prusse,  Vancienne  Rome,  la  Loire,  la  Seine, 
etc. 

Except :  Le  Ha/wvre,  le  Mexique,  le  Danube,  le  RhSne, 

$  4.    FEMININE  BY  TEEMINATION: 

1.  Nouns  ending,  with  e  mute,  not  included  in  the  masculine  ter- 
minations, as  :  la  vie,  life ;  Vepee,  the  sword. 

2.  Those  ending  in  arson,  ion,  and  eur,  as:  'la  maison,  the 
house ;  la  religion,  la  grandeur. 

3.  Those  ending  in  e  preceded  by  t  or  ti,  as  :  la  beaut e,  beauty. 

4.  These  five  words  ending  in  i  are  feminine  :  la  foi,  faith ;  la 
hi,  law ;  la  fourmi,  the  ant ;  la  merci,-  mercy ;  Vapres-midi. 

5.  Most  nouns  endiag;  in  oire  (not  oir)  are  feminine,  as  :  la 
gloire,  glory ;  Vhistoire,  history ;  la  victoire,  victory  ;  la  mackoire, 
the  jaw. 

6.  Gens.  This  word  presents  an  anomaly  in  gender.  It  is 
masculine,  but  when  an  adjective  precedes  it,  that  adjective  takes 
the  feminine  form,  if  its  termination  is  not  e  mute.  If  a  definitive, 
as  tout  or  certain,  precedes  this  adjective,  the  definitive  jilso  taJses 


208  I.      PREMIERE   LEgON. 

the  feminine  form.  In  all  other  cases,  gens  takes  a  masculine 
adjective,  as:  Toutes  les  vieilles  gens  sont  soupgonneux,  all  old 
people  are  suspicious.     But,  Tons  les  jeunes  gens, 

n.   GE]!n)ER  OF  COMPOUND  SUBSTANTIVES. 
This  depends  upon  the  manner  of  their  composition. 

1.  When  the  first  component  is  a  noun,  it  detennines  the  gender 
«>f  the  whole,  as :  Le  chou-fleur,  the  cauliflower ;  un  arc-en-cieij  a 
rainbow ;  la  fete  Dieu. 

2.  When  they  consist  of  a  preposition  or  an  adjective  and  a  noun, 
the  gender  of  the  noun  remains  for  the  whole,  as :  Le  contre-coup, 
the  counter-buff;  Vavant-bras,  m.  the  fore-arm. 

3.  Those  nouns  compounded  with  a  verb  and  noun  are  always  of 
the  masculine  gender,  as ;  Le  portemanteau,  the  portmanteau :  le 
tire-houchon,  the  corkscrew ;  le  porte-feuUUy  the  portfolio  (though 
feuille  is  feminine) . 

THEME  1. 

Indicate  the  gender  of  the  following  nouns,  by  placing  an  article, 
either  the  definite  or  the  indefinite,  before  them  : 

The  horse,  —  cheval.  The  pear, — poire.  The  metal, — metal. 
A  winter,  —  hiver.  Italy,  —  Italie.  The  cheny,  —  cerise.  The 
cherry-tree,  —  cerisier.  The  house,  —  maison.  The  vapor,  — 
vapeur.  The  walnut,  —  ?ioix.  A  leaf,  — feuille.  The  truth,  — 
verite.  The  van-guard,  —  avant-garde.  The  cart,  —  charette. 
The  work,  —  travail.  The  shell,  —  coquille.  The  hat,  —  cha- 
peau.  The  shoe, — Soulier.  The  honey, — miel.  The  carpenter, 
—  charpentier.  The  nurse,  —  nourrice.  The  sun,  —  soleil.  The 
earth,  —  terre.  A  year,  —  annee.  The  life,  — vie.  The  feast, — 
fete.  The  beauty,  —  heaute.  The  master-key,  —  passe-partout. 
The  spit,  —  tourne-hroche.     Christianity,  —  christianisme. 

in.  DOUBLE  GENDER  OF  SOME  NOUNS. 

1.   The  following  nouns  have  a  double  gender  : 
Vaidcy  m.  the  assistant.  Uaide,  f.  the  help,  support. 

Vo^kf  m.  the  eagle.  Vaigle^  f.  the  8tancUu:4' 


ON  THE  GENDER  OF  SUBSTANTIVES.       209 

I'aune,  m,  the  alder-tree.  Vaune,  f.  the  ell,  yard. 

un  couple,  a  cou])le,  husband  and  wife,     une  couple,  a  brace,  two  of  a  sort 

un  enscigne,  an  ensign.  une  enseigne,  a  sign. 

le  garde,  the  keeper.  la  garde,  the  guard,  watch. 

fc  guidt,  the  guide.  la  guide,  the  rein  in  driving* 

le  livre,  the  book.  la  livre,  the  pound. 

fe  manche,  the  handle.  la  manche,  the  sleeve. 

Ic  m^moire,  the  memorandum.  la  mtfmoire,  the  memory. 

le  mousse,  the  cabin-boy.  la  moicsse,  the  moss. 

Vorgue,  m.  sing,  the  organ.  les  orgues,  pi.  organ,  or  organs. 

fe  page,  the  page  (of  a  prince).  la  page,  the  page  (of  a  book). 

un  padlasse,  a  merry  andrew.  une  paillasse,  a  straw-bed. 

Pdques,  pi.  m.  Easter.  la  pdque,  the  Passover. 

/c  poSle,  the  stove.  /a  poc/e,  the  frying-pan. 

le  poste,  the  post,  military  post.  la  poste,  the  post-offce. 

un  somme,  a  nap,  slumf^er.  la  sornme,  the  sum. 

le  tour,  the  trick,  turn.  la  tour,  the  tower. 

le  trompette,  the  trumpeter.  /a  trompette,  the  trumpet. 

ttn  m/e,  a  veil.  une  voik,  a  sail. 

2.  There  are  in  French  some  nouns  which  have  no  paiiiculai 

form  for  the  feminine,  and  remain  always  masculine,  even  when 

applied  to  a  woman.     Such  are  : 

Un  auteur,      )  _  . 

■rr   ^    .     .      yrn.  and  f.  an  author,  a  writer. 

Un  ecrivam,  ) 

Un  orateur,  m.  and  f.  an  orator. 

Un  peiiitre,  m.  and  f.  a  painter. 

Un  sculpteur,  m.  and  f.  a  sculptor. 

Un  t€moin,  m.  and  f.  a  witness. 

Note.   Sometimes  the  word  fcrtime  may  precede,  as  :  Une  femrne  out  put, 

les  femmcs  pokes. 

3.  On  the  contrary,  there  are  a  few  feminine  nouns  which  ajiply 
also  to  male  individuals : 

La  caution,  the  bail.  la  basse,  the  base. 

la  pratique,  the  customer.  la  sentineUe,  the  sentry. 

IV.  FORMATION  OF  FEMININE  APPELLATIONS. 

1.  Male  appellations  which  are  originally  adjectives,  form  theii 
feminine  according  to  the  rules  on  the  adjectives  (see  Part  I.,  L 
XVIL),  as: 

14 


210  L      PEEMI^RE  LEgON. 

MASCULINE.  FEMININB. 

Li  Frangais,  the  Frenchman.  La  Frangaise,  the  Frenchwoman. 

un  Russe,  a  Russian.  une  Russe,  a  Russian  lady, 

tin  Juif,  a  Jew.  une  Juive,  a  Jewess. 

r^poux,  the  husband.  I'^pouse,  the  wife. 

fe  veuf,  the  widower.  la  veuve,  the  widow. 

2.  Those  ending  in  one  of  the  nasal  sounds  an,  on,  ten  (not  in) 
and  those  in  t  double  their  n  or  t  before  the  feminine  e,  as : 

Le  paysan,  the  peasant.  La  paysanne,  a  peasant  woman. 

le  lion,  \  ae  lion.  la  lionne,  the  lioness. 

le  chr^tien,  the  Christian.  /a  chr^tienne,  the  Christian  woman, 

fe  baron,  the  baron.  Za  baronne,  the  baroness. 

3.  Many  nouns  ending  in  e  mute  form  their  feminine  in  essCy  as 
Le  comte,  the  count.  Za  comtesse,  the  countess. 

ic  ne^rre,  the  negro.  la  n€gresse,  the  negress. 

le  maitre,  the  master.  •  la  mmtresse,ihe  mistress. 

le  prince,  the  prince.  la  princesse,  the  princess. 

4.  Those  in  -eur  change  this  termination  into  -euse  : 

Le  danseur,  the  dancer.  La  danseuse,  the  dancer,  y*. 

le  chasseur,  the  hunter.  la  cliasseuse,*  the  huntress.  "'^-'-. 

5.  Many  in  -teur  change  it  into  4nce,  as : 
L*acteur,  the  actor.  L'actrice,  the  actress. 

le  bienfaiteur,  the  benefactor.  la  bienfaitrice,  the  benefactress. 

le  tuteur,  the  guardian.  la  tutrice,  the  guardian,  /. 

6.  The  following  nouns  form  their  feminine  in  an  irregular  way : 

Le  dieii,  the  god.  La  d€esse,  the  goddess. 

le  due,  the  duke.  la  duckesse,  the  duchess. 

Vetnpereur,  the  emperor.  Vimp&atrice,  the  empress. 

le  roi,  the  king.  la  reine,  the  queen. 

/«  floras,  the  hero.  V heroine,  the  heroine. 

fe  gouvemeur,  the  tutor.  /a  gouvemante,  the  governess, 

/e  serviteur,  the  man-servant.  Za  servante,  the  maid-servant, 

fe  p^cheur,  the  sinner.  Za  p^cheresse,  the  sinner  ^. 

fc  cy.  'pagnon,  the  companion.  fo  compagne,  the  compamon  / 

Ze  fo?//),  the  hc-wolf.  Za  /ourv,  the  she-wolf. 

&  mulet,  the  mule.  /a  mw/e,  the  mule  /. 

l^  dindon,  the  turk^-cock.  la  dinde,  the  turkey-hwi. 
♦  Chasseresse  Is  a  poetical  form. 


ON  THE  GENDER  OP  SUBSTANTIVES.        211 
THEME  2. 

Form  and  "write  the  feminine  of  the  following  masculine  nouns, 
according  to  the  above  rules : 

The  neighbor,  le  voisin;  f.  — .  The  hunter,  le  chasseur;  f. 
— .  The  dwarf,  le  nain ;  f. — .  The  talker,  le  havard;  f. — . 
The  prisoner,  le  prisonnier ;  f.  — .  The  dumb  man,  le  muet ;  f. 
— .  The  teacher,  Vinstituteur ;  f.  — .  The  patient,  le  malade ; 
f.  — .  The  husband,  Vepottx ;  f.  — .  The  master,  le  maitre ;  f. 
— .  A  musician,  un  musicien;  f.  — .  The  founder,  le  fonda- 
teur ;  f.  — .  The  Englishman,  V Anglais  ;  f.  — .  The  German, 
VAUemand;  f.  — .  The  actor,  Vacteur;  f.  — -.  The  inventor, 
Vinventeur ;  f.  — .  The  liar,  le  menteu/r  (root  ment-,  termination 
-eur)  ;  f.  — .  The  traitor,  le  trattre  ;  f.  — .  The  singer,  le  chan- 
teur ;  f.  — .  The  idler,  h  paresseux  ;  f.  — .  The  lionj  le  lion ; 
f.  - — .     The  tiger,  le  tigre ;  f.  — . 

READING  LESSON. 

Un  honn^te  p^re  de  famille,  charg^^  de  biens  et  d'ann^es,  voulut 
r^glet  .d'avance^  sa  succession  entre  ses  trois  fils,  et  leur  partager 
ses  biens,  le  fruit  de  ses  travaux  et  de  son  industrie.  II  en  fit  trois 
portions  ^gales,  et  assigna  k  chacun  son  lot.  —  Puis  il  leur  dit :  *'  II 
me  reste  encore  un  diamant  de  grand  prix ;  jo  le  destine  k  celui  de 
vous  qui  saura  le  mieux  le  m^riter  par  quelque  action  noble  et  g6- 
n^reuse,  et  je  vous  donne  trois  mois  pour  vous  mettre  en  ^tat  de 
Vobtenir." 

Aussit6t  les  trois  fils  se  dispersent,  mais  lis  se  rassemblent  an 
temps  present.'  lis  se  pr^sentent  devant  leur  juge^  et  voici  ce  que 
raoonte  I'ain^* :  "  Mon  pere,  un  Stranger  s'est  trouv(5  dans  des  cir- 
Constances  qui  Font  oblige  de  me  confier'^  toute  sa  fortune :  il  n'avait 
de  moi  aucune  surety,  par  ^crit,*  et  n'aurait  pu  produire  centre  moi 
aucune  preuve  du  d^pot ;  mais  je  lui  ai  tout  remis  fidelement. 
Cette  fid^lit^  n'est^Ue  pas  quelque  chose  de  louable^?  "  **  Tu  as 
fiut,  mon  fils,"  lui  r^pondit  le  vieillard,"  ce  que  tu  devais  faire.  H 
Berait  honteux  d'en  agir  autrement,  car  la  probity  est  un  devoir.'* 

1.  Laden.     2.  Beforehand.     8.  Prescribed,  appointed.    4.  The  eldest.     6,  To 
6.  In  writing.    7.  Laudable. 


212 


1.     PitEMlfiRE  LEgON. 


CONVERSATION. 


Qui  voulut  r^gler  sa  succession  ? 
Que  fitril  k  cet  effet  (^for  this  pur- 
pose) ? 
Que  lui  restait-il? 
A  qui  le  destinart-il  ? 


Combien  de  temps  leur  donna-fc-D 

pour  cela  ? 
Que  firent  ensuite  les  fils  ? 


Quelle  av^t  ^t^  Taction  de  I'dn^  ? 


Que  Im  dit  le  vieillard  ? 


Un  honnete  perfe  de  famille. 
II  partagea  ses  biens  entre  ses 

trois  fils. 
Un  diamant  de  grand  prix. 
A  celui  d'entre  eux  qui  ferait 

une  action  noble    et    g^n^- 

reuse. 
H  leur  donna  trois  mois    pour 

obteiiir  ce  prix. 
Ds  se  disperserent,  mais  au  bout 

du  temps  present,  iis  revin- 

rent  k  la  maison. 
D  avait  remis  fidelement  k  un 

Stranger  la  fortune  que    ce- 

lui-ci  lui  avait  confiee  sans 

reQU  (receipt). 
Tu  n'as  fait,  mon  fils,  que  oe 

que  tu  devais  faire. 


VIN. 


Le  second  fils  plaida^  sa  cause  k  son  tour,  k  pen  pres  en  ces 
termes :  *'  Je  me  suis  trouv^,  pendant  mon  voyage,  sur  le  bord  d'un 
lac ;  un  enfant  venait^  imprudemment  de  s'y  kisser^  tomber ;  il  al- 
lait  se  noyer  f  je  Ten  ai  tir^,  et  je  lui  ai  sauv^  la  vie,  aux  yeux  des 
habitants  d'un  village  situ^  au  bord  de  ce  lac ;  ils  pourront  attester 
la  v^rit4  du  fait."* — "A  la  bonne  heure,"  interrompit'^  le  pere . 
"  mais  il  n'y  a  point  encore  de  noblesse  dans  cette  action ;  il  n'y  a 
que  de  rhumanit^.'* 

Enfin,  le  dernier  des  trois  freres  prit  la  parole.  '*  Mon  pere," 
dit-il,  **  j'ai  trouve  mon  ennemi  mortel,  qui,  s'^tant  4gar^.  la  nuit, 
s'^tait  endormi,  sans  le  savoir,  sur  le  penchant*  d'un  abime  f  le 
moindre  mouvement  qu'il  eut  fait,  aa  moment  de  son  r^veil,'  ne 


ON  THE  GENDER  OP  SUBSTANnVBS. 


213 


pouvait  manqner*  de  le  precipiter ;  sa  vie  ^tait  entre  mes  mains ; 
j'ai  pris  soin  de  reveiller^^  aveo  les  precautions  sonvenables,  et  Tai 
tire  de  cet  endroit^^  fatal." 

"  Ah !  mon  fils,"  s'ecria  le  bon  pere  aveo  transport,  et  en  Fem- 
brassant  tendrement,  "  e'est  a  toi,  sans  contredit,"  que  la  bague^ 
est  dae." 

1.  To  plead.  2.  Had  Just  fallen.  3.  To  be  drowned.  4.  The  fact.  6.  To  Inter 
rupt.  6.  The  slope.  7.  Abyss.  8.  Of  his  awakening.  9.  Fail.  10.  To  wake 
11.  Place,  ipot.    12.  Without  doubt.    13.  The  ring. 


CONVEBSATION. 


Qu'avait  fait  le  second  fils  ? 

Qui  avfdt  vu  cela  ? 

Enfin,  quelle  avait  ^t^  Taction 
du  dernier  des  trois  fr^res  ? 


Laquelle  de  ces  trois  actions 

^tait  la  plus  noble  ? 
Les    actions  des    deux   autres 

n'^taient-elles  pas  nobles  et 

g^n^reuses  ? 
Kt  qn'estrc©  que  lui  dit  le  p6re  ? 


II  avait  sauve  un  enfant  qui  allait 

se  noyer. 
Les  habitants  d'un  village  situ^  an 

bord  du  lao. 
D  avait  retir^  son  ennemi  endormi 

au    botd    d'un    abime,  oti  le 

moindro  mouvement  Teut  pr^- 

cipito. 
Celle  du  plus  jeune  fils. 

Non,  la  premiere  ^tait  une  actioD 

de  justice,  la  secondo  une  action 

d'humanite. 
n  s'^cria  avec  transport :  *'  Mod 

fils,  c'est  k  toi,  sans  contredit, 

que  la  bague  est  due," 


214  n.      DEUXifiME   LEgOK. 


II.    DEUXIEME    LE9ON 


PLURAL    OF    NOUNS. 

(See  Part  I.  Lesson  2,  p.  30.) 

The  general  rules'on  this  subject  have  already  been  given  in  the  second 
lesson  of  Part  I.     We  have  to  add  here  the  following  particularg. 

1.  Nouns  of  two  and  more  syllables,  ending  in  -ant  and  -ent,  are 
spelled  by  some  French  writers  in  the  plural  -ens  and  -ans,  instead 
of  -ents  and  -ants,  as  :  momens  for  moments,  enfans  for  enfanis. 
This  orthography,  however,  is  not  to  be  recommended. 

2.  The  following  nouns  in  al  and  ail  do  not  form  their  plural  in 
%vXy  but  take  an  s. 

Le  bed,  the  ball.  V ^entail,  m.  the  fan. 

le  cal,  callus.  I'^pouvantail,  m.  the  scarecrow. 

le  Tiarval,  the  narwhal.  un  portail,  a  portal,  front  gate. 

le  camaval,  the  carnival.  le  poitrail,  the  poitrel. 

le  r€galy  the  regale,  treat.  le  serail,  the  seraglio. 

U  ddlail,  the  particulars.  I'ail,  garlic  (has  in  Plur.  both  lei 

le  gouvemail,  the  helm,  rudder.  ails  and  les  aidx). 

Plural :  Les  bals,  les  cals,  les  d&.ails,  les  ^ventaih,  etc. 

Note.   JLe  Mail,  cattle,  makes  in  the  plural  les  bestiaux. 

3.  The  usual  plural  of  ciel  is  cieuXy  the  heavens ;  there  is,  how- 
ever, a  regular  plural,  les  dels,  meaning:  1,  the  testers;  2,  the  cli- 

mats ;  3,  the  skies  of  pictures. 

4.  L^ml,  the  eye,  has  in  the  plural  les  yetix.  Des  mis  de  hceuf 
are  oval  or  round  windows.  Aieul,  has  aieuls  when  it  means  grand- 
&tbers,  andai'eiw;  in  the  sense  of  ancestors. 

5.  How  compound  words' form  their  plural :  — 

1.  When  a  word  is  composed  of  a  substantive  and  an  adjective,  or  of  two 
robstantives,  both  take  the  mark  of  the  plural     Ex.: — 


FLTJRAI,  OF  Noima.  215 

LeA  htavcx-frlrts,  the  brothers-in-law. 

Jjes  belles-sceurs,  the  sisters-in-law. 

Les  choux-Jleurs,  the  cauliflowers. 

Les  chefs-lieux,  the  chief-towns  (of  counties). 

2.  But  when  a  word  is  composed  of  two  substantives  separated  by  a  pre- 
position, the  first  alone  takes  the  plural  termination.    Ex.:  — 

L^s  chefs-d'oeuvre,  the  masterpieces. 
Ij€s  arc3-en-ciel,  the  rainbows. 

3.  When  a  word  consists  of  a  substantive  and  a  verb  or  preposition,  the 
substantive  alone  can  take  the  sign  of  the  plural,  if  required  bj  the  seme. 

Ex.:  — 

Les  tire-bottes,  the  boot-jacks. 

Les  essuie-mains,  the  towels. 
Les  garde-fous,  the  balusters. 

4.  When  there  is  no  substantive  in  the  compound  word,  none  of  the 
components  can  take  the  mark  of  the  plural.     Ex.:  — 

Les  passe-partout  {not  jxisse-partouts) ,  the  master-keys. 
L>es  forte-piano,  the  pianos. 

5.  The  words :  la  grand'mere,  the  grandmother ;  la  grand'tante^  grand- 
aunt;  la  grand'rue,  the  main  street ;  la  grand'route,  the  highway, —  hare,  in 
the  plural,  les  grand' meres,  les  grand'tantes,  etc. 

6.  The  following  nouns  take  in  tho  plural  another  meaning  than 
in  the  singular : — 

SINOULAB.  PLTjnAI,. 

Le  ciseau,  the  chisel.  les  ciseaux,  the  scissors. 

la  lunette,  the  telescope.  les  lunettes,  the  spectacles. 

le  fer,  iron.  les  fers,  the  fetters,  chains. 

la  grace,  grace,  pardon.  les  graces,  grace,  charms. 

U  gage,  the  pawn,  pledge.  •  les  gages,  the  wages. 

la  mesure,  the  measure.  les  mesures,  the  measures. 

la  viande,  meat.  les  viandes,  food. 

la  troupe,  the  troop.  les  troupes,  the  troops. 

la  luiniere,  the  light.  les  lutnieres,  knowledge. 

Vaboi,  the  barking.  les  abois,  agony* 

la  defense,  the  defence.  les  defenses,  the  tusks,  fangfS 

7.  Substantives  which  have  no  singular  in  French  t  — 
Les  annaJcs,  f.  annals.  ^5  gens,  m.  people 

2a6  aticetres,  m.  ancestors.  k»  hardeSf  f«  cloUieA. 


^16  n.      DEUXIEME  LE9OS. 

le$  alentovn,  m.  )  .  lee  gens,  m.  people. 

Us  environs,  m.  >  *^®  environs.  ^  math^matigues,  f.  matheroaticft 

les  broussaiUes,  f.  brashwood.  les  mat€riaux,  niaterials. 

les  d^combres,  m.  rubbish.  les  moeurs,  f.  the  manners. 

les  d^ris,  m.  the  remains  les  mouchettes,  f.  the  snuffers. 

les  d(fpens,  m.  cost.  des  mouchettes,  a  pair  oi  snoffers. 

lea  entrailles,  f.  the  entrails  les  pleurs,  f.  the  tears. 

leM  Jrais,  m.  expenses.  les  Unhbres,  f.  darkness. 

lea  fun€raUles,  f.  funeral  rites.  les  vivres,  m.  Tictuals. 

THEME  8. 

1.  We  had  many  balls  last  winter.^  2.  Are  these  fans  dear! 
3.  No,  they  are  not  dear.  4.  The  heavens  declare'  the  gbry  of 
Gk>d.  5.  The  great  portals  of  those  churches  are  beautiful.  ^.  Wo 
honor'  the  virtues  of  our  ancesters.  7.  The  eyes  of  {de  T)  man 
are  the  mirror*  of  his  soul.  8.  The  eyes  of  a  mother  watch"  over 
her  child's  life.  9.  I  have  two  brothers-in-law  and  three  sistei-s-in- 
law.  10.  Those  pictures  are  masterpieces.  11.  I  want®  two  or 
three  towels.  12.  These  master-keys  must  be  very  old.  13.  Both 
my  (mes  detix)  grandaunts  are  dead ;  but  my  grandmothers  are 
stiU  alive  (en  vie).  14.  Lend  me  your  scissors,  if  you  please. 
15.  The  fetters  are  made  of  iron.  16.  Do  you  know  the  environ^ 
of  London?  17.  Yes,  I  know  them.  18.  Bring  me  a  pair  of 
snuffers.  19.  Do  you  like  vegetables  ?  20.  I  hke  them,  when  they 
afe  dry.  21.  I  found  this  ring'  under  the  rubbish  in  my  garden. 
22.  The  Httle  hummmg-birds  {oiseatix-mouches)  are  the  jewels'  of 
nature*  (Def.  art).     23.  I  study^  mathematics. 

1.  Use  the  article,  see  Lesson  3.  2.  To  declare  — Annoncer.  3.  ffonoror.  4.  Mi- 
rdr,  m.  5.  VeUler.  6.  II  me  faut  (see  Part  1.  p.  148, 3).  7.  Baguey  f.  8.  Bioou,  m. 
9.  t:tudier. 


READING  LESSON. 

LB  CASTOR.      The  Beaver. 

Dans  le  nord  de  TAm^rique,  sur  les  bords  des  €6111^8  et  des 
grands  lacs  du  Canada,  loin  des  grand'routes,  habite  le  castor.     Lb 

*  In  these  Tbomes,  words,  the  last  letter  of  which  ia  printed  In  itaUoa,  tare  tbz 
same  in  Frenoh  and  English 


PLtJBAL  Of  Kotms.  217 

partie  la  pliw  singuliere  de  son  corps  est  sa  qnette.*  Ses  pattcs  de 
devant  {fore-feef)  sont  des  especes  de  mains,  dont  il  se  sort  fort 
adroitement^.  Les  castors  entreprennent  des  travaux  tres-consid»- 
rablcs  pour  se  construire  des  habitations  solides  et  commodes.  Ce 
sont  des  cabanes  (huts)  ou  plutot  des  especes  de  maisonnettes  b&- 
fcies  dans  I'eau,  avec  deux  issues,  Tune  pour  aller  k  terre,  I'autre 
jour  se  Jeter  k  I'eau.  La  forme  de  cet  Edifice'  est  presque  toujours 
ovale  ou  ronde ;  il  y  en  a  depuis  quatre  ou  cinq  pieds  jusqu'k  huit 
ou  dix  de  diametre  et  de  deux  ou  trois  (Stages.*  Les  murailles*  onfc 
jusqu'k  deux  pieds  d'^paisseur;*  elles  sont  elevdes  k  plorab'  sur  un 
pilotis,*  qui  sert  en  meme  temps  de  fondement  et  de  plancher  k  la 
maison. 

Les  castors  aiment  k  ronger*  continuellement  de  I'^corce  {harTc)^ 
et  lis  en  font  ample  provision  pour  se  nounir  pendant  I'hiver. 
Chaque  cabana  a  son  magasin,  et  ils  ne  vont  jamais  piller^**  leurs 
voisins  Ces  cabanes  contiennent  quelquefois  jusqu'k  trente  castors, 
qui  vivent  toujours  en  paix  ensemble.  Si  quelque  castor  apcr9oit 
UD  ennemi,  il  donne  un  grand  coup,  de  sa  queue,  sur  I'eau.  A  ce 
signal,  tons  les  autres  plongent  dans  I'eau,  ou  se  r^fugient  dans  les 
cabanes. 

1.  Tall.    2.  Sldlftilly.    3.  Building.     4.  Floor,  story.    6.  The  waUs.    6.  Thiofc 
ness.    7.  Perpendicularly.    8.  Tale,  post.    9.  To  gpiaw.    10.  To  plunder. 


CX)NVERSATION. 

Ob  habite  le  castor  11  habito  dans  le  nord  de  I'Am^ 

rique,  sur  les  bords  des  fleuvei 
et  des  lacs. 
Quelle  est  la  partie  la  plus  re-     C'est  sa  queue. 

marquable  de  son  corps  ? 
Comment  sont  ses  pattes  de  de-     Ce  sont  des  especes  de  mains  dont 

vant?  il  se  sert  fort  adroitemcnt. 

LcB  castors  que   fontrils  de  cu-    Ds  batissent    des   cabanes   dans 
rioux  ?  Teau. 


218 


in.      TBOISIEME  LEgON. 


De  quelle  niani^re  les  batissent- 

as? 

Quelle  est  la  forme  de  ces  mai- 
sonnettes ? 

Y  a-fc-il  plusieurs  Stages  ? 

Les  murailles  sont-elles  solides  ? 

Y  a-t-il  plusieurs  castors  dans 
nn  tel  Edifice  ? 

Que  fontrils  quand  on  ennemi 
apprpche  ? 


Us  font  deux  issues,  Tune  pour 
aller  h  terre,  I'autre  pour  se  Je- 
ter a  I'eau. 

La  forme  en  est  ordinairemen\ 
ronde  ou  ovale. 

Oui,  les  cabanes  sont  de  deux  ou 
trois  Stages. 

Tres-solides ;  elles  ont  jusqu'k 
deux  pieds  d'epaisseur. 

Ces  cabanes  contiennent  quelque- 
fois  jusqu'k  trente  castors  qui 
vivent  ensemble  en  paix. 

lis  se  jettent  tons  dans  I'eau,  ou 
se  refugient  dans  les  cabanes. 


Ill,    TROISIEME    LE9ON 


USB  OP  THE  ARTICLE. 


I.    THE   DEFINITE   ARTICLE   IS    USED   IN   FRENCH   AND    NOT   IN 

ENGLISH  : 

1.    Before  abstract  nouns,  when  taken  in  their  whole  extent,  as 


L'amiti€,  f.  friendship. 
la  paresse,  idleness. 
I'amour,  m.  love. 
la  vieUlesse,  old  age. 


la  hont€,  goodness. 

V occupation,  f.  employment. 

la  patience,  patience. 

la  jeunesse,  joath. 
Examples:  — 
Le  tanps  est  pr^cieux,  time  is  precious. 
Le  vice  est  odieux,  vice  is  odious. 
La  modestie  est  une  belle  vertu,  modesty  is  a  fine  virtae. 
Jj  occupation  est  le  meiUeur  remede  centre  Vennui. 
Occupfttion  is  the  best  remedy  against  wearisomen«ii« 


USE  OP  THE  ABTICLE.  219 

2.  Before  collective  names  of  corporations,  bodies,  govemmentB, 
sciences,  religious  creeds,  seasons,  metals,  etc.,  as: 

La  noblesse,  nobility.  le  chrisiianisme,  Christiamty. 

le  gouvemement,  (government.  le  judaisme,  Judaism. 

la  monarchie,  monarchy,  Vhiver,  m.  winter. 

I'histoire,  f.  history.  Vor,  m.  gold. 

la  gfygraphie,  geography.  le  fer,  iron. 

3.  Before  words  which  represent  a  whole  genus  or  speoifis,  ms  t 

L'homme  est  mortel,  man  is  mortal. 

Les  voix  des  animaux  sont  tres-diff€rentes. 

The  voices  of  animals  are  very  different. 

4.  Before  the  following  and  other  nouns  taken  in  a  general  sense : 
L'homme,  man.  la  hi,  la\r. 

les  hommes,  men.  le  son,  fate. 

le  del,  heaven.  Vusage,  la  coutume,  custom. 

la  terre,  earth.  les  mceurs,  manners. 

la  vie,  life.  la  /aim,  hunger. 

la  mort,  dcttth.  la  soif,  tliirst. 

le  temps,  time.  le  diner,  dinner. 

le  malheur,  misfortune.  le  dejeuner,  breakfast. 

5.  When  particular  parts  or  qualities  of  an  organic  body  are 
mentioned,  as : 

Ce  gar<^on  a  la  tete  trh-petite. 

This  boy  has  a  very  little  head. 

Cette  femme  a  la  bouche  petite  et  les  yeux  bleu$. 

This  woman  has  a  little  mouth  and  blue  eyes. 

Le  loup  a  la  tete  longue,  le  nez  effi.l€  et  les  oreilles  Uroitet. 

The  wolf  has  a  long  head,  a  thin  nose,  and  small  care. 

La  Jille  aux  yeux  Ueus,  the  blue-eyed  girl. 

6.  When  in  English  the  possessive  case  is  used,  as: 
My  father's  house,  la  maison  de  mon  pert. 

The  king's  palace,  le  palais  du  roi. 

7.  Before  adjectives  used  substantively*  as : 
J*aime  le  vert,  I  am  fond  of  green. 

L^es  riches  nn  donnent  pas  toujours. 
Rich  men  do  not  always  givA. 


220  m.      TROISIEME  LEgON. 

8.  Before  proper  names  of   countries,  provinces,  rivers,  monn 
tains,  and  winds,  as :      • 

L' Angleterre  est  riche,  England  is  ricli. 
Le  mont  V€suve,  Mount  Vesuvius. 
La  France  est  plus  grande  que  Vltalie. 
France  is  larger  than  Italy. 

Note.  Further  particulars  on  proper  names  will  be  found  in  the  sixth 
Lesson. 

9.  Before  nouns  of  dignity,  and  titles,  followed  by  proper  names, 


Admiral  Nelson,  Vamiral  Nelson. 
Professor  A.,  le  pro/esseur  A. 

10.  The  definite  aiticle  replaces  the  English  indefinite  artiol©? 
when  the  price  of  things  is  indicated,  as  : 

Three  francs  a  pound,  trois  francs  la  livre. 
Five  francs  a  yard,  cinq  francs  le  metre. 

11.  In  the  following  phrases  the  definite  article  is  used  : 
A  l'€cole  —  a  l*€glise,  at  or  to  school ;  at  or  to  chorch. 

It  s'est  cuss€  la  jambe,  he  has  broken  his  leg. 

L'^p€e  a  la  main,  a  sword  in  his  hand. 

Je  vous  souhaite  le  ban  jour,  I  wish  you  good  morning 

Jt  n'ai  pas  le  temps,  I  have  not  time. 

H  n'a  pas  le  sou,  he  has  not  a  farthing. 

J^ai  mal  a  la  tele,  I  have  a  headache. 

%Pai  mal  aux  dents,  I  have  a  toothache. 

Soyez  le  bienvenu,  — la  bienvenue,  etc.,  be  welcome. 

La  semaine  pass^e  (derniere),  last  week. 

12.  After  dont  between  nouns,  as : 

Un  homme  dont  la  reputation  est  perdue,  est  malkeureuxt 
A  man  whose  good  reputation  is  lost  is  unhappy. 

n.       REPETITION    OF   THE   ARTICLE. 

The  article  must  be  repeated  in  French  before  every  substantive. 
Examples  : 

The  mind  and  heart,  l*espnt  et  le  cceur* 

The  shoemaker,  hatter,  and  tailor. 

Lie  bottier,  le  chapelier,  et  le  tailleur, 

I  have  bought  meat,  cheese,  and  fruits. 

J'oi  achei^  de  la  tnomie,  du  froma^  et  dea  Jrui^ 


USB  OP  THE   ARTICLE.  221 

1.  "Vlrtne  is  tbc  highest^  good  (Men,  m.).  2.  Men  are  mortaL 
3.  Modesty  adorns''  youth.  4.  Human  life  is  short.  5.  Man  is 
liable^  to  a  variety  of  (a  bien  des)  changes.*  6.  Gold  and  silver 
cannot  render*  man  happy.  7.  Men  of  (d\in)  real  genius®  are 
scarce.  8.  Black  and  white  are  two  opposite^  colors.  9.  Beauty 
and  wit®  are  valuable®  endowments  {avaiitages),  when  heightened 
sTeleves)  by  modesty.  10.  Iron  and  steel  are  more  useful  than 
gold  and  silver.  11.  How  much  a  pound  ?  12.  The  love  of  glory 
{Def.  art\),  the  fear  of  shame,^**  are  often  the  cause  of  great  deeds. ^" 
13.  Summer  is  warm,  but  winter  is  cold.  14.  The  instruction*  of 
adversity  are  wholesome  (salutaires) ,  though  unpleasing;"  the  lea- 
eons  of  prosperity  are  pleasing,  but  often  pernicious.  15.  Geogra" 
phy  is  a  very  useful  science.  16.  Painting,^  sculpture,  and  poe- 
try^^  belong  to  the  imagination.  17.  Good  and  bad  seem  to  bo 
blended  (meles)  together  through  all  nature.  18.  Hypocrisy  is  an 
homage  which  vice  pays  {rend)  to  virtue.  19.  Do  you  know  Gen- 
eral Knox?  20.  Yes,  I  know  him.  21.  White  garments"  are 
the  symbol  of  innocence.  22.  The  knife  and  fork  are  broken.  23. 
Let  us  go  to  church.  24.  The  boys  were  at  school  this  morning. 
25.  Fear^*  and  ignorance  are  the  sources  of  superstition.  2G  Good 
wine  is  sold  (jse  vend)  [for]  four  shillings  a  bottle. 

1.  Grand.  2.  Omer.  3.  Si{jet.  4.  Changement,  m.  6.  Ecndre.  6.  Vrai  g^nte. 
7.  Oppos6,  8.  Esprit.  9.  Pr6cieux.  10.  La  honte.  11.  Desagriable.  12.  La 
peinture.    13.  La  poisie.    14.   Fttements.    16.  Feur,  f.    16.  Action^  f. 

m.       THE  DEFINITE   ARTICLE   13    OMITTED  I 

1 .  Before  the  cardinal  numbers  which  come  after  the  names  of 
sovereigns,  as; 

Henry  the  Fourth,  Henri  quatre. 

Louis  the  Eighteenth,  Low's  XVJII  {dix^huit). 

Greorge  the  Third,  Georcje  trois. 

2.  Before  the  cardinal  numbers  used  in  quotations,  as: 
Book  the  first,  chapter  the  fifth 

t4vre  premier f  chapiire  cii^. 


222  in.      TROISdlME  LEgON. 

3.   Before  plm,  used  in  the  sense  of  the  more.     Ex. : 
Plus  je  la  vois,  plus  je  I'aime,  the  more  I  see  her,  the  more  I  love  her. 
IV.       TUB   INDEFINITE   ARTICLE   IS    OMITTED   IN    FRENCH  I 

1.  Before  national  and  professional  names,  when  the  subjeci  ia  i 
noun  or  personal  pronoun,  as : 

Je  8uis  Anglais,  I  am  an  Englishman. 

^f(m  pere  €tait  m€decin,  my  father  was  a  physician. 

Note.  But  it  is  expressed  after  c'est  and  void  or  voUa,  and  also  when  the 
noun  is  qualified. 

C'est  un  Amjlais,  he  is  an  Englishman. 

Void  un  offider,  here  is  an  officer. 

M.  Dubois  €tait  un  m€dedn  distingu€,  Mr.  Dubois  was  a  distinguished  phy 
sician. 

2.  It  is  also  omitted  in  appositioas,  that  is,  when  a  substantive 
is  used  to  qualify  another,  as : 

L'avare,  comidie  par  AfoUere,  the  Miser,  a  comedy  by  Moli^re. 
Auguste,  Jils  dt  M.  S.,  Augustus,  a  son  of  Mr.  S. 
Munich,  ville  d' Allemagne,  Munich,  a  city  of  Germany. 

3.  In  the  title  of  a  book  : 

A  French  grammar,  Grammaire  fran^aise. 
A  history  of  England,  Uistoire  d' Angleterre. 

4.  After  the  word  quel,  used  to  express  surprise  : 
What  a  noise  you  make  !  quel  bmit  vous  faites  ! 

5.  Before  the  words,  quantite,  a  quantity;  nomhre^  a  number; 
force,  a  great  number,  when  they  are  used  adverbially.     Ex. : 

Je  I'ai  vu  nombre  de  fois,  I  have  seen  him  many  tmies. 
n  m'a  donn€  quantity  de  jolies  chases. 
He  gave  me  a  great  many  pretty  things. 

6.  The  indefinite  article  is  left  out  in  French  and  supplied  by 
par,  before  substantives  that  denote  time,  or  in  mentioning  what  if 
paid  for  salary,  wages,  etc. : 

Five  guineas  a  month,  cinq  guin€espar  moU, 
So  much  a  lesson,  tant  par  legon. 

7.  Sometimes  after  jamais,  never,  as : 
Jamais  g^n^ral  ne  s'est  plus  distingu^. 

JBifaver  has  a  general  distinguished  himself  mort. 


USB  OP  THE  ABTICLIL  223 

8.  In  the  following  and  other  expressions,  in  which  the  noun  and 
verb  are  inseparably  connnected  : 

Trouver  moyen,  to  find  (a)  means. 
Faire  signe,  to  make  a  sign. 
Faire  present,  to  make  a  present. 
Mettre  Jin,  to  put  an  end  or  stop. 
Litter  bataille,  to  fight  a  battle. 
Prendre  exemple,  to  take  an  example. 
Rendre  service,  to  render  a  service. 
Ne  dire  mot,  to  sslj  not  a  word. 

THEM9  "^ 

1.  Book  the  tenth,  chapter  the  third.  2.  Charle*  the  Second. 
king  of  (rf')  Spain,  son  of  Philip  the  Fourth,  left  his  kingdom  (roy- 
aume)  to  Philip  the  Fifth  3.  William  the  Third,  king  of  Eng- 
land, married  (epousa)  the  princess  Mary,  daughter  of  James 
(^Jacques)  the  Second.  4.  Apelle*  was  a  painter.^  5.  Socrates' 
was  a  philosopher,  Cicero'  an  orator  (^teur).  6.  Is  your  father  a 
physician?  7.  No,  sir;  he  is  a  lawyer  (avocat).  8.  Henry's 
uncle  is  a  skilful^  physician.  9.  Who  is  that  gentleman  ?'  10.  He 
is  {cest^  an  oflBcer.  11.  How  much  do  you  charge  {demandez- 
voiis)  for  your  lessons?  12.  I  charge  ten  franc*  a  lesson.  13.  A 
German  Grammar.  14.  A  Roman  history,  from  the  foundation*  of 
Rom«  to  (Jusqu'ci)  the  destruction  of  the  Roman  empire.  16. 
What  an  unhappy  situation  !  16.  How  much  does  the  bookseller' 
pay  you  for  your  novels?'  17.  He  pays  me  five  crowns  (ecus)  a 
sheet.*  18.  We  went  to  Caen,  a  large  town  of  Normandy.^®  19. 
The  Duke  of  York,  a  prince  of  the  blood  royal.  20.  I  am  read- 
ing the  '*  Misanthrope,"  a  comedy  by  Moliere.  21.  I  shall  find  a 
means  to  satisfy"  him.  22.  He  said  not  a  word.  23.  Our  neigh- 
bor made  us  a  sign  to  leave"  the  room. 

1.  Peintrt.    2.  Socrate.     3.  Ciciron.    4.  Habile.    6.  Montieur,    fl.  Fondation^ 
7.  Libraire.    8.  Moman,  m.    9.  Feuille.    10.  De  Normandie.    11.  Satitfak-e,    12. 


22^  *  in.     TEOISIEMB  LEgON. 

V.      THE  ARTICLE  IS   OMITTED   IN   BOTH  .  LANQUAajaS  :  — 

1.  In  many  proverbs,  as : 

Contentement  passe  richesse,  content  surpasses  wealth. 
Pauvret€  n'est  pas  vice,  poverty  is  no  disgrace. 
Mauvaise  herbe  croit  toujours. 

2.  In  enumerating  several  substantives  in  the  partitive  sense, 
when  summed  up  by  tons  or  rien,  as : 

Hommes,  femmes,  enfants,  tons  voulaieni  le  voir. 
Men,  women,  children,  all  wished  to  see  him. 

3.  After  ni — «i,  €-?■-:  —  :vti,  when  the  nouns  are  taken  in  the 
partitive  sense,  as : 

Ni  or  ni  argent,  neither  gold  nor  silver. 
Ni  pr teres,  ni  menaces  ne  pouvaient  ['engager  a,  etc. 
Neither  prayers  nor  threats  could  induce  him  to,  etc. 
Soil  crainte,  soil  ignorance,  it  ne  voulait  rien  dire. 
Be  it  fear  or  ignorance,  he  would  say  nothing. 

4.  The  partitive  article  is  further  omitted  after  prepositions  wheo 
the  noun  following  forms  with  them  an  adverbial  phrase,  as  : 

Avec  plaisir,  with  pleasure.  par  jour,  daily,  a  day. 

avec  patience,  with  patience.  par  an,  yearly,  a  year. 

avec  soin,  with  care.  par  mois,  monthly,  a  month. 

avec  €leqance,  elegantly.  sur  mer,  )  , 

",      .  .  yhj  water,  by  sea. 

sans  argent,  without  money.  par  mer,  )    •'  "' 

sans  facons,  without  ceremonies.  sur  terre,  >  ,     ,      , 

...  , ,  ?■  by  land. 

sans  peine,  without  trouble.  par  terre,  ) 

sans  peril,  without  danger.  sous  peine  de  mort,  on  pain  of  death 

6.    No  article  is  used  before  a  substantive  which  is  repeated  with 
a  preposition,  as : 

Promesses  sur  promesses,  promises  upon  promises. 
De  temps  en  temps,  from  time  to  time. 
De  siecle  en  siecle,  from  age  to  age. 

6.    In  the  following  expressions,  where  the  noun  forms  but  one 
idea  with  the  verb  antecedent,  as : 

Avoir  /aim,  to  be  hungry.  prendre  patience,  to  have  patience 

avoir  totf,  to  be  thirs^.  prendre  soin,  to  take  can. 


USB  OP  7flE   ARTICLE.                               225 

axyyir  soin,  to  take  care.  /aire  grace,  to  grant  pardon. 

amir  peur,  to  be  afraid.  /aire  attention,  to  pay  attention. 

avoir  bonne  mine,  to  look  "well.  Jaire  grand  cos,  to  value. 

avoir  piti€,  to  have  pity.  fj-ire  peur,  to  frighten. 

avoir  honte,  to  be  ashamed.  faire  mention,  to  mention. 

avoir  raison,  to  be  right.  faire  fortune,  to  make  one's  fortune. 

avoir  tor*,  to  be  wrong.  rendre  compte, 

^  "~  account  for. 


avoir  sujet,  to  have  occasion  for.  rendre  raison, 

avoir  den'iein,  to  intend.  rendre  visite,  to  visit. 

avoir  envie,  to  have  a  desire,  a  mind.       porter  envie,  to  envy. 

avoir  besoin,  to  want.  courir  risque,  to  run  risk. 

avoir  coutume,  to  be  in  the  habit,  to    demander  pardon,  to  beg  one's  par* 

use.  don. 

prendre  part,  to  jom.  demander  grace,  to  beg  for  grace. 

prendre  garde,  to  take  care.  ajouier  foi,  to  give  credit. 
prendre  cong€,  to  take  leave. 

7.    Further,  after  many  verbs  which  are  followed  by  cfo,  a,  or  m. 
asi  — 

Combler  de  bienfaitH,  to  load  with  benefits. 
Vivre  de  pain,  to  live  upon  bread. 
Monter  a  nheval,  to  mount  (get)  on  horseback. 
Monter  en  voiture,  to  enter  a  carriage. 
Tomber  de  chevul,  to  fall  from  horseback. 
Descendre  de  cheval,  to  alight. 
Se  mfftre  a  table,  to  go  to  dinner. 
Se  lever  de  tul>le,  to  rise  from  dinner. 
Perdre  de  vue,  to  lose  sight  of. 
Mount  de  faim,  to  die  of  hunger. 
Monrir  de  froid,  to  die  of  cold,  to  freeze. 
Trembler  de  peur,  to  tremble  with  fear. 
Etre  maladt  de  chagrin,  to  be  ill  with  grief. 


THEME  6. 

1,  Charity*  begins  at  home  ( par  soi^meme).  2.  Necessity  baa 
no  law  (loi)  3.  Games,^  conversation,  tbecitre,  nothing  diverts 
(distrait)  him.  4.  Nobody  was  satisfied ;  father,  uncles,  aunts  and 
brothers,  all  thought  themselves  {se  crurent)  neglected.'  5.  This 
man  has  neither  vice«  nor  vutues  ;  neither  talents  nor  defects.^     6. 


226  m.     THOISIEME  LEgON. 

We  expected  our  friend  from  day  to  day.  7.  It  does  not  suffice  to 
heap  (d'entasser')  facts*  upon  facts, to  load® your  memory;  you  must 
exercise'  also  your  judgment.®  8.  I  shall  do  it  with  pleasure.  9. 
One  florin  a  day.  10.  Ten  pounds  a  year,  11.  The  poor  woman 
was  starving  with  hunger  and  (with)  cold.  12.  You  are  always 
right  J  I  have  been  wrong.  13.  Have  pity  on  (de)  my  wealiness.' 
14.  The  least  noise^**  frightens  me.  15.  Those  who  speak  without 
reflection,  are  exposed  to  many  («  hien  des)  errors.  16.  I  mupt 
take  leave  of  you.  17.  Many  poor  people  live  on  {de)  bread  and 
potatoes  only. 

1.  Chariti.    2.  Jifu,  m.    3.  N'dgligis.    4.  I)<?faut^    6.  Lt  feat.    «.  CTiarf^.    7. 
Sxtreer.    8.  Jugement.    9.  Faiblesse.    10.  Bruit,  m. 


READING  LESSON. 
D:fiMOSTIll:NB. 


D^mosthene,  jeune  homme  d'Athcnes,  avait  grande  envie  de  de- 
venir  orateur  habile ;  mais  la  nature  semblait  lui  en  avoir  refiis4  tous 
les  moycns. 

D'abord  il  begayait^  k  I'exc^s ;  puis  il  ne  pouvait  prononcer  la 
lettro  R.  ;  ensuitc  il  avait  une  voix  desagreable  et  glapissante,'  et  de 
faiblcs  poumons.'  D'autres  ajoutent  qu'il  avait  encore  la  mauvaise 
habitude  de  lever  I'^paule*,  quand  il  avait  prononc^  trois  ou  quatre 
mots.  Aussi,  la  premiere  fois  qu'il  harangua  le  peuple,  il  s'en  tira 
si  mal,  qu'il  fut  siffle*. 

Tout  autre  que  lui  aurait  h  jamais  perdu  courage.  Mais  Demosj- 
thene  prit  patience  et  resolut,  en  depit*  de  la  nature,  de  devenir  bon 
orateur,  et  il  le  dcvint.     Ecoutez  comment  il  s'y  prit.' 

Quclquefois  il  allait  au  bord  de  la  mer,  dans  I'cndroit  ou  lee 
vagucs"  vcnaient  se  briser  (break)  avcc  fracas.*  Lk,  il  debitait'^nn 
discours  c^  haute  voix,  pour  s'accoutumer  h.  dominer  le  tumultc  d'une 
assemblee  populaire. 

D'autres  fois,  il  mcttait  dans  sa  bouche  de  pctits  cailloux  (peb- 
bles) }  p'lis  11  courait  en  gravissant^  une  moutagao  et  en  d^clamant. 


USB   OP  THE  ARTICLE.  227 

afin  de  se  contndndre"  k  prononcer  clairement  jusqn'k  la  moinore 
syllabo. 

Ed  fin,  on  dit  qu'il  s'exergait  k  parler  dans  tine  chambre  souter* 
raine,''  et  que  pour  se  mettre  dans  la  n^cossit^  de  rester  longtonaps 
enferm^,  il  s'^tait  fait  raser^*  la  moitie  de  la  tete. 

II  se  plagait  des  heures  entiercs  devant  un  mirou",  pour  se  donner 
une  bonne  contenance  et  des  gestes  convenables.  On  dit  qu'il  se 
mettait  aussi  I'epaule  nue  iram^diatement  sous  la  pointe  d'nne 
6p^e,"  afin  qu'elle  le  piquat,''  toutes  les  fois  que,  d'apres  sa  mau- 
vaise  habitude,  il  fcrait  son  mouveraent  d'epaule. 

O'&ft  par  aod  fcxercices  soutenus^'  de  ce  genre,  joints  h  une  ^tude 
profonde  des  sciences,  qu'il  se  rcndit  enfin  le  plus  grand  orateur  qui 
ait  exists ;  et  aujourd'hui  encore,  apres  tant  de  sieclcs,^^  ses  ha- 
rangues sont  admirees  corame  des  chcfs-d'ccuvre  d'eloquence. 

1.  To  8tf>mmer.  2.  Shrill.  S.  Lungs.  4.  Shoulder.  5.  To  hi8s.  6.  In  spite  of. 
7.  To  manage.  8.  The  waves.  9.  Noise.  10.  To  deliver.  11.  To  climb.  12.  To 
force.  13.  Subterranean.  14.  To  shave.  l[.  A  sword.  16.  To  sting.  17.  Con 
tinned.    IS.  Century. 

CONVERSATION. 

La  nature    avjut-elle    favorise     Au    contraire,    elle   semblait  lui 
Demosthcne?  avoir  refus^  tous    les    moyene 

de  devenir  orateur. 
Quels  d^fauts  avait-il  done  ?  II  begayait  et  ne  pouvait  pronon- 

cer la  lottre  r. 
.^^omment  dtait sa  voix ?    ,  ^j^lo-^tait  desagr^able  et  glapis- 

v^        sante. 
Comment  s'cn  tira-t-ijl  lorslju'il     II  s'en  tira  si  mal  qu'il  fut  siffl^ 
prononga    son    dRmicr  dis-       .  {hissed). 
cours?  ^f  ^ 

Fut-il  decourag^  par  co  resul-    Non,  il  ne  pcrdit  pas  courage ;  au 
tat?  ^  contrau-e,  il  pcrsista  dans  son 

^  '  desscin. 

Ek  (y)minent  s'y  prit-il  ?  II  s'exer^ait  continuellement  et  de 

differentee  maoi^ret} 


228 


IV.      QUATBTftME  LEgON. 


Dites-moi  comment. 


Bstrce  qu'il  i^ussit  dans  ses  ef- 
forts? 

Ses  harangues  existentrclles  en- 
oore? 


H  mettait  de  petits  caillonx  dans  sa 
bouche  pour  se  defaire  (rid  of  ) 
de  I'habitude  de  begayer. 

II  r^ussit  si  parfaiteraent  qu'il  de- 
vint  k  la  fin  le  plus  grand  ora- 
teur  qui  ait  exists. 

Oui,  elles  ont  ^t^  conserv^es,  et 
elles  sont  encore  aujourd'hui  ad- 
mirees  comme  des  chefe-d'oeuYre 
d'^loquence. 


IV.    QUATRlfeME    LE9ON. 


SPECIAL  USE  OF  DE  AND  A. 

In  general  we  may  say  de  is  used  when  made  of,  composed  of,  coming 
from,  belonging  to,  can  be  understood  ,*  whereas  a  is  employed  when  for  the 
purpose  ofm  meant. 

I.  DE  IS  USED  :  — 

1.  After  adverbs  of  quantity,  as :  heaucoup,  pen,  plus,  moitUy 
tarU,  etc.     (See  Part  I.  L.  6,  p.  42.) 

2.  Before  a  limiting  word  which  follows  a  noun  used  partitively 
and  preceded  by  a  word  denoting  quantity.   Ex.:  — 

II  y  eut  deux  hommes  db  tu^s,  there  were  two  men  killed. 
Void  quelque  chose  de  plus,  here  is  something  more. 
Void  un  homme  de  trop,  here  is  a  man  too  many. 
J^ai  deux  chambres  de  budes,  I  have  two  rooms  let. 

Note.  The  noun  may  be  understood.  Ex.:  J'en  ai  une  delouie.  Or 
rien  or  personne  may  supply  the  place  of  the  noun  and  its  preceding  word. 
Ex.:  //  n'y  a  personne  de  malade  chez  nous,  there  is  no  one  sick  at  oar  hooM. 
Rien  de  bon,  nothing  good. 


SPECIAL  USB  OP  DE  AND  A.  229 

i>.    As  ifl   English,   r/^r  nouns  txpressing  quantity,  numbert 
'•i^asure,  rjeight,  etc.,  ill .  — 
Une  quaruit^de  nuix,  a  quaatity  of  walnuts. 
Une  paire  de  bos,  a  pair  ol  stockings. 
Une  livT«  de  beurre,  a  poa'il  of  butter. 
Une  piiiX  de  toile,  a  piftije  r  f  linen. 
Un  morcMu  de  froinafj^,  <>  piece  of  cheese. 
Une  main  de  papier,  a  (rare  of  'paper. 
Une  bouteille  de  vin,  &  'i>  r.tle  of  wine. 

4.  Afbcr  adjec'J  ;.'/•  ienoting  dimension  or  age,  as :  — 

A  wall  irrzz'cj  feet  rj^~ :  un  mur  haut  de  vingt  pieds  or  un  mur  qui  a  vingl 
pieds  DE  hai'2  or  iiTt  h  luteur. 

A  uoy  ten  yiiejB  oVl,  un  (petit)  gar^on  de  dix  ans. 

A  table  siz.  tyA,  long,  une  table  tongue  de  six  pieds  or  de  six  pieds  de 
longy.ieur. 

NoTK.  It  m'jL-f  be  observed  here  that  with  adjectives  of  dimension,  the 
verb  to  he  may  be  rendered  in  French  by  avoir,  as :  — 

This  tower  is  120  feet  high. 

Cett^,  tour  ▲  cent  vingt  pieds  DE  hauteur. 

5.  When  an  English  adjective  is  rendered  in  French  by  a  noun, 
the  order  of  the  substautives  is  inverted  in  English.  In  French  the 
latter  is  preceded  by  de.     Ex.:  — 

A  witty  man,  un  homme  d'esprit. 

A  gold  watch,  une  montre  d'or. 

Silk  stockings,  des  bos  de  soie. 

The  Russian  Ambassador,  Vamhassadeur  de  Russie. 

Irish  linen,  la  toile  d'lrlande. 

Spanish  wool,  la  laine  d'Espagne. 

Burgundy  wine,  U  vin  de  Bourgogne. 

6.  De  is  used,  as  in  English,  after  a  common  noun  followed  by 
its  proper  name.     Ex. :  — 

Le  royaume  d'Espagne,  the  kingdom  of  Spain. 
L'ile  de  Make,  the  island  of  Malta. 
La  ville  de  Londres,  the  city  of  London. 
Lelacde  Geneve,  the  lake  of  Geneva. 

Except  the  combinations  with  mont,  rue.  place,  and  ^glise,  as:  le  MxML 
Blanc,  U  Moot  Etna,  rue  Richelieu,  place  Venddme,  I'^liae  Saint-Sulpiee,  «te. 


230  IV.      QUATBIEME   LEgON. 

7.  After  many  adjectives  it  takes  the  place  of  the  English  unthy 
from,  of,  by,  in,  etc.     (See  L.  8,  compl.  of  adj.  1.)      Ex.:  — 

Fall  of  ardor,  plein  de  feu. 

Greedy  after  money,  avide  d'argaU. 

Dressed  in  black,  vetu  de  noir. 

I  am  pleased  with  my  situation. 

.Te  suis  content  de  ma  position. 

I  am  deprired  of  everything,  je  suisjfriv€de  tout. 

8.  De  m  used  for  than,  instead  of  que,  after  pliLs,  more,  and 
moins,  less,  when  these  adverbs  are  followed  by  a  numeral  adjective 
or  substantive :  — 

n  a  plus  de  sir  ans,  he  is  more  than  six  years  old. 

9.  For  in,  after  a  superlative,  before  the  name  of  a  place  :  — 

Une  des  meilleures  institutions  db  Boston,  one  of  the  best  in«titutionfl  in 
Boston.  » 

Le  premier  de  notre  €coh,  the  first  in  our  school. 

TRENCH   COMPOUND   NOUNS   WITH   DB. 

10.  English  nouns  compounded  with  two  substantives  are  gener- 
ally rendered  in  French  by  two  separate  substantives  joined  by  de, 
when  one  expresses  the  nature,  species,  or  quality  of  the  other. 
(Compare  p.  240,  2.)  In  French  the  order  must  be  altered,  the 
last  coming  first,  and  a  preposition  inserted.  Westminster  bridge, 
for  instance,  must  be  translated  as  if  it  were  bridge  of  Westminster : 
le  font  de  Westminster. 

\.  Deia  used  when  coming  Jrom,  belonging  to,  made  of  can  be  understood, 

tis:  — 
A  toothache,  un  mal  de  dents. 
A  headache,  un  mal  de  tite. 
The  town-hall,  l*h6td  de  ville. 
A  sea-fish,  un  poisson  de  mer. 
A  feather-bed,  un  lit  de  plumes. 
A  holiday,  an  jour  de  fete, 
A  gold  mine,  une  mine  d'or. 
The  moon-light,  le  clair  de  tune. 
A  masterpiece,  un  dief-Wcetivre. 


SPECIAL  USE  OP  DE  AUD  A.  231 

2.   When  in  the  English  word  the  second  component  den'^tes  a  poison  ot 
an  animal,  in  French  de  is  always  used,  as :  — 
A  schoolmaster,  un  maitre  d  Vco/«. 
A  chambermaid,  une  femme  de  ciambrt. 
The  dancing-master,  le  maitre  de  danse. 
The  music-mistress,  la  maitresse  de  musiqrte, 
A  iciddle-horse,  un  cheval  de  selle. 
A  sea-fish^  un  poisson  de  mar. 

THEME   7. 

1.  Give  me  much  bread  and  little  me  it.  2.  You  must  use  more 
prudence.  3.  I  have  bought  a  quantity  of  apples  and  pears.  4. 
You  make  too  much  noise.  5.  How  many  children  has  your  aunt  t 
6.  She  has  four  children.  7.  You  have  eaten  too  many  cherries. 
8.  We  have  not  bread  enough.*  9.  Mr.  Henry  has  a  groat  many 
friends.  10.  We  had  a  great  deal  of  pleasure,  11.  I  bought  a 
pound  of  cheese.  12.  We  want  a  dozen  pens,  a  bottle  of  ink,  and 
two  quires  of  paper.  13.  A  great  number  of  friends  remained 
attached*  to  me.  14.  They  have  built  a  wall  eighty  feet  long  and 
ten  feet  high.  15.  How  many  boys  were  there  killed  ?  16.  Tbere 
were  six  killed  (see  §  2).  17.  IIow  many  soldiers  yrere  there 
wounded?  18.  There  were  six  books  lost.  19.  How  many  were 
there  found?  20.  How  many  rooms  are  there  let  in  that  house? 
21.  Have  you  anything  good?  22.  I  have  nothing  bad.  23. 
When  my  sister  was  a  girl  of  seven  years,  she  lived  with  my  mother 
in  Italy.  24.  Have  you  a  gold  or  a  silver  watch  ?  25.  My  watch 
is  of  gold.  26.  Irish  linen  is  as''  good  as  Dutch'  linen.  27.  I 
prefer  Burgundy  wine  to  Spanish  wine.  28.  The  kingdom  of  Spain 
is  larger  than  the  kingdom  of  Portuga/.  29.  The  city  of  Pari*  is 
older  than  the  city  of  Berlin.  30.  Is  that  gentleman*  your  music- 
master?    31.   No ;  he  is  my  writmg*-master. 

1«  AUachit.    2.  Justi.    8.  D'Hollande.    4.  Monsieur.    5.  ^crUure,t. 


*A$H»t  enonfli,  li  placed  «(Ur  the  substantiT*  la  Engllih,  and  alwaya  before  in 


232  IV.   QUATRIEMB  LEgON. 

THEME  8. 

1.  To-morrow  is  (c'est)  a  LoliMay;  it  will  bo  a  day  of  happi- 
ness.^ 2.  Human  life  is  full  of  disappointments.'  3.  Mr.  B. 
is  a  young  man  endowed*  with  (c?')  wit*  and  judgment.  4.  Wf» 
were  very  much  pleased  with  his  behavior.®  5.  I  was  in  England, 
but  I  have  not  seen  Westminster  bridge.  6.  Burgundy  wine  is 
rery  dear.  7.  Spanish  wool  is  better  than  German  wool.  8.  I 
have  sold  my  gold  watch.     9.    Mr.  B.  always  wears^  silk  stockings. 

10.  My  sisters  and  I  (we)  have  taken*  a  walk  by  (aw)  moonlight. 

11.  The  battle-field  was  covered  mth  the  dead  and  dying.  12. 
This  girl  is  the  chambermaid  of  the  Duchess  of  L.  13.  Who  are 
these  gentlemen  ?  14.  One  is  my  music-master,  and  the  other  is 
my  sister's  dancing-master.  15.  Let  us  go  to  gallons  dans)  the 
dining-room;  dinner  is  served  {servi).  16.  I  shall  not  dine  to- 
day ;  I  have  a  bad"  headache. 

1.  FHe.  2.  Bonheur.  3.  Revers.  4.  Doui.  6.  Esprit,  6.  ConduUe^  t.  7,  Por- 
ter.  8.  To  take  a  walk  =  se  promener,    9.  Violent, 

n.      SPECIAL  USB  OP   a. 

1.  The  preposition  a  alone  (without  article)  is  used  after  a  verb 

in  the  following  expressions : 

Condamner  a  mort,  to  condemn  to  death. 

Fermer  a  clef,  to  lock. 

Timber  a  terre,  to  fall  to  the  floor  or  grotmd. 

AUer  a  pied,  to  go  on  foot,  to  walk. 

AUer  a  cheval,  to  ride,  to  go  on  horseback. 

Monter  a  cheval,  to  get  or  mount  on  horseback. 

Tomber  a  qenoux,    )  ,    ,       ,   , 

„  r  >■  to  kneel  down. 

ce  mettre  a  genoux,  > 

Se  mettre  a  table,  to  sit  down  to  dinner. 

2.  When  two  substantives  make  a  compound  word  in  English, 
their  order  is  inverted  in  French,  and  the  prepc  sition  a  intervenes, 
when  the  one  expresses  the  use  of  the  other,  or  when  for  the  pun 
pose  of,  by  means  of  may  be  understood : 

T^e ulk-wonn,  lever  "h $oie* 


SPECIAL  USE   OP  DE  AND  A.  238 

A  milk-pot,  vn  jwt  a  laiL* 

A  teacup^  une  tasse  a  thg. 

A  repeater,  une  montre  a  r^pHition. 

A  windmill,  an  moulin  a  vent. 

A  paper-mill,  un  moulin  a  papier. 

A  powder-mill  (a  mill  for  powder),  un  moulin  h  poudre. 

Gunpowder,  de  la  poudre  a  canon. 

A  dining-room,  une  salle  a  manger. 

A  bedroom,  une  chavibre  a  coucher. 

A  wineglass,  un  vene  a  vin.* 

A  coffee-cup,  une  tasse  a  caf6. 

A  steam-engine,  une  machine  a  vapeur. 

A  steamboat,  un  bateau  a  vapeur. 

Fire-arms,  des  armes  a  feu. 

3.  If  the  second  word  be^ns  with  a  vowel  or  //  mute,  the  artiole 
is  commonly  inserted,  as : 

An  ink-bottle,  une  bouteille  k  Vencre  Cor  a  encre). 
A  water-jug  (pitcher),  une  cruche  ^  Veau  (or  a  eauf. 

4.  When  the  compound  word  denotes  a  place  where  certain  things 
aio  sold  or  kept  in  quantities,  the  article  is  also  used  with  a,  as  : 

The  horse-market,  le  march€  aux  chevaux. 
The  fish-market,  le  march€  aux  poissom. 
The  corn-market,  la  halle  aux  bl^s. 

5.  A  together  with  the  article  is  further  used  to  call  a  dish  or 
di-ink  after  its  principal  ingredient,  as : 

A  milk-soup,  une  soujie  au  lait. 
Coffee  with  milk,  du  caf€  au  lait. 
A  cream- tart,  une  tarte  a  la  crime. 
A  pancake  with  herbs,  une  omelette  dux  Jines  herbes. 
NoTB.     But  wc  say  du  si/rop  de  groseille,  not  syrop  a  gro$eille,  cnitant 
synip,  because  this  is  made  entirely  of  currants. 

6.  To  denote  the  difierent  kinds  of  hunting,  shooting,  etc.,  afi : 
A  deer-hunt,  la  chasse  aux  chevreuih. 

Fox-hunting,  la  chasse  aux  renards. 

7.  A  13  generally  employed  to  translate  expressions  in  which  7ffi(h 

*  Un  pot  de  lait,  wi  verre  de  vin,  signify  a  pot  of  milk,  a  glaaa  of  wine ;  pot  cut 
lait  refers  both  to  the  Yessel  and  to  its  contents. 


234  IV.     QUATRlfiMB  LSgOH. 

is  expressed  or  could  be  employed,  or  wHen  having  oonld  be  osecL 
Ex.: 

Unc  maison  a  deux  dagrs,  a  two-story  hotise. 
Vn  chapeau  a  grands  bords,  a  broad-brimmed  hat. 
Une  voiture  a  deux  places,  a  double-seated  carriage. 

THEME  9. 

1.  I  have  bought  six  teficups ;  take^  them  into  the  dining-room, 
2.  Where  is  the  oiP-hottle  f  3.  Who  has  broken  this  flower-pot  ? 
4.  Bring  me  a  wineglass  and  two  teaspoons.  5.  Why  has  he 
been  condemned  to  death  ?  6.  He  has  committed^  a  murder.^  7. 
Your  room  is  locked.  8.  Is  this  an  ink-bottle  f  9.  No ;  it  is  a 
vinegar^-hottle.  10.  Let  us  sit  down  {rnettons-nous)  to  dinner.  11. 
Did  you  observe*  that  man  with^  black  hair  ?  12.  You  must  buy 
another  milk-pot.  13.  Is  this  the  corn-market?  14.  I  always 
keep  (keep  always)  fire-arms  in  my  bedroom  for  my  safety'  during . 
the  night ;  but  I  have  no  gunpowder  at  present,  thus  {ainsi)  my 
fire-arms  are  useless.' 

l.Portez.    2.  Huile,t.    Z.  Commis,  P.p.  of  commettre.    i,  Vinaigre.    5.  Eemar- 
quer.    6.  Aux,  pi.     7.  Suret6,  f.    8.  Inutile.    9.  Meurtre,  m 

THEME   10. 

1.  Whom  have  you  called?  2,  I  have  been  to  the  fish-market; 
however  I  have  bought  no  fish,  because  it  was  too  dear.^  3.  I  went 
fox-hunting  yesterday,  and  to-morrow  I  shall  see  a  deer-hunt.  4. 
What  had  you  for  dessert  ?  5.  We  had  cherry-pie^  and  a  cream? 
tar*,}  6.  Can  you  tell  me  where  the  hay-store  is?  7.  It  is 
near  the  horse-market.  8.  Who  invented  gunpov)der?  9.  Ber- 
(hold  ScQwarz,  a  German  monk  *  10.  The  poor  girl  has  broken  s 
milk-pot,  two  wineglasses,  and  several  teacups.  11.  The  Qreal 
Eastern  is  the  largest  steamship  in  the  {au)  world.  12.  Call  th« 
milk-woman  ;•  I  must  buy  a  pot  of  milk. 

L  CIm,   'i,  Qdkau.    3.  Crinu,  f.    4.  TourU^  f.    5.  MoiM,    0.  Laitikn' 


Hames  op  countries,  towns,  etc.  235 

V.    CINQUlfiME    LEgON. 


PECULIARITIES  IN  THE  USE  OF  NAIMES   OF 
COUNTRIES,   TOWNS,  ETC. 

(See  Part  L.L.VII.) 

1.  Afl  mentioned  in  the  First  Part  (7th  lesson),  the  definite  ar 
tide  is  put  before  the  names  of  countries,  provinces,  rivers,  and 
mountains.  But  the  names  of  countries  and  islands,  which  have  the 
same  name  as  cities  cituated  in  them,  such  as  Naples,  Bade,  Genes 
(Genoa),  Malts,  Candle,  etc.,  are  used  without  the  article. 

Eixcept,  however:  le  Hanovre  and  le  Luxemlxmrg. 

2.  Further,  the  definite  article  is  always  retained  with  names  of 
countries  which  are  only  used  in  the  plural,  and  in  those  which  are 
compounded  with  an  adjective.     Ex.:  — 

The  productions  of  India,  les  productions  de»  Indet. 
The  governor  of  the  Netherlands. 
Le  gouvemeur  des  Pays-bas. 
The  queen  of  Great  Britain. 
La  reine  de  la  Grande-Bretagne. 

3.  In  the  following  cases  de  only,  without  the  article,  is  used  be 
fore  names  of  countries ;  — 

1.   When  sovereigns,  courts,  and  titles  are  spoken  of.    Ex.:  — 
La  reine  d' Angleterre,  the  queen  of  England. 
Le  Grand-due  de  Bade,  the  grand-duke  of  Baden. 
NoTB.  With  the  names  of  some  countries  that  are  not  Earcpaan,  the 
■rticle  is  generally  used,  as :  — 

L'empereur  de  la  Chine,  du  Br^sU,  etc. 

The  emperor  of  China,  of  Brazil,  etc.  -* 

However,  with  Persia,  la  Perse,  and  Egypt,  VEgyjpte,  only  de  is  used » — 
Lsrcide  Peru,  the  king  of  Persia. 


286  ^.    ciNQmfiME  Lfegos. 

2.  Wiere  the  names  of  countries  have  the  meaning  of  an  adjective  (S6t« 
alsoL.  IV.  4),  as:  — 

L'argent  de  France,  French  money. 

La  sole  (Vltalie,  the  silk  of  Italy. 

Du  fromage  de  Suisse,  Swiss  cheese  {de  may  be  omitted). 

3.  After  the  verbs  :  venir^  to  come  ;  revenir,  to  come  back,  to  return ;  at- 
river,  to  arrive,  and  the  noun  le  retour,  if  the  name  of  the  country  is  femi 
nine,  as :  — 

II  est  venu  de  France,  he  has  come  from  France. 

Lorsqite  j'e  '^evins  d'Espagne,  when  I  returned  from  Spain. 

A  mon  retour  d' Italic,  on  my  return  from  Italy. 

But  if  the  same  is  masculine,  the  definite  article  is  used,  as:-^ 

tParrive  du  Tyrol,  du  Mexique,  du  Portugal,  etc. 

4.  After  words,  such  as  empire,  royaume  (kingdom),  diuJi^,  vUle,  Ue  (isle), 
as  in  English  (see  L.  IV.  6) :  — 

U empire  d'Autriche,  the  Empire  of  Austria. 
La  ville  de  Paris,  the  city  of  Paris. 

4.  Both  to  and  in  used  after  a  word  signifying  going,  coming, 
sending,  living,  being,  etc.,  before  names  of  countries  in  the  singu- 
lar, must  be  rendered  in  French  by  the  preposition  en,  without  any 
article.     Ex. :  — 

We  are  going  to  America,  nous  allons  en  Am&ique. 

He  is  to  go  back  to  Belgium,  {/  doit  retoumer  en  Belgique. 

I  send  him  to  Switzerland,  je  I'envoie  en  Suisse. 

My  brother  is  in  America,  mon  frere  est  en  Am€rique. 

Kouen  is  in  France,  Rouen  est  situ€e  en  France, 

5.  If  the  name  of  the  country  be  accompanied  by  an  adjective, 
dans  with  the  definite  article  must  be  used : 

Dans  la  Suisse  fran^aise,  in  French  Switzerland. 
Dans  I'Allemagne  m&idionale,  in  southern  Germany. 

6.  The  article  is  omitted  before  names  of  towns,  villages,  etc., 
as:  — 

Anvers,  Antwerp.  Livoume,  Leghorn. 

AthcneSf  Athens.  Lishonne,  Lisbon. 

BruxeUes,  Brussels.  Londres,  London. 

thuvres,  Dover.  Lyon,  Lyons. 

Geti^e,  /Jeneva.  Venise,  Venice. 


NAMES  OP  COUNTRIES,  TOWNS,  ETC.  2St 

NoTB.  A  few  names  of  towns  are  preceded  by  the  article  :  — 

Le  Havre,  Harre.  la  Rochelle,  Rochelle. 

la  Haie,  the  Hague.  le  Caire,  Cairo,  etc. 

7.  The  names  of  rivers  and  m/3untams  are  preceded  by  the 
definite  article,  as  in  English  : 

La  Seine,  the  Seine.  le  Tihre,  the  Tiber. 

le  iiJtdne,  tlie  Rlione.  le  Danube,  the  Danube. 

le  Rhin,  tiie  Rl'.ine.  h,  Moselle,  the  Moselle. 

le»  Alpes,  the  Alps.  fe  Riyhi,  the  Righi. 

8.  Both  to  and  at  or  in  before  names  of  places  are  rendered 
by  a,     Ex. :  — 

Are  you  going  to  Brussels," aZZer-wMS  a  Bruxellesf 

He  was  at  Rome  and  Naples,  il  ^lait  a  Rome  et  a  Naples. 

9.  After  partir^  to  set  out,  to  leave,  the  preposition  pour  must 
be  used  before  names  of  countries  with  the  article,  before  names 
of  cities  without  it :  — 

Nous  pariirons  pour  I'Espagne  et  le  Portugal. 

We  will  set  out  {or  leave)  for  Spain  and  Portugal. 

Elle  est  partie  pour  Paris  et  Lyon, 
She  left  for  Paris  and  Lyons. 

THEME  11. 

1.  I  prefer  the  wines  of  Germany  to  the  wines  of  Spain.  2. 
We  shall  soon  go  to  Switzerland  and  Italy.  3.  Naples  may  (  petU) 
be  called  a  paradise,^  from  its  (a  cause  de  so)  beauty  and  fertility.^ 
4.  This  merchant  has  bought  Italian,  silk,  Spanish  wool,  and  French 
wines.  5.  My  grandfather  lives  in  the  West  Indies.'  6.  I  set  out 
for  Egypt  to-morrow.  7.  This  cheese  comes  from  Switzerland.  8. 
Cologne  is  situated*  on  {sur)  the  Rhine.  9.  The  Alps  are  higher 
than  the  Pyrenees.  10.  The  emperor  of  Russia,  Peter*  the  Great, 
died  at  St.  Petersburgh  in  the  year  {en)  1725.  11.  Sicily  is  the 
granary*  of  (§  1)  Italy,  and  Italy  the  garden  of  Europe. 

1.  Paradis,  m.     2.  FerttiiU,    8,  Le$  Jnde*  occidentaUs,     4.  SW«^.   5.  I^arrt. 
%t  Grenkr ym. 


238  V.     CINQUIEME  LEgON. 

BEADING  LESSON. 
CHARLES    XII.     (Dome.) 

Charles  XII,  roi  de  Suede,  naquit^  h  Stockholm  le  27  Juin  1682. 
n  perdit  sa  mere  dan3  sa  onzieme  ann^e,  at  avait  a  peine  quinze  ans 
lorsqne  son  pere  mourut.  Selon^  le  testament  du  feu^  roi,  il  ne  de- 
vait  etre  majeur*  qu'apres  avoir  pass(5  sa  dix-huitieme  ann^e,  mais 
8ur  la  proposition  du  ministre  Piper,  les  ^tats  lui  defererent*  le 
gouvemement  dej^  en  1697.  L'an  1700,  Pierre  I,  empereur  de 
Russie,  Frederic  IV,  roi  de  Danemaik,  et  Auguste,  ^lecteur  de 
Saxe,  lui  declar^rent  la  guerre. 

II  les  attaqua  I'un  apres  Tautre  et  remporta  d'abord^  des  victoires 
eclatantes,'  entre  autres  celle  de  Narva,  ou  il  defit*  avec  moins  de' 
8,000  Suedois,  quatre-vingt  mille  Russes,  dont  il  resta  plus  de  vingt 
mille  sur  le  champ  de  bataille,  tandis  qu'il  ne  perdait  que  six  cents 
hommcs.  Mais  plus  tard,  lorsqu'il  penetra  en  Russie,  il  perdit  la 
bataille  decisive  de  Pultawa,  et  fut  contraint  de  se  refugier  sur  le 
territoire  turc  avec  une  faible  escorte  de  deux  cent  cinquante 
Suedois. 

1.  Was  bom.    2.  According  to.     3.  Late.     4.  Of  age.     6.  To  traxufer.     6.  At 
drat.    7.  Splendid.    8.  To  defeat.    9.  Than. 

CONVERSATION. 

Oh  naquit  Charles  XII  ?  Ce  roi  naquit  k  Stockholm. 

Dans  quelle  anaee  ?  En  1682,  le  27  Juin. 

Perdit-il  ses  parents  de  bonne  Oui,  il  perdit  sa  mere,  qnand  il 
heure  ?  avait  11  ans,  et  son  pere,  quand 

il  avait  15  ans. 

Quand  fut-il  ddclar^  majeur  ?        En  1697,  h  I'age  de  quinze  ans  et 

demi. 

Qu'arriva-t-il  trois  ans  apres?        Pierre  I,   empereur  de    Russie, 

Frederic  IV,  roi  de  Danemark, 
et  Auguste,  ^Iccteur  de  Saxe, 
lui  declaiercnt  la  guerre. 

Que  fit  Charles  XII  ?  II  les  attaqua  Tun  apres  I'autre  et 

les  deat. 


POSSESSIVE  ADJECTIVES. 


239 


Quelle  est   sa    plus  ^clatante 

victoire  ? 
Avait-il  bcaucoup  de  soldats  ? 
Y  eutril  beaucoup  de  tues  ? 


A  t-il  toujours  ^t^  heureux  dans 

868  bataillcs? 
A  quoi  futril  contraint  ? 


Cclle    de    Narva,    oh    il    battit 

80,000  Russes. 
H  n'avait  que  8,000  Suddois. 
Les  Russes  perdirent  plus  de  vingt 

mille   hommes,  les   Su^dois  h 

peine  six  cents. 
Non,  il  perdit  la  bataille  de  Pul- 

tawa. 
D  fut  contraint  de  se  r^fugier  sur 

le  territoire  turo,  avec  une  faible 

esoorte. 


-•♦>- 


VI.    SIXifeME    LE9ON* 


POSSESSIVE  ADJECTTVES. 

(See  the  First  Part,  L.  XII.) 
1.    Possessive  adjectives  must  be  repeated  :  — 

1 .  Before  every  noun  of  the  same  sentence,  as  :  — • 

My  brothers  and  sisters  have  arrived.  , 

Mes  freres  et  ines  sceurs  sont  arrives. 

2.  Before  two  or  three  adjectives  qualifying  different  things  s— 
I  love  your  great  and  your  little  children. 

.Paiine  vos  grands  et  vos  petits  en/ants. 

Note.  But  when  the  two  substantives  relate  to  the  same  person,  and 
when  the  two  or  three  adjectives  are  of  the  like  signification*  and  qualiQr 
the  same  object,  the  possessive  adjective  is  not  repeated.    Ex.:  — 

My  teacher  and  friend,  mon  pr€cepteur  et  ami. 

His  good  and  useful  advice,  scs  bons  et  utiles  conseits, 

•  irthey  have  a  contrary  signification,  tho  possessive  a^Jectlre  most  berepeatedy 
U  i  3€S  bonnes  et  set  mauvaises  pensies  (tiioughtfi). 


240  VI.      SIXIEME  LEgON. 

2.  Custom  requires  the  use  of  tbc  possessive  adjective  before  the 
names  of  relations  in  addressing  them  or  speaking  of  them.   Ex.:  — 

Aunt,  when  do  you  leave  1 
Ma  tante,  quand  partez-vous  f 

Cousin,  will  you  go  with  me? 

Mon  cousin  (ma  cousine),  voulez-vous  aller  avec  moi  f 

Father  is  not  at  home,  mon  pere  n'est  pas  a  la  maison. 

3.  "WTien  in  English  the  possessive  pronouns  mine,  thine,  hiSy 
hers,  etc.,  preceded  by  the  preposition  of,  are  placed  after  a  noun  to 
which  they  relate,  they  are  rendered  in  French  by  mes,  ies,  vet,  etc., 
before  the  noun,  which  is  put  in  the  plural.     Ex.:  — 

A  book  of  mine,  un  de  mes  Itvres. 
A  friend  of  yours,  un  de  vos  amis. 

4.  When  the  verb  to  be  is  found  before  a  possessive  adjective  fol- 
lowed by  a  noun  in  the  possessive  case,  and  signifies  to  belong,  in 
French  a  must  be  used.     Ex.:  — 

This  book  is  my  father's,  ce  litre  est  h,  mon  pere. 

That  house  is  our  uncle's,  cette  maison-la  est  a  notre  oncle. 

5.  When  parts  of  the  body,  or  physical  and  intellectual  faculties 
arc  spoken  of,  the  French  generally  use  the  definite  article  where  in 
English  the  possessive  adjective  is  used  (see  L.  IH.  6.)     Ex.:  — 

I  have  a  pain  in  my  head,  fai  mal  a  la  tete. 

He  has  lost  his  senses,  il  a  perdu  Vesprit. 

Note  1%  If,  however,  there  were  an  ambiguity  to  be  feared,  the  posses- 
sive adjective  should  be  used  in  French  as  in  English. 

Note  2.  When  a  habitual  complaint  is  spoken  of,  the  possessive  ad 
joctive  is  also  properly  used.    Ex.:  — 

His  headache  has  returned,  sa  migraine  Va  repris. 

6.  After  the  verbs  changer  and  redoubler  the  possessive  adjeo- 
tave  is  dropped  and  replaced  by  the  prepobition  (fo,  as :  — 

He  has  changed  his  religion,  il  a  chang€de  religion^ 
We  have  changed  our  opinion. 
Nous  avons  change  d'opiiiion  or  d'avis. 

They  redoubled  their  activity,  ils  redaublhent  d*activit€. 


P08SES8ITE   ADJECTITE8.  241 

THEME  12. 

1.  My  father,  mother  and  sisters  are  in  the  country.  2.  BSs 
ancle  and  aunt  know  it.  3.  I  thank  you  for  {de)  your  good  and 
useful  services.  4.  He  is  a  friend  of  mine.  5.  I  found  a  pencil 
of  yours.  6.  Where  are  you,  daughter?  7.  Here  I  am,  mother. 
8.  Come,  friend,  let  us  work.  9.  He  will  never  betray^  me,  for  he 
is  my  friend  and  protector.^  10.  We  changed  oiu*  mind'  when  we 
hoard  that  news.  11.  He  tells*  a  falsehood*  as  often  as  {toutes  les 
fois  qu*)  he  opens  his  mouth.  12.  A  cousin  of  ours  came  yes- 
terday to  see  us.  13.  Give  me  my  dictionary  and  grammar.*  14. 
My  mother  has  a  pain  in  (a)  her  head.  15.  I  have  a  pain  in 
my  ear.*  16.  The  man  who  fell  from  the  roof  of  our  house,  dislo- 
cated (se  demit)  his  wrist.'  17.  In  («)  the  last  battle*  our  gen- 
eral lost  his  right  leg,  and  I  was  wounded^*'  in  mi/  shoulder." 

1.  TYahir,  2.  Protecteur.  8.  Avis,  m.  4.  Dire  un  mensonge.  6.  Orammair€^ 
t  6.  Oreille.  7.  Toil,  m.  t.  Poignet,m.  9.  Jiataille,t.  10.  £les8er,Teg.y.  11. 
EpatUe,t, 

7.  When  in  English  the  word  ovm  is  found  alone,  i.  e.  without 
a  noun,  after  a  possessive  adjective,  the  latter  is  rendered  by  a  pos- 
sessive pronoun  :  le  mien,  le  tien,  le  sien  {propre),  etc.,  or  in  the 
feminine  by  la  mienne,  la  tienne,  la  sienne  (^propre),  etc.    Ex.:  — 

The  daughter  of  his  friend  and  his  own. 
La  Jille  de  son  ami  et  la  sienne  (propre), 

8.  The  indefinite  pronoun  one's  denoting  a  possession  js  trans- 
lated in  French  son,  sa,  ses.     Ex.:  — 

One  is  glad  to  find  one's  money  again. 
On  est  content  de  retrouver  son  argent. 

9.  When  its  and  their  refer  to  a  thing  which  is  not  the  subject 
of  a  proposition  they  are  rendered  by  en  unless  preceded  by  a  prop- 
osition, in  which  case  son,  sa,  ses,  leur,  leurs  must  be  used.   Ex.:  — 

I  like  this  country,  its  air  (Norn.)  is  healthy,  its  soil  fruitfiil,  etc 
Taime  ce  pays ;  fair  en  est  sain,  le  sol  en  est  fertile. 
What  plant  is  this  ?  —  I  do  not  know  its  name. 
Quelle  est  cette  plantel — Je  n'en  connaispa$le  nom, 
U 


242  VI.    sixiiSme  LEgo». 

Look  at  these  trees  ;  what  is  their  height? 

Vo^ez  ces  arbres ;  quelle  en  est  la  hauteur  (not  Uur  A.)  1 

But  we  must  say : 

Paris  a  ses  heaut€s. 

Paris  has  its  beauties. 

iPadinire  la  grandeur  de  ses  rues. 

I  admire  the  size  of  its  streets. 

Ces  arbres  sont  remarquables  par  leur  hauteur. 

These  trees  are  remarkable  for  their  height. 

10.    Observe  the  following  gallicisms :  — 
Let  me  soon  hear  of  you. 
Donnez-moi  bientot  de  vos  nouvelles. 
I  shall  go  to  meet  you,  j'irai  a  voire  rencontre. 
They  are  cousins  of  mine,  ce  sont  de  mes  cousins. 
With  regard  to  me,  —  to  you,  —  to  us. 
A  mon  €gard,  a  votre  €gard,  a  noire  €gard. 

THEME    13. 

1.  He  has  worked  much  more  for  our  good^  than  for  his  own.  2. 
Paris  is  a  large  city,  its  streets  are  too  naiTOw.*  3.  I  particularly* 
admire  (I  adra.  p.)  its  rich  stores.*  4.  Windsor  is  a  fine  town  ;  I 
admire  its  situatio/i,  walks*  and  streets.  6.  London  has  its  beau- 
ties. 6.  I  like  the  size®  of  its  streets.  7.  This  illncjss^  is  danger- 
ous ;  I  know  its  origin*  and  effects."  8.  This  is  (void)  a  fine  treo ; 
its  fruit  is  delicious.^®  9.  Every  science  has  its  principles.  10. 
An  illustrious  ( — tre)  birth"  receives  from  virtue  its  most  shining*" 
lustre.     11.  Mr  Dubois  has  sold  his  father's  house  and  his  own. 

1.  Le  Men.  2.  Etroit,  e.  3.  Surtout.  4.  Magasin.  m.  6.  Promenade,  f.  6. 
Grandeur,  f.  7.  Maladie,  f.  8.  Origine,  f.  9.  j^e/,  m.  10.  Dilideux.  11. 
Naisaance^f.    12.  Beau. 


BEADINQ  LESSON. 
EUDAMIDAS. 


Eudamidas  de  Corinthe  fit,  en  raourant,  un  testament  qui  semble- 
rait  ridicule  h.  tout  autre  qu'k  iin  ami.     D  touohait  ^  sa  demi^ro 


POSSESSIVE  ADJECTIVES.  243 

heure,  et  laissjdt  sa  mere  et  sa  fille  expos^cs  h  la  plus  cnielle  indi- 
gence, n'ayant  pour  tout  bien  que  deux  fideles  amis,  Carix^ne  et 
Ai'^thus.  Eudaraidas  ne  fut  point  alarm^  ;  il  jugea  des  coeurs  de 
Bes  auiis  par  le  sien  propre,  et  il  fit  ce  testament  qui  ne  doit  jamais 
etre  oubli^.  *'  Je  legue^  k  Are  thus  le  soin  de  nourrir  ma  mere,  et 
de  I'entretenir  dans  sa  vieillesse  ;  k  Carixene  le  soin  de  marier  ma 
fille,  et  de  lui  donner  une  dot*  convcnable." 

Carixene  etant  mort  quclque  temps  apres,  Ar^thus  ex^cuta  la 
commission  de  tons  les  deux;  et,  pour  rendre  son  action  plus  il- 
lustre,  il  maria  la  fille  de  son  ami  et  la  sicnne  en  un  me  me  jour, 
et  leur  donna  a  toutes  deux  une  merae  dot.  Quant  k  {as  to)  la 
mere,  il  la  nourrit  jusqu'^  la  mort.  Si  la  g^ndrosit^  d'Ar<5thus  est 
digne  d 'admiration,  la  noble  hardiesse'  et  la  confiance  du  testateur* 
Test  encore  davantage;  car  celui  qui  a  la  resolution  de  faire  un 
semblable*  testament,  est  capable  non-seuleraent  de  I'ex^cuter, 
mais  de  quclque  chose  encore  de  plus,  et  il  n'est  pas  douteux  qu'il 
n'eut  nourri  la  mere  de  son  ami,  et  mari(S  sa  fille,  aussi  bien  que  la 
sienne  propre,  meme  sans  en  etre  pri^. 
1.  I  bequeath.    2.  Dowry,  portion.    3.  Boldness.  4.  Testator.  6.  Such,  similar. 

COJ^VERSATION. 

Que  fit  Eudamidas  de  Corinthe    H  fit  un  testament  remarqnable. 

en  mourant? 
Etait-il  riche  ?  Au  contraire,  il  ^tait  tr^s-pauvre, 

mais  il  avait  deux  fiddles  amis. 
Que  l<5gua-t-il  done  k  ses  amis  ?    II  legua  k  son  ami  Ardthus  le  soin 

de  nourrir  sa  vieille  mere,  et  k 
Carixene  le  soin  de  marier  sa 
fille. 
Devai1>il  la  marier  sans  dot  ?        Non,  avcc  une  dot  convenable. 
Les  deux  amis  ex^cuterent-ils    L'un    d'eux,    Carixene,    monrni 
CO  que  le  testament  leur  im-        quclque  temps  apr^s. 
posa? 
Et  Tautie  que  fit-il  ?  Ar^thus  exdcuta  la  commission  de 

tous  les  deuj 


244  Vn.     SEPTlfiMB  LEgON. 

De    quelle    mani^re    Tcx^cu-    II  maria  la  fille  de  son  ami  et  la 
ta-t-il  ?    .  sienne   en   un   meme  jour,    et 

leur  donna  k  toutes  deux  une 
dot  egale. 
Et   comment  agit-il  envers  la    H  la  nourrit  jusqu'k  la  mort. 

mere  d'Eudamidas  ? 
Comment  trouvcz-vous  la  gdn^-    Elle  est  digne  d'admiration. 
losit^  d'Ar^tiius  ? 


VII.    SEPTIEME    LE9ON. 


NUMERALS. 
(See  the  Firs^  Part,  L.  XIV.) 

1.  When  the  cardinal  numbers  are  used  substantively  they  take 
the  masculine  article,  as : 

Un  un,  a  one.    Le  trois,  the  three. 

Ce  huit  est  mal  fait,  this  eight  is  badly  made. 

2.  A  and  one  before  hundred  and  thousand  are  not  translated 
Ex.: 

A  hundred  and  twenty  horses,  cent  vingt  chevanx. 
In  the  year  one  thousand  one  hundred  and  sixty. 
L'an  (or  simply  en)  mil  cent  soixante. 

3.  Observe  the  following  expressions  with  numerals : 
Un  a  un,  one  by  one. 

Deux  a  deux,  two  by  two. 

L'un  apres  Cautre,  one  after  the  other. 

Vera  six  hemes  or  vers  les  six  heures,  by,  about  six  o'clock. 

Vers  midi  or  vers  le  midi,  towards  (by)  twelve  o'clock. 

Une  heure  et  demie,  one  hour  and  a  half  or  half-past  one. 

Deux  heures  moins  un  quwt,  a  quarter  to  two. 

TroU  heures  (et)  un  quart,  a  quarter  past  thiea' 


NUHEBALS.  245 

Tous  leg  detiz  joiirs,  erery  otter  daj. 

D'aujonrd'Iiui  en  huit,  to-day  week. 

jynujourcrhui  en  quinze,  to-day  fortmght. 

Dans  (piinze  jours,  in  a  fortnight. 

U }/  a  huit  jours,  a  week  ago. 

n  y  a  un  an,  9.  year  or  a  twelvemonth  ago. 

4.  More  than,  and  less  than,  before  numbers  are  rendered  plus  dt 
and  moins  de,  instead  of  plus  que  and  moins  que.     Ex. : 

I  have  spent  more  than  a  huntlred  francs. 

J'ai  d«fpcns€  plus  de  cent  francs. 

Yea  have  not  less  than  ten  mistakes  in  your  exercise. 

Vous  n'avez  pas  moins  de  dix  faults  dans  votre  theme. 

6.    Nearly,  before  a  number,  is  translated  pres  de.     Elx. : 

It  is  nearly  five  o'clock,  il  est  prh  de  cinq  heures. 

THEME  11. 

1.  This  six  is  well  made,  but  this  nine  is  badly  made.  2.  Hemy 
the  Fourth  was  one  of  the  greatest  kings  of  France.  3.  Numa 
was  one  of  the  seven  kings  of  Rome.  4.  America  was  discovered' 
in  the  year  one  thousand  four  hundred  and  ninety-two.  5.  The 
shepherd^  has  sold  a  huncbrcd  sheep.  6.  When  do  you  dine?  7. 
I  dine  at  twelve  o'clock,  sometimes  at  one  o'clock.  8.  I  sup'  at 
half-past  eight,  and  I  go  to  bed*  at  midnight.  9.  Is  it  four  o'clock? 
10.  No,  sir ;  it  is  a  quarter  Ko  four.  11.  I  must  go  out  at  a  quar- 
ter past  four.  '12.  We  went  in  (enframes)  one  by  one.  13.  My 
brother  will  set  out  this  day  week,  and  will  come  back  in  a  fortmght. 
14.  lias  Mr.  L.  three  children?.  15.  No;  he  has  (en  a)  more 
than  thi'ce :  he  has  four  or  five.  16.  This  book  costs  less  than 
ten  francs.  17.  How  old  is  your  son  Charles?  18.  He  is  ni?arly 
tourteen  years  old.      19.   I  have  a  French  lesson*  every  other  day. 

L  Fui  dicouverU.    2.  Le  berger,     8.  Souper,     4.  Se  ooucher,    6.  Um  legM 
io  franqtds. 


240  Tin.     HUITlfiMB  LEgOH. 


VIII.     HUITIEME    LECON, 


ADJECTIVES. 
See  Part  I.,  Lesson  XVII. 

AGREEMENT   OF   THE   ADJECTIVE   WITO    THE   NOUN. 

I.    In  French,  the  adjective  agrees  in  gender  and  number  witt 
tlio  noun  to  which  it  relates  : 

Une  feuille  verte,  a  green  leaf.  * 

De  bona  amis,  good  friends. 

Lei  prunes  sont  murca,  the  plums  are  ripe. 

1 .  If  it  belongs  to  two  or  more  nouns  in  the  singular,  it  most  be  in  the 
plural : 

Le  pauvre  et  le  riche  sont  €gaux  devant  Dim. 

The  poor  and  the  rich  are  alike  before  Grod. 

J'ai  trouv€  la  porte  et  la  fenetre  fenn€es. 

I  found  the  door  and  the  window  shut. 

La  demence  el  la  majesty  €taient  peintes  sur  son  front. 

Clemency  and  majesty  were  imprinted  on  his  brow. 

2.  K  the  substantives  are  of  different  genders,  and  Joined  by  et,  and,  the 
adjectives  must  be  in  the  masculine  plural  ; 

Mon  frere  et  ma  soeur  sont  tres-heitreux. 
My  brother  and  sister  arc  very  happy. 

3.  When  the  two  nouns  are  joined  by  ou,  or,  or  when  the  conjunction 
is  left  out,  the  adjective  agi*ees  ouly  with  the  latter  noun : 

Un  chateau  ou  une  maison  ruin^e. 
A  ruined  castle  or  house. 
Le  fer,  la  Jlamme  ^ait  toute  prete. 
The  sword,  the  flame  was  quite  ready. 

2.  The  adjectives  demt,  half ;  nu,  bare  ;  excepte,  except ;  y  com 
pris,  included;  suppose,  supposed;  ci-Joint,  inclosed,  annexed. 
are  invariable  when  they  precede  the  noun ;  demi  and  nu  are  then 
joined  with  their  noun  by  a  hyphen.     Ex. : 

l/tie  demi-heurej  half  an  hour. 


ADJEcnvBs.  247 

Marcher  nu-pietJs,  to  walk  bftrcfooted. 
Marcher  nu-tete,  to  walk  bareheaded. 
Excq)t^  les  deux  jrremieres  pages. 
Except  the  two  first  pages. 
y  comftrjs  la  somme  de  ceid  Jranes. 
The  sura  of  a  hundred  francs  included. 
Suppose  ces  fails,  these  facts  supposed. 

But  they  must  agree  with  their  noun  when  they  follow  it,  as: 

Une  fieure  ct  demic,  an  hour  and  a  half. 

A  voir  les  jambes  nwes,  to  have  bare  legs. 

Les  deux  premieres  par/es  except ^cs. 

The  two  first  pages  excepted. 

Copie  de  ina  lettre  est  ci-jointa. 

A  copy  of  my  letter  is  annexed. 

3.  Feu,  late,  is  invariable,  like  the  preceding  ones,  when  it.  is 
before  the  article  or  pos.sessive  pronoun  ;  when  it  follows,  it  varies,  as : 

Feu  la  reine  or  la  feue  reine,  the  late  queen. 
Feu  mes  tantes  or  mes  feues  taiU.es,  my  late  aunts. 

4.  Some  adjectives,  as  bon,  vite,  bos,  etc.,  may  be  used  adverb* 
ially ;  then,  of  course,  they  are  invariable.     Ex. : 

Ces  roses  sentent  tres-bon  (not  bonnes). 

These  roses  smell  very  sweet. 

Lfcs  cer/s  courent  tres-vite,  the  stags  run  very  fast. 

5.  If  the  expression  avoir  Vair,  to  look,  is  followed  by  an  adjec- 
tive, this  latter  remains  unchanged  when  a  moral  or  intellectual 
quahty  is  spoken  of,  as : 

Ces  dames  ont  I'air  bon. 

These  ladies  look  good-natured. 

But  if  a  bodily  or  organic  quality  is  mentioned,  or  when  the  adjec- 
tive refers  rather  to  the  subject  than  to  the  word  air,  the  adjective 
agrees  with  the  subject  of  the  sentence.  In  this  latter  case,  the 
verb  etre  is  understood,  as : 

Ces  pierres  ont  I'air  tres-dures. 

These  stones  seem  to  be  very  hard. 

Madame  F.  a  I'air  mecontente  (i.  e.  d'etre  mAontente). 

Mrs.  F.  appears  to  be  discontented. 

6.  If  a  noun  is  accompanied  by  an  adjective  in  the  superlative. 


M8  vm.    HUiTifiim  le^ow. 

the  latter  always  agrees  with  it  in  gender  and  nmnber.     When  the 
superlative  follows,  the  article  must  be  repeated  : 

La  plus  belle  fernme,  the  handsomest  woman. 
Let  gens  Us  plus  riches,  the  richest  people. 

THEME   15. 

I.  I  have  a  good  friend.  2.  The  leaves  are  green.  3.  These 
pears  are  riper  than  those  apples.  4.  His  brother  and  cousin  have 
arrived.  5.  Charles  and  Louisa  are  very  industrious.  6.  Men 
and  women  are  mortal.  7.  My  son  and  daughter  are  happy,  8. 
His  uncle  and  aunt  are  dead.  9.  Louis  XIV.  had  in  France  an 
absolute'  powcr^  and  authority  (autorite).  10.  She  left  her  room 
and  her  trunk' open.  11.  I  found  the  windows  and  the  shutters^ 
shut.  12.  Give  these  presents  to  the  most  industrious  pupils.  13. 
Miss  Emma  is  the  daughter  of  the  richest  man  in  {de)  this  town. 
14.  I  remained  there  {y^  for  half  an  hour.  15.  The  child 
slept  two  hours  and  a  half.  16.  I  have  read  the  whole  book,  ex- 
cept the  two  last  chapters.*  17.  The  late  queen  was  opposed"  to 
that  measure.'  18.  ^\Tiy  do  you  go  barefooted  ?  19.  These  pears 
appear  to  be  ripe. 

1.  Absolu.    2,  Pouvoir,  m.    S.  Coffre,  m.    4.  Volet,  m.    6.  Chapitre,  m.    6. 
SPopposait.    7.  Mesure. 

B.      PLACE  OF  TUB  ADJECTIVE. 

The  principal  rules  have  already  been  given  in  the  eighteenth 
Lesson  of  Part  I.     We  have  to  add  here  only  the  following. 

Whan  two  adjectives  refer  to  the  same  noun,  we  should  examine 
what  kind  of  adjectives  they  are. 

1.  If  both  of  them  are  such  as  precede,  when  smgle,  they  may 
both  remain  before  the  noun  if  one  of  them  forms  with  the  noun,  as 
it  were,  but  one  idea.     Ex. : 

Une  jolie  petite  Jille*  a  pretty  little  girl. 

Un  beau  jeune  homme,\  a  handsome  young  man. 

•  In  Latin  filiola.  f  Youth  Ouvenis). 


ADJECTIVES.  249 

2.  If  both  preceding  adjectives  are  taken  in  their  foil  sense,  they 
must  be  joined  by  et,  and,  as  : 

Un  grand  et  beau  jardin,  a  large,  beautiful  garden. 

8.  An  adjective  usually  placed  before  the  noun,  when  connected 
by  a  conjunction  with  another  adjective  which  is  to  be  put  after  it 
is  itself  placed  after  the  noun.     Ex. : 

Une  action  belie*  et  courageuse. 
A  fine,  courageous  action. 
Une  feinme  petite,  mais  bien  faite. 
A  short  but  well-mado  woman. 

4.  In  English,  two  or  more  adjectives  may  qualify  a  substantive, 
without  a  conjunction ;  but  in  French,  et  (or  sometimes  mat's)  is 
always  placed  before  the  last  of  the  adjectives,  if  these  foUaw  their 
noun.     Ex. : 

Utie  dame  riche,  jeune  et  aimable. 

A  young,  rich,  aniiuble  lady. 

Un  homme  instruit,  mcuJMte  et  estim€  de  tout  le  monde. 

A  well-instructed,  modest,  and  generally -esteemed  man. 

lUEME  18. 

1.  Charles  is  a  handsome  young  man.  2.  Henry  is  a  pretty 
little  boy.  3.  This  is  a  long  (and)  tedious^  book.  4.  My  friend 
is  an  amiable  and  virtuous  man.  5.  He  has  a  large  and  beautiful 
house.  6.  This  Ls  a  drowned'  man  or  woman.  7.  For  tliis  place 
I  want  an  aged  man  or  woman.  8.  Is  it  the  elder  brother  or 
sister?  9.  The  savage  lived  in  a  large,  damp' cavern.  10.  Spain 
is  a  fertile  country,  but  badly  cultivated.*  11.  A  plain,"  simDlc, 
and  natural  style  is  the  only  one  to  be  recommended}  12.  Brav* 
and  trust/  men  are  generally  humane®  and  merciful.'  13.  This  is 
an  interesting^*^  and  instructive  study. ^^ 

1.  Ennuymux.    2.  Noyi  e.    3.  Flumide.   4.  CuUivi  e.   6.  Uni,   8,  Recommandahle. 
7.  OonUmU.    8.  Humain,    9.  Misericordieux.    10.  Jnt^restant.    11.  Mude^  f. 

•  <<  A  flne^aotlon  "  would  be,  Une  beUe  action* 


250  Vm.      HUITIEMB  LEgON. 

0,      COMPLEMENT  OP  ADJECTIVES. 

The  complement  of  an  adjective  is  either  a  substantive  or  a  verb, 
preceded  by  one  of  the  prepositions  de,  a,  en,  etc. 

1.  Adjectives  and  participles  which  denote  plenty,  desire,  scan 
city  or  want,  and  most  of  those  followed  in  English  by  of,  with  and 
^ow, govern  in  French  by  means  of  the  preposition  de,  aa : 

La  vie  est  pleine  de  miseres,  life  is  full  of  miseries. 

Le  jnine  hoinme  fut  comU€  d'/ionneurs,  (loaded  with  honors). 

2.  The  following  adjectives  govern  also  by  means  of  de : 

Capable,  capable.  las,  tired,  wearied. 

content,  contented,  pleased.  libre,  free. 

digne,  worthy.  niicontent,  discontented. 

exempt,  free.  satis/ait,  satisfied. 

hcnteux,  ashamed.  »iir,  sure,  etc. 

jaioux,  jealous. 

Ex. :  II  est  digne  de  recompense,  he  is  worthy  of  reward. 

3.*  Adjectives  denoting  fitness,  unfitness,  disposition,  inclination, 
readiness,  or  any  habit,  require  a  before  the  object.     Ex. : 

n  est  propre  It  tout,  he  is  fit  for  anything. 

Le  cheval  est  utile  h.  I'homme,  the  horse  is  useful  to  man. 

NoTB- 1.  The  following  adjectives  are  followed  by  a  in  French  and  of  in 
English : 

Attentifa,  heedful  of;  sensible  a,  sensible  of;  insensible  a,  insensible  of  or  to. 

Ex. :  Soyez  attentifs  au  danger,  be  heedful  of  (the)  danger. 

Je  suis  sensible  k  votre  bont€,  I  am  sensible  of  your  kindness. 

NoTB  2.  Some  adjectives  are  followed  in  French  by  the  preposition  a 
and  in  English  by  in ;  such  are : 

Habile  a,  skilful  in.  patient  a,  patient  in. 

exact  a,  punctual  in.  impatient  a,  impatient  in. 

Ex. :  II  est  Iiabile  II  tout,  he  is  skilful  in  doing  all. 

EUe  est  exacte  k  *<in  service,  she  is  punctual  in  her  service. 

4.  The  following  adjectives,  which  are  followed  in  English  by  to 
or  towards  when  they  express  behavior,  requii-e  in  French  the  prep 
OQtion  envers : 

•To  thii  rule  must  be  excepted  ■ome  words  in  the  preceding  list,  $  ^ 


ADJECTIVES.  251 

Affable  envers,  afFahle  to.  poli  eni'trs,  polite  to. 

bon  envers,  (or  pour)  kind  to.  reconnaissant  envers,  tbankftil  tO. 

juste  envers,  just  to.  respectueux  envers,  re?pectful  to. 

cruel  envers,  cruel  to.  g^n€reux  envers,  generous  to. 

honnete  envers,  civil  to.  liberal  envers,  liberal  to. 

Ex. :  //  a  €t€tres-bon  envers  moi  (or  pour  moi). 

He  has  been  very  kind  to  me. 

Soyez  poli  envers  tout  le  moncle. 

Be  polite  (civil)  to  everybody. 

6.  All  Others  not  mentioned  in  the  foregoing  sections,  and  which 
take  in  English  the  preposition  to,  are  followed  in  French  by  a. 
Ex.: 

That  is  easy  to  say,  celu.  est  facile  k  dire. 

Religion  is  necessary  to  man,  la  religion  est  n€cessaire  h  I'homme. 

He  was  deaf  to  my  prayers,  t/  €lait  sourd  a  mes  prieres. 

THEME   17. 

1.  We  were  loaded^  with  honors.  2.  The  basket*  is  full  offrxat. 
3,  Do  not  be  so  greedy  of  (after)  riches.  4.  My  cousin  is  worthy 
of  your  friendship.  5.  Are  you  pleased  with  your  horse  ?  6. 
Human  life'  is  never  free  froin  troubles.*  7.  Voltake  was  always 
greedy  of  praise  and  insatiable  of  glory.  8.  I  am  not  satisfied  with 
your  exercise.  9.  That  old  man  is  not  fit  for  that  place ;  he  is  not 
punctual  in  his  engagement*.  10.  My  servant  is  always  ready  to 
do  his  duty.*  11.  Nature'  is  content  with  little.  12.  Many 
people  are  dissatisfied  with  theu:  condition.  13.  Let  us  be  kind  to 
everybody.  14.  These  children  are  inclined'  to  idleness.'  15. 
That  is  easy  to  say,  but  diflBcult  to  do.  16.  Scipio  Africanus*  was 
respectful  to  his  mother,  liberal  to  his  sisters,  good  to  his  servants, 
just  and  aflfable  to  everybody. .  17.  Children  must®  not  be  cruel  to 
animals.  18.  He  is  insensible  to  all  the  remonstrances^^  of  his 
tiicuds. 

1.  ComM.    2.  Le  punier.    3.  I*at  the  article.    4.  Peine,  t.    6.  Devoir,  m.    6, 
Mnclin.    7.  Paresae,  f.    8.  Scipion  PAfricain.    9.  Doivent.    10.  Hemonirance,  f. 

D.   ADJECTIVES  OP  DIMENSION. 

1.  Adjectives  relating  to  the  dimenson  or  size  of  objects  are 
expre^^sed  in  French  either  by  an  adjective  or  a  substantive.     Thua 


262  VHL     HTTinfiME  LEgON. 

long  can  be  rendered  by  the  adjective  long  or  longue  (f.)  de,  or  by 

the  noun  de  longueur.      Observe  that  in  the  first  case  de  follows,  in 

the  second  precedes,  and  that  these  adjectives  are  placed  after  the 

aubstantive  and  before  the  dimension.     Ex. : 

.      .  T    ^      /.      ,  )  tine  table  longue  de  dix  piedi. 

A.  table  ten  feet  long,  y  . ,     ,    ,  •      -  j    ,  , 

)  une  table  de  dix  pieds  de  longueur. 

.   ^  ,       ,     ,  -      ,  .  ,    )  «"«  tour  haute  de  cent  pieds. 

A  tower  a  hundred  feet  high,  y        ,        ,       ^      j    i  i    ^ 

)  une  tour  de  cent  pieds  de  hauteur. 

2.  The  verb  to  be  connected  with  such  adjectives,  must  be  ex- 
pressed by  etre  when,  in  French,  the  adjective  of  dimension  is  pre- 
ferred to  the  noun,  as  : 

This  table  is  ten  feet  long. 
Cette  table  est  longue  de  dix  pieds. 
That  tower  is  a  hundred  feet  high. 
Cette  tour-la  est  haute  de  cent  pieds. 

3.  But  tha  verb  to  be  must  be  rendered  by  avoir  when  the 
dimension  is  expressed  by  a  noun.     Ex. : 

This  table  is  ten  feet  long, 
Cette  table  a  dix  pieds  de  longueur. 
That  tower  is  a  hundred  feet  high. 
Cette  tour-la  a  cent  pieds  de  hauteur. 

4.  In  a  similar  manner  age  is  expressed  either  with  age  de 
and  the  verb  etre,  or  with  the  verb  avoir  without  the  verb  dgS. 
Ex.: 

A  boy  eight  years  old,  un  gar^on  ag^  de  huit  ans. 

_  ,,)  ie  suis  aii€  de  vinqt  ans. 

I  am  twenty  years  old,  >•.,■• 

)  J  ai  vingt  ans. 

(The  latter  is  much  preferred.) 

6.  The  word  bg,  which  is  sometimes  used  in  English  after  a  com- 
parative, to  denote  how  much  a  thing  exceeds  another,  is  rendered 
by  de,  not  by  par.     Ex. : 

Charles  is  taller  than  I  by  three  inches. 
Charles  est  plus  grand  que  moi  de  trois  pouces. 


ADJECTIVES.  253 

TTTE^kTE    18. 

1.  I  have  seen  a  tree  ninety  feet  high.  2  We  have  a  honse 
eighty  feet  long  and  forty-five  high.  3.  This  stick  is  three  feet 
long.  4.  This  plank^  is  two  inches'  thick.*  5.  This  tree  is  fifty 
feet  high.  6.  London  bridge*  is  nine  hundred  and  twenty  feet 
long,  fifty-five  high,  and  fifty-six  wide.*  7.  The  monument  of  Lon- 
don stands  {est  place)  on  a  pedestal*  twenty  feet  high.  8.  This 
ditch  is  twelve  feet  deep.'  9.  The  famous  mine  of  Potosi  in  {dans 
!e)  Peru  is  more  than  (de)  fifteen  hundred  feet  deep.'  10.  My 
room  is  forty  feet  long  and  thirty  wide.  11.  The  walls  of  Algiers' 
are  fourteen  foot  thick  and  thirty  feet  high.  12.  King  Street*  is 
about^^  a  mile"  and  a  half  long  and  sixty-five  feet  wide.  13.  My 
brother  is  elder  than  I  by  two  years.  14.  I  am  taller  than  Robert 
by  seven  inches.  15.  Westminster  bridge  is  forty-four  feet  broad  / 
the  free-way^^  under  the  arche*  of  this  bridge  is  eight  h'lndred  and 
seventy  feet ;  it  consists^'  of  fourteen  piers,**  thirteen  large  archer, 
and  two  small  ones ;  the  two  middle"  piers  are  each  (chacun)  sev- 
enteen feet  wide,  and  contain  two  hundred  tons^'  of  solid  stones. 

1.  Planche,  t.     2.  Pouce,  m,     3.  Epais,  ipaisae.     4.  Le  pont  de  Londres.     6. 
Large  or —largeur.    6.  Piedestal.    7.  Pro/oruleur.     S.Alger.     9.  La  rue  royale.  . 
10.  Environ.     11.  ArUle,  m.     12.  The  free-way  =/<  i)<M»oye.    13.  II  consiste.    14, 
Pile,  t    15.  Du  milieu.    16.  Tonneau,  m. 


BEADING  LESSON. 

l'elepuant. 
L'elephant  est  le  plus  gros  des  quadrupedes ;  il  habite  les  forets 
fipaisses,'  les  bords  des  fleuves  et  les  lieux  humides.  Ses  jambes 
inforaies  soutiennent  un  corps  6pais  et  lourd.*  On  aper9oit  k  peine 
in  petite  queue,'  tandis  que  de  larges  orcilles  ombragent*  les  deux 
cotes  de  sa  tete.  Ses  yeux  sont  petits  en  proportion  de  son  corps 
^norme.  Son  nez,  qui  se  prolonge  de  plusieurs  pieds  et  qui  est  tres- 
flexible,  Iiu  sert  de  main.  A  I'aide  de  ce  nez,  qu'on  appelle  trompe,* 
)]  puise  {draws)  de  Teau,  cueille  les  herbcs  et  les  fleurs,  d^noue' 
let}  oordos,  ouvre  et  ferme  les  portes,  d^bouche  les  bouteilles,  ramasse 


254 


vm.    nurnfiMB  leqon. 


par  terre  la  plus  petite  piece  de  monnaie ;  en  un  mot,  il  fait  presqne 
tout  ce  que  nous  faisons  avcc  nos  doigts-  Quand  il  a  soif,  11  reniplit 
d*eau  cette  trompe,  et  boit  ensuite  corame  s'il  ndait'  une  bouteille. 
n  se  nourrit  d'berbes,  de  feuillos,  de  fruits  et  de  riz  (rice).  H 
raange  environ  cent  cinquante  livrcs  d'herbcs  par  jour. 

De  chaque  cot^  de  sa  trompe  sortent  deux  enormes  dents  qu'on 
appelle  defenses.  Ces  defenses  sent  des  armes  tembles,  dont  il 
dpouvante*  les  plus  feroces  animaux.  Elbs  fournissent  une  matiere 
pr^cieuse,  qu'on  appelle  ivoii-e,  et  pesent^  jusqu'k  cent  livres 
chacune. 

1.  Thick.    2.  Heavy.    3.  Tall.    4.  To  shade,  over-shade.    6.  Tfrunk  or  probosdB. 
6.  To  untie.    7.  To  empty.    8.  To  terrify.    9.  To  weigh. 


CONVERSATION. 

Que  savez-vous  de  I'^l^phant  ?      L'elephant  est  le  plus  gros  des 

quadrupedes. 
Oil  habite-t-il  ?  D  habite  les  forets  ^paisses,  les 

bords  des  fleuves  et  les  lieiix 

humides. 
Qu'estrce  qu'il  a  de  particulier  ?     II  a  une  trompe,  k  Taide  de  lar 

quelle  il  puise  de  I'eau,  cueille 

les  herbes  et  les  fleurs,  d^noue 

des  cordus,  etc. 
H  se  nourrit  d'herbes,  Je  feuilles, 

de  fruits  et  de  riz. 
II  remplit  d'eau  sa  trompe  et  boit 

ensuite. 
Environ  150  livres  d'herbes. 
L'ivoire  se  fait  des  defenses  de 

l'elephant   qui  pesent  jusqu*^ 

cent  livres  chacune. 


De  quoi  se  nourritril  ? 

Quand  il  a  soif,  que  fait-il  ? 

Combien  mange-t>il  par  jour  ? 
D'ou  vient  l'ivoire  ? 


PEHSONAL  PR0N0UN3.  256 


IX.    NEUYIEME    LE^ON 


I.   PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 

(See  Part  I.,  L.  XXIV.) 

1  Conjunctive  pronouns,  in  the  first  and  second  persons,  should 
be  repeated  before  every  verb  in  a  simple  tense.     Ex.:  — . 

Je  vous  aime  et  je  vous  aimerai  toujours. 

I  love  you  and  (I)  shall  always  love  yon. 

Vous  dites  et  voiis  direz  toujours. 

You  say  and  (you)  will  always  say. 

Je  le  mis  et  je  I'entends. 

I  see  and  hear  it. 

H  nous  ennuie  et  nous  obskde  sans  cesse. 

He  wearies  (us)  and  besets  us  unceasingly. 

Note.  With  a  compound  tense,  or  when  the  pronouns  are  in  the  third 
person,  they  are  rarely  repeated,  though  more  frequently  than  in  English, 
as:  — 

Je  I'ai  vu  et  entendu. 

I  have  seen  and  heard  it. 

n  (fcoute  et  ne  peut  comprendre,  etc. 

He  listens  and  cannot  conceive,  etc. 

2.  When  an  emphasis  is  laid  upon  the  personal  pronoun,  it  must 
be  repeated  in  French,  but  then,  the  first  is  disjunctive.  Very  of- 
ten it  is  then  preceded  by  c^est,  or  for  the  third  person  plural,  by  ce 
eont.     Ex.:  — 

(  moi,  je  le  dis. 
^  ^^^'''ic'estnun,quilediB. 

(■  lui,  U  a  pr^endu  cda. 
He  has  pretended  this,  -j  ^,^^  ^^ .  ^,^ .  ^  ^^^^^^^  ^^j^ 

(nous  n'avons  pas  dit  cela,  ncnu 
We  have  not  said  so,      )  ^^^^  „^,^  ^,^^^  ^  ^  .^  ^^^ 

Jt  is  not  we  who  said  so,  (  ^e  „'«,«  ;h«  nou*  qui  awns  dit  cela 


256  IX.      NEUTIEME  LEgOIT. 

(■  eux,  lis  I'ont  fait. 
They  hare  done  it,  |  ^^  ^^„^  ^^^^  ^^ .  ^,^^  ^^^.^^ 

Note.  Observe  that  in  such  cases  the  -serb  is  put  in  ihe  same  nmnbei 
and  person  as  the  pronoun  which  is  the  antecedent  of  the  relative  qui, 
as :  — 

Is  it  I  who  told  this  news  1 

Est-ce  moi  qui  ai  dit  cette  nouvelle  f 

3.  When  a  verb  relates  to  subjects  of  different  persons,  it  is  put 
in  tha  plural  with  nous,  if  one  of  the  several  subjects  is  in  the  first 
person,  — or  with  vous,  if  the  subjects  are  in  the  second  and  third 
persons.  '  Ex.:  — 

My  brother  and  /  shall  go  into  the  country. 
Mon  frere  et  moi,  nous  irons  a  la  campagne,  or, 
Nous  irons  a  la  campagne,  mon  frere  et  moi. 
I  told  you  and  him  or  both  you  and  him. 
Je  vous  I'ai  dit  a  toi  et  a  lui. 
You  and  your  friend  will  come  with  me. 
Vous  et  votre  ami,  vous  viendrez  avec  moi. 

4.  When  the  verb  governs  two  pronouns  (both  being  persons) 
one  in  the  Direct  Objective,  the  other  in  the  Indirect,  the  Indirect 
is  a  disjunctive  (see  p.  110).    Ex.:  — 

Je  vais  vous  pr€senter  a  lui. 

I  am  going  to  introduce  you  to  him. 

6.  A  personal  pronoun,  used  as  subject,  may  follow  the  verb 
after  aussi,  peut-etre,  encore,  toujours,  en  vain,  du  moins,  or  au 
moins. 

THEME  19. 

1.  I  believe  and  shall  always  believe  that  you  were  {avez  eu) 
wrong.  2,  He  says  so,  but  he  does  not  believe  it.  3.  I  honor 
and  respect  him,  but  I  do  not  love  him.  4.  We  come  and  go.  5. 
A  passionate^  temper^  renders  a  man  unfit'  for  business,*  deprives* 
him  of  his  reason,  and  makes  him  unfit  (makes  that  he  is  not  fit) 
(^propre)  for  society.*  6.  I  have  always  loved  and  esteemed  her. 
7.  They  (on)  flattpr"  and  praise  us.     8.  It  is  I  who  have  wiitten  it 


PEHSONAL  PRONOUNS.  257 

9.  It  is  they  who  have  s^cn  it.      10.  They  end  my  brother  have 
come.     ]  1    You  like  the  town  and  I  the  country. 

L  Passionni.   2.  Caradire.    3.  Inepte.    4.  Put  the  definite  article.   6.  I*river. 
6,  Flatter, 

0.  "When  two  personal  pronouns  lunit  a  verb,  both  should  be  dis 
junctive,  and  therefore  after  the  verb.     Ex.:  — 

I  forgive  both  you  and  her. 
Je  pardonne  a  vous  et  h.  die.* 
1  speak  to  hira  and  not  to  yon. 
Je  parle  k  hi  et  non  ^  vous. 

7.  The  pronouns  himself,  herself,  themselves,  when  with  a  re- 
dective  verb,  are  expressed  in  French  by  se  ;  otherwise  by  lui-nieme, 
elle-meme,  etix-memes,  elles-memes.     Ex.:  — 

Ho  (she)  docs  not  know  himself  (herself). 
//  {die)  ne  se  connait  pas. 

They  highly  distinguished  themselves. 
Us  (dies)  se  distingueretit  beaucoup.     But: 

Has  he  done  it  himself?     Yes,  himself. 
L'a-t-U  fail  lui-meme  t    Oui,  lui-mime. 

8.  Soi,  self,  is  of  both  genders,  and  is  used  of  things  as  well  as 
of  persons.     Ex.:  — 

n  est  sage  de  parler  rarement  de  soi. 
It  is  wise  to  talk  seldom  of  one's  self. 

9.  The  pronoun  itself,  preceded  by  a  preposition  and  relating  to 
an  inanimate  object,  is  expressed  by  soi,  when  the  antecedent  noun 
is  taken  in  an  abstract  sense.     Ex.:  — 

Uaimant  attire  le  fer  a  soi. 
The  loadstone  attracts  iron  to  itself. 
La  vertu  est  aimable  en  soi. 
Virtuo  is  amiable  in  itself. 

•  This  sentence  may  better  be  translated  thus :  Je  vous  pardonnR  ainti  qu^d,  eOa 
^jid  the  ioUowiu^,  c''est  <k  voia  que  je  parley  etc. 


258  rX.      NEUVIEITE  LEgON. 

10.   But  it  IS  rendered  by  elle,  when  the  inanimate  object  is  of  an 
individual  nature  and  of  the  feminine  gender.     Ex.:  — 

La  riviere  entraina  tout  avec  elle. 

The  river  carried  everything  away  with  itself 

Ces  raisons  sont  solides  en  elles-memes. 
Those  reasons  are  sohd  in  themselves. 

11.  The  English  personal  pronouns  are  always  rendered  by 
the  disjunctive  {moi,  toij  lid,  etc.),  when  they  are  used  alono,  or 
when  after  a  preposition  or  after  que,  than.     Ex. :  — 
Qui  a  fait  cela  ?     il/oi,  lui,  elle,  etc. 
Who  has  done  that  ?    I,  he,  she,  etc. 
Voulez-vous  aller  avec  moi,  avec  lui,  avec  eux  f  etc. 
Will  you  go  with  me,  with  hira,  with  them  1  etc. 
Je  parte  de  toi,  d'elle,  d'elles,  de  vous,  etc. 
I  am  speaking  of  thee,  of  her,  of  them,  of  you,  etc. 
n  est  plus  jeune  que  men. 
He  is  younger  than  I. 

THEME  20. 

1.  I  speak  to  you  and  to  him.     2.  I  forgive  [both]  you  and  him, 

because  I  hope  (that)  you  will  behave^  better  for  the  future  {aTave- 

nir).     3.    The  governor  is  your  enemy  ;  if  you  apply^  to  him,  you 

will  never  succeed,*     4.  I  do  not  trust*  (to)  him,  but  I  should  trust 

(to)  his  brother.     5.  That  man  works  for  himself.     6.  Each  acts 

for  himself.     7.  K  you  do  this  for  him  and  for  her,  you  will  greatly 

oblige  me.     8.  One  ought  not"  [to]  speak  of  one's  self,  unless  {qu'^ 

with  modesty.     9.  That  man  is  too  proud ;  he  does  not  know  hint** 

self.     10.  The  moon  brought^  a  change'  of  weather. 

1.  Se  conduire.    2.  S^addrsser  h  qn.    3.  R6ussir.    4.  Se  fler  d  gn.  5.  On  M  doil 
pas.    6.  Amena.    7.  Changementt  m. 


n.    PAETICULAH  USE  OF  EN  AND   Y. 

1.  The  pronouns  it  and  them,  used  with  regard  to  inanimate 
objects,  are  rendered  by  en,  when  the  French  verb  requires  dt 
before  an  object  which  follows,  whatever  preposition  may  be 
U#ed  io  English.     Ex.:*- 


PEBSONAL  PRONOUNS.  259 

A-t-on  parU  de  mon  ouvrage  1     Qui,  on  en  a  parl^. 
Did  they  speak  of  my  work  ?     Yes,  they  spoke  of  it 
Vo*is  m'avez  rendu  service.     Je  voits  en  remercie. 
Yoa  have  done  me  a  service.    I  thank  you  for  it. 

2.  En  is  fiirtber  used  to  express  the  words  some  and  any,  when 
they  c&me  after  a  verb,  and  supply  the  place  of  an  antecedent  sub- 
stantive, as :  — 

Void  du  jambon ;  en  venx-tu  f    Donnez-m'en,  s'il  vous  plait. 

Here  is  ham,  will  you  have  some  ?    Give  me  some,  if  you  please. 

J*ai  des  noix,  en  voulez-vous  f     Donnez-m'en  irois. 

I  have  some  walnuts  ;  will  you  have  any  1     Give  me  three  of  them. 

Donnez-lui-en,  give  him  some. 

Offrez-leur-en,  offer  them  some. 

Note.  Observe  1,  that  when  used  with  another  personal  pronoun,  en  fol- 
lows that  pronoun ;  and  2,  that,  in  the  affirmative  Imperative,  moi  and  tan 
are  changed  into  m'  and  t'  before  en,  as :  donnez-m'^.'' 

3.  7"  stands  for  in  it,  into  it,  at  it,  to  it,  there,  and,  with  the 
verb  penser,  for  of  it,  about  it,  of  them.  Like  the  other  conjunc- 
tive pronouns,  it  is  placed  immediately  before  the  verb,  except  with 
the  affirmative  Imperative,  where  it  follows  it.*     Ex.:  — 

Votre  pire  est-U  au  jardin  f    Out,  U  y  est. 

Is  your  father  in  the  garden  ?    Yes,  he  is  in  it  (there). 

AUez-vous  au  spectacle  f    Non,  Monsieur,  je  n*y  vais  pas. 

Are  you  going  to  the  theatre?    No,  sir,  I  am  not. 

Y  pensez-vous  9    Je  n'y  pense  plus. 

Do  you  think  of  it  ?    I  do  no  more  think  of  it. 

Allez-y,  go  there. 

N*y  allez  pas,  do  not  go  there. 

Note.    Y  must  always  refer  to  an  antecedent. 


♦Except  moi  and  toi  which  follow  the  word  y,  with  the  affirmative  Imperative, 
as :  Conduinez-y-moi,  rends-y-toi  (go  there),  whereas  we  say :  Conduisez-nous-y. 
When  both  en  and  y  liappcn  to  be  governed  by  tlie  same  verb,  y  staads  l)efore  en. 
Ex.:  Je  vous  y  enporterai,  I  will  bring  yoa  some  there.  But  conduiscz-moi  IA\» 
prcfiBrabl»  to  oonduisez-y-moi. 


DC.     NEUVIEMB  LEQON. 
THEME  21. 

1.  We  speak  of  it.  2.  You  speak  of  them.  3.  I  am  sorry  foi 
it.  4.  I  have  heard  that  your  uncle  has  arrived,  and  I  am  very 
glad  of  it.  6.  She  spoke  to  him  of  it.  6.  Talk^  no  more  of  it,  for 
I  will  not  hear  of  it.  7.  Have  you  [any]  books  ?  8.  Yes,  I  have. 
9.  Have  you  bought  some  flowers?  10.  Yes,  I  have  bought  some. 
11.  Give  me  three  of  them,  if  you  please.  12.  You  have  bread, 
give  some  to  the  poor.  13.  I  thank  you  for  it.  14.  Do  not  thank 
me  for  it.  15.  I  study  that  language,^  I  know  its  rules  well. 
16.  Since'  you  have  no  apples  in  your  garden,  I  will  send  you 
some.  17.  If  I  had  money,  I  would  give  you  some.  18.  Send 
us  some.  19.  Send  me  none.  20.  Mr.  A.  is  a  true  friend ;  I 
shall  never  forget  the  services  which  I  have  received*  from  him. 
21.  Is  your  father  in  his  garden?  22.  Yes,  he  is  (in  it).  23. 
Do  you  agree'  to  it?  24.  Yes,  I  agree  to  it.  25.  Have  you^  just 
returned  from  the  country?  26.  No,  I  am  going  there.  27.  We 
shall  think  of  it.  28.  We  have  forced'  them  to  it.  29.  There  is 
a  ditch,"  take  care'  not  to  fall  into  it.  30.  Our  orchard'^  is  very 
fruitful,  we  see  all  sorts'^  of  fruits  in  it.  31.  It  is  {c^esC)  a  good 
book,  one  (on)  reads  excellent  things  in  it. 

1.  Parlor.   2.  Langue^t.   3.  Puisque.   4.  Eegu.   5.  Consentir.   6.  Revenez-v<m»1 
7,  Forcis.   i,  Un/ossi,    9.  Prtntz  garde.    10.  Verger.    11.  Toutes  sortea  de. 


m.    THE  SUPPLYING  PRONOUNS  LE,  LA,  LES. 

1.  The  pronouns  le,  la,  les  are  used  in  French  to  supply  the 
place  of  an  antecedent  substantive  or  adjective,  or  of  a  phrase.  la 
such  case,  their  equivalent  in  English  is  so  or  it,  either  expressed  oi 
understood. 

2.  When  U  refers  to  a  noun  with  the  definite  article  or  possessive 
adjective,  it  takes  the  gender  and  number  of  that  noun.     Ex. :  — 

Etes-vous  la  mere  de  ces  en/ants.     Oai,  j'e  la  sitis. 
Are  you  the  mother  of  these  children  ?     Yes,  I  am. 
MesdemoiseUes,  ites-vovs  les  nieces  de  Madame  B,  t    (hu,  Madame,  nous  les 
tommes 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS.  261 

Ladies,  are  yon  Mrs.  B.'s  nieces  ?    Yes,  madame,  we  are. 
Sont-ce  la  vos  domestiques  ?     Oui,  ce  les  sont. 
Are  those  your  servants  1     Yes,  they  are. 
Sont-ce  la  vos  gants  nerifs  f    Non,  ce  ne  les  sont  pas. 
Are  those  your  new  gloves  1    No,  they  are  not. 

3.  But  when  le  supplies  the  place  of  an  adjective,  of  a  iHmn' 
died  adjectively,  or  of  a  phrase,  it  remains  unchanged.     Ex.  :  — 

Depuis  quand  etes-vous  maladet    Jt  le  suis  depuis  huit  jours. 
How  long  have  you  been  ill  1    I  have  been  (so)  these  eight  days 
Ces  dames  sont-eUes  marines  f     Oui,  elles  le  sont 
Are  these  ladies  mamed  1     Yes,  they  are  (it  or  so). 
Etes-vous  clirAiens  f     Oui,  nous  le  sommes. 
Are  you  Christians  ?     Yes,  we  are. 
n  le  /era,  s'U  le  peut,  he  will  do  it,  if  he  can. 

Note.  Le,  la,  les  must  be  used  (§  2)  when  the  adjectire  is  used  substan- 
tively, as : 
Mademoiselle,  etes-vous  la  malade  f     Oui,  je  la  suis. 
Miss,  are  you  the  sick,  onel     Yes,  I  am  (she). 

4.  Le  should  also  be  inserted  in  sentences  containing  a  compare' 
ti-e,  after  que  —  ne,  as: 

n  est  maintenant  plus  actif  qu'il  ne  V^ait  auparavarU. 
He  is  now  more  active  than  he  was  before. 
Elle  est  moins  riche  qu'on  ne  le  pense. 
She  is  not  so  rich  as  one  would  think. 

THEME  22. 

1.  Is  that  your  book  ?  2.  Yes,  it  is.  3.  Are  those  your  books  t 
4.  Yes,  they  are.  5.  Are  you  the  mistress  of  the  house  ?  6.  No, 
I  am  not.  7.  Are  these  boys  the  pupils  of  Mr.  M.  ?  8.  Yes,  they 
are.  9.  Are  you  my  friend's  sisters?  10.  Yes,  we  are.  11.  You 
want  some  men  of  good  will?^  .12.  Wo  are  all  so.  13.  Are  these 
your  horses?  14.  Yes,  they  are.  15.  Are  the  brothers  rich?  16. 
No,  they  are  not.  17.  Are  the  house  and  garden  large?  18. 
Yes,  they  are.  19.  Is  not  this  pretty  girl  your  gardoncr*8 
daughter?  20.  Yes,  madam,  she  is.  21.  We  need^  only  think 
ourselves  happy,  and  wo  shall  be  so.  22.  Young  ladies,  are  yon 
English?    23.  Yes,  we  are.    24.  Are  you  physicians  ?    25    Yes, 


262  IX.      NEUYIEME  LEgON. 

ar,  we  are.  26.  Are  you  the  physicians?  27.  Yes,  sir,  we  are. 
28.  Is  ho  sad? 3  29.  No,  he  is  not.  30.  Is  she  rich?  31.  Yes, 
Bhe  is.  32.  Are  those  gentlemen  brothers?  33.  Yes,  they  are. 
34.  Arc  you  still  ray  friend  ?  35.  Yes,  I  am.  36.  Are  you  the 
sister  of  Mrs.  A.  ?  37.  Yes,  I  am.  38.  Are  you  the  ladies  whom 
my  mother  expects?  39.  Yes,  we  are  40.  Because  she  is  pretty, 
she  must  not  imagine*  that  she  will  Jways  be  so.  41.  We  were 
embarrassed,'  and  are  so  yet  (encore).  42.  Children  ought  to 
{daivent)  apply'  themselves  to  then*  studies  as  much  as  they  can. 

1.  De  bonne  volonti.    2.  Nous  n'avons  qu'A  ncnis  croire.    8.  Triste.    4,  H  ne/aut 
JHU  qu'elU  a'imagine.    5.  Embarraasta,    6.  S^appliquer. 


READING  LESSON. 
L'^lipDANT.     (Continuation.) 

L'^lephant  vit  (lives)  au  delk  de  cent  cinquante  ans,  quand  fl 
est  libre.  Ces  animaux  marchent  ordinairement  de  compagnie ;  le 
plus  age  conduit  la  troupe  ;  le  second  d'age  marche  le  dernier ;  les 
jeunes  et  les  femelles  sont  au  milieu  des  autres ;  les  meres  portent 
leurs  petits  et  les  tiennent  embra.sses  de  leurs  trompes. 

L'elephant  dompte^  est  le  plus  doux  et  le  plus  patient  de  tous 
les  animaux.  II  s'attache  k  celui  qui  le  soigne ;  ^  il  le  caresse,  et 
semble  deviner*  tout  ce  qui  pent  lui  plaire.  En  peu  de  temps  il 
comprend  les  signes  et  meme  la  parole.  II  regoit  les  ordros  de  son 
maitro  avec  attention  et  les  execute  avec  prudence.  Un  Elephant 
dcmestique  rend  autant  de  service  que  six  bons  chevaux. 

lis  ne  cassent  rien  de  ce  qu'on  leur  conSe.  lis  posent  doucement 
les  paquets  qu'ils  portent,  et  les  rangent  dans  Tendroit*  qu'on  leur 
montre,  lis  essaient  avec  leurs  trompes  flexibles,  s'ils  sont  bien  si- 
tues,  et  quand  un  tonneau"  commence  k  rouler,  ils  vont  d'eux-mdmea 
chcrcher  des  picrres  pour  I'etablh:  solidemcnt. 

1,  To  t&me.   2.  To  take  oare.   8.  To  guess.   4.  Place.   6,  Cask. 


INTERROGATIVE  PRONOtTNS. 


263 


CONVERSATION. 


Quel  kga  r^lepbant  atteint-il  ? 
8e  laisse-tril  dompter  V 

L'elepLant  esfc-il  intelligent  V 
Se  rend-il  utile  aux  hommes  ? 


Les  ^It^phants  sont-ils  maladroits 
{atokward)  ? 

Que   font-ils  quand  un   tonneau 
commence  k  rouler  ? 


Hvit  au  dela  de  150  ans. 
Oui;  et  quaud  il  est  dompt^,  il 

est  le  plus  dous  do  tous  lea 

animaux. 
Tres-intelligent ;    il    comprend 

les  signes  et  raeme  la  parole. 
Un  seul  elephant  rend  autant 

de  service  que  six  bons  che- 

vaux. 
Non,  pas  du  tout;  ils  ne  cas- 

sent  rien  do  ce  qu'on  leur 

confie. 
lis   vont  chorcher  des  pierree 

pour  r^tablir  solidement. 


X.    DIXifiME    LEgON. 


INTERROGATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

See  Part  I.,  Lesson  xxt. 

In  regard  to  the  interrogative  pronouns  lequelf  quit  qut.*  and  qitoif  the 
following  observations  are  to  be  made  — 

1.  Lequel,  which?  always  refjrs  to  some  noun  either  nrecoding 
or  immediately  following,  and  a^ees  with  it  in  gender  and  number. 
Ex  :  — 

Void  'Jeux  routes,  laquelle  pren  frvs-vous  f 
Here  arc  two  routes ;  which  will  you  take  1 
J^esc/iicls  dt  oos  souliers  sont  d€chir€s  f 
Which  of  your  shoes  are  worn  out  'i 


264  X.      DIXIEME  LEgON. 

Note.  The  inlerrogativc  adjective  what  joined  to  a  noun  is  always  ex- 
pressed by  quel,  f.  quelle.     Ex. :  — 

What  book  do  you  read  ?  qud  Hire  lisez-vous  f 
What  are  your  reasons  ?  quelles  sotit  vos  raisons  f 

2.  The  interrogative  pronouns  who  ?  whose  ?  to  whom  ?  whom  ? 
ire  expressed  by  qui  ?  de  qui  ?  (not  dont  ?  )  a  qui  ?  and  for  the 
objective  qui  ?  {que  as  an  interrogative  means  what,  never  whom). 
Ex.  :  — 

Who  comes  1  qui  vient  f 

Of  whom  do  you  speak  ?  de  qui  parlez-vous  t 

Whom  do  you  seek  ?  qui  cherchez-vous  f 

3.  Instead  of  the  simple  qui  ?  the  form  qui  est-ce  qui,  Tvho  ?  is 
often  used  for  the  Nom.,  and  qui  est-ce  que,  whom?  for  the  Dir. 
Obj.     Ex. :  — 

Qmi  est<e  qui  vient  la,  who  comes  there  ? 

Qui  e$t-ce  que  vous  cherchez,  whom  are  you  looking  for  ? 

4.  The  same  is  the  case  with  que  ?  for  which  qu' est-ce  qui  ?  is 

often  used  in  the  Nom.,  and  qu' est-ce  que?  in  the  Dir.  Obj.     The 

latter  has  a  still  stronger  form,  qu' est-ce  qite  c'est  que  .  .  .  ?     This 

compound  form  is  generally  used  in  the  expression  what  is  that  f 

and  also  when  a  simple  noun  follows,  e.  g. :  — 

Qu'est-ce  que  cela  f  7     i      •     ,      - 

n  >  ^  ,    ,  ;    -  ^  what  IS  that? 

Qu  est-ce  que  c  est  que  cela  ?  y 

Qu'est-ce  que  la  vie?  )     ,,.,.-« 

^  ,  ,  1      .  ^y  what  IS  hfe  1 

Qu  est<e  que  c  est  que  la  vie  f  ) 

6.  The  pupil  muF^y  be  careful,  however,  not  to  confound  qui  est- 
ce  qui,  who  V  with  ^u' est-ce  qui,  what  ?  The  latter  is  used  for  the 
wanting  Nominative  of  tho  conjunctive  pronoun  que.     We  say :  — 

___     ,         „.    s  1         «  7  <7t"  est-ce  qui  vous  a  qffens^t 
Who  has  ofiendcd  you  ?  M  .  Vr     ^o 

•'         )  qui  vous  a  offens€f 

Whereas : 

What  ( Nom.)  raak^  you  so  sad ? 

Qu'est-ce  qui  vousjend  si  triste  ? 

rm.  .  ,  .        ,        « 7  qu'est-ce  que  vous  faites  Ui  t 

What  are  you  domg  there  1  y  '       .  .  ,. ;: 

)  que  faites  vous  la  f 

What  is  the  new»t  I  »"?"-'-'■' t,"°"T'         . 
>  qWest-ce  qu  U  y  a  de  nouveau  S 


IKTERROGATIYB  PRONOUNS.  266 

6.  Que,  what  ?  as  the  conjunctive  foiin,  can  only  be  used  before 
the  verb  or  in  close  connection  with  it;  but  the  disjunctive  form 
quoi,  what  ?  stands  either  alone  or  after  a  preposition,  or  is  even 
used  as  an  interjection.     Ex. :  — 

Voxis  cherchez  quelque  chose ;  quoi  done  f 
You  are  looking  for  something;  what  is  it! 
A  quoi  pense-t-il,  of  what  does  he  think  ? 
De  quoi  parle-t-on,  of  what  do  people  talk  ? 
Quoi  I  votis  eies  mari€!  what    you  are  married  I 
Note.    Quoi  is  also  used  instead  of  qu'y  a-t-il,  as :  — 
Quoi  de  plus  magnijique  qu'une  belle  nuit  d'€l€l   (instead  of  qu*y  a-t-il  de 
plus  magnijique  ! ) 
What  is  there  more  splendid  than  a  beautiful  summer's  night  1 

7.  In  autithetical  questions  with  or  (as  you  or  /?),  the  French 
usage  departs  very  widely  from  the  English,  inasmuch  as  the  con- 
trasted persons  or  objects,  instead  of  standing  in  the  Nominative 
as  in  English,  usually  follow  de,     Ex.  :^ 

Qui  de  ixnis  ou  de  moi  reinportera  le  prix  f 

Who  will  lake  the  prize,  you  or  I  ? 

Qui  a  €t€  le  plus  a}>}>itqu€  de  toi  ou  d'Emile  T  or 

Qui  de  toi  ou  d'Emile  a  A^  le  plus  aj>pliqu€f 

Who  has  been  the  most  diligent,  you  or  Emile? 

8.  De  may  be  omitted,  liowever,  when  two  or  more  om's  occur, 
and  also  when  de  or  des  with  lequel  precedes.     Ex. :  — 

L/iquelle  de^  deux  nations  ^ait  la  plus  vertueuse,  les  Grecs  ou  les  Romains  f 
Which  of  the  two  nations  was  the  more  virtuous,  the  Greeks  or  the 
Romans  ? 

THEIIE  23. 

1.  Which  of  your  brothers  is  married  ?  2.  "Which  of  your  sisters 
has  (est)  gone  to  lOngland  ?  3.  Of  all  these  pictures,  which  should 
you  like  best  ?  *  4.  Which  of  your  daughters  learns  Italian  ?  *  5. 
Here  are  two  pencils  ;  which  will  you  take  ?  6.  What  countries 
did  Alexander  the  Great  con(iuer  ? '  7.  What  are  your  terms  ?  *  8. 
Who  goes  there  ?  9.  To  whom  do  you  speak  ?  10.  For  whom  does 
a  miser*  hoard  '^  riclies  ? '  11.  "Who  will  be  bold  ^  euouirh  to  attack 
turn  i'  12.  Who  are  these  women  ?  13.  Whose  ^  gloves  are  these  ? 


266  X.     DiXIEME  LE?OlI. 

14.  Here  are  two  grammars ;  to  which  do  you  give  the  preferenw  1 
15  Who  sustains^''  this  globe  in  the  air?  16.  What  is  more  pleas- 
ant than  to  do  good?"  17.  What  is  human  life?  18.  What 
should  prevent^^  your  father  from  buying  (d'acheter)  this  house 'r 
19.  A  little  more  fame,^^  a  little  more  wealth,  —  what  does  all  this 
signify?"  20.  What  are  you  speaking  of?  21.  Of  what  do  you 
accuse  me  ?  22.  On  {sur)  what  will  you  interrogate"  him  ?  23. 
What !  Charles  has  been  arrested  !  ^®  24.  Which  of  you  has  been 
sick,  Emily  or  Emma  ?  25.  Which  was  the  greatest  man,  Alexan- 
der, Caesar,  or  Napoleon  the  First  ? 

1.  Le  mieux.  2.  Put  the  article.  3.  Put  has  conquered,  a  conquis.  4.  CondUi(m, 
f.  5.  L'avare,  m.  6.  Amasser.  7.  Richesse.  8.  Ilardi.  9.  See  p  2&1,  $  2,  2,  A  qui, 
10.  SoxUenir.  11.  Du  bien.  12.  Empecher.  13.  Gloire.  M.  Signifler.  15.  Inter- 
Toger.    16.  Arriti. 


BEADING  LESSON.* 
SEETILIUS   SB  Dl^FEND  DEVANT  LB  PEUPLB. 

"  Si  Ton  m'a  fait  venir  ici  pour  me  demander  compte^  de  ce  qui 
s*est  pass^  dans  la  demiere  bataille  ou  je  commandais,  je  suis  pr§t 
k  vous  en  instruire ;  mais  si  ce  n'est  qu'un  pretexte  pour  me  faire 
p^rir,  comme  je  le  soup^onne,*  dpargnez-moi*  des  paroles  inutiles : 
voila  mon  corps  et  ma  vie  que  je  vous  abandonne,  vous  pouvez  en 
disposer. 

**Quel  Gst  done  mon  crime?  Quelle  faute  ai-je  coramise  jus- 
qu'ici?  On  m'accuse  d 'avoir  perdu  beaucoup  de  monde  dans  lo  der- 
nier combat.  Mais  quel  est  le  general  qui  puisse  livrer  des  ba- 
tailles  centre  une  nation  agucrrie,*  qui  se  defend  courageusement, 
sans  qu'il  y  ait  de  part  et  d'autre*  du  sang  de  repandu  ?  Quelle  di- 
vinity s'est  engag^e  envers  le  peuple  remain,  h  lui  faire  remporter 
des  victoires  sans  aucune  perte  ?  ®  A  qui  fera-t-on  croire  que  la 
gloire  s'acquiert'  autrement  que  par  de  grands  perils  ?    J'en  suis 

*  The  Conyersation  ou  this  Beading  Lesson  will  be  found  at  the  end  of  the  fol- 
lowing lesson, 


RELATIVE   PRONOUNS.  267 

Venn  aux  mains  avec  des  troupes  plus  nombreuses  que  celles  que 
vous  m'aviez  confiees ;  j'ai  mis  en  deroute  leiu-s  l(:gions,  qui,  k  la 
fin,  oat  pris  la  foite.  Que  me  rcstait-il  a  faire  ?  Qui  d'entre  vous 
eiit  pu  se  refuser  ^  la  victoire  qui  marchait  devant  moi  ?  Etait-il 
merae®  en  mon  pouvoir  do  retenir  vos  soldats,  que  leur  coui'age  eni- 
portait,  et  qui  poursuivaient  avec  ardeur  un  ennemi  eflfray^  ?  Que 
dis-je?  Si  j'avais  fait  sonner*  la  retraite,  si  j'avais  ramen^  nog 
soldats  dans  leur  camp,  de  quoi  ne  m'accuserait-on  pas  aujourd'hui? 
Lequel  de  vos  tribuns  aurait  approuvr^  ma  conduite  ?  Ne  m'acou- 
Bcraient-ils  pas  d'intelligence  avec  les  ennerais  ?  " 

1.  Account.    2.  Suspect.    3.  Spare.  4.  Warlike.    6.  On  both  sides.    6.  Loss.    7. 
Can  be  gained.    8.  Even.    9.  To  sound. 


XI.    ONZIEME    LEgON. 


RELATIVE  PRONOUNS. 
(SeePartL,  L.  XXIV.) 

1.  The  relative  pronouns  who,  which  and  that  are  rendered  by 
qui,  when  they  are  in  the  Nominative  case,  whether  they  refer  to 
persons  or  things,  as  :  — 

The  man  who  works,  I'homme  qui  travaille. 
The  pen  which  is  on  the  table. 
La  plume  qui  est  sur  la  table. 

2.  The  same  pronouns  when  in  the  Du-ect  Objective,  whom 
which,  that,  are  expressed  by  que,  as  :  — 

The  man  whom  you  know,  Vhomme  que  vous  connaissez. 

The  book  which  I  have  lost,  le  livre  que  j'ai  perdu. 

Note.  Sometimes,  however,  lequel  must  oe  employed  instead  of  qui  or 
que,  when  by  the  use  of  the  latter  an  ambij^uity  might  arise.  In  such  a 
rase  as  this  for  instance  :  Le  frert  de  Madame  Lefmiu  qui  habite  Paris, 
wfyare  two  persons  being  mentioned,  it  would  be  doubtful  wheth^  we  mean 


268  XI.    oirzifiirE  LEgoN. 

to  say  that  tlie  brother  or  the  lady  lives  in  Paris.    In  the  first  case,  vn 
must  say :  — 

Le  frere  de  Mad.  Leibeau  lequel  liahite  Paris, 
or  if  the  lady  is  meant : 

Le  frere  de  Mad.  Leheau  laquelle  or  qui  hahite  Paris. 
For  the  latter  of  the  two  persons  qui  can  generally  be  used. 

3.  When  the  relative  pronouns  whom  or  which  follow  a  prepobi- 
tion,  they  are  usually  expressed  by  qui'in  speaking  of  persona,* 
and  by  lequel  or  laquelle  (pi.  lesquels,  lesquelles)  in  speaking  of 
animals  and  things,  as  :  — 

The  little  boy  to  whom  I  give  the  book,  is  diligent. 

Le  petit  gargon  a  qui  je  donne  le  livre,  est  appliqu€. 

The  Englishman  with  whom  I  travelled. 

L' Anglais  avec  qui  j'ai  voijag€. 

The  glory  to  which  heroes  sacrifice,  etc. 

La  gloire  a  laquelle  les  h€ros  sacrijient,  etc. 

The  cane  with  which  he  struck  me,  etc. 

La  canne  avec  laquelle  ii  m'afrapp^,  etc. 

4.  The  relative  pronouns  whose,  of  whom  or  of  which  are  com- 
monly expressed  in  French  by  do?it,  both  for  persons  and  for  ob- 
jects, as  :  — 

The  Frenchman  whose  brother  arrived  yesterday. 
L>e  f'rangais  dont  le  frere  est.  arrive hier  (see  L.  III.,  12). 
I  have  seen  the  garden  of  which  you  speak. 
J^ai  vu  le  jardin  dont  i-ous  parlez. 

5.  Bui  lequel  must  be  employed  when  the  noun  wbich  followB 
whose  is  governed  by  a  preposition. 

We  can  consequently  say  :  — . 

The  man  whose  merits  are  known. 
L'homme  dont  les  m€rites  (Nom.)  sont  connus. 
The  author  whose  works  you  have  read. 


*  After  entre,  between,  and  parmi,  among,  we  must  always  write  lesquels  or  j9» 
ffU^Ues  whether  persons  or  thiii|;s  be  spoken  of. 


EELITITB  PRONOUNS.  269 

L'auteurdont  vous  avez  lu  lea  ouvrages  (Dir.  Obj.)«* 
But  we  must  say: 
The  man  of  whose  modesty  people  talk  so  much. 
L'homme  de  la  modcstie  duquel  on  parle  tant. 
The  friend  to  whose  honesty  I  have  trusted,  has  deceived  mo. 
L'ami  a  la  probity  duquel  je  me  suis  Ji€,  m'a  tromp€. 

0,  The  relative  pronouns  whom,  which,  and  that,  are  often  left 
out  in  English,  but  in  French  qui  and  que  are  never  omitted. 
Example :  — 

The  boy  I  saw  with  you  yesterday. 

Le  gargon  que  j'ai  vu  hier  avec  vous. 

I  shall  send  you  the  books  you  have  chosen. 

Je  vous  enverrai  Us  livres  que  vous  avez  choisis. 

THEME   24. 

1.  The  man  who  has  done  this  is  generally*  esteemed.  2.  The 
flocks*  which  graze'  in  those  meadows*  are  mine  (a  mot).  3.  The 
watch  which  I  had  is  broken.  4.  The  books  which  you  read  are  good, 
but  difficult*  to  be  understood.  5.  The  sister  of  my  friend  who  ar- 
rived here  last  week,  is  very  ill.  6.  The  physician's  daughter  of 
whom  I  spoke  to  you  the  other  day,  has  married  ]Mr.  B.  7.  A  bird 
whose  wings  have  been  clipped,*  cannot  fly  any  more.  8.  Bees' 
among  which  we  find  such  admu-able  order,®  are  very  useful  insects. 
9.  The  professor*  to  whom  I  write,  is  very  learned.  10.  The  man 
you  respect  is  my  friend.  11.  Idleness  is  a  vice  to  which  young 
people  are  much  inclined.  12.  The  country  we  inhabit ^°  is  beauti- 
fill  and  fruitful.  13.  The  reasons  upon  which  I  rely,^^  are  unan- 
swerable.** 14.  Mr.  B.  is  a  man  to  whose  discretion  I  dare"  not 
trust.  15.  He  who  gets"  riches,  knows  not  for  whom  he  gets 
them.  IG.  The  daughter  of  Minos  gave  a  thread"  to  Theseus,^®  by 
means  (au  moyen)  of  which  he  went  out^  of  the  labyrinth 
{le  labyrinthe), 

♦Observe  here  the  position  of  the  nonn.  If  the  word  depending;  upon  dont  if  • 
Direct  Ot^ective,  it  amat  8*.eud  qfter  the  active  verl). 


270 


XI.      ONZIEME    LEgON. 


I.  Giniralement.  2.  Troupeau,  m.  3.  Paitre,  fsee  p.  178,  No.  25).  4.  PratrtA 
r.  5.  Difflciles  h  comprendre.  6.  Rognis.  7.  Us  abellles.  8.  Ordre,  ra.  9  Pro- 
fesseur.  10.  Habiter.  n.  Je  me  fonde.  12.  Sans  replique.  IZ.  Je  n^ose  me  fier. 
H.  Amasser.    15.  Un  fil.    16.  TAes^.    17.  Sortir. 

7.  ^woe,  what,  is  also  used  as  a  relative,  but  only  in  connectioD 
with  a  preposition.  It  is  generally  used  absolutely;  and  when 
the  noun  to  which  it  refers  has  been  expressed  the  use  of  hquel^ 
laquelle,  &c.,  is  preferable. 

Savez-voiis  a  quoi  il  s'ocatpe  a  present  f 
Do  you  know  what  he  busies  himself  with  now  ? 
Apres  quoi,  after  which.     Sans  quoi,  otherwise. 
C  est  pour  quoi,  on  that  account,  therefore. 

8.  The  adverbs  of  place  oil,  cCou  and  par  ©«,  are  also  ofien 
employed  instead  of  the  relative  pronouns  dans  lequel^  duquely  par 
lequel,  etc.,  when  things  are  spoken  of,  as:  — 

L'embarras  oil  (for  dans  lequel)  se  trouve  man  pere. 
The  embarrassment  in  which  my  father  finds  himself. 
Le  village  par  oil  (for  par  lequel)  nous  venons  de  passer. 
The  village  through  which  we  have  just  passed. 

9.  The  correlative  pronouns  he  who,  fem.  she  who,  pi.  they  wht 
or  those  who,  are  rendered  by  celui  qui,  fem.  celle  qui,  pi.  masc. 
ceux  qui,  pi.  fem.  celles  qui.     Ex.;  — 

He  who  is  contented,  is  happy. 

Cdui  qui  est  content  est  heureux. 

They  (or  those)  who  are  discontented,  are  unhappy. 

Ceux  qui  sont  m€contents,  sont  malheureux. 

Note  1.  Both  or  either  may  vary  according  to  the  verb  they  depend  oai, 
{cdui  qui,  celui  que,  etc. )  as  :  — 

I  shall  give  it  to  him  whom  I  love  most 

Je  le  donnerai  a  cdui  que  j'aime  le  mieux. 

Note  2.  In  French  both  pronouns  must  be  joined,  and  no  inversion  cac 
take  place  as  in  English.    Ex.:  — 

He  is  a  bad  citizen  who  rebels  against  his  country. 

Cdui  qui  se  revoke  contre  sa  patrie  est  un  mauvais  citoyen. 

JO.  The  English  what,  when  not  an  interro^tive  pronoun,  biit  a 


BELATIVE  PRONOUNS.  271 

ooraponnd  relative  in  the  sense  of  that  which,  is  translated  l)y  ce 
qui  for  the  Nominative,  ce  que  for  the  Direct  Objective,  and  by  ce 
dont,  when  the  verb  takes  the  preposition  de,  as :  — 

What  is  fine,  is  not  always  good. 
Ce  qui  est  beau  n'est  pas  tottjours  bon. 
I  shall  do  what  I  have  promised. 
Je  ferai  ce  que  j'ai  promis. 
I  have  sent  him  what  he  needed. 
Je  lui  ai  envoys  ce  dont  U  avail  besoin. 

11.  When  ce  qui,  ce  que  or  ce  dont  begins  the  sentence,  c^est 
must  be  placed  before  the  second  clause,  except  (as  in  the  first  sen- 
tence above)  when  an  adjective  or  a  participle  follows,  as :  — 

Ce  que  vous  pouvez  faire  de  mieux,  c'est  de  pariir  tout  de  suite. 
The  best  thing  for  you  to  do,  is  to  leave  immediately. 
Ce  qui  me  chagrine,  c'est  la  perte  de  mon  domestique. 
What  grieves  me,  is  the  loss  of  my  servant. 

12.  Proverbial  and  general  expressions  usually  commence  with  qui, 
whoever,  instead  of  celui  qui.     Ex.:  — 

Qui  court  deux  lievres,  n'en  prend  aucun. 

He  who  chases  two  hares  catches  none. 

Qiti  casse  les  verres,  les  paie. 

Who  (ever)  breaks  the  glasses  must  pay  for  them. 

Sauve  qui  peut  I  let  him  save  himself  who  can  I 

THEME  25. 

1.  This  is  the  object^  at  which  he  aims.*  2.  The  study  to  which 
I  am  devoted,*  gives  me  great  pleasure.  3.  Nature,  whose  beauty 
we  daily*  admire,  is  an  inexhaustible*  source  of  enjoyment*  for  us. 
4.  Your  pupil's  mother,  with  whom  I  was  speaking  yesterday, 
left'  this  morning.  5.  What  sort  of  a  book  is  that  in  which  you 
are  reading?  6.  It  is  a  Roman  History.  7.  There  is  nothing, 
upon  («)  which  I  think  more  frequently*  than  the  sad  fate'  of  my 
poor  friend.  8.  What  is  true  is  also  good.  9  Vu:tue  and  freedom  - 
are  the  conditions  without  which  we  cannot  be  happy.  10.  Is  the 
booae  in  which  you  live  on  the  highway?^     11.  No,  it  is  tolerably 


272  XI.      ONZIEME  LEgON. 

far"  from  it  (en).  12.  That  is  the  thing  about  which  1  would 
Bpeak  with  you.  13.  The  thing  the  miser  thinks  least  about  (a)  is 
to  aid^^  the  poor.  14.  That  is  the  thing  with  which  he  struck  me. 
15.  It  is  an  illness  to  the  progress  ^^  of  which  (§5)  one  cannot  ap- 
ply^* too  prompt  remedies.^*  16.  He  who  cannot  keep  a  secret,  is 
mcaj)able  of  governing.^*  17.  That  which  most  deserves  our  respect 
is  virtue.  18.  What  I  most  wish,  is  to  see  you  happy.  19.  What 
I  like  most,  is  to  be  alone. 

1.  Le  hut.  2.  Tendre.  3.  DivoiU.  4.  JoumeUement.  5.  Inipuisahle.  6.  I> 
plaisir.  7.  Est  partie.  8.  Souvent.  9.  Le  sort.  10.  La  route.  U.  Assez  ^loigni, 
12.  Assister.  13.  Progre»,  m,  14.  Apporter.  15.  De  trap  prompts  remedes.  10, 
De  gouvemer. 


READING  LESSON. 
SUITE   DE    "SERVILIUS." 

"Si  vog  enncmis  se  sont  rallies,  s'ils  ont  6t4>  soutcnus  par  un  corps 
de  troupes  qui  s'avan9ait  k  lour  secours ;  enfin,  s'il  a  fallu  recom- 
mencer  tout  de  nouveau  le  combat,  et  si,  dans  cette  derniere  action, 
j'ai  perdu  quclques  soldats,  n'est-ce  pas  le  sort^  ordinaire  de  la 
guerre  ?  Trouverez-vous  des  gdneraux  qui  veuillent  se  charger  du 
commandement  de  vos  armees,  h  condition  de  ramener  h  Rome  toua 
les  soldats  qui  en  seraient  sortis  sous  leur  conduite  ?  N'examinez 
done  point  si,  k  la  fin  d'une  bataille,  j'ai  perdu  quclques  soldats, 
mais  jugez  de  ma  conduite  par  ma  victoire. 

"S'il  est  vrai  que  j'ai  chasse^  les  ennemis  de  votre  territoire,  que 
je  leur  ai  tu^  beaucoup  de  monde  dans  deux  combats,  que  j'ai  forc^ 
les  debris^  de  leurs  armdes  de  s'enfermer  dans  leurs  places,*  que  j'ai 
enrichi  Rome  et  vos  soldats  du  butin*  qu'ils  ont  fait  dans  le  pays 
enncmi :  que  (let)  vos  tribuns  s'elevent,  et  qu'ils  me  reprochent  en 
quoi  j'ai  manque®  centre  les  devoirs'  d'un  bon  general. 

*'  Mais  ce  n'est  pas  ce  que  je  crains :  ces  accusations  iie  servent 
que  de  pr^texte  pour  pouvoir  exercer  iinpun(^mcnt  leur  haine®  et  leur 
animosite  centre  le  senat  et  centre  I'ordre  des  patriciens.  Fautril 
que  vous  ne  demandiez  jamais  rien  au  s^aat  qui  ne  soit  pr^udioiable 


BELATTTB  PBONOUNS.  273 

an  "bien  commtin  de  la  patrie,  et  que  vous  ne  lo  dcinandicz  que  pai 
des  seditions  ?  Si  un  s^nateur  ose*  vous  reprdscnter  Tinjustice  de 
vos  pretentions,  si  un  consul  ne  parle  pas  le  language  seditieux  de 
vos  tribuns ;  s'il  defend  avec  courage  la  souveraine  puissance  dont  il 
ost  revetu,  on  crie  au  tyran.*"  A  peine  est-il  sort!  do  charge,  qu'il 
se  trouvo  accabl^  d 'accusations.  C'est  ainsi  que,  par  votrc  injuste 
plebiscite,  vous  avez  ote  la  vie  k  Mendnius,  aussi  grand  capitaine 
quo  bon  citoyen.  Ne  devricz-vous  pas  mourir  de  honte  d' avoir  per- 
secute si  cruellement  le  fils  de  ce  Mendnius  Agrippa,  k  qui  vous 
devez  vos  tribuns  et  ce  pouvoir  qui  vous  rend  k  present  si  furieux? 

**  On  m'en  voudra  peut-etre  de  la  liberte  avec  laquelle  je  vous 
parle  dans  I'^tat  oil  je  me  trouve  k  present ;  mais  je  ne  crains  point 
la  mort :  condamnez-moi,  si  vous  I'osez ;  la  vie  ne  pent  etre  qu'k 
charge  k  un  g^ndral  qui  est  reduit  k  se  justifier  de  ses  victoircs. 
Apres  tout,  un  sort  pareil  k  celui  de  M^nenius  ne  pent  mo  desho- 
norcr." 

1.  The  fate.    2.  Driven  out.    8.  Remains.    4.  Fortresses.    6.  Booty.    0.  To  Udl. 
7.  Duties.    8.  Hatred.    0.  Dare.    10.  Behold  the  tyrant. 

CONVEESATION. 

Qui  etjut  Servilius  ?  Un  fameux  gdndral  romain. 

Pourquoi    I'a-t-on    fait    venir    k    Pour  se  justifier  dcvant  le  peu- 

Rome  V  pie. 

De  quoi  I'avait-on  accus^?  On  I'avait  accusd  d'avoir  perdu 

trop  do  soldats  dans  un  com- 
bat. 
Est-U   possible    de  livrcr   (une)     Non,  ce  n'est  pas  possible.     II 
bataille,   sans  qu'il  y    ait  du        doit  y  avoir  de  part  et  d'au- 
sang  de  r^pandu  ?  tre  du  sang  de  r^pandu. 

Peut-on    rem  porter    une   victoire    H  est  impossible  de  defairo  un 
sans  aucuuc  pcilc  ?  ennemi  nombreux  et  aguerri 

sans  pordre  du  monde. 
Comment  se  justifia  Servilius  du     II  rappcla  aux  Remains  qu'il 
reproche  qu'on  lui  faisait?  avait  remportd   une  victoire 

decisive,  et  mis  en  deroutse 
^  lee  hS^ojis  des  ennemLi. 


274 


Xn.      DOUZIEME  LEgON. 


Etait-il  en  son  pouvoir  de  retenir 
ses  soldats  ? 

Avaitril  manqu^  centre  les  devoirs 
d'un  bon  general? 

Si  Servilius  avait  fait  sonner  la 
retraite,  de  quoi  raurait-on  ac- 
cuse? 

Quels  services  avait-il  rendus  k 
(to)  Rome? 


Qnand  un  senateur  etait  sorti  de 

charge,  que  faisaient  les  tribuns 

du  peuple  ? 
Quel    exemple    dMnjustice     leur 

reprocha-t-il  ? 
Servilius  s'uttendaitril  k  un   sort 

semblable  k  celui  deM^ndnius? 


Non,  lour  courtgo  les  empoi'tait^ 
et  ils  poursuivaient  avec  ar- 
deur  rennerai  eflfray^. 

Non,  on  ne  lui  put  rien  ro- 
procher. 

Les  tribuns  du  peuple  I'auraient 
accuse  d' intelligence  avec  les 
ennemis. 

II  avait  chass^  les  ennemis  du 
territoire  romain  et  enrichi 
Rome  du  butin  qu'Ll  rappoi> 
tait  du  pays  enncmi. 

Us  I'accablaient  d' accusations. 


Celui  de  Men^nius. 

Oui,  mais  jl  dit  qu'un  sort  pa^ 
reil  a  celui  de  Menenius  n€ 
pourrait  le  deshonorer. 


XII.     DOUZIEME    LE(?ON 


INDEFINITE   PRONOUNS. 

In  regard  to  the  indefinite  pronouns  treated  of  in  Lesson  XXIX.,  Part 
L,  the  following  peculiarities  are  to  be  observed:  — 

1.  The  word  on  derived  from  homme,  man  (Latin  homo),  serves 
to  render  all  vague  and  general  repcirts  expressed  in  English  by  they 
say,  people  sar,  it  is  said,  we  say,  etc.  The  verb  which  follows  L- 
always  in  the  third  person  singular,  as ;  — 


INDEPINITB  PRONOUNS.  27^ 

People  say,  it  is  said,  on  dit. 

One  cannot  have  everything,  on  ne  pent  pets  avoir  taut. 

Note  1.  When  in  English  the  passive  voice  is  used  in  this  sen-ie,  the 
verb  must  be  changed  in  French  into  the  active  voice  with  on,  as :  — 

It  is  said,  on  dit.  It  is  believed,  on  croit. 

I  was  told,  071  m'a  dit.  I  am  deceived,  on  me  trompe. 

Lette-:8  have  been  received,  on  a  regu  des  lettres. 

Note  2.  For  the  cases  where  I'on  is  used  instead  of  on,  see  Lesson 
XXIX.,  2. 

2.  Chacun,  e,  each,  has  for  the  English  his,  her,  or  tte,  which 
follows  it,  son,  sa,  ses,  and  leur,  leurs,  for  their,  as :  — 

Put  these  books  each  in  its  place. 

Remettez  ces  litres  chacun  a  sa  place. 

The  judges  have  given  sentence  each  according  to  his  conscienoe. 

Les  juges  ont  opine's  chacun  selon  sa  conscience. 

The  bees  build  each  their  cells. 
'  Les  abeilles  bdtissent  chacune  leur  cellule. 

When  chacun  means  every  one,  everybody  (including  all),  it  is  always  mas- 
culine. Example  :  Chacun  a  son  tour.  But  when  used  relatively,  i.  o.,  in 
reference  to  a  part  of  mankind,  it  may  be  feminine.  Example :  Cfiacune 
de  nous  (/emmes)  se  pr€lendait  sup&ieure  aux  autres. 

3.  Aucun,  per  Sonne,  and  rien  do  not  require  ne  before  the  verb, 
in  a  sentence  interrogative  or  of  doubt :  aiicun  then  stands  for  any, 
personne  for  anybody,  and  rien  for  anything.     Ex.  :  — 

Je  ne  crois  pas  qu'il  y  ait  aucun  homme  sans  d€faut. 

I  do  not  think  there  is  any  man  without  a  fault. 

Je  doute  qu'il  y  ait  rien  de  plus  beau. 

I  doubt  whether  there  is  anything  more  beautiful. 

Note.  Aucun  and  nul  are  not  used  in  the  plural,  except  before  nouns 
which  have  no  singular,  or  which  are  used  in  a  different  sense  in  the 
plural. 

4.  When,  however,  these  three  pronouns  serve  to  answer  a  ques- 
tion without  repeating  the  verb  used  by  the  inquirer,  they  retain 
their  negative  meaning,  as :  — 

Qu'avez  vous  f  Rien.  Rien  du  tout. 

What  19  the  matter  with  yon  ?  Nothing.  Nothing  at  alL 

5.  None,  not  one,  are  rendered  by  attcun  ne  and  pas  un  ne. 
lixampleB :  — 


276  xn.    DOUzifiMB  le^on. 

None  of  you  were  there,  attcun  de  vous  n'y  €tait. 

I  have  four  sisters ;  none  (not  one)  of  them  ig  maxried. 

J^ai  quatre  soeurs,  aucune  or  pas  une  n'est  mari€e. 

6.  Somebody,  some  one,  anybody,  and  any  one,  are  ezpressed  by 
quelqu^un  singular  and  masculine.     Ex.  :  — 

Somebody  told  me  so,  quelqu'un  me  I'a  dit. 

Do  you  know  any  one  here  ?  Connaissez-votts  quelqu'un  id  f 

7.  La  plupart,  most,  is  properly  a  collective  noun,  and  like  most 
other  collective  nouns  takes  the  plural  after  it.  This  requires  the 
verb  and  attribute  which  follow  to  be  put  in  the  plural.     Ex. :  — 

La  plupart  de  ces  pommes  ne  sont  pas  encore  mures. 
Most  of  these  apples  are  not  yet  ripe. 

8.  Another  is  usually  expressed  by  un  autre,  Bud  others  (Nom 
and  Direct  Obj.)  by  d^autres  or  les  autres.     Ex. :  — 

Another  would  not  have  acted  so. 

Un  autre  n'aurait  pas  agi  ainsi. 

Charity  is  contented  that  others  be  preferred. 

La  charity  est  contente  que  les  autres  soient  pT(f€r€s. 

Buy  some  others,  achetez-en  d'autres. 

9.  AiUrui,  others,  only  applies  to  persons ;  it  is,  however,  also 
taken  as  a  singular  in  the  sense  of  another.  It  is  employed  only 
after  a  preposition.  Consequently,  when  in  English  the  indefinite 
pronoun  others  occurs  in  the  Nom.  or  Dir.  Obj.,  it  must  not  be 
translated  by  autrui,  but  by  d'autres  or  les  autres  (§  8).     Ex. :  — 

Charity  rejoices  in  the  happiness  of  others. 

La  charity  se  r€jouit  da  bonheur  d'autrui. 

Attendez  d'autrui  ce  que  vous  faites  a  autrui. 

Expect  from  others  the  same  treatment  which  you  give  them. 

10.  When,  however,  the  verb  in  the  latter  clause  governs  the  Dir 
Obj.,  en  is  used  instead  of  sow  or  ses.     Ex.:  — 

Souvent  nous  bldmons  les  d€fauts  d'autrui  sans  en  reconnaitre  les  bonnes  quor 
UtA  (without  acknowledging  their  good  ([ualities). 

11.  Tei  \uiti  two  significadons :  wch  and  manjf  a  (man).    In  the 


UTOEFINITB  PRONOUlfS.  277 

fiwiner,  it  is  an  adjective  and  agrees  with  its  noun,  in  the  latter 
it  is  often  a  pronoun,  i.  e.  is  used  without  a  substantive.     Ex. :  — 

Telle  €tait  la  difficult  du  terrain  que,  etc. 

8ach  was  the  difficulty  of  the  ground,  etc. 

Tel  park  de  choses  qu'il  n'entend  pas. 

Manj  a  man  speaks  of  things  which  he  does  not  anderstand. 

12.  Such  a  must  be  rendered  by  un  tel,  une  teUe.     Ex.:  — 

Vn  id  komme,  such  a  man. 
Une  telle  femine,  such  a  woman. 

Un  tcl  has  also  the  meaning  of  so  and  so,  as  :  — 

Chez  Monsieur  un  tel ;  Madame  une  telle. 

13.  Tel  que  has  the  meaning  such  as  or  jmt  (W,  and  agrees  in 
gender  and  number  with  the  noun  to  which  it  refers.     Ex.: — 

Telles  que  vous  les  voyez,  such  as  you  see  them  (fern.). 

14.  Notice  also  the  expression  :  U  n^y  a  rien  de  tel  que  ...  or 
il  n'est  rien  tel  que  .  .  .,  there  is  nothing  Uke.     Ex.:  — 

72  n'y  a  rien  de  tel  que  d^avoir  une  bonne  conscience. 
There  is  nothing  like  having  a  good  conscience. 

THEilE  25. 

1.  They  speak  of  peace.  2.  People  are  not  always  fortunate. 
3.  French  is  spoken  here.  4.  The  invention  of  gunpowder  is  air 
tributed^  to  to  Berthold  Schwarz  of  Friburg.*  5.  It  is  said  that 
the  queen  is  in  London.  6.  Everybody  has  his  faults.  7.  What 
is  the  price  of  each  of  those  medals?'  8.  My  children  have  each  a 
good  place.  9.  Every  one  has  his  [own]  manner  of  thinking*  and 
acting.  10.  I  do  not  know  any  of  his  friends.  11.  Would  any- 
body dare"  dcny^  it?  12.  None  of  the  judges  were  against  you. 
13.  Of  all  the  nations  of  the  earth,  there  is  none  (not  one)  but  has 
(qui  n'ait)  an  idea'  of  God.  14.  I  expect  somebody.  15.  Those 
apples  are  fine,  I  will  take  some.  16.  When  we  are  in  (en)  town, 
we  have  almost  eveiy  day  somebody  to  dine®  with  ua.  17.  I  have 
lo6t  my  stick,  I  must  buy  another.     18.  Most  of  my  books  an 


278  Xm.      TREIZlfiME  LEgON- 

ncw.  19.  Do  not  speak  ill  {maT)  of  others.  20.  Do  not  nnto  (ff) 
others  what  thou  wouldst  not  they  should^  do  unto  thee.  21.  Many 
a  man  sows^"  who  does  not  reap."  22.  There  is  nothing  like  being 
{que  d'etre)  an  honest  man.  23.  You  must  take  them  such  as 
tlioy  are. 

1.    Attribuer.     2    Fribourg.    3.    Mddaille,f.    i.  De  penser  et  (Pagir.    5.  Oai»r 
6.  Nier.    7,  Idie,t    8.  A  diner.    0.  QuHls  te  fissent  <k  toimime.    10.  Szmer.    1 
lUcoUer. 


XIII.     TREIZIEME    LE9ON 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS,  CONTINUED. 

1.  L^un  et  Vaittre,  fem.  Pune  et  Vautre  (plur.  les  uns  et  les  au- 
tres,  fem.  les  unes  et  les  autres),  both.  These  pronouns  agree  in 
gender  and  number  with  the  noun  to  which  they  refer ;  if  they  are 
preceded  by  a  preposition  in  English,  that  preposition  must  be  re- 
peated in  French  before  each  part.     Ex.:  — 

Both  are  gone,  I'un  et  Vartfre  sont  partis, 

I  will  do  it  for  them  both. 

Je  le  ferai  pour  I'un  et  pour  Vautre. 

Note  1.  When  in  English  the  word  hoth  is  followed  bja  nonh,  it  is  ren- 
dered in  French  by  les  deux.     Ex.:  — 

I  use  both  hands,  je  me  sers  des  deux  mains. 

Note  2.  Doth  followed  by  and  is  a  conjunction  and  is  commonly  omit- 
ted in  French,  as  :  — 

She  is  both  handsome  and  rich,  elle  est  belle  et  ricke. 

2.  L'un  6u  Pautre,  fem.  Pune  ou  Vautre,  eitker,  also  requires 
the  repetition  of  the  preposition,  as:  — 

I  will  do  it  for  either. 

Jg  le  ferai  poui  Vun  ou  pour  Vautre. 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS.  279 

3.  I^i  Tun  ni  V autre,  fem.  ni  Vune  ni  V autre,  neither,  requires 
nc  before  the  verb,  as  :  — 

Neither  has  obtained  the  prize. 

Ni  I'un  ni  C autre  n'a  gagng  le  prix. 

I  will  do  it  for  neither  of  them  (fern.), 

Je  ne  le  ferai  ni  pour  I'une  ni  pour  I'autre. 

4.  L'un  r autre,  fom.  Vune  V autre  (plur.  les  uns  les  autres,  fom 
Ics  uncs  les  autres),  one  another,  each  other.  The  first  of  the  two 
pronouns  is  always  the  subject  and  consequently  stands  in  the  Nom- 
inative in  French.  Active  verbs  then  require  se,  nous  or  vous  to 
be  prefixed,  although  no  reflective  pronoun  appears  in  English. 
Wben  they  are  preceded  by  a  preposition  in  English,  that  preposi- 
tion must  come  between  them  in  French.     Ex.:  — 

These  two  girls  love  each  other  tenderly. 

Ces  deux  jeunes  Jilles  s'aiment  (I'une  I'autre)  tendrement. 

Charles  and  Henry  speak  ill  of  each  other. 

Charles  et  Ilenri  parlent  mal  I'un  de  I'autre  (not  de  Vun  I'autre.) 

5.  The  word  the  same  is  expressed  by  le  meme  or  la  memc  foj 
the  singular  and  by  les  mcmes  for  the  plural  of  both  genders,  whetb 
er  it  be  connected  with  a  noun  or  not,  as :  — 

Is  that  the  same  pencil  which  I  have  lent  you. 
Est-ce  le  meme  crayon  que  celui  que  je  vous  ai  pret€f 
Yes,  it  is  the  same,  oui,  c'est  le  meme. 

6.  Tlie  same,  meaning  the  same  thing,  is  expressed  by  la  mem 
chose.     Ex.:  — 

He  did  the  same,  il  a  fait  la  meme  chose. 

7.  When  meme  signifies  even,  it  is  an  adverb  and  invariable 
It  may  be  placed  before  or  after  the  nouns.     Ex.:  — 

Vos  frlres,  vos  amis,  vos  ennemis  vieme. 

Your  brothers;  your  friends,  your  enemies  even. 

8.  Everything,  all,  are  expressed  by  tout  vrithout  any  article, 
placed,  in  compound  tenses,  between  the  auxiliarr  and  the  partjoir 
plo.  as ;  — 


280  Xin.      TREIZIEMB  LEgON. 

I  have  lost  ererything,  fai  tout  perdu. 
Everything  falls,  tout  tombe. 
All  have  perished  there,  tons  y  ont  p^. 
I  have  seen  them  all,  je  les  ai  toutes  vues. 

9    Le  tout  stands  for  a  substantive  singular  and  masculine,  an3 
anowcrs  to  the  English  the  whole,  as :  — 
Le  tout  est  plus  grand  que  la  partie. 
The  whole  is  greater  than  a  part. 
Je  prendrai  le  tout,  I  will  take  the  whole. 

10.  The  English  words  all  that,  everything  that  and  iphatever, 
are  rendered  in  French  by  tout  ce  qui  (Nom.),  or  tout  ce  qice  (Dir. 
Obj.),  always  singular  and  masculine.     Ex.:  — 

I  like  all  that  is  fine,  faime  tout  ce  qui  est  beau. 
All  that  he  says  is  true,  tout  ce  qu'il  dit  est  vrai. 

11.  In  the  sense  of  quite,  entirely,  before  an  adjective  or  a  par 
ticiple  masculine  of  both  numbers,  and  before  an  adjective  feminine 
beginning  with  a  vowel  or  h  mute,  tout  remains  uninflected ;  but  it 
is  declinable  before  an  adjective  or  a  participle  feminine  which  be- 
gins with  a  consonant,  and  agrees  with  it  in  gender  and  number. 
Examples :  — 

Nous  fumes  tout  surpris,  we  were  quite  surprised. 

Ma  saeur  €tait  tout  €tonn€e. 

My  sister  was  quite  astonished. 

Elle  fut  toute  surprise,  she  was  quite  surprised. 

12.  When  tout  in  connection  with  que  stands  for  ...  as, 
cUthouyh,  however,  it  is  used  as  a  conjunction  with  the  Indicative 
mood ;  and  in  this  use  the  above-mentioned  rule  (§  11)  also  holds 
good  (see  also  §  13).     Ex.:  — 

Tout  riches  que  vous  etes,  rich  as  you  are. 

Toutes  savantes  que  sont  ces  dames. 

Learned  as  these  ladies  are  (however  learned  these  ladies  are,  etc.). 

THEME   27. 

J .  Both  are  (ont)  right.  2.  Both  serve  the  same  purpose.*  3. 
Do  you  speak  of  my  brother  or  of  my  sister  ?    4.  I  speak  of  both. 


INDEFINITE  PBONOUNB.  281 

5.  Both  his  uncle  and  aunt  are  dead.  6.  Either  of  you  can  dome  a 
great  favor.  7.  Yesterday  I  expected  my  two  best  friends,  but 
neither  of  them  came.  8.  Both  suspect^  him,  but  neither  will  say 
why.  9.  Fire  and  water  destroy*  each  other.  10.  Love*  one  an- 
other, said  oui-  Lord.^  11.  They  speak  ill  of  one  another.  12.  It  is 
rare  to  hear  two  authors'  speak  well  of  each  other.  13.  This  poem 
is  the  same  that'  I  was  mentioning®  to  you.  14.  How  much  do  you 
ask  for  the  whole?  15.  I  will  not  sell  the  whole  ;  I  must  keep'  a 
part  for  myself.  16.  All  is  mutable  ^^  in  this  world.  17.  Every- 
thing displeases"  you.  18.  He  has  taken  everything  for  himself. 
19.  All  is  not  gold  that  glitters^  {transl:  All  that  (L.  XI.,  §  10) 
glitters  is  not  gold).  20.  Whatever  is  good  in  itself  {en  sot),  is 
not  always  approved."  21.  His  mother  was  {fui)  quite  cast 
down^*  at  that  news;  however,  sorry"  though  she  was,  she  received 
me  kindly,  and  desired"  me  to  dine  with  her.  22.  This  fashion^' 
is  quite  new.  23.  My  fiiend,  however  learned  he  may  be,  is  some- 
times mistaken." 

1.  Usage,  m.    2.  Soupqonner.    3.  Se  detruisent.    4.  Aimes-vous.    6.  Seigneur. 

6.  Auteur.  7.  Que  celui  dont.  8.  rarU.  9.  Garder.  10.  Variable.  11.  Di- 
plaire.  12.  Brille.  1.3.  Approuver.  14.  Abattue.  16.  Affligie.  16.  Prier.  17. 
Mode,f.    18.  Setromper. 


13.  Quelque  —  qiLe,  however,  though  —  ever  so,  is  used  in  the 
same  sense  as  tout  —  que,  with  this  diflferenccthat  tout  —  que  sup- 
poses something  more  true  or  real,  whereas  quelque — que  implies 
something  as  possibly  assumed,  and  on  this  account  always  governs 
the  Subjunctive.  Quelque,  when  before  an  adjective  or  participle, 
remains  unchanged.  The  construction  of  the  sentence  is  as  fol- 
lows :  quelque  begins  the  clause,  the  second  place  is  taken  by  the 
adjective  or  participle,  then  follows  que,  then  the  pronoun,  then  the 
verb  in  the  Subjunctive  mood.     Ex.:  — 

1  2  8        4  5 

Quelque  habiles  que  vous  soijez. 
Ilowcvcr  skilful  you  may  be. 

But  when  the  subject  is  not  a  pronoun,  but  a  substantive,  then  the 
rorb  takes  the  fourth  place  and  the  noun  the  fifth.    Ex.:  -^ 


282  Xm.      TREIZIEITB  LEgON. 

12  8       4  5 

Quelque  huxtbh  que  soil  voire  conduit^,,  die  sera  condamn^e. 

Ilowev'er  praiseworthy  your  conduct  may  be  —  or  though  your  conduct 
be  ever  so  praiseworthy,  —  it  will  be  condemned. 

1  i.    Quelque,  followed  by  a  substantive  and  any  other  verb  than 
to  he,  is  an  adjective,  and  therefore  takes  an  s  before  a  noun  plural,  j 
It  corresponds  with  the  English  whatever.     The  construction  is : 
1,  quelquc(s);  2,  the  substantive;  3,  que;  4,  the  pronoun;  5,  the 
verb  in  the  Subjunctive  mood ;  the  rest  as  in  English.     Ex.:  — 

1  2  3    4         6 

Quelques  richesses  qu'ils  aient  amass^es,  ils  ne  sont  pas  heureux. 

Whatever  riches  they  may  have  collected,  they  are  not  happy.  \ 

Quelques  fautes  qu'il  ait  commises,  jelui  pardonnerai. 

Whatever  faults  he  has  committed,  I  will  forgive  him. 

15.  Quel  que,  fem.  quelle  que,  must  be  divided  when  it  is  im-^ 
mediately   followed   by   the  verb  to  be ;   it  agrees  in  gender  and 
number  with  the  noun  to  which  it  relates ;  it  likewise  requires  the 
verb  to  be  put  in  the  Subjunctive  mood.     Ex.:  — 

Quelle  que  soit  votre  faute,  on  vous  pardonnera. 
Whatever  your  fault  may  be,  they  will  forgive  you. 
Quels  que  soient  les  talents  de  votre  frere,  il  ne  r€ussira  pas. 
Whatever  your  brother's  talents  may  be,  he  will  not  succeed. 

16.  The  English  whoever  and  whosoever  are  usually  rendered  by 
quiconque  when   they  mean   every    one   who   or   all  those  who.  '■ 
Examples :  — 

Quiconque  n'observera  pas  cette  hi,  sera  puni. 
Whoever  does  not  observe  this  law,  will  be  punished. 
Je  parle  a  quiconque  veut  m'emendre. 
I  speak  to  whomsoever  will  hear  me. 

17.  The  same  two  pronouns  whoever  and  whosoever  are  ex- 
pressed in  French  by  qui  que  ce  soit  (or  Jut)  qui,  when  they  mean 
whatever  may  be  the  person  who.  The  verb  is  in  the  Subj  mood 
Examples :  < 

Whoever  has  done  that,  he  is  a  man  of  talent. 

Qui  que  ce  soit  qui  ait  fait  cela,  c'est  un  homme  de  talent.  i 


IKDEPINITE  PRONOUNS.  2^ 

Whomsoever  you  meet  with,  do  not  say  what  you  have  seen. 
Qui  que  ce  soil  que  (Dir.  Obj.)  vous  rencontriez,  ne  dites  pas  ce  que  voua 
avez  im. 

18.  A  shorter  expression  for  qui  que  ce  soil  que  (not  qui)  is 
qui  que,  which  is  often  used,  except  before  il  and  ils : 

Qui  que  vous  soyez,  vous  etes  le  bienvenu. 
Whoever  you  may  be,  you  are  welcome. 
Qui  que  vous  rencontriez,  ne  dites  pas,  etc. 
Whomsoever  you  meet  with,  do  not  say,  etc. 

19.  Nobody  whatever,  is  expressed  by  qui  que  ce  soit  and  7te 
before  the  verb.     Ex.:  — 

Let  nobody  whatever  enter  my  room. 

Ne  laissez  entrer  qui  que  ce  soit  dans  ma  chambn. 

I  trust  nobody  whatever. 

Jene  me  Jiea  qui  que  ce  soit. 

NoTB.  But  when  nobody  whatever  begins  the  sentence,  personne  is  osel, 
as :  — 
Nobody  whatever  has  spoken  ill  of  you. 
Personne  n'a  parU  mal  de  vous. 

20.  When  the  English  indefinite  pronoun  whatever  does  not 
mean  aU  thai  which  or  everything  which,  but  whatever  may  be  the 
thing  which,  it  is  rendered  into  French  by  quelque  chose  qui^  quoi 
que,  or  quai  que  ce  soit  (or  fitt)  qui  or  qrie.     Ex.:  — 

Whatever  may  be  said  to  you,  do  not  believe  it. 
Quelque  chose  qu'on  vous  dise,  ne  le  croyez  pas.     Or : 
Quoi  qu'on  vous  dise,  ne  le  croyez  pas.     Or  : 
Quoi  que  ce  soit  qu'on  vous  dise,  ne  le  croyez  poi. 
Whatever  you  may  order,  I  will  do  it. 
Quelque  chose  que  vous  commandicz,  je  le  ferai.     Or : 
Qtwi  que  ce  soit  que  vous  commandiez,  je  le  ferai. 

21 .  Nothing  whatever,  not  anything  whatever,  is  translated  by 
quoi  que  ce  soit  or  fut,  and  ne  before  the  verb.     Ex. :  — 

Without  application,  it  is  impossible  to  succeed  in  anything  whatever, 
Sons  applicution  on  ne  peut  r^tssir  en  quoi  que  ce  aoU. 


284  XIV.      QtJATOHZIl^ME  LEgON. 

*    THEME  28. 

1.  Tho  wise  man  does  not  fear  men,  however  powerful  they  may 
be.  2.  Men,  however  great  or  small  they  may  be,  are  never  siiflS- 
ciently^  sensible  how  necessary  they  are  to  each  other.  3.  What 
over  wealth''  you  may  have,  you  will  never  be  happy,  unless  you. 
restrain  your  passions.  4.  Do  not  lose  [your]  courage,  whatevei 
may  happen  to  you.  5.  Distrust*  every  one  who  (§16)  speaks  ill 
of  his  friends.  6.  The  laws  condemn*  all  criminals,*  whoever  (§15) 
they  may  be.  7.  I  tell  it  to  every  one  who  will  hear.  8.  I  hope  that 
you  will  not  tell  my  secret  to  /Anybody  whatever.  9.  Regulus  did 
not  allow  himself  to  be  move^'  whatever  the  promises  were  that  the 
Carthaginians'  made  him.  10.  Unfortunate  [man]  !  whoever 
(§  18)  you  are,  I  will  not  betray*  you.  11.  Whatever  (§  20) 
may  happen  to  you  in  this  world,  never  murmur^"  against  Divine 
Providence  j  for  whatever  we  may  suffer,  we  deserve^^  it.  12.  Of 
whomsoever  you  speak,  always  speak  the  truth.  13.  I  have  found 
nothing  whatever.  14.  I  complain^^  of  notliing  whatever.  15. 
Young  men  ! "  whatever  the  destiny"  may  be  that  awaits'*  you,  in 
whatever  regioTi  of  the  earth  your  days  may  be'*  spent,  nature  will 
continually  offer  to  you  her  products''^  and  her  wonders ;  '^  you  wUl 
continually  be  surrounded'^  with  the  objects  of  your  study. 

1.  Assez.  2.  Jtichesse,  f.  3.  A  moins  que  votis  ne  rfprimiez.  4.  Mefiez-vous  de. 
6.  Conclamner,  6.  Crimincl.  1.  Ne  se  taissa  pas  djrnnler.  8.  Carthaginois.  9. 
Trahir.  10.  Murmur er.  II.  Mer iter.  12.  Se  plaindre  de.  13.  Gens.  H.  Le  sort 
15.  Attmdre.  16.  Doivent  sdcouler.  17.  Produits,  m,  18.  Merveilles.  19.  ErUour 
riade. 


XIY.    QUATOHZIEME    LEgON 


ADVEPvBS. 

See  Part  I.,  Lessons  XXI  and  XXXill. 

1    As  already  observed,  the  manner  or  mode  of  the  action  is 
by  the  adverbs  of  quality  or  maimer,  as : 


ADTSRBS.  285 

n  agit  sagement  (not  sage),  he  acts  wisely. 
7Z  €crit  mal  (not  tiiauvais),  he  writes  badly. 

2.  There  are  certain  adjectives,  however,  which  are  used  instead 

of  the  adverb.     This  is  the  case  in  the  following  expressions  :  —  , 

dUer  vite,  to  walk  fast.  rester  court,       ) 

»,      ,      ,    ,  .  7  V^  r  to  stop  short. 

oouter  c/ier,  to  be  tx  pensive  demeurer  court,  >  '^ 

vendre  dier,  to  sell  dear.  /xz^w  comptant,  to  pay  cash. 

seniir  bon,  to  smell  sweet.  marcher  droit,  to  walk  straight. 

sentir  mauvais,  to  smell  badly.  chxnter  jus  e,  to  sing  correctly. 

trouver  bon,  to  approve.  chanter  faux,  to  sing  false. 

trouver  mauvais,  to  take  iU.  parler  haut,  to  speak  loud. 

voir  clair,  to  see  clearly.  parler  has,  to  speak  low. 

tenir  ferme,  to  hold  fast.  faire  expres,  to  do  on  purpose. 

3.  The  adjectives  in  this  case  remain,  of  course,  unchanged. 
Examples :  — 

Cette  montre  coute  trop  cher  (not  chhe). 

This  watch  is  too  dear. 

Les  enfants  parlent  trop  haut  (not  hauts). 

The  childixin  speak  too  loud. 

La  chanteuse  a  chants  faux  (not  fansu). 

The  songstress  has  sung  false. 

Note  1.  In  speaking  of  the  state  of  the  healtli,  however,  the  adverb 
Wen  or  ?/ia/ is  employed.     Ex.  :  — 

Je  suis  bien,  I  am  well. 

EUe  se  trouve  mal,  she  finds  herself  ill. 

Note  2.  Obscr\'e  also  the  expressions,  EUe  est  bien,  she  is  pretty ;  and 
aSe  n'est  pas  mal,  she  is  not  bad-looking. 

4.  Some  adverbs  take  after  them  an  object  with  de  or  «,  in  case 
the  adjective  from  which  they  are  derived  also  takes  one.     Ex : — 

Conform'^ment  a  vos  ordres. 

In  conformity  with  your  orders. 

Ird^peiidamment  de  mes  instructions. 

Indepcndenrly  of  my  instructions 

Cette  riviere  coule  parol! element  a  la  Vlstule. 

That  river  flows  parallel  with  the  Vbtula. 

THEirE  29. 

1.  Do  not  go  so  fast.  2.  The  night  is  approaching ;  I  no  longer 
(j)lus)  sec  clearly.    3.  The  rose  smells  sweet,  but  the  pink^  smells 


2^6  XIV.      QUAIOR^I^MB  LEgON. 

better.  4.  Do  not  speak  low  (in  a  whisper)  in  the  presence  of 
others.  6.  How  docs  the  singer^  sing?  6.  She  sings  false  (incor- 
rectly). 7.  Do  not  speak  so  low ;  speak  louder,  so  that  you  can'  be 
understood.  8.  You  do  not  read  well,  and  you  write  no  {pas) 
better.  9.  To-day  I  am  not  very  well.  10.  Do  not  eat  so  fast. 
11.  This  merchant  sells  his  goods*  very  dear.  12.  It  is  dark ;  I  do 
not  see  clearly.  13.  I  have  distributed*  the  money  according  to  (in 
conformity  with)  your  orders. 

1,  Uoeillet.    2.  La  chanteuse.   3.  Qu'on  puisse  vous  comprendre.     4.  Mar(^Mn- 
di8€9.    6.  Bistributr, 


ADVERBS    OF   TIME,  ETC. 

1.  Observe  the  distinction  between  the  following  adverbs :  —  1. 
Plutot  means  rather  (of  inclination)  ;  plus  tot,  sooner  (of  time). 

2.  Tout  a  coup  means  at  once,  suddenly,  unexpectedly ;  tovl  (Tun 
coup  means  at  once,  i.  e.,  at  one  time;  a  la  /ois  means  altogether. 

3.  Immediately  is  translated  by  tout  de  suite,  tout  a  Vheure,  and 
also  by  sans  delai.  De  suite  means  successively,  one  after  the 
other.  4.  V autre  jour  means  the  other  day,  lately,  synonymous 
with  dernier ement.  On  the  next  day  is  le  lendemain.  5.  A  little 
while  ago  is  tantot ;  just  is  expressed  by  the  verb  venir  (see  Part 
I.  Lesson  XL VIL).  Ex.:  — 

He  has  just  gone  out,  il  vient  de  sortir. 

2.  Tres,  fort,  and  bien,  all  mean  veiy^  right ;  and  whether  one 
or  the  other  is  to  be  used  before  the  adjective  depends  upon  euphony 
alone.  Very  much,  with  verbs  is  generally  translated  by  beaucoup, 
and  sometimes  also  by  bien ;  but  never  by  tres  or  tres  beaucoup. 
Bien,  with  a  noun  in  the  sense  of  much  or  a  great  many,  must  be 
followed  by  de  with  the  definite  article  (see  Lesson  IV.,  §  1). 

8.  WJien,  in  inteiTOgative  phrases,  is  rendered  by  quand.  Id 
other  cases,  quand  refers  to  a  possible,  probable  fact ;  lorsque  to  a 
positive,  real  fact.  Quand  is  vague ;  lorsque  is  precise,  as  its  etj* 
mology  shows,  alorsquc,  i.  e.,  a  Vheure  que. 


ADVERBS.  28? 

4.  Plus  and  davantage  both  mean  more.  The  latter  always 
stands  at  the  end  of  a  sentence,  and  consequently  can  bo  followed 
neither  by  a  noun  nor  by  a  comparison  with  than.  Than  after  plui 
and  moins  is  usually  que,  but  before  a  numeral  it  is  translated  by  de 

5.  Adverbs  follow  the  simple  verb.  Do  not  say,  Ma  soeiir  rate- 
mcnt  sort  le  matin ;  but,  ma  sceur  sort  rarement  le  matin,  my  sis- 
ter scklom  goes  out  in  the  morning.  Je  pensc  souvent  a  vouSf  1 
often  tLink  of  you. 

In   connection  with  the   compound  tenses  of  the  verb,   the  adverb  is 
generally  placed  between  the  auxiliary  and  the  Participle  Past.    Ex. : 
Jl/a  S(n(r  a  Ixaucoup  voyngi. 
My  sister  has  travelled  a  great  deal. 

6.  But  adverbs  of  time  can  also  be  placed  at  the  beginning  of 
the  sentence,  when  an  emphasis  it  laid  upon  them.     Ex. :  — 

Bienldt  je  Le  vis  reparnUre,  1  saw  him  soon  reappear. 

THEME  30. 

1.  We  often  pnt  off'  till  the  next  day  what  wo  onght  to  do  at 
once.  2.  Fortune  is  so  fickle^  that  she  often  suddenly  deserts'  those 
tliat  she  has  favored*  the  most.  3.  A  single*  drop  of  vinegar  con- 
tains more  than  a  hundi-cd  animalculae.'  4.  This  man  has  a  great 
many  faults.  5.  Children  must  obey  immediately.  6.  This  man 
has  been  very  much  regretted.'  7.  One  does  not  arrive  at  once  at 
the  highest  pinnacle'  of  fume.  8.  Mr.  M.  (has)  won  a  thousand  dol- 
lar«  at  one  time.  9.  He  undertakes  too  many  things  at  once.  10. 
Did  you  believe  this  manV  11.  At  first  {d'abord)  I  was  not  will- 
ing to  believe  him.  12.  Good  taste*  is  rather  a  gift^'*  of  nature, 
than  an  acquirement"  of  ar^  13.  How  nmch  money  have  you  lent 
him  ?     14.  1  have  lent  hhn  more  than  eighty  floiin*. 

1.  Renvoyer  or  dijfdrer  2,  Inconstant.  3  Abandonner,  4.  FavoHsi8,  6.  Una 
tenlt  goutte.  6.  AuimaictUe,  m.  7,  Regrttter,  8.  IJegri,  m.  9.  Oout,  m.  Id 
Don,  m.    11.  AcquiMiiony  f. 


r- 


288  XIV.      QtATORZIEME  LEgON. 

BEADING  LESSON. 

Lb   CONNfTABLB  DE   BoUUBON    ET  BaTAKD. 

(Dialogue.) 

Le  Connetdble.  N*est-ce  pas  le  pauvre  Bayard  que  je  voia  au 
pied  de  cet  arbre,  ^tendu  sur  Therbe,^  et  perc4  d'un  grand  coup^ 
Oui,  c'cst  lui-meme.  Ilelas !  je  le  plains.  En  voilh  deux  qui  pd- 
rissent  aujoard'hui  par  nos  armes :  Vandenesse  et  lui.  Ces  deux 
Fran9ais  etaient  deux  oraements  de  leur  nation  par  leur  courage. 
Je  sens  que  mon  coeur  est  encore  touchy  pour  sa  patrie.  iMais  avan- 
90ns  pour  lui  parler.  Ah  !  mon  pauvre  Bayard,  c'est  avec  douleur 
que  je  te  vois  en  cet  etat. 

Bayard.     C'est  avec  douleur  que  je  vous  vois  aussi. 

Le  Con.  Je  comprends  bien  que  tu  es  fach^  de  te  voir  dans 
mes  mains  par  le  sort^  de  la  guerre ;  mais  je  ne  veux  point  te  traiter 
en  prisonnier,  je  te  veux  garder  comme  un  bon  ami,  et  prendre  soin 
de  ta  gu^rison,''  comme  si  tu  ^tais  mon  propre  frere.  Ainsi  tu  ne 
dois  point  etre  fach^  de  me  voir. 

Bay.  He  !  croyez-vous  que  je  ne  sois  point  f^h^  d 'avoir  obli- 
gation au  plus  grand  ennerai  de  la  France  ?  Ce  n'est  point  de  ma 
captivite,  ni  de  ma  blessure,*  que  je  suis  en  peine ;  *  je  meurs  dans 
un  moment,  la  raort  va  me  delivrer  de  vos  mains. 

Le  Con.  Non,  mon  cher  Bayard,  j'espere  que  nos  soins  r^ussi- 
ront  a  te  gudrir. 

Bay.  Ce  n'est  point  U  ce  que  je  cberche,  et  je  suis  content  de 
mourir.  (7b  be  continued.) 

1.  Grass     2.  Fate.    3.  Recovery     4.  Woimd.    5.  Sony. 


SYirrAX  Of  NEGATIONS.  286 

XV.    QUINZIEME    LE9ON. 


SYNTAX  OF  NEGATIONS. 
(See  P.  I.,  L.  XXXII.) 

1 .  It  is  necessary  in  the  first  place  to  distinguisb  wbether  the  ne« 
galion  belongs  to  a  verb  or  not ;  if  not,  the  negative  particle  stands 
without  ne.  Not,  without  a  verb,  before  nouns,  is  translated  by  non 
or  non  pas.     Ex. :  — 

His  cnielty  and  not  his  pride. 

Sa  cruaul€et  non  (oT  non  pas)  son  orgueil. 

Not  in  connection  with  other  words  is  simply  pas :  — 
Not  much,  pas  beaucoup.  Not  I,  pas  moi. 

Not  so  much,  pas  tant.  Why  not,  pourquoi  pas. 

Not  at  all,  pas  du  tout  or  point  du  tout. 

N.  B.  Observe  the  following  expressions: — 

Not  (nor) — either,  non  pins. 

Nor  his  brother  either,  ni  son  frere  non  plus. 

Nor  I  cither,  ni  moi  non  plus. 

Not  only  —  but,  non-se^ilement  —  mais.     ( See  §  4. ) 

2.  But  if  the  negation  belongs  to  the  verb  the  negative  particle, 
whatever  it  may  bo,  is  invariably  accompanied  by  ne.     Ex.:  — 

Ne  lui  parlez  pas,  do  not  apeak  to  him. 

Jc  n'ai  rien  vu,  I  liave  seen  nothing. 

Je  ne  I'ai  plus,  I  have  it  no  more. 

Aucun  de  vous  n'y  €tait,  none  of  you  were  there. 

Le  pauvre  homme  n'a  point  d' argent. 

The  poor  man  has  no  money. 

Je  ne  ronnais  personne  iri,  I  know  nobody  here. 

Ni  prieres  ni  *  menaces  ne  purent  I'attendrir. 

Neither  prayers  nor  threatenings  could  move  him. 

•  If  neiiJier  —  nor  comv  before  two  verbs  Intlie  Indicative  mood,  tbe  formerfB  ex- 
pressed Himply  by  ne  bt-fore  the  first,  and  nor  by  ni  ne  before  the  second.     Ex.  :- 
I  neither  praise  nor  blame  him. 
Jenele  loue^  ninele  hi^mc, 

"  :, 


290  XV.      QUINZIEME  LEgOH. 

//  ne  sait  ni  lire  ni  €cr{re. 

H«  knows  neither  how  to  read  nor  write. 

Nous  n'approuvons  nullement  votre  desseih. 

We  by  no  means  approve  of  your  design. 

Note.  When  the  verb  is  in  the  simple  Infinitive  ne  pas  or  ne  point  (b\bo 
fu  ya>7L2w)  are  not  separated,  as  :  — 

Not  to  study,  ne  pas  €ludicr  or  ne  point  dudier. 

But  when  it  is  in  the  compound  Infinitive  it  is  optional  to  separate  theic 

or  not,  as:  — 

(  ne  pas  (point)  avoir  €tvuii€. 
Not  to  have  Studied, -s    ,  /■    •  ^\  ^   i-^ 

'  i  n' avoir  pas  (point)  €ludi€. 

3.  The  words  no  more  or  not  any  more  (meaning  not  more)  are 
expressed  by  ne  before  the  verb  and  pas  plus  afler,  when  mxyre  is 
followed  by  than :  — 

lie  is  no  more  than  fifteen  years  of  age. 
n  n'a  pas  plus  de  quinze  ans. 

But  they  are  rendered  by  ne — plus  without  pas,  when  more  is  not  fol- 
lowed by  than.     Ex.:  — 
I  shall  read  no  more  (no  longer),  je  ne  lirai  plus. 

4.  iVbw  seulement,  not  only,  takes  no  ne  with  the  verb.     Ex.:  — 

Je  Vai  fait  non  seulement  pour  lui,  mats  aussi  pour  ses  enfants. 
I  have  done  it  not  only  for  his  sake,  bat  also  for  his  children's. 

THEME  31. 

1.  I  do  not  speak.  2.  I  have  not  spoken.  3.  Have  yon 
bought  this  book ?  4.  No,  sir,  I  have  not  (P.  I.,  L.  XLVII.).  5. 
It  is  your  friendship  which  I  seek,  not  my  interest.^  6.  Not  I.  7. 
Not  we.  8.  Are  you  tired?  9.  Not  at  all.  10.  I  was  not  there ; 
nor  my  sister  cither.  11 .  This  peasant^  can  neither  read  nor  write. 
12.  The  boy  has  neither  paper*  nor  pens.  13.  I  have  never 
had  such  a  (un  si)  good  book.  14.  We  have  no  desire  at  all* 
to  do  it.  15.  The  speaker*  has  convinced®  not  only  his  fiiends 
but  also  his  adversaries.  16.  Chai'les  XII.  persisted  in'  never 
Bpeaking  (never  to  speak)  French.     17.  I  have  no  more  hope. 

1.  Intirety  m.  2.  Paysan,  m.  3.  See  p.  224,  J  3.  4.  NuUcment  envie,  6.  Vor» 
tewr»  6.  Ccmvaincre.   7.  S'obstinait, 


BYJSTTAX  OP  NEGATIONS.  291 

NE  USED  ALONE  WITHOUT  PAS. 

5.  Tho  negative  not  is  expressed  by  ne  without  pas  ot, point 
with  the  three  verbs :  cesser,  to  cease ;  oser,  to  dare ;  pouvoir,  to 
be  able ;  when  followed  by  an  Infinitive,  as  :  — 

Elle  ne  cesse  de  plenrer,  she  docs  not  cease  crying. 
77  n'ose  revenir,  he  dares  not  come  back. 
Je  ne  puis  le  croire,  I  cannot  believe  it. 

Note  1.   Cesser  takes  pas,  however,  when  a  time  is  specified,  as  ;  — 
n  ne  cesse  pas  de  travaiUer  avant  huit  heures  du  soir. 
NoTB  2.  la  regard  to  pouvoir,  use  in  the  first  person  of  the  Prosanl 
tense  cither:  — 
Je  ne  puis  {without  pas),  or :  Jene  peux  pas. 

6.  When  the  negative  use  of  savoir  means  to  be  uncertain,  i.  e. 
in  doubt,  it  does  not  take  pas.  In  the  same  way  pas  is  always 
omitted  in  the  expression  je  ne  saurais,  I  cannot.     Ex.:  — 

Je  ne  savais  que  dire,  I  did  not  know  what  to  say 
Je  ne  saurais  voiis  donner  une  garantie. 
I  cannot  give  you  a  security. 

But  if  "  not  know  "  has  the  signification  of  not  to  have  learned,  not  to 
know  (a  language,  etc.),  then  saro/r  always  takes  ne  and  pas.     Ex.:  — 
Je  ne  sais  pas  nager,  I  cannot  swim. 
Ne  savez'vous  pas  I'allemand,  do  you  not  know  German  1 

7.  In  sentences  depending  upon  prendre  garde,  to  take  care, 
there  is  no  pas.     Ex.;  — 

Prenez  garde  qu'il  ne  vous  trompe. 
Pas  is  used  however  if  an  infinitive  follows.     Ex.:  — 
Prenez  garde  de  ne  pas  tomber. 

8.  Of  two  negative  sentences  standing  in  immediate  connoction 
with  each  other,  the  latter  loses  its  pas.     Ex.: —  ^ 

Je  ne  connais  pei'sonne  qui  ne  fasse  quelqnefois  des  fautes. 

NoTB  1 .   Also  peu  and  sans  arc  here  regarded  as  a  negation,  as  :  -rr 

Pen  s'en  faui  qu'il  ne  soil  tomh€,  he  was  very  near  falling. 

^fw  nen  /aire,  without  doing  anything. 


292  AV.      QTHNZIEME    LEgON. 

Note  2.  The  former  sentence  may  also  be  interrogative  if  only  the  idea 

of  negation  be  contained  in  it,  as  :  — 

Ya-t-il  (or  est-il)  un  homme  qui  ne  croie  en  Dieu  f 

9.  Do  not  put  pas  after  que  ne,  when  used  instead  ot  pourquoi 
pas.     Ex.:  — 

)Si  vous  avez  froid,  que  ne  mettez-vous  voire  manteau  f 
If  you  are  cold,  why  not  put  on  your  cloak  ? 

10.  Nor  after  voila,  il  y  a  and  depuis  que,  when  the  verb  which 
has  the  idea  of  negation  is  in  the  compound  of  the  Present  or  iu  the 
compound  of  the  Imperfect.     Ex. ;  — 

H  y  a  deux  mois  que  je  ne  lui  ai  parl€. 
II  a  lien  chamj^  depuis  que  je  ne  I'ai  vu. 

11.  Pas  is  not  used  when  ne  is  connected  with  cT autre  followed 
by  que,  as :  — 

Je  n'ai  d'autre  ambition  que  de  vous  rendre  heureux. 
I  have  no  other  ambition  than  to  make  you  happy. 

12.  Further  in  the  following  idioms  :  — 

N'avoir  garde,  to  take  care  not  to,  to  be  on  one's  guard. 

N^importe,  it  does  not  matter. 

Ne  voir  goutte,  to  see  nothing  (at  all). 

Ne  dire  mot,  to  say  not  a  word. 

a  Dieu  neplaise  que,  etc.,  God  forbid,  etc. 

13.  A  moins  que  and  conjunctions  expressing  fear,  take  ne  before 
the  following  verb  (in  the  subjunctive).     Ex.:  — 

A  moins  que  vous  ne  le  fassiez,  Unless  you  do  it. 
THEME    32. 

1.  Alcibiades  could  not  suffer  that  his  country  should  obey*  a 
rival.^  2.  I  dare  not  enter^  his  room.  3.  It  is  no  more  than  a 
sveok*  since  I  saw  {que  fai  vu)  your  uncle ;  he  has  gone  to  Amer- 
ica, you  will  see  him  no  more.  4.  I  cannot  (§6)  tell  you  whether 
(si)  my  father  is  at  home  or  not  {non)-,  I  have  not  seen  him  thi^• 
njoming.      5.  Take  c^e  lest  {que,  §  7)  he  steal  your  money.      6. 


BTNTAX   OF  NEGATIONS.  293 

Take  care  not  to. be  (to  come)  too  late.  7.  We  dare  not  tell  him  this 
news.  8.  There  is  no  enemy  who  is  (soit)  not  able*  to  injure. **  9. 
God  forbid  that  I  should  betray'  your  secret. 

1.  Impcrf.  Subj.  2.  A  une  rivale,    3.  Entrer  dans.    4.  HuU  Jours.    6.  En  Hat. 
6.  Dt  nuire,    7.  Trahir, 


NEGATION  USED   IN  FRENCH,  AND  NOT  IN  ENGLISH* 

14.  Ne  is  moreover  often  employed  in  French  when  in  English 
no  thought  of  negation  is  to  be  discovered.     This  is  the  case  :  — 

Witb  the  affirmative  verb  of  a  comparative  clause  introduced 
by  que,  than,  when  the  verb  closely  follows  que.  Also  after 
verbs,  nouns,  and  conjunctions  expressing  fear  and  apprehension. 
Ex.:  — 

//  est  plus  ag€  que  je  ne  croyais. 

He  i»  older  than  I  thought. 

Je  crains  qu'il  ne  vienne. 

I  fear  ho  may  come. 

7?  parle  autrement  rpi'il  n'agit. 

He  speaks  otherwise  than  ho  acts. 

A  moins  que  vous  ne  le  fassiez. 

Unless  you  should  do  it. 

NoTB.  But  if  the  first  clause  of  the  sentence  be  negative,  que  of  the  la^ 
ter  clause  is  not  followed  by  n«,  if  the  compared  action  is  not  doubtful,  as  : 

//  n'€crit  pas  mieux  qu'il  parle. 

15.  The  verbs  douter,  to  doubt ;  nier  and  disconvenir,  to  deny  . 
contester,  to  contest,  require  ne  before  the  verb  (in  the  Subjunctive) 
of  the  dc|)ondcnt  sentence,  yet  only  when  these  verbs  themselves 
are  used  simply  negatively  or  simply  interrogatively.     Ex.:  — 

Je  ne  doiite  pas  > 

Doutez.vous         \  ^"^  ^^«  "«  *^*'  '"'''*•  (^> 

I  do  not  doubt  (do  you  doubt)  that  this  is  true. 

Je  ne  nie  pas\'J^'^'^  '^^  ^^P^'  (^) 

Do  you  deny  (I  do  not  deny)  that  he  is  guilty? 

•  The  pupil  should  learn,  in  connection  with  this  lesson,  $  6,  L.  XJX.  p.  33Q, 


294  XV.      QUINZIEME  LCgON. 

16.  But  when  these  verbs  arc  affirmative,  or  ncgative-mterrogar 
fcive,  ne  is  not  inserted  in  tlie  second  clause.  Also  when  ne  pas 
douier  has  the  force  of  etre  sur.     Ex.:  — 

Je  doute  que  cda  soil  vrai  (without  ne). 
Ne  niez-vous  pas  qu'il  soit  coupaUe  f 

17.  If  the  dependent  sentence  in  English  is  negative,  it  takes 
of  course,  ne  — pas.     Ex. :  — 

I  fear  he  will  nqt  come,  je  crains  qu'il  ne  vlenne  pas. 
They  fear  the  fortress  will  not  have  ammunition  enough. 
On  craint  que  la  forteresse  n'ait  pas  assez  cle  munition. 

18.  Empecher,  to  prevent,  to  hinder,  requires  ne  before  the  fol 
lowing  verb  in  the  Subjunctive  mood,  as  :  — 

Tempicherai  qu'il  ne  sorte. 

I  will  hinder  him  from  going  out. 
Empechera-t-il        1 

II  n'empeckera  pas  I  ^"^  ^*  "*  ^«  /^««- 

Will  he  prevent  you  (he  will  not  prevent  you)  from  doing  it  1 

THEME  33. 

1.  He  is  more  wicked  than  I  thought.  2.  Henry  is  stronger 
jthan  ho  was  last  year.  3.  Ireland  is  more  powerful,  at  present,  than 
were  the  three  kingdoms  at  (a)  the  death  of  queen  Elizabeth,  4. 
A  traveller  often  relates'  things  otherwise  than  they  are.  5.  I  fear 
lest  (que)  some  misfortune  has  befallen'*  my  son.  6.  I  fear  our 
master  will  come;  do  you  not  fear  he  will  come?  7.  He  denies 
that  his  brother  is  mixed  up^  in  that  affair.  8.  The  city  of  Paris 
has  become  much  more  beautiful  since  ^  you  saw  (have  seen)  it.  9. 
Do  you  fear  ho  will  write  to  your  father?  10.  I  do  not  fear  it, 
11.  We  do  not  fear  that  the  lattle  is  lo.st.  12.  Do  you  deny  that 
you  have  procured  [for]  him  the  moans  of  flight?'  13.  I  do  not 
deny  that  I  have  given  him  some  clothes  anTl  some  money.  14,  I  will 
hinder  him  from  coming  back.  15.  I  doubt  whether  the  letter  has 
been  sent  to  him  (see  p.  275,  §  1,  Note  1).  16.  I  cannot  prevent 
him  from  loving  (that  he  loves)  pleasure*'  better  than  work.* 

1.  Rapporter.    2.  Etre  arrivi  d.     8.  Jiieler.    4.  £>^puis  que,    6.  ^htiie,  t,    5» 
fut  tiui  dcf.  article. 


8YKTAX  OF  NEGATIONS.  206 

reading  lesson. 

Lb  Conn^table  db  Bourbon  et  Batard. 

(Suite.) 

he  Con.  Qu'as-tn  done '(  Estrcc  quo  tu  ne  saurais  te  consolei 
d'aToir  6t^  vaincu  ct  fait  prisonnicr  dans  la  rctraite  dp  Bonnivct? 
Ce  n'cst  pas  ta  faute,  c'cst  la  sicnnc :  Ics  arracs  sent  journaliores 
(^changing).  Ta  gloire  est  assez  bicn  ^tablio  par  tint  de  belles  ac- 
tions. Les  Impdriaux^  ne  pourront  jamais  oublier  cetto  vigoureuse 
defense  do  MiSzieres  contrc  cux. 

J^at/.  Pour  moi,  je  no  puis  jamais  oublier  que  vous  etes  ce 
grand  connetable,  ce  prince  du  plus  noble  sang  qu'il  y  ait  dans  le 
monde,  et  qui  travaille  h  dechircr^  do  ses  propres  mains  sa  patric  et 
Ic  loyaume  de  ses  ancetres. 

Le  Con.  Quoi !  Bayard,  jo  to  lone,  et  tu  me  condamncs  I  Je 
te  plains,  ct  tu  m'insultcs  I 

Bat/.  Si  vous  me  plaignez,  jo  vous  plains  aussi;  et  jo  voua 
trouve  bien  plus  2t  plaindre  que  moi.  Jo  sors  de  la  vie  sans  tache ; 
j'ai  sacrifie  la  micnne  h  mon  devoir,  jo  meurs  pour  mon  pays,  pour 
mon  roi,  estim^  des  cnncmis  de  la  France,  ct  regiett<S  de  tous  les 
bons  Fran9ais.  Mon  etat  est  digne  d'cnvie. 

Le  Con.  Et  moi,  je  suis  victoricux  d'un  ennemi  qui  m'a  ou- 
traged, je  mc  vcnge  de  lui ;  je  le  chasse  du  Milanais  ;' je  fais  sentir  a 
toute  la  France  combien  elle  est  malbeureuse  do  m'avoir  perdu,  cd 
me  poussant  a  bout.*     Appollos-tu  ccla  etre  h  plaindre  ? 

Bay.  Oui,  on  est  toujours  h.  plaindre  quand  on  agit  centre  son 
devoir.  D  vaut  mieux  perir  en  combattant  pour  la  patrie,  que  de 
la  vaincre  et  de  triompbcr  d'elle.  Ah !  quelle  horrible  gloiro  que 
oolle  de  ddtruire*  son  propre  pays  I  (^To  be  continued.) 

1.  The  Imperialists,  Austrlani.     2.  To  toox.    8.  From  the  Milanese  terrltorj 
i  To  the  extreiae.    5.  Destroy. 


296  XVI.    seizuSme  le^on. 

XYI.    SEIZIEME    LEgON 


REMARKS  ON  SOME  PREPOSITIONS. 

The  nse  of  the  prepositions  is  of  too  various  a  nature  to  allow  of  its  being 
^termined  by  definite  rules.  Their  departure  from  the  original  significa- 
tion can  only  be  shown  by  examples. 

Prepositions  must  generally  be  repeated  before  every  noun.  A, 
dCy  and  en  must  always  be  repeated. 

All  prepositions  except  en  govern  the  infinitive ;  en  is  followed  by 
the  present  participle.     Ex.  :  — 

Pour  oiler,  in  order  to  go.    En  allant,  in  going. 

I.  ON  THE  USE  OE  SOME  FRENCH  PREPOSITIONS.   n 

a. 

A  denotes  1st  place,  and  is  used  before  names  of  places  (not 
.:(iiintries) ,  and  common  names ;  (in  English  at  or  iri)  :  — 
a  Paris,  at  Paris,     a  IVylise,  at  church. 
a  la  campagne,  in  the  country,     a  t'ortibre,  in  the  shade. 
au  theatre  or  au  spectacle,  at  the  theatre. 
a  la  poste,  at  the  post-office. 
frapper  a  la  porte,  to  knock  at  th«k-door. 
a  la  main,  in  the  hand,     a  dvoite,  to  the  right. 

2.  Time:  — 

a  quelle  heure,  at  what  o'clock  1 

a  deux  heures,  at  two  o'clock,     a  midi,  at  twelve  o'clock. 

au  commencement  de  la  le^on,  at  the  beginning  of  the  lesecn 

a  temps,  in  time,     a  man  arriv^e,  on  my  arrival. 

2  la  pointe  da  jour,  at  d>i3'b^eak. 

3.  ^Tanner  and  instrument :  — 
a  la  node,  in  fashion,  fashionably. 

a  pied,  on  foot,     a  cheval,  on  horseback. 

a  bras  ouverts,  with  open  arms. 

travaiUer  h  I'aiffuilie,  to  work  widi  the  needle. 


REMARKS   ON  SOME  PREPOSITIONS.  297 

peindre  a  Vhuile,  to  paint  in  oil 

nussurer  a  I'aune,  to  measure  by  the  eU  (yard). 

deux  a  deux,  two  and  two. 

goutte  a  gontte,  drop  by  drop. 

a  bort  marchi,  cheap. 

a  cinq  jx>ur  cent,  at  five  per  cent. 

a  I'anglaise,  after  the  English  style. 

4.  Destination :  — 

Une  cuiller  a  th^,  a  teaspoon. 

Une  montre  a  r€p€lition,  a  repeater  Cwatch). 

5.  Direction,  especially  with  the  verb  aUer  or  se  rcndre,  to  go 
(the  English  to)  :  — 

AUer  a  Vienne,  to  go  to  Vienna. 

Nous  allons  a  la  campagne,  we  are  going  into  the  country. 

AUer  au  theatre,  to  go  to  the  theatre. 

Alter  a  la  chasse,  to  go  hunting,  etc. 

Dans,  en. 
Dans  means  both  in  and  into  a  (closed)  place ;  it  is  used  in  a 
more  determinate  sense  than  en,  and  is  always  followed  by  the  iirticle 
or  another  determinate  word  (such  as,  this,  my,  which,  etc.).    Ex.  :— 

Dans  la  (ma,  voire)  chambre,  in  the  (my,  your)  room. 

Dans  ma  poche,  in  my  pocket. 

Dans  I'liiver  de  1850,  in  the  winter  of  1850. 

Dans  une  colere  affreuse,  in  a  dreadful  passion. 

//  esi  dans  La  prison,  he  is  in  (the)  prison  (of  that  place). 

Eire  dans  la  vil/e,  to  be  within  the  town  (not  in  the  country). 

Observe  also  the  difference  in  the  following  expressions :  — 

n  est  au  jardin  and  it  est  dans  son  jardin. 

Je  8uis  a  (a  maison  (at  home)  and  je  suis  dans  ma  maison. 

En  is  used  in  a  more  vague  sense,  and  is  followed  by  no  article.  Il 
is  used  for  in  or  to  before  the  name  of  a  kingdom,  republic,  country, 
oounty,  or  province.     Ex. :  — 

En  liberty,  in  liberty.    En  colere,  in  a  paflsion. 

En  France,  in  or  to  France. 

En  Avril  or  au  mois  d'  avril,  in  Ay  ril. 

En  Ai,  in  summer.     En  hiver,  in  winter. 


298  XVI.      SEIZIEMB  LEgON. 

En  atitomne,  in  antnmTi  (Tint  au  printemps,  in  spring.) 

Eire  en  voi/age,  to  travel  about. 

En  ces  tennes,  in  these  words. 

Vivre  en  paix,  to  live  in  peace. 

Eire  en  vi/le,  to  1)C  out,  to  be  from  home. 

II  est  en  prison,  he  is  in  prison  (he  is  a  prisoner). 

Note.  There  are  a  few  expressions  in  which  the  article  is  retained  aftei- 
en;  such  are,  en  ['absence,  in  the  absence;  en  I'honneur,  in  honor.  Only  F 
and  la  ore  thus  found  after  en,  never  le. 

Dans  and  en,  relating  to  time,  are  differently  used.     Dans  de- 
notes the  point  of  time,  en  the  duration.     Ex. :  — 
Dans  dix  minutes,  ten  minutes  hence. 
En  dix  minutes,  within  the  space  of  ten  minutes. 
Jt  partirai  dans  huit  jours,  I  shall  set  out  in  a  week. 
M.  13.  reviendra  dans  deux  inois,  Mr.  B.  will  return  in  two  months. 
J^ai  appris  le  fran^ais  en  dix  mois,  I  learned  French  in  ten  months. 

Entre,  parmi. 
Entre  answers  in  general  to  the  English  between,  betwixt,  and  \& 
■aid  of  two  objects  only.     Ex.  :  — 

Entre  la  porte  et  la  fenetre,  between  the  door  and  the  window. 

Entre  autres,  among  others. 

La  mere  tenait  I'enfant  entre  ses  bras. 

The  mother  held  her  child  in  her  arms. 

Parmi  is  said  of  several  objects,  as  :  — 
Parmi  les  rochers,  among  the  rocks. 
Votre  grammaire  se  trouva  jxirmi  mes  Hares. 
Your  grammar  was  found  among  my  books. 

Devant,  avant. 

Devant  is  a  local  preposition,  and  is  also  used  for  in  presence  of, 
as:  — 

Nous  jouerons  devant  la  maison,  we  will  play  before  the  house. 

H  a  paru  devant  le  juge,  he  appeared  before  the  judge. 

Sur  le  devant,  in  the  front ;  la  porte  de  deoant,  the  front  door. 

Avant  denotes  priority  of  time  and  order,  as ;  — 
Je  suis  amv€  avant  vous,  I  arrived  before  you.  i 

L'article  se  met  avant  le  nom,  the  article  is  put  before  the  noon. 


nSMAHES  ON  SOME  PEEPOSinONS.  299 

Avcmt  tatd,  nbove  all. 

Avant  is  also  used  before  an  infinidve  with  de:  — 

AlxuU  de  partir,  before  leaving. 

EnverSy  vers. 
E?ivers,  towards,  to,  is  used  for  with  regard  to,  in  a  moral  sense^ 

as:  — 

Soyez  charitaUes  envert  lea  pauvres,  be  charitable  tovrards  the  poor. 
Ccmportez-vous  bien  envers  lui,  behave  well  towards  him  (with  regard  to 
tiim). 

Vers  expresses  motion  and  is  put  before  names  i)f  |»lace8  and 
persons ;  — 

Vers  la  cdline,  towards  the  liilL 

n  s'avanfa  vers  moi,  he  advanced  towar«i!>  me 

Chez. 
Chez  might  be  rendered  in  English  by  at  tht  hoti9e  of,  wtth^ 
among,  etc.     Ex. :  — 

Chez  votre  pere,  at  your  father's. 

Chez  les  Romahis,  aoiong  the  Romans. 

Chacun  est  maitre  chez  ^oi,  everybody  is  master  in  his  own  boose. 

Je  viens  de  chez  vous,  I  come  from  your  house. 

Ebrs  de,  hors. 

1.  Hors  de  denotes  an  exclusion  from  a  place,  out  of,  outside  of 
without.     Ex. :  — 

Sors  de  la  maison,  out  of  the  house. 
Hon  da  royaume,  out  of  the  kingdom. 

KoTE.   In  this  signification  de  may  be  left  out,  as :  Hors  la  maison,  hors 
la  barriere,  etc. 

2.  Hors  de  is  also  used  in  a  figurative  or  temporal  sense,  as :  — 

/?  est  hors  de  danyer,  he  is  out  of  danger. 
Hors  d'dat,  out  of  condition,  unable. 

3.  Hors  (without  de)  signifies  except,  besides :  — 

Hors  cela  nous  sommes  d' accord,  with  the  exception  of  that  we  are  agreed. 
Note.  In  this  senco  hormis  is  sometimes  used  for  hors,  more  frequently 


300  Xn.     SEIZIEME  LEgON. 

D^avec,  (Tentre,  de  dessoiis,  etc. 
Some  prepositions  are  preceded  by  de,  which  serves  to  indicate 
fche  point  from  which  an  action  proceeds,  aa : — 
Ma  separation  d'avec  mon  pere. 
'iA.j  separation  from  my  father. 
On  arracha  l^enfant  d'entre  les  bras  de  sa  mere. 
They  tore  the  child  from  the  arms  of  its  mother. 
On  le  lira  de  dessous  le  lit. 
They  drew  him  from  under  the  bed. 

Sans. 
Sans,  without,  is  sometimes  expressed  in  English  by  but  for 
Elxample :  — 

Sans  lui,  je  serai  mort  de  /aim. 
But  for  him,  I  should  have  starved. 

^. 

This  word  is  a  contraction  for  en  les.  It  is  used  for  university 
degrees.     Ex. :  — 

Bachelier  es  lettres,  bachelor  of  arta. 

THEME   34. 

1.  Where  are  you  going?  2.  I  am  going  into  the  country.  3. 
My  friend  arrived  in  the  beginning  of  summer ;  he  was  received 
with  open  arms.  4.  Is  this  book  to  (a)  your  taste  ?^  5.  No,  I 
do  not  like  it.  (^It  does  not  please  me).  6.  I  met  that  gentleman 
on  my  journey  in  Italy.  7.  Is  Mr.  A.  at  home?  8.  Yes,  sir;  he 
is  in  the  garden.  9.  In  the  absence  of  the  king,  who  is  now  m 
Italy,  these  afikirs  must  be  suspended.'  10.  The  poor  man  had  to 
choose  between  slavery^  and  death.  11.  Wliy  has  she  been  so 
anjust  towards  her  parents?  12.  Did  you  arrive  before  or  after 
four  o'clock  ?  13.  Before  the  church  there  are  three  high  poplars.* 
14.  My  neighbor  was  kindly  disposed  towards  me.  15.  I  found 
this  letter  among  ray  papers.  16.  Brandy  (J eau-de-vie)  is  the 
Bource  of  great  evils  among  that  people. 

1.  Gout,  ta.    2.  Suspendre.    3.  L'esclavagey  m.    4.  PenptUr,  m. 


REMARK8   ON   SOME   PREPOSITIONS.  301 

THEME   35. 

1.  They  (on)  told  me  amongst  other  things,  that  the  ship  had 
been  taken  by  the  enemy  (pL).  2.  The  old  man  was  unable  {not 
in  a  condition)  to  do  anything  for  her.  3.  He  has  sold  all  his 
horses,  except  one  or  two.  4.  Now  we  turn  to  (towards)  the  south. 
5.  Among  the  merchants  in  London,  there  are  many  beneficent' 
men.  6.  He  lives  with  his  brother.  7.  The  tailor  will  come  to 
vour  house  to-raoiTOw.  8.  Where  do  you  come  from  '(  9.  I  come 
&T)m  my  aunt's.  10.  The  wooden  horse  was  outside  the  walls^  of 
Troy.  11.  The  patient'  is  at  present  out  of  danger.  12.  Nobody 
besides  myself  was  present.  13.  Out  of  (swr)  sixty  soldiers  who 
tried  the  attack,  twenty-five  fell  into  {entre)  the  hands  of  the  enemy 
(jo/.).  14,  One  must  distinguish  true  friendship  from  {d'avec) 
(the)  false.     15.  The  dog  sprang  out*  from  under  the  table. 

1.  Bienfaisant.    2.  Les  tnurs  de  Troie.    3.  Le  malade.    4.  Sauter. 

n.     HOW  TO   EXPRESS   SOME  ENGLISH  PREPOSITIONS. 

Above. 

Above,  when  it  expresses  time  or  number,  so  as  to  signify  more 
than  or  longer  than,  b  rendered  in  French  by  plxts  de      Kx.  :  — 

The  fight  lasted  above  four  hours. 
Le  comUit  dura  plus  de  quatre  heures.. 
It  is  above  twenty  miles  from  here. 
fl  y  a  plus  de  vingt  lieues  d'ici. 

About. 
1.  About,  in  the  sense  of  around,  is  to  be  r«^ tiered  by  aufour 
de.     2.    In  the  signification  of  concerning,  it  ts  touchant,  concer- 
nant,  sur,  or  simply  de.     3.   In  speaking  of  things  which  people 
Tarry  about  them,  it  is  translated  with  sur.     Ex. :  — 

1.  All  thronged  about  the  prince. 

Tout  le  inoiule  se  pressa  antour  da  prince. 

2.  1  will  speak  to  him  al)0ut  our  afTuir  (business). 
Je  Lui  parlerai  toucliaiit  (or  sur  or  de)  notre  affaire. 

3.  I  have  no  money  about  me,  je  n'ai  pas  d'u/t^ui  sur  moi. 


d02  XVI.      SEIZIEMB  LEgOM. 

At. 
1.  At  IS  most  commonly  rendered  by  a  with  or  without  an  arti- 
cle. 2.  After  nouns  or  verbs  denoting  derision,  anger,  surprise, 
sorrow,  etc.,  at  is  rendered  by  de.  3.  It  is  translated  chez  when, 
in  English,  it  precedes  the  word  hovLSCy  either  expressed  or  unde^ 
stood.     Ex. :  — 

1 .  We  were  at  dinner,  nous  ilions  a  diner. 

Do  you  play  at  cards,  jouez-vous  aux  cartes  t 

2.  She  laughed  at  him,  elte  se  moqua  de  lui. 
I  am  surprised  at  what  you  say. 

Je  suis  surjms  de  ce  que  vous  dites. 
S.  We  were  at  your  aunt's,  nous  Aions  chez  voire  tante. 

By. 

1.  By  denoting  the  agent  or  cause  is  translated  de  or  par  (see 
p.  135,  2).     Ex.:  — 

Mr.  Bell  is  respected  by  everybody. 
M.  Bell  est  respects  de  tout  le  monde. 
Troy  was  destroyed  by  the  Grecki. 
Troie  fut  detruite  par  les  Grecs. 

2.  In  affirmations  and  swearing  by  is  translated  par: 
He  swears  by  his  honor,  t7  en  jure  par  son  honneur. 

3.  By,  after  the  verbs  to  sell,  to  buy,  to  work,  etc.,  preceding  n 
noun  of  weight  or  measure,  day,  week,  month,  or  year,  is  rendered 
in  French  by  a  with  the  definite  article.     Ex. :  — 

I  sell  the  tea  by  the  pound,  je  vends  leth€ala  livre. 
We  work  by  the  hour  or  by  the  day. 
Nom  travaillons  a  I'heure  ou  a  la  joum€e. 

4.  When  preceding  a  numeral  immediately  followed  by  an  adjec- 
tive of  dimension,  by  is  rendered  in  French  by.  sur.     Ex. : 

This  room  is  fifteen  feet  long  by  ten  wide. 

Cette  chambre  a  quinze  pieds  de  longueur  sur  dix  de  largeur. 

5.  By,  immediately  following  the  verbs  to  kill,  to  wound,  etc., 
is  translated  in  French  by  d'un  coup  de,  when  it  expresses  the  blow, 
wound,  firing,  etc.,  of  an  instrument  by  which  a  man  was  wounded, 
killed^  etc      Ex.:  — 


RZMAEKS  ON  SOME  PREPOSITIONS.        303 

The  ofliccr  was  wounded  by  a  hullct. 
L'officier  fat  hless^f  d'un  coup  de  fusil. 
Achilles  was  killed  at  the  siege  of  Troy  by  an  arrow. 
Achille  fut  tu€  an  siege  de  Troie  d'un  coup  de  Jleche. 
Note.   If  the  blows  have  been  repeated,  a  coups  de  is  used.  Id  which  caw 
ft  is  most  commonly  rendered  in  English  by  mth.     Ex. :  — 
They  knocked  him  down  with  a  stick. 
Hi  I'assommererU  a  coups  de  baton, 

THEME  30. 

1.  My  father  was  not  above  twenty-two  years  old  when  he  was 
married.^  2.  My  uncle's  country-bouse*  is  very  handsome ;  but  it 
cost  him  above  eighty  thousand  francs.  3.  It  is  above  a  year  since 
my  friend  set  oflf  for*  America.  4.  Rome  was  built  by  Romulus. 
6.  The  poor  man  has  been  driven  out*  of  his  house  by  his  creditors.' 
6.  I  will  get  up  to-morrow  at  six  o'clock.  7.  Were  you  at  Mrs. 
D.'s  ball  last  night?  8.  I  will  pay  you  at  the  end  of  this  month. 
9.  I  rejoice  greatly  at  your  good  luck.'  10.  She  always  smiles'  at 
everything  that  is  said.  11.  WTacre  was  your  sister  this  morning? 
12.  She  was  at  her  aunt's.  13.  ^ly  box*  is  a  foot  and  a  half  deep 
by  two  wide  and  four  long.     14.  IIaro!d  was  wounded  by  an  arrow.' 

15.  William  the  Second  was  killed  by  an  arrow  in  the  New- Forest. 

16.  He  is  so  strong  that  with  his  fist^"  (5,  Note)  he  could  knock 
down"  an  ox.  17.  They  killed  the  dog  with  stones.  18.  The  sol- 
diers kill  one  another  with  bayonets.^ 

1.  To  be  married,  se  marier.  2.  La  nuiison  de  campagne.  3.  Pour.  i.  ChasBi. 
6.  Criancier,  m.  6.  Bonheur.  7.  Sourire.  8.  Le  coffre.  9.  FUche,  f.  10.  Le 
poing,    11.  Abaitre.    12.  La  balonette. 

From. 
1.   From,  preceding  the  name  of  a  person,  or  a  possessive  adjoo- 
ttvo,  or  a  personal  or  interrogative  pronoun  after  the  verbs  to  go,  to 
some,  to  send,  etc.,  is  generally  rendered  by  de  la  part  de.    Ex. :  — 

Many  compliments  from  Dr.  O. 

Bien  des  compliments  de  la  part  de  Afonsieur  le  dodeur  Q, 

I  come  from  him  or  her  (from  them),  etc. 

Je  liens  de  sa  part  (de  leur  part). 


304  XVI.      8EIZIEME  LE^ON. 

2.  From,  meaning  jfrom  some  one's  house,  is  m  French  dt  chaz. 

Example :  — 
I  come  from  ray  uncle's,  aunt's,  etc. 
Je  viens  de  chez  mon  oncle,  —  de  chez  ma  tante,  etc. 

3.  From  —  to  is  rendered  by  de  —  en.     Ex. :  — 

He  went  from  street  to  street,  from  town  to  town,  etc. 
U  alia  de  rue  en  me,  de  ville  en  ville,  etc. 

Note.  When  two  names  of  towns  or  villages  are  mentioned,  to  is  ren- 
dered by  a.     Ex. :  — 
From  Paris  to  Rouen,  de  Pajns  a  Rouen. 

4.  From  is  rendered  by  depuis,  and  to  hjjtisqu'a^  when  speak- 
mg  of  extent  or  time.     Ex. :  — 

From  Easter  to  Christmas,  depuis  Pdques  jusqu*a  NoSl. 

In. 

1.  j5i  —  dans  or  en,  see  these  words  in  the  first  part  of  this  Les- 
son. 

2.  In,  after  words  denoting  pain,  hurting,  etc.,  and  preceding  a 
possessive  adjective  with  any  part  of  the  body,  is  to  be  rendered  by 
a  with  the  definite  article.     Ex. :  — 

I  have  constantly  a  pain  in  my  head. 
J'ai  toujours  mal  a  la  tete. 

3     In  adverbial  expressions  of   time,  in  is  not  expressed  in 
French.     Ex. :  — 
In  the  morning,  le  matin.    In  the  evening,  le  soir. 

On  or  upon. 

1.  On  or  upon  is  most  generally  sur.     Ex.  :  — 
He  climbed  upon  the  tree,  il  grimpa  sur  I'arbre. 

2.  After  the  verbs  to  play,  to  live,  to  depend,  and  the  like,  on 
CT  upon  is  rendered  by  de.     Ex.  :  — 

You  play  on  the  violin,  and  I  play  on  the  flute. 
Vous  jouez  du  violon  et  moi,  je  joue  de  la  Jlute. 
A  good  end  often  depends  on  a  good  beginning. 
Une  bonne  fin  depend  souvent  d'un  ban  commencement. 
The  prisoner  lives  on  bread  and  water. 
Le  prisonnier  vit  de  pain  et  d'eau. 


REMARKS  ON  SOME   PREPOSITIONS.  306 

3.  The  preposition  on,  before  the  days  of  the  week  and  with 
dates,  is  dropped  in  French.     Ex.  :  — 

Come  on  Sunday,  lyenez  dhnnnche. 
On  the  twelfth  of  Maj,  le  doiize  mat. 

4.  On,  denoting  time,  m  other  cases  is  translated  hy  en. 

Over. 

This  preposition  is  commonly  rendered  in  French  by  sur,  but  ii 
must  be  expressed  by  the  Part.  Past  of  the  verbs  passer,  Jinir, 
achever,  when  it  denotes  an  action  ended.     Ex.  :  — 

As  soon  as  the  rain  will  be  over. 

Des  (/lie  la  pliiie  sera  pass^e. 

Is  dinner  over,  U  diner  est-il  Jinif 

With. 

1.  With  is  rendered  by  de  after  such  verbs  as,  to  die,  to  meddle, 
to  do,  to  dispense,  to  load,  to  cover,  to  fill,  and  after  some  adjeo- 
tivcs,  as :  pleased,  contented, -etc.  (see  p.  250,  §  1  and  2).    Ex.:  — 

He  died  with  cold,  il  mournt  de  froid. 

The  wagon  is  loaded  with  goods,  la  voiture  est  charg€e  de  marchandises. 

2.  With  is  expressed  by  a  and  the  article  before  nouns  denoting 
in  what  manner  a  thiag  is  done  or  made.     Ex.  :  — 

To  draw  with  a  pencil,  dessiner  au  crayon. 

To  fight  with  pistols,  se  battre  au  pistolet. 

Note.  Charger  takes  a,  and  se  battre,  au,  a  la,  a  I'  (as  the  norm  may 
require),  before  the  names  of  materials  or  weapons  generally  used  for  loadiug 
fire-anns  or  for  ii]^hting  ;  othcnvise,  with  is  rendered  by  avec.     Ex.  :  — 

Clia'ger  an  fusil  a  balles,  avec  des  pierres.  Se  l>attre  a  l'€p€e,  an  pistolet, 
avec  des  luiches,  avec  des  martaux. 

The  araltiguous  English  sentence,  lie  struck  the  raau  with  a  wooden 
Isg,  would  be  translated  into  French  by  II  frappa  I'homme  a  lajambe  de  hois, 
if  the  man  was  crippled ;  but  if  the  wooden  leg  is  the  weapon  of  attack, 
arec  is  used. 

3.  With  must  not  be  expressed  after  the  following  verbs  :  to 
meet  with,  rencontrer ;  to  trust  with,  conjier  qch.  a  qn.  ;  to  supply 


306  XVI.     SEIZlfiSTB  LEgON. 

witli,  fotimir  qch.  a  qn. ;  to  reproacli  with,  rcprocher  qch.  h  qn. 

Examples :  — 

We  ^ill  supply  him  with  everything. 
Nous  lui  foumirons  tout. 
I  reproached  hira  with  his  ingratitude. 
Je  lui  reprochai  son  ingratitude. 

Remark.  Prepositions  are  placed  in  French  before  the  words  they  gov 
em,  though  in  English  they  are  sometimes  placed  after.  .  Ex. :  — 
Whom  do  you  speak  to,  a  qui  parlez-vous  f 
What's  that  for,  ponr  quoi  cela  f 
The  man  whom  you  are  interested  in. 
L'homme  pour  qui  vous  vous  int^ressez. 


THEME  87. 

1.  Go  from  me  to  IMr.  S.,  and  tell  him  that  I  am  expecting  him. 
2.  From  whom  do  you  come  ?  3.  I  come  from  Miss  B.  4. 
Charles  was  wounded  in  his  arm,  and  not  (now)  in  his  leg.  5.  I 
have  very  often  a  pain  in  my  teeth.  6.  I  will  call  upon  you  in  the 
afternoon,  and  in  the  evening  (I  will)  go  to  the  play.  7.  Upon 
what  instrument  does  your  sister  play?  8.  She  plays  the  piano. 
9.  That  happened^  on  the  12th  [of]  March.  10.  I  am  in  the 
habit^  of  taking  a  cup  of  coffee  as  soon  as  dinner  is  over.  11.  Do 
not  meddle^  with  my  affairs ;  attend  to  your  own.  12.  Is  that 
house  covered  with  slate*  or  tiles?*  13.  It  is  covered  with  tiles. 
14.  This  picture  seems  to  be  done  with  chalk.'  15.  When  you 
meet  a  poor  man,  never  reproach  him  [with]  his  poverty.  16. 
France  extends'  from  the  Rhine  to  the  Atlantic®  Ocean.  17.  What 
does  he  complain'  of?  18.  We  have  travelled  from  Switzerland  to 
Italy.  19.  You  spend  all  the  day  in  going  {a  alhr)  from  house  to 
house,  from  street  to  street,  from  place  to  place.  20.  Those  labor- 
ers^°  work  from  {depuis)  morning^*  to  night.^  21.  I  walk  every 
day  from  twelve  (midi)  to  three. 

1.  Se  pasaa.  2.  To  be  In  the  habit  of,  avoir  Vhabitride  de.  3.  Se  ntHer.  4.  Ar. 
doisz,  in  singular.  6.  Tuile,  in  plural.  6.  Craie,{.  7.  S^etendre.  8.  VOciaai  4i 
lanltfque.    9.  Se  plaindre  de  qch.    10.  Ouvrier,  m.    11.  Put  the  artioltf. 


08ES   OF  THE  CONJUNCTION  QtJB.  301 

XVII.      DIX-SEPTlfiME    LE9ON. 


DIFFERENT  USES  OF  THE  CONJUNCTION    QUE. 

I.    QUE  WITH  THE  INDICATIVE. 

1.  The  conjunction  que  is  used  1.  to  join  the  two  terms  of  a 
comparison ;  2.  in  a  restrictive  sense  for  but  or  only,  as : 

Elle  n'a  que  deux  /reres,  she  has  only  two  brothers. 

2.  The  que  of  admiration  or  excla'nation  expresses  wonder  01 
surprise;  it  answers  to  the  English  words  how,  how  much,  how 
many.      Ex.  :  — 

Que  vous  etes  heitreux  I  how  happy  you  arc  I 
Que  la  terre  est  petite  en  comparaison  avec  le  scieil! 
How  small  is  the  earth  compared  with  the  son  I 
Que  de  peine  vous  prenez  pour  moi ! 
How  much  trouble  you  take  for  me  1 

3.  In  short  exclamations  que  is  inserted  afler  the  noon  when  the 
verb  is  omitted.     Ex.  :  — 

Quel  beau  pays  que  Vltalie  / 

What  a  beautiful  country  Italy  is  I 

Quxl  homme  que  ce  F€n€lon  I 

What  a  man  that  Fenelon  is  {or  was)  I 

4.  It  stands  for  pourquoi  in  negative  exclamations,  as :  — 
Que  ne  puis-je  vous  aider  I    why  can  I  not  assist  you  1 

5.  The  French  periphrase  of  a  sentence  with  c^esi  is  followed  by 
quBf  whereas  in  English  this  is  not  expressed.     Ex.:  — 

Vest  une  belle  chose  que  la  discrAion, 
Discretion  is  a  good  thing. 
C'est  une  chose  d/lestahle  que  la  haine. 
Hatred  is  a  detestable  thing. 

If,  however,  an  Infinitive  follows,  ^  need  not  be  used :  — 


308  xrn.    t>ix-septieme  LEgoN. 

Cest  une  honte  (que)  (Tignorer  sa  langue  matemeUe. 
It  is  a  shame  not  to  know  one's  mother  tongue. 

6.  Que  must  be  inserted  after  c'est-a-dire,  that  is  to  say,  wnen  a 
verb  follows.  Que  is  also  frequently  used  after  voila  and  peut-etr* 
Example :  — 

Vous  serez  par/a  itement  Uhres,  c'est-a-dire  que  vous  ne  d^pendrez  de  persortne, 
Yoa  will  be  perfectly  free,  that  is  to  say,  you  will  depend  upon  nobody. 

7.  In  the  expressions :  que  oui,  yes ;  que  si!  0  yes !  qus  r^on, 
no ;  ^'Me  is  used  ploonastically.     Ex.:  — 

Je  dis  que  oui,  I  say  yes. 

8.  Que  stands  for  since  instead  of  depuis  que: 

Combten  y  a-t-il  que  votre  soeur  est  mortet 
How  long  is  it  since  your  sister  died  1 

9.  Que  is  used  for  when  after  a  peine,  scarcely,  and  in  the  sig- 
nification of  as  or  when,  after  the  specification  of  a  time,  in  which 
case  the  use  of  lorsque  would  be  incorrect.     Ex. :  — 

A  peine  €lait-il  sorti,  que  la  maison  s'^croula. 
Scarcely  was  he  gone  out,  when  the  house  fell. 
Un  matin  que  je  sortais  de  tres-bonne  heure. 
One  morning  as  I  went  out  early. 
Maintenant  que  vous  etes  en  France,  etc. 
Now  that  you  are  in  France.  ... 

10.  Que  corresponds  to  the  English  that  after  all  verbs  of  think- 
ing, feeling,  saying,*  as :  dire,  affirmer,  repondre,  declarer, 
croire,  penser,  sentir,  etc. ,  and  usually  takes  the  Indicative  when 
these  words  are  used  afiirmatively.  In  English  the  that  is  oft«D 
omitted,  but  in  French  it  must  always  be  employed.     Ex.:  — 

Dites-lui  que  je  V attends. 

Tell  him  that  I  am  waiting  for  him. 

H  nCa  r€pondu  qii'il  n'en  savait  rien. 

He  answered  mo  that  he  knew  nothing  of  it 

On  croit  qu'dle  est  tres-riche. 

She  is  supposed  to  be  very  rich. 

•"VTuurc  lu  Latin  the  Aco.Ib  used  with  the  Ii\fimiiV8. 


t!8fiS  01'  TflE  CONJtJliC'riON  OttB.  SOd 

NoTB.   Que  is  not  only  always  expressed  in  French,  bnt  repeated  before 
each  member  of  the  proposition.    Ex.:  — 
Je  crois  que  vous  vous  trompez  et  que  vous  ne  r€ussirez  pcu. 
I  thiiLk  jou  are  mistaken,  and  that  yon  will  not  succeed. 

11.  In  many  cases  where  the  conjunction  is  repeated  in  English, 
the  French,  instead  of  repeating  it,  put  que  in  the  place  of  it.  This 
IB  the  case  with  lorsque,  qv^nd,  pendant  que,  tandis  que,  parcc 
que,  tant  que  and  des  que.     Ex.:  — 

Lorsque  I'empereur  fat  revenu  et  qu'il  (and  when  he)  eiU  visits  le  camp,  U 
risolut  de  livrer  bataille. 

Tandis  que  Charles  XII  donnait  un  roi  a  la  Pdogne  soumise,  que  le  Dane- 
nvirk  n'osait  le  troubler,  et  que  le  roi  de  Pmsse  recherchait  son  amiti€,  le  czar  de- 
vaxait  de  jour  en  jour  plus  redoutable. 


THEME  JW, 

1.  I  am  much  younger  than  you.  2.  Caroline  is  only  seventeen 
years  old.  3.  How  pretty  she  is  I  4.  How  I  hate  flatterers  !^  5. 
How  small  is  the  part  of  the  world  which  we  inhabit !  '^  6.  What 
[que  de)  misfortunes  you  have  undergone  !  ^  V.  If  you  are  [avez) 
cold,  why  (§4)  don't  you  put  on  your  cloak  ?  8.  It  is  a  very  dif- 
ficult thing  to  know  (§  5)  [how  to]  keep  what  one  has.  9.  Look, 
itraius!  10.  Perhaps  he  will  conic.  11.  1  believe  (that)  you 
are  right.  12.  He  told  me  that  he  had  not  yet  received  a  letter 
from  his  uncle.  13.  Are  you  ready?  14.  O  no!  (§7)  T  cannot 
finish  before  an  hour.  15.  Have  you  not  been  there  ?  16.  O  yes ! 
1 1.  How  long  is  it  since  you  lost  your  father  ?  1 8,  One  day  when 
the  two  sparrows'  had  flowu  out,^  the  childi*en  took  away^  their 
nest.  19.  Tell  me  the  day  (on  which,  §  9)  you  think "  of  leaving. 
20.  I  think  he  is  not  at  home.  2 1.  Scarcely  is  he  out  of  bed  be- 
fore he  begins  to  work.  22.  Why  (§  4)  did  you  not  tell  it  ?  23. 
When  you  have  acknowledged  yom- faults,  and  (§11)  have  repair- 
ed^ tham,  I  will  forgive  you. 

1.  Flatteur.  2.  UaUter.  3.  ^prouves.  4  Le  moincau  6  jStaierU 
eortii.    Q.  Eiilever.    7.  Vou9  comptez  paHir.    8  Repares 


SIO  XVn.      DIX-SEPTlfiME  LEgOM, 

n.    QUE  WITH  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

1.  Que,  in  a  conditional  sense,  is  used  in  the  beginning  of  a  sen- 
tence for  the  word  whether,  and  in  the  middle,  to  avoid  the  repeti' 
don  of  si ;  in  both  cases  it  governs  the  Subjunctive  mood.    Ex.:  — 

"Wlicther  he  come  or  not,  I  do  not  care. 

Qu'il  vienne  ou  non,  je  ne  m'en  soucie  pas. 

If  soirrbody  calls  and  I  am  out,  send  for  me. 

Si  queJqu'un  vient  vie  voir  et  que  je  sois  sorti,  envoyez-moi  chercher. 

If  you  meet  her,  and  (if)  you  have  time  to  speak  to  her. 

Si  I  ous  la  rencoiUrez  et  que  vous  ayez  le  temps  de  lui  parlor. 

2.  For  tiUf  instead  oi  jusqu'a  ce  que  after  attendre^  to  wait. 
Example :  — 

Wait  till  it  gets  less  cold. 
Attendez  qu'il  fasse  moins  froid. 
Tou  must  wait  till  I  am  back. 
JX  faut  atiendre  que  je  sois  de  retour. 

3.  For  the  English  tlurd  person  of  the  Imperative,  let  him  or  let 
them.     Ex.:  — 

Let  him  come,  qu*il  vienne. 

Let  them  do  it,  qu'iU  {qu'elles)  le  /assent. 

4.  For  ihatf  instead  of  pour  que^  afin  que : — 

Come  here  that  I  may  speak  to  you. 
Venez  ici  que  je  vous  parle. 

6.  Que  is  used  with  ne  for  the  English  hut  (or  hut  that)  after 
verbs  expressing  doubly  fear,  etc.  (see  p.  293,  §  15).     Ex.:  — 

I  don't  doubt  but  that  you  are  right. 
Je  ne  doute  pas  que  vous  ii'ayez  raison. 

6.  In  the  same  manner  que  is  used  for  hefore^  instead  of  avant 
que  ;  for  unless,  instead  of  a  moins  que  ;  for  without^  instead  of  sans 
quCf  and  for  yet,  instead  of  el  cependant.     Ex.:  — 

I  shall  not  go  out  before  you  are  in. 
/«  ne  iortirai  pas  que  vous  ne  aoyet  renM, 


U8EH    OF   THE    CONJUNCTION   QUE.  311 

I  ahaH  not  pardon  you  unless  you  acknowledge  your  faulta. 

Je  ne  vous  pardonnerai  pas  que  vous  ne  reconnaissiez  vos  JatUet. 

He  takes  no  trip  without  some  accident  befalling  him. 

//  ne  fait  pas  de  voyage  qu'il  ne  lui  arrive  quelque  accident. 

Though  he  should  have  all  the  gold  in  the  world,  yet  he  would  not  be 
satisfied. 

//  aurait  tout  I'or  du  monde,  qu'il  ne  serait  pas  content. 

(For  the  use  of  que  instead  of  repeating  compound  conjunctions,  and  af- 
ier  verbs  governing  the  Subjunctive,  see  Lesson  19,  on  the  Subjunctive 
Mood,  §  12). 

THEME  39. 

1 .  Whether  it  rain  or  not,  I  must  go  out  directly.  2.  If  I  were 
rich  and  had  children,  I  would  give  them  a  good  education.  3. 
Whether  you  be  rich  or  poor,  you  should  {devez)  be  a  man  of  prob- 
ity. 4.  He  had  not  a  doubt  {did  not  doubt)  but  that  this  was  hia 
pursuer.^  5.  Wait  till  the  rain  is  over.  6.  A  miser*  might  have 
ill  the  gold  in  the  world,  he  would  never  be  satisfied.  7.  You  shall 
not  go  out  before  it  is  light.'  8.  Let  him  have  his  share.*  9.  Come 
that  I  may  tell  you  the  reason  of  that  thing  {en).  10.  May  heaven 
bless*  you  I  11.  May  the  earth  lie  lightly  on  him  {be  light^  to 
liim).  12.  Let  him  employ  his  time  well.  13.  I  shall  not  leavt 
the  house  {go  out)  before  you  pay  me.  14.  He  cannot  play  but 
he  hurts'  himself.  15.  If  you  go  to  Paris  and  (§  1)  will  take  me 
with  you,  I  shall  be  most  happy.*  IG.  My  friend  says  he  will  not 
pay  the  bookseller*  before  he  has  received  all  the  books  (which)  he 
(has)  ordered.  17.  I  shall  put  off'"  my  journey ;  I  shall  wait  till 
your  time  allows  you  to  accompany  me. 

1.  Persicuteur.  2.  Avare.  3.  To  be  light— /aire  Jour.  4.  Part,i.  5.  Binir, 
d.  JAg^re.  7.  Se  /aire  mcU.  8.  Most  h&ppy  —  £nchant4.  9.  Lt  libraire.  10. 
Remettre. 

reading  lesson. 

Lb  Conn£table  de- Bourbon  et  Bayard. 

(Fin.) 

Le  Connet.     Mais  ma  patrie  a  6t6  ingrate  apres  tant  de  servicefl 

.pe  je  lui  avals  rendus.     Le  roi  m'a  fait  uue  injustice  dnorme.    En 


312        '  XVn.      DIX-SEPTIEME  LEgON. 

me  d^pouillant*  de  mon  bien,  on  a  d^tach^  de  moi  jusqu*^  (even) 
mos  domestiques,  Matignon  et  d'Argouges.  J'ai  ^t^  contraint, 
pour  sauver  ma  vie,  de  in'euf  uir  presque  seul.  Que  voulais-tu  que 
je  fisse  ? 

Bai/,  Que  vous  souffrissiez  toutes  sortcs  de  maux,  plutot  que  de 
manqucr  a  la  France  ct  a  la  grandeur  de  votre  maison.  Si  la  per- 
secution etait  trop  violente,  vous  pouviez  vous  retirer :  mais  il  va- 
lait  mieux  etre  pauvre,  obscur,  inutile  a  tout,  que  de  prendre  les 
armes  centre  nous.  Votre  gloire  edt  ote  au  comble'^  dans  la  pau- 
vrete  et  dans  le  plus  miserable  exil. 

Le  Conn.  Mais  ne  vois-tu  pas  que  la  vengeance  s'est  jointo  k 
Tambition  pour  roe  jeter  dans  cette  extrdmit^  ?  J'ai  voulu  que  le 
roi  se  repcntit  de  m'avoir  traits  si  mal. 

Bai/.  U  fallait  Ten  faire  repentir  par  une  patience  h  toute 
^prcuve,  qui  n'est  pas  moins  la  vertu  d'un  heros  que  le  courage. 

Le  Conn.  Mais  le  roi,  dtant  si  injuste  et  si  aveugle*  par  sa 
mere,  mdritaib-il  que  j'eusse  de  si  grands  dgards  pour  lui  ? 

£ai/.  Si  le  roi  ne  le  mdritait  pas,  la  France  entiere  le  mdritait. 
La  dignity  meme  de  la  couronne,  dont  vous  etes  un  des  heritiers,  le 
mdritait.  Vous  vous  deviez*  k  vous-m^me  d'epargner*  la  France, 
dont  vous  pouviez  etre  un  jour  roi. 

Le  Conn.  Eh  bien  I  j'ai  tort,  je  Tavoue ;  mais  ne  sais-tu  p;is 
combien  les  meilleurs  coours  ont  de  peine  k  register  k  leur  ressenti- 
ment? 

Bay.  Je  le  saia  bien :  mais  le  vrai  courage  consiste  k  r^sister. 
Si  vous  connaissez  votre  faute,  batez-vous  de  la  rdparer.  Pour  moi, 
je  meurs,  et  je  vous  trouve  plus  k  plaindre  dans  vos  prospdritds, 
que  moi  dans  mes  soufirances.  Quand  Tempereur  ne  vous  trompe- 
rait  pas  quand  m6me  il  vous  donnerait  sa  sojur  en  manage,  ct  qu'il 
partagerait  la  France  avec  vous,  il  n'effacerait  point  la  tache^ 
qui  deshonore  votre  vie.  Le  connetable  de  Bourbon  rebelle  ! 
ah  !  quelle  honte  !  ficoutez  Bayard  mourant  comme  il  a  vecu, 
ct  ne  ccssant  de  dire  la  verite: 

1.  strip.    8.  The  highest.    8.  Blinded.    4.  To  owe.    B.  To  spare.    6.  The  Btain. 


0SB  OP  THE  TENSES  OF  THE   INDICATirE.  31S 


XVIII.    DIX-HUITIEME    LE9ON 


USE  OF  THE  TENSES  OF  THE  INDICATIVB. 

I.    PRESENT  TENSE. 

1 .  The  Present  of  the  Indicative  corresponds  to  the  English  pres- 
ent. In  French  there  is  only  one  form  of  this  tense,  as  :  Je  lis,  I 
read  ;  faime,  I  like.  The  English  forms :  I  am  reading,  I  do  read, 
etc.,  must  therefore  always  be  translated  as  if  they  were :  I  read,y# 
Hs.     Ex.:  — 

The  children  arc  playing  in  the  garden. 
*     Les  en/ants  jouent  au  jardin. 
Nous  dinons  toujours  a  deux  heures. 

2.  The  Present  tense  is  sometimes  employed  for  the  Future, 
when  speaking  of  actions  which  are  to  be  done  at  a  time  proximate 
or  near,  as :  — 

Je  pars  demain,  I  (shall)  set  out  to-morrow. 

3.  It  is  also  used  in  a  narrative,  instead  of  the  Preterite,  in  or- 
der to  give  more  vivacity  to  the  description,  and  to  make  the  event, 
as  it  were,  present.  For  this  reason  it  is  called  also  the  historical 
or  narrative  Present.     Ex.:  — 

A  ceete  nouvelle,  qu'il  repousse  avec  irritation,  Napoleon  descend  de  la  mm- 
lagne  da  Saliit  et  s'approche  de  la  Moskiva  et  de  la  porte  Dorogomilow.  B 
s'arrete  (stops)  encore  a  I'enirtfe  de  cette  barriere^  mais  inufilement.  Murat  h 
presse,  etc. 

Here  repousse,  descend,  s'approche,  s'arrete,  presse  are  historical  Presents  ("in- 
stead of  repoussa,  descendit,  s'approcJia,  s*arreta,  pressa).  It  is  particularly 
liked  for  euphony,  when  several  Preterites  of  the  first  conjugation  would  be 
used.    Example :  — 

Mentor  range  les  soldats,  il  marche  a  leur  tite  et  s'avance  vers  Us  ennemis  (Id 
itead  of  rangea,  marcha,  ^avanga). 

4.  The  Preseru  tense  must  also  be  used  for  the  English  Perfect, 


314  xriii.    Dix-HuiTiEME  L^goii. 

when  a  duration  of  time  is  expressed  in  wliich  the  condition  is  still 

continuing :  — 

How  long  have  you  been  here  ' 

Depuis  quand  etes-vous  id  f 

Ha  ye  you  had  this  dog  long  1 

Y  a-t-il  longtemps  que  vous  avez  ce  chien  t 

I  have  had  him  these  two  years. 

Je  I'ai  depuis  deux  ans. 

If  the  Compound  of  the  Present  were  used  in  these  sentences,  it  would 
imply  that  the  condition  no  longer  existed.  H  y  o,  deux  ans  qu'il  a  M 
mort,  would  be  absurd  in  French,  as  it  would  imply  that  he  toas  alive  again. 

THEME  40. 

1.  Do  you  speak  French?  2.  Yes,  sir,  I  do.  3.  Is  it  raining? 
4.  No,  it  does  not  rain.  5.  I  do  not  like  lazy  boys.  6.  I  cannot* 
write  with  a  bad  pen.  7.  I  see  a  man  who  is  asleep.^  8.  What 
are  you  doing  ?  9.  I  am  reading  a  very  amusing  book ;  you  must 
read  it  also ;  to-morrow  I  shall  send  it  to  you.  10.  I  set  out  to- 
morrow for  Germany.  11.  I  shall  be  ready  in  a  moment.  12. 
How  long  have  you  been  (§4)  in  Paris?  13.  I  have  been  here 
for  (depuis)  three  months.  14.  Have  you  had  this  stick'  long? 
15.  I  have  had  it  for  more  than  {de)  four  years.  16.  Has  your 
fiather  known  that  gentleman  long?  17.  I  think  he  has  known  him 
for  a  year  or  two. 
X,  Quidort.    2.  Canne,f. 


n.    PAST  TENSES. 

-'^.  The  Imperfect  tense  denotes  continuity  of  an  action  or  ooncU- 
tion,  in  past  time.  It  is  therefore  used  to  express  what  was  custom- 
aiy  Of  habitual.  It  is  also  used  in  descriptions  of  persons  and  of 
things,  in  expressing  physical  and  moral  qualities,  traits  of  charac- 
ter etc.*     Ex.:  — 

*  Hence  it  is  called  by  some  grammarians  tbe  Hmultaneou*  piut^  and  by  >omL 
tlie  tUtcriptive  tense. 


USB  OP  THE  TENSES  OP  THE  INDICATIVR.  315 

Henri  TYAait  un  bon  prince^  U  arxiit  de  belles  qual'd€s,  il  aimait  sun  peKfile  o 
m  &ait  aim€. 

Je  ne  savais  pas  cela. 

Pendant  mm  s^jour  a  la  campagne  je  me  Icvais  tous  les  matins  a  cinq  heuret 
a  je  faisais  de  loncjues  pivmenades. 

Cali/pxo  ne  pouvait  se  consoler  du  depart  d'  Ulysse.  Sa  grotie  ne  rCsonnait 
plus  de  son  chant.  Les  nymphes  qui  Ux  servaient,  n'osaierU  lui  purler'.  Eile  st 
promenait  souvent  seule,  etc. 

Lorsque  j'f^ais  en  pleine  iner,  je  m'amusais  quelqrie/ois  a  dessiner  les  beaux 
nuages,  semNalJes  a  des  groupes  de  montagnes,  qui  voguaient  a  la  suite  les  uns-des 
autres,  sur  I'azur  des  cieux. 

La  grotte  de  la  d^esse  €lait  sur  le  penchant  d'une  colline:  de  la  on  d^couvrait 
la  mer ;  d'un  autre  cotton  votjait  une  riviere  oh  se  montraient  des  ties  bord€esde 
hauls  peupliers  qin  portaient  leurs  teles  superbes  jusque  dans  les  nues.  Les 
divers  canaux  qui  fnnnaient  ces  ties,  semhlaient  se.  jouer  dam  la  camjHigne:  les 
uns  roulaient  leurs  catix  claires  avec  rapidit€;  d' autres  avaient  une  eau  /Hiisible 
et  dormante.  On  apercevait  de  loin  des  collines  et  des  montagnes  qui  se  perdaieni 
dans  les  nues.  Les  montagnes  voisinrs  Aaient  couvertes  de  pamjrres  verts  qui 
pendaient  en  festons:  le  raisin, plus  ^clatant  que  la  pourpre,  ne  pouvait  se  cacher 
sous  les  feuilles,  et  la  vigne  €tait  accabliie  sous  son  fruit. 

6.  When  two  occurrences  take  place,  that  which  is  interrupted 
by  the  other  and  which  was  lasting  before  the  other  happened,  must 
be  in  the  Imperfect  tense  :  — 

Je  dormais  (I  was  slcepinf?)  lorsqu'il  entra. 

Je  le  surpris  pendant  qu'il  €crivait. 

From  this  we  see  that  whenever  in  English  the  Tmperfect,  I  was,  with 
the  Part.  pres.  is  used  (I  was  sleeping,  I  was  writing,  etc.),  in  French  the 
Imperfect  tense  must  he  employed. 

7.  In  longer  narrations,  all  those  parts  which  do  not  form  the 
thread  of  the  narratix^e,  but  serve  only  to  illustrate  the  principal 
facts,  and  which  are  only  explanatory  additions  or  observations  of  the 
writer,  are  in  the  Imperfect  tense.     Ex.:  — 

Au  temps  que  Vltalie  Anit  franc^aise,  une  sedition  €clata  (broke  out)  dans  wk 
des  regiments  en  gamison  a  Livoume.  C'^ait  une  affaire  grave:  c'dait  bean- 
coup  plus  qu'une  mutinerie  de  soldats.  L'empereur  parut  extrememcnt  irriU, 
lorsqu'il  apprit  cette  nouvelle.  Ses  ordres  ^aient  precis  et  terriUesj  il  ne  voulaH 
pas  de  oonseils  Je  guerre,  etc. 


316  XVm.     DTX-ETTITlfiME  LEgON. 

Etait,  itaient  and  vonJait  serve  as  illustrative  additions  and  explanatory 
observations  of  the  writer  on  the  facts  expressed  by  the  verbs  <e/ato,  parui 
apprit. 

8.  Afler  the  conjunction  si,  if,  tbe  Imperfect  is  used  to  denote  a 
condition  or  supposition  (sea  §  18).     Ex.:  — 

Si  favais  de  Vargent.     Si  mon  frere  venait,  etc. 
n  me  demxnda  si  favais  des  keures  lihres. 
He  asked  me  if  I  had  some  hours  to  spare. 

9.  Sometimes  the  Lnperfect  is  used  instead  of  the  Conditional, 
to  denote  that  something  would  have  happened,  had  not  anothei 
occurrence  prevented  it,  as :  — 

J^^ais  perdu,  s'il  ne  m'avait  pas  retenu. 

I  should  have  been  lost,  if  he  had  not  held  me. 

Note.  In  a  similar  manner  the  expressions  :  shoxdd  have,  ought  to  have, 
and  could  have,  are  often  rendered  in  French  by  the  Imperfects:  H  fallait, 
je  devais,  il  pouvait,  etc.     Ex.:  — 

Vous  demez  me  U  dire  tout  de  suite. 

You  ought  to  have  told  me  directly. 

THEME  41. 

1.  Caesar  was  a  great  general.  2.  Henry  the  Fourth  was  a  good 
king,  he  loved  his  people.  3.  "We  were  at  dinner  when  the  cou- 
rier^ arrived  (Pret.).  4.  Tranquillity  reigned  throughout  (dans) 
the  whole  country.  6.  The  general  was  waiting  for  troops*  which 
were  io  {devaient)  come.  6.  My  father  studied  (used  to  study) 
much  when  he  was  young.  7.  K  he  came  now,  he  would  find  me 
prepared.  8.  When  I  was  at  Paris,  I  went  every  morning  to 
take  a  walk  in  the  Champs-Ely  sees,  or  in  the  Bois  de  Boulogne  ; 
afterwards'  I  came  home,  where  I  employed*  myself  till  dinner 
either  in  reading*  or  writing,  and  in  the  evening,  I  generally  went 
[for]  amusement*  to  the  French  Theatre  or  the  Opera.  9.  If  I 
were  in  France,  I  would  learn  French.  10.  If  he  had  something, 
he  would  give  it  to  you.  11.  I  asked  him  if  his  father  was  at 
home.  12.  lie  answered  that  he  did  not  know  it.  13.  I  thought 
you  were  wrong.     14.  I  observed  that  he  was  quite  pale.' 

1.  Lc  courier.     2.  Troupes,  pi.  f.     3,  Aprts  ceUt.     ♦.  S'occuper     6.  A  lire.     6 
atamuser.    7.  PdU. 


USB  OF  THE  TENSES  OP  THE  INDICATIVE.  317 

THE   PRETBRITB. 

10.  This  tense  (as:  TaHai,  je  vis,  je  regus,  etc.)  is  used  in 
French  to  express  a  particular  fact  or  event  entirely  elapsed,  which 
has  happened  but  once,  or  very  seldom,  at  a  definite  time.  It  is  the 
narrative  or  historical  tense.     Ex.:  — 

Je  fits  a  Rome  I'A^  pciss€. 

n  partit  le  20  Ociobre. 

Le$  Romains  rJiasserent  Tarrpiin  de  Rome. 

Apres  la  mort  d' Aristide,  Cimon  prit  les  renes  du  gouvemement. 

Ce  flit  Vipoqne  ou  la  Grece  commenga  a  produire  les  grands  hommes. 

Quand  les  ordres  de  Criton  furent  exAui€s,  un  domestique  apporta  la  coupe 
^cup,  goblet)  fatale. 

Le  premier  Octobre  1714  Charles  Xll  quitta  en/in  la  Turquie.  Let  Turcs 
accompagnerent  le  roi  jusqu'a  la  frontiere  et  eomblerent  ee  monarque  de  tons  les 
signes  de  leur  res})€ct  et  de  leur  admiration.  Pendant  cinq  jours  Charles  sup- 
porta  la  lenteur  qu'entraine  naturellement  un  long  cortege ;  le  sixieme  jour  il  per- 
dit  patience  et  congut  Vid€e  de  continuer  le  voyage  avec  deux  compagnons.  Ac- 
compagne  de  deux  colonels  suidois,  U  ahandonna  le  co.i^ge.  Tous  trois  Jran- 
chirent  la  frontiere  et  continuerent  le  voyage  a  cheval  avec  une  vitesse  extraordi- 
naire.    Aprhs  22  jours  Charles  arriva  devant  les  partes  de  Stralsund. 

11.  In  longer  narrations  all  the  facts  which  form  the  thread  of 
the  relation,  are  expressed  in  the  Preterite,  whereas  explanatory  re- 
marks servii/g  only  to  elucidate  or  complete  the  relation  of  the  facts, 
are  in  the  Imperfect  (see  §  7)  or  in  the  Pluperfect.     Ex.:  — 

Les  onze  magistrats  qui  veillaient  a  Vex€cution  des  criminels  se  rendirent  h  la 
prison  de  Socrate  pour  lui  annoncer  le  moment  de  son  tr€pas  (death).  PZm- 
sieurs  de  ses  disciples  entrerent  ensuite;  Us  €taient  a  peu  pres  au  nombre  de 
vingt ;  Us  trouverent  aupres  de  lui  Xdntippe,  son  €pouse,  qui  tenait  le  plus  jeune 
de  ses  enfarOs  entre  ses  bras.  Des  qu'elle  les  apergut,  eUe  ^€cria :  Ah  I  voUa 
vos  amis.  Socrate  pria  Criton  de  la  faire  remener  chez  elle  (to  take  hei 
home). 

Here  the  Preterites  rendirent,  entrerent,  trouverent,  aper^t,  s*€cria  and  pria 
express  the  facta,  whereas  qui  veillaient.  Us  €taient,  qui  tenait,  etc.,  are  inci- 
dental additions. 

12.  When  two  facts  occur  together  so  that  one  is  internipted  by 
the  other,  the  verb  which  expresses  the  interruption  is  in  the  Preter- 
He,  the  other  in  the  Imperfect.     Ex.:  — 


B18  XVm.     DTX-HUITI^MB  LsgoiT. 

•Te  dormais  qtuznd  U  entra. 

Je  dfjeunais  quand  vous  vintes  me  demander. 

I  was  breakfasting  when  you  came  to  ask  for  me. 

THEME  42. 

1.  I  saw  the  queen  of  England  last  year.  2.  My  aunt  died  tk 
day  before  yesterday.  3.  Cato  killed  himself  lest  he  should  (^ot 
psur  de)  fall  into  the  hands  of  Caesar.  4.  Marius  was  ill-treated 
by  {de)  fortune ;  however  he  did  not  lose  his  courage.  5.  Rome 
was,  for  (pendant)  more  than  two  hundred  years,  the  mistress^  of 
the  world.  6.  King  Pepin  died  in  768 ;  Charlemagne,  his  gon, 
succeeded  (him).  7.  We  set  oflf  as  soon  as  we  had^  the  order  for 
it  (en).  8.  My  brother's  servant  brought  me  a  letter  this  morning 
before  I  was  up.'  9.  Epaminondas  refused  the  present*  of  Daniis. 
10.  The  Duke  of  Bouillon  was  obliged  to  give  the  town  of  Sedan 
to  Henry  the  Fourth ;  but  this  prince,  satisfied  with  his  submission,* 
gave"  it  him  back*  soon.  11.  Napoleon  was  born®  in  Corsica/  12. 
When  some  one  represented  to  Napoleon  that  a  thing  was  impossi- 
ble, he  declared  that  this  word  was  not  French. 

1.  La  maitresse.  2.  Pret.  of  recevoir.  3.  Lev£.  4.  Soumission,  f.  6.  Rendre, 
6.  Pret.  of  the  verb  naitre,  p.  181.    7.  En  Corse. 

THE   COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT. 

13.  The  Compound  of  the  Present  (fai  vu,  fai  regu^  etc.)  is 
used  to  express  a  thing  as  having  taken  place  at  a  time  not  specified, 
or  in  a  period  not  fully  elapsed.     Ex.:  — 

J^ai  perdu  tons  mes  en/ants. 

M.  Laurent  a  beaucoup  voyag€. 

Nous  avons  renonc^  (given  up)  a  nos  droits. 

Alexandre  le  Grand  a  d€truit  I'empire  des  Perses. 

L'avez  vous  vu  aujoud'hui  ?  —  Out  je  I'ai  vu  ce  matin 

Nous  avous  eu  beaucoup  de  pluie  ceite  ann€e. 

Note.  The  French  Perfect  corresponds  to  the  same  form  in  English  in 
all  cases,  except  that  given  under  the  Present  tense,  §  4,  in  such  phrases  as 
Depuis  quand  etes  vous  ici,  how  long  have  you  been  here  ?  But  the  French 
tense  is  much  more  frequently  used  than  the  English,  as  will  be  seen  in  the 
following  paragra|)h6 


USB  OP  THE  TENSES  OP  THT  INDICATTTB.     319 

14.  The  Compound  of  tbe  Present  translates  the  English  Irape^ 
feet,  whenever  this  does  not  denote  continuous  or  habitual  state  or 
action  (see  §§  5,  6,  7),  or  is  not  strictly  a  historical  past.  It  is  the 
tense  most  frequently  used  in  conversation.     Ex. :  — 

Did  you  see  him  yesterday? 

L'avez-vous  vu  hier  ( not  U  vites-vcus)  1 

No,  sir,  I  did  not  see  him. 

Non,  Monsieur,  je  ne  I'ai  pas  vu. 

Did  they  tell  him  to  come  at  six  % 

Lui  at -on  dit  de  venir  a  six  heures  f 

Yes  they  told  him  to  come  at  six  o'clock  precisely. 

Oui,  on  lui  a  dit  de  venir  ti  six  heures  precises. 

^£»  Francais  ont  yagn€  la  bataille  de  Marengo. 

in  this  last  sentence,  gagnerent  would  be  perfectly  correct,  but  would  refer 
.nerely  to  an  historical  event  in  the  past,  with  no  bearing  upon  the  present. 
Unt  gagn€  connects  the  fact  stated  with  something  present,  either  in  the 
speaker  or  in  the  hearer. 

15.  The  Compound  of  the  Present  is  idiomatically  used  in  famil- 
iar conversation,  instead  of  the  Compound  of  the  Future,  as : 

Avez-vous  bientSt  Jini  votre  theme  f     Out,  je  I'ai  Jini  dans  un  moment. 
Will  you  soon  have  done  your  exercise?     Yes,  I  shall  have  finished  it  in 
a  moment ;  instead  of  the  more  formal  Aurez-vous  Jini J*aurai  Juii. 

THEME  43. 

1.  The  horse,  when  he  has  run^  his  course ;  the  bee,  when  it  has 
made  its  honey ; '  and  the  good  man,  when  he  has  done  good'  to 
others,  do  not  make  a  noisy  boast*  about  it,  but  go  on*  repeating  the 
action  ;  as  the  vine,*  in  its  season,  produces  new  clusters'  again. 
2.  F^nelon  preached  with  success  from  the  age  of  nineteen,  and 
wrote  many  works  which  are  admured  for  their  beauty  of  style  ;  but 
that  which  has  gained*  him  the  greatest  reputation  is  his  **  Telma- 
ohus,"*  where  ho  has  displayed^"  all  the  riches  of  the  French  lan- 
guage. 3.  No  work  had  ever  a  greater  reputation  ;  it  is  written  in 
a  lively,"  simple,  natural,  and  elegant  manner ;  its  fictions  are  well 
in^agined,  the  moral^  sublime,  and  the  political  maxima  (which)  it 
oontains.  all*'*  tend  to  the  happinuss  of  mankind.^* 


320  XVni.      DIX-HUITIEME   LEgON. 

1.  Achwi,  2.  JI/IcZ,  m.  3.  Du  Men.  4.  Ne  s^en  vanteni  pas.  6.  Continver.  6. 
Wigne,  f.  7.  Ui-appe,  f.  8.  Lui  a  fait.  9.  TeUmaque.  10.  Deployer,  11,  Anirw 
12.  Xa  morale.    13.  Tendre  a.    14.  Z)cs  hommes. 

THE   COMPOUNDS    OP   THE   IMPERFECT  AND    OP   THE   PRETERITE. 

16.  These  tenses  are  formed  from  the  Imperfect  and  Preterite, 
and  correspond  to  them  fully ;  only  that  they  represent  their  action 
as  having  taken  place  previous  to  some  other  event  referred  to,  and 
cannot  be  used  entirely  independently,  but  usually  stand  connected 
with  a  conjunction  or  an  adverb  of  time.  If  this  conjunctive  clause 
expresses  a  definite  past  time,  the  Compound  of  the  Preterite  is 
employed,  especially  after  the  conjunctions  aussitot  que,  lorsque, 
quand,  des  que^  a  peine,  hientot,  en  un  moment,  un  jour  que,  etc. 
Example :  — 

Aussitot  que  feus  termini  mes  affaires,  je  repartis. 

A  peine  eut-il  prononc€  ce  mot,  qu*il  s'en  repentit. 

Des  que  le  parlement  se  fat  assemble,  V€meute  cessa. 

As  soon  as  the  parliament  was  assembled,  the  riot  ceased. 

It  is  here  not  to  be  overlooked  that  in  the  use  of  the  Compound  Preterite 
a  more  immediate  relation,  a  closer  connection  must  exist  between  the  two 
past  events. 

17.  With  the  Compound  of  the  Imperfect,  this  close  connection 
fails,  and  this  is  the  distinguishing  feature  of  this  tense,  which  is 
also  used  like  the  Impcifcct  for  descriptions,  for  continuous  events, 
and  frequently  repeated  or  customary  previous  actions.     Ex,  :  — 

Platon  avait  re^u  de  la  nature  un  corps  robuste. 

J' avals  deja  termini  mes  affaires,  quand  je  regus  voire  lettre. 

A  la  campagne,  quand  f  avals  din€,  je  faisais  une  promenade  de  deux  Heues. 

18.  The  Compound  of  the  Imperfect  is  also  used  after  the  con- 
junction si,  if,  the  same  in  French  as  in  English  (see  §  9).     Ex. : 

Si  vous  Alez  venu  plus  tot,  vous  m'auriez  trouv^  a  la  maison. 
S^U  avait  parU  plus  haut  (louder),  je  I'aurais  compris. 

THEME  44. 

1.  The  Tynans  had,  by  their  pride,^  offended  the  great  Sesostris, 
who  ruled  in  Egypt,  and  who  had  conquered  so  many  kingdoms. 
2.  The  wealth  which  they  had  acquired^  by  commerce,  and  the  strength 


tJSB  OP  THE  TENSES  OF  THE  INDICATTVB.  821 

of  the  impregnable'  city  of  Tyre,  lying*  in  the  sea,  had  lifted  up* 

the  heart  of  these  people.     3.  They  had  refused  to  pay  Sesostris 

the  tribute*  which  he  had  imposed  upon  them  {leur)  on  his  retuiu 

from  his  conquests ; '  and  they  had  furnished  troops  to  his  brother, 

who  had  attempted*  to  kill  him  in  the  midst  of  the  festivities*  of  a 

great  banquet.      4.    As  soon  as  Sesostris  learned^''  this,  he  detei 

mined"  to  humiliate  their  pride  and  to  destroy  their  commerce  upon  all 

seas.     5.  Julius  Caesar,  having  disembarked"  in  Africa,  fell  [down] 

as  he  was  lea\ing  the  vessel ;  this  appeared  to  his  soldiers  a  very 

inauspicious^^  omen : "  he,  however,  turned  the  feelings  of  the  army 

to  his  advantage  by  exclaiming  (en  s'ecriant),  "  It  is  now,  0 

Africa,  that  I  hold  thee." 

1.  OrgueU,  m.  2.  Acquiset.  8.  Imprtnable  (before  the  noun).  4.  SittUe  dana, 
S.  Enfli.  6.  Le  trUmt.  7.  Conqwte,  f.  8.  Voulu.  9.  Joies.  10.  Apprendre.  11. 
n  risolut  d'humilier.    12.  AyatU  debargxU.    13.  Un  prisage  de  mauvaise  augur*, 

-  in.     THE  FUTURE   TENSES. 

19.  The  Future  (j>  parlerai,  je  ferai^  etc.)  denotes  in  genera] 
future  events  or  circumstances,  as  :  — 

Charles  partira  demain. 

20.  It  must  sometimes  be  used  in  French  after  adverbs  of  time 
(jquand,  lorsgue,  etc:)  where  the  English  use  the  Present,  when  the 
idea  is  one  of  future  time.     Ex. ;  — 

VcruM  pouvez  venir  quand  voris  voudret. 
You  may  come  when  you  like. 

21.  It  is  used  as  a  softened  form  of  the  Imperative,  implying  the 
expectation  of  fulfilment.     Ex.  :  — 

Vou3,m'^crire2  deinain,  (do)  write  to  me  to-morrow. 
Vous  tie  tuerez  jfoint,  thou  shult  do  no  murder. 
Quand  tx)us  viendrez,  vous  apporterez  mon  livre. 
When  you  come  you  will  bring  my  book. 

NoTB  I.  When  shall  and  wiU  imply  determination,  they  are  rendered  by 
voukir,  as :  — 

I  will  do  it,  je  veux  le  /aire. 
Tou  nball  do  it,  je  veux  que  vous  le  fusiez. 
21 


B22  xnn.    dix-huitieme  LEgoN. 

22.  It  soraetinaes  has  the  sense  of  the  Imperative  in  sent^n^. 
like  the  following  :  — 

Croira  qui  voudra  Vhlstorien  CapitoUn  et  qudques  autres  ^crivains  qui  font 
danser  les  €l^pliants  sur  la  corde. 

Believe  who  will  the  historian  Capitolinus  and  several  other  writers,  who 
make  elephants  dance  on  a  rope. 

Note.  To  be  on  the  point  of  doing  something  is  expressed  in  French  by 
aUer,  which  corresponds  precisely  with  the  English  to  be  going,  etc.  (See 
Part  I.,  Lesson  XL  VI.)     Ex. :  — 

Are  ,^ou  going  to  write  to  him  ?  aUez-vous  lui  Retire  f 

I  am  coming,  je  vais  venir. 

Na}tol€on  dit  a  ses  soldats,  "  Nous  allons  entreprendre  la  conquete  de  VEgypU. 
[jes  peuples  avec  lesquds  nous  allons  vivre,  sont  Mahometans"  etc. 

23.  The  Compound  of  the  Future  indicates  an  event  which  is  to 
precede  another  future  event  specified.     Ex  :  — 

Quand  j'aurai  terming  mes  affaires^  je  partirai  tout  de  suite, 
Aussitot  que  je  serai  arrive,  j'irai  le  voir. 

24.  When  the  conjunction  si  signifies  whether,  expressing  llnce^ 
tainty,  the  future  can  be  used  after  it,  in  French  as  in  English.  Si 
is  never  followed  by  the  future,  unless  it  means  whether.     Ex-  :  — 

Je  ne  sais  si  mon  frere  viendra. 

I  do  not  know  if  my  brother  will  come. 

25.  When  si  signifies  on  condition  that,  the  English  Future  must 
be  rendered  by  the  Present.     Ex.  :  — 

Vous  deviendrez  savant,  si  vous  €tudiez  hien. 

You  will  become  a  learned  man,  if  you  will  study. 

26.  The  Future  is  sometimes  used  to  imply  surmise.     Ex.  :  — 
Oil  est  mon  argent  f     L'aurai-je  peut-elre  pc'du  ? 

Whsre  is  my  money "?     Have  I  perhaps  lest  it  ? 

27.  The  Conditionals,  je  parlerais,  faurais  parte,  are  used  in 
French  as  in  English,  in  conditional  sentences  :  — 

Je  serais  heureux  si  j'ai^ais  des  amis. 
I  should  be  happy  if  I  had  some  friends. 

Note.   The  English  I  wish,  when  it  docs  not  relate  to  something  past. 
Is  often  'aranslatcd  by  the  Conditional  of  vouloir,  je  voudiais.    Ex.  :  — 
I  \i'ish  he  would  come  soon,  je  voudrais  qu'il  vint  bientOt. 


USB  OF  THE  TENSES  OF  THE  IKDICATITB.  323 

28.  After  si,  when  it  means  mppose  that,  the  English  Condi 
(ional  must  be  rendered  by  the  Imperfect  (see  §  8).     Ex.  :  — 

Si  J€  contimijis  mon  commerce,  Je  deviendrais  riche. 
If  I  should  coDtiuue  my  trade,  I  should  become  rich. 

But  when  si  means  whether,  the   Conditional  is  also  used  in 
French :  — 
Je  ne  sais  si  mon  oncle  inendrait,  en  cos  que  vous  I'invitasstez. 

29.  The  compound  Conditional  of  devoir,  pouvoir,  and  votdoir, 
followed  by  the  simple  Infinitive,  must  be  used  when,  in  English, 
the  auxiliaries  should,  ought,  could,  might,  are  followed  by  a  com- 
pound Infinitive     Ek.  :  — 

Vous  auriez  du  €crire  une  lettre. 
You  ought  to  have  written  a  letter. 
J'aurais  pu  lui  donner  de  rargent. 
I  could  have  given  him  some  money. 

THEME  46. 

1.  T  shall  go  to  London.  2.  The  bookseller  will  send  you  the 
book  to-morrow.  3.  When  I  am  in  the  country,  will  you  come  to 
see  me  ?  4.  I  shall  play  as  soon  as  I  have  finished  my  lesson.  5. 
There  will  always  be  wars  among  men,  as  long  as  they  are  (§20) 
ambitious.  6.  I  hope  you  will  not  refuse  me  this  favor.  7.  When 
you  are  ready,  we  will  go  and  take  a  walk.  8.  I  do  not  know  if 
my  sister  will  consent  to  it  (y).  9.  If  your  person  were  as  gigan- 
tic* as  your  desbes,  the  whole^  world  could  not  contain  you ;  your 
right  hand  would  touch  the  east^  and  your  left  the  west*  at  the 
(en)  same  time,  said  the  Scythian'  ambassador  to  Alexander.  10. 
I  could  have  kept"  the  book  ;  nobody  would  have  known  it. 

1.  Oigantesque.    2.  Entier  (after  the  noun).    3.  Vorient,  m.    4.  IPoccident,  la 
S.  Vambasmdeur  des  Scythes.    6.  Oarder. 

THEME  46. 

1.  My  country  has  been  ungratefuP  to  me,  although  I  have  ren- 
dered it  (/mi)  great  service  {pi).  2.  The  king  has  done  me  groat 
injustice ;  he  ba&  robbed^  me  of  my  entire  fortune,  bo  has  ovod 


324  xnn.    Drx-HUiriEMB  le^on.  , 

taken*  from  me  my  two  servants.     3. 1  have  be^n  compelled  to  flee, 

in  order  to  preserve*  my  life,  which  was  seriously  threatened.     4 

What  was  to  be  done  V     5.   You  should  rather  have  endured' 

(§  29)  all  injuries  than  to  offend'  against  France  and  the  greatness 

of   your  house.      6.  If   you   were   persecuted,   you  could   have 

retired ;  *  it  would  have  been  (valu)  better  to  be  poor  and  unknown 

than  to  take  up^°  arms  against  your  country.     7.  Even  in  poverty 

and  in  the  most  wretched^  exile,  your  fame^^  would  not  have  been 

lost. 

I.  Ingrat.  2.  Privi.  3.  JlTa  dipouilU  jusqu^dt.  4.  Pour  sauver.  5.  Qiie  voU' 
iieahrnms  que  je  fisse  7  6.  SovffHr.  7.  Que  de  manquer  d.  8.  Vous  relirer  (refleo- 
Ovo  verb).    9.  Obscur.    10.  Prendre  le$  armes.    11.  Miserable.    12.  Gloire,  f. 


READIXG  LESSON. 
ALEXANDRE    SELKIRK. 

Pendant  la  guerre  pour  la  succession  d'Espagne,  quelques  parti- 
cmliers^  ^quipercnt  en  Angleterre  deux  vaisseaux  armateurs,  destines 
k  faire  des  prises^  dans  la  mer  du  sud.  Le  capitaine  Rogers  fat 
nomm^  pour  les  commander.  lis  leverent'  Tancre  de  Bristol  le  2 
A-out,  1708.  Au  mois  de  Janvier  de  I'annee  suivante  ils  se  trou- 
vaient  du  c6t6  du  pole  antarctique.*  Rogers  doubla  le  Cap-Horn 
sans  prendre  terre  en  aucun  lieu  de  ces  parages*  jusqu'k  File  de 
Juan  Fcmandes,  situde  dans  la  mer  du  sud,  a  la  distance  de  cent- 
dix  lieues  du  Chili.  II  y  envoya  une  pinasse,*  qui  revint  au  vai&- 
seau  avec  quantit<5  d'dcrevisses,'  et  un  horame  vetu  de  peaux  de 
chevres"  qui  paraissait  plus  sauvage  que  ces  anunaux  memes. 
C'dtait  un  Ecossais,  nommd  Alexandre  Selkirk,  qui  avait  dte  maitre 
k  bord  du  vaisseau  *'  Les  Cinq-Ports,"  et  que  le  capitaine  Stxadling 
avait  abandonne  sur  cette  ile  depuis  quatre  ans  et  quatre  mois. 
Voici  le  recit  que  ce  malheureux  fit  de  ses  aventures  au  capitaine 
Rogers. 

*'  Des  mon  enfance  j'ai  it4  dlevd'  dans  la  marine.  Ayant  suivi 
le  capitaine  Stradling  dans  eon  ezp^tion,  j'eus  un  d^mel^"  aveo 


THE   SUBJUNCTTVE   MOOD.  326 

fui,  ce  qui  Tengagca  h  me  debarqner  snr  cette  lie.  Je  rdsolua 
d'abord  d'y  rester,  plutot  qne^^  de  m'exposer  k  de  nouveaux  cha- 
grins, d'aubrnt  plus  que  le  vaisseau  etait  en  mauvais  ^tat.  Cepen- 
dant  revcnu  k  moi  meme,  je  soidiaitai  d'j  retoumer,  mais  le 
capitaiue  u'y  voulut  pas  consentir." 

(To  be  continued. ) 

1.  Private  men.    2.  Captnre.    3.  To  weigh.    4.  South.    5.  Parts  of  the  sea.    6. 
Pinnace.    7.  Crab     8.  Goat-skins.    9.  Brought  up.    10.  Quarrel,    il.  Rather  than. 

QUESTIONNAIRB. 

Que  firent  quelques  particuliers  angljds  pendant  la  guerre  de  (a 
succession  d'Espagne  ? 

Qui  commanda  les  deux  vaisseaux? 

Oil  prit-il  terre  pour  la  premiere  foist 

Oil  est  situ^e  cette  ile? 

Qui  trouva-tK)n  1^  ? 

Qui  6tait  cet  horame  ? 

Comment  y  ^tait-il  venu  ? 

Combien  de  temps  y  ^tait-il  rest^  ? 

Pourquoi  avaitril  ete  debarqu6  par  le  capitaine? 


XIX.     DIX-NEUVli:ME     LE9ON. 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

1.  The  Subjunctive  is  in  most  cases  dependent,  and  is  therefore  used  in 
fiHjbordinate  clauses.  Whenever  in  French  a  subordinate  clause  is  depcnd- 
Cbt  upon  a  leading  clause  which  contains  the  idea  of  something  not  ye( 
b&nng  an  actual  existence  for  the  spcalccr,  consequently  of  something  pos- 
sil/e  or  uncertain,  its  verb  \rill  be  in  the  Subjunctive.  This  unreality  can 
apply  as  well  to  something  external,  i.  e.  to  actions  and  events,  an  to  somo- 
thLig  internal,  i.  e.  to  conceptions  and  emotions.     This  is  the  gcuera] 


326  XIX.      DIX-NEUVIEME  LEgON. 

ground  of  distinction  in  the  application  of  the  French  Subjunctive.  The 
two  languages  hy  no  means  agree  in  this  point.  Many  verbs  in  English 
are  put  in  tlie  Future,  the  Conditional,  or  the  Present  Indicative,  which,  in 
French,  must  be  in  the  subjunctive.     Thus  for  instance :  — 

Ji  ne  pense  pas  qu'il  soil  si  dg€. 
I  do  not  thinlc  he  is  so  old. 
Nous  craignions  qu'il  ne  s'en  cdldt. 
We  feared  he  would  go. 

2.  But  before  passing  to  the  rules  concerning  the  use  of  the  Sub- 
junctive, it  will  be  indispensably  necessary  to  understand  the  relation  of 
the  tenses  of  the  Subjunctive  to  those  of  the  Indicative  and  Conditional, 
without  which  the  clause,  dependent  upon  them,  cannot  be  properly  trans- 
lated.    The  following  rules  are  here  applicable  :  — 

1.  If  the  verb  of  the  leading  clause  is  in  the  Present  or  Future  Indica- 
tive, that  of  the  dependent  clause  will  be  in  the  Present  or  Compound  of 
the  Present  of  the  Subjunctive.     Ex.:  — 

Je  veux  qu'il  vienne,*  I  wish  him  to  come. 

Connaissez-vous  quelqu'un  qui  sache  /aire  cela  f 

Do  you  know  anybody  who  knows  how  to  do  this  ? 

Je  ferai  en  sorte  que  tout  soit  pret. 

I  will  have  everything  ready. 

J'attendrai  que  mon  pere  soit  parti. 

I  will  wait  till  my  father  has  departed. 

2.  If  the  verb  of  the  leading  clause  be  in  a  past  tense  of  the  Indicative, 
or  in  the  Conditional,  the  Imperfect  of  the  Subjunctive  must  follow  in  the 
subordinate  clause ;  or  if  the  subordinate  clause  contain  an  event  which  has 
already  taken  place,  the  Compound  Imperfect  of  the  Subjunctive  must  be 
employed,  according  to  the  following  scheme :  — 

Je  craignais 
Je  craignis 
Xai  craint 
J'avais  craint 
Je  craindrais 
J*aurais  craint 


qu'eUe  n'arrivdt    demain — aujourd^hui,  —  trop    tard, 
trop  tot,  etc. 


•Observe  that  the  Present  and  Future  are  the  same  in  the  SubjuncUTe  Mood  in 
French  J  the  context  alone  shows  of  whicJi  of  the  two  we  speak.    Ex.:  — 
Je  ne  crois  pas  qxi'elle  menne. 
I  do  not  think  she  is  coming. 
Je  tie  crois  pas  qu'elle  viemic 
I  do  sot  think  ehe  will  coioi«i. 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD.  827 


qu'ils nefuanent  amv€$  hier  —  avcmth:a    —  la 
demiere,  etc. 


Je  crmgntiit 
Je  craignis 
J*ai  craint  ♦ 
J'aoais  craint 
Je  craindiais 
J^aurais  craint     ' 

3.  There  are  a  great  many  verba  which  govern  the  verb  of 
he  subordinate  clause  in  the  Subjunctive  mood ;  they  may  be 
div^ided  into  four  classes,  viz. :  — 

1.  Verbs  of  wishing,  willing,  desiring,  commanding,  or  permitting. 

2.  Verbs  of  thinking,  believing,  and  saying. 

8.  Verbs  expressing  fear,  doubt,  sorrow,  astonishment,  denial,  daty, 
Qccessity,  joy,  or  delight. 

4.  Impersonal  verbs  which  do  not  express  certainty  or  probability. 

4.  Verbs  of  wishing,  willing,  commanding,  etc.     Such  are  :  — 

Aimer,  to  like.  permettre,  to  permit,  allow. 

aimer  mieux,  to  prefer.  prier,  to  beg,  to  ask. 

d^fendre,  to  forbid.  recommander,  to  recommend. 

demander,  to  ask.  souhaiter,  to  wish. 

d^sirer,  to  wish  for,  to  desire.  souffrir,  to  suffer. 

exigtr,  to  demand.  supjUier,  to  beg,  request. 

ordonner,  to  order.  voidoir,  to  be  willing,  etc 

Examples ;  — 

fordonne  q»*il.  sorte,  I  order  him  to  go  out. 

J*aime  qn'il  soit  courageux,  I  like  him  to  be  brare 

n  veut  que  je  dise  la  v&it^  { Pres.  Subj.,  §  2,  1 ). 

He  wishes  rae  to  say  the  truth. 

n  txmlait  qite  je  lui  disse  la  v€rii€  {Tmperf.,  §  2,  2). 

He  desired  me  to  tell  him  the  truth. 

Le  rot  exigea  qne  je  partisse  tout  de  suite. 

The  king  demanded  that  I  should  leave  directly 

♦As  the  Compound  of  the  Pre.sent  belongs  to  Present  as  well  as  to  Pas* time,  it 
can  bo  followed  also  by  the  Present  of  ttieSubJunctive,  when  the  dependcuc  olansa 
Tefers  to  Present  time.    Ex.  :— 

Dieii  nous  a  doniU  la  raison  vour  que  noun  nous  en  acrvlons 
Qod  bas  given  us  reason  that  we  may  malLe  use  of  It. 


328  XIX.      DIX-NEUVIEME  LE^ON. 

5.    Verbs  of  thinking,  believing,  saying,  etc. 

These  verbs,  and,  in  general,  all  those  which  express  the  intel- 
lectual faculties  of  the  muad,  govern  the  Indicative  when  they  are 
afinnatively  used,  and  most  commonly  the  Subjunctive  when  they 
are  used  negatively,  interrogatively,  or  are  preceded  by  the  conjunc- 
tion si.  If  I  say,  for  instance :  Je  crois  que  Charles  est  rnalade, 
I  represent  Charles's  illness  to  myself  as  a  reality,  and  consequently 
the  Indicative  is  required.  But  in  the  sentences  :  Je  ne  crois  pcu 
que  Charles  soit  malade,  or,  croyez-vous  que  Charles  soil  malade  ? 
an  uncertainty  is  expressed  in  regard  to  Charles's  illness,  and  the 
Subjunctive  must  be  used.     Ex. :  — 

Je  ne  crois  pas  que  le  concert  ait  lieu  ce  soir. 

I  do  not  think  that  the  concert  will  take  place  to-night. 

Pensez-vous  qu'il  puisse  apprmdre  tout  cela.  * 

Do  you  think  he  can  learn  all  that  ? 

Je  ne  dis  pas  qu'il  ait  tort. 

I  do  not  say  that  he  is  wrong. 

Partons,  si  vous  pensez  qu'il  fasse  beau  temps. 

Note  1.  If  however  we  ask  a  question,  less  to  be  informed  of  a  thing 
than  to  inform  others  of  it,  the  second  verb  (having  the  sense:  Do  you 
know?)  is  put  in  the  Indicative,  and  not  in  the  Subjunctive.     Ex.:  — 

Vous  ai-je  dit  que  mon  frere  est  arrive  f 

Note  2.  Observe  that  the  verbs  of  knowing,  being  sure,  resolving,  etc., 
are  not  comprised  among  those  which  govern  the  Subjunctive.  They  gen- 
erally require  the  Indicative,  even  when  used  interrogatively  or  neg- 
atively :  — 

Je  saixxis  ") 

Jenesavaispasi^''''^'^'''*'^' 

Je  ne  sais  s'il  le  /era,  I  do  not  know  if  he  will  do  it. 

THEME  47. 

1.  I  wish  him  to  come  (that  he  c).  2.  The  law  requires  that 
thieves^  [should]  be  punished.  3.  I  demanded  that  he  should  pay 
me.  4.  Has  he  demanded  that  you  should  pay  the  bill?*  5. 
I  forbid  that  he  should  go  there.  6.  God  wills  that  we  love  our 
enemies.  7.  Caligula  wished  that  the  Romans  should  render  him 
divine  honors.*    8.  Yo^r  father  expects  that  you  should  give  ^  an  ao- 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD.  329 

ootmt  of  wbat  yoa  have  done.  9.  Mj  aunt  wishes  thai  I  should 
sot  out  to-morrow.  10.  Tell  him  to  wait.  11.  Auguotus  com- 
manded in  his  will*  that  they  should  not  seek  to®  extend  the  empire. 
12.  Allow  me  to  tell  you  (allow  that  I  tell  y.)  the  truth.  13.  f 
will  be  obeyed  (that  one  ob.  me).  14.  Do  you  think  your  aunt 
will  come  by  herself?'  15.  If  I  find  that  you  frequent  bad  oom* 
pany,  you  will  lose  my  friendship.  16.  Do  you  hope  they  (^ori) 
will  make  peace  ?  * 

1.  Les  voleiin.    2.  Le  compte.    3.  Des  Iionneurs  divina.    4.  To  give  an  aocoanti 
rendrecon^fte.    5.  TatameiU,  m.    0.  A^Tidre,    7.  SeuU.    8.  La  paix. 


6.   The  Subjunctive  is  used  after  verbs  of  fear,  doubt,  sorrow 
joy,  denial  or  hinderance,  astonishment,  etc.     Such  are :  — 

Avoir  peur, ")  s'Aonner,  to  wonder. 

craindre,       >        ^^'  empecher,  to  hinder,  prevent. 

douter,  to  doubt.  ^  nier,  to  deny. 

And  likewise  afler : 

l^tre  hien  aise,  to  be  glad.  itre  affllg€,  to  be  aflSicted. 

itre  charmi,    )  itre  fachi,  to  be  sorry. 

Are  enchants,  |  ^  ^  ^^^  ^lad.  ^^^^  ^o/m^,  to  be  astonished. 

Stre  content,  to  be  satisfied.  etre  surpris,  to  be  surprised. 

se  r€jouir,  to  rejoice.  regretter,  to  regret. 

trembler,  to  tremble.  ie  plaindre,  to  complain. 

Examples :  — 

Je  crains  que  ma  mkre  ne  soit  malade. 

I  fear  my  mother  is  ill. 

Je  ne  doutais  pas  qu'il  n'arrivdt  avant  voxts. 

I  did  not  doubt  that  he  would  arrive  before  you. 

,Pempecherai  qu'il  ne  *  sorte. 

I  will  hinder  him  from  going  out. 

J*  regrette  qu'il  soit  venu  trop  tard. 

Man  pere  est  fdchff  que  je  ne  Ini  aie  pas  €crit  plus  Uk. 

Je  suis  chann€  que  vous  soi/ez  venu  me  voir. 

Je  m'Oonn^  qu'il  v'ait  pas  regu  ma  lettre. 

*  Conoeming  the  particle  ne,  aee  L.  XY.  (  16-  If. 


330  XIX.    dix-neuviSme  L^goir. 

Note  1 .  The  ver')S  avoir  peur,  appr€liender,  craindre  and  trembler  reqtiire 
the  particle  ne  before  the  verb  in  the  Subjunctive  mood,  but  only  when 
these  verbs  themselves  axe  afiinnative  or  negative-interrogative.    Ex.:  — 

Je  crains  qu'il  ne  vienne. 

Ne  craignez-vous  pas  qu'il  ne  viennet 
Bn  I  if  the  sentence  be  simply  negative  or  simply  interrogative,  ru  is  ao» 
used,  as  :  — 

Je  ne  crains  pas  qu'il  vienne. 

Craignez-vous  qu'il  vienne  ? 

Note  2,  If  after  those  verbs  mentioned  in  §  6,  we  wish  to  express  our 
selves  with  definiteness,  de  ce  que  is  used  instead  of  the  simple  que,  and  thu 
is  followed  by  the  Indicative :  — 

U  est  fa,cli€  de  ce  que  vous  ne  lui  avez  pas  €crit. 

Je  me  plains  de  ce  qu'elle  m'a  ouhU€. 

Note  3.   If  the  second  verb  is  negative  in  English,  ne — pas  must  be 
used  in  French,  as  :  — 
Je  tremble  qu'il  n' arrive  pas  a  temps. 
I  tremble  lest  he  may  not  arrive  in  time. 

7.   Subjunctive  after  Impersonal  verbs. 

A  verb  preceded  by  que  is  always  put  in  the  Subjunctive  aft«r  the 
following  Impersonals :  — 

H  est  surprenant,  it  is  surprising.  il  plait,  it  pleases,  suits. 

i7  convient,  it  is  proper.  tV  est  fdcheux,  it  is  sad. 

t7  faut,  it  must.  il  est  juste,  it  is  just,  right. 
i7  importe,  it  is  important,  it  matters,     il  est  difficile,  it  is  difficult 

it  coi:cems.  il  est  possible,  it  is  possible. 

il  suffit,  it  is  sufficient.  il  est  naturel,  it  is  a  matter  of  course 

ii  vaut  micux,  it  is  better.  il  se  peut,  il  peut  se  /aire,  it  may  be 

And  likewise  after :  — 

U  est  temps,  it  is  time.  c'est  dommage^  it  is  a  pity 

(/est  un  malheur,  it  is  a  misfortune,  etc.,  etc. 

Examples :  — 
J7  faut  que  vous  partiez  tout  de  suite. 
You  must  leave  directly. 
n  est  possible  qu'il  revienne. 
It  is  possible  t^jat  he  co^ie  b^i< 


THE  StTBJUNCTlTE  MOOD.  331 

C*est  dommage  que  vous  ne  soyez  pas  venu  plus  tdt. 

It  is  a  pity  that  you  have  not  come  earlier. 

II  suffit  qu'il  ait  avou€  sa  fault. 

It  is  enough  that  he  has  confessed  his  fault. 

//  esU  juste,  que  vous  soyez  puni.  » 

It  is  right  that  you  be  punished. 

Further,  after  il  y  a,  and  all  impersonal  verbs  with  an  adjective 
denoting  evidence,  certainty,  or  probability,  when  they  are  used  in  a 
negative,  interrogative,  or  conditional  manner.     Ex.  :  — 

Ya-t-tl  un  mortel  qui  puisse  dire  qu'il  est  toujours  hcureux  1 

Is  there  a  mortal  who  can  say  that  he  is  always  happy  ? 

Est-il  siir  qu'il  ait  tort  t 

Is  it  certain  that  he  is  in  the  wrong? 

H  n'est  pas  stir  qu'il  ait  tort. 

It  ia  not  certain  that  he  is  in  the  wrong. 

THEME  48. 

1.  I  doubt  whether  that  is  true.  2.  I  doubt  whether  your  uncle 
mil  arrive  to-morrow.  3.  The  Egyptians  did  not  doubt  (see  Les- 
3on  XV.,  §  15)  that  certain  plants  and  animals  were  divinities.' 
4.  We  question  whether  riches  can  afford'*  happiness.  5.  I  did  not 
know  that  you  were  to  come.  6.  Do  you  doubt  that  I  am  your 
friend?  7.  I  do  not  doubt  that  you  are  my  friend.  8.  He  denies 
that  he  had  been  told  that.  9.  He  does  not  deny  that  he  has  been 
told  that.  10.  It  is  time  for  us  to  go  (that  we  go)  home,  for  it 
begins  to  (a)  rain.  11.  It  is  evident  that  Greece  could  no  more 
defend  herself,  so  much  was  she  at  that  time  sunken.*  12.  It  is 
sufficient  if  you  tell  him  this.  13.  It  is  a  pity  that  you  did  not  go 
with  us;  you  would  have  enjoyed* yourself  much.  14.  It  is  not 
Iffobable  that  they  will  do  it.     15.  I  must  go  to  (en)  town. 

U  Des  divinitis,    2.  Accorder.    8.  Dichue.   4.  S'amu^er, 


8.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  in  relative  dependent  clauses  begin- 
ning with  qui,  que,  lequel  or  ou,  which  depend  upon  a  leading 
olause  in  which  a  wish,  doubt,  or  condition  is  implied,  especially 
iiior  an  Imperative      Ex.  :  -— 


332  XIX.      Dli-NfiUVlEMB  LEQOlSt. 

Liscz  des  ouvrages  qui  puissent  former  votre  govt. 

Read  such  books  as  can  form  your  taste- 

Choisissez  un  apparteinent  oil  vous  soyez  a  votre  aise. 

Choose  an  apartment  where  you  may  be  comfortable. 

lis  envoyerent  des  d€puMs  qui  consultassent  ApolloiX. 

They  sent  deputies  who  were  to  consult  Apollo. 

If,  however,  no  such  requirement  or  expectation  is  contained  in  the  lead 
I'ng  clause ;  if,  on  the  contrary,  the  matter  is  rather  regarded  as  something 
which  is  actual,  or  which  has  already  taken  place,  then,  of  coarse,  the 
Indicative  is  used.     Ex, :  — 

J'ai  lov€  un  appartement  oil  je  suis  hien  a  mon  aise. 

lis  envoyerent  des  d€put€s  qui  consulterent  Apollon. 

9.  A  verb  preceded  by  the  relative  qui  or  qtte  is  put  in  tbe  Sub- 
junctive after  the  Superlative,  when  the  relative  clause  only  express-, 
es  an  opinion,  as  :  — 

C'est  le  plus  beau  jardin  que  je  connaisse. 
This  is  the  most  beautiful  garden  I  know. 
C*est  une  des  demieres  lettres  que  St.  Paul  ait  €crites. 
This  is  one  of  the  last  letters  St.  Paul  has  written. 
La  meilleure  garde  qu'un  roi  puisse  avoir,  c'est  le  coeur  de  ses  sujets. 
The  best  guard  a  king  can  have  is  the  hearts  of  his  subjects. 
If,  however  the  thing  is  represented  as  certain  or  as  a  matter  of  fad,  the 
Indicative  follows.    Ex. :  — 
Souviens-toi  que  je  suis  le  seul  qui  t'a  drplu  (displeased). 
N^ron  est  le  premier  empereur  qui  a  pers^cut^  I'^glise. 

10.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  further  after  the  ordinal  numbers 
(as,  le  premier,  le  second,  le  dernier y  etc.),  and  after  unique^  smd, 
peu,  rien,  and  personne.     Ex. :  — 

Votis  etes  le  premier  ami  que  j*  aie  rencontri  "it  Paris. 
You  are  the  first  friend  I  have  met  with  in  Paris. 
C'est  I'unique  espoir  qui  me  soit  rest^.  r- 

This  is  the  only  hope  that  remains  to  me. 
Jl  y  a  peu  d'hctmmes  qui  sachent  supporter  I'adversit^. 
There  are  few  men  who  know  how  to  bear  adversity. 
Je  ne  connais  personne  qw  soit  aussi  keureux  que  lui. 
I  know  nobody  who  is  so  happy  as  he  is. 

Note.   Qui  and  que  do  not  govern  the  Subjunctive,  when  th^y  aie  pre- 
ceded by  de  and  its  object,  to  which  they  refer.    Ex. :  — 
Ne  dites  rien  de  ce  que  je  vous  at  cmJU  (Ind.). 


1?HE  SUBJtJNCTIVB  MOOD.  333 

THEME  49. 

I.  You  are  the  most  learned  man  I  know  in  this  town.  2.  Rob- 
ert is  the  only  friend  on  whom  I  can  depend.^  3.  Nero  was  the 
first  emperor  that  (has)  persecuted  the  Christians.  4.  I  seek  a 
servant  who  is  faithful.  5.  The  diamond  is  the  most  valuable*  stone 
vro  know.  6.  You  are  the  first  German  I  have  met  with  in  China. 
7.  There  is  no  one  who  does  it  more  easily*  than  she.  8.  Is  this 
the  first  time  you  have  been  mistaken  ?  *  9.  I  wish  it  were  the  first 
time.  10.  Lucretius'  and  Pliny  were  the  only  natural  philosopher^ 
whom  the  Romans  had. 

1.  Compter.     2.  Pricieux.    8.  Aisiment.    4.  Se  tromper,    6.  Lucrice  et  PUne, 
6.  Ifaturalistes. 

II.  Subjunctive  after  conjunctions.  A  verb  is  put  in  the  Sub- 
junctive after  the  following  conjunctions  :  — 

Avant  que,  before.  non  que,  ,      ^  ,,    ^ 

^    '  ^    '         ^  not  that. 


,.! 


^    '  f^  if  ever  so  little. 


a  mains  que  (ne),  unless.  non  pas  que, 

ajin  que,  in  order  that  pour  que,  in  order  that. 

bien  que,  although.  pour  peu  que, 

de  peur  que  (ne),  lest.  si  peu  que, 

de  crainte  que  {ne),  for  fear  that  pourvu  que,  provided. 

de  maniere  (sorte)  que,  so  that  que  —  ne,  till,  before. 

en  aMendant  que,  tm.  quel — que,       )  howerer.      (Seep. 

en  (au)  cos  que,  in  case.  quelque  —  que,  )  282.) 

encore  que,  although.  quoique,  although. 

jusqu'a  ce  que,  until.  sans  que,  without. 

loin  que,  far  from,  sinon  que,  but  that. 

nudgri  que,  for  all  that,   notwith-  «  tant  est  que,  if  so  be  that. 

standing  that  soit  que  —  soit  que,  )  whether— or. 

nonobitani  que,  notwithstanding.  soit  que — ou  que,    >  be  it  that — or 

suppM^que,  suppose  that 

EXAMPLES. 
Bentrons  aixint  qu'il  fosse  nuit. 
Let  us  go  home  before  it  gets  dark. 
A/in  que  {pour  que)  vous  le  sachiez.  * 

That  you  may  know  it.  . , 

Je  ne  sortirai  d'ici  que  je  ne  sois  pay€. 

I  shftll  not  go  away  from  here  before  I  am  paid 


334  XIX.      OIX-NEUVIEMB  LfiCON. 

QuoiguHl  me  Vait  promU. 

Althou<^h  he  has  promised  me. 

Paarvii  quHl  y  consenie. 

Provided  he  consent  to  it. 

Quelque  effort  que  /assent  les  kommes,  leur  n€ant  parait  partout. 

Whatever  eflFort  men  may  make,  their  nothingness  appears  eyerywhere. 

A  moins  que  vous  ne  me  demandiez  pardon. 

Unless  yot  ask  me  for  pardon. 

Au  {en)  cos  qu'il   mourut. 

In  case  he  should  die. 

Note.  The  Indicative  can  sometimes  be  nsed  after  avant  que,  jusqu*h  a 
que,  sinon  que,  de  sorte  que,  si  ce  n'est  que,  tellement  que,  and  de  maniere  que, 
when  all  doubt  and  uncertainty  are  excluded,  and  the  clause  expresses  a 
fact.     Ex. :  — 

Je  gardai  mon  sang  froid,  jusqu'a  ce  que  je  Ventendis  calomnier  mon  frere. 

H  s'est  occupy  de  cette  affaire  de  maniere  {de  sorte)  qu'on  n'a  pu  le  bldmer. 

12.  In  the  same  manner  the  Subjunctive  is  employed  after  the 
simple  que,  when  used  instead  of  one  of  the  conjunctions  mentioned 
in  §11.     Ex.  :  — 

Je  ne  puis  vous  pardonner  avant  que  vous  me  fassiez  Vaveu  de  vos  fautes  et 
que  vous  me  promettiez  de  vous  corriger. 

I  cannot  pardon  you  before  you  confess  your  faults  and  promise  me  to 
improve. 

Venez  que  (instead  of  aj^n  que)  je  vous  en  dise  la  raison. 

Come,  that  I  may  tell  you  the  reason  of  it. 

Son  esprit  est  toujours  actif,  quoiqu'il  soit  malade  et  qu'il  ne  puisse  travaiUer. 

His  mind  is  always  active,  although  he  is  sick  and  cannot  work. 

13.  The  conjunction  que,  used  to  avoid  the  repetition  of  si,  gov- 
erns the  Subjunctive.     Ex. :  — 

Si  je  ne  suis  pas  rentr€  a  quatre  heures  et  qu'on  vienne  me  demander,  etc. 
If  I  am  not  at  home  at  four  o'clock,  and  somebody  comes  for  me,  etc. 

14.  The  Subjunctive  is  also  used  after  attendre  ;  tiU  is  translated 
by  que,  and  not  by  jusqu^a  ce  que,  as :  — 

Attendez  qu'il  revienne,  wait  till  he  comes  back. 

15.  Aside  from  the  instances  above-mentioned,  the  Subjunctive 
also  occurs  in  a  few  expressions  which  appear  either  the  expression 
of  a  wifih  or  as  a  kind  of  third  person  Imperative.     Notice  espe- 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD,  385 

cially:  Dmse-je  I  should  I!    Puissiez^ous  I   would  that  yoal 
Puissent-ils !  may  they  ....  1     Further :  — 

Dim  vexiiUe  or  pliit  a  Dim,  would  to  Hearen. 

"*^y«  le  rot,  long  live  the  king  I 

Puissiez-vous  etre  hmrmx,  may  you  be  happy  ! 

Qu'on  amene  Vaccus€,  let  the  culprit  be  brought  htra ! 

Qu'ils  viennent,  let  them  come  1 

Que  Dim  vous  b^nisse,  God  bless  you  1 

Que  la  terre  lui  soit  l€yere,  maj  the  earth  lie  lightly  upon  Urn  I 

A  Dieu  ne  plaise  que,  may  hearen  not  permit,  etc. 

THEITB  60. 

1.  Before  war  wafl  declared,  the  Carthaginians  sent  onoe  more 
ambassadors  to  Kome.  2.  I  cannot  depend  on  your  promise,  unless 
you  give  me  the  necessary  security.^  3.  Caesar  went  by  forced' 
marches  to  Vienne,  on  the  Ehone,  before  the  enemy  (^plur.)  became 
aware'  of  his  approach.  4.  Get  up  early  to-morrow  morning,  that 
we  may  start*  in  good  time  (a  temps).  5.  I  shall  not  yet  pass  to 
the  perusal*  of  this  author,  imlcss  you  adrise*  me  to  do  it.  6.  Keep 
a  strict  watch'  over  all  your  senses,  Jest  intemperance  get?  the  better 
of  you.  7.  Though  he  is  lazy,  yet  he  improves  a  little  (fait  quel- 
ques  progres).  8.  I  shall  wait  until  (§  14)  you  have  done.  9. 
Wait  till  the  ram  be  over  (passee).  10.  Although  Homer ,•  ac- 
cording to^  Horace,  slumbers"  at  times,^*  he  is  nevertheless  (il  n^en 
est  pat  moins)  the  first  of  all  poets.  11.  You  will  succeed,"  pro- 
vided you  act  with  vigor.  12.  I  shall  soon  speak  French,  though  I 
am  convinced  that  it  is  a  difficult  language  13.  I  shall  not  Icaro 
the  house  before  {que  —  ne)  you  sign"  this  paper.  14.  May  Qt)d 
protect"  you.     15.  May  Heaven  preserve  us  from  war. 

1.  Oaravt{e,t,  2.  A  marches  forcita.  3.  S^apercevoir  de,  4.  Partir,  6.  LtO" 
tare,  f.  fl.  Consetller,  7.  VeiUez  avec  soin.  8.  To  got  the  better  of,  maitrlM^ 
qn.  9.  Homtre.  10.  Selon,  11.  SommdUer.  12.  Quelqu^oit.  13.  £iiu$ir,  14. 
Slffner.    16.  Protiger. 

THEME  61. 

1.  A  thoughtless^  man  knows  nothing,  though  he  have  read  a 
great  many  books ;  m  the  same  manner  a  great  many  porsoiur^  le- 


336  XIX.      DIX-NEUVIEME   LEgON. 

main  ignorant,  thougli  ttey  have  travelled  through  the  most  civilized 
countries.  2.  She  will  forgive  you,  provided  you  make  her  an 
apology.'  3.  K  somebody  comes,  and  I  am  not  at  home,  send  for 
me.  4.  I  shall  be  obliged*  to  do  it.  5.  We  should  be  obliged  to  do 
it.  6.  I  feared  you  would  have  complamed  of  me.  7.  Our  cousir 
set  out  without  our  knowing  (w.  that  we  knew)  [of]  his  intent ioni 
8.  I  do  not  believe  he  has  studied  history.  9.  Do  you  think  thej 
would  refuse  me,  if  I  requested  it  of  them  (si  je  les  en  priais)  1 
10.  May  all  nations  be  convinced"  of  this  truth !  11.  I  do  not 
think  he  is  so  old.  12.  Get  in"  without  his  seeing  you  (w.  that  he 
B.  y.).  13.  Go  gently,^  lest  he  should  hear  you.  14.  Make 
haste,*  lest  they  should  set  off  without  you.  15.  I  do  not  deny  that 
it  may  be  so.  16.  We  do  not  fear  that  it  will  give  you  pain."  17. 
Do  not  let^''  that  child  ride  this  horse  ;  I  am  afraid  he  will  throw" 
him  off.  18.  We  ought  to  practise  what  the  gospel^^  teaches  us. 
19.  Shall*  I  read  the  letter  aloud  ?  20.  Yes,  if  you  please.  21. 
I  doubt  whether  the  young  man  would  have  succeeded,  had  it  not 
been  for^  your  assistance. 

1.  Insouciant,  2.  Oens.  3.  Vos  excuses.  4.  Falloir.  6.  To  be  convinced,  te 
convnincre.  6.  Entrez.  7.  Doucement.  8.  D^pichez-^ous.  9.  Faire  de  la  peine, 
V>.  Psrmettre'    11.  Jeter ^ bos.    12.  I/6vangUe,ta.    13.  Sans, Beep. SOO, 


BEADING  LESSON. 
ALEXANDRE   SELKIRK. 
(Suite.) 

"  Abandonn^  sur  cette  ile  d(^serte  avec  mes  habits,  un  lit,  ul 
fiisil,^  une  livre  de  poudre,  des  balles,  du  tabac,  une  hache,  un  ecu- 
tcau,  un  chaudrpn,^  une  bible  et  quelques  autres  livres ;  je  m'amusai 
et  pourvus'  k  mes  besoins*  le  mieux  qu'il  me  fut  possible.  Mais 
darant  les  premiers  huit  mois  j'eus  beaucoup  de  peine  k  vaincre  la 
m^lancolie  et  k  surmonter  Fhorreur  que  me  causait  une  &i  affieuse 
Bolitude. 

"  Je  fis  deux  cabanes*  k  quelque  distance  Tune  de  I'autre,  aveo 


fflij  SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD.  i^) 

dn  bois  de  piment  ;•  je  les  couvris  d'une  espece  de  jono^  et  les  doub- 
lai"  de  pcaux  de  chevres  que  je  tuais  h  mesure  que  j'en  avais  besoin, 
tant  que  ma  poudre  dura.  Lorsqu'elle  approchait  de  sa  fin,  je  trou- 
vai  le  secret  de  tirer  du  feu  avec  deux  morceaux  de  bois  cjue  je 
frottais^  Tun  centre  I'autre.  Je  faisais  la  cuisine^*'  dans  la  plus  pe- 
tite de  mes  buttes,  et  dans  la  grande  je  dormais,  chantais  des  psaumes 
et  priais  Dieu.  Le  malbeur  m'avait  fait  conniutre  le  prix  de  la 
religion. 

*•  Accabl^  de  tristesse,  manquant  de  pain  et  de  sel,  jo  ne  man- 
geais  qu'k  Textr^mit^,  lorsque  la  faim  me  pressait,  et  je  n'allais  me 
coucher  que  lorsque  je  ne  pouvais  plus  soutenir  la  veille."  Le  bois 
de  piment  me  servait  k  cuire  la  viande,  et  k  m'^clairer,  et  son 
odeur^  aromatique  r^cr(5ait^'  mes  esprits  abattus. 

"  Je  ne  manquais  pas  de  poissons,  mais  je  n'osais  en  manger  sans 
§el,  parce  qu'ils  m'incommodaient,  k  la  reserve  ^*  des  ^crevisses  de 
riviere,  qui  sent  ici  d'lm  gout  exquis,  et  aussi  grosses  que  celles  de 
mer.  Tantot  je  les  mangeais  bouillies,  et  tantot  grillees,"  de  m§me 
que  la  cbair  des  chevres,  qui  n'a  pas  Ic  gout  si  fort  que  celle  des 
notres,  et  qui  donne  un  excellent  bouillon.^'  J'en  avais  tu^  jusqu'k 
einq  cents.  Quand  ma  poudre  fut  finio,  je  les  prenais  k  la  course. 
Par  un  exercice  continuel  je  m'^tais  rendu  si  agile  que  je  courais  h 
travers  les  bois,  sur  les  rochers  et  les  collines  avec  une  vitesse  in- 
croyable.  Peu  s'en  fallut  un  jour  quo  mon  agilite  ne  me  coiitat  h 
vie.  Je  poursuivais  une  cbevre  avec  tant  d'ardcur  que  je  la  pria 
sur  le  bord  d'un  precipice  que  des  buissons*'  me  cachaient,  et  je 
culbutai"  de  haut  en  bas  avec  elle.  Cette  chute  ^^  terrible  me  fit 
perdre  toute  connaissance.  En  fin  revenu  a  moi-meme,  je  trouvai  la 
ohevre  morte  sous  moi,  et  j'eus  assez  de  peine  k  me  trainer*  d  ma 
oabane,  qui  en  etait  k  un  mille,^  et  k  en  sortu*  au  bout  de  dix 
jours."  {To  be  continued.) 

1.  Gan.  2.  Kettle.  3.  From  pourvoir,  to  provide.  4.  Need,  want.  6.  Hat.  6, 
Plmenta.  7.  Rush.  8.  To  line.  9.  To  rub.  10.  To  cook.  11.  Watch,  watching. 
12.  Smell.  13.  To  revive.  14.  Exception.  15.  Broiled.  16.  Broth.  17. 
18.  To  tumble.    19.  FaU.    20.  To  drag.    21.  A  mUe. 


-^■■^ 


888  II.      VINGTT^ME   LBgON. 

QUESTIONNAIKB. 

Quels  effets  (things)  Ixii  ayait-on  laiss^B  ? 

N'avait-il  pas  de  nourriture  spirituello  ? 

Quel  fut  le  premier  soin  de  Selkirk  ? 

De  quoi  couvrit-il  les  cabanes  ? 

D'oii  tira-t-il  ces  peaui? 

Bst-ce  qu'il  priait  aussi  Dieu  ?  . 

Avaitril  de  quoi  faire  du  pain  ? 

Que  mangeait-il  done  ? 

N'avaitril  pas  de  poisson  ? 

N'y  avait-il  pas  d'^crevisses  ? 

Comment  les  mangeait-il  ? 

Eutril  toujours  assez  de  poudro  ? 

Comment  prenait-il  alors  les  chevres  ? 

Etaifc-il  done  si  agile  ? 

N'eufc-il  pas  d'accident  facheux  ? 

N'avait-il  pas  remarque  le  precipice  ? 

Se  blessa-t-il  par  suite  de  cette  chute  ? 

Quand  il  revint  k  lui,  dans  quel  6tat  so  trouTab^l  ? 


XX.    VINGTifiME    LE9ON, 


THE  INFINITIVE. 

1.  The  Infinitive  sometimes  takes  the  place  of  a  noun.  It  h 
used  as  the  subject  of  a  sentence,  where  in  English  the  Part.  Pres 
!a  often  found.     Ex.:  — 

Secourir  les  pauvres  est  une  action  louabU. 
To  relieve  the  poor  is  a  praiseworthy  action. 
Midire  est  une  infamie. 
CaluBUiiatiiui  if  ihwrMtftil 


THE  INFINITIVE.  339 

NoTB  i  In  some  instances  it  becomes  properly  a  noun  and  takes  the 
Article  with  it,  as:  le  manger,  le  boire,  les  vivres  (victuals).  If  such  an  In- 
finitive is  amplified  by  means  of  other  words,  it  is  better  to  write  c'«8<  of 
<^aait  instead  of  est  or  &ait,  and  sometimes  also  voila.    Ex. :  — 

N'aimfr  que  sot,  c'est  ainier  peu  de  chose. 

To  love  no  one  but  one's  self  is  to  love  very  little. 

'  NoTB  2.  When  this  amplification  is  somewhat  long,  the  Inflnitivo  oan- 
not  remain  at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence,  but  must  be  placed  after  tht 
predicate,  and  takes  de  before  it.  In  order,  however,  not  to  confuse  the 
sense  and  the  construction  of  the  sentence,  ce  or  il  is  employed  as  a  merely 
introductory  subject ;  c«,  if  a  substantive  follows,  U,  if  an  adjective.  Ex- 
amples:— 

Cest  un  honneur  d'itre  utile  a  $a  patrie. 
II  est  glorieux  de  mourir  pour  sa  patrie. 

Note  3.  If  this  antecedent  predicate  have  several  or  long  amplifltations 
Ihe  subject-infinitive  is  commonly  introduced  by  an  expletive  que.     Ex. :  — 

CAait  une  grande  nouveauU  pour  le  roi  que  d'entendre  parler  si  naturelle- 
mmt. 

2.  Where  two  imperatives  are  connected  in  English  by  and, 
if  the  first  is  a  verb  of  motion  the  second  must  be  translated  in 
French  by  the  Infinitive,  and  the  conjunction  omitted.     Ex.:  — 

Go  and  see  my  brother,  allez  voir  mon  frhre. 
Go  and  do  it,  AUez  le  /aire. 

3.  A  verb  immediately  preceded  by  and  depending  on  another 
verb  (auxiliaries  excepted),  or  following  a  preposition,  other  than 
en,  must  be  put  in  the  Infinitive :  — 

Je  vow  le  ferai  savoir,  tans  itre  press€. 

4.  Comment,  how ;  que,  what ;  oii,  where ;  paurqiwi,  why,  and 
a  few  other  words  similarly  used  in  interrogations,  are  often  followed 
by  the  Infinitive  instead  of  the  Indicative,  when  the  sense  will  not 
thereby  be  rendered  obscure.  Thus  '*  Pourquoi  alter  7  "  may  mean 
"  Why  do  you  go  ?  "  "  Que  faire7  "  "  What  is  to  be  done  ?  " 
"  Que  dire ?*'   "  What  shall  I  say ? " 

5.  Hie  Infinitive  without  a  preposition  is  used  in  French  after 


340  XX.      VINGTIl^MB  LEgON. 

verbs  of  motion,  as :  oEer,  envoyer,  etc. ;  after  verbs  tbat  denote  i 
perception  of  the  senses,  as :  entendre,  sentir,  voir,  etc.,  and  aftei 
the  following  verbs :  — 

Affirmer,  to  affirm.  jurer,  to  swear. 

assurer,  to  assure.  laisser,  to  let,  to  permit. 

2V0uer,  to  confess.  jiier,  to  deny. 

ccmpter,  to  reckon,  intend.  oser,  to  dare. 

croire,  to  believe.  paraitre,  to  appear. 

daigner,  to  deign.  penser,  to  think. 

declarer,  to  declare.  .  pr€tendre,  to  pretend. 

d€sirer,*  to  wish.  pouvoir,  to  be  able. 

devoir,  to  be  obliged.  reconnaitre,  to  acknowledge 

dire,  to  say.  savoir,  to  know. 

esp&er,*  to  hope.  sembler,  to  appear,  to  i 

faillir,  to  miss.  souhaiter,*  to  wish. 

faire,  to  do.  soutenir,  to  maintain. 

/i//oer  (i7  ./auf),  it  mnst.  t€moigner,  to  testify. 

B'imaginer,*  to  imagine.  vouloir,  to  be  willing. 

Examples:  — 
Fcn«z  no«s  voir  demain.  • 

Come  and  see  us  to-morrow. 
Je  cours  lui  apprendre  cette  rwuveUe. 
1  hasten  to  tell  him  this  news. 
H  faut  envoi/er  cherclier  le  m^decin. 
We  must  send  for  the  doctor. 
Vous  osez,  —  daignez,  —  d^sirez,  etc.  lui  porter  I 
You  dare,  —  deign,  — wish,  etc.  to  speak  to  him ! 
Je  croyais  — ,  je  d€sirais,  etc.  lui  rendre  un  service. 
I  thought — ,  I  wished — ,  etc.  to  render  him  a 
Je  compte  — ,  j'espere,  etc.  oiler  a  Paris. 
1  intend  — ,  I  hope,  etc.  to  go  to  Paris. 
Je  ne  sais  pas  nager. 
I  cannot  swim. 
Croyez-vous  avoir  raisonf 
Do  you  believe  you  are  in  the  right  ? 
Je  Ventends  venir. 
X  hear  him  coming 


THE  INF^nTIVE.  341 

NoTB  1.  After  the  above  four  verbs  marked,*  de  is  sometimea  used, 
especially  when  they  themselves  stand  in  the  Infinitive.    Ex. :  — 
Peut-on  esp€rer  de  vous  voir  demain  t 
Personne  ne  doit  s'imaginer  de  tout  savoir. 

Note  2.  The  verb  faire  is  used  for  to  doy  to  make  and  to  get,  to  cause ;  io 
all  these  cases  it  is  immediately  followed,  in  French,  by  the  Infimtive  activt 
without  a  preposition :  — 

Je  ferai  bdtir  une  maison. 

I  will  cause  a  house  to  be  built 

Voulez-vons  faire  laver  vo$  gants  f 

Will  you  have  your  gloves  washed  1 

Je  lui  ferai  faire  un  theme. 

I  will  make  him  write  an  exercise. 

6.  The  simple  Infinitive  is  governed  further  by  the  verbs: 
aimer*  when  used  in  the  Conditional,  I  should  like ;  preferer,  to 
prefer  ;  aimer  anlant,  to  like  as  much ;  il  vaiU  mieua:,  it  is  better. 
Examples :  — 

Taimerais  le  wir,  I  should  like  to  see  him. 

Jl  vaut  mieux  c^der,  it  is  better  to  yield. 

Je  pr€fer^  rester  a  la  maison,  I  prefer  staying  at  home. 

NoTB.  When,  however,  in  the  second  member  of  a  comparison  a  second 
Infinitive  follows  que,  this  latter  takes  de  before  it.    Ex.:  — 
Jaime  mieux  mourir  que  de  trahir  mon  secret. 
I  will  rather  die  than  betray  my  secret. 

7.  The  Infinitive  is  used  afber  every  prepoffllion  except  en. 
Examples :  — 

Au  lieu  de  jouer,  instead  of  playing. 

Sans  oiler,  without  going. 

Puur  voir,  for  the  purpose  of  seeing. 

THEME  62. 

1.  To  speak  too  much  is  dangerous.  2.  To  clothe*  the  poor  is  a 
good  work.*  3.  To  lie  is  to  disregard '  God  and  to  fear  men.  4. 
To  purchase  peace  of  an  enemy  is  to  give  him  the  means  of  cany" 

*  In  regard  to  aimer  with  d  consult  ^  16  of  this 


342  ZX.      VINGTI^ME  Lf}90N. 

ing  on*  war.  5.  Can  you  inform  me  wbether  the  ooorier  has 
arrived  ?  6.  He  has  not  yet  arrived.  7.  One  must  know  [how]  to 
keep*  a  secret.  8.  This  man  thinks  he  knows  (i^i/*.)  everything. 
9.  We  hope  to  see  the  queen.  10.  When  do  you  intend  to  re- 
tarn?  11.  I  do  not  know  precisely  ;•  but  I  hope  to  see  you  again 
■oon.  12.  The  king  caused  the  brave  soldiers  to  be  rewarded.  13. 
It  is  much  better  to  keep  silent^  thaa  to  say  such  things.  14.  The 
most  unfortunate  of  men  is  he  who  thinks  himself  to  be  such  (r). 
16.  He  assured  us  that  he  had  been  there.  16.  To  yield"  to  ne- 
cessity ifl  not  to  be  [a]  coward.'  17.  Eating,  drinking,  and  sleeping 
were  his  only  occupations.  18.  I  hastened  to  communicate^''  to  him 
thifi  intelligence."  19  He  came  to  tell  me  that  he  had  won  noth- 
mg  in  the  lottery.  20.  Who  would  not  rather  (like  to)  be  poor 
than  possess  unjustly  acquired  wealth?"  21.  Bayard  said  to  the 
Constable  de  Bourbon :  **  It  is  better  to  perish  fighting  (c»  combat- 
Umt)  for  one's  {sa)  country,"  than  to  conquer  and  (to)  triumph " 
orer  it  {d\Ue). 

1.  ntir.  2.  (Mtvre,  f.  S.  Mifpri$er.  4.  ConHtmtr.  6.  Taire.  •.  Au  jutte,  7. 
8e  Udre.  8.  Ced^r  d.  9.  Ldche.  10.  Communiguer.  11.  K*wmXU,  f.  18.  Dee 
rich4$$umalacqui»es.    13.  Patrie.    14.  Triomphm'. 


THE  INTINITIVE  PRECEDED  BT  DE. 

8.  After  a  substantive  which  the  yerb  limits,  the  English  prepo- 
sition of  with  a  Pros.  Participle  (of  going,  of  seeing,  etc.)  is  gen- 
erally expressed  by  de  with  the  Infinitive.     Ex. :  — 

Lt  d£iir  de  vous  voir,  the  desire  of  seeing  you. 

Sa  maniere  de  penser  et  d'agir  (of  thinking  and  acting). 

H  est  tempi  de  partir,  it  i»  time  to  set  out. 

JTai  VhcumeuT  de  vcus  tcdtier. 

9.  The  preposition  de  is  placed  before  a  verb  in  the  InfinitiTC, 
after  the  adjectives:  avide,  content,  mecontent,  las,  digne, 
capaJMe,  incapable,  etc.,  and  in  general  after  an  adjective,  whenever, 
by  inverting  the  sentence,  the  clause  containing  the  Infinitive  mighi 


THB  LNFLNWIVB.  S43 

be  made  the  leading  terc^  of  an  assertion  expressed  as  subjeot  to 
■ome  tense  of  to  be.     Ex.:  — 

Je  suis  cwieux  de  savoir. 

I  am  anxious  to  know. 

Et€$-vous  las  de  travailler  t 

Are  you  tired  with  working  1 

Cet  homme  est  capable  de  vous  trvmper. 

That  man  is  capable  of  deceiving  you. 

Vou9  etes  tre$-adroit  d'avoir  si  bien  riussi. 

You  are  rcry  clercr  to  hare  succeeded  bo  well. 

10.  De  is  used  before  the  Infinitive  after  impersonal  verbs, 
such  as :  %l  convient,  it  is  proper ;  il  importe,  it  concerns  ;  il  t'agtt, 
it  is  the  question ;  il  suffit,  it  is  enough  ;  il  me  tarde,  I  long,  and 
after  il  est,  il  etait  or  il  temhle  followed  by  an  adjective,  as :  il  est 
facile,  il  4tait  necessaire,  etc.     Elx.:  — 

n  m*vnporte  beaucoup  de  lui  dire  cela. 

It  concemi  me  much  to  tell  him  thii. 

n  eat  beau  de  pardonner  h  $on  ennemi. 

It  is  a  good  thing  to  pardon  one's  enemy. 

n  suffira  de  lui  parler. 

It  will  be  enough  to  ipeak  to  him. 

11.  Deia  used  after  que,  than,  in  a  comparison  of  predicates. 
See  Note,  §  6,  of  this  lesson. 

THEME  M. 

1.  You  have  no  cause*  to  bt  angry  with  (^contre)  me.  2.  Were 
you  at  the  concert  yesterday  ?  3.  I  did  not  hare  thft  pleasure  of 
seeing  you.  4.  The  way*  to  be  happy  is  to  bo  virtuous.  5.  Have 
you  the  intention  of  selling  your  horse  ?  6.  Not  at  all ;  I  intend 
to  keep  it.  7.  I  fear  losing  (to  lose)  your  confidence.*  8.  It  is 
too  late ;  it  is  time  to  go  to  bed.  9.  The  art  of  dancing  was  known 
to  the  ancients.     10.  It  is  disgraceful*  to  obey  (a)  one'a  passions. 

11,  The  desire  of  appearing  clever  often  prevents  one  becoming  so.* 

12.  We  rejoice  greatly  to  see  you.     13.  It  is  i^reeable  to  hear  the 
fcwitttt'  of  the  birds.     14.  It  in  useless  to  warn'  him.     15.  It  is  a 


344 


XX.    vingtiBme  LEgON. 


beautiful  thing  to  for^ve  one's  enemies.  16.  It  is  pleasant  to  live 
with  one's  friends.  17.  It  is  the  fate*  of  all  human  things  to  be  of 
short  duration.'  18.  The  gi-eat  secret  of  being  happy  is  to  work 
and  to  be  virtuous.  19.  I  don't  approve  [of]  your  project  of  going 
to  Europe.  20.  Gentleness^**  is  the  surest  means  of  escaping  every 
21.  It  is  sad  to  have  no  fiiends  and  to  be  forsaken." 


1.  Avoir  si^et.  2.  Le  moyen.  3.  Confiance,  f.  4.  Honteux.  5.  De  le  devenir, 
6.  Le  gazouillement.  7.  Avertir.  8.  Le  sort.  9.  De  n'avoir  gy?une  courte  dur^. 
10.  La  douceur,    11.  AhandomU. 

12.   De  is  further  used  before  the  Infinitive,  when  the  latter  is 
immediately  preceded  by  any  of  the  following  verbs :  — 


Abstenir  (s*),  to  abstain. 

accuser,  to  accuse. 

achever,  to  finish.    ^ 

affecter,  to  affect. 

agir  (a')  (unip.),  to  be  the  question. 

ambitionner,  to  aspire  to. 

appartenir,  to  pertain,  to  become. 

applaudir  (s'),  to  rejoice,  exult. 

appr^hender,  to  apprehend. 

avertir,  to  warn. 

aviser  (s'),  to  determine. 

hlamer,  to  blame. 

hrvler,  to  wish  ardently. 

censurer,  to  censure. 

cesser,  to  cease. 

chagriner  (se),  to  grieve. 

charger,  to  commission. 

choisir,  to  choose. 

commander,  to  command. 

conjurer,  to  entreat. 

conseiller,  to  advise. 

convenir,  to  become,  to  suit. 

convaincre,  to  convince. 

corriger,  to  correct. 

craindre,  to  fear. 

d^courager,  to  discourage. 

d6daigner,  to  disdain,  scorn. 

d^endre,  to  forbid. 


d€f€ndre  (se),  to  decline. 

d€fier,  to  challenge. 

d€pecher  (se),  to  hasten. 

d€saccoutumer  (se),  )       .  ^ 

d^shabituer  (se),      > 

d^sesp€rer,  to  despair. 

d^sirer,  to  desire.  De  is  often  omit* 
ted  after  this  verb. 

d^soter  (se),  to  be  grieved. 

d^tester,  to  detest.  De  may  be  omit- 
ted. 

d^ourner,  to  dissuade. 

devoir  (se),  to  owe  it  to  one's  self. 

diff€rer,  to  put  oflF. 

dire,  to  tell. 

disconvenir,  to  disown,  deny. 

discontinuer,  to  discontinue. 

disculper,  to  exculpate. 

dispenser,  to  excuse  from. 

dispenser  (se),  to  forbear. 

dissuader,  to  dissuade. 

dotiter,  to  doubt. 

^crire,  to  write. 

efforcer  (s'),  to  endeavor. 

effrayer  (s'),  to  be  frightened. 

empecher,  to  hinder. 

empresser  (s'),  to  hasten. 

enraffer,  to  be  enraged. 


THE  INFINITIVE. 


mtr'ifjrendre,  to  nndertake. 

^!H)uvanter  (a'),  to  be  frightened. 

essayer,  to  try. 

itmner  (s'),  to  wonder. 

ifoiter,  to  avoid. 

excuser  (s'),  to  excuse  one's  wlf. 

feindre,  to  feign. 

fifliciter,  to  congratulate. 

Jinir,  to  finish. 

Jlatter  (se),  to  flatter  one's  self. 

frimir,  to  shudder. 

garder  (se),  to  take  care. 

gemir,  to  moan,  lament. 

glorijier  (se),  to  pride  one's  self. 

hasarder,  to  hazard,  to  risk ;  se  hasar- 

der  requires  a. 
hater  (se),  to  hasten. 
imputer,  to  impute. 
indigner  (s'),  to  be  indicant. 
ing^rer  {a'),  to  intermeddle* 
inspirer,  to  inspire. 
jurer,  to  swear. 
manquer,  to  fail. 
mfditer,  to  contemplate. 
meler  (se),  to  concern  one's  self. 
menacer,  to  threaten. 
m^ter,  to  deserve. 
moquer  (se),  to  laugh  at 
mourir  (fig.),  to  long. 
nigliger,  to  neglect 
m«r,  to  deny. 
o^V,  to  offer.    - 
omettre,  to  omit. 
ordonner,  to  order. 
oublier,  to  forget. 
pardonner,  to  forgive. 
parler,  to  speak. 
pa&s«r  (se),  to  do  without 
permettre,  to  permit. 
penuader,  to  persuade, 
pt^ucr  (se),  to  take  pride  in. 
plaindre,  to  pity 


platndre  (se),  to  complain. 

prescrire,  to  prescribe. 

presser,  to  urge. 

press&r  (se),  to  hasten. 

pr^sumer,  to  presume. 

/>ncr,  to  pray,  entreat. 

promettre,  to  promise. 

proposer,  to  propose. 

proposer  (se),  to  purpose. 

protester,  to  protest. 

punir,  to  punish. 

rassasier  (se),  to  be  sated. 

rebuter,  to  discourage. 

rebuter  (se),  to  be  weary. 

recommander,  to  recommend. 

refuser,  to  refuse. 

regretter,  to  regret. 

r€jouir  (se),  to  rejoice. 

remercier,  to  thank. 

repent ir  (se),  to  repent 

reprendre,  to  censure. 

r€primandeT,  to  reprimand. 

reprocher,  to  reproach. 

reprocher  (se),  to  reproach  one's  self. 

r€soudre,  to  resolve.     When  active, 

followed  by  (fe ;  passive,  by  i. 
ressouuentr  (se),  to  remember. 
nVe,  to  laugh. 
risquer,  to  venture. 
•eoiV,  to  be  becoming. 
rougir,  to  blush. 
acandaUser  /se),  to  take  offence. 
Bommer,  to  summon. 
souffrir,  to  suffer. 
aouhaiter,  to  wish.     Z^  may  bA  sup- 


soup^onner,  to  suspect. 
gouvenir  (se),  to  remember. 
»w^r«  (unip.),  to  suffice. 
sugg^rer,  to  suggest. 
ntpplier,  to  beseech. 
tatJier,  toeadctt^v^r 


846  XX.  YIHGTIEME   LEgON. 

tarder,  (unip.),  to  long.  w  trouver  bien,  to  derire  benefit 

tenter,  to  attempt.  u  trouver  mal,  to  fare  ilL 

trembler,  to  tremble.  vanttr  (se),  to  boaat. 


EXAMPLES. 

n  cute  de  pUuimr,  it  ceases  raining. 
Je  wus  eonseilU  de  partir,  I  advise  jou  to  get  oat 
J*  trains  de  voua  d^anger,  I  fear  to  disturb  you. 
II  e$t  d^fendu  de  Jumer  id,  smokimg  la  forbidden  here 
Dites-lui  de  venir,  tell  him  to  come. 
Vous  m&itez  d'etre  puni,  you  deserve  to  be  punished. 
77  risque  de  tout  perdre,  he  risks  losing  ercrything. 
La  forteresse  Jut  somm^e  de  se  rendre,  the  fortress  -n&a  summoned  to  sur- 
render. 

13.  After  the  following  prepositions  and  conjunctions: — /w«, 
hors,  avant,  au  lieu,  loin,  afin,  a  moint,  de  crainie,  or  de  peur, 
d  force  (by)  faiUe  (for  want  of) ,  plutot  que  (rather  than) .    Ex. : — 

Avnnt  de  partir,  before  departing. 

Au  lieu  de  pleurer,  instead  of  crying. 

Lsin  de  se  corriger,  far  from  amending  himself. 

A  f&rcs  de  prier,  by  much  entreaty. 

Dieu  nous  afflige  ajin  de  ntus  urriger,  God  lendi  uf  afflictloBS  (in  order) 
to  amend  ut. 

Je  SOTS  J  de  crainte  (or  depeur)  de  vous  d^rmnger,  I  go  for  fear  of  disturbing 
you. 

TH£M£  M. 

1.  I  adyise  yon  to  stay  here  and  (to)  begin  your  studies.  2.  I 
beg  you  to  come  at  ax  o'clock.  3.  The  first  step^  towards  good 
(vers  le  Hen)  is  to  avoid  evil.  4.  It  is  {c^est)  the  duty  of  a  Chris- 
dan*  to  please  God,  to  hurt  nobody,  and  to  do  good,  even  to  his 
enemies.  5.  He  is  not  able  to  go  so  far.  6.  You  are  very  amiable 
in  having  come  to  pay*  us  a  visit.  7.  It  is  dangerous  to  trust*  every- 
body. 8.  The  law  of  nature  forbids  us  to  do  injustice  (tort)  to 
others.  9.  A  simple  and  temperate  diet*  lays  the  foimdation*  of 
firm  health,  [which  is]  capable  of  enduring'  the  greatest  hardships.* 
10.  I  oannot  help®  recognizing  in  the  laws  oi  miuie  a  wooderfiil 


THE  UMFmiTlVg.  347 

art ;  and  I  hesitate  not  to  say,  in  the  language  of  Scripture,^  that 
every  star  hasteneth^  to  go  whither  the  Lord  sendeth  it. 


1.  Lt  pat,    2.  Chritien.    8.  Faire,    4.  Se  fler  d.    6.  Nourriiure.    fl. 
;.  Supporter.    6.  Lea /cUigties.    9.  M^empicher.     10.  VEcrUurt  SairUe,    11.  8e 
i^picher, 

THEME  65. 

1.  I  was  astonished,  after  such  news,  to  see  the  man  so  quiet. 
2.  Before  one  writes  (^Inf.)j  one  must  know  what  one  wishes  to  say. 
8.  Instead  of  working,  ho  went  to  walk  that  day.  4.  I  longed^  to 
see  my  native  country^  again ;  accordingly*  I  determined  to  embark* 
for  Europe.  5.  By  much  entreaty,  I  induced'  my  friend  to  accom- 
pany me.  6.  For  fear  of  offending  him,  I  preferred  to  remain* 
silent.  7.  The  enemy  retired,'  in  order*  to  make  believe  that  he 
had  given  over*  the  siege.  8.  When  one  advised  Philip  to  expeP" 
from  his  dominions^  a  man  who  had  spoken  ill  of  him ;  "I  will  take 
care^  not  to  do  it,"  replied  Philip;  "he  would  go  everywhere 
and  speak  ill  of  me." 

1.  lime  tardait.  2.  Pay$  natal,  t.  Cest pcurquoi.  4.  Fembarquer p^ur.  6. 
Engager  d,  f .  M*  iaire.  7.  Eeflcctlye  Terb.  I.  JJtn  d*.  f .  Btncmetr  4.  la 
Cha$$0r,    11.  Etat.    12.  Se  girder  bien. 

THl  INIINITIVl  WITH   O. 

We  place  the  preposition  a  before  the  Infinitive  of  a  verb :  — 

14.  When  the  English  Infinitive  is  passive,  or  can  be  changed  to 
the  passive  without  altering  the  sense.     Ex. :  — 

La  moiuon  h.  tsp€T€r^  the  harvest  to  be  hoped  for. 
CeUe  maison  est  a  vendre,  this  house  is  to  be  sold. 
Je  n'ai  pas  de  temps  a  perdre,  I  have  no  time  to  loio. 

15.  After  a  substantive,  when  the  following  verb  is  or  may  be 
expressed  by  in  with  the  Pres.  Part.     Ex. :  — 

J^aurai  beaucoup  de  plaisir  a  vcus  voir. 
I  shjdl  have  great  pleasure  in  seeing  you. 

16.  After  any  adjectives  which  take  a  verb  in  the  InfinitivQ  to 
complete  the  sense,  provided  the  verb  preceding  the  adjeotive  ii  not 
used  impersonally.     Espocially  after :  — 


348  zz.    yingtiSme  LsgoN. 

Aocesnble,  accessible.  lent,  slow. 

ai8€,  easy.  pret,  ready. 

attentif,  attentiye.  prompt,  quick. 

ban,  good.  propre,  fit,  proper. 

dispose,  disposed,  inclined.  sensible,  sensible. 

difficile,  difficult,  hard.  sourd,  deaf. 

docile,  obedient.  titHe,  useful. 

habile,  skilful.  inutile,  useless. 

facile,  easy.  (See  also  L.  VHI.,  Gov.  of  Adj,) 

EXAMPLES. 

Cette  legon  est  facile  a  apprendre,  this  lesson  is  easy  to  learn. 

Ce  fruit  n*est  pas  bon  a  manger,  this  fruit  is  not  good  to  eat. 

Ce  theme  est-il  difficile  a  traduire  f  is  this  exercise  hard  to  translate  ? 

Nous  sommes  disposes  a  croire  que,  etc.,  we  are  disposed  (inclined)  to  believe 
that,  etc. 

Soyez  prompts  a  faire  le  bien,  be  quick  to  do  good. 

Note.  Compare  the  following  sentences,  in  which  the  verb  preceding 
the  adjective  is  used  impersonally  (see  L.  XX.,  §  10).    Ex. :  — 

n  n'est  pas  facile  de  prononcer  ce  mot,  it  is  not  easy  to  pronounce  that 
word. 

n  est  difficile  de  vaincreses  passions,  it  is  difficult  to  conquer  one's  passions. 

n  semble  difficile  d* apprendre  cette  kmgue,  it  seems  difficult  to  learn  that 
language. 

The  other  way  would  be :  — 

Ce  mot  n'est  pas  facile  a  prononcer, 

Cette  langue  parait  difficile  a  apprendre,  etc, 

THEME  66. 

1.  This  ^ood  is  to  be  sold.  2.  These  rooms  are  to  let.  3.  We 
have  not  a  moment  to  lose.  4.  There  is  much  pleasure  in  taking  a 
a  walk.  5.  Is  this  house  to  sell  or  to  let  ?  6.  It  is  to  let.  7.  I 
perceived  in  him  a  kind^  of  repugnancy  to  learn  Greek.*  8.  Ycm 
know  his  courage  in  facing'*  dangers.  9.  This  girl  spends  all  her 
dme  in  playing.  10.  There  is  more  glory  in  dying  like  Nelson  than 
in  living  in  unmerited*  honor.  11.  Is  German  easy  to  learn?  12. 
It  is  not  so  easy  as  French.  13.  That  is  easy  to  say^  but  not  so 
easy  to  do.  14.  That  forest*  is  dangerous  to  pass.  15.  I  am 
ready  to  follow  you,  but  I  fear  that  you  are  not  fit  to  goide'  m. 


THE  INFINinVB. 


349 


16.  Be  attentive  to  seize  the  opportunity.'     17.  The  just  man  ie 

slow  to  punish  but  quick  to  reward.     18.  Are  you  dispose rl  to  do 

what   I   tell  you?     19.    I  shall  be  quick  to  perform  what  you 

command  me. 

1.  Une  sorte  de  repugnance.     2.  L«  Grec.      3.  Affi^onter.     4.  Au  sein  des  hon^ 
news  gu'on  n'a  pas  vUrites.    5.  Foret,  f.    6.  Ouider,  conduire.     7.  IPocoasion, 


17.   The  following  verbs  also  govern  the  Infinitive  with  a:  — 
Aha{s8er{s'),  to  stoop. 
abmttir,  to  end  in. 
accorder(s'),  to  agree,  to  coincide 


accoutujner,  to  accustom. 
acharner(s' ) ,  to  strive  furiously. 
admettre,  to  admit,  to  permit. 
aguerrir(s'),  to  become  inured. 
aider,  to  help. 

<umer,  to  like  (v.  L.  XX.,  §  6). 
amuser(s'),  to  amuse  one's  self  with. 
animer,  to  animate,  to  incite. 
app/iquer{s'),  to  apply  one's  self. 
apprendre,  to  learn,  to  teach. 
appreter{s'),  to  prepare. 
aspirer,  to  aspire. 
assigner,  to  assign,  to  summon. 


consentir,  to  consent. 

consister,  to  consist. 

conspirer,  to  conspire. 

consumer,  to  consume. 

contribuer,  to  contribute. 

convier,   to  invite.     Sometimes  fol- 
lowed by  de. 

couter,  to  cost.    When  used  imper- 
sonally it  is  followed  by  de. 

decider,  to  decide. 

determiner,  to  determine. 

determiner (se) ,  to  resolve. 

disposer,  to  dispose. 

disposer (se),  to  prepare  one's  self. 

divertir{se),  to  amuse  one's  self. 

donner,  to  give. 


a88ujettir{s'),  to  subject  one's  self  to.  employer,  to  employ. 


attacher(s'),  to  strive. 

attendre{s'),  to  rely  upon,  expect 

attendre,  to  put  off,  delay. 

augmenter(s'),  to  increase. 

auiariser,  to  authorize. 

aviler{s'),  to  debase  one's  self. 

aixiir,  to  have. 

balancer,  to  hesitate. 

bomer(se),  to  confine  one's  self  to. 

dicrcher,  to  seek. 

Qomplairi{se),  to  delight  in. 

concourir,  to  concur. 

oondamner,  to  condemn  :  also  the  ref. 

oondesotndrtt  to  C(»ide»ceiid. 


encourager,  to  encourage. 

engager,  to  induce. 

enhardir,  to  embolden. 

enseigner,  ta  leach. 

entendre{s'),  to  be  skilful,  lo  be  a 

judge. 
entreprendre,  to  undertake. 
essayer(s*),  to  attempt. 
etonner(s'),  to  wonder. 
etre,  to  be. 

€tudier(s'),  to  make  it  one's  study. 
€vertuer(se),  to  strive  (may   be  fol- 

followed  by  pour). 
iixodUr,  to  exod. 


350 


rx.     VmOTlfiMB  LEgON. 


exciter,  to  excite. 
exercer(s'),  to  practice. 
exhorter,  to  exhort. 
exposer{s')  to  expose  one's  self. 
baXr,  to  hate. 

habituer(s'),  to  become  used  to 
kasarder{8e),  to  venture. 
h€siter,  to  hesitate. 
mduire,  to  induce. 
instruire,  to  instruct. 
int^resser,  to  interest. 
inviter,  to  invite, 
meftr*-,  to  set,  to  put. 
w€ftr<j(s(!),  to  begin. 
montrer,  to  show,  to  teach. 
obstiner{s'),  to  persist  in. 
offrir{s*),  to  offer  one's  ierriceB. 
opinidtrer{s')  to  insist  upon. 
parvenir,  to  succeed  in. 
passer,  to  spend  (time,  etc.). 
pencher,  to  incline. 
penser,  to  think,  to  intend. 
pers€v€rer,  to  persevere. 
perslster,  to  persist. 
pfeire(s«),  to  delight  in. 
plier{se),  to  bend,  bow,  comply, 
porter,  to  induce. 
pousser,  to  urge,  compel. 


prendre  plaiser,  to  take  pleasure. 

/w<!parer(sg),  to  prepare. 

pr^endre,  to  lay  claim,  to  sue.  When 
signifying  to  mean,  to  intend,  it 
governs  the  infinitive  without  a 
preposition. 

provoquer,  to  provoke. 

r€duire,  to  constrain. 

r€duire{te),  to  be  reduced. 

renoncer,  to  renounce. 

r€pugner,  to  be  repugnant. 

r€signer{se) ,  to  be  resigned. 

r€soudre{se),  to  resolve. 

Tester,  to  remain.     Also  used  imp. 

r^issir,  to  succeed. 

risquer,  to  risk. 

stfrinr,  to  serve. 

Sanger,  to  dream,  think,  purpose. 

»u^re,  to  suffice.  May  be  followed 
by  pour.  When  used  imperson- 
ally, is  followed  by  de. 

tarder,  to  defer,  to  delay. 

tendre,  to  tend,  to  intend,  to  aim. 

tenir,  to  be  anxious,  desirous. 

travaiUer,  to  labor. 

viser,  to  aim. 

vouer,  to  devote. 


Examples:  — 
J*aime  a  danser,  I  like  to  dance. 
.    Mon  JUs  apprend  a  chanter,  my  son  learns  to  siii|^. 
Je  vous  autorise  a  vendre  mon  jardin. 
I  authorize  you  to  sell  my  garden. 
Notre  bonheur  consiste  a  vivre  tuivant  la  nature. 
Our  hstppiness  consists  in  living  according  to  nature. 
On  m'a  invito  a  /aire  une  promenade. 
I  have  been  invited  to  take  a  walk. 

18.    The  Infinitive  preceded  by  a  is  idioraatically  used  after  the 
veth  etre  to  transkte  the  Ekiglish  progrmmve  fon»8.  suob  as  :   /  am 


THE  mFmrnvB,  861 

singing,  I  was  writing,  etc.     The  French  Je  mis   a  chanter^ 

Titais  a  ecrire,  are,  however,  not  so  much  used  as  the  English 
participial  inflections,  which  are  generally  rendered  by  the  simple 
verb  Ji  chante,  fecrivaiSt  etc. 

1 9  The  Infinitive  with  a  also  occurs  in  abbreviated  expression.': 
which  in  reaUty  are  simply  contracted  subordinate  sentences. 
Examples ;  — 

A  I'entendre,  on  dirait  qu'il  est  innocent. 

To  heax  him,  one  would  say  he  is  innocent. 

A  vous  voir,  on  croirait  .  .  . 

To  see  you,  one  would  think  .  .  . 

Tl  etait  le  premier  a  se  Jeter  sur  Pennemi. 

He  was  the  first  to  throw,  i.  c.  who  threw  himself  on  the  enemy. 

Je  ne  tuis  pas  homme  a  me  laisser  offenser, 

I  am  not  the  man  to  allow  myself  to  be  offended. 

Je  me  plagai  de  maniere  a  pouvoir  tout  observer. 

I  placed  myself  in  such  a  posture  as  to  observe  everything. 

20.  Verbs  with  a  or  de.  The  following  verbs  require  either  d 
or  de,  according  to  the  sense  in  which  they  are  employed  :  — 

1.  Commencerf  to  begin,  is  generally  followed  by  a.    Ex.:  — 
On  a  commence'  a  jouer,  they  have  begun  to  play. 

But  if  it  expresses  simply  a  fact  without  any  idea  of  continoatkm,  ds  is 
used  after  it :  — 

Puisque  j'ai  commence  de  rompre  le  silence. 

Since  I  have  begun  to  break  the  silence. 

2.  Continuer  a  denotes  an  uninterrupted  continuation  of  the  action. 
Example ;  — 

Si  votis  continuez  a  travailler  si  fart,  vous  ruinerez  voire  sanU. 
If  you  continue  to  work  so  much  you  will  ruin  your  health. 
Ccntinuer  de  denotes  an  action  repeated,  but  after  successive  intern^ 
tions.    Ex  :  — 
Mon  ami  continuait  de  m*(crire. 
My  firiend  continued  to  write  to  me. 

3.  D€fier  requires  a  when  it  means  to  challenge,  to  provoke  (to  a  competi 
^fm)f  and  de  when  it  mesns  to  set  at  d^/iancs,  or,  defy  to  do  fomeUiing. 


362  XX.     VINGTiiME  LEgON. 

4.  S*efforcer,  STnonymous  with  faire  des  efforts,  to  exert  one*8  uelf,  to 
take  pains,  takes  a.     Ex.: — 

//  s'effnr^ait  a  faire  son  devoir. 

He  took  pains  (exerted  himself)  to  do  his  duty. 

S'efforcer  de  means  to  endeavor.    Ex.:  — 

Je  m'efforcerai  d'obtenir  cette  place. 

I  shall  endeavor  to  get  that  place. 

5.  Btre^  to  be,  when  joined  to  ce,  is  followed  by  a  if  it  denotes  turn,  and 

(ly  de,  if  it  denotes  duty  or  right,  as  :  — 

C'est  a  vous  a  parler,  it  is  your  turn  to  speak. 

C'est  au  maitre  d'ordonner,  c'est  a  moi  d'ob€ir. 

It  is  for  the  master  to  command,  it  is  for  me  to  obey. 

6.  Ldisser,  to  leave,  meaning  to  transmit,  is  followed  by  a ;  meaning  to 
cease  or  abstain,  by  de;  and  when  used  in  the  sense  of  to  permit  (to  let), it 
governs  the  next  verb  without  a  preposition. 

7.  Manquer  a  denotes  the  omission  or  neglect  of  a  duty :  — 
Pourqim  avez-vous  manqti^  a  faire  votre  exercice  f 

Why  have  you  neglected  to  do  your  exercise  1 
Manquer  de  signifies  to  fail,  to  be  on  the  point  of :  — 
J^ai  manqu€  de  perdre  la  vie,  I  had  nearly  lost  my  life. 

8.  S'occuper  takes  a  in  the  sense  of  to  employ  one's  time,  to  work  at 
Examples :  — 

7Z  s'occupe  a  lire,  he  occupies  himself  with  reading. 

L'auteur  de  "  Paul  et  Virginie  "  s'occupait  a  recueillir  les  mat^riaux  de  cet 
ouvrage. 

The  author  of  "  Paul  and  Virginia  "  occupied  himself  in  collecting  the 
materials  of  this  work. 

S'occvper  de  signifies  mettre  ies  soina,  to  pay  attention  to,  to  think  mucb 
of.    Ex.:  — 

H  s'occvpe  de.d€lruire  les  dbus. 

He  is  thinking  how  to  abolish  abuses. 

9.  Venir  governs  the  Infinitive  with  a,  when  it  signifies  to  happen. 
Example :  — 

S*il  venait  a  apprendre  que  vous  etes  id. 
If  he  happened  to  know  that  you  are  here. 

Venir  is  followed  by  de,  when  it  is  used  to  express  a  thing  just  happened 
(see  P.  I.,  L.  XLVn.).    Ex.:  — 


THB  INFINrnVE.  353 

Meg  soeurs  viennent  de  sorttr. 
My  sisters  have  just  gone  otit. 

10.    Tarrfer  a  signifies  to  delay.    Ex.:  — 
Ne  tardez  pas  a  Lui  envoyer  de  V argent. 
Do  n  3t  delay  sending  him  some  money. 

Tarder,  as  an  impersonal  verb :  il  me  tarde,  I  long>  governs  the  Infin 
ilire  with  rfe.     Ex.:  — 
n  me  tarde  de  le  revcir,  I  long  to  see  him  again. 

21.   The  following  eleven  verbs  may  take  either  a  or  «fe;— 

Consentir,  to  consent.  s'enteter,  to  be  obstinate  in. 

contramdre,  to  compeL  essayer,  to  try. 

demander,  to  demand.  cbliger,  to  oblige. 

forcer,  to  force.  oublier,  to  forget. 

t'emjyresser,  to  be  eager.  tacheTf  to  try. 
8'engager,  to  engage,  agree. 

Examples :  — 
n  ne  demande  gu'a  manger  et  a  hoire. 
He  demands  nothing  but  to  eat  and  drink. 
EUe  demanda  au  del  de  lui  pardonner  sa  faute. 
She  prayed  to  heaven  to  forgive  her  fault. 
Le  banqiuer  s'engagta  a  (or  de)  payer  la  somme  de  mUle  franca. 
The  banker  agreed  to  pay  the  sum  of  a  thousand  francs. 

THEME   67. 

1.  When  the  captain  began  to  speak,  all  the  soldiers  listened' 
attentively.  2.  In  the  spring  the  trees  begin  to  cover  themselves 
with  leaves.  3.  They  continued  to  live  in  peace.  4.  We  have 
continued  to  write  to  him,  but  he  has  not  yet  answered  us.  6. 
The  unfortunate  never  fail  to  complain.  6.  I  have  failed  to  do 
what  I  had  promised  you.  7.  I  will  endeavor  to  satisfy  him.  8. 
It  is  long  before  he  comes  (he  delays  to  come).  9.  I  long  to  bavt 
finished  my  work.  10.  At  last  I  longed  (i7  me  tarda)  to  see  again 
my  native  country.  11.  That  woman  is  occupied  only  with  iron- 
ing.^ 12.  Do  not  fail  to  be  here  at  a  quarter  to  six.  13.  Come 
(md  see  us  this  evening.  14.  Is  your  brother  at  home  ?  15.  No, 
38 


364  XX.    vmoTiiMB  LBgoM. 

he  has  jtist  gone  out.    16.  We  have  just  received  your  letter.    17. 
He  agreed  to  inform  you  of  the  result.' 
1.  ifcottter,   2,  Bepasser,   8.  RimUat. 


INFINITIVE  WITH  THE  PREPOSITIONS  POUR,  PAR, 

APRES,  SANS. 

22.  Pour.  Whenever  the  English  to  before  an  Infinitive 
expresses  a  design  or  purpose,  and  can  be  changed  into,  in  order 
to,  pour  must  be  used.     Ex.:  — 

iZ  attend  de  I'argent  pour  payer  sea  dettes. 
He  is  expecting  money  to  pay  his  debt*. 
J'ai  fait  mon  possible  pour  les  r€concilier. 
I  have  done  all  in  my  power  to  reconcile  them. 
Je  Vai  fait  moi-meme  pour  ne  pas  vous  d&anger. 
I  did  it  myself  not  to  disturb  you. 

23.  The  preposition  pour  is  also  used  after  the  adjective  follow- 
ing assez,  trop,  suffisant,  or  after  the  verb  suffire.     Ex.:  — 

M.  R.  est  assez  riche  pour  acfieter  cette  campagne. 
Mr.  R.  is  rich  enough  to  buy  that  estate. 
Caroline  est  trop  jeune  pour  /aire  cet  ouvrag: 
Caroline  is  too  young  to  do  this  work. 

24.  The  French  usage  differs  from  the  English  in  employing  the 
Infinitive  instead  of  a  separate  clause,  when  the  dependent  olause 
has  the  same  subject  as  the  principal  clause  :  — 

Je  crois  etre  hless€,  I  think  I  am  wounded. 

J'espere  m^riter  votre  conjiance,  I  hope  I  deserve  your  confidence. 

Je  voudrais  etre  riche,  I  wish  I  were  rich. 

THEaiE  68. 

1.  I  travel  to  see  the  world.  2.  The  army  was  too  fatigued  to 
renew^  the  attack.  3.  I  will  do  everything  to  oblige  you.  4.  God 
has  not  given  us  hearts  to  hate  one  another.  5.  He  is  going  into 
^Jbe  country  to  shoot*   6   Some  people  are  hated  without  deservip.g' 


THE   INFLNlTlVa.  356 

H.  7.  It  is  necessary  to  know  the  human  heart  to  judge  well  of 
others.*  8.  After  having  terminated  some  affairs  at  home,  I  shall 
begin  by  paying*  some  visits.  9.  Nobody  can  be  happy  without 
practising"  virtue.  10.  If  the  emperor  Titus  passed  one  day  with- 
out doing  good' to  (a)  anybody,  he  used'  to  say:  "I  have  lost 
this  day." 

1.  BenouveUr  Vattaque,    2.  Chasser.    8.  Mirittr.    4.  Dt$  cnUret,    6.  Faire»    «. 
^xxUgpier,   7.  Du  bien.    8.  H  avait  coutume. 


BBADING  LESSOW. 

▲LlXANDBl    8KLKIBK. 

(Suite.; 

**  Une  longue  habitude  me  fit  manger  la  viande  sans  sel  et  sans 
pain.  Dans  la  saison  j*avais  quantity  de  bons  navets^  qui  avaient 
&t6  sem^s  par  T^quipago*  de  quelque  vaisseau  et  qui  couvraient 
plusieurs  arpents*  de  terre.  Je  ne  manquais  pas  non  plus  d'exoel- 
lents  choux*  que  je  cueillais  sur  une  espece  de  palmier  et  que  j*a&- 
saisonnais  avec  le  fruit  du  piment,  qui  est  le  meme  que  le  poivre  de 
la  Jamai'que,  et  dont  I'odeur  est  ddlicieuse. 

**  Mes  souliers  et  mes  habits  fiirent  bientdt  us^s  ^  force  de  courir 
k  travers  les  bois  et  les  broussailles.*  Cependant  mes  pieds  s*endur- 
cirent*  si  bien  k  la  fatigue,  que  je  courais  partout  sans  peine. 

"  Revenu'  enfin  de  ma  m^lancolie,  je  me  divertissais  quelquefois 
a  graver  mon  nom  sur  T^orce*  des  arbres  avec  la  date  de  mon  exil, 
ou  bien  k  chanter  et  k  dresser*  k  la  danse  des  chats  et  des  chevreaux. 
Lorsque  je  n'eus  plus  d'habits,  je  me  fis  un  juste-au-corps"  et  un 
bonnet  (cap)  de  peaux  de  chevres  que  je  cousis  ensemble  avec  de 
petites  courroies ; "  un  clou"  me  servait  d'aiguille.  Je  me  fis  aussi 
dos  chemises  d'un  morceau  de  toilo  que  j'avais.  Quand  mon  eou- 
fceau  fut  us^  jusqu'au  dos,  j'en  forgeai  d'autres  avec  quelques  cercleti 
de  fer  que  j'ayais  trouv^s  sur  le  rivage,  et  je  les  aiguisai"  sur  des 
pierres. 

'*  C'est  ainid  que  la  n^cesait^  m'apprit  k  pourvoir  k  tous  mes 


356  XX.      VINGTIEME  LEgON. 

**  Pendant  mon  s^jour**  dans  cette  ile  d^serte,  j'ai  yn  plusieurs 
fois  des  vaisseaux  qui  passaient,  mais  il  n'y  en  eut  que  deux  qui 
vinrent  y  mouiller."  Incertain  de  quelle  nation  ils  etaient,  je  m'en 
approchai  pour  les  examiner.  Mais  quelques  Espagnols  qui  avaient 
dejk  mis  pied  k  terre,  ne  m'eurent  pas  plutot  aper9u  qu'ils  tir^rent^^ 
sur  moi  et  me  poursuivirent  jusque  dans  les  bois,  ou  je  grimpai  snr 
un  arbre.  Je  ne  fus  pas  decouvert,  quoiqu'ils  rodassent^'  dans  les 
environs  et  qu'ils  tuassent  quantity  de  chevres  sous  mes  yeux. 
Eufin  j'aperpus  vos  navires  que  je  pris  aussitot  pour  anglais.  J'al- 
Inmai  un  feu  sur  un  rocher  pres  du  rivage  pour  vous  donner  le  sig- 
nal de  ma  d^tresse.^®  Vous  me  comprites  et,  graces  k  voire  huma- 
nity, je  puis  esp^rer  de  revoir  ma  patiie." 

1.  Turnips.  2.  The  crew.  3.  Acre.  4.  Cabbage.  6.  Brushwood.  6.  To  harden. 
7.  Eecovered.  8.  Bark.  9.  To  train.  10.  Jacket.  11.  Strap.  12.  A  nail.  13.  To 
sharpen.  14.  Stay.  15.  To  anchor.  16.  To  fire  or  shoot  at.  17.  To  run  about, 
ramble.    18.  Distress. 

QUESTIONNAIEE. 

Comment  mangeaifc-il  la  viande  ? 

N'avait-il  pas  autre  chose  h  manger  ? 

Manquait-il  de  choux  ? 

Oil  les  cueillait-il  ? 

Avee  quoi  assaisonnait-il  ses  choux? 

Avaitril  toujours  des  souliers  et  des  habits  ? 

Comment  se  divertissaitril  quelquefois  ? 

Lorsque  ses  habits  furent  uses,  que  fit  Selkirk  ? 

De  quoi  se  servit>il  pour  coudre  les  peaux  de  chevies? 

De  quoi  se  fit-il  des  chemises  ? 

Quand  son  couteau  fut  us4,  que  fit>-il  ? 

N'a-t>il  jamais  vu  de  vaisseaux  qui  passaient? 

De  quelle  nation  ^taient-ils  ? 

Que  firentrils  lorsqu'ils  I'eurent  apcr^u  ? 

Fut-il  decouvert? 

Qu'aper9utril  enfin? 

Pourquoi  allumart-il  un  feu  sur  le  rivago  ? 

C©  signal  fiit-il  remarqu6  ? 


THE   PRESENT  PARTICIPLE.  S57 


XXI.     VINGT    ET    UNIEME    LEgON 


THE  PRESENT  PARTICIPLE. 

1.  The  Present  Participle  is  invariable  in  French.     Bz. :  — 

Une  femme  mourant  de  soif, 

A  woman  dying  of  thirat. 

Une  preuve  convainquant  tout  le  monde. 

A  proof  convincing  everybody. 

Une  mere  consotant  sa  JUle. 

A  mother  consoling  her  daughter. 

Une  pluie  ficondant  la  terre. 

A  rain  fructifying  the  earth. 

2.  When  the  Present  Participle  loses  its  verbal  nature  and  be« 
comes  a  participial  adjective,  it  follows  the  noun,  and  agrees  with  it 
as  an  adjective.     Ex. :  — 

Une  femme  mourante. 
A  dying  woman. 
Une  preuve  convainquante. 
A  convincing  proof. 
Des  paroles  consolanteM. 
Consoling  words. 

3.  The  Present  Participle  is  often  nsed  in  English  as  a  substan- 
tive, which  is  not  the  case  in  French.  It  can  sometimes  be  rendered 
by  a  noun,  in  most  cases  by  the  Infinitive  (see  Lesson  XX.,  §  1). 
Examples :  — 

La  lecture  est  un  passe-temps  agrgahiU, 
Beading  is  an  agreeable  pastime. 
Sa  passion  dominante  est  la  chasse, 
ilis  ruling  passion  is  hunting. 
I  like  dancing,  j'aime  a  danser. 

4.  When  an  English  Present  Participle  has  reference  to  a  sub- 
gtantive  which  is  not  in  the  Nominative  Case,  it  is  rendered  in  French 


358  Xn,      VTNGT  ET  UinfiMB  LEgON. 

by  the  Present  or  Imperfect  of  the  Indicative,  with  the  relative 
pronoun  qui  before  it.     Ex. :  — 

II  portait  une  houteille  qui  contenait  du  poison. 

Ho  carried  a  bottle  containing  poison. 

5.  An  English  Present  Participle  preceded  by  any  preposition 
but  by  and  o«  (§  7),  such  as,  of,  from,  before^  after y  for,  without, 
l3  rendered  in  French  by  the  Infinitive  with  de,  a,  pour  or  sans  (as 
wo  have  seen  before) ,     Ex. :  — 

Uart  (T^crire  est  tres-ancien. 

The  art  of  "vmting  is  very  old. 

Je  connais  sa  maniere  de  penser  et  d'agir. 

I  know  his  maimer  of  thinking  and  acting. 

Ne  Vempichez  pas  de  /aire  du  lien. 

Do  not  prevent  him  from  doing  good. 

Je  Vai  rencontrtf  avant  de  partir. 

I  met  him  before  leaving. 

On  ne  pent  pas  trakir  la  v€rit€  sans  se  rendre  coupaUe. 

One  cannot  speak  against  the  truth  without  being  gniltf. 

6.  Sometimes  the  English  Present  Participle  is  used  substantively 
with  a  possessive  pronoun  before  it;  then  it  must  be  rendered  in 
French  by  the  conjunction  que  and  the  Indicative  or  Subjunctive, 
according  as  the  case  requires.     Ex. :  — 

Je  doute  qu'tl  soil  un  honnete  homm§. 
I  doubt  his  being  an  honest  man. 
Nous  avons  appris  qu'il  s'est  fait  soldat. 
We  heard  of  his  becoming  a  soldier. 

THEME  69. 

1.  Miss  Mary  is  an  obligmg  young  lady.  2.  I  listened^  [to]  her 
encouraging  words.  3.  He  has  given  us  consoling  news.  4.  These, 
'iooks  are  very  interesting.  5.  That  mother,  in  her  supplicating* 
attitude,  would  have  appeared  touching,  even  without  the  surprising 
eloquence  of  her  discourse.  6.  The  young  soldier,  precedmg  all 
the  others,  seized'  the  standard.*  7.  That  mountain,  commanding 
an  extensive'  view,  was  very  well  calculated*  for  our  observation*. 
8.  Caroline,  weeping  bitterly,'  threw  herself  into  her  mother's  armB. 


THE    PEESENT    PAETICIPLB.  35^ 

9,  T  have  seen  your  brother  (§  4)  playing  in  the  garden.  10. 
Alexander  asked  the  physicians  standing*  by  {autour  de)  him  if  he 
should  die  of  (de)  his  illness.  11,  The  soldiers  of  Alexander,  for* 
getting  then-  wives  and  children,  looked  upon*  the  Persian  gold  as^ 
theur  plunder."  12.  It  ceased  raining.  13.  He  risked  losing  his 
life.  11.  I  am  afraid  of  losing  her  confidence.  15.  The  desire  of 
appearing  clever  often  prevents  one  from  becoming  so.  16.  He 
left^  without  paying  his  debts.  17.  I  heard  of  his  being  (S  6) 
married.  18.  We  noticed"  his  looking  at  it  (le).  19.  He  wrote 
to  me  without"  his  father's  knowing  it. 

1,  ^couter  qch.  2.  To  Buppllcate,  supplier.  3.  S'emparer  de  qch.  4.  Le  dra- 
peau.  5.  ^tendue,  f.  fi.  Propre  A.  7.  To  weep  bitterly,  fondre  en  larmet.  8, 
Se  tenir.  9.  To  look  upon,  regarder  qch.  10.  Comme.  11.  BtUiUt  m.  12.  Par- 
Zir.    13.  Bemarquer.    14.  Sans  que  with  the  Subj. 

THE  GERUND,— PRESENT  PARTICIPLE  WITH  EN, 

7  The  Gerund  is  the  Present  Participle  with  the  preposition  en 
prefixed.  It  generally  denotes  1,  either  a  means  by  which  the  ob- 
ject of  the  leading  clause  is  attained,  or  2,  a  simultaneous  action, 
that  is,  an  action  during  the  transaction  of  which  another  is  acted  by 
the  same  subject.  It  is  always  invariable,  and  corresponds  to  the 
English  Present  Participle  preceded  by  the  prepositions  6y,  in,  and 
on  or  while  ;  or  is  sometimes  rendered  by  the  simple  Participle  with- 
out preposition.     Ex. :  — 

1.  Denoting  a  means :  — 

On  se  forme  Vesprit  en  Itsant  de  bons  livres. 

We  form  our  minds  by  reading  good  books. 

Nous  avons  ohtenu  la  paix  en  faisant  de  grands  sacrificea. 

Wc  have  obtained  peace  by  making  great  sacrifices. 

U  se  sauva  en  sautant  par  la  fenetre. 

lie  saved  himself  by  jumping  through  the  window. 

2.  Denoting  a  sunultaneous  action  :  — 

La  d^esse  sourit  en  voyant  Td^maque. 

The  goddess  smiled  on  seeing  Telemachus. 

//  me  (lit  cela  en  treinhlant. 

He  trembled  as  he  told  me  this. 


360  XXI.      VINGT  ET  UNlfiME  LECOfi. 

J«  Vai  rencontre  en  allant  au  chateau. 

I  met  him  in  going  (as  I  was  going)  to  the  castle. 

Je  lis  le  journal  en  d€jeunant. 

I  read  the  paper  while  breakfasting. 

Note.  The  English  by  with  a  Participle  is  rendered  in  two  cases  only 
by  par  and  the  Infinitive,  viz.,  with  comi„jncer,  to  commence,  b^in,  and 
Jinir,  to  terminate  with,  to  do  something  at  last.     Ex. :  — 

Je  veux  commencer  par  reciter  ma  legon. 

I  will  begin  by  saying  my  lesson. 

II  finit  par  me  demander  pardon. 

At  last  he  begged  my  pardon  (he  ended  by  asking) 

8.    To  enforce  the  simultaneousness  of  the  two  actions,  taut  is 
often  placed  before  the  Gerund.     Ex. :  — 
Tmit  en  pleurant  il  ne  put  s'empecher  de  rire. 
Whilst  crying  he  could  not  forbear  laughing. 

THEME  60. 

1.  We  learn  the  news  by  reading  the  newspapers.  2.  By 
observing  these  rules,  you  may  avoid  mistakes.  3.  By  studying 
much,  you  will  become  learned.  4.  More  glory  is^  acquired  by 
defending  one's  fellow-citizens^  than  by  accusing  them.  5.  In 
going ^  this  way  we  shall  meet  him.  6.  I  met  my  friend  as  I  was 
going  to  the  post-office.  7.  By  paying  aU  his  debts,  he  reestab- 
lished *  his  credit  8.  He  told  me,  trembling,  that  he  had  lost  all  his 
money.  9.  You  may  easily  get*  praise,  by  complying*  with  the 
{avx)  wishes  of  the  people'  with  whom  you  converse,  and  by  pre- 
ferring others  to  yourself. 

1.  On  acguiert.  2.  Concitoj/en,  m.  3.  Prendre.  4.  R4tablir.  5.  Obtenir  d<?^ 
(ouangea,    6.  To  comply  with,  se  conformer  d.  qch,    7.  Des  peraonntfi. 


reading  lesson 
Gesler  conduit  Tell  a  Kusnach. 
Tell,  dans  la  barque,  ^tait  moins  ^mu  des  cris  des  soldafcs,  du 
bruit  des  vagues  ^cumantes,  du  sifflement  des  vents  d^chain^,  qu'il 


tME  PRESENT  PARTICIPLE.  361 

oe  le  fut  en  d^couvrant  la  caverae  de  Grutli.  H  attendait  le  tre- 
pa3,^  et  ne  songeait  qu'k  Tavantage  que  son  pays  pourrait  tirer  de  la 
mort  du  gouverneur.  11  jouissait  en  silence  de  la  peur,  des  geiniar 
seraents,^  du  tounnent  quMprouvait  Gesler,  lorsqu'un  des  rameurs, 
^out-^-eoup  s'adressant  kcet  homme  cruel:  *'  Noils  sommes  perdu3," 
dit-il,  '*  il  n'est  plus  en  notre  puissance  de  maiutenir  au  milieu  des 
flots  la  barque  emport^e"  pai  le  vent  du  nord  qui,  dans  un  instant, 
va  la  briser  en  pieces  centre  les  rochers  du  rivage.  Un  seul 
horame,  le  plus  renommd,  le  plus  habilo  de  nos  trois  cantons  dans 
I'art  de  braver  les  tem  petes  du  lac,  peul  nous  sauver  de  la  mort. 
Cct  homme  est  ici :  le  voilk !  le  voilk  charg4  de  tes  chaines ! 
Choisis,  Gesler,  choisis  promptement  enlre  le  trepas  ou  sa  libert^." 

Gesler  fremit*  k  cette  parole.  Sa  haine  violente  pour  Tell  com- 
bat dans  son  arae  pusillanirae  I'amour  meme  qu'il  a  pour  la  vie ;  il 
h^site  encore,  il  ne  r^pond  point,  mais  les  priercs,  les  murmures  des 
soldats  et  des  rameurs  qui  lui  demandent,  qui  le  prcssent  de  sauver 
leurs  jours  et  les  siens,  en  delivrant"  son  prisonnier;  la  crainte 
d'etre  mal  ob^i,  s'il  se  refuse  aux  voeux  de  tons,  et  la  tempete  qu/ 
augmente,  determinent  enfin  Gesler.  *'  Qu'on  brise®  ses  chaines," 
ditril,  "je  lui  pardonne  tons  ses  crimes,  je  lui  rends'  la  vie  et  lali 
bcrt^,  si  son  adresse  nous  amene  au  port." 

Les  soldats,  les  rameurs,  s'empressent®  de  rendre  libre  Guillaume. 
Ses  fors  sont  tombi^s,  il  se  leve,  et,  sans  prononcer  un  seul  mot,  il 
s'empare  du  gouvemail.*  Faisant  mouvoir  sous  sa  main  la  barque, 
comme  I'enfant  fait  plier  la  bagu.ette^°  qu'il  toume  a  son  gre,  il 
oppose  la  proue"  aux  deux  vents,  dont  les  forces  ainsi  diviseos 
la  tiennent  en  equilibre.  Profitant  ensuite  d'un  moment  do 
oalme,  il  toume  de  la  proue  k  la  poupe,^  mainticnt  la  barque  dans 
la  direction  qui  seule  pent  la  sauver,  fait  prendre  les  rames  k  deux 
^euls  rameurs,  dont  il  dirige  les  efforts,  et  s'avance,  malgr^  les  venta, 
aialgr^  les  flots  et  la  tempete,  vers  le  detroit^'  qu'il  veut  repasser. 
lies  t^nebres  "  empechent  Gesler  de  s'apercevoir  qu'il  retoume  aux 
memes  lieux  d'o ii  il  est  parti.  Tell  continue  sa  marche ;  la  nuit 
presque  entiere  s'^coule ;"  il  est  rentr^  dans  le  lac  d'Uri,  il  aper9oit 
la  laeur  mourante  du  signal  donnl  mi  le  mont  d'Altdorf.     C'est 


362  XXI.     VINGT  ET  UNI^ME  LECON. 

cette  lueur"  qni  lui  sert  d'^toile ;  il  connait  le  lac  depuia  lono^temps, 
il  en  ^vite  les  ^cueils,^'^  il  s'approche  pourtant  du  rivage  qui  borde 
le  canton  de  Schwitz ;  il  pense  h  Werner  Stauffacher ;  il  calcule  que 
Werner  doit  §tre  en  marche,  et  que  les  chemins  encombr6s  do 
neige,  le  forceront  de  cotoyer^'  le  lac.  Dans  ce  faible  espoir,  il 
navigue,  en  feignant  d'ignorer  les  lieux  oh  la  tempete  pousse  la 
barque,  en  augmentant  les  terreurs  de  Gesler  et  de  ses  soldats, 
(Tb  be  continued.') 

1.  Death.  2.  Sighs.  3.  Carried  away.  4.  To  shudder,  tremble.  6.  To  liberate, 
8.  To  break  (see  p.  372,  $  15).  7.  I  give.  8.  See  p.  388,  $  9.  9.  The  helm,  rudder. 
10.  The  rod.  11.  The  prow.  12.  The  stern.  13.  The  strait.  14.  The  darknesB. 
15.  To  pass  away.     16.  Idght,     17.  Cliff.    18.  To  follow  or  march  along  the  coast 

QUESTIOXNAIEE. 

Tell  ^tait-il  ^mu  de  quelque  cbose  ? 
Qu'attendaitril? 
A  quoi  songeaifc-il? 
De  quoi  jouissait-il  en  silence  ? 

Qu'esfc-ce  qui  determina  enfin  Gesler  h  delivrer  le  prisonnier  ^ 
Que  dit  alors  un  des  rameurs  k  Gesler  ? 
Qui  ^tait  le  batelier  le  plus  habile  dans  les  trois  cantons  ? 
Le  rameur  nomma-tril  cet  homme  ? 
Entre  quoi  Gesler  avait-il  k  choisir  ? 
Quel  parti  (decision)  prit-il  ? 
Que  firent  les  soldats  et  les  rameurs  ? 
Quand  les  fers  furent  6t^s,  que  fit  Tell  ? 
Quelle  manoeuvre  fit-il  apres  ? 
Racontez  ce  que  fit  Tell  ensuite. 

Gesler  s'aper9utril  que  Tell  retoumait  vers  leg  m§mo6  lieui  d\yh 
lis  ^talent  partis  ? 
Vers  quel  lac  Tell  dirige-t-il  la  barque  1  * 
De  quel  rivage  s'approche-t-il  ? 
A  qui  pense-t-il  ? 
Que  calcule-t-il  k  son  ^gard? 
Que  feint-il  ? 


THE  PAST  PABTICIPLB.  363 

XX  IL     VINGT-DEUXIEME    LE90N. 


THE  PAST  PARTICIPLE. 

Every  possible  difficulty  in  regard  to  the  agreement  of  Past  Participk 
may  be  solved  by  the  application  of  one  of  the  three  following  rules  :  — 

1.  The  Past  Participle,  when  used  adjectively,  is  placed  after  the 
noun  and  agrees  with  it  as  an  adjective.     Ex.:  — 

Une  fieuT  Ji€lTie,  a  withered  flower. 

Unt  lettre  bien  ^crite,  a  well  written  letter. 

Des  maisons  bien  meuhUes,  well  furnished  houses. 

2.  The  Past  Participle  accompanied  by  the  auxiliary  etre  agrees 
with  the  subject,  except  in  reflective  verbs.     Ex.:  — 

Cette  lettre  est  bien  €crite,  this  letter  is  well  written. 
Mes  deux  tantes  sont  mortes,  both  my  aunts  are  dead. 
La,  ville  fut  prise,  the  town  was  taken. 
La  nuit  sera  bientot  pass€e,  the  night  will  soon  be  over. 

3.  The  Past  Participle  accompanied  by  the  auxiliary  avoir  (and 
by  etre  in  reflective  verbs)  agrees  with  the  direct  oh/ect,  but  only 
when  that  direct  object  precedes.     Ex.:  — 

La  lettre  que  fai  regue. 

The  letter  I  have  received. 

Let  lettres  que  j'ai  revues. 

The  letters  I  have  received. 

Lea  dames  que  nous  axxms  rencontr^es. 

The  ladies  we  have  met 

Les  affaires  que  vous  avea  entreprises. 

The  affairs  you  have  undertaken. 

Oil  8ont  les  livres  f  — je  lea  ai  perdus. 

Where  are  the  books  ?     I  have  lost  them. 

Oii  est  ta  plume  t  — je  Vai  perdue. 

Where  is  thy  pen  ?     I  have  lost  it. 

Ou  saiit  les  fruits  que  vous  m'avez  envoy^sf 

Where  are  the  fruits  yon  sent  roe  1 


364  XXn.     VINGT-DEUXIEME  LEgON. 

But  there  is  no  agreement  in  the  participle  when  there  k  n< 
direct  object,  or  when  the  direct  object  comes  after  the  participle 
liixample :  — 

J*ai  reyw  unt  lettre  —  deux  lettres. 

I  have  received  one  letter —  two  letters. 

J'ai  rencontre  une  dame  —  deux  dames, 

I  met  one  lady  —  two  ladies. 

J'ai  perdu  les  livres. 

I  have  lost  the  books. 

fai  perdu  la  plume.  * 

I  have  lost  the  pen. 

iVo'is  avons  mang€. 

We  have  eaten. 

//•>  ont  r€pondu  a  noire  lettre. 

Thoy  have  answered  oar  letter. 

Mes  /reres  avaient  dormi. 

My  brothers  had  slept. 

4.  In  reflective  verbs,  as  etre  takes  the  place  of  avmr,  the  par 
ticiple  agrees  with  the  second  pronoun,  if  that  is  a  direct  object, 
JExamples :  — 

lis  se  sont  present^s. 
They  presented  themselves. 
Elle  s'est  bless^e. 
She  wounded  herself. 

But  when  the  second  pronoun  is  an  indirect  object,  the  participle 
remains  unchanged,  unless  the  direct  object  precedes,  as  in  verbs 
conjugated  with  avoir.     Ex. :  — 

Us  se  sont  presents  des  Jleurs, 

They  presented  flowers  to  each  other. 

Us  se  Sfmt  ecrit  deux  lettres. 

They  wrotet  letter  to  each  other. 

But  the  participle  must  agree  if  the  du-ect  object  (Jleitrs,  lettres) 
precedes.     Ex.:  — 

Lies  Jleurs  qu'ils  se  sont  presentees- 
Xfe»  lettres  qu'ils  se  sont  Sorites. 


THE   PAST   PARTICIPLB*  365 

APPLICATION  OF  THE  ABOVE  RULES. 

As  the  application  of  the  above  rules  may  present  some  difficulty, 
special  rules  will  be  given,  though  all  that  follows  is  really  embraced 
Id  §§  2  and  3. 

5.  The  Past  Participle  of  a  neuter  or  intransitive  verb  conju- 
grited  with  avoir  never  agrees,  when  conjugated  with  etre  it  always 
agrees  with  the  subject.     Ex.;  — 

Les  deux  heures  que  fat  dormi. 

The  two  hours  during  which  I  slept;  que  is  equivalent  to  pendant 

lesquelles. 

lis  sont  tomb^s,  they  fell.     Elles  sont  tomh^es. 

Hence  also  the  Past  Part,  ete  is  always  invariable :  EUe  a  etS, 
Elles  onf  ete. 

6.  The  Past  Participle  of  an  impersonal  verb  is  always  invari- 
able, as : 

Les  pluies  qu'il  y  aeu  cet  hiver. 
The  rains  we  have  had  this  winter. 

7.  A  Past  Participle  does  not  agree  with  en  (of  it,  of  them, 
some),  because  en  is  not  considered  as  a  direct  object.     Ex. :  — 

Avez-vous  des  fleurs  ?  —  Oui,  il  nous  en  a  donni. 

But  the  presence  of  en  does  not  prevent  the  participle  from  agreeing  with 
the  real  direct  object  if  that  precedes.     Ex. : 
Jja  bonne  opinion  qne  fen  avais  conque. 
The  good  opinion  I  had  conceived  of  it. 

8.  A  Past  Participle  between  two  que's  is  invariable.  Elx. ; 
Les  livres  que  vous  avez  cru  que  je  vous  donnerais,  the  books  you 
thought  I  would  give  you.  The  first  que  is  not  the  object  of  em, 
but  of  donnerais. 

9.  The  Past  Participle  followed  by  an  infinitive  agrees  when  ^he 
object  that  precedes  is  governed  by  the  participle,  if  the  object  de- 
pends on  the  infinitive  the  participle  is  invariable.  Ex. :  La  dume 
gtte  fai  vup  petndre,  the  lady  I  saw  painting.  La  dame  que  fai 
vu  petndre  means,  The  lady  whom  I  saw  painted^  that  is,  whose' 


366  XXn.      VINGT-DEUXIEME  LEgON. 

portrait  I  saw  taken.  La  dame  que  f  at  entendue  chanter,  tlie  lady 
I  heard  singing ;  but,  La  chanson  que  fai  entendu  chanter,  the 
song  I  heard  sung,  —  because  que  is  governed  not  by  entendu  but 
by  chanter.  For  the  same  reason  Je  les  ai  laisses  partir,  I 
allowed  them  to  go ;  but,  Us  se  sont  laisse  surprendre  par  Vennemi  ; 
ihey  allowed  themselves  to  be  surprised  by  the  enemy.  In  this  last 
sentence  se  is  the  object  of  surprendre,  as  it  is  equivalent  to,  They 
allowed  the  enemy  to  surprise  them. 

10.  The  past  Participle  of  the  verb  faire  followed  by  an  infini 
tive  never  agrees,  because  faire  thus  connected  with  an  infinitive  is 
considered  for  all  purposes  of  government  as  forming  but  one  verb 
with  it.  Thus  mJele  fais  passer,  le  is  the  object  of  faire  passer  ; 
in  Je  lui  fais  passer  le  pont,  le  pont  is  the  direct  object,  and  lui 
and  not  le  must  be  used,  as  faire  passer  cannot  have  two  direct 
objects.  Hence  fait  is  invariable  in  the  phrase  :  Une  femme  s'esi 
presentee  a  la  porte,  je  Vai  fait  parser,  a  woman  presented  he^ 
self  at  the  door,  I  let  her  pass. 

11.  After  the  Past  Participles  du,  pu,  and  voulu  an  infinitive 
may  be  undei-stood,  in  which  case  they  remain  invariable,  as :  Je 
lui  ai  rendy.  tous  les  services  que  fai  du  .  .  .  que  fai  pu  (that 
is  lui  rendre),  I  rendered  him  all  the  services  I  should  ...  I  could 
(render  him).  But,  Les  sommes  quHl  nCa  dues;  the  sums  he  owed 
me  —  dues  agrees  with  its  object  que  which  precedes. 

12.  The  Past  Participles  attendu,  excepte,  passe,  suppose,  and 
vu  are  sometimes  employed  as  prepositions.  They  then  precede  the 
noun  they  govern,  and  are  invariable. 

Other  instances  might  be  adduced,  but  a  strict  application  of  §§  1,  2,  8, 
and  4,  will  be  found  to  covei  all  cases  of  doubt. 

THE31E  61. 

1.  She  is  loved.  2.  We  are  satisfied.  3.  My  sisters  are  satis- 
fied. 4.  My  aunt  has  arrived.  5.  My  cousins  {fern.)  have 
arrived.  6.  This  house  is  sold.  7.  The  two  houses  are  sold.  8. 
Piese  letters  are  written  very  weU.     9.  My  mother  has  gone  out, 


THE  PAST  PARTICIPLB.  367 

and  my  sisters  have  also  gooe  out.  10.  !Mary*8  grandmother  ap- 
pears afflicted.  11.  The  trees  have  been  felled.^  12.  Virtuous 
people  are  esteemed,  and  the  impious''  (ai*e)  despised.  13.  The 
rule'  whi^h  I  have  learned  is  very  easy.  14.  The  woman  I  have  seen 
b  very  handsome.  15.  Where  is  the  letter  which  you  have 
received?  .16.  Here  it  is  (la  void)  ;  it  is  written  in  (en)  French. 
17.  The  horses  which  we  have  sold  were  very  old.  18.  How  many 
horses  have  you  sold  ?  19.  We  have  sold  them  all.  20.  Which 
house  have  you  taken?*  21.  How  many  books  has  he  bought? 
22.  Where  is  my  pen?  23.  I  have  not  seen  it.  24.  Where  are 
my  sisters  ?  25.  I  have  not  seen  them.  26.  Here  are  the  apples 
(which)  you  have  given  me;  I  have  not  eaten  them.  27.  The 
young  ladies  have  been  much  amused*  in  your  company.  28.  Gen- 
tlemen,  you  are  mistaken.*  29.  She  has  repented  of  her  neglect 
fulness.'  30.  I  saw  (have  seen)  them  play  before  my  house.  31. 
The  singers*  whom  I  heard  singing  yesterday  were  Tjrrolese.* 

1.  To  foil,  couper,    2.  Impie.    S.  Regie,  f.    4.  Louer.    6.  S*amu»er,    0.  iSir  trom^ 
per.    7.  Nigligence.    S.  CharUeur,  m.    9.  TyrolieM. 

THEME  82. 

1 .  That  ^1  has  run  too  fast ;  she  is  out  of  breath.^  2.  My  aunt 
has  travelled  in  Italy.  3.  His  mother  (has)  lived*  in  this  house  foi 
(pendant)  two  years.  4.  These  young  men  (gens)  have  studied 
French  and  German.  5.  We  (have)  met  some  ladies  in  the  street. 
6.  Miss  Eliza  has  brought  a  bunch'  of  flowers.  7.  For  whom  has 
she  brought  them  ?  8.  She  (has)  brought  them  for  you.  9.  Have 
you  read  these  two  books?  10.  No,  sir,  I  have  not  yet  read  them. 
11.  I  have  read  another  book  which  your  brother  has  lent  me.  12. 
The  carpenter*  has  built  a  new  house,  and  he  has  sold  it  this  morn- 
ing to  Mr.  B.  13.  The  rain  which  has  fallen  this  morning  has 
spoiled  the  roads.  14.  We  have  bought  twenty  acres*  of  land.* 
15.  The  excessive  heat  which  we  had'  last  summer  has  occasioned 
diseases.'  16.  There  came  a  person  that  I  did  not  know.  17. 
Why  are  these  plants  to  wot?'    18.  I  (have)  ordered^^  them  to  be 


368  XXn.     VINGT-DEUXIEME  LEgON. 

watered.^*^    19.  The  measures"  T  was  obliged^^  to  take  have  not  had 
the  expected  effeet.^^     20.  The  landlord"  caused"  them  to  be  paid. 

1,  ff->rs  (Vhalcine.  2.  Demeurer.  3.  Bouquet.  4.  Le  chnrpentier.  5.  Arpent, 
m.  6.  Terre.  7.  Put  the  Corap.  Pres-  of  the  impersonal  form  it  fait.  8.  Maladie. 
'i .  Mouill/es.  10.  Fairearroser,  11.  Mesure,  f.  I'Z.Paxi.  of  devoir.  13  ^e<,  m. 
lit  Uaubergiste.    15.  Faire. 

THEME   63. 

1 .  Where  is  your  gold  watch  ?  2.1  have  sent  it  to  the  watch- 
maker.^ 3.  I  thought  you  had  allowed^  it  to  be  stolen.  4.  The 
two  horses  which  I  (have)  advised  you  to  buy  are  worth  (valent)  a 
thousand  francs.  5.  Happy  the  princes  who  have  always  used' 
their  power*  for  the  good*  of  their  people.  6.  You  must  {il  faui 
que  vous)  finish  the  letter  which  you  have  begun  to  write.  7.  The 
apples  which  I  have  forbidden  you  to  eat  are  not  ripe.  8.  How 
many  men^  commit  the  same  faults  which  they  had  resolved  to 
avoid. ^  9.  We  have  showed^  him  all  the  honor  {pi.)  it  was  our 
duty  [to  show  him].  10.  My  friend  rendered  me  every  service®  he 
could.  11.  Have  yuu  bought  some  cigars  ?^'*  12.  Yes,  I  have 
bought  [some].  13.  Are  not  these  trees  very  high?  14.  I  have 
seen  higher  ones.  15.  The  ship  which  we  saw  launched"  has  now 
the  name  of  Arion.  16.  The  play^'-^  I  saw  performed^'  last  night 
has  been  very  much  applauded.  17,  Imitate  the  virtues  which  you 
have  heai'd  praised  {Lif.}.     18.  We  used"  all  the  means  we  could. 

1.  Horloger.  2.  Laisser.  3.  Employer.  4.  Pouvoir,  m.  6.  Le  bien.  6.  Qui 
(fluvinTii^s.  7.  Eviter.  8.  Fait.  9.  Tous  les  services  qu'.  10.  Cigare,  m  U.  Ian- 
Qsr,    Vi   La  pidcc.    13.  Jouer,    14.  Employer. 


THE  PARTICIPLE  ABSOLUTE.  369 


XXITI.     VINGT-TROISIEME    LEyON 


THE  PARTICIPLE  ABSOLUTE. 

1.  Tlie  Participle  Absolute  is  used,  as  in  Englisli,  instead  of 
accessory  and  subordinate  clauses  beginning  with  a  corjunctioD 
whiob  have  the  same  subject  as  the  leading  clause.     Ex. :  — 

FUgulus  s*€loigna  de  Rome,  tenant  les  yeuxjixis  a  la  terre,  et  laissant  sa/emme 
et  ses  en/ants. 

Vennemi,  voyant  (as  he  saw)  noire  petit  nombre,  recommen^a  le  combat. 

N€o]ttolcnw.,  pour^suivant  son  discours,  me  dit,  etc. 

he  charjtKutieT ,  laissant  son  ouvraije  a  moiti(f  fait,  alia  diner. 

L'einftereur  Conrade,  ne  voulant  plus  tenter  la  fortune,  abandonna  subitemeni 
la  TnreSainte,  etc. 

Ne  sofJiant  wxf.  faire,  il  prit  ce  parti. 

2.  When  the  accessory  sentence  expresses  an  event  which  has 
taken  place  before  another  expressed  in  the  principal  sentence,  the 
compound  form  of  the  Participle  Absolute  {ayant  vu,  ayant  fait, 
etc. )  is  used.     Ex. :  — 

Le  comte  de  Toulouse,  ayant  s(mm€  (having  summoned)  la  viUe  de  se  rendre, 
la  d^clara  sa  jwssession. 

Le  Toi  ayant  hut  sacrifi€  pour  le  bonheur  de  son  peuple,  fut  enfin  la  victims 
de  scs  bonnes  intentions. 

Lysandre  ayant  fait  un  ricJie  butin  (booty)  dans  la  prise  d'Athines,  envoya  h 
LobC^demone  tout  I'or  et  I'argent  qt/il  avait  pris. 

THEME    64. 

1.  As  the  two  combatants  would  not  yield,^  they  were  pioroed 
with  wounds.*  2.  As  Mentor  heard  the  voice  of  the  goddess  who 
was  calling  her  nymphs  into  the  wood,  he  waked'  Telumachus.  3. 
Crant-or,  seeing  that  I  was  already  very  near  him,  redoubled  his  zeal, 
and  attempted*  to  barricade  my  way.  4.  That  mountain,  command- 
ing ao  extensive*  view,  was  well  calculated*  for  our  observation*  5. 
I  cannot  adcompany  you  into  the  country,  having  some  business 
24 


370  XXin.     TINGT-TROTSIEME  LEQON. 

that  requires  my  presence  here.    6.  How  many  people  do  we  see, 

who,  knowing  the  value  of  time,  waste'  it  improperly.**  7.  Wishing 

to  make  something  of  my  son,  I  have  put  him  into  your  hands.     8. 

Newton,  having  taken  the  average^  of  years  during  which  the  king? 

of  the  various^"  countries  have  reigned,  reduced  each  reign  to  ahont 

twenty  two  years.     9.  Napoleon,  seeing  that  the  battle  of  Waterloo 

was  lost,  drew  his  sword  and  wished  desperately^^  to  fling  himself 

into  the  tumult  of  the  battle.     10.  FrankHn,  [after]  having  looked 

everywhere  for  employment,^^  reentered  at  the  printer^^  Keimer's. 

1.  Ceder.  2.  De  coups.  3.  Eveiller.  4.  Chercher  A  barrer.  6.  Etendu.  6. 
Propre  d.  7.  Perdre.  8.  Mai  d  propos.  9.  Le  terme  moyen,  10.  Different.  11. 
En  ditespiri.    12.  De  V occupation,    13.  Chez  Vimprimeur  K. 

3.  The  Participle  Absolute  can  also  be  used  in  the  place  of  sub- 
ordinate sentences  beginnmg  with  a  conjunction,  if  they  have  a  di5 
fereut  subject.     Ex. :  — 

Le  roi  €tant  mort,  son  Jils  lui  succ€da. 

The  king  being  dead  his  son  succeeded. 

La  ville  ayant  <Sl€  priscy  les  soldats  la  pillerent. 

The  town  being  taken,  the  soldiers  pillaged  it. 

Le  repas  ^tant  Jini,  nous  nous  mimes  en  route. 

When  diner  was  over,  we  set  oflf. 
J^tant  is  sometimes  omitted.     Ex. :  — 

Le  rqyas  Jini  (for  ^tant  Jim),  nous  nous  mimes  en  routfi. 

When  dinner  was  over,  we  set  off. 

L'op^ration  achev€e,  le  roi  remonta  a  cheval. 

The  operation  being  performed,  the  king  mounted  again  on  horseback. 

Cetie  disposition  faite,  nous  entrdmes  dans  la  salle  de  reception. 

When  this  arrangement  was  made,  we  entered  the  parlor. 

THEME   65. 

1,  My  mother  being  ill,  I  cannot  go  out  to-day.  2.  Franklin, 
seeing  that  all  his  efforts  were  useless,  went  back  to  his  country,  in 
order  to  brave  the  storm^  with  his  countrymen.  3.  Wishing  to  see 
him,  I  went  to  his  house.  4.  Mary  and  her  brother  Henry,  per 
ceiving  a  pretty  butterfly,^  endeavored  to  catch'  it.  5.  The  gates 
being  closed,  we  could  not  enter.  6.  Philip  sent  deputies  to  the 
Scythian*,*  demanding  ( joowr  demander)  a  part  of  th«  expunses'  of 


THE  PABTICIPLfi  ABSOLUTE.  371 

ihe  scig« ;  tbe  Scyttians,  alleging"  tLe  barrenness'  of  theu"  land, 
replied  tbat,  baving  no  rijbcs  sufficient  to  satisfy  so  great  a  kmg, 
tbey  tbougbt  [it]  more®  unfit  to  pay  but*  a  part,  tban  to  refuse  the 
whole. ^°  7.  Tbe  wound  still  bleeding,"  she  fainted.^^  8  Every- 
body will  respect  the  magistrates  who,  forgetting  their  own  interest, 
observing  the  law,  favoring^*  virtue  and  restraining^^  vice,  seek  the 
welfare^*  of  their  country. 

1.  Uorage.,  m.  2.  Papillon^  m.  8.  Attraper.  4.  Sajtke,  m.  6.  Les  frais.  6. 
AlUguer.  7.  La  sUrilit6.  8.  Moins  convenable.  9.  De  ne  payer  qu^une  partie. 
10.  Le  tout.  11.  Saigner,  12.  S'evanouir.  13.  Favoriser.  14.  liiprimer.  16.  lA 
Men. 


READING  LESSON. 

6ESLEB  CONDUIT  TELL  1  EUSNACH. 

(Fin.) 

Enfin  Torient^  se  colore,  et  la  tempete  semble  s'appaiser  aux  pre- 
miers rayons  de  Taurore.  Le  jour  naissant  d^couvre  k  Tell  les 
roches  voisines  d'Altdorf,  avant  que  le  tyran  ait  eu  le  temps  de  les 
reconnaitre ;  Guillaume  y  dirige  sa  barque  et  la  fait  marcher  plus 
rapidement.  Gesler,  dont  la  ferocity  revient  a  mesure  que  le  dan- 
ger s'^loigne,  observe  avec  des  yeux  sombres.  II  veut,  mais  11 
n'ose  pas  encore  le  faire  charger  de  liens.*  Scs  soldats  et  ses  mate- 
lots^  reconnaissent  bicntot  ou  ils  sont,  en  instruisent  le  gouvemeur, 
qui  s'avan^ant  vers  Tell  avcc  colere,  lui  demande  d'une  voix  terrible, 
pourquoi  la  barque,  qu'il  a  guidee,  a  repris  le  chemin  d'Altdorf. 

Guillaume  sans  lui  repondre,  pousse  la  barque  droit*  h  un  rooher 
pen  ^loign^  de  la  rive,*  saisit  d'une  main  prorapte  Tare  et  la  fleche* 
qu'un  archer  tenait  k  la  main,  et,  rapide  comme  I'^clair,  s*61ance'  de 
la  barque  sur  le  rocher.  L^,  sans  s'arreter,  il  saute  siir  un  autre 
itHS,  gravit*  aussitot  la  roche  escarpee,'  et  se  montre  sur  le  sommet, 
semblable  k  I'aigle  des  Alpes  quand  il  se  repose  aupr^s  des  nuages, 
et  qu'il  promene  ses  yeux  pergants  sur  les  troupeaux  des  vallons. 

Le  gouvemeur  etonn^  pousse  un  cri  de  fureur,  de  rage.  II  com- 
mando aussitot  qu'on  debarque,  et  que  ses  soldats,  disperses,  envi- 
ronnent  de  toutes  parts  le  roc  oh  il  volt  le  heros.     On  obeit ;  leg 


372  XXin.     VINGT-TBOISIEME   LEgON. 

archers  desccndent  et  pr^parent  d^jk  leurs  arcs ;  Gesler,  qui  marcbe 
au  milieu  d'eux,  veut  que  leurs  fleches  r^unies  s'abreuvent  toutes 
du  sang  de  Guillaume.  Guillaume  aussi  a  ses  desseins.  II  ne  s'a^ 
r§te,  il  ne  se  montre  que  pour  attirer  Teanemi.  D  laisse  approcher 
oette  troupe  armee  jusqu'a  la  juste  distance  ou  son  trait*  pent  don- 
ner  la  mort.  II  regarde,  fixe  Gesler,  pose  sa  fleche  sur  sa  corde,  et. 
Tadressant  au  coeur  du  gouvemeur,  il  la  fait  voler^**  dans  les  airs 
La  fleche  vole,  siffle,"  frappe  au  milieu  du  coeur  de  Gesler.  Le 
tyran  tombe,  b^gaie  sa  fureur,  et  son  ame  s'exhale  au  milieu  des 
imprecations.  Tell  a  deja  disparu ;  plus  leger  que  le  faon,^''  s'est 
pr^cipite  du  sommet  du  roc,  il  court,  il  vole  sur  la  glace ;  il  gagne, 
traverse  des  sentiers"'  deserts,  et  prend  le  chemin  d'Altdorf. 

Flcni'an. 
1.  The  east.    2.  Fetters,  chains.     3.  Sailor.    4.  Straight.    6.  Bauk.    6.  Arrow. 
7.  Jumps.    8.  To  climb  up.    9.  Steep.    10.  To  fly.    11.  To  hiss.    12.  The  fawn.    13. 
Path. 

QUESTIONNAIKE. 

Que  decouvre  le  jour  naissant  k  Tell  ? 
Que  fait  Gesler  ? 

Quelle  6tait  I'intention  de  Gesler  V 

De  quoi  les  soldats  et  les  mate  lots  instruisent-ils  le  gouvemeur  ? 
Quand  Gesler  aper9ut  les  roches  d'Altdorf,  que  demandart-il  ^ 
Tell  ? 

Guillaume  lui  fitril  une  response  ? 

Ou  pousse-t-il  la  barque  ? 

Que  saisit-il  d'une  main  prompte  ? 

Oil  s'elance-t-il  de  la  barque? 

A  qui  ressemble-t-il  quand  il  se  montre  sur  le  sommet  ? 

Qu'est-ce  que  le  gouvemeur  comjnande  alors  ? 

Futril  obei  ? 

Gesler'  que  veut-il  ? 

Jusqu'ou  Tell  laisse-t-il  approcher  la  troupe? 

Qui  veut-il  frapper  ? 

Sa  fleche  I'a-t-elle  atteint  ? 

Que  fait  Tell  alors? 

Quel  chemin  Tell  prend-il  ? 


GOVERNMENT  OF  VllBBS. 


i73 


XXIV.     VINGT-QUATRIEME    LE^ON. 


GOVERNMENT  OF   VERBS. 


1.    Many  verbs  which  in  English  require  a  preposition,  such  as 

at,  of,  from^  to,  withy  for^  etc.,  take  in  French   a  direct  object. 
Such  are  :  — 

approuver,  to  approve  of.  envoyer  chercher,  to  send  for. 

attendre,  to  wait  for.  esp&er,  to  hope  for. 

chercher,  to  look  ( seek )  for.  expier,  to  atono  for. 

connaitre,  to  be  acquainted  with,  to  fournir,  to  supply  with. 


prier  Dieu,  to  pray  to  God. 
regarder,  to  look  at. 
rencontrer,  to  meet  with. 
r€sowire,  to  resolve  upon. 


know. 
consid^er,  to  look  upon. 
d€8irer,  to  wish  for. 
devenir,  to  become. 
6x)uter,  to  listen  to. 

Examples :  — 

Attendez-vous  wire  frh-e,  are  you  waiting  for  your  brother  *? 

Qu'etes-ixms  devenu,  what  has  become  of  you  ? 

II  faut  envoyer  chercher  le  in€decin,  we  rau.st  send  for  the  doctor. 

2.    The  following  verbs  which  in  English  usually  require  a  diivct 
object  take  in  French  the  preposition  a  :  — 

Apprendre  >  qch.  a  qn.,  to  teach  one    permettre  a  qn.,  to  allow  one. 

enseigner     )  something 

eonseiiler  qch.  a  qn.,  U>  advise. 

convenir  a  qn.,  to  suite  any  one. 

d€p'mre  a  qn.,  to  displease  one. 

d(Ssofj^ir  a  qn.,  to  disobey  one. 

dire  a  qn.,  to  tell  some  one. 

/aire  tort  a  qn.,  to  wrong  one. 

80  Jier  a  qn.,  to  trust  one. 

nuire  a  qn.,  to  hurt,  injure  one 

ob€ir  a  qn.,  to  obey  one. 

ordonner  a  qn.,  to  order. 

pardonner  a,  to  pardon,  forgive  one. 

parvenir  b  qch.,  to  attain. 


plaire  a  qn.,  to  please  one. 
rem^diera  qch.,  to  remedy. 
renoncer  a  qch.,  to  renounce,  ahdicarc 

something. 
r€signer  a  qch.,  to  resign  something 
r€slster  a  qn.,  to  resist  one. 
ressembler  a  qn.,  to  resemble  one. 
subvenir  a,  to  relieve. 
succ^drr  a,  to  succeed. 
86  soustraire  a,  to  keep  out  of  Lne 

way. 
survivre  a,  to  outlive,  survive. 
toucher  h  qch.,  to  touch  something. 


874  XXnr.     VmOT-QUATElfME  LEgON. 

Examples :  — 
Pouvez-vous  enseigner  le  latin  a  mon  Jih  f 
Can  you  teach  my  son  Latin  t 
H  faut  ob€ir  a  vos  parents. 
Yoii  must  obey  your  parents. 
On  ne  peat  pas  pi  aire  a  trntt  h  monde, 
Y"ou  cannot  please  everybody. 
Ne  xfous  Jiez  pas  a  lui. 
Do  not  trust  him. 

THEME  «e. 

1.  Who  teaches  your  brother  French?  2.  Mr.  R.,  who  is  a  very 
good  teacher.  3.  This  ribbon  does  not  please  my  sister.  4.  You 
have  wronged  your  neighbor ;  you  have  hurt  his  credit;^  at  least  he 
says  so  (Je).  5.  A  good  christian  forgives  his  enemies.  6.  Miss 
Mary  resembles  her  mother  [very]  much.  7.  Will  you  allow  your 
pupils  to  to  take  a  walk  this  afternoon  ?  8.  Yes,  I  will  allow  them 
to  go  with  you.  9.  Children  must  obey  then:  parents.  10.  The 
ofiBcer  disobeyed  the  orders  of  the  king.  11.  The  son  succeeded 
his  father.  12.  The  riches  of  the  count  would  have  relieved  the 
wants'  of  the  poor.  13.  He  who  wishes  to  please  everybody,  runs 
the  risk*  of  pleasing  (rfc  ne  plaire)  nobody.  14.  Louis  the 
Fourteenth  survived  his  son,  the  dauphiTi,  and  his  grandson.*  15. 
Do  not  touch  anything. 
1.  CrMit,  m.    2.  JJesoin,  m.    8.  Courir  risque.    4.  PetU-fiU. 


3.  Verbs  which  require  in  English  the  prepositions  of  and  from 
are  generally  followed  in  French  by  de.  Besides  these,  the  follow- 
ing also  require  de :  — 

Accabler  de,  to  overwhelm.  approcher  de,     ) 

t'acquitter  de  qch,  to  discharge.  s'approcher  de,  )  *°  apP«>ach. 

^qffliger  de,  to  be  afflicted  at.  s'armer  de,  to  arm  one's  self  with. 

t^apercevoir  de,*  to  remark,  to  per-  avoir  besoin  de,  to  want,  to  require, 
ceive.  avoir  piti€  de,  to  pity. 

•  Apercevoir,  when  not  a  pronominal  verb,  gOTerns  the  dttroot  ollject  and, applies 
to  vMUe  tbings,  as :  J'aptrfus  une  fiamme. 


GOVERNMENT   OF  7ERB8. 


376 


aw>tr  or  prendre  soin  de,  to  take  care 
of. 

hruler  de,  to  bum  with. 

chaiger  de,  ) 

ambler  de,  I  ^^''^^'^'^^- 

se  cmtenter  de,  to  be  satisfied  or  con- 
tented with. 

oouvrir  de,  to  cover  with. 


te  defter  de,  ") 

de,\^^' 


distrust. 


K  vi^fier 

d^pendre  de,  to  be  dependent  on. 

envelopper  de,  to  wrap  up  in. 

Jaire  de,  to  do  with  (to  make  use  of). 

/aire  present  de,  to  present  with. 

f€liciterqn.  deqch.,  to  congratulate  on. 

fourmiller  de,  to  swarm  with. 

honorer  de,  to  honor  with. 

jouir  de  qch.,  to  enjoy. 

m^dire  de  qn.,  to  traOuce,  to  slander. 

86  tneler  de  qch.,  to  meddle  with. 

Be  moquer  de  qn.,  to  laugh  at. 


mourir  de,  to  die  of. 
munir  de,  to  furnish,  provide  with. 
se  passer  de  qch.,  to  do  without. 
p^rir  de,  to  perish  or  die  of. 
pro /iter  de  qch.,  to  profit  by. 
pourvoir  de,  to  provide  with. 
punir  de  qch.,  to  punish  for. 
r€compenser  de  qch.,  to  reward  for. 
regarder  de,  to  rep:ard  with. 
te  rfjouir  de,  to  rejoice  at. 
reinercier  de  qch.,  to  thank  for  some* 

thing. 
remplir  de,  to  fill  with. 
te  repentir  de,  to  repent. 
rire  de,  to  laugh  at. 
se  souvenir  de,  to  remember,  to  recol 

lect. 
sourire  de,  to  smile  at. 
trioinpher  de,  to  triumph  over. 
St  tromper  de,  to  mistake. 


Examples :  — 
Approchez-vous  du  feu,  come  near  the  fire. 
Je  me  suis  d€fi€  de  ses  promesses. 
I  distrusted  his  promises. 
On  m'accabUi  de  reproches. 
They  overwhelmed  me  with  reproaches. 
EUe  sourit  de  notre  emharras. 
She  smiled  at  our  embarrassment. 


THEME  C7. 

1.  He  was  overwhelmed  with  reproaches.^  2.  You  must  dis- 
charge that  obligation.  3.  Death  pities  nobody,  neither  rich  not 
poor.  4.  Come  near  the  window.  5.  Nature  wants  few  things. 
6.  She  is  contented  with  little.  7.  Have  you  not  perceived  this 
mistake?  8.  No,  sir,  I  have  not  perceived  it  {en).  9.  The 
ground  ^  was  oovered  with  snow.    10.  The  general  honored  me  mih 


376  XXIV.       VINGT-QUATRIEMB   LE^ON. 

his  friendship.  11.  Your  brother  presented  me  with  this  silver  pen- 
holder.^ 12.  The  impious*  mock  at  virtue  and  religion.  13.  Dc 
not  meddle  with  my  affairs.  14.  Distrust  that  man  ;  he  will  laugh 
at  your  benefits*  when  he  no  longer  requires  them.  15.  Never  trar 
duce  (slander)  anybody.  16.  Mr.  A.  is  a  very  strong  man ;  he 
enjoys  good  health.  17.  If  he  repents  his  faults,  I  will  pardon 
liim.  18.  I  cannot  do  without  his  help.*  19.  I  hope  (that)  you 
will  profit  by  this  experience.  20.  Remember  your  promise.  21. 
I  remember  that  story  very  well.  22.  Everybody  rejoices  at  that 
victoiy.' 

1.  Reproche,  m.    2.  La  terre.    3.  Porte-plume,  m.    4.  Impie,  5.  Bierifait,  m.  6. 
Secoursj  m.    7.  Victoire,  f. 

4.   Verbs  with  different  governments.     The  following  verbs  have 
different  governments  according  to  their  different  significations :  — 

1.  Abuser  qn.,  to  deceive. 

abuser  de  qch.,  to  abuse,  to  misuse. 

2.  Assister  qn.,  to  assist,  to  help. 
assister  a  qch.,  to  be  present  at. 

3.  Changer  qch.,  to  change,  to  alter,  to  exchange. 

changer  de  qch.,  to  change,  to  change  one  thing  for  another. 
changer  en,  to  turn  into. 

4.  Convenir  de  qch.,  to  agree  (construed  with  etre), 
convenir  a  qn.,  to  suit. 

5.  Croire  qn.,  to  believe  some  one. 
croire  qch.,  to  believe  something. 
croire  a  qch.,  to  believe  in  something. 
croire  en,  to  believe  in. 

6.  Demander  qn.,  to  ask  or  inquire  for  some  one. 
demander  qch.,  to  ask  for  somothing. 
demander  a  qn.,  to  ask  a  person. 

demander  qch.  a  qn.,  to  ask  something  of  some  one  or  to  ask  some  one 
for  something. 

7.  Echapper  and  s' ^chopper  de,  to  escape  from,  i.  e.  out  of. 
€chapper  a,  to  escape  from,  i.  e.  to  avoid,  to  be  preserved  from. 

8.  Se  facher  de  qch.,  to  be  sorry  for. 

*'       "      contre  qn.,  to  be  angry  at. 

9.  Insulter  qn.  or  qch.  (dir.  obj.),  to  offend  by  insults. 
insulter  a  qn.  or  n  qcL,  to  deride,  to  scorn,  to  insult. 

10.  Jou«r  a  qch,,  to  play  at  a  game. 


GOVERNMENT  OF  VEBB8.  377 

jowr  de  Varr/ent,  to  pfey  for  money. 
jov^r  d'un  instrument,  to  play  (on)  an  instrument. 
«!  jouer  de  qn.,  to  laugh  at,  to  deceive. 
11    Manquer  (neuter  verb  without  a  government),  to  be  wanting  or  miss- 
ing. 
manquer  qr  ,  or  qch.,  to  miss,  to  fail  in. 
nianqucr  de  qch.,  to  be  wantiug  in,  to  be  short  of. 
manquer  a  qn.  or  a  qch.  (also  contre  qch.),  to  fail  in,  to  omit 

12.  R^f>ondre  a  qch.,  to  answer. 
r€}X)ndr€  de  qch.,  to  answer  for. 

13.  Satisfaire  qn.,  to  satisfy,  to  content. 

satisfaire  a  qch.,  to  fulfil  duties  to  .  .  .  ,  to  satisfy. 
U.  Sermr  qn.,  to  serve  one,  to  be  at  one's  service. 
servir  de  qch.,  to  serve  as  something,  for  some  one. 

15.  Souscrire  qch.,  to  subscribe,  to  sign. 
souscrire  a  qch.,  to  approve  of,  to  subscribe  to. 

16.  User  qch.,  to  use  up,  to  wear  out. 
user  de  qch.,  to  make  use  of,  to  use. 

Examples :  — 

On  a  change  les  conditions,  they  have  altered  the  conditions. 
J*ai  change  de  logevient,  I  have  taken  other  lodgings. 
Que  demandez-vous,  what  do  you  ask  for  ? 
Demandez  a  votre  mire,  ask  your  mothen 

J'ai  demands  mon  argent  a  mon  ancle,  I  have  asked  ray  money  of  my 
uncle. 
Rfpondez  a  ma  question,  answer  my  question. 
Pouvez-vous  r^pondre  de  sa  probity,  can  you  answer  for  his  honesty? 

5.  Special  remarks  on  some  verbs. 

1.  Acheter  qch.  a  qn.,  to  buy  something  of  some  one. 

2.  Aider  qn.,  to  succor,  to  8ui)port,  to  give  means  of  doing. 
aider  a  qn.,  to  help,  to  aid  physically  in  doing  something. 

3.  Applaudir,  to  applaud  something,  governs  the  dir.  obj. 
applaudir,  to  applaud  a  person,  governs  the  ind-  obj. 

4.  Ayprocher  qch.  (active  verb',  to  approach,  to  advance,  to  bring  pr  push 

near. 
approcher  qn.,  to  approach  —  to  have  free  access. 
approcher  de  qn.  or  de  qch.,  to  approach  some  one  or  something;  to  Jjc 

«*•  draw  nearer  (see  §  3). 

6.  Emprunter,  to  borrow,  governs  the  indirect  object  of  the  person  when 


S78  JXrV,     VINGT-QUATni^MB  LEgON. 

represented  by  a  personal  pronoun  (such  as  lui,  leur,  nous,  etc.).  Bui 
it  requires  a  or  de  when  the  person  is  expressed  by  a  noun  las:  a 
or  de  mon  frere,  of  ray  brother. 

6.  En  croire  qch.,  to  trust,  to  depend  upon. 

7.  H€riter  qch.  de  qn.,  to  inherit  something  from  some  one.     If,  however, 

no  person  is  mentioned,  the  thing  follows  the  preposition  de. 

8.  Persuader  qn.  de  qch.,  to  convince  a  person  of  the  truth  of  a  thing. 
persuader  qch.  a  qn.,  to  persuade  one  to  do  something. 

9.  Redoiibler  qch.  (dir.  obj.),  means  to  redouble,  i.  e.  to  reiterate. 
redoubkr  de  qch.,  to  redouble,  i.  e.  to  augment  in  force. 

10.  Penser  h  means  to  have  one's  mind  upon. 
penser  de,  to  have  an  opinion  of. 

Examples :  — 
Approekez  la  table,  approach  the  table  (bring  it  nearer). 
Tout  le  monde  pent  approcher  notre  prince. 
Everybody  has  free  access  to  otxr  prince. 
iVc  vous  approchez  pas  taut  du  bord. 
Do  not  go  so  near  the  edge. 
Pensez  a  moi,  think  of  me. 
Que  pensez-vous  de  cela,  what  do  you  think  of  thati 

6.  On  the  verb  faire.  The  verb  faire  when  followed  by  an 
Infinitive  with  a  dir.  obj.,  requires  the  person  in  the  ind.  obj.,  the 
two  verbs  being  considered  as  one  verbal  expression  the  sense  of 
which  is  is  always  active.  The  reason  of  it  is  that  an  active  verb 
cannot  have  two  direct  complements  (see  L.  XXII,  10).     Ex.  :  — 

Je  lui  at  fait  €crire  cinquante  mots. 
I  have  made  him  write  fifty  words. 
Sa  mere  lui  a  fait  raconter  cette  histoire. 
BQs  mother  caused  him  to  relate  that  story. 

But  if  there  be  no  direct  object  after  the  Infinitive  that  foUowF 
fjire,  the  person  stands  in  the  direct  object.     Ex.:  — 

Je  les  ai  fait  partir,  I  have  made  them  depart. 
Nous  les  avons  fait  renoncer  aleur  prdentions. 
We  have  made  them  abandon  their  pretentions. 

7.  The  verbs  ecouter,  entendre,  laisser  and  voir  also,  are  some- 
iamos  used  in  this  manner,  as :  — 


GOVERNMENT   OP  VERBS.  379 

Je  lui  ai  vu  maltraiter  son  chien. 
I  saw  him  ill-treat  his  dog. 

But  this  is  not  generally  adopted,  and  it  is  better  to  say :  -— 

Je  Vai  tm  maltraiter  son  chien, 

J* at  vu  le  petit  gargon  (dir.  obj.)  maltraiter  son  chien. 

8    Wlien  the  Infinitive  is  followed  by  a  subordinate  sentence  with 
que,  the  indirect  object  is  preferred,  as :  — 
Je  lui  ai  entendu  dire  qu'il  partirait. 
I  heard  him  say  that  he  was  going  to  leave. 
Jai  entendu  dire  a  son  pere  qu'il  lui  pardonnerait. 
I  heard  his  father  say  that  he  would  forgive  him. 

THEME  61. 

1.  The  jailer*  has  deceived  the  prisoner  with  respect  to  (sur)  the 
lot*  which  awaited  him.  2.  Have  you  not  abused  our  patience  ? 
8.  We  have  abused  it  {en).  4.  The  hour  from  10  tx)  11  does  not 
suit  my  sister.  5.  We  have  agreed  on  the  price.'  6.  Let  us 
always  assist  the  poor.  7.  I  could  not  be  present  af  the  funeral.'* 
8.  I  have  changed  my  opinion.  9.  Could  you  change  me  this 
napoleon?  10.  Industry  is  the  true  philosopher's^  stone  that 
changes  all  metals  into  gold.  11.  Whom  have  you  asked  for  ?  12. 
I  inquired  for  my  eldest'  brother.  13.  Have  you  asked  your  friend 
for  money  V  14.  I  have  not  asked  him  for  any.  15.  Do  not  be- 
lieve that  man,  he  is  a  liar.'  16.  I  do  not  believe  in  his  promises. 
17.  We  believe  in  God.  18.  The  little  bu:d  has  escaped  from  his 
cage.  19.  Can*  you  play  at  chess?*  20.  No,  Sir,  but  I  will 
play  at  cards  with  you,  if  you  like.^''  21.  I  play  (on)  the  violin 
and  my  sister  plays  on  the  piano.  22.  We  often  play  together. 
23.  I  was  too  late,  I  missed  the  train."  24.  A  soldier  must  {doit) 
not  fail  in  courage.  25.  The  pupil  redoubled  his  application,  when 
he  heard  that  a  prize'  would  be  given.  26.  The  man  is  too  poor, 
he  cannot  satisfy  his  creditors."  27.  Do  you  make  use  of  specta* 
cles?^  28.  Yes,  I  always  wear  spectacles;  I  am  short-sighted.^' 
29.  Make  him  read  a  chapter"  or  two.     30.  I  made  him  relate' 


t>80  XXV.     ViNGT-CINQUi:lME  LECON. 

the  story  a  second  time      31.  Charles  the  XII  made  all  that  mul 

titude  cross  ^'  the  river,  without  retaining^®  a  single  soldier  prisoner. 

1.  Le  geolier.  2.  Le  sort.  3.  Prix,  m.  4.  Funiraillea,  f.  pi.  5.  Phi'osophale. 
6.  Ain4.  7.  Afenteur.  8.  Savoir.  9.  Aux  tehees.  10.  Vouloir.  11.  Le  convoL 
12.  Criancier.  13.  Lunettes,  f.  pi.  14.  J'ai  la  vue  basse.  16.  ClutpUre^  m.  Ul 
Baconter,    17.  Rt^^ser.    18.  Sans  en  retenir. 


XXV.    VINGT-CINQUIEME    LEgON 


IDIOMATICAL  EXPRESSIONS. 

Idioms  are  modes  of  speaking  peculiar  to  one  language,  Tvhicb 
oannot  be  literally  translated  into  another 

Avoir,  to  have. 

Avoir  vingt  am,  to  be  twenty  years  old. 

Avoir  malaux yeux,  to  have  sore  eyes. 

Avoir  mal  a  la  tete,  to  have  a  {or  the)  headache. 

J^ai  /void  aux  mains,  my  hands  are  cold . 

Vous  avez  beau  parler,  it  is  in  vain  for  you  to  talk. 

Xax  de  la  peine  a  le  croire,  I  can  hardly  believe  it. 

Avoir  froid,  to  be  cold,  —  chaud,  to  be  warm. 

Avoir  Jwnie,  to  be  ashamed. 

Avoir  raison,  — tort,  to  be  right,  —  in  the  wrong. 

Avoir  bonne  mine,  to  look  well. 

N^ avoir  que  /aire  de,  to  have  no  occasion  for. 

Avoir  grand  soif,  — faim,  to  be  very  thirsty,  —  hungry. 

Avoir  quelque  chose,  to  have  something  the  matter  with  OBft 

Avoir  pew    to  be  afraid. 

Avoir  sommeil,  to  be  sleepy. 

Avoir  soin,  to  take  care. 

Avoir  besoin,  to  have  need,  want. 

Avoir  sujet,  to  have  reason. 

Avoir  regret,  to  regret. 

Avoir  enrie,  to  desiie. 


IDIOMATICAL  EXPRESSIONS.  S8l 

Avoir  cMtume^  to  bo  accustomed. 

Avoir  lieu,  to  take  place. 

Avoir  heau,  to  be  in  vain. 

L'avoir  belle,  to  have  a  favorable  opportunity  to  do  it. 

A 

MrCj  to  bo. 
Etre  en  Oat  de,  to  aflford. 
Eire  a  son  aise,  to  be  in  good  circumstances. 
Etre  mal  avec  quelqii'un,  to  be  out  of  favor  with  some  one. 
Etre  de  moiti€,  to  go  halves. 
Pltre  a  la  porUe,  to  be  within  reach. 
ktre  mr  le  point  de,  to  be  very  near  to,  to  be  going  to. 
II  en  est  de  .  .  .  ,  it  is  with,  it  is  the  case. 
Etre  riche  de,  to  be  worth,  to  possess.     When  a  person  is  the  subject 

valoir  is  never  used  in  this  sense. 
H  est  riche  de  douze  milk  piastres,  he  ia  worth  twelve  thousand  dollars. 
Etre  en  retard,  to  be  late. 
Etre  a  meme  de,  to  be  able  to. 
Etre  en  peine  de^  to  l)e  uneasy  about 
Etre  en  me,  to  be  alive. 
Etre  en  chemin  pour,  to  be  on  the  way  to. 
Eire  au  fait,  au  courant  de,  to  be  familiar  with. 
Etre  a  la  veilfe  de,  on  the  eve  of. 
Etre  de  trop,  to  be  in  the  way. 
Etre  bien  avec,  to  be  on  good  terms  with. 
Etre  brouill^ avec,  on  bad  terras  with.     ■ 

Etre  aux  prises  avec,  to  be  in  open  rupture,  quarrel  or  battle  with 
Etre  d'avis,  to  be  of  opinion. 
Y  etre,  to  be  at  home. 
Etre  d'accord,  to  be  in  tune. 

Ce  piano  n'est  pas  d'accord,  this  piano  i^  not  in  tone. 
Nous  sommes  d'accord,  we  agree. 
Vom  n'y  etes  pas,  that  is  not  it. 

Faire,  to  do,  to  make. 

Faire  savoir  (jn.,  to  let  one  know,  to  send  word. 

Faire  chaud,  faire  froid,  to  be  warm,  —  cold  (of  the  weather). 

Se  faire  des  amis,  to  get  friends. 

Faire  faire,  to  get  made. 

Faire  aemblant  de,  to  pretend. 


382  XXV.      VmGT-CINQUIBME  LECON. 

Faire  attention^  to  pay  attention. 

Faire  cas  de,  to  value,  to  esteem. 

Faire  un  tour  de  promenade,  to  take  a  walk. 

Faire  voile  or  mettre  a  la  voile,  to  set  sail. 

Faire  de  son  mi&cx,  to  do  ono.'s  best. 

Ne  faire  que,  to  do  nothing  but. 

Cen  est  fait  de  moi,  I  am  undone,  it  is  over  with  me. 

Vims  feriez  mieux  de  rester,  you  had  better  stay. 

Faites-moi  grace  de  tons  ces  details,  spare  me  particulars. 

Faire  raccommoder,  to  have  mended. 

Faire  la  cuisine,  to  cook. 

Faire  tort  a,  to  injure. 

Faire  bouillir,  to  boil. 

THEME  69. 

1.  How  old  was  your  father  when  he  died  ?  2.  He  was  seventy. 
3.  And  your  mother?  4.  She  was  almost^  eighty.  5.  I  do  nol 
remember  to  have  ever  been  so*  thirsty  as  T  was  yesterday.  6. 
Wami  yourself,  if  you  are  cold ;  my  feet  are  not  cold,  because  I 
have  walked  much,  but  my  hands  are  so  cold,  that  I  cannot  write. 
7.  There  are  some  walks'  in  our  park  which  are  three  hundred  feet 
long.  8.  You  are  in  the  wrong,  and  he  is  in  the  right.  9.  It  is 
in  vain  for  you  to  ask  money  from  a  miser,  he  will  never  give  you 
any.  10.  Is  it  cold  this  morning?  11.  Yes  sir,  it  is  very  cold; 
however,  I  do  not  think  it  is  quite  so  cold  as  it  was  yesterday.  12. 
The  weather  is  very  inconstant;  it  was  hot  yesterday,  it  is  cold 
to-day ;  it  rained  this  morning ;  it  is  fine  weather  now,  but  perhaps 
it  will  rain  again  before  (it  be  *)  night. 
1.  Prit  de.    2.  Si.   8.  AUie,  f.    4.  Paire  (Subj.). 


Donner,  to  give. 

Dormer  dans  le  pi^ge,  to  be  caught  in  the  snare. 

Donner  sur  le  jardin,  to  look  out  on  the  garden. 

Donner  carte  blanche,  to  give  full  powers. 

Donner  sur  I'ennemi,  to  fall  upon  the  enemy. 

JVe  savoir  ou  donner  de  la  tete,  to  know  not  what  way  to  tam. 

Oe  vin  dotuie  h  la  tete,  that  wine  flies  np  to  the  head. 


IDIOMATIGAL  EXPRESSIONS.  383 

Dortntr  un  coup  de  main,  to  help. 

Donner  a  jdeines  mains,  to  ^ive  largely. 

iSe  donner  des  airs,  to  take  a  jj^reat  deal  on  one's  self. 

Se  donrter  la  peifte,  to  take  the  trouble. 

Jouer,  to  play,  etc. 

Jotuv  (Tnn  instrument,  to  play  (upon)  an  instrument. 
Jouer a({ud(ine  jeu,  to  play  at  some  game. 
Joua  une  piece  de  theatre,  to  a<-t  a  play. 
Jouer  un  tour  a  qn.,  to  serve  (play)  oue  a  trick. 
3e  porter,  to  be  (in  reference  to  health). 
//  se  porte  bien,  he  is  well. 
Aimer  viieux,  to  have  rather,  to  choose  rather. 
AlUr  a  fn-ede  afxtttue,  to  go  at  full  speed. 
Donnir  la  yrasse  matinee,  to  sleep  very  late. 
Prendre  en  miuoalse  p^irt,  to  take  amiss. 
S'lf  hien  /yrendrt,  to  go  the  righi  way  to  work. 
JS'i/  ftrendre  mid.  to  1:0  rhe  wrong  way  to  work. 
iSV  fXisHt^r  f/e,  to  <lo  wjtiKMit. 
J^nmner  Jiinuriiis  i/u*-,  to  take  ill  if. 
Trinirtn-  son  niaitrt-,  ro  nu-i't  with  one's  match. 
Tnmrer  a  reiiire,  to  riiul  fniilt  wilh. 
tiiitHtir  Intn  <fr^,  10  l^w  thankful  for. 
Tenir  jHirole,  to  ke^p  our  word. 
Ne  tenir  iju'ii,  to  l>e  in  a  person's  power. 
//  ne  tient  /km  a  mni  ifne,  it  is  not  my  fault. 
S'en  terur  h,  to  stand  to. 
fat  re  teiur,  to  forward. 

Venir  a  fxfut  de,  to  bring  about,  to  aectimplish. 
En  vouloir  k,  to  have  a  spite  against,  to  be  vexed  with* 
Je  ijottdi-ais  /mnroir,  I  wish  1  eould. 
//  y  tHi  de  iH)tre  vie,  your  life  is  at  stake. 
Verxir  de,  to  have  just  done  somethmg. 
'   En  veftir  aux  maim,  to  comu  to  blows. 

TIlHiME   70. 

1.  llow  do  yoii  do  thi.s»  morning?  2.  I  am  very  well,  T  tbauk 
yr>u.  3.  And  how  does  ycmr  sister  do?  4.  She  is  not  well ;  she 
has  been  ill  for  these  tw<»  months,  and  I  fear  she  will  never  be  well 
^  again.     5.  And  your  brotbera,  how  are  they  V     6.  The  youngest  is 


SM  XXV.      VINOT-CTNQUIKMB    LEgON. 

very  well,  Init  !  fin  oot  kmm  how  fh«  oldest  «loe8.  because  we  have 
not  hoani*  of  him  for^  the.se  two  uion^^hs;  he  wu*>  very  well  when 
he  wrote  t/»  uj-  last  '  7  It  is  with  the  diseases  of  the  heart  as  with 
.hose  '»f  t,h»*  hodv.  some  are  real/  aiul  some  iiiia;j^nary  8.  It  is 
Fith  men  of  l(^'l^liIl^!:  as  with  ears*  of  corn  ;  they  raise  their*  he'i  U 
while  they  are  I'inpty.  ancj  when  they  are  full,  they  begin  to  «iri»op/ 
9  It  is  with  your  s(»n  as  with  other  ehiUlreu.  10.  I  do  nut  think 
it  will  lie  with  my  son  a»  it  was  with  yours. 

1.  Avitir  de  se»  tuHirelleA.     2.  Fur  these  —  dr^ou.      3.  La  derniere /oU,     i.  JMbL 
5.  Epit  de  bit.     6.  ihit.  Art.    7.  /'e/M-Aer. 

THKME  71. 

1.    I  have  gieat  pain'  in  my  side.      '2.    He  h;is  sore  eyes.      3     He 

has  a  sore  fo<»t       4.    My   lips  are   s«>re.      5,   She   had   the  toothache 

yesterday,  rujw   she  has  a  ln*adarhe  ;  t^Muorrow,    |>erhaps,  she  will 

have  the  ear^-ache.      H     When  1  was  youn«»,  (  of^fm  had  the  lu'ad- 

aehe.      7.    Why  do  you   not  eat,  if  you  are  hun<i;ry'f     M.    I  a?m  not 

very  hungiy,  I  can   wait  [till]  «iiuner  time,'  hut  I  auj  very  thirsty, 

and    I  will   thank*  you   for*  a  i^lass  of  wine,      9.    It   is  very  cold 

to-day.      10.    [t  was  <rold  yesterday.      11.    It  will  be  hot  soon       12. 

I  am  thirsty       18.    He  is   hungry.      14     My  .sister  is  not  well,  she 

haB  not   Ijcen"  well   for  three   weeks,   she  had   a   headache  tfvday. 

15.   At  what  o'clock   did   you   rise   this   morning  Y      16.    I  rose  at 

four  o'clock.     17.  It  iij  in  vain  for  you  to  Bay  so,  i  de  not  believe 

you. 

1.  Bien  mat.    2.  OreiUe    3.  JU  diner.    4.  Pi-ier.    5.  De  im  donner.    6.  Se  porter, 
ase  the  I'reseut  tenne. 


VOCABULARY 


OF   THE  WORDS    USED    IN    OTTO'S    FRENCH    GRAMMAR. 
Based  on  Oasc's  Dictionary. 


ABniiEVIATIONS. 


a.,  active,  ar.tif. 

adj..  adjective,  adjectif. 

adv  ,  adverb,  ndrerbe. 

art.,  article,  article. 

conj.,  conjuTiction,  conjonciimi. 

dem.  pron.,  demoiiHtrative  pronoun, 

prmi  (tin  denumMt  nit  if. 
I.,  ie.mmvm.  jemiii in. 
fig..  ti;;u natively,  au  figure. 
fill.,  future,  J'atur. 
imp  ,  inipersonsil.  impei'Monnel. 
ind.,  indicjitive  mood,  inilioitif. 
inf..  intinitive  nioo<l,  infinitif. 
int.,  iulerje<!tiou.  intcrjtction. 
inter. .    interrogatively,     iiUerroya- 

tnc/nent. 
ir..  irregular.  vii-eyiiUer. 
in..  maHculine.  mtmcaliii, 
n.,  neuter,  neutre. 


o.'s,  one's,  mn.  m,.,  nen. 

part.,  participle,  partinpe. 

perH.,   (said  of)   persons,    (des)  pet' 

pers.  proM..  personal  pronoun,  jyrfh 

iKnn  p<r,vnind. 
pi  ,  plural,  plnriel. 
prep.,  preposition.  prepoHtion. 
pron..  pronoun,  pronom. 
r..  reflective.  re,fiJ>c.lii. 
rcl.  pron..    relative  pronoun,    pro* 

no  in  relatif. 
8.,  substantive,  Hiibxtantif. 
sing.,  sin<nilar,  xinguUer. 
v.,  vide.  see.  ctfir. 
v. a.,  verb  active,  vcrhp  arJif. 
v.n. ,  verb  neuter,  rcrhe  neutre. 
v.r.,  verb  retiectivc,  cerhe  reJiccJn, 


(  "s  Figure  in  i)arenthesiR  cererully  refers  to  page  oontainiMg  explana' 
tionn  or  rules  relatinj^  t»»  otie  wonl. 

♦  liiili<;;iu-H  that  th»;  gn..  /.  (»r  U    is  liquid. 

*  l)eiii)te.-<  tb  it  tiie  //  is  ;is])i rated. 

—  Staiul<  tor  tlie  njpetitioti  of  ihe  le.iding  word. 

-  Before  final  letters  or  syllables,  shows  the  masoil-inc  tfrniiTiaMon, 
irhen  followed  \,y  the  feminii-.e  ;  jis,  curien-x,  se.  curieuj:.,  lu  ,  cuntUHe^ 
f.  ;  protec-teiir,  trice,  proteotcury  m.,  protecC/'ice,  f. 


FEENCIl-ENGLISII    VOCABULARY. 


A. 

a,  prep,  (case,  83;  before  cities, 
etc.,  45;  spec,  use,  228;  after 
oAj.,  250;  after  adv..  285;  re- 
marks. 21)6  ;  with  inf.  847 1,  to,  at, 
tic,  within.  itUn,  on,  nxtt.  hi/,  <(fter, 
Uiuler.  (igidnst.  ticr/>iuUng  to.  — 
moi  (toi),  *fcc,.  to  me  v>r  viynelf, 
ridn.e.  of  my  oipn.  iS:c. 

abaisder.  v. a  tti  lowir.  to  humble; 
k'-  ■.  V  r    t^>  xto'i'i).  to  liH'liite. 

abandon,  s.in.  ohainhnnnen.t. 

abundonu  ,  e,  adj.  Kbituxloned,  de- 
Kfited. 

abandonncr,  v.  a.  to  abandon,  to 
lence^  to  gioe  up. 

abattement,  s.m.  depreasum,  despon- 
dency, low  »piriU 

abattre,  v. a.  to  fell,  to  cant  d/>wn, 
dlH-tearten  :  a' — .  v.r.  to  fall,  to 
break  down,  dexj'ond. 

abattu,  e,  adj.  depr€.if<ed,  low-spir- 
ited. 

abbe,  s.m.  abbot,  prieat. 

abeille.  s.f.  t)ee. 

ab  me,  s.m,  abyss. 

aboi,  s  m.  (2b5)  barking;  — s,  pi. 
agony. 

aboudamment,  adv.  abundantly. 

abondunce.  s  f .  abundance,  plenty. 

abondant.  e,  adj.  abnnd<tn.t. 

abord  (d'),  SiA\.  first,  atfir-tt. 

abontir,  v  n.  to  end,  to  tend. 

abr  ger.  v. a.   to  abridge,  ahhreriate. 

abreuver.  v. a.  t(t  water  ;  s' — ,  v.r.  to 
n  rink 

abii.  s  m    shelter,  refuge. 

abri(u)t.  s.m.  a-i'vie^d. 

abritcr.  v. a.  Xo  xlielter.  to  prottct. 

ab»ijut,  e,  adj.  ;$.  obstut. 


'  absoudre,  v.  a.  ir.  (175)  to  absolve.,  U 
I     forgive. 

,  abfitenir  (s'),  v.r.  ir.  (187)  to  abstain 
!  abus,  s.m.  abuse,  nuisance. 
abuser,  v.a.n.  to  deceive,   to  abuse., 

to  take  admntage  (of),    s' — ,  v.r. 

to  deceice  one-xelf. 
acajou,  s.m.  vfiahogauy. 
accabler,  v. a.  to  ocer whelm.,  to  crush 

(down). 
ace  H.  s.m.  arce.s.^.  attack. 
accident,  s.m.  Occident. 
accompagner,  v.  a   to  accompany,  to 

e-sCA>rt. 
accomplir,  v.  a.  to  accomplish. 
accord,  s.m.  agreement.  aryC(yrd<tnce  ; 

d' — ,  agreed,  granted  ;  etre  d'— , 

to  be  in.  tune,  to  agree. 
accorder,    v. a.    to  grant.,    to  alhw. 

s' — .  V.  r.  to  agree. 
accourir,  v.n.  ir.  (184)  to  run  (up), 

to  come  in  haute. 
acxjoutumer,  v. a.  to  accvstom 
accroc.  s.m.  ob-ttade,  impediment. 
accrocher,  v.a.  to  hook  (on),  fasten. 
accroire,  v.a.  (177).    Faire  —  h,   to 

make  (one)  beliei^e. 
accroitre.  v.a.n.  ir.  (178)  to  increase., 

to  fall  (to). 
accueillir,  v.a.  ir.  (184)  to  receive,  to 

welcmne. 
accniso.  e,  s.m.f.  accvsed,  culjvtit. 
accuser,  v.  a.  to  accuse,  to  blame. 
achamer.   v.a.   to  ea-nte.  to  enrage ; 

h' — ,  v.r.  to  xel  furloudy  (to),  to  be 

enraged,  to  be  herd  (upon). 
acli(>tnr.  v.a.  |9())  to  buy. 
achever.  v.a.  tf/Ji/ofsh.  to  end^ 
\  A(rhille.  s.m.  ArhUle.^. 
ao(iuerir,  v.a.  ir.  (187)  lo  acquire^  to 
I      yidn. 


VOCABULARY. 


387 


ftcqnitter,  v.  a.  to  pay,   to  receipt,  to 

ncfjnit ;  s' — ,  v.  r.  to  acquit,  one- 

kdf,  to  perforin,  to  fvlJiL 
acte,  8.m.  act,  action,  deed,  bill. 
ac  teur,  trice,  s.m.f.  actor,  actress. 
acti-f,  ve,  adj.  active. 
action,  s.f.  action,  act,  deed;  — s, 

pi.  ^tock. 
actuel,  le,  adj.  present,  real. 
actaellement,  adv.  at  jyresent. 
addition,  8.f.  addition,  bill. 
adieu,  adv.  8.m.  goodbye,  fareiceU. 
adinettre,  v.a,  ir.  ( 1 80)  to  admit,  to 

aU/rin  of. 
admirer,  v.a.  to  admire,  wonder  at. 
adresse,   s.f.    nA-ill,    clererii&fn,    ad- 

dresH  ;  a  1' —  de,  addretiH  d  to. 
adresser,  v.  a,  to  address  ;  a' — ,  v.  r. 

tfj  apjdp,  to  sjieak. 
adroit,  e,  adj.  dexterous,  skilfvl. 
adroitenieut,  adv.  .ski! fully,  ciecerly. 
adverV)e.  8.m.  adverb. 
adversaire,    8.m.    ndversary,   fjqyjto- 

uent. 
adversitc,  s.f.  advei'sity. 
affuiblir,  v.a.   to  weMken  ;  s' — ,  v.r. 

(o  grow  weak. 
aflfaiblisseinent,  s  m    loettkening. 
affaire,  8.  f.    ajfuir,  thiiif/,  bu.nuess, 

job,  bargain.    engagcnitiU  ;    —  a, 

buidnesn,  trade,  cjfVctM. 
affocter,  v.a.  to  a  feet,  to  attach. 
afTectiou,  H.t.  ajftclion  ;  prendre  en 

— .  to  take  a  Liking  or  a  fancy  to. 
affcctueu  x.  se.  ailj,  af'ecti<'ii<ite. 
afhrnier.  v.a.  t/t  ajffirm,  to  assert. 
artligeant,  e,  adj.  noi'rowfui,  distress- 
ing. 
affliger.  v.a.  to  afflict,  to  distress.,  to 

grieve. 
affreu  X,  se,  adj.  frightful.,  dread- 
ful. 
afifi,  conj.  in  oi'der,  sf* ;  —  de,  in 

o^rder  to. 
Afrique  (L'),  s.f.  Afrie/i. 
age,  s.ra.  age.  years,  trine;  qnel-dge 

avezvouB,  /*//</>  old  are  you  f 
ag  ,  e,  adj.  (252)  <iged,  old. 
agil*^  adj.  agile.,  nmdile. 
a^filito,  8.f.  ixgdiiy,  nunbkness. 


agir,  v.n.  to  act,  to  do,  to  belmve; 

il  s'agit  (de  .  .  .),    the  matter  or 

question  or  point  is. 
agiter,  v.a.  t/)  agitate,  to  disturb. 
fagneau,  am.  bimb. 
agroable.  adj.  agreeable,  pleasant. 
agrement,  s.m.  pleasure,  comfort. 
aguerrir,   v.a.    to  train  or  inure  to 

war. 
aide,  s.f.  aid,  help,  assistance. 
aide,  s.m.f.  assistant. 
aider,  v.a.  to  help,  to  aid,  to  assist. 
aieul,  s.m.   (81)  grandfather,  anceS' 

tor. 
ai'eux,  s.m  pi.  uU)  ancestors. 
aiglft,  s.m.  eagle. 
aigle,  s.f.  eagle,  (standard), 
aigrir,  v.a.    to  exanperate,  to  {make) 

Hour,  to  irriiale.  to  embitter. 
aigii.  c.  adj.  acute,  .shai"]),  jx/inted. 
faiguille.  h.  f.  ueedle. 
aiguiHer,  v.a.  to  /tharjien,  to  wliet. 
fail.  !*.ni.  garlic. 
aile,  a.f.  ming.  xai ,  aixle, 
fjpilleura,  adv.  elseirhi^-e. 
aimable.  adj.  arnab/e. 
aiinunt.  s  m.  inagnet. 
aimer,  v.a.  to  btce,  to  like. 
a  nc.  e,  adj .  8.  elder,  eldest 
aiusi.    adv.    conj.    so,    thus;  —   de 

suite,  and  st/  on  or  forth  ;  —  que, 

rtx,  sf)  as,  a,s  (Cell  as. 
air,  s.m.  air,  bretze,  look,  manner^ 

tune;   avoir  1' — de  ^247)  to  look 

like  or  fis  if. 
aise,  adj .  gl(td,  pleased ;  dire  bien 

— ,  to  be  very  glad  {of  it). 
aise,    8.f.   ease,  joy ;    a   1' — ,    etisy, 

cornff/rtable ;   mal    a  son  — ,   un 

eapy,  unweU. 
aise,  e,  adj.  easy,  inell  off. 
ajouter,  v.a.  to  add,   to  join. 
alarmer,  v.a.  to  alarm. 
album,    a.m.     album,     scrap-book^ 
I     .sketch- l/fwk. 
alentour,  adv.  around  about ;   d'— , 

neighboring. 
al  en  tours,  a.m.  pi.  neighborhood.,  as- 
sociates. 
fAllemagne  (L'),  s-f.  Oeiiwtny. 
Aliemand.  e,  adj.  s.  Gertnan. 


388 


VOCABULARY. 


aller.  v.n.  ir.  (185,  194,  203)   to  go, 

to  go  0)1,  to  be  going,  to  be  nhoaU 
shall,  will^  to  ft,  to  come,  to  be  ; 
—  a  pied,  to  walk  ;  —  a  cheval,  to 
riiU  (on  JMrneh(ick)  ;  faire  — ,  to 
set  going  ;  allons  !  c^nne  !  well ! 
now  !  comment  allez-vous  *;*  com- 
ment cela  va-t-il  ?  hoio  (ire  you  f 
je  vais  or  cela  va  mieux,  /  am 
better  ;  s'en  — ,  v.r.  to  go  awny 
or  of. 

allio,  e,  adj.  s.  allied. 

allumer,  v.a.  to  light,  to  kindle;  s' — , 
v.r.  to  light. 

allumette,  s.f.  match. 

alnianach,  s.m.  almanac. 

alors,  adv.  thtn,  at  that  time,  now, 
in  that  case. 

alouette.  s.f.  lark. 

A  peri,  s.f.pl.  Alpf<. 

alterer,  v.a.  to  alter.  t/>  clmnge,  to 
impair,  to  i/i/nre  ;  s' — ,  v  r.  (of 
the  voice)  to  falui'r,  to  tremble. 

amasser,  v.a.  to  heap  up,  to  gather. 

ambas.sadeur.  s.m.  a/nhanxador. 

ambitieii-x.  .se,  adj.  oinhiti/noi. 

ambition,  s.f.  amhituHL.  wUl. 

ambitionner,  v.a.  to  be  dijibitiov^t 
of. 

ambre,  s  ra.  amber. 

ame,  s  f.     on.  ftpirit.  ghos*.  life. 

amoner,  v.a  to  bring,  to  bring  in^  to 
cause. 

am-er.  ere,  adj.  bitter,  md. 

amer,  s.m.  bitter. 

Americain,  e,  adj.  s.  American. 

Amcrique  (L'),  s.f.  America. 

ami,  e,  s.m.t.  friend,  dear. 

amical,  e,  adj.  friendig.  amicable. 

amicalement.  adv.  in  a  friendly 
way,  amicably. 

amiral,  s.m.  admiral. 

ami  tie,  s.f.  friendship,  lore;  — 8, 
pi.  (kiud)  regards  or  compliments, 

amour,  s.m.  lore. 

ample,  adj.  aynple,  fvll.  large. 

amnsant,  e.  adj.  amudng. 

amuser,  v.a.  to  amuse,  to  entertain, 
to  please  ;  s' — ,  v.  r.  to  aniu-^e  or 
enjoy  one^eJf;  to  be  amused  or 
pUMsed. 


an,   s.m.    year,  year  old;    jour  de 

r — ,   premier  de  1' — ,  new-year''^ 

day. 
ane.  s.m.  ass.  donkey. 
ancOtres,  s.m. pi.  anceMors. 
ancieu,  ne,  adj.  ancient,  old. 
ancre,  s.f.  ano\or. 
Angleterre  iL'),  s.f.  England. 
animal,  s.m.  (81)  aninud,  beast. 
animer,  v.a.  to  animate,  to  enliven, 

to  give  life  to;  s' — ,    v.r.  to  be- 

com£  animated  or  excited. 
aniraosite.  s.f.  ani/n/mty,  excitement. 
aunales,  s.f.pl.  an)t,als. 
auu6e.  s.f.  year  ;  souhaiter  la  bonne 

— ,  to  wish  a  happy  new-year. 
annoncer.  v.a.  to  aniunince,  to  indi 

cate,  to  advertise. 
Antarcti<iue,  adj.  ant/trctie. 
An  vers,  s.m.  Antwerp. 
Ao  ,t.  s. in.  Aagivit. 
apaisor,  v.a.  /"  ajyjte-ase,  to  calm,  t- 

soothe  ;   s' — ,  v.r.  to  abate,  to  ge 

Cidm  or  (/a let. 
apercevoir.    v.a.    ir.    0^>*)    f^    P^'' 

reire.  to  see  ;  s' — ,  v.  r.  f^'  perceive 

t/f  bf  aware  {of},  to  notice. 
Apollon.  s.m.  Aj^tlJ^K 
aptKiratre,  v.n.  ir.  {]7S)  t^f  appetir. 
appart(;meiit,  s.m.  apartments 
apparten  r,  v.n.   ir,   (187)  to  belong, 

to  bec'niie. 
appoler,  v.a.  (J)')^  U)  call,  to  ajrpeal, 

.s' — .   v.r.  t/>  be  c,  filed  ;    commeol 

vous  appelez-vous  ?  what  is  youi 

name? 
applaudir,  v.a.  to  applaud,  to  cheer 
applique,  e,  adj.  diligent,  attentive. 

fftudiouxly,  adapted. 
appliquer,  v.a.   to  ajr^^ly  ;   s' — ,  v.r 

to  a^yply. 
apporter,  v.a.  to  bnng,  to  produce 

to  cause. 
apprehender,  v.a.  to  apprehend^   U 

fear. 
apprendre,  v.a.  ir,  (1S1)  to  learn,  to 

hear,  to  inform,  to  teU. 
appro ter,    v.a.    to   prepare,    to    gtt 

ready. 
apT)roGhe.  s.f.  ajyproarh. 
approciier,  v.a.n.  to  aj)2)roaeh. 


VOCABULAUr. 


3«9 


approf ondir.  v.  a.  tn  deepen,  to  inves- 

tif/ote.  t(>  fathom. 
approuver,  v.  a.  t/>  approve,  of. 
appui,  s.m.  lorjtport,  prr^j). 
appuyer.  v.a.n.   tr,  xnpjyort^  to  ie/tn, 

to  rent. 
apres.     prep.     adv.    nfter^    iie.it   to. 

'il)out.  behind.,  <iftenrard«  ;    d' — . 

oft^r.  frofn,  neroriUmj  to. 
aiircti-deniain,    adv.    s.m.    the    diti 

after  t»>-iru^rroiD. 
apr.s-iuidi,  s.m.f.  afternoon. 
arbre,  H.m.  tret. 
arbuste.  s.m.  bnsh. 
arc,  s.m.   boin.  arclt^  arc 
arc-en -ciel,  s.ra.  (21."))  raiitlHnn. 
archer,  s.m.  archer. 
archevoque,  s.m.  arrhbifhov. 
ardeur,  s.  f.  anior,  heat,  eajjernettg. 
argent,  s.m.  silver.,  mouey,  e^oth. 
argiier,  v  .n.  to  argue.,  U)  infer. 
Aiinste  (L'),  8.m.  Ariosto. 
arin.uenr.  a.m.  privateer. 
arme,   s  f.  weapon;   — s,   pi.  finn.x, 

tro<ypi*.,  warfare  ;  — b  a  feu,  fire- 

arvi«. 
arra6e.  8.f,  army,  troopH. 
aroinatique.  adj.  aromatic. 
arpent,  h.  ra.  acre. 
arracher,  v. a.   to  pluck.,  to  tear.,  to 

snatcli. 
arranger,  v. a.   to  arrange.,  to  put  in 

onUr.,  to  nettle,  to  xuit. 
axr.  ter,  v.  a.,  n.  to  stop.,  to  check,   to 

anext  ;  e,' — ,  v.r.  to  stop,  to  stand. 
arricre,  adv.   behind^  away  !  en  — , 

bihcky  in  arrears. 
arrivee,  s.f.  arrival.,  coming. 
arriver,  v.n.  (135)  to  arrive,  to  come, 

to  happen. 
art,  s.m.  art. 

articuler,  v.vl.  to  articulate. 
Afiie  (L'),  8.1  Asia. 
aspirer,  v.a.n,  to  inhale.,  to  aspire.. 
fassaillir,  v. a,  ir.   (185)  to  assail.,  to 

assault. 
assaisonner,  v.  a .  ^  season.,  to  dress, 

Pt  temper. 
assassin,  s.m,  murderer ,  assassin. 
assawsiner,  v. a.  toi^urder.  toassassi- 

iuUe. 


assant.  s.m.  assault,  .ohoek,  attack. 
assembloe,   s.f.     axaembly,    mfeting^ 

party. 
a.sseoir.  v.a.  ir.  (192;  tt>  ^t-at,  to  set  ; 

k' — ,  v.r.  to  fit  down,  to  st. 
as.sez.  adv.  einnigh,  rather,  pretty  ; 

—  bien.     prttty    well;   bien  — , 

(pii'e  eiioiir/h. 
a-ssidn,  e.  ndj.  assiduovs. 
a.-ssidui{H3.  8.f.    ax.Hd.vity.  dose  appli- 
cation. 
apsiette.  K  f.  pUite.  pl.ateft/1. 
fassigner.  v.a.  #/>  a.H,ngii,  to  xummon. 
assis,  e,  adj.  .seated,  xittiny. 
assLster.  v.a.n    to  oxxitt,  t/f  help,  to 

attfiul,  to  be  prrxent. 
ass<>ci»5.  e.  s.  m.  f.  axmH-iate,  partner. 
a^sonimer,  v.a.    U>  kiutck   down.,   to 

/.•ill.  to  pliifjiie. 
assoitir.  v  a„n. ,  to  match,  to  assort., 

to  Hort. 
asHoupir,    v.a.     to   make    drowxy ; 

s' — ,  v.r.  to  gtt  dro-irxy  or  uleej'y. 
awourdir,  v.a.  to  deafen. 
assnjettir.  v.a.  to  mtbjcct.  toxttbdiie. 
assnro,  e,  a(lj,  s.  secure,  xure.,  cer- 
tain. 
assurcment,  adv.  assuredly. 
assuror,  v.a.  to  axsiire. 
Athcnes,  s.f.  Athens. 
atlas,  s.m,  atlffs. 
attacher,  v.  a.  to  attach,  to  fasten  ; 

s' — ,  v.r.  to  attach  one-self ,  to  en- 

deavoi;  to  strive. 
attaquer,  v.  a.  to  attack,  to  assault. 
alrt-eindre,  v.a.ii.  Ir.   (175)  to  reach, 

to  attain. 
attendant  (en),    in  the  meantime, 

meanwhile,  till ;  —  que,  xiniil. 
attendre,  v.a.n.  to  wait  for,  towaity 

to  expect,  tjo  await ;   faire  — ,  to 

keep  waiting  ;  s'— ,  v.  r.  to  eiepeot., 

to  rely. 
attendrir,  v.a.  to  affect,  to  move. 
attetidu,  prep,  considei'ing  ;  —  quo, 

cormdtiing  that,  irliereas,  as. 
attenti-f.  ve,  adj.  attentive. 
attention,  s.f.  attention,  care,  notice; 

faire  — ,  to  pay  attention,  to  con- 

siller. 
attester;  v.a.  to  attest,  tovouoh. 


390 


VOCABULARY. 


attirer,  v. a.  to  ntfract,  to  draw. 

attrapCv,  v.  a.  to  catrJi. 

au  [coittractjon  of  a  le,  art.  (34)]. 

aube,  fe.f.  ddwn. 

auberge,  s.f.  in/i. 

aucun,  e.  adj.  (57,  76,  275)  any,  no, 
none^  iwt  any. 

au(;unement,  adv;  not  at  aU. 

audace,  s.f.  audacity.,  daring. 

audience,  s  f.  audis/ice. 

auditeur,  s.m.  hearer. 

augm enter,  v.a.n.  to  increase,  to  en- 
large, to  raise. 

Auguste,  s.m.  Avgiistvs. 

auguste,  adj.  august. 

aujourd'hui.  adv.  to-day.,  this  day. 

aumone,  s.f.  i dins.,  charity. 

aune.  s.m.  alder. 

aune,  s.f.  ell.,  measure,  yard. 

auparavant,  adv.  before,  formefrly, 
first. 

aupres,  prep.  7iear,  by.,  7iext,  about. 

aupres,  adv.  ne((/r,  close  by. 

au(juel  [contraction  of  a  lequel]. 

aurore.  s.f.  dawn,  light. 

aussi,  adv.  conj.  also,  too^  likewise, 
so,  as,  as  much  ;  —  bieu,  as  well. 

aussitv/t,  adv.  prep,  immediately,  di- 
rectly, iinmediatdy  after  ;  — que, 
as  soon  as. 

autant,  adv.  as  much,  as  many, 
so  much,  so  many  ;  d' —  moins, 
all  the  less;  d' —  plus,  all  the 
more. 

auteur,  s.m.  author. 

automne,  s.ra,f  autumn. 

autoriser,  v.  a.  to  authorize. 

autour,  prep.  adv.  (301)  around, 
about,  <iround  or  about  it,  around 
or  about  them. 

autre,  adj.  pron.  (276.  278,  292) 
other ;  tout  — ,  quite  different, 
any  other  ;  nous  — s,  we. 

aiitrefois,  adv.  formerly  ;  d' — ,  of 
former  times. 

autrenient,  adv.  otherwise,  differ- 
ently, eUe. 

Autriche  (L'),  s.f.  Austria. 

autrui,  s.m.  (276),  another,  others. 

aux  [contraction  of  a  ies,  art.  i34)]. 


auxquelles  fcontfaction  of  h>  le«- 
queilesj. 

auxquels  [contraction  of  alesquels], 

avance,  s.  f .  advance  ;  a  1' — ,  d' — , 
en — ,  par — ,  in  advance,  before- 
hand. 

avancer,  v.a.n.  to  advance,  t/)  jyrO' 
mote,  to  -project,  to  get  on,  to  go 
on;   s' — ,  v.r.  to  advance. 

avant,  adv.  far,  deep  ;  en  — ,  for- 
ward, in  front. 

avant,  prep.  (298)  before,  ere;  d' — , 
before  ;  —  que,  —  de,  before  ;  — 

-garde,  s.f.  van-guard; hier, 

adv.  the  day  before  yesterday. 

avantage,  s.m.  advantage. 

avaut-bras,  s.m.  forearm. 

avare,  adj.  avaricious,  stingy. 

avare,  s.m.  miner. 

avarier,  v  a.  to  damage. 

avec,  prep.  adv.  (37,  300)  with,  by, 
among,  against,  besides;  d' — , 
from. 

avenir,  s.m.  future ;  a  1' — ,  in  fu- 
ture, hencefarth. 

aventure,  s.f.  adventure. 

avertir,  v.  a.  to  inform,  to  warn. 

aveugle,  adj.  8.m.f.  blind,  blind  man 
or  iDoman. 

aveugler,  v.  a.  to  blind,  to  dazde. 

avide,  adj.  greedy,  eager. 

avilir,  v. a.  to  degrade;  s' — ,  to  de- 
base oneself. 

avis,  s.m.  opinion,  advice;  changer 
d' — ,  to  alter  on^s  tnind ;  etre 
d' — ,  to  be  of  the  opinion. 

aviser,  v.a.n.  to  perceive,  to  inform  y 
s' — ,  v.r.  to  think,  to  venture. 

avocat,  s.m.  barrister. 

avoir,  v.  a.  (48,  58)  to  have,  to  feel, 
(51 )  to  be  ;  qu'avez-vous  ?  qu'est- 
ce  que  vous  avez  ?  (52)  wliat  is  the 
matter  with  youf  Ilya(imp. ), 
(14(5)  there  is,  there  are,  the  matter 
is.  since,  ago  ;  qu'y  a-t-il  ?  wliat  is 
the  matter  ?  (idioms,  380). 

avouer,  v.a.  toavcw,  to  confess y  to 
own. 

f  Avril,  s.m.  April, 

azur,  sm.  azure. 


VOCABULARY. 


391 


Bade,  s.f.  Baden. 
bague,  s.f.  Hng. 

baguette,  s  f .  wand,  switch,  drum- 
stick. 
bain,  s.m.  bath. 
baiHser,  v. a.  to  lower  ;  se  — ,  v.r.  to 

St/M/p. 

bal,  s.m.  boU. 

balaneer,  v.a.n.  tostroing,  tohentate. 

balbutier,    v.a.n.    to  stammer,    to 

stutter. 
balle,  af.  ball,  bitUet. 
balsamique,  adj.  balmy. 
banc,  s.m.  bench. 
banquier,  s.m.  Ixinker. 
baptcme,  s.m.  bivptism. 
baril,  s.m.  barrel. 
baroune,  8.f.  baroness. 
barouche,  s.f.  baroncfie. 
barque,  s.f.  bnrk,  boat. 
barriere,  s.f.  barrier,  gate. 
bas,  se,  adj.  low. 
bas,  8.m.  stocking. 
ban,  adv.  low,  in  a  low  tone,  softly, 

in  a  whisper  ;   ici  — ,  here  bdow  ; 

la  — ,  below,  over  titer e^  jptnder  / 

en  — ,  down,   below,  dftwnstairs  ; 

tout  — ,  very  hw,  in  a  whisper. 
base,  8  f.  base. 
basse,  s.f.  bass,  base. 
f  bataille,  8.f.  battle  ;  livrer  — ,  fight 

a  battle. 
fbataillon,  s.m.  battalion. 
bateau,    s.m.    ImmU  ;    —  a  vapeur, 

steamboat. 
bateli-er,  hre,  s.m.f.  Ixxitinan,  wa- 
terman. 
b'lter,  v.a.  to  saddle. 
bati,  e,  part,  built,  made. 
b'ltir,  v.a.  to  build. 
battre,  v.a.n.  (107)  to  beat,  to  strike, 

to  defeat,  to  thrash  ;  se  — ,  v.  r.  to 

fight. 
bavard,  e,  adj.  s.   talkative,  talker, 

gossip. 
beau,  bel,  m.,  belle,  f.,  adj.  (41) 

deattt^idj  finSy  handsome,  noble  ; 


do  pins  belle,  more  than  ever* 
avoir  —  .  .  . ,  to  ...  in  vain  .  .  .  y 
Tavoir  belle,  to  have  a  favorable 
opjKn't unity  ;  vous  avea  —  dire, 
parler,  or  faire,  say,  or  dk>,  what 
you  will. 

beaucoup,  adv.  much,  many,  a  great 
deal,  a  gre^it  many. 

bean-frere,  s.m.  (215)  brothjr-in- 
law. 

beautc,  R.f.  beauty. 

bee,  s.  m.  benk,  bill. 

bog^ayer,  v.n.a.  tf*  stammer,  to  lisp. 

bel,  le,  adj.    V.  beau. 

Belgique  (La),  s.f.  Belgium. 

bellu-sueur,  8.f.  (215)  sister-in  law. 

benediction,  s.f.  blessing,  benediC' 
tion.    . 

•fbonin,  m.,  b'nigne,  f.,  adj.  benign. 

bonir,  v.a   to  blt'ss. 

bergor,  8.m.  shepherd. 

besoin,  s.  m.  n^ed,  want ;  an  — ,  if 
h£ce^viry  ;  avoir  —  de,  to  want,  to 
need. 

bestial,  e,  adj.  beastly. 

bestiaux,  s.m.  pi.  ('51)  cattle. 

bctail,  s.m.  (:{l)  c<ittle. 

beurre,  s.  ra.  butter. 

bible,  s.f.  bible. 

bien,  s.m.  go<xi,  benefit,  property 
wefdth. 

bien,  adv.  weU,  right,  quite,  very 
much,  many,  on  good  terrm,  good- 
looking  ;  —  de,  du,  de  la,  des, 
much,  many  ;  —  !  good  !  —  que, 
although  ;  e'est  — !  tJiat  will  do  / 

bienfaisant,  e,  adj.  beneficeiit. 

bienfait,  s  m.  benefit,  kindness. 

bieufai-teur,  trice,  8.m.f.  benefae 
tor.  benefactress. 

bienheiireu-x,  se,  adj.  happy,  blessed 

bieutat,  adv.  soon,  sliortly ;  a  —  I 
/  fwpe  to  see  you  again  soon. 

bienvenu,  e,  adj.  welcome. 

bicre,  s.f.  beer. 

bijou,  H.m.  jewel. 

bldmer,  v.a.  to  blame. 

blan-c,  che,  adj.  white. 

blanc,  s.m.  white. 

blc,  s.m.  com,  wheat. 

bleaser,  v.a.  to  woUnd^  to  hurt 


392 


VOCABULARY. 


blessure,  s.f.  wound. 

bleu,  e,  adj.  s.m.  blue. 

blociis,  8.m.  blockade. 

boeuf,  8.m.  <?«,  beef. 

Boheme  (La),  s.f  Bohemia. 

boire,  v.a.n.  ir.  (177)  to  dnnk. 

boire,  s.m.  drink. 

bois,  s.m.  wood;  der^ren — ,  wooaen. 

boite,  8.  f,  box^  case. 

bon,  ne,  adj.  good,  kind  ;  —  a  rien, 
good  for  nothing  ;  a  quoi  —  ?  ml  cat 
is  the  use  ?  c'est  —  !  go<)d  I  eery 
good  !■  all  right ! 

bon,  s.m.  goody  goodfeUow. 

bonheur,  s.  m.  happiness. 

bcmjour,  s.m.  good  morning^  good 
day. 

bonnet,  s.m.  cap. 

bonsoir,  s.  m.  good  nighU  good  even- 
ing. 

bonto,  s.f.  goodness,  kindness. 

bord,  8.  m.  border.,  edge.,  brim.,  ba?ik^ 
sliore. 

border,  v.  a.  to  border.,  to  bind. 

bomer,  v.  a.  to  bounds  to  limit. 

bosse,  s.f.  hump. 

botte,  s.f.  boot. 

bottier,  s.m.  boot-maker. 

bouche,  s.f.  mouth. 

bonder,  v.a.D.  to  pout  (at). 

boug-ie,  s.f.  wax-candle. 

fbouillir,  v.n.  ir,  (186)  to  boil. 

f bouillon,  s.m.  broth,  tea. 

boule.  s.f.  ball. 

boulet,  s.m.  baU. 

bourg-eoLs,  e,  s.m.f.  citizen. 

bourg-eois,  e,  adj.  citizenlike,  plain, 
vulgar. 

fBourgogne  (La),  s.f.  Burgundy; 
—  s.m.  Burgundy  (wine). 

bourse,  s.f.  purse,  exchange. 

bout,  s.m.  end,  piece  ;  k  —  de.  .  ., 
out  of ;  au  —  de,  after  ;  pousser 
a  — ,  to  drive  U>  extremities,  to 
put  out  of  patience  ;  venir  a  — de, 
to  succeed  in,  to  get  the  better  of. 

fbouteille,  s.f.  bottle. 

bouton,  ft.m.  bud. 

boutonner,  v.a.  to  button. 

braire,  v.n.  ir.  (197)  to  bray. 

bras,  «.ra.  df'ni. 


brave,    adj.     brave,    honest,    good, 

worthy,  courageous. 
braver,  v.a.  to  brave. 
brebis,  s.f.  sheep. 
bref.  brove,  adj.  sliort,  brief. 
Brosil  (Le),  s.m.  Brazil. 
j-Bretague  (La;.  8.f.   Brittany;   La 

Grande  — ,  Great  Britain. 
bride,   s.f.    bridle;   a  —  abattue,  h, 

toute  — ,  at  full  speed  ;   tenir  en 

— ,  Off  keep  within,  bounds. 
briser,  v.  a.  n.  to  break,  to  shatter,  to 

daJi ;    se  — ,  v.r.    to  break,    to 

dash. 
broc.  s  m.  can. 
tbrouillard,  s.m.  adj.  fog ;   il  fait 

dii— .  it  u  foggy. 
fbrouiller,  v.a.    to  throw  into  con- 
fusion ;   se  — ,  v.r.  to  f<dl  oat,  to 

be  on  bad  tei  ms. 
fbroussailles,  s.f.  pi.  brushwood. 
bruire,    v.n.    ir.     (107)    to    ruMle, 

roar. 
bruit,   s.m.  noise,  disturbance,  re- 

p<rrt. 
bruler,  v.a.n.  to  burn,  to  long. 
brun,  e.  adj.  brown. 
brut,  e.  adj.  raw,  crude. 
Bruxelles,  s.f.  Brussels. 
buisson,  s.m.  bush,  thicket. 
bureau,  s.m.  office,  desk. 
butin,  s.m.  booty,  prize. 


Ca,  adv.  —  et  la,  here  and  there., 
up  and  down,  to  and  fro. 

cabanc,  s.f.  cottage,  cabin,  hut. 

cacher,  v,  a.  to  hide,  to  conceal. 

cadeau,  s.m.  present,  gift. 

cafe,  8.  m.  cojfee,  eo fee-house  ;  —  aa 
lait,  coffee  with  milk  {ifi  it), 

cage,  s.f.  cage. 

cahier,  s.m.  copy-book. 

fcaillou,  s.m.  pebble,  stone, 

Caire  (Le),  8.m.  Cairo. 


VOCABULARY 


69S 


cal,  8.m,  C4tlJmity^  enUvA, 

calculer,  v.a.n.  to  CdlcuUrte. 

calino.  adj.  calm^  quiet,  stiU. 

calmer,  v. a.  to  mIj/i,,  to  snwthe. 

calomnie,  s.f.  calumny^  islander. 

caloinnier»  v.a.  to  calumniate,  to 
slaiider. 

camarade,  8.m.f.  comrade,  play- 
fellow,  compa7iwn,  friend. 

camp,  8.m.  c<fmp. 

fcampagne,  8.f.  country,  fieWt, 
count ry-hautie,  C4iiripaign. 

canal,  8.m.  canal,  channel. 

canard,  8.m.  dvck,  fabte  neucs, 
hoax. 

Candie,  s.f.  Candia  or  Crete. 

canif,  8.m,  'penknife. 

canne,  8.f.  cane,  stick. 

canton,  8.m.  canton,  district. 

cap,  8.m.  cape. 

capable,  adj.  capable,  able. 

capitaine,  s.m.  captain. 

capitade,  8.f,  capital. 

capricieu-x,  se,  adj.  capricious. 

capti-f,  ve,  adj.  8.  captive. 

captivite,  s.f.  captirity. 

car,  conj,  for.,  becauxe,  as. 

careBser,  v.a.  to  car  ens.  to  fondle. 

camaval,  s.m,  carnival. 

carte,  s.f.  card,  card-board,  map, 
chart ;  —  blanche,  full  power  ;  a 
la  — ,  fronn  the  bill  of  fare. 

cas,  s.m.  cane ;  en  tout  — ,  at  all 
event*  ;  fair  (gran')  —  de,  to  va- 
lue, to  think  (a  yie<it  deal  oj"). 

casquette,  s.f.  cap. 

casser,  v.a.  to  bre^tk,  to  crack. 

austor,  s.m.  beaver,  C4f.'<f&r. 

cause,  s  f .  canne.  mot  in,  rcanon  ;   a 

—  de,  on  aC'Cmnt  tf ;  et  pour  — , 
fiT  a  very  y*Mjd  reaxttn,. 

causer,  v.n.  to  talk.  In  rhat. 
caution,  s.f.  bail,  nurcty. 
cavenie,  8.f.  cavern,,  rare. 
ce,   eet,  m.,  cette,  f.  udj.  ((i2)  this, 

that. 
ee,  c\  pron.  (73,  111,  120.  25-))  this, 

thill,  it,  tlwy,  these,  thone.  he.  xhe  ; 

—  qui,  —  que  (271)  vchnt,  that 
which,  vhich  ;  —  sont,  they  are, 
ft  U  ;  a  —  que,  from  what,  t/utt, 

1^* 


as;  de  —que,  from,  the  fact  that; 

sur  —  que,  as,  when,  on. 
ceci,  pron.  {\W)  this,  this  thing. 
ccder,  v.n.  a.  to  yield,  to  give  up. 
cedrat,  s.m.  cnlrat,  lemon. 
ceindre,  v.a.  ir.  (175)  to  surround,  to 

gird. 
ceinture,  8.f.  belt. 
cela,  pron.  (120)  that,  it,  that  thing; 

c'est  — ,  that  is  it. 
cclebre,  adj.  celebrated. 
celle,  pron.  fem.  of  celui. 
cellule,  s.f.  cell. 
celui,  pron.  m.   (Ill),  207)  he,  him, 

the  one,  that;  —  ci,  the  latter^ 

this,  this  one,  he,  him,  who ;  — 

-la,  tfie  former,  tJtat,    that  one^ 

he,  him. 
cendre.  s.f.  as?tes,  cinders. 
cens,  s.m.  franchi.<<e. 
censurer,  v.a.  to  censure, 
cent,  s.m.  hundred. 
centaine,  s.f.  huitdred. 
centiome,  adj.  UfNidredth. 
centime,  s  m.  penny. 
cependant,  adv.  in  the  mean  time^ 

yd,  still,  hmcever. 
cerccau,  s.m.  hoojt. 
cercle,  s.m.  circle,  ring,  hoop. 
ccreales,  8.f.  pi.  wrn. 
cerf,  s.m.  stag,  deer,  hart. 
cerise,  a.f.  cherry, 
cerifiier,  s.m.  cherry-tree. 
certain,  e.  adj.  certain. 
cert: tine nient,  adv.  certainly. 
certes,    adv.    mast    annuredly^    in- 
deed. 
cos,  jidj.  thene.  those.      V.  ce. 
cesse,  8  f.  ceaj<ing;    sans  — ,   incea- 

Hunity.  r4,iifttiintly. 
cesser,  v.a.u.  (loO,  291)  to  cease,  to 

ieare  fyff. 
cet,  le,  adj.      V.  ce. 
ceux,  m.  pi.  of  celui 
chacuu,   e,   prou.  (275)  eacJi,  every 

one. 
chagrin,  s.m.  grief,  sdTow. 
chagiiner.  v.a.  to  griece,  to  vex. 
cha:ne,  ».  f.  chain,. 
chair,  s  f^  Ji^h. 
chaise,  s.f.  otuiir 


394 


'OCABULAR^. 


chaleur,   s.f,   lieat,   warmth^  glow, 

atli'inatiou. 
chambre,  s.f.  room  ;  —  a  couch er, 

bed-room. 
chameau,  s.m.  camel. 
champ,   s.m.  field ;   sur-le-  — ,  im- 

'medintely  ;  avoir  la  clef  des  — s, 

to  be  at  'liberty. 
chaudelle.  s.f.  candle. 
changer,  v.a.n.  to  change.,  to  alter., 

to  turn. 
chanson,  s.f.  song. 
chant,  s.m.  siugiag.^  song. 
chanter,  v.a.n.  losing. 
chanteu-r.  se,  s.m.f.  singer. 
chaos,  s.m.  chaos. 
chapeau,  s.m.  (30)  hat. 
chapeli-er,  ere,  s.in.f.  hatter. 
chapitre.  s.m.  cluipter. 
chaqne,  adj.  each.,  every. 
charge,  s.f.  had.,  office,  place. 
charge,  e,  adj.  (21 1 )  laUen. 
charger,  v.a.n.  to  load.,  to  charge,  to 

burden,  to  lade.,  to  intrust  ;  se  — , 

v.r.  to  take  charge  {of),  to  charge 

each  otJter. 
charmer,  v.  a.  to  charm,  to  delight. 
chai-pentier,  s.m.  carpenter. 
charrette,  s.f.  cart. 
chasse,  s.f.  hunting. 
chasser,    v.a.n.    to  drive   away.,    to 

chase,  to  hunt. 
chasseresse,  s.f.  huntress. 
chasseur,  s.m.  hui'iti-r. 
chasseuse,  s.f.  hunlrexs. 
chat,  chatte.  s.m.f.  cat. 
chateau,  s.m.  castle. 
chatier,  v.  a.  to  r/aiMise.  to  pymah. 
chaud,  e,  adj.  hot.  Warm;  avoir — , 

faii"3  — ,  to  be  warm. 
chaud,  s.m.  heat,  iioarnith. 
chaudron,  s.m.  kettle. 
chef,  s.m.  head.,  chief. 
chef-d'cxjuvre,    s.m.    (215)    master- 
piece. 
chef -lieu,  s.m.  (215)  chief  town. 
chemin,  s.  m.  loay.,  road  ;  —  de  far, 

railroad;  en  — ,  —  faisant,  by  or 

on  the  way. 
ohemioee,  s.f.  chimney,  hearth. 
cliemiae,  s.f.  sJiirt,  c/ieniiae. 


chc5ne,  s.m.  oak. 

chenil,  s.m.  dmj-kennd. 

ch-er,  ere,  adj.  dear.,  fond. 

cher,  adv.  dearly,  dear. 

chercher,  v.  a.  to  try  to  find.,  to  look 
for  ;  faire  — ,  to  send  for. 

cheval,  s.m.  (85)  Iwrse. 

cheveu,  s.m.  hair. 

chevre,  s.f.  goat. 

fchevreuil,  s.m.  roehnck,  deer. 

chez,  prep.  (:}7,  201))  at  or  iu  or  to 
the  dicelling  (house,  lodgings, 
<kc. )  of,  at  or  to  .  ...  ',«<,  in  or  to 
the  room  ox  the  country  of,  among., 
with,  in  ;  —  moi,  toi,  lui,  elle,  soi, 
nous,  &c.,  at  or  to  or  in  my,  thy., 
his.  Iter,  oSs,  our  &c.  honse^ 
lumie,  at  home;  un  —  soi,  at  home. 

chien,  s.m.  dog. 

chiendent,  s.m.  dog's  grass. 

Chine  (La),  s.f.  China. 

choeur,  s.m.  choir. 

choir,  v.n.  (189)  to  fall. 

choisir,  v.  a.  to  chjoose,  to  select^  to 
pick  out. 

choix,  s.m.  choice,  selection. 

chose,  s.f.  thing,  object,  matter; 
peu  de  — ,  pas  grand'  — ,  not 
much,  no  great  ma  tier,  of  little 
consequence.     V.  quelque  chose. 

chou,  s.m.  cabbage. 

chou-lieur,  s.m.  (215)  cauliflower. 

Chretien,  ne,  adj.  s.  christian. 

christianisme,  s.m.  christUinity. 

chut,  int.  hush/ 

chute,  s.f.  f(dl. 

ci,  adv.  (()2)  here,  this,  par-ci,  par-la, 
here  and  there  ;  —  joint.    V.  joint. 

ciel,  s.m.  (214)  (pi.  cieux,  ciels) 
heathen.,  sky,  climate.,  tester. 

cigare,  s.m.  cigar. 

oil,  s.m.  eye-lash. 

cime,  s.f.  titp,  summit. 

cinq,  adj.  s.  jive. 

ciniiuante,  adj.  fifty. 

cinquantieme,  adj.  s.m.  fiftieth 

cinquieme,  adj.  s  m.  fifth. 

cinquiemement,  adv.  fiftJdy. 

circoucire,  v.  a.  ir.  {171)  to  circumeiss 

circonscrire,  v.a.  ir.  (17G)  to  circum- 
scribe. 


TOCABULARY. 


895 


ijirconstance,  s.f.  dreurmtance, 

ciseau,  s.in.  cltud. 

ciseuux,  s-m.  pi.  sdxsors. 

citoyen,  ne,  s.ra.f.  citizen. 

citron,  a.m.  lemon. 

civil,  e,  adj.  civil. 

ulair,  e,  adj.  dear.,  bright^  plain. 

clair,  s.m.  light. 

clairement,  adv.  dearly. 

classe,  a.f.  dnss. 

clef,  (cle),  s.f.  key  ;  fermer  ^  — ,  to 
lock. 

clcraence,  s.f.  demency. 

clerc,  s.m.  derk. 

climat.  s.m.  climate^  dime. 

cloche,  s.f.  bell. 

clore,  v.a.n.  ir.  (198)  to  done^  to  en- 
djse. 

clos,  e,  part.  adj.  shut,  dose, 

clou,  s.m.  nail. 

cochon,  s.m.  hog,  pig. 

ccBur,  s.m.  heart. 

coin,  s.m.  corner,  patch. 

colere,  s.f.  anger ;  en  — ,  angry. 

colibri,  s.m.  humming-bird. 

colline,  s.f.  hill. 

colorer,  colorier,  v. a.  to  color. 

combat,  8.m.  fight,  battle^  com- 
bat. 

combien,  adv.  how  mnr.h,  hoio  many, 
/loic  long,  how  far,  how. 

comble,  s.m,  utnwH  ;  au  — ,  com- 
plete. 

combler,  v.a.  to  Jiea/p,  to  load. 

coraedie,  s.  f .  comedy,  play. 

couiodien.  ne.  s.  ni.f.  comedian. 

comtJte,  s.f.  comet. 

coinme.  adv.  a.s,  like,  as  if;  —  cela, 
—  (;a,  like  tin  it.  xo. 

commencement.  8.m.  beginning. 

conunenccr,  v.a.n.  to  begin. 

comment,  adv.  ///>//).  why.  what. 

commerce,  s.m.  commi^rce,  trade, 
biitiiiejtH. 

commettre,  v.a.  ir.  (180)  to  commit, 
to  compr(/mixe. 

coiiimis.  .s.m.  derk. 

commission,  s.f.  commission,  mes- 
sage, errand. 

commode,  adj.  convenient,  comfort- 
«Me,  eagy. 


commodement,   adv.    conveniently 

c^nnfortably. 
commun,  e,  adj.   common,  mututi^ 

vulgar. 
commun,  s.m.  gener'ility,  bulk. 
communcmeut,  adv.  Cy,mnMnly,  gen- 

eraXiy. 
fcompagne,  s.f.  companion,  partner. 
fcompagnie,  s.f.   coinpaity,  society, 

troitp. 
fcompa^on,  s.m.  companion,  part- 
ner, fellow. 
coraparaisou,  s.f.  comparison. 
comparaitre,  v.n.  ir.  (178;  toappear. 
complaire,  v.n.  ir.    (178)  to  please; 

se — ,  v.r.  to  delight. 
compl-et,  ete,  adj.  c</mp'ete.  full. 
complet,  s.m.  full  number. 
complutement,      adv.      completdy, 

fully,  utterly. 
compliment,  s.ra.   comjylitnent,  can- 

gmtulatwn. 
couiporter.  v.a.  to  admit  of ;   se — , 

v.r.  to  behare. 
composer,  v.a.n.  to  compose,  settle. 
comprendre,  v.a.  ir.    (181)    to  comr 

jirehend,  to  comprise,  understand. 
compris ;  y  — ,  udv.  including,  with; 

non  — ,  not  in^iuding. 
compromettre,    v.a.n.    ir.    (180)    to 

onnpromifte,  to  expose. 
coraptant,  adj.  ready. 
comptant,  s.  m.  ready  mtmey,  c-ash  ; 

au  — ,  for  cash. 
compte,    s.m.    account,    reckoning, 

c(dculat.iou  ;    —  -rendu,   rep<trt ; 

a  — ,   on  accoutit  ;  pour  mon  — , 

for  my  part,  as  for  me  ;  se  reudre 

—  de.  to  uci'AiiDit  for. 
compter,  v.a.n.  toe/>unt,  U)  calcidate. 

V>  inrdudft.  to  contain,  to  rely. 
comte,  s.m.  count,  earl. 
comtesse,  s  f.  counti-ss. 
concemer,  v.  a.  to  cuicorn. 
concert,  .s.m.  concert. 
coucevoir,  v.a.  ir,  (189)  to  ccncdve, 

to  understand. 
conclure,  v.a.n.  ir.  (107)  to  condude. 
Concorde,  s.f.  concord. 
concourir,  v.n.  ir.  (184)  to  compete. 
ooncours,  a.m.  concourse. 


8'J6 


VOCABULARY. 


condamner,  v. a.  t/)  condetnn^  to  sen- 
tence. 

condescendre,  v.n.  to  condescend^  to 
comply. 

condition,  s.f.  condition.,  state; 
— H.  pi.  te/Dns. 

conduire,  v.  a.  ir.  (172)  to  conduct, 
to  lead  ;  se  — ,  v.  r.  lo  beluvre. 

condnite,  s.f.  conduct,  behavior, 
leading. 

conftance,  s.f.  confidence,  trvfit. 

couiier,  v.  a.  to  corifide,  to  tn/H. 

coufii-e.  v.a.  ir.  (171)  to  preserve,  to 
pickle. 

confirm  er,  v.a.  to  con  firm. 

conti tu re ,  h.L  ja m . 

confornioment,  adv.  conformably, 
suitably. 

contort,  a.m.  comfort. 

confus,  e,  adj.  confused. 

conge,  s.rn.  leave,  discJiarge,  holi- 
day, 

congedier,  v.a.  to  discharge,  dismiss. 

coujugaison,  s.f.  conjugation. 

conjurer,  v.a.  toco/ispire,  to  entreat. 

connaissance,  s-f.  knowledge,  ac- 
gu/ii/itance,  senses  ;  -  s,  pi.  know- 
ledge, learning,  <icquirements. 

connatre.  v.a.n.  ir.  (176)  to  know, 
to  be  acquainted  with. 

conn.-table,  s.  m.  constable. 

conqucrant,  a.m.  cumqueror. 

con(iucrir.  v. a.  to  conquer,  subdue. 

conquute,  s.f.  Cf/n quest. 

consacrer.  v.a.  ir.  (188),  to  conse- 
crate, to  sanction. 

conscience,  s.f.  cvn^cience. 

consciencieu-x,  se,  adj.  consden- 
tlovn. 

fconseil,  s.m,  advice,  counsel;  — de 
guerre,  court-martini. 

fcoiiseiller,  v.a.  toadrixe,  to  counsel. 

consentir,  v.n.  ir.  (184)  to  consent  ; 
—  v.a.  to  i/,.s.sent  or  agree  to. 

consequence,  s.f.  conseqtie'nce,  im- 
portance;  en  — ,  ana^equentiy, 
accordingly. 

consrquent.  e,  adj.  consistent;  par 
— ,  con,sequentli/. 

couserver,  v.a.  to  2^reserve,  to  keep, 
tB  ket^t  {tip). 


consideration,  s.f.  consideration,  rtf 
gard,  respect. 

considcrer,  v.  a.  to  condder,  to  ex- 
amine, to  value. 

f consigner,  v.a.   to  dqiosit,  consign 

consistance,  s.f.  consistency,  thick- 
ness. 

consister,  v.n.  to  consist. 

consoler,  v.a.  to  console,  to  comfort. 

conspirer,  v.n.  a.  to  conspire,  to  plot. 

constamment,  adv.  constantly. 

constant,  e,  adj.  constant,  steady. 

constitner,  v.a.  to  constitute,  to 
form  ;  se  —  prisonnier,  to  sur- 
render. 

constitution,  s.f.  constitution. 

construction,  s.f.  construction^ 
building. 

con.stniire,  v.a.  ir.  (172)  toconstruci., 
to  build.. 

consul ter,  v.a.  to  consult. 

consumer,  v.a.  to  consume. 

conte,  s.m.  tale. 

coutenance,  B.f.  countenance,  air, 
look. 

contenir,  v.a.  ir.  (187)  to  contain,  to 
hold. 

content,  e,  adj.  contented,  satisfied, 
ple<tsed,  glad. 

contentement,  s.m.  content,  satis- 
faction, joy. 

contenter,  v.  a.  to  satisfy,  to  please  ; 
se — ,  v.r.  to  be  satisfied. 

conter.  v.a.  to  relate,  to  teU. 

contester,  v.a.n.  (298)  U)  contest. 
I  continuellement,  adv.  continually. 
I  continuer,  v.a.n.  to  continue,  logo 

on  with. 
I  contraindre,  v.a.  ir,  (175)  to  compel, 
to  frvce,  to  constrain. 

contraire.  s.m.  adj.  contrary ;  au — , 
on  the  contrary;  au  —  de,  con- 
trary  to, 

centre,  prep.  adv.  against,  contrai-y 
to,  ne<tr,  versus. 

contre-coup,  s.m.  rebound,  conse- 
quence. 

contredire,  v.a.  ir.  (173)  to  contrn- 
i      diet,  to  oppose. 

contredit ;    sans  — ,    adv.    unque»- 
I      tiouabty. 


VOCABULARY. 


897 


contree,  8.f.  count t^,  regini. 

contrefaire,  v. a.  ir.  (I8()j  to  counter- 
feit. 

coutribuer,  v.n.  to  contribute. 

convaincre.  v. a.  ir.  (174)  to  cftncince. 

convainquant.  part.  r/ni,nnciiig. 

conveiiaV>le,  adj.  pritj/er,  hecoiaiiiy^ 
Hijht,  due.,  su/tuhle. 

convenir,  V  n.  ir.  (1H7)  to  agree,  to 
suit,  ttt  be  expedient. 

coiivertir,  v.  a   tn  on  cert,  tuchi(uye. 

convier.  v. a.  toinoite. 

copia.  s.f.  C'^7/. 

coij,  H.  in.  rot'k. 

fci)quiJle,  s.f.  ff/tell. 

fcorweiil  .  s.f   buj^kft. 

corile,  M.f.  .Htiiiiy   c-orrl.  rojie.  , 

conlon,  8. in.  ttrixt,  s^tring,  hand; 
—  blen,  Jii!tt-ntt<'  c4Ht!:. 

Coriuthicu.  ne.  sulj.  CiniutitUin. 

oorpM.  H.  rn.  h()iy   r/trpH. 

correct,  e,  adj.  cttntrJ. 

corriger,  v  a.  t<>  r^'iTect. 

cort.-^e,  s.  m.  retinue,  nttendautif, 
jrrtM:ejO(i//ii. 

c'te.  s.f.  Cf'iijit,  nhore. 

cOt(3.  8.m.  Hklc  'ffify  pffrt. 

cotoH,  8  tn.  c/4too. 

cotonnier.  a.m.  cotton  trt-e. 

cotoyer,  v.  a.  to  count,  to  go  at  the 
ante  of. 

con,  8  m.  neck. 

couohe,  e,  part,  adj  lying  down,  in 
bed. 

coa<  her,  to  Uig  domii,  to  put  to  bed  ; 
ee  — ,  v.r.  to  lit  lUfwn,  U)  g(»  to  bed. 

coudre,  v.a  u.  ir.  (174;  Ot  neuo. 

coaler,  v.n.  tojioir,,  to  run. 

conleur,  s.f.  color,  jutcut. 

coup,  s.m.  hlfno,  stroke,  knock,  rajt, 
hit,  HtAtb,  thrust,  wound,  tri;k  ;  — 
de  rteche  ('{O-S),  arrow ;  —  de 
foudre,  thu mler-xtroke  ;  —  de  fusil 
(308),  bulUt ;  —  de  main,  sudden 
attack,  hel/p ;  —  de  soleil,  xuu- 
stroke  ;  a  — s  de  (308)  d'uu  —  de 
(302)  by,  with  a,  with  ;  tout  a 
— ,  tout  d'un — ,  all  of  a  sadden, 
suddenly,  all  at  once. 

x)upable,  adj.  8.m.f.  guilty, 

coupe,  s.f.  cutting,  cup 


couper.  v.a.n.    t^  cut,  t.  cut  off  oi 

out  or  up  or  doica,  to  « lip  ;  se   -, 

V.  r   t/)  cat  one.^elf. 
couple,  s.m. f.  couple,  brace. 
cour.  s  f .  yard,  court,  court-yard. 
courage,  s.m.  courage,  cheer. 
courjigeusement,  adv.  ourayeouHy. 
courageu-x,  se,  adj.  courageoujt. 
cour.  lilt,     8  m.      Ktreani,      cur  rent  ^ 

cour.He  ;   au  —  de.   acquainted  or 

ciai versa nt    with;    mettre   au  — 

(de).  (o  inform  (of). 
conrljer,  v.a.n.  to  bend,  to  bow  do'wn. 
ciuirir.  v.a.n.  ir   {\ii4:)  to  run. 
couronne.  .s.f.  crown,. 
cuurroie.  s.f.  xtrap^  bet. 
cDuis,  s.m.  ctur.se,  current. 
course,  s.f.  run,  race,  a/ursc,  career: 

a  la  — ,  running. 
court,  e.  adj.  short. 
court,  adv.  sho.t;   tout   — ,    ^h/rt, 

simply  ;   deiiieurer    or  roster    — , 

to  st"p  ts/t/'/'t. 

cousin,  e,  s.  ni.f.  cousin. 

couteau.  s.m.  (30)  knife. 

c<)i;ter,  v.  n.  a.  to  cody  to  be  expensive. 

coutd.  s.m.  ticking. 

couLume,  s.f.  custom,  habit ;  comme 

de  — ,  //.•«  Wiuai;  de  — ,  u.s>oally  ; 

avoir  —  de,  to  be  in  the  habit  of. 
convert,  e,  adj.  covered,  sheltered. 
couvrir,   v.a.   ir.    (185)  to  cover,  to 

hide,  Uf  protect ;  se  — ,  vr.  to  cover 

oneself,  to  grt  cloudy. 
craiudre.  v.a.  ir.  (175,  326,  330),  to 

fear,  to  be  afraid  of,  to  dre^td. 
crainte,  s.f.  fear,  dread;   de  —  de, 

for  fear  of  ;  de  —  que.  for  fear^ 

lent. 
crainti-f,  ve,  adj    timid. 
cra3()n,  s.m.  pencil,  crayon.,  sketch. 
croateur,  s.m.  creator,  maker. 
crcme,  s.  f .  cr&im. 
crier,    v.n. a.    to  cry,    to  shout,    to 

scream,  to  r,aM  out.  to  prorZaim. 
crime,  s.  in.  crime,  offence. 
crimiuel.  le.  adj,  s.  criudnai,  cal.jrrit. 
crin,  s  ra.  Iior.se  luiir. 
croire.  v.a.n.  ir.   (177)  to  beliece,  to 

think. 
croitre,  v.n.  ir.  (136,  178)  to  grow. 


398 


VOCABULARY. 


croix,  8.f.  croH^, 

cru,  e,  adj.  raio,  crude. 

cruaute,  s.f.  cr 

cruche,  s.f.  pitchei' 

cniel,  le.  adj.  cruel^  Hore. 

cruel)  ement,  adv.  cruelly^  sordy, 

fcueillir,  v.  a.  ir.  (184)  to  gather^  to 
pick. 

fcuiller,  cuillere,  s.f.  spoon;  — ^ 
cafe,  tea-sp<K>n. 

cuir,  s.m.  akin,  leather. 

cuire.  v  a.n,  ir.  (172)  to  cook,  to  bake., 
to  boil. 

cuihine,  s.f.  kitchen,  cooking  ;  tuire 
la  — ,  t4)  cook. 

cuLsini-er,  ere,  s.m.f.  cook. 

cuivre,  s.m.  cojyper,  branx. 

culbuLer,  v.a.n.  to  tumble  head  over 
heeU. 

cupidite.  s.f.  cufyidity. 

curac^-ao.  s  m.  eanK^'oa. 

curieuseinent.  adv.  cwionsly. 

curieu-x,  se,  adj.  s.  curi(.un,  singu- 
lar, curious  part,  inquisitice  per- 
son. 

curiosite,  s.f.  curiosity. 


D. 


fdeigner,  v.n.  to  deign. 

daim,  s.m.  deer,  buck. 

damner,  v.  a.  to  damn. 

Danemark  die).  s.in.  Denmark. 

danger,  s.m.  danger,  fear. 

dans.  prep.  (2.)(),  2'.)7)  m,  into, 
withiu. 

danse,  s.f.   dance. 

daiiser.  v.n. a.  t/>  dance. 

dausciu  r,  .se,  s.m.f.  dancer,  partner. 

dard,  s.m.  dart,  xtiug. 

davantage,  adv.  ut<n-e,  longer. 

de.  d',  prep,  (with  art.,  ;^:i ;  parti- 
tive, 8iJ  ;  without  the  art.,  42  ; 
special  use,  22y ;  with  proper 
names,  235 ;  after  adjectives, 
860 ;    after  adverbs,  285  ;    with 


infinitive,  342)  o/,  from,  out  o/ 

171,   with,   by,  at,  some,  any,  to^ 

between,  than  (238). 
debarquer,  v. an.  to  land. 
dcbiter,  v.  a.  to  sell,  to  retail,  to  de* 

liver,  to  utter,  to  debit. 
deboucher,  v. a.  to  open,  to  uncork. 
debris,    s.m.    fragment.,    remains^ 

rubbisJu 
de(^a,  prep.  adv.  on  this  side  (of); 

en  — ,  o?i  this  side ;  —  et  dela, 

here  and  there. 
deceder,  v.n.  {Vd^)  to  die,  to  decease. 
decembre,  s.m.  December. 
docevo'c,  v.a.  ir.  (189)  to  deceive. 
docha  ne,  e,    adj.    uncJiainedy   rag- 

inq,  furious. 
dechirer,  v.  a.  to  tear,  to  rend. 
dcchoir,  v.n.  ir.  (136,  189)  to  fall,  to 

sink. 
decider,  v.a.  to  decide;  se — ,  v.r. 

to  make  up  o. '«  mind. 
decision,  s.f.  decision. 
doclaraer,  v.  a.  n.  Pt  recite,  declfdm. 
declarer,  v.  a.  to  decUire,  to  proclaim. 
dccombres,  s.m.  pi.  rubbish. 
decoudre,  v.a.  ir.  (174)  to  unsew,  to 

rip. 
decourager,  v.a.   to    discourage,  tO 

deter, 
decouvert,    e,  adj.   uncovered,  dis- 

c-overed. 
decouvrir,  v.a.  ir.  (185)   to  uncover., 

to  discover. 
decrire,  v.a.  ir.  (176)  to  describe. 
decro  tre,  v.n.  ir.  (178)  to  decrease. 
fdedaiguer,  v.a.  to  divdiin,  to  scorn. 
dedain,  s.m.  disdain,  ac/trn. 
dedans,    adv.    in.     within,     inside : 

en  — ,  i/mide,  within,. 
dedans,  s.m.  inside,  interior. 
dcdire,  v.a.  ir.    (173)   to  co/itradiett 

to  gainsay  ;  se  — ,  v.r.  to  retract. 
doduire,  v.a.  ir.  U72)   to  deduct,   to 

infer. 
da  esse,  s  f.  goddess. 
fdofaillir,    v.n,    ir.  (198)  to  faU^  to 

faint. 
defaire  v.a.  ir.  (180)  to  undo,  to  un- 
make, to  rid,  to  defeat^  to  rout; 
se  — ,  to  g^.t  rid. 


VOCABULARY. 


399 


defaut,   «.Tn.    defeet^  fhult,  want; 

a.  or  a,\x  —  de,  for  wont  of ;  en 

— ,  atfavlt. 
defendre,  v. a.  to  defend^  tofoi'hid; 

se  — ,  v.r.  to  defend  or  shelter  or 

justify  oneself,  to  dedine. 
defense,    s.f.   defence,    (354)    tu%k, 

outworks. 
def erer,  v.  a.  to  confer,  to  bestow. 
deficit,  s.m.  defidenci/. 
defier,  v.  a.  to  defy,  to  challenge,  to 

provoke,  to  dare;  se  — ,  v.r.  to 

distrust. 
degeler,  v.a.n.  to  thaw. 
dcgencrer,  v.n.  (136)  to  degenerate. 
dehors,  adv.  outnde,  out,  without ; 

en  — ,  outsitle,  withaut. 
dehors,  s.m,  outside,  exteiHor;  lea — , 

pi.  appearajices. 
deja,  adv.  already,  yet. 
dejeuner,  s.m.  lunch,  brealfnxt. 
dejeuner,    v.n.    to    take    luudi,    to 

bi'eakfast. 
dela,    prep,    au  — ,  beyond,  on  the 

other  side,  upwards,  more  ;  en  — , 

beyond,  farther. 
delai,  s.m.  delay. 
delicat,  e,  adj.  delimte,  nice. 
delicates.se,  s.f.  delicacy,  nicety. 
delicieusement,  adv.  ddiciously. 
deiicieu-x,  se,  adj.  delicious. 
duller,  v.a.  to  untie. 
delivrance,  s.f.  deliverance,  release. 
delivrer,  V.  a.  to  deliver,  to  free. 
demain,  adv.  s.m.  to-morrow. 
demande,  s.f.  question,  request,  de- 
mand, desire. 
deraander,   v.a.    to  ask,    to  beg,   to 

want,    to    demand,    to   inquire; 

faire  — ,  to  send  for. 
demcle,  s.m.  quarrel,  strife. 
dementir,  v.a.  ir.   (184)  to  give  the 

lie  to,  to  contradict,  to  deny. 
dvmettre,  v.a.  ir.  (180)  to  put  out  of 

joint,  Uf  dismisK. 
deraeure,  s.f.  residence,  dwelling. 
demeurer,  v.n.  to  reside,  to  live,  to 

dwell. 
demi,  e,  adj.  (240)  Jialf,  semi. 
donioijratic,  s.f.  democracy. 
demoiselle,  s.f.  young  lady. 


demolir,  v.a.  to  demolish,  to  pvB 
do  ton. 

Demosthenes,  s.m.  DemostlieneA. 

dcnouer,  v.a.  to  untie,  to  undo. 

dent,  s.f.  tooth. 

depart,  s.m.  departure. 

depccher,  v.a.  to  despatch;  se — , 
v.r.  to  make  haute,  to  Jtasten. 

depeindre,  v.a.  ir.  (175)  to  depict^  to 
describe. 

dependre,  v.  n.  to  depend. 

depens,  s.m.  pi.  expense,  cost. 

dcpenser,  v.a.  ^  spend 

dopit,  s.m.  vexation,  spite. 

deplaire,  v.n.  ir.  (178)  to  displease, 
to  gioe  offence. 

deplaiair,  am.  displeas7ire,  sorrow, 
grief 

depot,  s.m.  deposit,  trusty  store- 
house, settlement. 

fdepouiller.  v.a.  Ut  strip,  despoil. 

depourvoir,  v.a.  to  divest. 

dcpourvu,  e,  adj.  unprovided,  desti- 
tute. 

depuis.  prep,  since,  from,  for,  after; 

—  longtemps,  long  ago  ;   —  peu, 
latdy ;     —  quand  ?    Jiow    long  f 

—  que  (202),  since,  ever  since. 

depuis,  adv.  since,  afterwards. 

depute,  s.m.  dejmty,  rej/reaentative. 

deranger,  v.a.  to  derange,  to  dis- 
place, to  inconvenience,  to  disturb, 
to  trouble;  se — ,  v.r.  to  disturb  or 
trouble  onesdf. 

demi-er,  ere,   adj.    s.    latter,   last^ 

latest,  extreme;   la  semaine  — e, 

last  week ;  la  — e  f ois,  last  or  the 

last  time. 
demierement,  adv.  lately. 
deroute,  s.f.  rout^  disorder ;  mettre 

en  — ,  to  rout. 
derriere,  prep.  adv.  behind^  behind 

it. 
des  [contraction  of  de  lea,  art.  34, 

39  j. 
d^s,  prep,  even  from^  as  early  aSy 

from. 
dcsaccoutumer,  v.  a.  to  break  of  the 

habit, 
dcsagrcable,  adj.    disagreeable,  un- 

pleasaiU. 


400 


VOCABULARY. 


desagreablement.  adv.  dimgreeably.  \ 
deHai)prendre,  v. a.  ir.  {\'6\)  unlearn.  \ 
descendre.  v.n.   (13(i)  to  desceitd,  to 

coine  or  go  <hwn. 
d  sert,  e,  adj .  d(>^e>i,  defterted 
dosesporer.  v.n.  to  dcsjioir. 
desespoir,  s.iu,  dexjuiir. 
doshaintuer,    v. a.    to  brettk   of  the; 

Ik  I  hit.  i 

deshouorer,  v.  a.  to  dishonor^  to  din 

yntce. 
f  designer,  v.  a.  to  dmgnnte^  topoinU 

out. 
dosir,  s.m.  denire,  wish. 
ddHirer,    v.  a.     (192)    to   desire,    to 

iniffh. 
dcsobeissanoe,  s.f.  disobedience. 
dcsoler.  v.  a.  fo  dintre.t!*  ;  se  — ,  v.r. 

to  ijiiere. 
dosordre,  H.in.  disorder,  confimon. 
d6sorni!iis.  adv.  heiicef(rri}i. 
desquel!es    |  con  traction    of  de  les- 

qmillesj. 
dessquels    [contraction    of    de     les- 

qiiels]. 
dcBsein,     s.m.     d^myn,     intention, 

j)l(fn.  pvrpone  ;  a  — ,  07i  jiurpose  ; 

a  —  de.  in  order  to  ;  avoir  —  or 

le  —  de,  io  intend. 
deHsert.  s  in.  desert. 
desservir.    v.n  a.    ir     (^188)  to   take 

atcai/,  to  re/nme  the  cl^-th. 
des.-in,  8.m.  dra>rin(/.  pattern. 
dessiner,  v. a.  to  draw,  to  .sketch. 
deBsous.  adv.  prep,    under,   below ; 

an  — ,  under,  below  ;  de  — ,  from. 

under  ;  par  — ,  nnder. 
dessous,  s.m.,   under  part,  bottom, 

inrong  dde. 
dessus,  adv.   i)rep.   on,  upon,  over, 

above,  uppermost  ;  par  — ,  upon, 

bejfidej(. 
dessus,  8.  m.  v]yper  part. 
destiner,  v. a.  to  dextine,  to  intend. 
Ictycher.  v. a.  to  detach,  to  untie. 
^detail,  s.m.  detail,  particular. 
doteindre,  v. a.  ir.  (175)  to  takeout 

the  odf/r  (f;  —  v.n.  to  lose  its  dye 

or  color,  to  fade. 
d.  tenir,  v.  a.    ir.   (187)  to  detain.,  to 

withhold. 


determiner,  v.  a.  to  determine,  to 
settle  ;  se  — ,  v.r.  to  resolve. 

detoster,  v. a.  to  det'St.  tft  hate. 

dotour,  s.m.  winding,  rerundahoui 
way. 

drtourner,  v.  a.  to  tnrn  aside,  to 
dissuade. 

dotresse,  s.f.  distress. 

dctroit,  s.m.  strait. 

d6trnire,  v.  a.  ir.  (172)  to  destroy,  to 
ruin. 

detfce.  s.f.  debt. 

deux,  adj.  s.m.  two.  both;  tons  lea 
— ,  botJt,  every  other. 

deuxieme,  adj.  sm.f.  second. 

deuxiemeraent,  adv.  secondly. 

devant.  prep.  adv.  (298)  before,  in 
front  of,  before  them. 

devant,  s.m.  forepart,  front ;  aller 
or  venir  au-  —  de,  to  ^<?  or  come 
to  meet. 

devant  (part,  of  devoir],  owing,  in- 
tending,  being  on  the  point  of. 

dcveiopper,  v. a.  to  ujifold,  to  deve- 
lop, to  dis^.lay. 

devenir,  v.n.  ir.  (135,  187)  to  be 
corne,  to  grow. 

dev.tir,  v.  a.  ir.  (183)  to  undothe,  to 
undress,  to  divest. 

deviner,  v.  a.  to  divine,  to  gness. 

devoir,  s.m.  duty,  task;  — s,  pi. 
r<  speMs. 

devoir,  v. a.  ir.  (189,  323)  to  owe; 
—  V  n.  invst,  to  be  obliged,  (203) 
to  be  {to),  to  be  intended,  shovld, 
ought ;  se  — ,  to  owe  it  to  one- 
self. 

dcvorer,  v.a.  to  der.onr,  to  eonsicme. 

de^'oui',  e.  adj.  devoted,  true,  sin- 
cere, faithful,  affectionate,  loving  ; 
votre  tout  — ,  yours  truly  or  .*m- 
cerely  or  faithfully 

devouement.  s.m.  devotedness. 

devouer,  v.a.  to  devote. 

diamant,  s.m.  diamond, ^'iewel,  gem. 

dijimctre,  s.m.  diameter. 

Dieu,  s.m.  God ;  gr.ce  a  — ,  — 
merci,  thank  God ;  mon  —  1 
— !  good  Heavens!  dear  me! 
blexs  ?ne  ! 

diffc'rent.  e,  adj.  different,  various. 


VOCABULARY. 


401 


diffcTPr.  V  a.  ^>  piit  off.  ^  i 

dittio.le,  ;uij.  ilijfirnlt,  liard^  hard  to  \ 

j'U-.itse,  pnrtiddar.  '■ 

ditKc; lenient,  adv.  irilh  di^U'iilty.       \ 
dilli«;ult<i.  s  f.  ibjffieiilty  \ 

ditt'onne.  adj.  dej'inmed.  \ 

ftJigne,      adj.      worthy,     dejiefoiitf/, 

(h'<//ttjiet/.  p 

diniancli*^.  s.m.  Siiiidtiy.  j 

dludon.  jliiide.  ».m.  turAwy,  gooae.      < 
d  ner.  s.  in.  diinaT. 
diner,  v.u.  to  dine. 
due,  v.a.  ir.  (172)  tf*  Any,  to  tell,  to 

i^teok ;   cela    va   sans  — .    (202) 

that  is  n  nmtter  of  amrxe  ;  c'cKt  a- 

— ,  t/ui(  ix  lo  soy. 
direct,  e.  adj.  direct,  ntndyht. 
dirger,  v  a.  t^f  direct,  U*  imUKige.  to 

yuidc. 
dinronl inner,   v.a.n.   to  di-'<c^>htiinie. 

t.-  Un  'c  off. 
di.sconvenii.    v.u.   ir.    (187.  2S);i)    tn 

diHDiru.  tit  deny. 
disconrii*.  v.u.  ir.  (lS4i  to  ilu<r4nirx('. 
distiours,  H.  nx.  dixeanr-^e.  xj/etch,  lec- 

turt. 
disorotion.  s.f.  dincretifn. 
di.sculper,    v.a.      to     e,iculpate,    to 

etonemte. 
disjoindre,  v.a.  ir.  to  dixjtdn. 
disparaitre,    v.n.    ir.    (KKi.    178)   to 

diifoj^iear,  ttt  voniah.  lo  yo. 
diHpeuBer.    v.a.    to   ejewft,    to   difi- 

peioxc.  to  hext/iii)  ;  se  — ,  to  exempt 

o,iextlj\  lojoibior. 
disperser,   v.a.  to  dupeme,  to  scdt- 

ter. 
dispose.  8,  adj.  dixpoxcd.  inclined. 
disposer,   v.a.n.    to  dispose,   to  have 

at  c^rinmiiiid;  se  — ,  v.r.  topre]H(re. 

to  get  ready. 
di.sposition.  s  f.  disposition,  inclina- 

iitni^  tendency. 
di8f)ute,  s.f.  dispute,  dixcustdfm. 
diajtuter.    v.a.n.  to  dispute;  ae — , 

v.r.  to  sftrive  or  cx)ntend  for 
dissondre,  v.a.  ir.  (17o)  to  dissolve. 
diissuader,  v  a.  to  dixHua^ie. 
distance.  K.f.  diMonce. 
distii'^ier.    v.a.    to  dif<tingiii*h ;  Be 

— ,  v.r.  U>  dixtiugt  ish  onene^'. 


dJRtraire,  v.a.  ir.  (174)  to  awert^  to 

ohxtroct. 
distrait,  e,  adj.  inattentive,  absent. 
di.stribner.  v.a.  to  dixtribute. 
dit  e,  adj.  Slid,  socalUd. 
divers,  e.  adj.  different,  several. 
divertir.  v.a.  to  amuse,  to  divert 
divijiito,  s.f.  divinity,  deity. 
diviser.  v  a.  to  divide,  to  part. 
di.x..  adj.  s.ra.  ten,  tenth. 
dix  huit,  adj.  s.in.  eighteen. 
dix-huitiume.  adj.  eighteenth, 
dixionie.  adj.  s.m.  tenth, 
dix-neuf,  adj.  s.m.  nineteen. 
d:x-neuviome,  adj.  nineteenth. 
dix-sept,  adj.  s.ra.  seventeen,. 
diA-septieme,  adj.  seventeenth. 
dizaine,  s.f.  ten. 
doeilH,  adj.  docile,  manageable. 
dominant,  e,  adj.  ruling^  prevail- 
ing. 
doni  ucr,  v.a.n.   to  rule.,  to  get  over^ 

t(t  fredominate. 
domniage,    s.m.    damage,    injury^ 

wroug  ;  c'est  — ,  it  is  a  pity. 
doiupter.  v  a.  ^  subdvc^  to  tame. 
don.  s.m.  gift,  jrresent. 
done,    couj.    (1G4)    then,    therefore^ 

accordingly,    so,    do,    now,    con- 

xequfntly. 
donner,  v.a.n  (88)  to  give,  to  grant y 

to  eavse,  to  make,  to  look.,  to  open  ; 
"    (idioms,  382). 
dont,    pron.     (12(>,    268)  w?u?se,    of 

wlu/m,   from    whom,    of    which, 

from    which,    with  or  by   wlu/m, 

with  or  by  which,  in  which,  wfiom^ 

which. 
dorenavant,  adv.  Iienceforth. 
dorer,  v.a.  to  gild. 
dormant,  e,  adj.  sleeping,  stagnant, 

dull. 
dorniir,  v.n.  ir.  (183)  to  sleej)^  to  h4 

asleep. 
dos,  s.m.  back,  bridge. 
dose,  s.f.  doxe.  portUm. 
dot  s.f.  dfncry,  poi'tion 
double,  s.m.  adj.  double,  d-eceitfvl. 
doubler.  v.a.  to  double,  to  line. 
doiiceraent,    adv.    sweetly,    noflly^ 

gently 


402 


VOCABULARY. 


douceur,  s.f.  sweetness^  gentleness ; 

— s,  pi.  sweet  things. 
douer,  v. a.  to  e}id<ym,  to  gift. 
douleur,  s.f.  pain,  grief,  sorrow. 
douloureu-x,  se,   adj.  painful,  ten- 
der, save,  mournful. 
doute.    s.m.    doubt;    sans  — ,   no 

dmiht. 
douter,  v.n.a.    (293)   to    doubt,    to 

question,  to  distrust;  se — ,  v.r. 

to  susyect,  to  think. 
douteu-x,  se,  adj.  doubtful. 
Douvres,  s.m.  Dover. 
dou-x,   ce,   adj.    »weet,   soft,   mild, 

gentle. 
douzaine,  s.f.  dozen. 
douze,  adj.  s.  twe(,v€y  twelfth. 
douzierae,  adj.  s.iu.  twelfth. 
drap,  s.m.  clot7t,  sheet. 
dresser,  v.a.n.  to  erect,  to  raise,  to 

train  ;  se  — ,  v.r.   to  stand  up,  to 

start  up. 
droit,  e,  adj.  straight,  right. 
droit,  adv.  Htraight,  right,  directly ; 

tout  — ,  straight  on. 
droit,  s.m.  right. 
droite,  s.f.  right,  right  hand  ;  a  — , 

on  or  U>  the  right. 
du.  art.   m.    [contraction  of  de  le, 

art.  (34,  39)]. 
du,  due,  part,  of  devoir,  adj.    due, 

owing,  &c. 
due,  s  m.  duke. 
duchesse,  s.f.  duchess,  couch. 
duquel  |  contraction  of  de  lequel] . 
dur,    e,    adj.    hnrd,   firm,    tough, 

rough,  sharp. 
duree,  s.f.  duration. 
durement,  adv.  liard,  harshly. 
durer,  v.n.  to  Uist. 
durete,  s.f.  hardness,  harshness. 
duvet,  s.m.  down,  featJier-btd. 


E. 


eau   s.  f .  (30)  water  ;  — x,  pi.  water- 

ing-place. 
6chaj)])er,   v.n.   (136)  to  escape,  to 

get  out  ;  s'— ,  v.r.  to  escape. 


^chauffer,  v. a.  to  heat  to  warm; 
s'— ,  v.r.  to  get  warm,  to  get  re- 
cited. 

6choir,  v.n.  ir.  (136,  189)  to  fall. 

eclair,  s.  m.  lightning,  fash  ;  f  aire 
des  — 8,  to  lighten. 

eclaircir,  v.  a.  to  clear,  to  clear  up. 

eclairer,  v. a.  to  light,  to  enUg/iten^ 
to  thrmo  a  light  upon  ;  v.n.  to  give 
light. 

eclat,  s.m.  loud  sound  or  noise^ 
flash,  scandtd. 

eclatant,  e,  adj.  bright,  bnlliant^ 
splendid,  blooming,  glorious. 

eclater,  v.n.  to  shiver,  to  break  out ; 
—  de  rire,  Uf  hurst  out  laughing. 

eclore,  v.n.  ir.  (135,  198)  to  hatch, 
to  open. 

^cole,  s.f.  sclwol,  college. 

ecoli-er,  ere,  s.  m.f.  pupil,  student. 

economic,  8.f.  economy,  saving,  sys- 
tem. 

ecorce,  s.f.  bark,  rind. 

Gcossais,  e,  adj.  s.  Scotch,  Scotch- 
man, Scotchwoman. 

^cosse  (1'),  s.f.  Scathmd. 

ecouler  (s'),  v.r.  to  elapse,  to  pass. 

ecouter,  v.  a.  to  linten,  to  mind. 

ecraser,  v.  a.  to  crush,  to  acerwhdm. 

ecrevisse,  s.f.  crab. 

eerier  (s'),  v.r.  to  cry  out,  to  ex- 
claim. 

ecrire,  v. a.  ir.  (175)  to  write;  s' — , 
v.r.  to  wHte  to  each  other ;  to  be 
spelt. 

^crit,  s.m.  writing,  written  agree- 
ment; par  — ,  in  writing. 

6criture,  s.f.  writing^  handwriting. 

ecrivain,  s.m.  imiter,  author. 

ecrouler  (s'),  v.r.  to  fall  in  or  down. 

focueil,  s.m.  rock,  reef,  sand-bank, 
danger. 

6cumant,  e,  adj.  foaming. 

ecumer,  v.n.  to  foam  ;  v.  a.  to  skim. 

edifice,  s.m.  edifice,  structure. 

education,  s.f.  education,  training^ 
breeding, 

effacer,  v.  a.  to  efface,  to  era.se,  to 
blot  out. 

effet,  s.m.  effect,  intent,  show,  bill ; 
— 8,   pi.   eff'ects^   things,  luggage ; 


A  OCABULARY. 


403 


h  cet  — ,  for  thift  purpose  ;  h  V —  | 
de,  in  m'ckr  to  ;  en  — ,  iti  reality^  j 
indeed. 

effile,  e,  adj.  slender,  tapering.  \ 

eftorcer  (s')^  v.r.  to  exert  oneself,  to 
e/ia&ivor,  to  tri/. 

effort,  s.m.  exertion,  endeavor 

effrayer,  v.  a.  (97)  to  fricjhten,  scare.* 

6gal.  e,  adj.  s.  equal,  even,  level,  re- 
gular. 

^galement,  adv.  equally,  alike,  also, 
likeirise. 

6gard.  s.m.  regard,  respect,  a4i'/)vnt; 
a  cet  — ,  in  tlm  or  that  resj)ecf  ; 
a  r —  de,  regarding,  with  regard 
to,  as  for;  a  mon  — ,  ((/wards  me. 

^gare,  e,  adj.  atniy,  Umt. 

egarer,  v. a.  to  mislead,  to  disorder  ; 
s' — ,  v.r.  to  l«)se  one's  way. 

egayei,  v.  a.  to  fidicen,  toc/ieerup. 

egiisc,  p.f.  c/it/rch. 

elancer.  v.n  to  sfujot ;  b' — ,  v.r.  to 
rux/i,  to  .-^jirifig. 

^lecteur,  s.m.  ele^^tor. 

elephant,  s.m.  elejthont. 

elevo,  e,  adj.  part,  rained,  high,  ele- 
vated, bred. 

elever,  v.  a.  to  raise,  to  build,  to 
bring  up,  to  rear,  to  elevate. 

elire,  v. a.  ir.  (177)  to  elect,to  cJioose. 

Elise,  8.f.  Eliza. 

elle.  pron.  (110,  114,  258)  she,  her,  it; 
— 8,  pi.  they,  them;  —  -m<"'me, 
herself,  itself ;  — s-memes,  Viem- 
selces. 

elegance,  s.f.  elegance. 

f  oloigne.  e,  part.  adj.  distant. 

{eloigner,  v. a.  to  remove;  s' — ,  v.r. 
to  go  away,  to  leave. 

eloquerament,  adv.  eloquently. 

eloquence,  8.f.  eloquence. 

embarras,  s.m.  encumbrance,  em- 
barr((ssment,  confusion,  difficulty, 
scrape. 

embellir.  v.n.  s' — ,  v.r.  to  improve, 
to  jrorp  /uindsome. 

emblem*!.  8  ra.  emblem, 

embras.scr,  v. a  to  eiibracs.  to  hug, 
*o  hiss. 

femen^H.  s.f.  riot. 

einmuuer,  v.  a.  to  take  away. 


emoudre,  v.  a.  ir.  (175)  to  grind. 

emouvoir,  v.  a.  ir.  (11)0)  tx)  move,  to 
agitate^  to  stir  up,  to  rouse,  to 
affect  ;  s' — ,  v.r.  to  be  moced  or 
agitated,  &c. 

emparer  (s'),  v.r.  to  seize,  to  takt 
j)ossejfsion,  to  take  up, 

emp'cher,  v.  a.  (2i)4)  to  prevent,  to 
hinder. 

emperenr,  s.m.  emperor. 

empire,  8.m.  empire. 

empirer,  v.  a.  (iJiO)  to  make  worse. 

emploi,  s.m.  use,  employment. 

employer,  v.  a.  (97)  to  emptloy,  to 
use  ;  s' — ,  v.r.  to  apply  oneself. 

emporter,  v. a.  to  carry  away,  to 
bUyw  off,  to  take  ;  s' — ,  v.r.  to  fly 
into  a  passion, 

empresser  (s'),  v.r.  to  be  eager ^  to 
hasten. 

enipi-unter,  v. a.  to  boii'ow. 

emu.  e,  adj.  moved,  affected,  agi- 
tated. 

en,  prep.  (236,  297)  in,  into,  to^ 
in,  trith,  by,  at,  for. 

en,  pron.  m  *f .  (114.  120,  194,  241, 
258)  of  him,  of  hei;  of  it,  its,  of 
them,  theirs,  fnmi  him,  from  her, 
from  it,  from  them,  from  tJiere, 
by  him,  for  ity  on  that  account, 
with  them  ;  c' —  est  or  —  voila 
assez,  trop,  it  or  that  is  enough^ 
too  much. 

en-cas,  s.m.  sun-shade. 

enchanter,  v.  a.  to  enchant,  bewitch, 

encombre,  s.m.  hindrance. 

encombrer,  v.  a.  to  obstruct,  to  en- 
climber. 

encore,  adv.  conj.  still,  yet,  as  yet, 
again,  also,  too,  more,  stiU  inore, 
another. 

encourager,  v.  a.  to  encoder  age,  to 
incite. 

encourir,  v.  a.  ir.  (184)  to  incur. 

en  ere,  s.f.  ink. 

encrier,  s  m.  inkstayid. 

endormi,  e,  adj.  adeep. 

endormir,  v.  a.  ir.  (18:^)  to  send  to 
sleep  ;  s'  — ,  v.  r.  to  fUl  asleep,  to 
go  p>  sleep. 

endioit,  s.m.  place,  part. 


404 


VOCABULARY. 


enduire.  v.  a.  ir.  (172)  to  lay  over,  to 

pl/iffter. 
endurcir,  v.  a.  to  harden,  to  inure. 
enfant,  s.m.f.  child,  infant. 
enfer,  a.m.  7ieU. 
enferraer,  v.  a.  to  shut,  to  shut  up 

or  i>i. 
entin,  adv.  lastly,  in  sliort,  at  last, 

at  length. 
en f oncer,  v. a,    to  sink,  to  thrust,  to 

stick,  to  drive  in. 
eiifreindre,  v. a.  ir.  (175)  to  infringe. 
enfuir  (s),  v.r.   ir.  (183)  to  flee,  to 

ran  away,  to  fly. 
engager,  v.  a.  to  pledge,   to  engage, 

to  induce;  s' — ,  v.r.  to  pledge,  &c., 

oneself. 
enhardir,  v.  a,  to  embolden. 
enivrer.  v. a.  to  intoxicttte. 
enjoindre,  v.  a.  ir.  (175)  to  enjoin. 
*^nlever.  v.  a.  to  lift,  to  raite.  to  take 

nicay.  to  remone,  to  take  or  carry 

aioay  or  off. 
ennemi.  e,  s.m.f.  enemy. 
ennerai,  e,  adj.  hoxtile.  of  the  enemy. 
ennui,  s.m.    tedhasness,  weariness, 

d'/lr^esM. 
fenorj-ueillir,  v.  a.  to  make  proud. 
enonne,  adj.  enormons.  huge. 
dnorinement.  adv.  enornioudy. 
enquarir   (s'),    v.r.    ir.   (188)  to  in- 
quire, to  link. 
enrage,  e.  adj.  rnad.  enraged. 
enrager,  v.n.  to  be  mad  or  enraged. 
enrharaer  is'),  v.r.  to  catch  cold. 
enrichir,   v. a.   to  enrich;  s' — ,  v.r. 

to  get  rich. 
•{•enseigne,  8.m.  ensign. 
fenseigne,    s.f.    sign,    sign-board; 

— s,  pi.  cohrs. 
fenseigner.  v.a,  ^  teach,  instruct. 
ensemble,  adv.  together,  at  the  same 

tifue. 
ensalte,     adv.    after,     afterwards. 

thfit.  next. 
ensuivre  is'),  v.r.  ir.  (174)  to folk>w, 

to  eiixae. 
entendre,  v.  a    to  hear.  ^/  listen  to. 

to  uiider>iiiih,d  ;       din-;,  to  henir  it 

Haid ;   faire    --.   to  i/ire  to  ander- 

atoiid ;    s'   -,    v.r.    ti>   hear  each 


«tlier,  to  understand,  to  come  to 

or   U)   have    an    understanding ; 

s'entend,  or  cela  s'entend,  that  i% 

understood,  of  coiir.se. 
entendu,  e,  part.  adj.  heard,  binder- 

sPjod.  agreed  ;  bien  — ,  of  c<jurse  ; 

—  (que),  on  condition  {that). 
euttter,    v. a.    ttf  infatwite;    s' — , 

v.r.  to  get  obstinate. 
ent-ier,  ere,  adj.  entire,  whole. 
entours,  s.m.  pi.  neigJiborhood. 
en-tout-cas,  8.m.  sun-nhade. 
entr'acte,  s.m.  interval  between  the 

acts. 
fentraillcs,  s.f.  pi.  entrail%  boicds. 
entrainer,   v.  a     to  carry   away,    to 

draw,  to  invoice. 
entre,    prep.    ^298,    800)     between, 

among,  in.  into. 
entrje.    s.f    entrance.,   entry,  going 

in.  introdurtion.  admission',  droit 

d' — .  import -duty. 
entrefaites.  s  f.  pi.    sur  ces  — ,  in 

the  midst  of 'all  this. 
entreprendre,    v.a.    ir.   (181)  to  un- 
dertake, to  attempt. 
entreprise,  s.f.   undertaking,  enter- 
prise. 
entrer,  v.n.  (136)  to  enter,  to  go  in, 

to  come  in.   to  walk  or  step  in  ; 

faire  — ,  to  let  in,  ask  or  shoio  in. 
entretenir,  v.a.  ir.  (187)  to  hold  to- 
gether, to  keep  up.  to  entertain; 

s' — ,  v.r.  to  converse. 
entrevoir,  v.a.   ir.    (11)2)  to  have  a 

glimpse  of.  to  perceive ;  s' — ,  v.r. 

have  an  interview,  to  meet. 
entr'ouvrir,    v.a.    ir.    (185)   to  half 

open,   to  put  ajar ;  s' — ,  v.r.    U 

half -open,  to  be  ajar. 
en  vers,  prep.  (250,  21)9)  towards,  to 
envi  (a  Y).  prep.  adv.   in  emalatior. 

of  {e/ich  other,. 
envie,  s.f.  envy,  inclination,  fancy 

avoir  — de.  to  want,  to  feel  dis 

posed  to  :  poxter  —  a,  tf}  envy. 
envier.  v.a.  to  envy,  to  grudge. 
environ,  adv.  alMnit.  , 

environner,  v.a.  to  surround. 
environs,    .s.m.    pi.  country  round. 

neighbor JuMjd. 


VOCABULARY. 


405 


envoyer,   v.  a.   ir.    (194)  to  send,  to 

forwiii'd. 
epais,  se,  adj.  thicks  heavy. 
cpaisseur,  8.f.  thichtietH,  depth. 
<  pauouir,  v.  a.  to  exjfoad,  tff  blmo. 
fjpargner.  van   to  saoe^  to  apare. 
epaule,  s.f.  shoulder. 
cpje,  8.  f.  MiCord. 
epicerie,  s.f.  grocery. 
epiiie.  s.f.  th>rn. 
cj)ingle,  s.f.  'pia. 
cpocpie,  s.f.  epoch,  era,  time. 
epouse,  8.f.  s]}oii.te,  wife. 
fepouvautail,  s.m.  Kcurecroio. 
e]^ouvant«r.  v  a.  to  friyhte/i. 
epoux,   s.m    h'tMhiiud,  /fpome ;  — , 

pi.  hiiitbaud  <in,d  mfe. 
epreuve,  s.f    triid.  proof;  d  toute 

— ,  weil-tried,  naxhukvii. 
oprouver,  v.  a.  to  try.  Uf  ejuperieiice, 

to  fed. 
^puiser.  v.a.  tft  ex/uiust,  to  utst  up. 
6(iuateur.  s.m.  eqmitor. 
equation,  s.f.  eiiuatlon. 
equilibre,  s.m.  equUihriam. 
Equipage,  8.m.  equipage,  carnage, 

ere  ID. 
cqiiiper,  v.a.  to  fit  out.  to  equip. 
equit;itiou,  s.f.  liorHeniannhip. 
eireur.  s  f.  error,  rimtake. 
m   [contraction  of  en  lesj  (300)  <?/; 

bachelier  es-lettres,   bachelor   of 

arts. 
escalier,  s.m.  staircane,  stairs. 
escarp J,  e,  adj.  steep. 
escorte,  s.f.  escort,  convoy. 
+E.spagne  (1'),  8.f.  Spain. 
JEspagnol,  e,  adj.  Spanish,   Span- 
iard. 
ospoce,  s.f.  species,  kind,  sort. 
esperance,  8.f.  hope,  expectation. 
esperer,  v.a.n.  (97)  to  Iiope. 
espoir,  s.m.  Iiope,  expectation. 
esprit,  s.m   tfjiiiit,  glu>nt.   mind,  in- 

teilrct.    braiim ;    —    fort,    frte- 

thin  ker,    neeptic ;    bel    — ,     mit  ; 

homme  d' — .  witty  or  clever  vuiu. 
esquiver  (s'^  v.r.  U>  xteal  awity. 
p'*'^ai,  8.m.  triid,  titte/npt. 
bfsn  liin,  s.m.  swarm. 
etinnyeif  v.a.n.  to  try,  to  try  on,  to 


attempt  ;  s' — ,  v  r.  to  ti'y  one^i 
hand  or  skill  or  strength. 

essentiel,  le,  adj.  essential. 

easuie-maius,  8.m.  towd. 

essuyer,  v.a.  (97)  to  wipe,  to  wipe 
of. 

estimer,  v.a.  to  value,  to  esteem. 

estomac,  s.m.  stomach. 

et.  couj.  a/id  ;  —  .  .  .  et,  both  .  .  . 
and. 

6tablir,  v.a,  to  establish,  to  lap 
d(npn,  to  set  up. 

dtablissement,  s.m.  establishment. 

ctage,  s.m.  story,  floor,  flat. 

etat.  8.m.  state,  condition,  predica- 
ment, calling,  trade ;  en  —  de» 
in  a  couditUm  or  able  to;  hors 
d' — ,  untible;  faire  —  de,  f/>  value; 
mettre-eu  —  de,  to  enable  to. 

Etats-Unis  (les),  pi.  tlie  United 
States. 

t'to  8.m.  Hammer. 

eteindre,  v.a.  ir.  {170}  to  extinguish, 
to  put  out. 

etendre.  v.a.  to  extend,  to  stretch; 
s' — ,  V.  r.  to  lie  doiPn. 

etendu,  e,  adj.  extennice,  lying  down. 

oternel.  le,  adj.  eternal,  crerlasting. 

etotfe.  s.f.  xtujf,  materials. 

etoile.  s.f.  tttar. 

etonn6,  e,  adj.  lutonished. 

etonnement,  s.m.  astonishment^ 
wonder. 

ctonaer,  v.a.  to  astonuh:  s' — ,  v.r. 
to  be  astonished,  to  wonder. 

dtoiiffer,  v.a.  to  suffocate,  to  stifle^ 
to  smother,  to  choke. 

6traugler,  v.a.n.  P^  strangle. 

etre,  v.n.  (54,  58)  to  be,  to  exist,  to 
?uioe,  to  belong  ;  ce  qui  en  est, 
aU  about  it;  m' eat  que,  it  is  or 
was  because,  the  fact  w  /  ce  n'est 
pas  que,  not  th'it;  comme  side 
rien  n'otait.  as  if  nothing  had 
happened ;  en  —  de  .  .  .  c-omrae 
de.  pj  be  with  .  .  .  a.s  iQith  ;  esb-ce 
que,  \^^^)  is  it  {true  or  a  factt  Umt ; 
il  e.st.  there  in,  there  are;  n'est-tso 
pjisV  is  it  not  (Hit)  ?  y  — ,  to  luivi 
hit  it.  to  see  it ;  (idioms,  38J' 

itre,  .-.m.  being. 


406 


VOCABULARY. 


etroit,    e,   adj.    narrow^    straight^ 

tight. 
etude,  s.f.  study  ;  salle  d' — ,  school- 

roo7n. 
eiudiant,  s,m.  student. 
eludier,  v.a.n.  to  study,  to  practise; 

s' — ,  v.r.  to  etideaTor. 
eux,   pron.   m.pl.   {\U))  they,  them; 

—  mt'mes,  themaelve^'i. 
f  cveiller,  v.  a.  to  awake,  to  awaken, 

to  I'ouae. 
evenement,  s.m.  ment. 
fcventail,  s.m.  (31)/c7W-. 
evertuer  (s'),  v.r,  to  ntrive,  to  exert 

onenelf. 
tviter,  v.a.  to  avoid,  to  shun . 
exact,  e,  adj.  exacts  nccurate. 
examiner,  v.a.  to  examine,  look  at. 
excellent,  e,  adj.  exoeUeni. 
exceller,  v.  n.  to  excel,  to  surpass. 
fxcepti'.  prep,  exceft,  xare. 
exciter,  v  a.  ta  excte,  to  roune. 
excuser,  v.a.   to  e.rcvHe.  U>  apologize 

for  ;  s' — ,  v.r.  to  excuse  o'lte^^e'f^  to 

apologize,  to  beg  to  be  excuHnl. 
executer.   v.a.   to  execute,  to  carry 

out,  to  perform. 
execntion,  s.f.  execution. 
exempie,  s.m.   example,  copy ;  par 

— .  fo7'  instance,  indeed. 
exempt,  e,  adj.  exempt,  free. 
exempter,  v.a   t^}  exempt. 
exercer,  v.a.  to  exercise,  to  practise, 

to  drill. 
exercice,   s.m.    exercise,    practice; 

faire  1' — ,  to  drill. 
exhaler,   v.a.    to  exhale,   to  breathe 

out ;  s' — ,  v.r.  to  coine  out,  (872) 

take  flight. 
exhorter,  v.a,  to  exhort. 
exhumer,  v.a.  to  exhvme,  to  disinter. 
exigeant,    e,    adj.    too    difficult   to 

please,    too  particular,   expecting 

too  much,  exacting. 
exiger,  v. a.  to  require,  to  demand, 

to  exact. 
exil,  s.m.  eaile. 
exiler,  v.a.  t(*  exile,  to  banish. 
existence,  s.  f.  existence. 
exister,  v.n.  to  ea-ist.  to  be.  to  lire. 
expier,  v.a.  to  expiate,  to  atone  for. 


exposer,  v.a.  to  expose,  to  exhibit,  to 

explain. 
expros,  se,  adj.  s.m.  express. 
expres,  adv.  purposely,  on  purpose. 
expressement,  adv.  expressly. 
exqiiis,  e,  adj.  exguinte. 
extraire,  v.a.  ir.  (174)  to  ext/ract,  to 

.select. 
extraordinaire,  adj,   extraordinary, 

unc^yintnon. 
extraordinaire,  s.m,    extraordinary 

or  unusuid  thing. 
extremement,  adv.  extremely. 
extremite,  s.f.  extremity  ;  a  1' — ,to 

extremity,  to  the  last  mo7nent 


F. 


Fable,  s.t.  fable,  story. 
fac^ade,  s.t  front,  face. 
fuche.    e,    adj.    ( —   centre)    angr^ 

{with)  ;  ( —  de,  en)  sorry  (for,  for 

it). 
facher,    v.a.     to    make    angry ^    to 

offend,  to  vex ;  se  — ,  v.r.    to  get 

or  to  be  angry,  to  take  offence. 
fdcheu-x,   se,    adj.    grievous,    sad, 

troublesome,     unpleasant,     vexa- 
tious. 
facheuy.  s.m.  intruder,  bare. 
facile,  adj.  easy. 
facilement,  adv.  easily. 
facilite,  s.f.  ease,  facility. 
fayon,    s.f.    workmanship,  fashion, 

shape,   manner,    way,   cet'emony, 

fuss. 
faible,  adj.  weak,  feeble. 
faible,  s.m,  weak  side,  weakness. 
faiblesse,  s.f.  weakness. 
ffaillir,  v.n.   ir.  (198)  to  err,  to  be 

nmtaken,,  to  fail,  to  be  near  or  on 

the  point  of. 
faim,    s.f.  hanger ;  avoir  — ,  to  bt 

hungry. 
faire,  v.u.n.  ir.  (180)  to  make,  P)  d/>, 

to  go.  on,  to  be,  to  a^k,  to  give,  to 


VOCABULARY. 


407 


play,  to  act,  to  cause,  to  get,  to 
Jidve,  to  pay ;  avoir  a  —  de,  ^ 
wanU     to    haoe    occasion    for ; 

—  dire,  to  send  word;  il  fait 
chaud,  doux,  froid,  jour,  it  is 
warm  or  hot,  mild,  cold,  daylight; 
cela  fait  du  bien,  tJmt  does  (one) 
good;  cela  ne  fait  rien,  that 
makes  no  difference,  neoer  mind  ; 
ne  —  que  (304)  -to  do  nothing 
but;  ne  —  que  de  (sortir,  &c.) 
to  Jmve  or  be  bat  juxt  [gone  oat. 
<fcc. ) ;  pour  quoi  —  ?  ictuU  for  ? 
comment  —  ?  ichat  is  or  was  to  be 
dune?  se  — ,  v.r.  to  be  done  or 
made,  to  take  place,  to  be,  to  be- 
come, to  form  ;  (idioms,  881). 

faisceau,  a.m.  bundle. 

fait,  e,  part.  ( V.  faire)  made,  done, 
calculated. 

fait,  s.m.  fact,  deed,  act,  feat. 

falloir,  v.u.  ir.  (147,  190)  iinpers.  to 
bo  necessary  or  requisite,  must,  to 
be  obliged,  sfi/ndd-.  ought,  to  icaat, 
must  have  ;  il  faut  que  jc  sorte, 
J  must  go  out ;  il  le  taut,  it  muxt 
be  so,  it  must  be  dftuc;  comme  il 
faut,  as  it  shotdd  be,  re.fi>icta.hle, 
proper  ;  s'en  — ,  v.r.  to  be  ntar; 
j)eu  s'en  faut,  tiery  near,  very 
lu'urly. 

fameu-x,  se,  B.d'] .  f ambits ,  first-rate. 

ffamille,  s.f.  family. 

faon,  s.m.  fawn. 

fardeau,  e.m.  burden,  load,  wdght. 

farine,  a.f.  Jtour. 

fat,  adj.  B.m.  (25)  foppish,  fop. 

fatal,  e,  adj.  fatal. 

fatigue,  B.t.  fatigue,  we/irine^s.  toil. 

f atiguer,  v.  a.  to  fatigue,  to  tire,  to 
wear  out,  to  worry;  se — ,  v.r. 
to  get  tired. 

faute,    s.f.  fault,   error,   mistake; 

—  de,  for  want  of. 
ffauteuil.  s.m,  easy -chair. 

faux,    Bse,    adj.    fase,     deceitful, 

f urged,  out  of  tune. 
faux,  adv.  fdxely,  wrong. 
favoris^r,  v. a.  tofavoi'. 
fxicopd,  e,  i}/!].  fruitful,  teeming. 
fccondfjr,  v.  a.  to  fecundute,  fertilize 


feindre,  »a.n.  ir.  (175)  to  feign,  to 

pretend. 
foiiciter.  v.  a.  to  congratulate, 
f emolle,  s.  f .  {idj.  female. 
femme,   s.f.    woman,   wife;  — de 

chambre,  lady's-maid. 
fendre.  v.a.n.  to  cleave,  to  split. 
feuotre,  s.f.  window, 
fer,    s.m.    iron.,    sword;    — s,    pi. 

chains,  fetters  ;  fil  de  — ,  wire. 
fer-blanc,  s.m.  tin. 
*  forir,  v.a.  ir.   (198),  sans  coup — , 
'witlout  striking  a  blow. 
ferrae,  adj.. /i>//i,  steady,  strong. 
ferme,  adv.  fa^t,  /lard,  firmly. 
!  fermer,  v.a.n.   to.  shut,  to  close,  to 
I     fasten,  to  spyp. 
I  fermete,  s.  f.  firmness. 
'.  feroce,  adj.  ferocious,  wild. 
I  f orocitc,  s.  f .  ferocity. 
fertile,  adj.  fertile,  fruitful. 
fertilito,  s.f  fertility,  fruitfulness. 
fe«l,on,  B  \n.  fextoon,  scdlo^p. 
f(jtc.    R.f.   feast,    holiday,  birthday, 
I      saints'  day  ;  jour  de — ,  holiday. 
f  "te-diea,  s.f.  Corpus  Christi. 
feu,   s.m.    (?}())  fire,    light;  au — ! 
i     fire  !   faire  du  — ,  to  make  afire. 
feu,  e,  adj.  ('247)  late,  decdised. 
ffenille.  s.f.  leaf,  sheet. 
i  feve,  s.f.  bean. 
Fevrier,  s.m.  February. 
fid'le,  adj.  fadthfal,  true. 
fidelement,  adv.  faithfuUy. 
fidclit'-,  s.t  fidelity,  loyalty. 
fier  (se).  v.r.  to  trust,  to  rely. 
fievre,  s.f.  fever. 

figurer,  v.a.  to  figure;  v.n.  to  match, 
to  make  a  figure ;  se — ,  v.r.  to 
imagine,  to  fancy. 
fil.  s.m.  threiui,  yarn. 
filer,  v.a.  to  spin. 
ffille,  s.f.  girl,  daughter ;  petite  — , 

granddaughter. 
fils,  8.  m.  son,  boy  ;  petit ,  grand- 
son. 
fin,  s.  f .  end,  close,  aim  ;   h,  la  — ,  at 

last. 
fin,  e,  adj.  fine,  thin,  refined,  excel.' 
lent,    keen,     shrewd,    sly;     — es 
herbes,  sweet  herbs. 


408 


VOCABULARY. 


Bui.  e,  adj.  finished,  d&ne,  over. 

finir,  v.a.n.  (100)  to  finisli^  to  end, 
to  hate  dime. 

fixe,  adj.  fixed,  firm,  steady. 

fixer,  v.a.  to  fix.  to  stare  at. 

flannne,  s.L  flame. 

flatter,  v.a.  to  fi.itter,  to  caress; 
se — ,  v.r.  to  flatter  oneself  ,  trust. 

fldtterie,  s.f.  flattery. 

flatteu-r,  se,  adj.  s.  flattering.,  flat- 
terer. 

fleche,  s.f.  arrow. 

flegme,  s.m.  pUegm. 

fljtrir,  v.a.  to  wither. 

fleur,  8  t.  flower,  blossom,  bloom. 

tieuri,  e,  adj.  florid,  in  hloftaom. 

Jlenrir,  v.n.  to  flower,  to  blossom. 

lieuve,  s.  m.  (great)  river,  stream. 

florin,  s.m.  florin. 

florir,  v.a.  (102)  to  flourish. 

flot,  a.  m.  'wave,  tide,  fi/ood,  torrent. 

flute,  s.f,  flute. 

foi,  s.f.  faith,  belief,  trii-nt,  creed ; 
ajouter  —  a,  to  give  credit  to,  to 
believe. 

foin,  s.m.  hay. 

fois,  s.f.  time;  une — ,  once,  once 
upon  a  time ;  deux  — ,  twice ;  a 
la  — ,  tout  a  la  — ,  at  a  time,  at 
the  same  time. 

fol,  le,  adj.      V.  fou. 

follement,  adv.  madly,  foolishly. 

fonco,  e,  adj   dm-k,  deep. 

fond,  s.m.  bottom,  depth,  farthest 
end  or  part,  background  ;  a  — , 
thoroughly  ;  au  — ,  dans  le  — ,  on 
the  whole,  in  one?s  heart. 

fondement,  s.m.  foundation. 

fonder,  v.a.  to  lay  the  foundation  of , 
to  found. 

fondre,  v.a.n.  to  melt,  to  cast. 

fontaine,  s  f .  fomitairt,,  spring. 

force,  s.f,  .streagth,  might,  power, 
frrce.  energy ;  — s,  pi.  strength, 
troojis ;  a  —  de.  by  .strength  of, 
by  7nuch,  by  many,  by  dint  of. 

forcer,  v.a.  to  farce,  to  compel. 

forot,  s.f.  fm-est. 

forger,  v.a.  to  forge. 

forme,  s.f.  shape,  figure,  manner, 

former,  v.a.  tQf</rm^  to  9h".pe, 


fort,  e,  adj.  strong,  stout,  large^ 
hard. 

fort,  adv.  vei'y,  very  much,  strongly., 
hard ;  —  bien,  very  well. 

forte-piano,  s.m.  i2\o}  pianofoj'te. 

forteresse.  s  f.  fortre.'is. 

fortune,  s.f.  luck,  wealth,  property. 

fosse,  s.m,  ditch. 

f  >u,  fol,  m.  folle,  f.  adj.  mad,  fool- 
ish. 

fou,  8,m'.,  folle,  s.f.  madman,  mad- 
woman. 

fourcbette,  8.f.  fork;  dejeuner  a 
la  — ,  lunch. 

fourmi,  s.f.  ant. 

ffourmiller,  v.n.  to  swarm,  tobefvR. 

fournil,  s.m.  bake-house. 

fouruir,  v.a.  to  furnUh,  to  supply. 

f ourrure,  s.  f .  fur. 

fracas,  s.m.  crash,  uproar,  din^ 
noi'<e,  fuss. 

fraicheur,  s.f.  freshness,  coolness. 

frais,  fraicbe,  adj.  fresh,  cool. 

frais,  s.m.  pi.  expenses,  cJiarges. 

f raise,  s.f.  strawberry. 

framboise,  s.f.  raspberry. 

franc,  s.  ra.  franc. 

franc,  francbe,  ad],  free,  frank. 

Fran^ais,  e,  adj.  s.  French,  French- 
imin.  Frenchwoman. 

francbe luent,  ads.  freely,  candidly. 

franchir,  v.a.  to  leap  or  jump  ooer^ 
t<>  cross. 

Francois,  s.m.  Francis. 

f  rapper,  v.  an.  to  strike,  to  knacky 
to  rap,  to  imprej<s. 

fremir.  v.n.  to  shudder,  to  shake,  to 
tremble. 

frere,  s.m.  brother. 

frire,  v.a.n.  def.  ir.  (198)  to  fry; 
f  aire  — ,  to  fry. 

froid,  e,  adj   cold,  frigid,  cool. 

froid,  s  m.  col  I.  coolness. 

fro  mage,  s  m    cheese. 

front,  s.m.  forehead,  brow,  froTU^ 
impudence. 

frontiere,  s.f.  ad],  frontier,  border^ 

f rotter,  v.a.  to  rub,  to  polish. 

fruit,  s.m.  fruit,  residt. 

fruitier,  ier(i,  adj.  fruit. 

fugiti-f,  ve,  adj.  s.  fuigtiv«. 


V0CABULAR7. 


409 


fuir,  v.n.a.  ir.  (183  to  jlee^  to  fly^ 
to  run,  a  way. 

fnite,  8.  f .  flight,  escape. 

fumoe,  s.t".  sinoke. 

fumer,  v.a.n.  to  mioke,  to  fume. 

funobre,  adj.  funeral,  disirmi. 

ffuueniilles,  s.f.  pi.  funeroL 

fureur,  s.f.  fury,  luiye. 

furieu-x,  se,  adj.  s.  furious^  en- 
raged. 

fusil,  s.in.  gun,  miisket. 


gage,  8.m.  pledge,  pawn;  — a,  pi. 
toage:<,  jmt/. 

fg^^^ner,  v.a.n  to  gain,  to  enrn.  to 
iniii^  tf>  obtain. 

gai,  e.  adj.  gay,  lively,  c/ieerful, 
merry. 

gaiete,  sf.  gaiety,  mirth. 

gant,  s.ra.  gl>/c€,  gauntlet. 

garantie,  s  f.  guarantee^  security. 

garautir,  v.  a.  to  gimraatee,  lo  mar- 
rant. 

gar<,on,  s-m.  Ixpy,  f>fic/wU/r,  waiter. 

garde,  s  f.  guard,  icatGli  ;  n'avoir 
—  de,  to  be  far  from  ;  prendre 
— ,  (291 J  to  take.  aire,  he  careful. 

garde,  s.m.  guard,  kee^^er,  watch- 
man; —  -fous,  s.m.  rail. 

garder.  v.  a.  to  keejt.  to  guw  d;  se  — , 
v.r.  to  shelter  oaeaelf,  to  beware, 
to  take  care  not  to. 

ganiir,  v.  a.  to  furninh,  to  trim. 

gamison,  8.f.  garri.'ion. 

g  teau,  s.m.  cake. 

g  ter,  v.a  to  ^oil,  to  corrupt. 

gauche,  adj.  left. 

gauche,  s.f.  left  hand,  left  (tide,  left; 
h  — ,  on  or  to  the  left. 

g'^ler,  v.a.n.  to  freeze. 

gemir,  v.n,  to  yrtMin.,  to  lament. 

gfcmissement,  s.m.  groan,  lamenta- 
titja. 

4fene,  s-f.  inconvenience,  const/raint; 
s&ns  — ,  free,  eatty. 
18 


gt'ncr,  v.a.  to  inconvenience,  to 
trouble,  to  be  in  the  way  of ;  so 
— ,  v.r.  to  HtAind  on  ceremony. 

general,  e,  adj.  general. 

genereusement,  adv.  generously^ 
nobly 

genereu-x.  se.  adj.  generous. 

G.nes,  s.f.  Genoa. 

Geneve,  s.f.  Geneva. 

gt'uie,  s.m.  genius^  spirit. 

genou,  8.  m.  knee  ;  — x,  pi.  knees^ 
Itip. 

genre,  s.m.  kind,  sort,  style,  gender. 

gens,  s.m.  pi.  f.  (207)  people^  per* 
HotM,  men.  servants. 

gentil,  le,  adj.  nice,  pretty. 

gcographie,  s  f .  geogra/phy. 

gosir,  v.n.  ir.  def.  (198).      V.   git, 

geste,  e.m.  gesture, 

gibet,  8.m.  gaUoics. 

gibier,  s.m.  game. 

g.t  (19>),  lien  ;  ci ,  here  lies, 

glace,  s.f.  ice,  looking -glaSs. 

glace,  e.  adj.  frozen,  icy. 

glapiHsant,  e,  adj.  i220)  shriU. 

gliaser,  v.n.a.  to  dip,  to  slide. 

gloire,  s.f.  gl(^ry. 

glorieu  x,  se.  adj.  s.  glorious,  proud. 

glorifier,  v.a.  to  glorify  ;  ae — ,  v.r. 
t<f  boaH  {of ). 

gnomon,  s  m.  gnomon. 

gorge,  s.f.  throat. 

gousse.  s.f.  jiod,  husk. 

go.t.  a.m.  taMe. 

goutte,  8.  f .  drop,  gout. 

goutte,  adv.  at  aJl ;  ne  voir  — ,  n'y 
voir  — ,  njot  to  see,  at  all. 

f-gouvernail,  s.m.  rudder,  helm. 

gouvemante,  s.f.  governess,  house- 
keeper. 

gouvemement.  s.m.  government. 

gouvemer,  v.a.n.  to  gorern,  to  rule. 

gouvemeur,  s.m.  govei'nor. 

grace,  s.f.  grace,  favor,  mercy  gracr,- 
fulnexs,  charm,  thanks,  oinitig ; 
— 8.  pi  graces,  grace  ;  faire  —  a, 
Pt  forgive,  to  panlou;  faire  une 
— ,  to  do  a  favor  ;  faire  —  de,  to 
forgive,  to  spare. 

gracieusement,      adv.      graciously, 

I     kindly. 


410 


VOCABULARY. 


gracien-x,  se,   adj.   gracious^  kmd, 

g racefiiL  'ple( ma nt . 
grammaire,  s.f.  gramma ?: 
grand,  e,  adj.  great,  large,  big^  tall, 

grand,   broads   wide;  — 8,  s.    pi. 

gre-it  people. 
graii'cas.      V.  cas. 
grandeur,  s.f.  greatne,ss. 
granJir.  v.n,  (VSii)  to  grow,  increase. 
grand'niere,  s.f.  graudrrudJier. 
grand-i)6re,  s.m.  grandfather. 
f^rand'roxite,  s.  f.  highroad. 
grand' nie,  s.f.  main  nit  eel. 
graud'tante.  8.  f.  great-aunt. 
gras,  se,  adj.  fat,  phunp;  dormir  la 

—  matinee   to  lie  hite  in  bed. 
grave,  adj.  grace,  serunm. 
graver,  v  a.  to  engrave. 
gravir,  v.n. a    to  climb. 

grc.  s.  m.  good  will,  will,  taftte,  mind; 
a  son  — .  at  o.\'(  ■pleaHiire;  au  — 
de,  accordi/ig  U* ;  savoir  —  or  bon 

—  de,  *t(>  he  obliged,  or  tluinkful  or 
grafeful  for,  to  take  kindly; 
savoir  mauvais  —  de,  to  take  ill 
or  unkindly  ;  se  savoir  bon  —  de, 
to  be  pleased. 

Grec,  que.  adj.  s    Grecinn,  Greek. 

Groce  (la),  s.f.  Greece. 

gr  ler,  v.n.  to  hail. 

gril,  8.ni.  gridiron. 

fj^rriller,  v.a.n.  tt^  broil,,  to  tonM. 

griraper,  v.n  a.  to  climb,  to  creep. 

fgrogner.  v.n.  to  grunt,  to g ramble. 

gronder,  v.a.n.  ttf  grnndde,  to  .scold. 

gro.s.  ae,  adj.  big,  large. 

gros,  adv.  much  ;  en  — ,  wlMlesale. 

fgro.seille,  s.f.   currant,  gooseberry. 

gross- ier,  lire,  adj.  coarse,  rough. 

grotte,  s.f.  grotto,  grot. 

groupe,  s.m.  group. 

guore,    adv.   (57)   (ne  .  .  .    — )   jhot 

much,  ftot  very,  nothng,  hat  little, 

hardly. 
giierir.  v.a.n.  to  cure,  to  heal,  t^o  re- 
guorisoa,  s.f.  cure,  recovery .    [cover. 
gu^'rre.  s.f.  war.  warfare. 
gui'l<'..  s  m. t   guide,  rein. 
gnider.  v.  a.  t>  guide,  to  direct. 
^Gu.Uriume.  «  in.  WUliain. 
i>«iiu»;e,  !*  i.  gai.ne<i. 


H. 

'7/  thus   preceded  by  an  inrerted 
comma  is  asjdrate. 

habile,  adj.  able,  clever,  skUfvl. 

fhabiller,  v.  a.  to  dreas. 

habit,  s.m.  cont,  garment,  clothes. 

habitant,  e,  s.m.f.  inhabitant,  resi 
dent,  inmate. 

habiter,  v.a.n.  to  inhabit,  to  occupy, 
to  lice  in,  to  live. 

habitude,   s.f.    habit,  custom,  prac- 
tice ;  d' — ,  '-usually. 

habittier,  v.  a.  to  accustom,  to  inure. 

'hablHr,  v.n.  to  boast. 

*  hi  bleu -r,  .se,  s.m.f.  boaster. 

'hache.  s.f.  axe,  hatchet;  —  d'armes, 
battle-axe. 

'hagard.  e.  adj.  haggard. 

f  h.iillun.  s.m.  rag. 

'haine.  s.f.  hatred,  s-pite. 
hair,  v. a.  (102)  to  hate. 

'haire,  s.f.  Juiir-shirt. 

"h  le,  s.m.  Jiot  or  sultry  air. 

•halle.  s^X  market. 

'hallebarde.  s  f.  halberd. 

'hallier,  s.m.  thicket. 

'halte,  s.f   halting-pla>ce. 

'hameau,  s.m.  hamlet. 

•hanche,  s  f.  hip. 

'hangar,  s.m.  shed. 

'hanneton,  s.m.  cockchafer. 

'Ilanovre  (le).  s.m.  Hanover. 

'hauter,  v. a  to  frequent. 

'harangue,  s.f.  speech,  address. 

'haranguer,    v. a.    to    harangue,    bo 
addre^ss. 

'haras,  s.m.  breeding-stud. 

'harasser,  v. a.  to  harass. 

'harceler,  v.  a.  to  harass. 

'harde,  s.f.  herd,  leash. 

'hardes,  s.f.  pi.  cMhes. 

'hardi,  e,  adj.  bold,  d<rring. 

'hardiesse.    8.f.     boldness,    couragt^ 
Ibrty. 

'harenj?.  s.m.  herring. 

f  •hari^n'm  X,  se.  adj.  Hurljf. 

•haric(;t.  s.ui.  bean. 

'haridelle,  s-f.   fade. 


VOCABULARY. 


411 


•hamaifi,  8.  m.  harness. 

'harpe,  s.  f.  Inn-jh 

'harpie,  s.f.  harpy. 

'hasard.  s.  in.  clunice ;  par  — ,  hy 
chiHce. 

'hasarder,  v. a.  to  hazard^  to  venture. 

*h.  le,  s.f.  lu'.i^te. 

'h.ttcr,  v.a.  to  hixten,;  se  — ,  v.r,  to 
luisten.  ti>  nuike  huste. 

'hausser,  v.a.  to  raij<e. 

'haul,  e,  adj.  hiyU.  l/tjty,  ttiU. 

'haut,  s.ni.  hciyjit^  t(fj>,  xummit^ 
de  —  en  bji8,  (ltnrnw<nd.from  U^) 
to  hdttom;  en  — .  up^  ap-stdlnt. 

*haut.  adv.  Uif/hy  Imtd. 

'hautenienf.  adv.  highly. 

'hauteur,  f.f.  htiyhi. 

'li  ve,  {ulj.  fUiJtcintt'd. 

iiavre,  8.  ni.  (titled)  lutrbr/r. 

'havre-sttc.  «.in.  k/titpaock. 

'Haye  (Ja).  ».  f.  tht  IJnytie. 

*hf.  int.  hoU/H/ /   f  Ktiyf 

h  las.  inl.  uliiif  I  ah  ! 

llolrne.  M  f .  llelen. 

•hnniur.  v.  u.  to  migh. 

Ilt;nn,  am.  Ihnry. 

'bjraut.  H  m.  hendd. 

hcibe,  s.f  herh^yrtt^.  hltu^e;  mau- 
vaise  — .  weed,. 

he.rbivore,  adj.  herhivor</w>. 

'horisso.  e.  a<lj  standing  erect, 
hr titling,  nmgk. 

'licrisMtr,  v.a.  to  hrixtle  up. 

'bcriwon,  s  m.  hedge-hog. 

heritage,  s.m.  iiihrrit'ntce. 

h6rit«ir.  v.  an.  to  inhei'it 

heroine,  s.f.  heroine. 

hcroique,  adj.  heroic. 

hcroistne,  H.ni.  heroitsm. 

h.  rou,  8.m.  heron. 

'heros,  s  m.  hero. 

'herwe,  s.f.  Itarrow. 

hcsiter.  v.n.  to  hesitate. 

heure,  8.f.  hmtr.  time,  o^ clock  ;  &  la 
bonne  — ,  weJl  nnd  good,  all  right, 
very  gfjffd ;  a  V — .  qu'il  est.  nt 
yrtxeiit  ;  de  bonne  — ,  in  good 
time,  enriy  ;  dc  meiJleure  — ,  ear- 
Uer.  )*iH>iur;  tout  a  1'-  -,  prexently, 
hy  on.d  hy. 

acur»Mi8«'meut,  adv.  fortaiuhidy. 


1  heureu-x,  se.  adj.  hajrpy. 
I  'heurter,  v.a.n,  to  ML 
I  *hibou.  s.m  irm. 

'hideu-x.  se,  adj.  hideous. 

bier,  adv   ycsterfbiy. 
■^  •liicrarchie.  s.f.  hierarchy. 
)  'hissei-.  v.a.  t<>  hoi,st. 
,  histoire,  s.f.  history,  tftf/ry. 

historicn.  8.m   historian. 

hiver.  8.m    ic inter. 

'Hollande  (la),  s.  f.   Holland. 

•honiard,  s.m.  lobster. 

honiniiige.  a.m.  homage. 

bomnie,  s.m.  )na.n. 

h()n)i"to.  adj.  hoiteM.  m/tdcM,  cioiL 

honneur.  s.m.  /u^nor,  rejfjtect. 

honorer,    v.a.    tf*  honor;  s' — ,  v.r.  to 
(fo  oneself  ho/tor.  U/  jtride  onemif. 

•honte.  8.f.    nhinne;  avoir  — ,   Ut  be 
ashamed. 

"bouten  X.    se.    adj.    shameful,    dis- 
gni rtfiil .  ashain i;d. 

'bonle.  8  f   horde. 

horioge,  s.f.  diH'.k. 

horloger.  H.m.    matrh-maker,   dock' 
maker. 

hormi.'*,  adv.  ejxq^i,  but,  mne. 

horreur.  H.f.  horror,  fright. 

horrible nient,  adv.  hjtrribly. 

'hors.  prep   (21/".))  oiil .  heyuud,  patit^ 
ititay.  o^f\  besidiK  eoriu-pt.  sace. 

h'te,  s.m.  landlord,  host. 

hCitel.    a.  in.     ludel,     town-mansion, 
hou^e. 

'hotte,  s.f,  basket. 

•boublon.  a;m.  htyjys. 

f  •houille.  8.f.  C(^al. 

'houlctte,  a.f.  tn^wel. 

'houp}»e.  a.  f.  tuft. 

'housse.  s.f.  corer. 

'b(mx,  a.m.  holly. 

•huche,  s.f.  kneading-trough. 

*huer.  v.n. a.  to  hoot. 

huile,  s.f.  oil. 

hnia,    a.m.  h.    —    clos.   with  doMd 
d>orH. 

huit.  adj.   a.m.  eight;  —  jours,  {fi) 
aicek. 

buitaiiie.  a.f.  ^ght  days,  eight. 

buiticnie,  adj.  s.m.  eighth. 

buitr«,  ».f.  oyster. 


412 


VOCABULARY. 


humanii^,  s.f.  hnmamtp. 
humblement,  adv.  humbly. 
burner,  v.  a.  to  .mck  in. 
humeur.  s.f,  Jmmor,  temj)er. 
humide,    adj.    damj)y    7noist,    wet, 

watery. 
*huppe,  s.f.  crest. 
'hure,  s.f.  head. 
'hurler,  v.n.  to  /i/)wl. 
'hussard,  s.m.  husmr. 
'hutte,  8.f.  hvt,  .shed. 
hydrogene,  s.m.  hydrogen. 


ici,  adv.  here^  hither^  now ;  d' — , 
JiCfice. 

id4e,  s.f.  ide(f,  thoiight,  mind. 

igiiorance,  R.f.  ig/iannice. 

il,  (.ron.  m.  (78,  114)  he,  it,  there; 
-8,  pi.  they. 

lie.  R.f.  Mnnd,  ide. 

illisible,  adj.  illegible. 

illustre,  adj.  iUv.sfri<ni.<<. 

image,  s.f.  image,  jnctvre. 

imaginer,  v. a.  to  imagine,  to  con- 
ceive, t<)  fancy. 

imbu.  e,  adj.  imbued. 

immortel.  le.  adj.  s.  immortal. 

impatiemment.  adv.  impa 

impatient,  e,  adj.  impatient 

impcratrice,  s.f.  emprens. 

imperial,  e,  adj.  imperial. 

impcrialiste,  s.m.  imperialist. 

imj'criaux,  s.m.  pi.  imperialists. 

impie,  adj.  impiouH. 

importer,  v. a.  to  import;  — ,  vn. 
tc  concern,  to  matter  ;  n'importe, 
no  matter  ;  peu  — ,  it  matters  lit- 
tle ;  qu'importe?  whit  does  it 
S((,nify  or  matter? 

Importunei,  v.  a.  to  importune,  to 
aurioy. 

impoBer,  v.a.n.  to  impose,  to  lay  on. 

ImposHibilibe,  s.f.  impossibility. 

inn  rcciitioa,  s.f.  im/precatioUy  curse. 


imprudement,  a3v.  imprtidenUy. 
impuncment.  adv.  trith  i^npunity 
imj)uiii,  e,  adj    i//ipi/iii.\hrd. 
imputer,  v.  a.  to  imju/te.  I<»  eluirge. 
incfipuble.  adj.  incapabf,-,  mijit. 
incapacit<;,  s.f.  iiKUiparity. 
inceiidie.  s  m.  fere,  conjhigratiirn. 
incertain.  e,  ndj.  uvcrrtain. 
ince.ssaiuineiit,  adv.  immeAiiattly ,  in- 

ressoitly. 
incessant,  e,  adj.  inces-sttnt. 
incliner,  v.a.n.    to  ithcline,  to  be  iti- 

dined,  to  sloj^e. 
incommoder.  v.  a.    to  inconvenience, 

t<>  disagree  with. 
inc(mcevable,     adj.      inconceivable, 

xtrange. 
inconnu.  e,  adj  s.  unknown. stranger, 
inconstant,  e.  adj.  inconstant,  Jickle. 
incroyable,  adj.  incredible. 
Iiide,  s  f,  hidia  ;  — s,  pi.  Indie.s. 
inrlccis.  e.  adj.  nnd(cidfd.  doubtful. 
indeinuiser.  v. a.  to  indemnify. 
indcpendamment,  adv.  inde])endent' 

ly. 
indifF  rent,  e,  adj.   indifferent,   im- 

materiid. 
indigence,  s.f.  want,  poverty. 
findigne,  adj.   unworthy,   undeserv- 
ing, worthlejis. 
tindigner,  v.  a.  to  make  indignant ; 

s' — ,  v.r.  to  be  indignant. 
indiquer.  v.  a.    to  indicate,  to  show., 

to  point  out. 
indubitable,  adj.  beyond  doubt. 
induire,    v.  a.   to  induce,  to  lead,  t4 
^  infer. 

industrie,  s.f.  skill,  industry. 
inexpugnable,  adj.  impregnable. 
inf. i me,  adj.  infanums. 
infamie,  s.f.  infamy. 
informe,  adj.  shapeleM. 
ingerer  (s' )  v.  r.  to  in  termeddle  {with) 
ingrat.  e,  adj.  ungrateful. 
inhabile,  c.  adj.  unskilful, 
inhumain.  e,  adj    inhuman,  cruel. 
initier,  v. a.  to  initiate. 
injuste,  adj.  unjust. 
injustice,  s.f.  injustice. 
innocent,  e,  adj.  innocent.  dmpU. 
inoui',  e,  adj.  unheard  of. 


VOCABULARY. 


413 


inserire,  v.a.  ir.  (176)  to  inscribe^  to 

enter. 
insecte,  s.m,  insect, 
inseusible,    .adj.    imennible^   uncon- 

scioas,  uufeeling. 
inspirer,  v.a.  to  inspire, 
instant,   s.m.    i/iMfint,   moment;   a 

I' — ,  ifiMnnfli/,  imme.di<itdy. 
institutcur,  s.m.  founder.,    iju<tntc- 

tor,  ncluxtbntixter. 
institution,  s.f.  inHitution,  w/uxd. 
instniire.  v.a.  ir.  (172)  to  iruttrnct,  U> 

teach  ;  s' — ,  v,  r.  io  instruct  or  im- 

prore  one-self. 
Instruit,     e,     adj.      well-informed.^ 

learned. 
insu  (a  1' —  de),  prep,  inikiunon  to. 
insulte,  s.f.  inMult,  affront. 
insiilter,  v.a.  to  i>iJ<nU,  to  attack. 
intact,  e,  adj.  intact,  pure. 
intcgrito.  s.f.  integrity,  honeMy. 
intelligence,    s.f.    intellect^    under- 

xtandiny,  intelligence,  skiU. 
intelligent,  e,  adj.  intelligent. 
intention,  s.f.  intention,  pui'^ione. 
interdire,  v.a.  ir,  (17;])  to  forbid,  to 

interdict. 
intcresser,  v.a.n,   to  interest,   tft  he 

intereMing  ;   s' — ,   v.  r.    to  he  in- 

tereMted.  to  take  an  intereM  {in). 
inter. 't,  s.m.  interest. 
intorieur,  e.  adj.  interior.,  inner. 
interroger,    v.a,    to  interrogate,    to 

quextuni. 
interrompre,  v.a.  to  intei'rupt. 
intervenir,  v.n.  ir.  (135,  187)  to  in- 
terfere, to  intervene. 
introduire.  v.a.  ir.  (172)  to  shojc  iit, 

to  introduce ;  s' — ,  v.r.  to  intro- 
duce onetfdf  to  get  in, 
inutile,  adj.  useless. 
inutileinent,  adv.  uftelessly,  in  vain. 
inutilite,  8,f.  tLselessness. 
inven-teor,    trice,  s.ra.f.   inventor^ 

amtriver. 
invention,    s.f.  invenfion^   eontriv- 

ance. 
inviter,  v.a.  fofivite. 
Irlande  (T),  s  f .  Ireland. 
iK«ir,  v.  ir.  (108)  [obs.  J. 
itbu,  e,  adj.  sprung^  born. 


issue,  s.f.  iwj/e,  outCet. 
Italic,  s.f.  Itab/. 
italien.  ne,  adj.  s.   Italian. 
ivoire,  s.m.  ico7'y. 


jadis,  adv.  of  old,  formerly. 
Ijaillir.  v.n.   to  gu4ih  out,  to  splashy 

to  .strike. 
jalousie,  s.  f.  jmlmixy,  window-blind. 
jalou-.x,  se,  adj  jeAilmA,  anxunm. 
jamais,  adv.  (57)  eccr,  neoer ;  ^ — , 

l)our  — ,  for  ever. 
jambe,  s.f.  leg. 
jambon,  s.m.  kain. 
y.x\\\\er,H.vi\.  Jah.itary.  . 
jarilin.  s.m.  garden. 
jardiuier.  s.m.  gardener. 
jaune,  ;wlj.  .s.m    yeliuit),  yolk. 
jauiiir,  vail,  to  turn  yellow^  wither, 
je.  j',  pion    (114)   /. 
Jean,  s,m.  John. 
Jeanne,  s.f.  Jane. 
jet,  s.  m.  throw,  sketch,  jet ;  —  d'eau, 

fowiitain. 
Jeter,  v.a.n.  (9(5)  to  thrmv  {(iwny  or 

out),  to  ddJth  ;  se  — ,  v.r.  to  throw 

oneself,  to  jump,  to  rush. 
jeu,  8.  m.  play,  sjiort,  game. 
Jendi,  8.m.  Thursday. 
jeun  (a),  adv.  fisting. 
jeune,  adj.  young. 
jeune,  %.rQ..  fasting ,  foAt. 
jeunesse,  s.f.  youth. 
joie,  B.t.  joy,  delight,  mirths 
joindre,    v.a.    ir.    (175)   to  join,   to 

unite,  to  add. 
joint,  e,  adj.  ci-  —  (246)  annexed^ 

herewith,  enclosed. 
joli,  e,  adj.  pretty,  nice,  handsome. 
jonc,  s.m.  rush,  Malacca  cane. 
jouer,  V  n.a.  tf/play,  to  gamble;  se 

— ,  v.r.  to  play,  U^  laugh,  to  make 

a  f(H}l  (<?/],   to  be  acted  (idioms, 

383). 


414 


VOCABULARY. 


j<jug,  s.m.  yol;e. 

jouir,  y.n.  to  enjoy. 

joujou,  s.m.  pUiy thing,  toy. 

jour,  s.m.  day,  day-time  ;  faire  — , 
to  he  daylight. 

journal-icr,  lore,  adj.  s.  daily.,  incon- 
stant, variable. 

journee,  s.f.  day,  day\^-work. 

joyeu-x.  se,  adj .  joyful,  merry,  cheer- 
ful, f/lad. 

judaisme,  s.m.  Judaism. 

juge,  ii.m.  judge. 

juger,  v.a.n.  (97)  to  judge. 

jui-f,  ve,  adj.  a.  Jewich^  Jew,  Jewess. 

fjuillet,  s.m.  July. 

juin,  s.m.  Ja)te. 

Julos,  s.m.  Jid/'us. 

jnm-eau,  elle,  adj.  s.  tmn. 

juraent,  s.f.  mare. 

jnrer,  v.a.n.  to  swear. 

jusque,  prep,  to,  an  far  o.h,  so  far 
as,  until,  tiU.  eve/i ;  jus(]u'a  ce 
que.  imtil,  till;  ju.s(pi'i(;i.  so  far  ; 
jusque  la.  so  far;  ju.sqii'a  quaud? 
haw  long?  jusqu'ou  y  how  far? 

juste,  adj.  just,  correct,  true.,  up- 
right. 

juste-au-corps  (justaucorps)  s.m. 
jacket. 

justifier,  v.  a.  to  justify,  to  vindicate. 


la,  r,  art.  f.      V.  le. 

la,  V,  pron.  f.      V.  le. 

la,  adv.  there,  then ;  —  -dedans, 
within,  in  there ;  de  — ,  hence, 
from  there  ;  c'est  — ,  it  is  there, 
that  is  ;  ce  sont  — ,  those  are. 

laborieu-x.  se,  adj.  laborioufi,  indus- 
triAHis.  painful. 

lac,  s.m.  like. 

laconi(]ue,  adj.  laconic. 

laid,  e,  adj.  ugly,  pUdn.  naughty. 

larue,  s.f.  w>hL 

laisser,  v.  a.  to  let  alone,  to  allou),  to 


let.  to  let  go  ;  (352)  to  cease,  to  ab- 
stain ;  laisser  faite,  to  lei  alone^ 
not  to  disturb;  se  — ,  v.r.  to  let  or 
sujfer  onese'f. 

lait,  s.m.  milk. 

lampe,  s.f.  lamp. 

lance,  s.f.  lance,  spear 

langxie,s.f.  tongue  language,  (geog.) 
neck. 

lapin.  am   rabbit. 

laquelle,  proa.  f.      V.  lequel. 

larcin.  s.m.  birceny.  theft. 

las,  se,  adj.  tired,  weary. 

laver,  v.  a.  t<t  wash. 

le,  la,  r,  pi.  les,  art.  (28,  ,218)  the. 

le,  la,  1',  pi.  le.s,  eux,  pron.  (114, 
200)  him,  it,  so. 

lecher,  v.  a.  to  lick. 

lot^'on.  s.f.  lesson,  lecture,  reading. 

lecture,  s.f.  reading,  perusal. 

Icg-er.  ere.  adj   light,  dight,  trifling. 

logyrement,  adv.  lighHy,  incoimder- 
ately. 

legion,  s.f.  legion. 

Icg'uer,  v.a.  to  leave,  to  bequeath. 

lc<^ume,  s.m.  regetable. 

lent,  e,  adj.  sl/rio. 

lentement.  adv.  slowly. 

lenteur.  s.f.  slownej^s.  delay. 

lequel,  laquelle.  pi.  lesquols,  les- 
quelles,  pron.  (122,  1^5,  126,  263, 
268)  wJio.  which,  whom,  that. 

les,  art.  m.f.  pi.      V.  le. 

les,  pron.  m.f.  pi.      V.  le. 

lettre,  s.f.  letter,  note  ;  belles s, 

polite  literature;  homme  de  — , 
literary  man. 

lear,  pron.  pers.  m.f.  pi.  (114,  110) 
to  or  at  them,  for  or  witJi  or  in  at 
from  them,  them. 

leur,  adj.  poss  (($4,  239,241)  their ^ 
their  own  ;  le  — ,  la  — ,  les  — s, 
theirs,  their  own,  their  relations. 

lever,  v  a.n.  to  raise,  to  lift  up,  to 
heat^e.  to  get  up  ;  se  — ,  v.r.  ta 
rUe,  to  get  up. 

liberal,  e,  adj.  liberal. 

libertc,  s.  f.  liberty,  freedom. 

libre,  adj.  ft'ee,  ej-empt,  unoccupied. 

lihrement,  adv.  freely. 

lieu.  8.m.  iMnd,  tie,  c/iain. 


VOCABULARY. 


4l5 


lier,  v.a.  to  hind^  to  tie. 

lieu,     B.m.     placp,    aj)ot^    occfision, 

cause ;  au  —  de,  imtmd  of ;  au 

—  que,  instead  of  irhich  ;  avoir 

— ,  to  take  'place  ;  tenir  —  de,  to 

fill  the  pUice  of,  to  be. 
lievre,  s.m.  hare. 
fli<^ne.  s.f.  line. 
lion,  B.m.  Wm. 
lioune,  s.f.  lioness. 
liqueur,  s.f.  liquor.,  cordial. 
lire,  v.a.  ir.  (177)  ^^  rend. 
lift,  s.m   lily,  luce. 
lit.  s.m.  bed. 
Livourue,  8.f.  Leglu/m. 
livre,  s.ra.  book. 
livre,  s.f.  pound. 

livrer,  v.a.  to  deliver.,  to  give  (up). 
locution,  s.f.  fo7in  of  sjjeech, phrase. 
logenient,  s.m.  lodying,  quarters. 
logis,   s.ra.   dwelling,  house  ;  au  — , 

at  home. 
loi,  s.f.  Uiw. 
loin.  adv.  far,  far  off ;  an  — ,  far., 

afar.,  far  away  ;  de  — ,  from  a 

distance. 
Londres,  s.ra.  Jjtndon. 
long,  ue,  adj.  hmg,  slmn. 
long,  s.m.  length. 
longtemps,  adv.  Umy,  a  lort.g  timeov 

while  ;  depnis  — ,  long  ago. 
longue.  s.f.  long  ;  a  la  — ,  in  time., 

in  tilt'  long  r^irt. 
longueur,  s.f.  length. 
lors.  adv.    then, ;  don — ,from   that 

moniejit,  ttince  then. 
lorsijue,  conj.  (320,  .-i21)  wlien. 
lot.  s.m.  U)t.  share 
louable,  adj.  praiseworthy. 
oiiange,  •  s.  f .  pi-aixe. 
louer,  v.a.  to  rent,  to  let. 
loucr.  V  a.  (133)  to  praise,  commend. 
ioup.  s.m.   wolf. 
lotird,  e,  adj.  heavy,  dumsy. 
louve,  s.f.  she  wolf. 
iueur,  s.f.  glimmer,  light. 
Ini,    pron.     pers.    m.f.     (110,    114, 

1 1(>)  Ag,  him.,  her,  it.,  to  or  at  or 

for  or  with  or  in  or  from  him, 

etc.,   itself; memo,   himself, 

itself. 


luire,  v.n.  ir.  (171)  to  shine,  gleam. 
lumiore,    s.f.   lighty  knowledge,  in* 

formation. 
lundi,  s.m.  Monday. 
lune.  s.f.  moon. 
lunettes,  s.f.  pi.  spectades. 
luxe,    s.m.    luxury;    objets  de — , 

fancy  goods. 
Lycurgue,  s.m.  Lycurgus. 
Lyons,  s.  Lyons. 


M, 


ma,  adj.  poss.  f.      V.  men. 
machine,  s.f.  machine,  engine. 
machoire,  s.f.  jaw. 
raadame,  s.f.  Madam,  Mrs.,  this  or 

the  lady ;   —  votre   mere,   yov/T' 

mother. 
mademoiselle,  s.f.   Miss,  the  young 

lady  ;   —  votre  soeur,  your  sister. 
magasin,  s.m.  W((rehifuse,  store. 
msigi.ster,  s.m.   (24)  country  school' 

nut^ter. 
magistrat,  s.m.  magistrate. 
fniagnitique,  adj.  magnificent. 
mahomctan,  e.  adj.  s.  MaJu»netan. 
mai,  am.  M<(y. 

raaigre,  adj.  lean,  meagre,  thin. 
main,    s.f.    hand,    quire;   k  la — , 

hindy,   in  hand;   en  venir  aux 

— 8,  t<f  come  to  blows,  to  join  battle; 

('•tre  aux  — s.  lobe  fighting. 
maint,  e.  adj.  many  a,  many. 
maintenant,  adv.  nmc,  now  then. 
maintenir,  v.a.   ir.   (187)    to  main- 

tain,  to  hold,  to  keejt  [up)  ;  se  — , 

r.T.  to  keep  (up),  to  hold  out. 
maintien.  s-m.  maintenance,  deport' 

ment. 
mais,  conj.  but,  why;  — non  !  no/ 

oh  710  !   T say  no! 
mai's,  s.m.  maize. 
maison,  s.f.  Iwuse. 
maisonnette,  s.f.  sfinall  house. 
maitre,  B.m.  master,  teacher,  v^xtch. 


416 


VOCABULARY. 


maitresse,  s.f.  mistress^  teaclier. 

majeste,  s.f.  majesty. 

majeur,  e,  adj.  s.  greater^  of  ag«, 
major. 

mal,  s.m.  evii^  ill^  harm,  ache  ;  avoir 
—  B,,  to  have  a  pain  or  pains  in. 

mal,  adv.  ill,  badly,  had,  wrong; 
aller  plus  — ,.to  grow  worse. 

malade,  adj.  iU,  »ick. 

malade,  s.m.f.  invalid,  patient. 

maladie,  s.f.  iUness,  malady,  disease. 

maladroit,  e,  adj.  awkward,  unskil- 
ful. 

maladroitement,  adv.  awkwardly. 

malaise,  s.m.  uneasiness,  embarrass- 
ment. 

malgre,  prep,  in  spite  of,  notwith- 
standing. 

malheur,  s.m.  mufortnne,  iU-luek. 

malheureusement,  adv.  unfortu- 
nately. 

malheureu-x,  se,  adj.  unfortunate, 
unlmppy. 

malheureu-x,  se,  s.m.f.  poor  wretch., 
wretch. 

malhomiete,  adj.  dislionest. 

malice,  s.f.  malice, 

malicieu-x,  se,  adj.  malicious,  sly. 

mal-in,  figrne,  adj.  s.  malignant, 
mischievous,  roguish,  sly. 

Malte,  s.f.  Malta. 

maltraiter,  v.  a.  to  ill-treat,  wrong. 

mamau.  8.f.  m/imina,  mother; 
g-raii d' — ,  grandniamma. 

maminifere,  adj.  s.  mainmiferous. 

manche.  s.ra.  hmdle 

manche,  s.f.  sleeve,  channel. 

man^eable,  adj.  editable. 

majiyer,  v.a.u.  (07)  to  eat,  to  de- 
vour ;  a  — ,  somt'Uiing  to  eat. 

manger,  s.m.  eating,  food. 

manior,  v.  a.  to  Umch,  to  handle. 

mauiere,  s.f.  manner,  way.  style, 
sort  ;  de  —  que,  d'une  —  ou  d'au- 
tre,  by  some  m,eans  or  other.,  m 
tluit. 

manoeuvre,  s.f.  manoeuvre. 

manquer,  v.n.  to  fail,  to  miss,  to  oe 
near,  to  want.,  to  he  wanting  or 
d^ident, 

manteau,  s.m.  c^A;,  manUt, 


march  and,  e,  s.m.f.  denUr,  tinder 
man,  merchant. 

marchandise.  s.f.  merchandise, goods. 

raarche,  s.f.  walk,  march,  course. 

raarche,  s.ra.  mtirket ;  a  bon  — , 
eJieap ;  bon  — ,  cheapness,  cheap. 

marcher,  v.  n.  to  w(dk,  to  m^irch,  to 
go.  to  sail  ;  faire  — .  ttf  set  going. 

mardi,  s.ra.   TueMlay. 

marochal.  s  ra.  farrier  ;  —  ferrant, 
farrier. 

raari.  s.ra.  husband. 

mariage,  s.ra.  marriage. 

Marie,  s.f.  Mary. 

niarier.  v. a.  to  marry,  (243)  to  find 
H  huxhand  for  ;  se  — ,  v.r.,  to 
marry,  to  get  marned. 

marron.  s.m.  chestnut. 

mars,  s.m.  March. 

mar{;eau,  s.m.  hammer,  knocker. 

matelot,  s.m.  sai'oi'. 

matoriaux,  s.m.  pi.  material'i. 

mathcmatiques,  s.f.  pi.  mathema- 
tics. 

matiore,  s.f,  mattery  material,  sub- 
ject, contents ;  en  —  de,  in  point 
of 

matin,  s.  m.  miming  ;  de  grand  or 
bon  — ,  early  in  the  morning,  very 
early. 

matinee,  s.f.  morning,  foren/nm. 

maiidire,  v  a.  ir.  (178)  to  curse. 

maud  it,  e,  adj.  cursed. 

mauvais,  e,  adj.  bad,  ill. 

mauvais,  adv.  bad;  faire — ,  to  be 
bad  weather. 

me,  m',  pron.  pers.  (114,  138)  me, 
to  or  at  me,  for  or  with  or  in  or 
from  me,  myself,  to  myself. 

mcchant,  e,  adj.  wicked,  bffdf 
naughty. 

meconuaitre.  v.  a.  ir  (179)  not  to 
recognize,  to  di'i^regard. 

mccontent,  e,  adj.  s.  dissatisfied, 
displeased,  malcontent. 

medecin,  8.ra.  medical  man,  physi- 
cian, doctor. 

m6decine,  s.f.  medicine. 

m^dire,  v.n.  ir.  (173)  to  speak  iU,  to 
slander. 

muditer,  v.a.n.  to  meditate,  prt^edt 


TOCABtri/ART. 


417 


mefieT(8e),  v.r,  to  mMrust 

fmeilleur,  e,  adj.  better,  best. 

melancolie.  s.f.  meMinc/ifdp. 

mtUer,  v. a.  to  mix,  to  mingle  ;  se  — , 
v.r.  to  intermeddle  {with),  to  con- 
cern oneself. 

membre,  s.m.  member,  limb. 

meme,  adj.  (Ill,  279)  same,  very, 
own,  self,  himsdf,  hersdf,  itself ; 
la  —  chose,  tJie  same  thing ;  la 
chose  — ,  tJie  very  thing  ;  lea  — s, 
the  same,  alike. 

mcme,  adv.  (279)  even,  also,  Uke- 
wue  ;  a  — ,  able  ;  de  — ,  tout  de 
— ,  the  same,  for  (tU.  that ;  de  — 
que,  as,  as  weU  n.<i.         « 

memoire,  s.f.  memory. 

memoire,  8.m.  memorandum,  biU, 
memoir. 

menace,  s.f.  threat,  menace. 

menacer,  v.  a.  to  threaten. 

menage,  s.m.  house-keejnng,  house- 
?(oUi,  house. 

mener,  v.a.n.  (96)  to  lead. 

menteu-r,  se,  adj.  s.  lying,  false ; 
liar. 

mention,  8.f.  (225)  faire  — ,  tom,en- 
tion. 

mentir,  v.n.  ir.  (184)  to  lie. 

meprendre  (se),  v.r.  ir.  (181)  to  mis- 
take, to  be  mistaken. 

mcpriser,  v.  a-  to  despise,  to  scoi^n. 

mer,  s.f.   sea;  pleine  — ,  open  or 

merci,  s.f.  mercy.  {main  sen. 

mei'ci,  s.m.  int.  tliank^!  — !  think 


you  ! 


bien !  muc?i  obliged! 


mercredi,  s.m.    Wednesday. 
mere,  s.f.  mother. 
meridional,  e,  adj.  sovthern. 
merite.  s.m.  merit,  d€-'<ert. 
meriter,  v.  a.  to  dr;serve,  to  merit. 
mes,  adj.  poss.  pi.  m.f.   (04,    240) 

my,  my  oion.  V.  mon. 
mesdames,  H.f.  pi.  Indies. 
mesdemoiselies,   s.f.  pi.   young  la- 

diea,  ladies,  the  Misucs. 
messieurs,  s.m.   pi.  gentlemen,  »irs, 

Messrs. 
mesure,  s.f.  meojiure ;  d  —  que,  in 

proportion  as,  according  as,  as. 
mesarer,  v.sl.  to  measure^  to  weigh. 
27 


metal,  s.m.  metal 

metier,  s.m.  trade,  profession. 

metre,  s.m.  metre,  yard. 

mettre,  v.  a.  ir.  (180)  to  put,  to  place, 

to  lay,  to  set,  to  put  on,  to  wear; 

se  — ,  v.r.  to  put  or  pUtce  oneself, 

to  sit  down,  to  dress,  to  begin,  to 

set  about;  —  eh  route,  to  start,  to 

set  out. 
meuble,  s.m.    piece  of  furniture  ; 

— s.  pi.  furniture. 
meunier,  s.m.  miller. 
Mexique  (le),  s-m.  Mexico. 
miasme,  s.m.  miasm. 
Michel- Ange,  s.m.  Michael- Angelo. 
midi,  s.m.  noon,  twelve  o'clock. 
miel,  s.m.  honey. 
mien,  ne,  pron.  poss. (125,  2^\)mine; 

le  — ,  la  — ne,  les  — s,  les  — nes, 

mine,  my  oion. 
mieux,    adv.     better,     best,    more, 

most  ;  j'aimerais  — ,  /  would  or 

had  rather. 
migraine,  s.f.  sick  headache, 
mil,  adj.  one  tlioiwtnd. 
milieu,  8.m.   middle,  midst,  centre, 

middle  course  ;  au  — ,  in  the  mid 

die  ;  du  — ,  middle. 
mille,  adj.  tfiousand. 
mille,  s.m.  mile. 
milliorae,  adj.  s.  t/iousandth. 
millier,  8.m.  thoiisand. 
million,  s.m.  miMwn. 
mine,  s.f.  countenance,  face,  mien , 

de  bonne — ,  good-looking;  avoir 

bonne  — ,  to  look  well. 
mine,  s.f.  mine,  ore. 
minuit,  s.m.  midnight. 
minute,  s.f.  minute. 
niinutie,  s.f.  trifle,  minutim. 
miroir,  s.m.  mirror,  lookinq -glass. 
mis.  6,  ;idj.  attired,  drt^^cd,  c  .♦  I. 
miserable,  adj.  miserable,  wretched, 

wickeA. 
misorablement,      adv.      miserably, 

wretchedly. 
miscre,  s.f.  mise^'y,  distress,  trouble. 
mixtion.  s.f.mU;tu7'e. 
mode,  s.f.  inode,  fashion;   — s,  pi. 

miUinery;  a  la  — ,  in  or  of  fashion, 

fashionable. 


418 


VOCABULARY. 


mod  erne,  adj.   s.    modsm^   modern 

Hlijle. 
modeste,  adj.  modest. 
nii.destement,  adv.  modestly. 
modestio,  s.f.  mode-sty. 
moenrs,    s.f.    pi.    maiinei'S,    moraU., 

hiibiti^.  • 

moi.  pers.  pron.  (110)  /,  me. 
nioindie,  adj.  lefiS,  least. 
moineau.  s  m.  sparroin. 
moins,   adv.    lens,    except^  mini/ft,  to 

(?>)) ;  a  —  de,  for  lesn  titan.,  ■uide.^H. 

except  in  case  of ;  a  —  que  (202) 

■iirdeKH ;    au    — ,    at   least,    at  all 

events  ;  du  — ,   at  least ;   le  — , 

the  leant. 
mois,  s.m.  month. 
Moi«e.  s.m.  Moses. 
moisson,  s.f.  harvest,  reaping. 
moitii-!,  s.f.   h(df ;  a  — ,  Jiatf ;  ctre 

de  — ,  to  go  halves. 
mol.  le.      V.  mou. 
mollement,  adv.  softly. 
mon,    ma,  pi.   mes,  adj.   poss.   (64, 

239)  my,  7ny  own. 
monarchie,  s.f.  monarchy. 
monarque,  s.m.  monarch. 
monde,  s.m.  world,  men,  people,  so- 
ciety, company  ;  du  — ,  of  or  in 

the  world,  fashionable ;   le  beau 
— ,  fashionable  peo^ile  or  society  ; 

beaucoup   de  — ,    many  men  or 

pexyj)le  ;   peii   de  — ,  few  people  ; 

tout  le  — ,  ereryhody. 
monuaie.  s.f.  coin,  moriey. 
monosyllabe.  adj.  s.m.  monosyllabic, 

monimjllahle. 
monsieur,  s.m.    gentleman,    this   or 

the  gentleman.    Sir,    Mr.,    Esq  , 

Master ;    —    votre    pore,     your 

father. 
mont,  s.m.  mount,  mountain. 
fmontagne.  s.f.  mountain. 
moriter,  v.n.a.    (1-J6)   to  ascend,  to 

go  or  come  up,  to  get  up  or  in. 
montre,  s.  f.  icatch  ;  —  a  repetition, 

repeating  icatch. 
moutrer,  v.  a.  to  show,  to  point  out, 

to  let  see,  to  teach. 
mo(iuer   (se),   v.r.    to  laugh  (at)    to 

nuike  game  of.^  to  mock,  to  joke 


morceau,  s.m.  piece,  bit,  moi  gel. 

mordre.  v.a.n.  to  bite. 

mort,  s.f.  death. 

mort,  e,  adj.  s.  dead ;  ctre  — ^ 
(pers.)  to  be  dead,  to  have  died. 

mortel,  le,  adj.  s.  mortal,  deadly. 

mot,  s.m.  word,  xaying,  motto;  — 
a  — ,  word  for  loord,  literal  trans- 
lation ;  bon  — ,  smart  or  witty 
Haying. 

motif,  s.m.  motioe,  reason,  cause. 

mou,   mol,   m.,   moUe,  f.   adj.  soft^ 

vcumche,  H.f.  Jly.  [?neUow. 

mouchetles.  s.f.  pi.  snujfers. 

moudre,  v. a.  ir.  (174.  to  grind. 

fmouiller,  v.a.n.  to  wet,  to  water,  to 
noak)  to^a.Ht)  anchor  ;  se  — ,  v.r. 
io  get  wet. 

monlin,  s.m.  mill ;  —  a  vent,  wind- 
mill ;  —  a  poudre,  powder-mill. 

mou  rant,  e,  adj    dying. 

raourir.  v.n.  ir.  (KJo,  186)  to  die, 
(H45)  to  long ;  se  — ,  v.r.  to  be 
dying,  to  be  dying  out. 

mousse,  s.m.  cabin-boy. 

mousse,  s.f.  m/ws.  froth,  lathe^ 

moiitarde,  s.f.  mustard. 

mouton.  s.m.  sheep,  mutton. 

mouvement.  s  m.  irmtu/n,  movement. 

mouvoir,  v.  a.  ir.  (100)  txj  move,  to 
stir,  to  prompt. 

moyen,  s.m  meams,  way,  medium  ; 
— s,  pi.  abilities. 

muet,  te.  adj    dumb,  mute. 

rauct,  te,  s. ru.f.  dumb  person. 

mule,  s.f.  she-mule., 

mulet,  s.m.  male. 

muuir,  v.  a.  to  supply^  tn  provide. 

munition,  s.f.  ammunition,  stores. 

liMur,  s m.  iritll. 

mur,  e,  adj.  ripe,  mature. 

fmuraille,  s.f.  ivall. 

murier,  s.m.  mulberry-tree. 

murir,  v.a.n.  to  ripen. 

murmure,  s.m.  murmuT,  gruir^ 
bllng',  whisper. 

murmurer,  v.a.n.  to  murmur,  t4 
grumble. 

musicien.  ne,  s.m.f.  musician. 

musique,  s.f.  music,  band. 

matiuerie,  s.f.  mutiny,  sedition 


VOCABULARY. 


419 


N. 

nacelle,  s.f.  hont, 

nacr«.  s.f.  inother-of-petirL 

uager,  v.u.  t«f  sioim. 

nay:uore,  adv.  but  lately. 

naiu.  e.  8.m.f.  adj.  dwarf. 

naiasance.    8.f.    birth.,    descent,   ex- 

tracthit. 
na  tre.  v.n.  ir,  (135,  181)  ^>  *e  born. 
narval,  am.  (214)  udnchd. 
natuie,  s  f .  not 'ire,  kind. 
uatiirel.   le,   adj.    natural,    native, 

plain. 
natnrellemeiit,  adv.    nataraUy,   of 

c^nu'i^e. 
navet,  a.m.  tnrnij)^  roat. 
navij^er,  v.u.  U)  narigate.,  to  sail. 
navire,  s.m.  .s/iip,  vcMHci. 
ne,    n',    adv.    (57 ;    with   conj.   58, 

151) ;   syntax,    28S)  ;    used    alone, 

291  ;   not  as  negative,  293)  not ; 

—  pas  or  point,  not  ;  —  ...  que, 

(57)  o)dy,  but. 
no,  e,  part,  borny  by  birth. 
neanmoins,  adv.   nevertheless,  how- 

eoer. 
neant,  s.m.  nothing^  nothingness, 
necessite,  8.f.  necessity,  need. 
negliger,  v.  a.  to  neglect. 
negociant,  s.ra.  merchant. 
negre,  s.m.  negro. 
nC^resse.  s.f.  negress. 
neige,  s.f.  snom. 
neifirer,  v.n.  (140)  to  snow. 
nerf,  s.m.  neroe. 
Noron.  s.m.  Nero. 
uet,  te.  adj.  dean,  neat.,  plain. 
not.  adv.  entirely,  clean.,  frankly. 
nettoyer,    v. a.    to   clean,    to  scour, 

t/)  inive. 
neuf,  adj    s.  nine. 
ueu-f,  ve.  adj.    nem,  fresh;   a   — , 

adv.  anew,  again. 
neuvicme,  adj.  s.m.  ninth. 
neveu,  s.m.  ne])hew. 
nez.  H.m.  nose. 

ni,  couj.  (57,  58, 163)  neitheVj  nor,  or. 
uid.  H.m.  ne^st. 
niece,  s.f.  niece. 


nier,  v.a.  (29")  tod^ny   to  disijw/i. 

noblesse,  s.  f.  nobility. 

Noel,  s.m.  Christmas. 

noir,  e,  adj.  black. 

noix,  s.f.  wamut,  nut. 

notu,  8.  m.  Mime.  noun.  fame. 

nombre,  8.m.  number,  quantity. 

nombreu-x,     se,     adj.    numerous, 

many. 
nomuier,   v.a.    to  name.,  to  call,   to 

noniin.iite. 
non.    adv.  (289)   no,   not ;   —  pas, 

nM,  no,  not  so  ;  —  plus,  neither, 

either,  on  the  other  hand  ;  que  — , 

no.  nnt, 
nonohalamment.  adv.  carelessly. 
uonobfstant,  piep.  notwithstanding. 
uord.   s.m.  north. 
nos,  adj    poss.  pi  m.f.  ((J4,  239)  our^ 

our  own. 
note,  s.f.  /wte,  mark.  bill. 
notre,  adj.  poss.   (()4,  239)  our,  our 

oiDn. 
nOtre,  pron.   poss.   (125)  ours,  out 

own  ;  le  — ,  la  — ,  les  — s,  ours. 
nourri,  e,  adj.  fed. 
uourrice,  s.f.  wet-nurse,  nurse. 
nourrir,  v.a.  to  feed,   to  nourish,  ti 

nurse,  to  maintain. 
nourriture,  s.  f .  food,  nourishment. 
nous,   pers.    pron.    (110,    114,    138, 

25(j)    we,  us,  to  or  at  v^,  for  ot 

with  or  in  or  fnun  us,  each  other  ; 

m /'uies.  ouraelues. 

nou-veau,    vel.    in.,    velle,    f.    adj. 

adv.  new,  recent,  novel,  fresh. 
nouveautu,  s.f.  noveUy,  new  thing, 

new  publication,  latest  fanhUtn. 
lion  velle,  s.f.  news,  intelligence,  tki- 

in-gs,  story. 
nouvellement,  a<lv.  newly.  Ititely. 
novembre.  s  in.  Nocember. 
noyer,  s. m.  widnul-tree.,  walnvt. 
noyer,  v.a.  trf^  drown, ;  se  — ,  v.r.  ta 

be  drowned,  to  drown  one^eZf. 
nu,   e,    adj.  (24())  naked,  bai ". ;  — 

-pieds,  bare-foot ;  —  -tiite   bare- 
headed. 
nuago.  s.m.    hud. 
nuance,  s.m.  shade,  tint. 
mie,  s.f.  cloud;  — s,  pi.  skies. 


420 


VOCABULARY. 


nn6e,  8.f.  doud,  swarm. 

nuire,   v.n.   ir.   (172)   to    hurt,    to 

wrong. 
nuisible,  adj.  hurtful^  injurious. 
nuit,  s.f.  night,  darkness. 
nul,  le,  adj.  (57)  no,  not  any,  null, 

void,  no  one,  nobody. 
nullement,   adv.    (57)  by  no  means, 

not  (it  ail. 
nami  ro,  s.m.  number,  size. 
nyraphe,  s.f.  nymjifi. 


o. 


oboir,  v.n.  to  obey,  to  he  obedient. 

oboissant,  e,  adj.  obedient. 

objet,  8.m.  object,  subject,  aim,  ar- 
ticle. 

oblige,  e,  adj.  obliged. 

oblig-er.  v.a.n.  to  oblige. 

obHcur,  e,  adj.  dai'k,  obscure. 

obsoder,  v.  a.  to  be.^et,  to  possess. 

observer,  v^a.  to  observe,  to  notice. 

obstiner  (s'),  v.r.  to  be  obstinate,  to 
persist. 

obtenir,  v. a.  ir,  (187)  to  obtain,  get. 

occasion,  s.f.  opjiortunity,  occasion, 
cati.se,  reason. 

occupation,  s.f.  occupation. 

occupy,  e,  part.  adj.  occupied,  en- 
gaged, busy. 

occiiper,  v.a.  to  occupy,  to  hold,  io 
employ,  to  inhabit ;  s' —  (a),  v.r. 
to  employ  or  occupy  oneself  {in). 

octobre,  8.ra.  October. 

odeur,  s  f .  odor,  smell. 

odieu-x,  se.  adj.  odious. 

fceil    (8.m. ),    (;}1,    214)    pi.    yeux, 

eye  ; de-boeuf,  hdrs  eye,  round 

inindow  ;  coup  d' — .  glance. 

foeillet,  s.m.  pink. 

cenf,  s.ra.  egg. 

oeuvre,  s.f.m,  v^ork. 

oflfenser,  v.a.  ^  oifend;  s' — ,  v.r.  to 
take  offence. 


offrir,  v.a.  ir.  (184)  to  offer,  present, 

oie,  s.f.  goose. 

oiudre,  v.a.  ir.  (175)  to  anoint. 

oiseau,  s.m.  bird,  fowl. 

oisi-f,  ve,  adj.  idle. 

ombrag^e,  s.m.  shade. 

orabrager,  v.a.  to  shade. 

ombre,  s.f,  shade,  shadxm. 

omelette,  s.f.  omdet. 

omettre,  v.a.  ir.  (180)  to  omit,  to 
leave  out. 

on,  pron.  sing,  ra.f.  (129,  274)  one^ 
a  man,  a  woman,  petyple,  they,  ib6, 
you ;  —  dit,  pc/yple,  or  tJiey  say, 
it  is  said  ;  —  m'a  dit,  /  have  been 
told. 

oncle,  s.m.  uncle. 

onze,  adj.  s.  eleven. 

onzieme,  adj.  s.  eleventh. 

opiner,  v.  n.  to  give  one's  opinion,  to 
advise,  to  vote. 

opiniatrer  (s'),  v.r.  to  be  obstinate., 
to  persist. 

opinion,  s.f.  opinion,  vote. 

opposer,  v.a.  to  oppose ;  s' — ,  v.r.  to 
object. 

oppressor,  v.a.  to  oppress. 

or,  conj.  now,  but. 

or.  s.m.  gold. 

orage,  s.m.  storm,  tempest. 

orange,  s.f,  orangi'.. 

orateiir,  s.m.  orator,  speaker. 

ordinaire,  adj.  ordinary,  commtm., 
u.sual,  custonmry;  a  1' — ,  as  Uftual. 

ordinairement,  adv.  ordinarily,  gen- 
erally. 

ordonncr  v,a.n.  to  order,  to  com- 
mand, to  prescribe. 

ordre,  s.m.  order,  command;  de 
premier  — ,  first  rate. 

foreille.  s.f.  ear. 

foreiller,  s.m   pillow, 

orgue,  s.m.f.  organ. 

forgneil,  s.ra.  pride. 

orient,  s.m.  (aM. 

origine.  s.f,  origin,  source. 

omeraent.  fi.ra.  or tianient. 

omer.  v.a.  to  adorn,  to  deck. 

OS.  s.ra.  bone. 

osciller,  v.n.  to  osciUate. 

oser,  v.a.n.  (291)  to  dare,  tenbar^,' 


VOCABULARY. 


421 


oter,  v.a.  to  take  nwny^  to  reu.ore, 

to  d/^nre,  to  tnkfi  or  i>nU  off. 
ou.  conj.  or,  either^  or  eltf  ;  —  bieji. 

or  due,  r.T. 
oil,  adv.  (270)  tohrre,   in   or  int/f  or 

at    or    to    which,    ir/ien  ;     d' — , 

w?ferwe. 
oublier.  v.a.  (98)  to  ff/rgft. 
on  est.  R.Tn.  wrH 
oui,  adv.  8.  pex,  at,. 
ouir,  v.a.n.  ir.   (198)  tf>  hear. 
ours.  8.m.  /'ear. 
outil,  8.m.  foftl^  iTn]lew.e)it. 
outrnyer,  v.a.  t)  ot/fnii^fi.. 
outre,  prt'p.   adv.    bej/z/id,  farther, 

h/'M/'ffe-K  :  (H  — ,  iiuni-orfr.  Iiexidex. 
on  vert,  e.  julj.  open,  fro  uk. 
ouvrH^e.  R  m.  irntrk,  trorkinanxhip. 
ouvrir.  v.a.n.  ir.  (18."))   Uj  ojen.   to 

viilork. 
ovale,  adj.  s,m.  tfE'/i. 
oxygcue,  K.m.  oaeyjen. 


page,  s.m.  page. 
page,  B.f.  J>age  {of  a.  hook). 
paien,  ne,  adj.  a.  paga)h. 
■paillasKe.  B.f  xtra in-vKittress. 

•paillasse,  H,m.  domn. 

•paille,  B.f:  xtrati). 
pain,  B.m.  bread,  l/nf,  cake. 
paire,  s  f.  pair,  ro'iplc. 
paisible,  adj.  peace-at>le.  peaceful. 
paitre,  v.a.n.   ir.   (178)  to  graze,  to 

pvtture. 
paix,  B.f.  peace,  rext,  hash/ 
palaiB,  B.m.  palace. 
palmier,  s  m.  palm-tree. 
pampre,  8.m.  vine-hrancfu 
panier,  B.m.  banket. 
paon,  B.m.  pe^'Hujck. 
pape,  B.m.  pope. 
papier,    s.  m.   paver  /  —  S  lettres, 

note-pajier.,  letter-paper. 
fpapillon,  8.m.  bntterjly. 


pilqne,  s.f.  pa.<i.sover. 
paqucs.  s.m.f.  I^a.<ite7 
p;uiintt,  B.  m.  parcel  bLjrdle. 
par.  prep.  (;^()2)  b(/,  through,  a.  out 
of.  from.^  on,  in,  for.  by  irny  of ; 

—  -derricre,  behind,  from  behind; 

—  ici.  this  inay.  about  hire  ;  —  li, 
thttt  itay.  a1>4)vt  there ;  —  oCi, 
irhich  way,  how. 

parrige.  s.m.  part^,  latitnde. 
paraitre,  v.n.  ir.  {\7f>)  to  ajjpear,  to 

fwmte   in   /tight,    to  xeern,  to  l<n)k^ 

to  .thow. 

parnllclemcnt,  adv.  paraUely,  paral- 
lel. 

paraplnie,  R.m.  ambrelUi. 

parbleu.  int.  irdl !  why!  indeed! 

parce  (jne,  conj.  t>ec-<iase,  an. 

parcourir,  v.a.  ir.  (184)  to  travd 
or<r,  t4>  go  or  ran,  or  look  orer. 

pardon,  s.m.    pardon,  forgiven esn ; 

—  !  excuse  nie!  I  beg  yoiij  par- 
don- ! 

pnrdonner,  v.a.  to  forgire.,  to  par- 

d/ai,  to  excuse. 
fpareil,  le,  adj.  alike^  similar^  like, 

like  it,  frach. 
fpareil.  s  ra.  equals  match. 
parent,  e,  s.m.f.  relation,  relative ; 

--8,  pi.  parenU,  relations. 
parer,    v.a  n.     to  adorn,    to    deck, 

to  dreM,  to  parry. 
paresse,  s.f.  idlene^H,  laziness. 
paresseu-x,  se,  adj.  8.m.f.  idlji,  lazy; 

idler,  Uizy  person. 
parfait.  e.  adj.  8.m,  perfect,  finished. 
parfaiteraent.  adv.  perfectly. 
parfum,  s.m.  perfume,  scent. 
parisien.  ne,  adj.  b.  Parisian. 
parlemont.  s.m.  parliament. 
parler.  v.a.n.  to  speak,  Ut  talk. 
partni.  prep.    (2f'8;  among,  amidst, 

with 
parole,  s.f.  word,  speech. 
part,   8.  f .   part,  share,  portion  ;  de 

—  (!t  d'autre,  mi  both  sides  ;  de  la 

—  de,  (oO;J)  on  thepartof,  from  ; 
de  ma — ,  fr<nn  me  ;  nulle  — ,  iw- 
Vbhere,  anywhere ;  quelqup  — , 
s<miewhere,  anywhere  ;  prendre  — 
a,  to  participate  in,  to  partake  of. 


422 


VOCABULARY. 


partaker,  v.a.n.  (97)  to  divide,  shire. 
parti,   a.m.   'party ,   dde,  jMrt,  reso- 

Intion,  means,  course. 
particul-ier,    iore,    adj.   partimdar, 

peniUiir.  private. 
particulier,  s.ra.  individual,  prioate 

man. 
partie.    s.f,    part,    party,    gam.e ; 

—  double,  double-entry  ;  en  — , 
partly  ;  faire  une  —  de,  to  play 
a  game  at. 

partir,  v.n.  ir.  (13(>,  183)  to  depart, 
to  H('.t  out,  to  go  off ;  a  —  de, 
from. 

partoat.  adv.  everywhere,  any- 
where ;  —  oil,  triherecer. 

parure.  s.f.  di'e>ts,  finery,  ornament. 

parveiiir,  v.n.  ir.  (l-M,  187)  to  ar- 
rive {at),  to  reach,  to  succeed. 

pas,  8  m.  .step,  pace,  foot-step,  strait; 
faux  — ,  mistake. 

pas.  adv.  (57,  159,  280)  any,  no, 
n.ot  any  ;  —  du  tout,  not  at  all. 

passableraent,  adv.  tolerably,  so 
so. 

pass6,  e,  part.  adj.  T)rep,  past,  gone^ 
oner,  faded,  last,  after. 

passo,  s.m.  time  past,  past. 

pa.s.se-p;irtout,  s.m,  inaster-key, 
I,  itch- key. 

passer,  v.n. a.  (l-''^))  ^  pass,  to  pass 
by  ox  away,  to  be  over,  t^fade,  to 
Jiand,  to  crceed,  to  sui'pass ;  — 
chez,  to  call  upon  or  at  {.  .  .  '«)  / 

—  pour,  to  he  connidered ;  faire 
— ,  to  paxx,  to  hand  round.,  to 
while  ainiiy  ;  se  — ,  v.r.  to  pass 
away,  to  happen  ;  —  de,  to  do 
loithout. 

passe-teini)8,  s.m  pasfime. 
pavssiou,  s.f.  passion,  lace. 
pa.s.siontiameiit,  a<lv.  passionately. 
pte,  s.f.  paste,  dough. 
p  16.  s.m   pie. 
pathotique,  adj.  s.  pathetic 
patiemment,  adv.  patiently 
patience,  s.f.  patience,  puzzle. 
patient,  e,  adj.  s.  patient. 
p  itiner,  v.n.  to  skate. 
p  itriarche,  8.m.  patriarch 
patricien,  ue.  adj.  s.  patrician 


patrie,  s.f.  {native)  country,  father- 
land, home. 

fpatroiiille,  s.f.  patrol. 

pafcte,  s.f.  paw,  foot,  claws ;  —  de 
devant,  fore-feet. 

pauvre.  adj.  poor. 

pauvretc,  s.f.  pooerty,  need. 

fpavillon,  s.m.  pavilion,  summer- 
house,  flag. 

payer,  v.  a.  (97)  to  pay,  to  pay  off . 

pays,  s.m.  country,  land,  native 
place. 

paysage,  s.m.  landscape. 

paysau,  ne,  s.m.f.  adj.  peasanty 
country -man,  country -wouvm. 

Pay.s-Bas.  s.ra.  pi.  Netherlands. 

peau.  s.f.  skin,  leather. 

p"-chG.  s  f.  peach,  fishing. 

P'  chc.  s.ra  sin.  tresjviss 

[)6eher,  v.  n.  to  sin,  to  trespass. 

P'cher,  s.m.  peach-tree. 

P'clier,  v.a.n.  to  fish. 

pjch-eur,  eresse,  s.  adj.  sinner,  sin- 
ning. 

P' cheu-r,  se,  a.m. t  fisherman,  an- 
gler. 

fpeigue,  s.m.  c^rmb. 

peiiidre,  v.a.n.  ir.  (175;  to  paint. 

poine.  s  f.  pain,  grief ;  a  — ,  hard- 
ly, sr.nrcely,  no  sooner,  iiery  little; 
en  — ,  uneasy  ;  et-re  la  — ,  tit  be 
worth  or  worth  while  ;  doniier  de 
la  —  a.  to  gire  trouble  t^t ;  se 
douner  de  la  — ,  to  take  paiii^s ; 
S8  douner  la  —  Clq  .  .  .  to  take  the 
trouble  to 

peinfcre.  s  in.  painter. 

peinture,  s.f.  painting,  picture. 

p  le-ui'le,  adv.  s.  pell-mell,  helter- 
skelter 

j)elle.  s.f.  shooet. 

polote.  s.f.  baU  (of  thread). 

ponchaut,  8.m.  deciicity,  ^  slope, 
brink. 

pencher,  v.a.n.  to  incline,  to  bend, 
Vt  sto-yp,  to  slojie,  to  be  inclined. 

pendant,  prep,  during;  —  quo, 
w/dle.. 

pendre,  v.  an.  to  hfing, 

ponctrer,  v.a.n.  to  penetrate,  (0 
pierce,  to  pet  in. 


VOCABULARY. 


4^3 


pens^e,  s.f.  thought,  idea,,  opinwn, 
mind. 

peaser,  v.a.n.  to  think.,  to  believe, 
to  bear  in  mind ;  faire  —  ^.  to 
remind  of. 

pendant,  e,  adj.  piercing,  penetrat- 
ing, shriU. 

percer,  v.a.n.  to  pierce,  to  bore,  to 
oj-ten,  to  lan^;  to  cut. 

percevoir,  v.  a.  ir.  (189)  to 'collect,  to 
perceive. 

pordre,  v.a.n.  to  lose,  to  nan. 

perdu,  e,  adj.  lost,  mined. 

pore,  s.m.  father;  — s,  pi.  fore- 
fathers. 

poril,  s.m.  peril,  daiiger,  risk. 

pcrir,  v.n.  (18(5)  to  perish  ;  faire—, 
tp  put  to  death. 

permettre,  v.a,  ir.  (180)  to  permit, 
to  (dlmo  ;  se  — ,  v.r.  to  allow  one- 
si'if  to  take  the  Kberty. 

porroquet,  s.ra.  parrot. 

Persan.  e.  Perse,  adj.  s.  Persian. 

Perse  (la),  s.f.  Persia. 

persecuter.  v.a.  to  perseeate. 

per«jvcrer,  v.n.  to  persevere. 

ptirsil,  s.m.  parsley. 

[)erHiflter,  v.n.  to  persist. 

persdnne,  s.f.  person. 

personne,  pron.  m.  (130,  275)  anp 
one.  anybody,  any,  no  one,  7io- 
bo'^y. 

persuader,  v.a.  to  persuade,  to  con- 
rince,  to  satisfy. 

perte,  s.f.  loss. 

pe.sant,  e,  adj.  heart/,  duU. 

peser.  v.  a.  n.  ^>  weigh,  to  ponder. 

petit,  e,  adj.  little,  small. 

petit,  e,  s.m.f.  little  ox  young  one. 

peu,  adv.  little,  not  peri/,  few,  soon, 
7wt  ;  —  a  — ,  by  degrees,  gradu- 
ally ;  avant  — ,  before  hmg ;  dans 
— ,  shorily  ;  pour  —  que.  hoioerier 
little  ;  quelq\ie  — .  a  little,  some- 
what *  si  —  que,  liowerer,  little  ; 
sona  — ,  shorUtf., 

peu  s.m.  small  amount,  a  little^  lit- 
tle time  ,'  un  — ,  a  little. 

fieiiphi,  s.m.  pefyfAe,  nation. 

prill  pier,  v.a.n.  tr/ pcoide. 

peuplier.  8.m.  poplar. 


peur,  s.f.  fe/tr,  fright,  dread;  de 
—  de,  for  fear  of ;  de  —  quo,  for 
fear,  lent  ;  avoir  — .  to  be  afraid; 
faire  —  a.  P>  frighten. 

peureu-x.  se.  adj.  timid. 

puut-itre.  adv.  perhjips. 

philosophe.  s.m.  a(ij.  philr>snp?ier. 

piano.  .s.m.  piano  ;  —  droit.  ChJagi 
piano  ;  —  a  queue,  grand  piaiw. 

piastre,  s.f.  jriti-stre. 

piOce,  s.f.  pifxe.  bit,  room. 

pied.  s.m.  ff>^>t  ;  pointe  du  — ,  tip- 
toe ;  a  — .  on  foot ;  sur  un  bon  — , 
upon  a  go* >d  footing  ;  mettre  —  ^ 
terre,  to  alight. 

picge,  s.ra.  snare,  trap;  donner 
dans  le  — ,  to  be  catight  in  the 
trap. 

Pierre.  H.ra.  Peter. 

pierre..  s.  f.  atone. 

piofc';,  s.f.  piitg. 

pien-x,  se.  adj.  pi^ms. 

pij;«on.  s.ra.  j)fgeon. 

f  pi  Her,  v.a.  to  plunder. 

pilotis.  s.m.  piles,  pile-work. 

pilule,  s.f.  ■j)ill. 

piraent,  s.m.  Jamaica  popper^  aU 
S])ice. 

pin,  s.m.  ]iine.  pine-tree. 

piuasse,  s.f.  pinnace. 

piquer,  v.a.  to  prick,  to  sting,  0 
bite,  to  goad,  to  stick  ;  se  — ,  v  r. 
to  prick  oncielf,  to  be  offended,  to 
pride  or  plume  oneself  [on). 

pire,  adj.  worse,  worst;  de  — en 
— ,  worse  and  worse. 

pis,  adv.  worse,  worst. 

piatolet,  s.m.  pistol. 

pitic,  s.f.  pity,  compassion,;  avoir  — 
de,  to  pity. 

place,  s.  f .  place,  room,  square,  situa- 
tion, (272)  fortr&is. 

placer,  v.a.  (97)  to  place,  to  put  ;  m 
— ,  v.r.  f/t  place  or  put  oneself. 

plaider,  v.a.n.  to  plead. 

plaie   s.f.  wound,  sor^. 

plaindre,  v.a.  ir.  (175)  to  pity,  to 
regret  ;  a  — ,  to  be  pitied ;  se  -, 
to  complain. 

l)laine,  s  f.  plain,  h^'ath. 

plaire,  v.n.  ir.  (.178)  to pleuie ;   plAt 


424 


VOCABULARY. 


i  Dieu  or  an  ciel !  would  to 
Heaven !  a  Dieu  ne  plaise, 
Ueaoen  forbid ;  s'il  vous  plait,  if 
yon    fleane ;    plait-il  ?   what   did 


foil  K(iy?   whiitf 


to 


delight  or  takepUnHure  {in). 

plaisanter,  v.a.n.  to  jeH,  to  joke. 

plaisanterie,  n.i.  jest in,g.  joke  ;  — ^ 
part,  Herionsly  ;  par  — .  in  joke. 

plaisir,  s.m.  yleasure,  nmuneiiieid., 
fdvar. 

plauche.r,  s.in.  flom\  ceiling. 

p3aute,  s.f.  plant. 

planter,  v. a.  ^>  plants  to  set. 

platine,  s.m.  ^'/^tina. 

plein,  e.  adj.  fuU  [of),  filled  {with), 
whole,  replete,  o-pea,  blight  ;  tout 
— .  (pdte  piU  ;  tout  —  de,  much, 
many. 

pleurer,  v.a.n.  to  weep,  to  cry. 

pleurs.  s.m.  pi.  tearn,  (of  vines) 
bleeding. 

pleuvoir,  v.n,  ir.  (190)  to  rain,  to 
pour  in  or  nhower  down,. 

pli.  8.m.  foid.  plait. 

plier,  v.a.n.  to  fold,  to  bend,  to  give 
way. 

plomb,  s.m.  lea,d  ;  a — ,  perpendi- 
calarly. 

plonger.  v,a.n.  t^  plunge,  to  dive. 

pluie,  s.f.  rain.  stJi/rioer. 

plumage,  s.m.  plumage,  feathers. 

plume,  f^.i.  feather,  pen. 

plupart,  8.f.  127^)  most  part,  gerter- 
ality  ;  la  —  du  temps,  qeneraUy. 

plus,  adv.  (57,  290,  :)01)  more,  the  \ 
more,  most,  aho ;  (with  negative)  i 
any  more,  any  longer,  no  morCy  \ 
no  longer,  not  any  more  or  longer,  ' 
no  .  .  .  left  ;  au  — ,  tout  au  — ,  at : 
most,  at  be.'it ;  —  de,  more  than  I 
abore  ;  bien  — ,  mvch  more  ;  de  — ,  j 
more,  besides,  moreover ;  de  —  en  I 
— ,  more  and  more ;  le  — ,  the  \ 
most;  deux  fois  — ,  twice  cts 
much  ;  deux  fois  de  — ,  twice  more. 

plnsieurs,  adj.  pi.  several,  some. 

plutot.  adv.  (2.S()')  rather. 

poclie,  s.f.  pocket,  pouch,  bag. 

po  le,  s  ni.  stove. 

pov'le,  s.f.  pan,  fj'yi?t>j-pa7i. 


poeme,  s.m.  poem. 

poids,  s.m.  weight,  yravHy. 

poindre,  v.n.  ir.  (j75)  to  datt^,  t9 
break. 

point,  s.m.  point,  dot,  stitch,  degree^ 
full  stop;  au  —  de.  so  far  as; 
sur  le  —  de.  to  be  very  near. 

point,  adv.  (159)  not.,  no,  any.,  not 
any.  noT  at  all. 

points,  s.f.  point.,  head.,  tip.,  dawn^ 
break,  sting. 

poire,  s.f  .pear. 

pf)iH,  s.m.  pea. 

poisson.  s.  m.  fish. 

fpoitrail,  a.m.  breast.,  chest.,  breast- 

poivre.  s.m.  pepper.  [plata. 

pnlaire,  adj.  polfir. 

pOle.  s  m.  pole. 

poli,  e.  adj.  polished,  polite. 

poliment.  adv.  civilly,  politely. 

polir,  V.  a.  to  polish. 

pomme,  s.  f .  apple  ;  —  de  terre,  po- 
tato. 

ponctuellement,  adv.  punctually. 

pont.  s.m.  bridge,  deck. 

populaire,  adj.  popular. 

port,  s.m.  port,  luirh/r. 

fportail,  s.m.  (31)  front,  door-way, 
portal. 

porte,  s.f.  door,  gate. 

porte-erayon.  s.m.  pencil-case. 

portefeuille,  s.m.  portfolio,  pocket- 
liook. 

portemanteau,  s.m.  portmanteau. 

porte-monnaie,  s.m.  parse. 

porte-plume,  am.  penholder. 

port>  e,  8.f.  compass,  range;  a  or  & 
la  —  de,  within  reach  of. 

porter,  v.a.n.  to  carry,  to  bear,  to 
take,  to  bring,  to  wear,  to  induce  ; 
se  -  ,  v.r.  to  bear,  to  be  inclined, 
to  do,  to  be;  comment  vous  portez- 
vouz  ?  h/>w  do  yoH  d/)^  iow  are 
youf 

portion,  s.f.  portion,  share 

portrait,  s.m.  portrait,  picture. 

portugais,  e,  adj.  s.  Portuguese. 

poser,  v.a.n.  to  place,  to  put,  to  set, 
P>  lay  or  put  (dxnvn).  to  7'est,  to 
lie.  to  po.se  ;  se  — ,  v.  r.  t^}  perch^ 
to  oliyM,  to  tcike  a  position. 


VOCABULARY. 


425 


pomti-f,  ve,  adj.  p>MtJirp, 
posscder,  v  a.  to  ^J'av.vc-v.v,  to  hare. 
posfiihle,  a<lj.  pfMsi/fi/'. 
poasible.    8.  in.   fHu^xihiW >f .    iitinjn<t  ; 
faii*e  son  — ,  to  <ht  inir''x  ntiWNtt. 

postc,  8.  f.  /wx/.,  jmst-ojfiGir. 

poste.  s.m.  ;vAv/.  xOili^m. 

ix>t,  R.m.  jttt,JM/,  r/en-. 

pou,  s.m.  lnt/.<<f. 

p<mce.  8.m.  thtiwh,  inch. 

|»oudre,  s.  f.  /wwder^  duH  ;  —  a  can- 
non, ffu/ipf/tPfier. 

poule,  R.f.  /tch,  pfMil. 

pouls.  ».  m.   pidae. 

poumon.  8  ra.  li/jtffx,  litn^. 

poupc  K.f.  nt.er'i;  fxntp, 

pour.  Y»rep.  ('Xt.  2  57)  for,  on  nr- 
c/nint  '>J\  for  the  xokr  r/f,  tufnt-rdit^ 
(854)  iti  order  t"^  o.i.  thot/f/h,  per  ; 
—  que.  in  ort/er  thot  ;  comnie 
— ,  '"<  if,  'fx  luncJt  O.H. 

pouqjre.  R.ni.f.  pt/rjiie. 

puiquoi,  conj.  adv.  tnhj/ ;  c'ost — , 
therefore. 

pourri.  e,  adj.  R.m    rottv.n. 

pourrir.  v. an.  t»  rot. 

poursuite,  «.f  p'tmuit. 

^ursuivre.  v.a.n.  ir.  (lH)  to  pur- 
sue^ to  foiitno^  to  go  on.  with,  to 
profifcafe. 

pourtanfc,  adv.  yet,  though,  h/tm- 
ener,  xtiil. 

pourvoir,  v.a.n.  ir.  (190)  to  provide, 
to  .suppiff  ;  se  — ,  v.r.  to  proriile 
oneself. 

pourvu.  part.  conj.  prorided. 

pousser,  v,a.n.  to  pu.ih,  to  dnce^  to 
urge,  to  grmo. 

poussiore,  8.  f .  dmt ;  il  fait  de  la  — , 
it  i»  di/Mi/. 

pouvoir,  v.a.n.  ir.  (190,  291,  32:j) 
to  be  able,  turn,  to  be  able  to  do, 
may;  n'en  —  plu8,  to  be  eac- 
houtfted  ;  cela  se  pent,  f/oit  nmy 
be  ;  il  se  pent  que,  it  niay  be  that ; 
je  u'y  puis  rien,  f  eaimM  help  it; 
pnisHicz-vous !  may  ytm!  on  ne 
peut  raieux.  oa  well  tat  jKMtsible. 

pouvoir,  8.111.  jxt'ixr. 

pratique,  r  f.  practice^  cimtom^  cus- 
tomer. 


pratique,  adj.  practieM. 
precaution,  s.f.  precaution,  caution, 
precepteur,  s.m.  tutor,  preGept(Tr. 
]>rccieu-x,   se,    adj.    jyrecious,    vol- 

"obi,e. 
pr     piter,  v.a.  to  precipitate^  tokuri 

oi-  (Ltxh  down. 
prOcis.  e.  adj.  precise,  formoL. 
pi-.jcisoniciit,  adv.  precisely. 
prudire,  v.a.  ir.  (173)  to  foreteU,  to 

]tredicL 
prcforableraent,  adv.  (180)  prefer- 

oMy. 
pr  cither,  v.a.  to  prefer. 
projudiciable,  adj.  prejudicial,   in- 

jnruniJi. 
prein-ier,  iere,  adj.  first. 
premier,  a.  m.  firsL 
premiorement,  adv.  first,  firstly,  in 

the  firxt  pUice. 
prendre.  v.a.n.  to  take,  to  seize,  to 

eMitrh,  to  take  up;  se  — ,  v.r.  to  be 

cdof/ht,  to  catch,  to  set  about ;  s'y 

— ,  <V>  proceed,  to  go  to  work. 
preparer,   v.a.    to  prepare,   to  get 

rendy. 
pres.  prep,    near,  by,  close,  to.,  al- 

mo.xt ;   tout  — ,    Tiery  near,   clos% 

by  ;  {\\ 0 )  —  de  la,  ii'i  theneighbor- 

hood  ;  a  peu  -%,  nearly. 
presbytcre,  s.m.  parsomige. 
prescrire,  v  a.n.  ir.  (17(5)  prescribe, 
present,  s.m.  present,  gift,  present 

tense  ;  h.  — ,  at  present.,  now. 
prcsentement,  adv.  nmjo. 
presenter,  v.a.  to  present,  to  offer. 
preserver,  v  a.  to  preserve,  to  keep, 
president,  8.m.  president. 
pr.  sider,  v.n.  to  preside. 
presque,   adv.   abnost,   neaAy ;   — 

pas.  scarcely,  scarcely  any. 
presqu'ile,  s.f.  penimula. 
presse,  e.  adj.  in  haste,  in  a  hurry, 

anxious. 
pressentir,   v.a.  ir.  (184)  to  haee  a 

presentimeM  of,  to  foresee. 
prcsser,  v.a.n.  to  pre^s,  to  squeeze^ 

to  urgf^  to  hurry. 
presumcr.  v.a.  to  presume,  suppose* 
prct,  e,  adj.  ready,  disponed. 
prctendre,    v.a,u.  to  claim,  to  pf& 


€26 


VOCABULARY. 


tend^  to  lay  elnim  to,  to  prefitime, 
to  jyrofe<K,  to  iutearL  to  mtaii. 

prtter,  v.a.n.  to  lend  ;  se  — ,  v.r.  to 
coiwjyly. 

pretexte,  8.m  pretext,  'pretence. 

pri  tre,  s.m  'priest. 

preuve,  sf.  proof,  evidence. 

prcvaloir,  v.ii.  ir.  (101)  to  prevaU. 

provenir,  v.  a.  ir.  (\^7)  to  precede,  to 
2)revent,  to  warn,  to  inform. 

prevoir,  v.  a.  ir.  (100)  to  foresee^  to 
antbcipite,  to  provide  for  or 
ofjdinsf. 

prier,  v.a.n.  to  'pray,  to  heg,  to  re- 
(ptest,  to  ask  ;  —  en  gr.lce,  to  en- 
treat;  faire  — ,  to  send,  to  re- 
quest ;  je  V0U3  en  prie,  pray  ;  do; 
please. 

pricre,  a.f.  prayi;r,  request. 

prince,  s.m.  prince. 

princesse,  s.f.  princess. 

printemp.s,  s.m.  spring. 

pris.  e,  alj.  taken. 

prise,  s.f.  taking,  capture,  prize; 
t'tre  aux  — s,  to  he  fighting. 

{msrne,  s.  m.  prixni. 

prisonn-ier,  iere,  s.m.f.  prisoner. 

priver.  v.  a  to  dejrrire,  to  hrreave  ; 
se  — ,  v.r.  tr)  deprioe  oneself. 

prix,  8.nu  price,  cost,  value,  icorth, 
jirize  ;  tie  — ,  ixl^aiJile. 

probablemeut,  adv.  probably,  likely. 

probit6,  s.f.  probity,  Jtonefty. 

prochain,  e,  adj    next,  ndirest. 

prochain.  .s.m.  neighbirr. 

proche,  adj.  prep.  adv.  near,  close. 

production,  s.f.  production. 

produire.  v.  a.  ir.  (172)  to  produce, 
//>  yield,  to  Jtear,  to  show,  to  bring. 

produit,  8,m.  jn'oduce,  proceeds,  pro- 
duct. 

professenr,  s.m.    professor,  teacher, 

profil.  s.  m.  profile.  [master. 

profiter,  v.n.  to  profit,  to  take  ad- 
vanta(.'3,  to  avail  oneself 

profond.  e.  adj.  deeq^.  profound. 

profoudoment,  adv.  deeply.,  pro- 
foundly. 

pro^rcs,  s.m.  progres'^. 

prolonger,  v. a.  to  prolong,  toextcndy 
to  protract. 


promenade,  s.f.  promenads,  loalk- 
ing.  It)  ft  Ik  ;  —  a  cheval.  ride  ; 
—  en  bateau,  sail,  row  ;  — ^  pied, 
walk  ;  —  en  voiture,  drive. 

promener,  v.  a.  to  take  out,  to  ta>ki 
far  a  walk,  to  tarn;  se  — ,  v.r. 
to  take  a  walk,  take  an  airing^ 
to  wander. 

proinHsae,  af.  promise,  word. 
i  proaiettre,  v.a.n.  ir.    i.180)   to  pro- 
i      nme. 

\  promis,  e,  adj  s.  engaged,  promised. 
j  prompt,  e,  adj.  prompt,  quick^ 
j      speedy. 

'  prompteraent,        adv.       promptly^ 
quickly. . 

prononcer,  v.a.n.  ti  profwunce,  to 
utter. 

prophc'tie,  s.f.  prophecy. 

propos.  s.m.  talk,  speech,  d'lsconrse ; 
a  — ,  tAt  the  purpose,  proper,  in 
good  time  ;  a  — !  by  the  bye  .t  a.  — 
de.  with  regard  to. 

proposer,  v.  a.  to  projiose,  to  offer. 

pro'ire.  adj.  own,  proper,  peculiar^ 
di-an.  tidy. 

proprement,  adv.  prfrperly. 

proprictaire,  s.m.f.  owner,  proprie- 
tor. 

proprictc,  s.  f.  property.,  peculiarity^ 
pnriwiety. 

prospcritc,  s.f.  prosperity. 

protec-teur,  trice,  s.  adj.  protector^ 
protectress. 

protection,  s.f.  patronage. 

proteijfer.  v.  a.  (07)  to  protect. 

protester,  v.a.n.  to  protest. 

proue,  s.f.  jyrow.  .^teni. 

provenir,  v.n.  ir.  (l;J5.  187)  to  'pro- 
ceed, to  arise. 

providence,  s.f.  Providence. 

provision,  s.f.  provision,  sxqyply^ 
xtore. 

provoquer,  v.  a.  to  provoke. 

I)rudonieut.  adv   prudently. 

prudence,  s.f.  pradence,  discretiun.' 

prudent,  e.  adj.  prudent 

prune,  s.f.  plum. 

Frusse  (la),  s  f.  Prussia. 

psaume.  s  m.  psalm. 

publi-c,  que,  adj.  pabfic. 


VOCABULARY. 


427 


pniB.  adv.  tJien^  afterwards,  hmdes. 
puiser,  v.  a.  t(j  draw. 
puisque,  conj.  aince. 
jmissamment,  adv.  p&tJDerfuUy . 
puissance,  s.l  paicer. 
puuir,  v.a.  to  puiiuh. 
punition,  8.f.  '})iuii<hment. 
pupille,  8.in.f,  ward,  p  1(2^11. 
piipitre,  8.  in.  denk. 
pn--,  e,  adj.  pure,  reai. 
pdsillanime,  adj.  j)asiUanimous 


Q. 


I*  indicates  that  qn  m  noundM  as 
'*  Aquatic."  fu.  all  other  c<u<ej<, 
qu  M  nouaded  like  k. ) 

*quadru|ie(le,  adj.  s.in.  fou?  -fotd&f, 
tjiiiidniptd. 

quaiite,  8  f .  qualitif,  propirty,  ca- 
paiuty. 

quand,  adv.  when,  wluit  time. 

quand,  conj.  (:{20)  although,  though; 
—  iiniue,  Uiomjh.  although,  even 
if.  notwithntanding. 

quant  a,  prep,  with  regard  to,  (in 
to.  as  for. 

quanti -me,  a.m.  day  of  the  mouth. 

quantite,  H.f.  quantity. 

quariinte,  adj.  s.  forty. 

quarantiome,  adj.  8.  fortieth. 

quart,  s.m.  quarter,  fnirth ;  — 
-d'heure,  quarter  of  an  hmr. 

quartier,  8.m.  quarter.,  piecey  dis- 
trict. 

quatorze.  adj.  s.in.  fourteen,  four- 
teenth. 

qnatorzicme,  adj.  s.m.  fourteenth. 

quatif.  adj    a  ui.  fntr,  fourth. 

quatre-vinj^t-dix.  adj.  eighty. 

qualrc-vin^H   udj.  Hghty. 

qn!itri(infi,  adj.  n.f.  fourth. 

quatriujiif.nuuit,  adv  foiniJdy. 

^ualrieunal,  e.  a<lj.  quadrennial. 


quo,  qu',  pron.  finterrog.  .22,  2(14; 
2«»r.,  relat.  125.  2(57)  wh/)in.  that, 
which.  iJuit.  what ;  qu'est  ce  que, 
itc.     V.  2()4. 

que,  adv.  how,  how  much,  lum 
many. 

que,  qu',  conj.  (\iS'-)\  with  indicat., 
:J07;  with  subjunct.,  29!,  810, 
2:}5-:5:J2 ;  with  comp.  of  pret. 
820,  hut,  only,  ,57;  than,  2«;{) 
that,  ax,  when,  than.  Hum  that, 
how.  how  many.  what.  why.  till, 
while.,  whether,  if,  let,  lest,  for 
fear,  except,  but,  unlexs.  after, 
only.  but.  yet.  still.  )y)t  with  stand- 
ing, although,  since,  [sometimes 
untranslated]. 

quel.  le,  adj.  ((32)  what,  which  ;  — 
que,  irhatevei',  whoecer. 

quelconque,  adj.  (7(>)  whatever,  any. 

quelque,  adj.  CZ^-l)  some,  any,  a 
few.  w/uitccer ;  —  chose,  some- 
thing, anything  ;  avoir  —  cho.se, 
^')2)  /«/  be  the  matter  with. 

qnoltjue,  adv.  (26\)  however,  aboutj 
sfHiie. 

qu«4(iuefois,  adv.  sometimes. 

quel<iu'un,  e,  pron.  (27(J)  somebody, 
some  one,  one,  anybody,  any  one, 
any. 

queUiuea-uns,  uues,  pron.  pi.  some, 
any.  a  few. 

querelle,  s.f.  quarrel,  row. 

qu.  rir,  v.a.ir.  (180)  to  seek,  to  fetch, 

question,  s.f.  question,,  query. 

queue,  .s.f.  tail,  end.  cue. 

qui,  pron.  (interrog.  122,  2(54 ; 
relat.  125,  2(57;  after  superlat. 
822)  who,  whom,  which,  that, 
some ;  —  est-ce  — ,  wlio,  who- 
soevei' ;  —  que  ce  soit,  (282)  who- 
ever  ;  a  —  est,  whose  i«. 

quiconque,  pron.  (282)  wJioeoCT^ 
wlnnnsococr. 

quint,  adj.  the  fifth. 

quiiizaine,  s.  f .  fifteen,  fortnight. 

quiiize.  adj.  s.  in  fiffren.  fifteen tJi  ; 
—  jcmrs.  (>f)  fortnight  :  d'au- 
jourd'hui  en  — ,  this  day  fort- 
night. 

quiuziciue,  adj.  s.  fifteenth. 


428 


VOCABULARY. 


quitter,   v.  a.    to  quit,   to  leave,  to 

part  with. 
♦quoi,   pron.    (122,    125,   255,  270) 

which,    that,    wJiat;    de    — ,  of 

which,  of  what. 
♦quoique,     conj.     (163)    ciUhougL, 

though. 


raccommoder,  v. a.  to  mend,  repair. 

raconter,  v.  a.  to  relate,  to  tcU. 

radoub,  s.ra.  (22)  reptiruj.  repair. 

rafraichir,  v.a.n.   to  cool,  to  refresh. 

rage,  s.  f.  rage,  inadaesta. 

Kiisin,  H.m.  grapes,  raiitin. 

raison,  s.f.  reason,  sense,  judg- 
ment, satlsftctioa;  a  —  de,  <U 
the  rate  of,  in  proportion  to  ;  en 
—  de,  in  considertition  of ;  avoir 
— ,  to  be  right  ;  rendre  —  de.  tx) 
give  an  nccount  of,  to  give  satis- 
faction for. 

rallier,  v.  a.  to  rally. 

ramasser,  v.  a.  to  gather,  to  pick  up. 

rame,  s.f.  oar,  ream. 

ramener,  v.  a.  to  bring  back. 

rameur,  s.m.  rower,  oarsman. 

ranger,  v. a.  to  range,  to  put  in 
order,  t.o  put  in  its  place,  draw  up. 

rapidement,  adv.  rapidly. 

rapid itc,  s.f.  rapidity,  swiftness. 

rappeler,  v.  a.  (9(5)  to  aiU  back,  to 
recall,  Vj  remember  ;  se  — ,  v.r.  to 
re-CfUect,  to  remember. 

rapporter,  v.a.n.  to  bring  back,  to 
rejtort. 

rapprendre,  v.  a.  ir.  (181)  to  learn 
ngnin. 

rate.  !ulj    rare,  .soiree. 

Direinont.  luiv    ^id'fo.n.  rarely. 

raser.  v.  a.  toshtr<-{of).  t>  raze,  to 
raxe. 

rasHHsier,  v. a.  f"  khUhU..  to  pM,  to 
surfeit  :  ^-Xi^i  xin^ix^xd  de,  to  be 
tired  of. 


rassembler,  v.  a.  to  assemble  ;  se  — ^ 

v.r.  to  asse/nble,  to  meet,  tocrtnod. 
rayer,  v. a.  to  scratch,  to  erase. 
rayon,  s.m.  7'ay,  beam,  shelf. 
reb.itir,  v.  a.  t(/  rebuild. 
rebattre,  v.a   to  beat  again. 
rebelle,  adj.  s.  rebelli*/us.  rebel. 
rebut,  8.ia.  repubte.  rebuff,  refuse. 
rebuter,  v.a.  to  reject,  to  disccmrage; 

se  — .  v.r.  to  be  disheartened. 
reception,   s.f.    reception,  draiDing- 

room. 
recevoir,  v.a.n.  to  receive,  entertain^ 

to  adiTut. 
reci  ercher,   v.a.    to  seek  again  or 

after,  to  sea  reft. 
rocit,  s.m   recital,  account. 
recommender.  v  a.  lo  recommend ; 

se — -.  v.r.  to  rrOft'ntnend  oneself . 
rccompen.se,  s.f  rnrard. 
rccoinpeasor,   v  a.,    fo    reward,    to 

r-'frnpen-sate. 
reconduii-e.  v.a.   ir.    (\TZ)  to  lead  oi 

take   back,   to  ^iccompany,  to  S66 

home. 
reconnaissance.    8.f.    gratitude,   rt- 

Cf>gniVu>n,  nckrbowledgment. 
reconnaissaut,     e,     adj.     grateful, 

thankful. 
reconnaitre,   v.a.  ir.   (179)  to  know 

again,    to  recognize,    to  acknow- 
ledge, P>  admit,  to  reconnoitre. 
recouqu6rir.  v.a.  ir.  (188),  to  recon- 
quer, to  regain. 
recoudre.  v.a.  ir   (174)  to. Hero  again. 
recourir,  v.n.  ir.  {\'^\)to  run  again^ 

to  have  reamrse. 
recours.  8.m.  recourse,  refuge. 
recouvrir,    v  a.    ir.    (185)   to    cover 

again  or  over,  to  cover. 
recreer,  v.  a.  to  create  anew,  revive. 
rccrire,  v.a.  ir.  il7(>)  t(/  write  again, 

to  answer. 
recroitre.    v.n.     ir.     (178)   to  grow 

again. 
re(^:u,  e,  acij.  rerHved. 
re»^*u.  s.m.  ncelpt. 
frecueillir,  v.a.   ir.    (184)  to  gather, 

to  reap,  to  cxjllect. 
recuire,  v.a.  ir.  (172)  to  ...  to  cook 

again. 


VOCABULARY. 


429 


redescendre.  v.n.a.  to  descend  a  gain  ^ 

to  go  d/jinn  agnin. 
redevenir,  v.n.  ir.  (187)   to   become 

agdin. 
redevoir,  v.  a.  ir.  (189)  lo  owe  ntUl. 
redinj^ote,  s-f.  ocerc/xit. 
redire,  v.a.  ir,  (172)  fe  7'epent,  to  say 

or  tell  (igai/i,  to  object;   trouver 

a  — ,  frri  dire,  to  Jind  fault. 
redoubler,  v.n.a.  to  redouble,  to  in- 
crease. 
redoutable,  adj.  fonnidable. 
redresser,  v.  a.  to  straighten,  to  set 

right. 
roduire.  v.  a.  ir.  (172)  to  reduce,  to 

coaxtrain,  to  compel;   ee — ,  v.r. 

to  be  reduced. 
reel,  ie.  adj.  /v/t/,  true. 
rcolire.  v.  a.  ir.  (177)  to  re-elect. 
roelleuient,  adv.  r&iUy. 
refaire,  v. a.  ir.  {IHO t  to  ina/ce again, 

to  ineiid. 
rcfugier  (se),  v.r.  to  take  refuge  or 

s?ieiter. 
refus,  a.in.  refusal,  denial. 
refuser,  v.a.n.  to  refuse,  to  decline ; 

86  — ,  V.  r.  to  deny  oneself. 
r%al,  8.m.  entertainment,  feast. 
regard,  s.m.  look,  glance;   — s,  pL 

eytn,  altentioTi,  notice. 
regarder,  v.a.  u.  to  look  at,  to  behold, 

to  see,  to  consider.,  to  concern. 
regiment,  s.m.  regiment. 
rdgle,  s.f.  rule^  ruler. 
regler,  v.a.  to  rule,  to  regulate,  to 

settle. 
regret,  s.m.  regret,  grief,  sorro^w. 
regretter,  v.a.  to  regret. 
rogul-ier,  icre,  adj.  regular. 
reiue,  s.f.  queen. 
re  Jeter,  v.a.n.  (90)  to  throm  again,  to 

throw  back. 
rejoindre,    v.a.     ir.    (175)    ^  join  \ 

again.  \ 

rejouir.  v.a    tf   rejoice,  to  cheer ;  se 

--,   v.r.   (i;}9)   njoice.    f/t  delight, 

Vf  be  glad.  j 

lelever,  v  a.n.  to  raise,  to  take  up, 

^    gire  a  reU-fh,    to  retort,  to  re- 
lit .re. 
religion,  H.i.  reliyioa. 


relire,  v.a.  ir.   (177)  to  read  {oxer) 

again. 
reluire,   v.n.   ir.   (171)  to  shine,    to 

glitter. 
reraurquable,  adj.  remarkable. 
remarquablement,     adv.     remark- 
ably. 
remcde,  s.m.  remedy.    . 
remedier,  v.n.  to  remedy,  to  help. 
reraener,  v.  a.  (90)  to  take  or  carry 

or  lead  back. 
remettre,  v.a.   ir.  (180)  to  put  back 

{again),  to  restore,  to  put  off,  to 

remit. 
remonter,  v.a.n.    to  go  up  again  or 

back,  to  wind  up,  to  remount. 
remoudre,    v.a.    ir.    (175)  to  grind 

again. 
remplir,  v.  a.  fc  fill  {again  or  up),  to 

perform,  tofuljil. 
remporter,    v.a.   to  carry   or   taka 

back,  to  obtain,  to  gain,  carry  oJ)\ 
remuer,  v.a.n.  to  mooe. 
renaitre,  v.n,   ir.   (181)    to  be  bt/rn 

again,    to  come  to  life  again,    to 

spring  up  or  rise  again. 
renard.  am.  frx. 
rencontre,  s.f.  meeting,  encounter; 

aller  or  venir  a  la  —  de,  (242)  to 

go  or  come  to  meet. 
rencontrer,  v.a.n,  to  meet  (with),  to 

fiad,  to  en,couuter  ;   se  — ,  v.  r.  to 

meet. 
rendormir,  v.a.  ir.   (183)   to  lull  to 

steep  again  ;   se  — ,    v.r.    to  fall 

asleep  or  go  to  sleeji  again. 
rendre.  v.a.  to  return.,  to  give  back, 

to  surrender,  to  make,  to  render, 

U)  translate,   to  pay  ;   se  — ,  v.r 

t<f  render  or  make  oneself,  to  sur- 
render, to  be  translated. 
r'^ne,  s.f,  rein. 

rerjfenuer.  v.a   to  shut  up,  contain. 
renommo,  e.  adj.  renoinned,  J'amotis. 
reiioiicer,  v.n.  to  renounce,  girt  up 
renouveler,  v.a   (9(j)  t<.  renew. 
reutrer,    v.n.     to    return,    to  come 

Itoine  or  in  again  ;  v.a.  to  pat  {in) 

again  or  back. 
repaitre,  (178)  se  — ,  v.r.  tofeetl,  to 

feauL 


430 


VOCABULARY. 


repandre,  v. a.  to  Hpread,  to  shed,  to 

HCiitter  ;  se — ,  v.  r.  to  spread 
reparaitre,  v.n.  ir.  {\7H)  tu re(t]>pear. 
reparer.  v.  a.   to  rrpoir,  to  mend,  to 

rnoke  ameiuh  for. 
lepartir,    v.n.   ir.    (183)    to  set  out 

again ,  to  reply. 
lopartir.  v.  a.  to  divide,  to  distribute. 
re] 'as.  s.m.  meal,  repaxt. 
repasser,   v.a.n.    to  paxn  again,    to 

rrfxiHs,  to  iron,  to  go  or  kxfk  over. 
repcindre,  v  a.  to  paint  again. 
repoiitir  (se),  v.r.  ir.  (184)  t/)  repent. 
repentir,  s.m.  repe/itance. 
repcter,  v. a.  to  repeat,  to  reheai'ne. 
repetition,  s.f.  repetitio)/,  rehearxal. 
replacer,  v.  a.  to  replace, to  pvthack. 
repliquer.  v.a.n.  to  reply,  toanawer, 

to  rejoiji.. 
repoudre.  v.a.n  t^  answer,  to  reply, 

to  corieypond^    to   reapond,    to  be 

rex]>oii,sibie. 
reposnr  (se).  v.r.  to  rent. 
refjousser.  v  a.n.  t<>»imrn,  U>  reject. 
repreudre.    va.n.    ir.    (181)  to  take 

or    catch    again,    to  reprove,    t  • 

ceaxare,  to  hlatne. 
reprosenter,  v.a.n.    to  represent,  to 

perform. 
reprimander,  v.  a.  to  reprimand,  to 

/•'  ]  trove. 
roprimer,  v. a.  to  repress,  to  restrain. 
rcproeb'i,   s.m.   rewoach ;  sans  — , 

blanidess. 
reprocher,  v.  a.  to  reproach,  to  up- 
braid. 
reproduire,  v.  a.  ir.   (172)  to  repro- 
duce;  se — ,  v.r.   to  reappear,  to 

occur  again. 
reprouver,  v.  a.  to  disaqyiyrove  of. 
frepugner,  v.n.  to  be  repugnant,  to 

feel  reluctant. 
requorir,  v.a.  ir.  (188)  to  request,  to 

claim. 
reserve,    s.f.    reservation,    reserve., 

reserves  ;  a  la  —  de.  except. 
fresigner,  v.a    to  resign  ;  se  — ,  to 

reingn.  oneaelf^  to  nubniit. 
rcsister,  v.n.  to  res:,»t,  to  (/j>j>o.s-f\ 
rosolut'oii,  8.1.  rcsol/ition.  re^oloe. 
roauiiuer,  v.n.  Lo  resound,  to  tclut. 


resoudre.  v.a.  ir.  (175)  to  resolve^  U 
solve ;  se  — ,  v.  r.  to  resolve,  to 
■make  up  one^s  mind. 

respect,  s.m.  respect,  awe. 

respecter,  v.a.  to  re^pe/it,  to  rerere, 

respectueu-x,  se,  adj.  respectful. 

ressemblant,  e,  adj.  alike,  similar. 

ressembler,  v.n.  to  7'esem^le,  to  be 
or  h/ok  like ;  se  — ,  v  r  to  be 
alike. 

resseutiment,  s.m.  resentment. 

ressentir,  v.a.  ir.  (184)  to  feel,  inex- 
perience. 

ressort,  s.  ra.  spring,  lock,  elasticity^ 
strciiglh,  means. 

ressortir,  v.n.  (184)  to  go  or  came 
out  again,  to  resort. 

ressouvenir  (se),  v.r  ir.  (187)  to  re- 
member, to  recollect;  faire  — ,  to 
reniiruL 

ressouvenir,  s  m.  remembrance.,  re- 
collection. 

reste.  s.m.  rest,  remainder,  re- 
mains,  remnant ;  au  — ,  du  — , 

,    besides,  hoicerer,  yet. 

rest^r.  v.n.  (l;>())  b*  remain,  to  be 
Ufi,  to  stay  {b(hind),  to  keep. 

restreindre,  v.a  ir.  (I7i))  to restri<it, 
to  rextrai/k.  to  limit. 

retard,  s. m.  dilay,  slowness ;  en  — , 
late,  behind  one^s  time. 

retenir,  v.a.  ir.  (187)  to  get  back,  to 
keep  back,  to  detain.,  to  retain,  to 
keep,  to  hokt  hack  or  up,  to  re- 
strain, to  carry;  se — ,  v.r.  to 
refrain ,  to  restrain  oneself. 

retirer,  v.a.  to  draw  back,  to  draw 
out  or  in,  to  withdraw,  to  retire  ; 
se — ,  v.r.  to  withdraw,  to  retire^ 
to  retreat. 

re  tour,  s.ra.  return,  caming  back; 
—  sur  soi-mi  me,  reflection  on 
one\s  own  conduct ;  de  — ,  return- 
ed, back. 

retoumer.  v.a.ii.  to  return,  to  go 
back  {again),  to  turn  {up). 

retraite,  s.  t.  retreat,  retirement. 

rutrouvcr,  v.a.  to  find  again,  to  re- 
corer.  to  meet  again. 

reunion,  s.f.  reunion.,  unian,  meet- 
ing. 


VOCABULARY. 


431 


r6tinir,  v.  a.  to  reunite^  to  unite,  to 
c^jUe'Ct. 

reussir,  v.n,  to  succeed,  to  get  on. 

rove,  s.m.  dream. 

f  re  veil,  s.m.  awaking,  alarm,  re- 
veille. 

revenir,  v.n.  ir.  (135, 187),  to  retvrn, 
to  come  back,  to  come  round,  to  re- 
cover, to  come  to,  to  recur,  to  cost, 
to  be  reconciled  or  aqvpeased. 

revers,  8.m.  back^  wrong  side,  re- 
terse. 

revetir,  v. a.  ir.  (183)  to  dotJte,  to 
put  on. 

revivre,  v.n,  ir.  (181)  to  come  to  life 
again,  to  revive. 

revoir,  v.  a.  ir.  (192)  to  see  again,  to 
meet  again,  to  revise;  au  — , 
goodbye  ox  farewell. 

revolter,  v.  a.  to  rquse  or  cause  to  re- 
volt, to  revolt ;  se  — ,  v.r.  to  rebel. 

Bhin,  P.m.  Rhine. 

rhume,  s.m.  cold 

riche,    adj .  s.    rich,    weidthy ;   ctre 

—  de,  to  possexfi. 

ricbesse,  s.f.  ric/te^s.  w&Uth,  richness. 

ridicule,  adj.  ridic'tlous. 

ridicule,  s.m.  ridicule,  ridiculous 
thing,  reticule. 

rien,  adv.  (57,  159,  275)  anything, 
nothing,  nobody,  no  one ;  n'avoir 
— ,  nothing  to  be  the  matter  with  ; 

—  que,  ordy ;   —  moins  que,  no 
Uhs  than. 

rien,  8.m,  nothing,  trifle. 

rincer,  v.  a.  to  rinse. 

rire,  v.n.  ir.  (107,  194)  to  laugh,  to 

smile,  to  joke  ;  —  aux  eclats,  to 

burst  out  laughing  ;  se  —  de,  to 

laugh  at. 
rire,  s.m.  laughter,  laughing,  laugJu 
rLaible,  adj.  risible,  laughable. 
riaquo,  8.m.  risk,  hazard. 
rioquer,  v.a.n.  to  risk,  to  hazard,  to 

venture. 
rivage,  s.m.  shore,  bank. 
rive,  s.f.  bank,  shore,  border. 
riviere,  s.f.  ricer. 
riz,  s.m.  rice. 
robe,  s.f.  dresn,  gown. 
robuBte,  adj.  robust,  luirdy. 


roc,  s.m.  rock, 

roche,  s.f.  rock. 

rocber,  .s.m  rock 

roder,  v.n.   to  prowl,  to  rainble.,  to 

rove,  to  roam. 
roi.  s.m.  king. 
romain,  e,  adj.  s.  Roman. 
rompre,   v.a.n.    (107)    to  breaky   to 

break  off,  to  interrupt. 
rond,  e,  adj.  round,  rounded. 
ronde,  s.f.  round,  heat. 
rong-er,  v.  a.  to  gnaw,  to  nibble. 
rofjtuu,  s.m.  reed. 
rosier,  s.m.  rose-bush. 
roue,  s.f.  wheel. 

rougir,  v.  a.  n.  to  redden,  to  blush. 
rouler,  v.a.n.  to  roll  (up),  to  whedy 

to  turn. 
route,  s.f.  road,  route,  way,  course; 

grande  — ,  highroad. 
rouvrir,  v.  a.  ir.  (185)  to  reopen^  to 

open  again. 
royal,  e,  adj.  royal,  regal. 
royaume,  s.m   ki/igdom. 
ruban.  s.m.  ribbon.,  string. 
rue,  s.f.  street. 
ruine.  s.f.  ruin,  decay. 
ruiner,  v.a.n.  to  rum,  to  destroy, 
russe,  adj.  s.m.f.  Russian. 
Russie  (la),  8.f.  Rus»ia. 


s'  [an  elision  for  se  and  also  for  Bi], 
sa,  adj.  poss.  f.  ?ier  (own).      V.  sou, 
sacrifier,  v.a.n.  to  sacrifice,  devote. 
sag-e,  adj.  wise,  sensible,  good. 
sagemeut,  adv.  windy,  sensibly. 
sagease,  s.f.  wisdom. 
fsaillir,  v.n.   reg.  and  ir.   (185)  to 

project,  to  stand  out,  to  gush,  to 

gush  out. 
sain,  e,  adj.  sound,  healthy. 
saint,  e,  adj.  s.  Ju>ly,  sacred. 
saisir,    v. a.    to  seize,    to    grasp,   to 

catch,   to  lay  hold  of,  to  under* 

stand. 


432 


VOCABTTLATIY. 


saison,  s.f.  aenunn,  time. 

Balir,  v.a.  to  soil,  to  ninke.  dirtif. 

saJle,  8.  f.  hnll,  room ;  —  a  manger, 
dirdttg-room. 

salon,  s.m.  drnmiiiy-rooin^  saloon, 
parlf/)'. 

B-vIut,  s.m.  >*t(fMy.  xalodtioii,  salute^ 
hoiD.  henedlcturn 

Balutaire,  adj.  aalntavy,  wholesome. 

samedi.  s.m.  Stiturday. 

sang,  s.m.  f>I/>od. 

sunglant,  e,  adj.  hhxnJy. 

Bans,  prep.  (287,  800)  tcithoiit,  were 
it  not  ftrr.  but  for  ;  —  que,  intJi- 
out ;  —  cela,  —  quoi,  other  wine. 

sansonnet,  s.m.  atdriing. 

sant'-,  s.f.   health. 

satisfaire,  v.a.n.  ir.  (180)  to  satisfy, 
to  j/leasfi.  to  (jvbe  satisfaction,  to., 
to  gratify,  to  meet. 

sau-f,  ve.  adj.  spared. 

sauf,  prep.  xa.ce.  racing,  eo'eept. 

Baut,  s.m.  leap,  jump,  fall. 

Bauter,  v.n.  to  leap,  to  jump. 

sanvage,  adj.  loild,  savage,  shy. 

sauver,  v.a.  tosave^  ta rescue ;  se  — , 
V  r.  to  escape,  to  nave  oneself,  to 
flyaway. 

Bavant,  e,  adj.  s.  learned^  scientific 
m<in,  scholar. 

Bavoir,  v.a.  ir.  (191,  201  >,  to  know, 
to  be  aware  of,  to  be  atquaiiited 
with,  to  nnder^itand,  to  know  how, 
to  he  iiiform.''d  of  to  learn,  can, 
to  be  able  ;  f aire  — ,  to  let  know, 
to  inform  ;  a  — ,  — ,  viz. ,  name- 
ly, that  is  ;  je  u'en  sais  rien,  1 
donH  know  at  all. 

Mvoir,  a.m.  knowledge,  leaiming. 

eavon,  s.m.  soa,n. 

Saxe  la),  s.f.  Saxony. 

Saxon,  ne,  adj.  s.  Saxon. 

scandaliser.  v.a.  to  scindalize ;  se 
— ,  v.r.  P)  be  scandidized. 

pcolorat,  s.m.  villain,,  scoundrel. 

BC3ue,  s.f.  scene,  stage. 

Bcbisme,  s.m.  schism. 

science,  s.f,  science.,  knowledge^ 
learning. 

WMilpter,  v.a.  to  sculpture^  to  cane. 

sculpteur,  a.m.  scuii)tor,  caroer. 


sculpture,   R.f.    scvlpture,    earmng^ 

carred  work. 

se,  s',  pers.  pron.  (188)  oneself,  him- 
self, herself,  itself,  themsdves,  each 
other,  one  another,  to  oneself,  to 
himself,  to  herself,  &^c.,  to  or  with 
each  other,  in  or  within  or  with 
or  from  (uieself,  &c.,  between  ot 
among  them  or  themselves. 

see,  m.,  scche,  f. ,  adj.  dry.  hard, 

sccher,  v.a.n.  to  dry,  to  wither. 

second,  e,  adj.  second,  other. 

second,  s.m.  seco)id. 

seconde,  s.  f .  second,  second  class. 

secondement,  adv.  sec/)ndly. 

secouer,  v.a.  to  shake,  to  toss. 

secourir,  v.a.  ir.  (184)  to  succor^  to 
rdieoe,  to  assint.  to  help. 

secours,  s  m.  sncctrr,  relief,  helpj 
rescue  /  au  —  !  help ! 

secr-et,  ete,  adj.  secret,  reserved. 

secret,  s.m   secret,  secrecy. 

se<Ution,  s.f.  sedition. 

seditieu-x,  se.  adj.  seditifpiis. 

scduire,  v.a.  ir.  (172)  to  seduce^  to 
bribe,  to  tempt. 

sein.  s.m.  bosom,  breast. 

Seine,  s.f.  Sein''. 

seize,  adj   s.m.  sixteen,  sixteenth, 

seizieine,  adj   s.  sixteenth. 

sejour,  s.m.  stay. 

sel,  s.m.  S(dt. 

selle,  s.f.  saddle. 

selon,  prep,  according  to. 

semaine,  s.f.  week 

semblai)le,  adj.  alike,  like,  such. 

semblant,  s.  m.  se/nblance,  preteh  't; 
faire  — ,  to  pretend.,  to  app,  vr 
as  if. 

sembler,  v.n.  to  seem,  to  aitpea-i  ; 
que  vous  en  sembleV  what  da 
you  think  ofitf 

semelle,  s.f.  sole. 

semer,  v.a.n.  to  sow,  to  scatter,  catt, 

semi,  adj.  semi.  demi.  hdf. 

souat,  s  m.  senate. 

sjaateur.  s.m.  senator. 

sens,  s  m.  sense. 

sense,  e,  adj.  sensible. 

sensibilitf^,  s.f.  stnsibiUty,  feeliiif, 

sensible,  adj.  se/isible,  sensitive. 


VOCABULARY. 


438 


•entier,  ^.ra..  footpath,  path. 
sentiment,   am.   i^e/i-sation,  feeling^ 

xejUimeut. 
sentineile,  s.f.  se/Ui/iel,  sentry. 
eentir,    v.a.n.    ir.    (184)   to  fe^,  to 

ismdl^  to  tuKte,  to  mnell  of.,  to  taste., 

to  percdce, 
seoir,  v.  a.  ir.  (198)  to  fit. 
separation,  s.f.  reparation. 
Bepare,  e,  adj.  !<ep<irate,  distinct. 
scparer,  v.  a.  to  separate^  to  dicide. 
sept,  adj.  s,m.  seven. 
septembre,  8.m.  >e]>tember. 
septieme,  adj.  K.m.  seceutk. 
fpcrail.  s.m.  iseiagiio. 
serieu  .k,    se,    adj.    serimm.,    grave., 

eartiext. 
serpent,  s  m.  serpent.,  snake, 
Bcrvante,  s. f.  (mold)  yer rant. 
service,    s.m.     xcrclce.    attendance, 

dulij  ;  rendre  — ,  to  do  a  faror. 
serviette,  s.f.    napkin. 
eervir,   v.a.n.  ir.   (1»S'{)  t(i  «crce,   to 

Willi  vfx)n ,  to  be  of  xervlce  or  use 

to,  to  xerce  up,  tfi  hel/^j ;   le  diner 

est  servi,  dinner  Is  ready  ;   se  — , 

V.  r.  ti>  help  onendf  to  he  served  up; 

—  de,  V*  1/se.  to  (wail  onenelf  of. 
serviteur.  s.m.  mrrant. 
servitude,  s.f.   sercitnde. 
ses.  adj.  poss.  pi.  m.f.  (()4).    V.  son. 
fse.uil.  8.m.  thrcx/oM.  sill. 
seal,  e.  adj.  ah/ie,  by  onesdf  lonely., 

oidi^.  nliujle. 
sen  I,  e.  s.m.f.  <me.  mie  fd«>ne. 
senlement,  adv.  (290;  only,  merely, 

Xtllclf/. 

pevcre,  adj.  severe,  xti-irt. 
Bovcreraent,  adv.  severely,  sternly. 
so vo rite,  s.f.  severity,  strict/iess. 
si,  s\  conj.   (16;{,  HIG,  320,  32;{),  if, 

whether,  tJtough,  sujypose  ;  que  — , 

and  if. 
8i,  adv.  so  niiich^  (201)  yes ;  —  bien 

que,  so  mad)  so  Hint. 
siecle,  s.m.  century,  age. 
Bieg^G,  s.  ra.  nent.  siege. 
Bleu,  ne,  pron.  poKs.  (241)    le  — ,  la 

— lie,   les  — s.    les  — nes.  his,  his 

own,  hers,  her  mon,  its,  its  own, 

mn^s  own,  of  his.  of  hers. 


sitrlement,  s.m.    whistling,    hissing^ 
hiM. 

sitaer,  v.n.a.  tf?  whittle,  to  fUss. 

siriier,  a.m.  whistle,  hiss. 

signal,  s.m.  dgMd. 

silence,  s.m.  siU-n^e,  pa/fise. 

simple,  adj.  simple,  single,  plain^ 
sUly. 

sill  core,  adj.  sincere,  true. 

sinccrement,  adv.  sincerely. 

sinccritc,  s.f.  sincerity. 

singe,  s.m.  ape,  monkey. 

singularite,  s.f.  singularity,  pecuU- 
arity. 

aingul-ier,  icre,  adj.  singular,  pecu- 
liar. 

sinon,  conj.  otherwise,  or  else,  if 
not,  except. 

sirop.  s.m.  sirup,  syrup. 

sitOt,  adv.  .w  soon,  as  soon. 

situe.  e,  adj.  situated. 

six,  adj.  s.m.  six.  sixth. 

sixieme,  adj.  s.m.  sirth. 

sixiemement,  adv.  sixthly. 

Sixte,  s.m.  Sixtiis. 

sooiote,  s.f.  Hociety,  company. 

soeur.  s-f.  .tister. 

soi.  pron.  (111.257)  oneself  itsdf^ 
Idniscif,  lirfisi'lf,  themselves;  — 
-mime,  o/oeself  itself,  etc. 

soi-disant.  adj.  leuiM-be,  so-ca'led. 

soie,  s  f.  siik. 

soif.  s  f.  fJdrat ;  avoir  — ,  to  bB 
thirsty. 

fsoigner,  v.  a.  to  take  care  of,  to  at- 
tend, to  nurse. 

fsoigiieiinoineiit,  adv.  carefully. 

.fsoigncu-x.  se,  adj.  careful. 

soin,  8.  m.  care  ;  — s,  pi.  attendance; 
avoir  —  de,  (52)  t"  tiike  are  of ; 
donner  des  — s  a,  to  attend. 

soir,  s.m.  evening,  night. 

soiree,  s.f.  evening,  evening  party. 

soit,  int.  he  it  s<tJ  y.(  it  he  s,t !  let  it 
be  f  very  weU  J  ireli ! 

soit,  adv.  either,  nr.  either  frimt.^ 
witetherfivm;  — <|ue,  tchethov,  >>r, 

soixantaine,  s,f.  sixty. 

soixante,  adj.  sixty; dix,  seveitjf, 

soixantiJme,  adj.  s.m,  sia^ieth, 

sol,  8.m.  soil 


434 


VOCABULARY. 


fsoleil,  s.m.  ^un. 

Bolennel.  le.  adj.  sdemn. 

Rolide,   adj.  s.m.   solid,  substantial^ 

strong,  yxxl,  rml. 
eolidement,    adv.    soiidly,  strongh/, 

finitly. 
golidite,  s.f.  solidity,  strength. 
politaire,  adj.  s<Altiiry^  lonely. 
Rolliciteur.  am.  s-^icitor,  canvasser. 
Kombre,  adj.  darky  gloomy. 
somrne,  si  sum.  nmmint. 
|5omme,  8.  m.  7mp,  deep. 
f  sommeil,   s.  m.   deep  ;  avoir  — ,  to 

he.  deepy. 
Bommer.    v.  a.    to  snminon,   to  sum 

ton.  sii,  pi    ses,  posa   adj.  {(y4,2i\), 

hijt  {oipit),  her  (otpn\   its   {ocan), 

o^ii/fM  ( (jifiii)    their  {oton). 
song-er,  r  a  n.  P>  dreniiK  to  think^  to 

rnitmdrr 
soiiner.  v.a.n  t>>  ntfiiiid.  P>  ring,  to 

strike  ;  oa  «i>ime,  tJie  hdl  riitgs. 
sonae.te.  s.f.  heU. 

sort,  ».xn.  fate,  lot,  fortune,  chance, 
eorte,  ».  f.   sort,  kind,   manner  ;  de 

la  — ,  thus  St)  ;   de  '/r  en  —  que, 

so  that,   s(j  as;   de  telle  — ,  in 

snch  n  tnnnner ;  en   qnelque  —  , 

in  n  yntmner. 
sortie,  8.f.  going  ont,  sally,  exit. 
sortir,  v.n.    ir.  (1;3(>,  ISl)  to  go  out, 

t*>  leave  {the  room),  to  luioe  but 

just  left. 
sot,  te,  adj  ftwUsh,  sUly. 
Bot,  te,  &.n\.L  fo(Ay  bU/ckkead. 
sottise.  s.f.  foUy.  foolish  thing. 
son,  s.m.  fenny. 
souci,  s.m.  care,  anxiety. 
soucier  (se),  v.  r.  to  care,  to  mind,  to 

iHsh,  to  like,  to  want. 
Foudiiin,  e,  adj.  sudden. 
soiul.iia,   soudainemeut,  adv.    s^id- 
«ouffrance.  s-f.  suffering.        \de)dy. 
»4»uii"r:mt,  e.  adj.  .suffering. 
sonfh-ir,  v.a.n.  ir.  (185)  to  suffer,  to 

ht',ir.    to  a(k>LP.    to  be  pained  or 

yriet-ed,. 
«uu]iait^r,  v.  a.   to  winli,  to  desire,  to 

w£»h  for. 


soul,  adj.  &m.  (24)  satiated,  JUL 
soulever,  v.  a.  to  lift,  toiaise. 
Soulier,  s.m.  shoe. 
soumcttre,  v.  a.  ir.  (180)  to  subdm 

to  submit. 
soup(^on,      s.m.     suspicion,     toud 

taste. 
soui)yonner,  v.  a.  to  stispect. 
soup(^onneu-x,  se,  adj.  swijncimis. 
soupe,  s.  f .  soup  ;   —  au  lait,  mif/ 

porridge. 
source,  s.f.  spring,  source. 
sou  roil,  s.  m.  eye-brow,  brmo. 
sourd,  e,  adj.  deaf,  insensible. 
sourdre,  v.n.  ir.  (11)8;  to  spring  {vp 

gufih  (forth.) 
sourire.  v.n.  py  smile. 
souris,  s-f.  mouse. 
80UH.  prep,  under,  bdoio,  beneath. 
son.scrire,  v.a.n.    ir.    (176)    to  sul 

xcrlbe,  to  xign,  to  consent. 
soustrure.    v.  a.   ir.    (174)    to  tah 

away,  to  Hubtract ;   se  — ,  v.r.  i 

escape,  to  avoid. 
soutenir,  v.a.n.  ir,  {\S7)  to  smyport 

to  sustain,   to  -maintain,  to  kee 

up,  to  npJiold ;  se — ,  v.r.  to  su% 

jyort  oneself,  to  bear  iip. 
soutenu,  e,  adj.  supported,  kept  uj. 

unjlugging.  unremitting. 
soufcerrain,    e,    adj.     underground:^ 

'^nhterraneao. 
souvenir  (se),    v.r.  ir.   (187)    to  n 
■  member,    to  recollect,    to  bear  i 

mind;   faire   — ,    to  remind;   : 

m'en  souvient,  /  remember  it. 
souvenir,  .s.m.    remembrance,  reco 

lection,  keepmke. 
souvent,  adv.  often  ;  le  plus  — ,  mot 

frequently. 
souverain,  e,  s.  adj.   sovei'eign,  su 
i      preme. 

j  spectacle,     s.m.      speetade,     s7iou 
'      theatre. 

spirituel,   le,  adj.  spiritual,  inteSi 
'      'ji  nt.  witty. 
stairnant,  e.  adj   stagnant. 
strict,  e,  adj.  .strict,  ri(/orf>u». 
style.  s.m.  style. 
subir,  V  a.  to  suffer,  toeudart, 
.  subitemeut,  adv.  suddetUy. 


VOCABULARY. 


435 


fiubsister,  v.n.  to  subsist^  to  exist,  to  I 
live,  to  continue.  j 

Bubvenir,  v.n.  ir.  (187)  to  supply,  to  \ 
promle,  to  relieve. 

succeder.  v.n.  to  sricceed,  tofoUow. 

succes,  a.m.  success. 

succession,  s.f.  succession,  inheri- 
tance. 

Sucre,  s.ra.  sugar. 

Sucre,  e,  adj.  sugared,  honeyed. 

sud.  s.ra.  south. 

Suede  (la),  s.f.  Sweden. 

Bucdois,  e,  adj.  s.  Swedish,  Swede. 

sueur,  s.f.  perspiration. 

suffire,  v.n.  ir.  (171)  t^)  suffice. 

suffisant,  e,  adj.  s.  xiiffident.  enough. 

fiuggerer,  v. a.  to  nugge.'st,  to  intimate. 

Suisse  (la),  s.f.  Switzerland. 

Suisse,  s.ra.  Smiss. 

suite,  8.f.  rest,  attendants,  continu- 
ation, sequel.,  succes.sion,  can- 
sc(/uence,  result  ;  a  la  —  de,  with, 
after  ;  de  — ,  cotixfcutindy.  iinme- 
diately  ;  par  —  de,  in  c<)nnequence 
of ;  tout  de  — ,  immediately,  di- 
rectly, at  once. 

duivaut,  e,  adj.  s  following,  nejrt. 

fiuivaut.  prop,  according  to  ;  —  que, 
iin^  according  as. 

suivi,  e,  adj.  folhwcd. 

fiuivre,  v.a.n.  ir.  (174)  to  follow,  to 
go  or  comf-  after,  to  pursue. 

sujet,  te.  adj.  Hubject.  lifihlf;.  inclined. 

sujet.  te,  s.m.f.  subject,  felhw. 

sujet,  s.  m.  subject,  cau^e,  reason. 

snperbe,  adj.  proud,  su,perb. 

Bupcrieur,  c,  s.  adj.  superior,  above. 

suporiorito,  s.f.  superiority. 

8uppl6er,  v.a.n,  to  sufrply,  to  take 
the  plitce  of. 

Bupplice,  8.m.  executifjn. 

Bupplier,  v.a.  to  supplicate,  to  be- 
seech, to  entreat. 

supportable,  adj.  supportable,  toler- 
aJM. 

supporter,  v.a.  to  support,  to  sus- 
tain, to  Mtajtd. 

suppose,  e,  adj.  supposed;  — que, 
supposing. 

Buppo.ser,  v.a.  to  supjKMc,  to  imply. 

ouppuHJtion,  «.f.  suppoHitian. 


supprimer,  v.  a.  to  .mpprcss,  to  omit. 

supreme,  adj.  supreme. 

sur,  e,  adj.  sure,  certain,  safe,  con- 
fident; pour  — ,  for  certain, 
surely. 

sur,  prep.  (JiOl,  303,  804)  on,  upon, 
abate,  about,  iDith,  by,  concerning^ 
on  account  of ;  —  ce,  thereupon. 

Bureau,  s.m.  elder,  elder-tree. 

Bureau  d'Bspagne,  s.m.  lilac  bush. 

surement,  adv.  surdy,  certainly. 

stlretc,  s.f.  safety,  security. 

surf  aire,  v.a.n.  ir.  (180)  to  ask  too 
much  for. 

sunnouter,  v.a.  to  surmount,  to  over- 
come. 

sumommer,  v.a.  t^  surname. 

surprendre,  v.  a.  ir.  (181)  to  surprise, 
to  take  by  surprise,  to  catch,  to 
overhear. 

surpris,  e,  adj.  surprised,  of  sur- 
prise. 

Hurseoir.  v.a.n.  ir.  (1S)8)  to  suspend, 
Ut  put  off. 

surtont,  adv.  particularly,  above  aU. 

surtout,  s.m.  overcoat. 

f surveillance,  s.f.  superintendence » 
watch. 

survenir,  v.n.  ir.  (135,  187)  to  com^ 
une-rpectfidly.  to  happen,  to  bcf<dl. 

survivre,  v.a.n.  ir.  (181)  to  survive^ 
to  outlive. 

suspect,  e,  adj.  svj<pi.cious,  suspected. 

suspendre,  v.a.  to  suspend,  to  Jiang 
up,  to  stop,  to  defer. 

svelte,  adj.  slender. 

syllabe,  s.f.  syllable. 

syniphonie,  s.f.  symplwny, 

syrop.      y.  sirop. 


ta,  adj.  poss.  f.    V.  ton. 
tabac,  s.m.  tobacco. 
table,  s.f.  table,  index;  — ji manger, 
dining-table. 


436 


VOCABULARY. 


tableau,  s.m.  (SO)  painting,  picture, 
table. 

tache,  s.f.  spot,  stain,  blemish. 

tache,  s.f.  task,  job. 

tacher,  v.n.  to  endeavor,  to  try. 

ftailler,  v. a.  to  cut,  to  carce,  to 
make,  to  mend. 

ftailleur,  s.m.  taihr. 

taire,  v. a.  ir.  (Xl^)  to  say  nothing  of  ; 
faire  — ,  to  silence  ;  se  — ,  v.r.  to 
Iwld  one's  tongue  or  peace,  to  be 
silent. 

talent,  s.m.  talent. 

tant,  adv.  so  much,  as  much,  so 
many,  as  many ;  —  mieux,  so 
tniich  the  better  ;  —  pis,  w  much 
the  xnorse  ;  —  que,  asi  far  as  ;  si 
—  est  (jue,  if  it  is  true  that. 

tante,  s.f.  aunt. 

tantot,  adv.  by  and  by,  presently, 
nearly. 

taon,  s.m.  horse-fly, 

tapis,  s.m.  carpet,  rug. 

tard,  adv.  late ;  au  plus  — ,  at  the 
latest. 

tarder,  v.n.  to  delay,  to  be  long;  U 
me  tarde  de,  1  long  to. 

tarte,  s.f.  tar-t. 

tas,  s.m.  heap,  pile.  lot. 

tasse,  s.f.  cup ;  —  a  the,  tea-cup. 

Tasse  (le),  s.m.  7Vw.vo. 

taureau,  s.m.  bidl. 

te,  t',  pers.  pron.  (114,  138)  yon, 
thee,  to  you,  to  thee,  at  you  or 
thee,  for  you  or  thee,  with  you  or 
thee,  in  you  or  thee,  from  you  or 
thee,  yourself,  thyself,  to  ycmrsdf 
to  thysdf. 

teindre,  v. a.  ir.  (175)  to  dye,  to  color, 
to  stain. 

tel,  le,  adj.  (276)  such,  like,  similar, 
so,  many  a,  many  a  man,  many, 
some,  any ;  un  — ,  une  —  le,  so 
and  so. 

Telemaque,  s.m.  Telemachus. 

tellement,  adv.  so  much  so  ;  —  que, 
so  that. 

ftemoigner,  v.a.n.  to  testify. 

t^moin,  s  m.  witness,  testimony. 

temps'te,  s.f.  stm'm,  tempest. 

♦^emps,  8.m.  time,  weatJier  ;   de  —  a 


autre,  de  —  en  — ,  from  time  tt 
time,  now  and  then  ;  I'aire  beau 
or  mauvais  — ,  to  be  fine  or  bad 
wenlher  ;  quel  —  fait-il  ?  AfyiC  is 
the  weather  f 

tendre,  adj.  tender,  affecting. 

tendre.  v.a.n.  to  stretch,  to  hold  out, 
to  lead,  to  tend,  aim,  intend. 

tendrement,  adv.  tenderly. 

tendrosse,  s.f.  tender n ens. 

tcncbres,  s.f.  pi.   darknes<<: 

tenir,  v.a.n.  ir.  (187)  to  hold,  to  keep, 
to  h'ld  fast,  to  occupy,  to  possess. 
to  take,  to  stick,  to  be  anxious,  to  be 
desirous,  to  care  ;  (impers.)  to  de- 
pend ;  (mil.)  to  holdout;  je  n'y 
"tiens  plus,  /  cannot  stand  it  ((tiy 
longer,  I  don'' t  care  for  it  anymore; 
il  ne  tient  qu'a  vous  de,  it  only 
depends  on  you  to ;  se  — ,  v.r.  to 
keep,  to  stay,  to  remain,  to  be 
held  ;  se  -r-  debout,  to  stand  up  ; 
se  —  pour,  to  consider  onendf ; 
I  s'en  —  a,  to  rely  on,  to  abide  by ; 
'      s'en  —  la.  to  step  .short. 

tenter,  v. a.  to  attempt,  to  tempt. 

terme,  s.m.  bound,  time,  icord. 

terminaison,  s.f.  termination,  end- 
ing. 

terminer,  v  a.  to  terminate,  to  end, 

to  doxe. 
!  terrain,  s.m.  ground,  plot. 
:  terre.  s  f .  exirth,  ground,  soil,  land, 
\      estate,   world;   —    sainte,    Iloly 
Land. 

terrestre,  adj.  ttrresti'ial,  earthly. 

terreur,  s.f.  terror,  dread. 

terrible,  adj.  terrible,  dreadful, 
wild. 

territoire,  s.m.  terntory. 

tes,  adj.  poss.  pi.      V.  ton. 

testa-teur,  trice,  s.m.f.  testator, 
testatrix. 

t'*'te,  s.f.  head,  top,  brains,  wits. 

the,  s.m.  tea,  tea-party. 

theme,  s.m.  theme,  exercise. 

thym,  s.m.  thyme. 

tien,  ne,  pron.  poss.  (241)  le  — ,  les 
— s,  la  — ne,  les  — nos,  thine,  thy 
own,  yours,  pour  own. 

tierce,  s.f.  third. 


VOCABULARY. 


437 


tiers,  m. ,  tierce,  f.  adj.  thirds  of  a 
third  'perxon. 

tiers,  8.m.  third. 

tij^e,  s.f.  Htcin,  atulk^  trunk. 

tij^re,  s.ra.  tiger. 

tire-bot.tcs,  .s.m.  boi)t-jnck. 

tire-boucbon,  s.m.  cork-acrew. 

tirer,  v  a.n.  to  draw,  to  shoot.,  to 
fire.,  to  c.vtnfct,  to  pull  {of  or  out)  ,\ 
Be  — ,  v.r.  to(/et  out  (of) ;  s'cn  — , 
to  acquit  oueaelf. 

tissu,  s.m.  <m?y«,  texture. 

toi,  pers.  pron.  (110)  yon.,  thee.,  tlum; 
rathne,  ymtr.felf.,  thyself. 

toile,  s  f .  doth,  liaea,  canvas,  cur- 
tain 

toit,  8.  ra.  roof. 

tomber,  v.n.  (185)  to  ftU. 

ton,  poss.  adj.  (04)  thy,  thy  aion, 
your,  your  own. 

tonneau,  s.m.  ca^k,  tub. 

tonner,  v.n.  to  thunder. 

tonnerre,  s.m,  thunder. 

torride,  adj.  t&rrid. 

tort,  8.  m  wrong,  fault  ;  avoir  — , 
to  he  in  the  wrong;  faire  — a, 
to  wrong,  to  injure. 

tot,  adv.  fioon,  early ;  —  ou  tard, 
sooner  or  later  ;  au  plus  — ,  as 
soon  as  'posf^ibU. 

touchant,  prep.  (301)  concerning, 
about. 

toucher,  v. a.n.  to  touch,  to  feel,  to 
pUty,  to  strike,  to  move,  to  border, 
to  he  near,  to  draw,  to  join. 

tou jours,  adv.  always,  ezer. 

tour,  s.f.  tower,  (chess)  castle,  rook. 

tour,  8.m.  turn,  round,  winding, 
revolution,  tri/p,  trick,  feat ;  faire 
le  —  de,  to  go  round. 

tourraent,  s  m.  torment. 

tourmenter,  v. a.  to  torment,  to  tease. 

toumebroche,  s.m.  turnspit. 

toumer,  v. a.n.  to  turn,  to  turn 
round. 

tout,  e,  adj.  (76)  aU,  whole,  every. 

tout,  s.m.  (279)  all,  whole,  every- 
thing ;  du  — ,  not  at  all ;  pas  or 
point  du  — .  not  at  all ;  rien  du 
— ,  nothing  at  aU. 

tout,   fuiv.    wfioUy,   entirely,   quite., 


all,  very,  much,  jvM,  however, 
thongh  ;  —  coinme,  j>  st  as  or 
like ;  —  a  fait,  adv.  quite,  <dto- 
gcther. 

toutefois,  adv.  Ivowever,  nevertheless, 
yet,  still. 

trad  aire,  v  a.  ir  (172)  to  translate. 

tra'iir,  v. a.  to  betray. 

trainer,  v.  a.n.  to  drag,  to  trail,  to 
carry  about,  to  lag,  to  linger. 

traire.  v.  a.  ir.  (174)  to  milk. 

trait,  s.m.  shaft,  arrow,  draught, 
nfroke,  act,  trn it.  feature. 

traiteuient,  s,m.  treatment,  usage. 

traiter.  v.  a.n.  to  treat,  to  deal  with, 
to  nt'gotiate. 

trai-tre,  tresse,  adj.  s,  treacherous, 
traitor 

tranquiile,  adj.  quiet,  still,  tranquil, 
calm  ;  sois  or  soy  z  — ,  keep  your 
mind  easif,  don't  bt  uifeasy,  never 
feur  ;  restez  — ,  be  or  keep  quiet ; 
laisvsez  moi  — ,  l>a,'-e  me  alone. 

tranquilleineut,  adv.  quietly. 

trauHcrire,  v  a,  ir,  (176)  to  Iran- 
scribe,  to  copy. 

transjjresser.  v. a.  Ut  tranjigress. 

transiti-f,  ve,  adj.  transitive. 

transmettre,  v.a,  ir,  (180)  to  trans- 
mit, to  convey. 

transport,  s.m.  transport,  convey- 
ance, rapture. 

transporter,  v.a.  to  ti'anspoi't,  to 
enrapture. 

jtravail,  s.m.  (31)  labor,  toil,  pains, 
work. 

ftravailler,  v.n. a.  to  work,  to  labor, 
to  toil. 

travers,  s.m.  breadth,  whim,  caprice; 
a  — ,  acrjss,  tJwrougJi  ;  au  —  de, 
through. 

traverser,  v.a.n.  to  cross,  to  go  or 
pass  or  run  through. 

treize,  adj.  s.  m.  thirteen,  thirteenth 

treizicme,  adj.  s.  thirteenth. 

trembler,  v  n.  (330)  to  tremble. 

tremper,  v.  a.  n.  to  steep,  to  soak,  to 
temper,  to  wet. 

trentaine,  s.f.  thirty. 

trente,  adj    s.m.  thirty,  thirty^ 

treuticme,  adj.  s.m.  thirtieUi. 


438 


VOCABULARY. 


trcpas,  s.m.  deat?i,  d^cefme. 

trcs,  adv.  very,  very  miLcli^  most. 

trcHor,  s.m.  trerM/ire. 

ftros.saillir,  v.n.  ir.  (185)  to  start,  to 
thrill. 

tribun,  s.m.  tribune. 

triomphe,  s.m.  triumph. 

triomphei,  v.n.  to  triumph,  to  ex- 
ult. 

triste,  adj.  snd,  melancholy,  duU, 
sorrowful,  dixmal,  po//r. 

tristerneut,  adv.  Sddly.  sorrowfully. 

tristesse,  s.f.  sadness,  dulness,  sor- 
row. 

Troie.  s.f.  Troy. 

trois,  adj.  s.m.  three. 

troisieme,  adj.  s.m.f.  third,  third 
floor. 

troisi6mement,  adv.  thirdly. 

trorape,  s.f.  horn,  trumpet^  (253) 
trunk. 

tromper,  v.  a.  to  deceive,  to  cheat, 
to  disappoint ;  se  — ,  v.r.  to  make 
a  mistake,  to  be  mistaken. 

trompette,  s.f.  trumpet;  —  8.m. 
trumpeter. 

trone,  s.m.  throne. 

trop,  adv.  U)o.  too  much,  too  many  ; 
—  peu,  too  little,  Um  few  ;  de  — , 
too  much,  too  many,  over,  in  the 
way;  par  — ,  too,  too  much  ;  je 
ne  sais  (pas)  — ,  /  hardly  know. 

trou,  s.m.  hole,  gap. 

troupe,  s.f.  troo]i,  band,  company, 
flock,  herd,  soldiers. 

troupeau,  s.m.  flock,  herd. 

trouver,  v.  a.  to  find,  to  meet  with,  to 
think  ;  se  — ,  v.r.  to  find  or  meet 
each  other,  to  be,  find  ®r  feel  one- 
self, to  be  found,  to  hapypen  ;  se  — 
avec,  to  meet ;  se  —  bien,  to  de- 
Hce  benefit ;  se  —  mal,  to  fare 
iU. 

tu,  pers.  pron.  (114)  thoai,  you. 

tuer,  v.a.  t<j  kill,  to  slay,  slaughter. 

tumulte,  s.m.  tumult,  riot. 

tur-c,  que,  adj.  s.  Turkish,  Turk. 

Turquie  (la),  s.f.  Turkey. 

tuteur,  s.m.  guardian,  trustee. 

tu  trice,  8.f.  truxtee. 

byrau,  8.m.  tyrant. 


u. 

ubiquite,  s.f.  ubiquity. 

uu,  e,  s.m.   adj.   art.   oiie,   a,  an; 

V — ,  the  one,  one  ;  V—  I'autre,  lea 

— s,  les  autres,  (278)  one  another^ 

each  other  ;   V —  et  I'autre,  both  ; 

les  -=-s  et  les  autres,  everybody,  nU; 

V —  ou  I'autre,  either;   ni  Y — ni 

I'autre,  neither. 
uni,  e,  adj.  even,  united. 
unieme,  adj.  first. 
unir,  v.a.  to  unite,  to  join. 
usage,  s.m.  usage,  luibit,  practice^ 

cu.Htom. 
user,  v.a.n.  to  rise,   to  make  use,  to 

comume,  to  wear  out. 
ustensile,  s.m.  utensil,  implement, 
utile,  adj.  useful. 


vache.  s.f.  cow. 

vaciller,  v.n.  to  vacillate. 

va^ie.  s.f.  wav'',  surge. 

\'\aA\\vi.m.mevi.t,iiAv. valiantly, biavely. 

fvaillani;,  e,  adj.  valiant. 

vain,  e,  adj.  vain,  fruitless,  useless. 

vainGre,v.a.  ir.  (174)  to  conquei\  to 
vanquish,  to  subdue. 

vaisseau,  s.m.  ship,  vessel. 

valet,  B.XQ..  footman,  valet,  knave. 

valeur,  s.f.'  value,  loorth;  — s,  pi. 
(com.)  pa/per,  bills;  de — ,  valu- 
able. 

valloe.  s.f.  valley. 

vallon,  s.m.  valley,  vale. 

valoir,  v.n. a.  ir.  (191)  to  be  worthy 
to  be  good,  to  be  or  to  be  worth  {as 
much  as),  to  yield  ;  —  mieux,  to 
be  better,  to  be  worth  more ;  ne 
—  rien,  to  be  good  for  nothing. 

vanter,  v.a.  to  praise,  to  boast. 

vapeur,  s.f.  vapor,  .steam,  smoke. 

vase,  s.m.  vessel,  vase. 


VOCABULARY. 


439 


vean,  s.m.  calf^  -Deal. 

fveille,  s.f.  waking^  watch^  day  or 
night,  before^  eve. 

fveiller,  v.n.a.  to  be  or  keep  awake., 
to  sit  or  stay  up,  to  watch. 

velours,  s.m.  velvet. 

vendre,  v.  a.  (105)  to  sell,  to  sell  for. 

veridredi.  s.m.  Fmiay. 

vengeance,  s.f.  vengeance.,  revenge. 

venger,  v.  a.  to  revenge,  to  avenge, 
resent. 

venir,  v.n.  ir.  (1,35,  187)  to  come.,  to 
come  in  or  on  or  along,  to  come 
and,  to  hnftpen,  to  occur  ;  —  a,  to 
Jui/pj^en  to,  should,  were  to  ;  —  de, 
(203)  to  hate  or  he  just  {gone  out., 
etc.) ;  faire  — ,  to  send,  for. 

Venise,  s.f.   Venice. 

vent,  s.m.  wind ;  en  plein  — ,  in  Vie 
open  air. 

ventre,  s.m.  stomach,  belly. 

ver,  s.m.  worm;  —  a  soie,  silk- 
worm. 

verbe.  s.m.  verb. 

verger,  ».ra.  orchard. 

veritc,  s.  f .  truth  ;  a  la  — ,  indeed.,  it 
is  true. 

verre,  s.nj.  glass ;  —  ^  vin,  wine- 
glass. 

vers.  prep.  (209)  towards,  about. 

version,  s.f.  version.,  translation. 

vert,  e,  adj.  green. 

veit,  s.m.  green,  grass. 

vertu,  s.f.  virtue,  property. 

vertuen-x,  se.  adj.  virtiu)us. 

Vcsuve,  s.m.   Vesuvius. 

vtteraent,    s.m.    garment,    clothes, 
dress. 
tir,  v.a.  ir.  (183)  to  clothe,  to  dress. 

'  i-f,  ve,  s.m.f.  adj.  wid<mer, 
iririmo,  widmoed. 

vexer,  v.a.  to  vex,  to  annoy. 

^iaude,  s.f.  meat,  fwd. 

vicBT^.m.  rice,  defect. 

victoire,  s.f.  victory,  Victona. 

victorieu-x,  se,  adj.  victorious. 

vider,  v.a.  to  empty,  to  settle. 

vie,  s.f.  life.,  living ;  en  — ,  alive., 
living ;  rendre  la  —  dure  a,  tx) 
make  miserable. 

fvieil,  Jo,  adj.  e.      V.  Vienx. 


fvleillard,  s.m.  old  man. 

fvieil lesse,  s.f.  old  age. 

fvie.illir,  v.n.  (136)  to  grow  old. 

Vienne,  s.f.   Vienna. 

fvieux,  vieil,  ra.  vieille,  f .  adj.  old^ 

aged. 
fvieux,  vieille.  s.m.f.  something  old^ 

old  man,  old  rooman. 
vi-f,  ve.  adj.  alive.,  live,  quick,  lively, 

sharp. 
fvigne,  s.f.  vine,  vineyard. 
vigoureu-x,  se,  adj.  vigorous,  deter- 

mined. 
village,  s  m.  village.  [tryman. 

villageois.   e,  s.m.f.   villager,  coun-- 
ville,  8.f.  toum,  city. 
vin,  s.m.  wine. 
vinaigre,  s.m.  vinegar. 
vingt,  adj   s.m.  twenty. 
vingtaine,  s.f.  twenty,  score, 
vingtieme,  adj.  ticentieth. 
violette,  s.f.  violet. 
violon,  s.m.  violin. 
vis.  s.f.  screw. 

visage,  s.m.  face,  countenance. 
vis-a-vis,  adv.  prep,  opponite, 
viser,  v.n.a.  to  aim  (at),  to  sign. 
visible,  adj.  to  be  seen,  visible. 
visiblcinent,  adv.  visibly. 
visir,  s.m.  vizier. 
visite,  s.f.  visit,  call ;  faire  or  rendre 

— ,  to  pay  a  visit. 
Vistule,  s.f.    Vistula. 
vite,  adj.  quick,  swift. 
vite,  adv.  quickly,  directly;  au  plus, 

— ,  as  quickly  or  as  fast  as  pos- 
sible ;  faire  — ,  to  be  quick. 
vitement.  adv.  quickly. 
Vitesse,  s.f.  speed,  quwkness. 
vivacite,  s.f.  vivacity,  liveliness. 
vivant,  e,  adj.  living,  ali-oe. 
vivre,  v.n.  ir.  (181)   to  live;   savoir 

— ,  to  have  {good)  manners. 
vivre,  s.m.  food ;  — s,  pi.  provisions, 

victuals. 
voeu,  s.  m.  vow,  wish,  prayer. 
voguer,  v.n.  to  row,  to  sail,  to  go. 
voici,  prep.   (32)  Jiere  is,  here  are, 

this    is,   these  are;    le  — ,   hsre 

he  is  ;  me  — ,  Jiere  I  am, 
vole,  s.f.  way,  road. 


440 


VOCABULARY. 


voila,     prep,     (32)    behold^     look! 

there  !  there  or  here  w,  there  are, 

that  is,  tJwse  are ;  le  — ,  there  lie 

w  ;  me  — ,  here  I  am. 
voile,  s.m.  veil. 
voile,  s.f.  sail ;  a  la  — ,  under  sail ; 

f aire  — ,  to  sail ;   mettre  a  la  — , 

to  sail. 
voir,  v.a.n.  ir.  (192)  to  see,  to  behold; 

to  look  (at  or  on)  ;   faire   — ,   to 

show  ;  voyons  !  let  us  see  !  mine  ! 
voisin,  e,  adj.  neighboring .,  n^ar. 
voisin,  e,  s.m.f.  neighbor. 
voisinage,  s.m.  neighb'>rhood. 
voiture,  s.f.  vehicle,  c-irridge.  coach. 
voix,   s.  f .   voice,  vote ;  i  haute  — , 

loudly. 
vol,    s.m.    stealing,    tlteft ;   au  — , 

fiying,  on  the  wing. 
voler,  v.n.   to  Jfy  ;  — ,  v.a.  to  steal, 

to  rob. 
voleu-r,  se,  8,m.  f.  thief,  robber ;  au 

—  !  stop  thief! 
volontiers,  adv.  willingly,  gladly. 
vos,   adj.   poss.   pi.  m.f.   (64,   240) 

your,  yyur  oion. 
votre,   adj.  poss.    (64)  your^  your 

own. 
votre,  pron.  poss.  (125)  yours,  your 

own  ;  le  — ,  la  — ,  lea  — s,  yours., 

your  own. 
vouer,  v.a.  to  vow,  to  devote. 
»  mloir,  va.n.  ir.  (191,  828)  to  wUl, 

to  be  willing,  to  desire,  to  like,  to 

icish,   to  want ;  en  —  a.  to  bear 

ill-will,    to   he   angry   loith ;    que 

voulez-vous  ?  what  do  you  want? 

veuillez,  please. 
Tous.    pers.    pron.    (110,    114,    138, 

25!))  you,  ye,  to  or  at  you,  for  or 

with  or  in  or  f  mm  you  ;  —  m  'me, 

yourself;  —  -memes,  yourselves. 


I  voyage,    s.m.    travelling,   journey^ 
I      <^"U'''''ff<^  /  de  — ,  travelling. 
'  yoyager,  v.  n.  to  travel. 

voyageu  r,  se.  adj.  s.  travelling,  tra- 
velier,  passenger. 

vrai,  e,  adj.  true,  real. 

vriii,  vraiment,  adv.  truly,  really, 
indeed. 

vraisemblable,  adj.  likely,  probable. 

vn,  e,  part  seen,  considering. 

vue.  s.f.  sight,  eye-night,  view,  pros- 
pect /a  —  d'ceil.  visibly ;  de  — , 
by  sight  ;  avoir  la  —  basse,  to  be 
.fhort- sighted;  perdrede — ,  tolosa 
sight  of. 


J,  adv.  there,  here,  at  home,  in; 
il  —  a,  FI  avoir ;  —  otre,  V.  otre. 

y,  pers.  pron.  (120,  258)  to  him.  him, 
to  her,  her,  to  it,  it,  to  or  on  the 
subject,  to  them,  them,  in  him,  in 
Iter,  in  it,  in  them,  about.it,  of  it^ 
for  it. 

yeux,  pi.  of  oeil  (81). 


zele,  s.m.  zeal. 
zelo,  e,  adj.  zealoifA. 
zero,  s.m.  nought,  cypher. 
zone,  s.f.  zone. 


ENGLISH-FRENCH    VOCABULARY 


OP  THE  WORDS  THAT  OCCUR   IN  THE  THEMES. 


A. 

a,  art.  (28,  34,  45,  220,  222,  244) 
WTi,  m. ,  une^  f . ,  le,  m. ,  to,  f . ,  les, 
pi. ,  par. 

able,  adj.  capable  (dfe),  en  etat  {(ie); 
to  be  —  to,  pouvair  (ir.  190), 
avoir  la  force  de. 

a")out,  prep.  (301),  (round)  autour 
rfd,  (near  to)  auprSs  de,  (with,  on 
one's  person)  sur,  (concerning) 
8ur,  au  svjet  de,  couceriiant, 
t/yft chanty  (nearly)  em^roii,  d  peu 
prh^  (on  the  point  of)  pr^s  de. 

above,  prep.  au-dessuf<  de,  par- 
des8U8,  sur,  (before,  298)  avant, 
(more  than,  301)  plus  de,  plus 
que  ;  — ,  adv.  en  haul,  (beyond) 
au-ddd  ;  —  all,  sur  tout. 

absence,  s.  absence,  f. 

absent,  adj.  absent. 

absolute,  adj.  absolu. 

absolve,  v.  a.  absoudre  (ir.  175). 

abstain,  vn.«V/ft.<*i^/aV  (rZc)  (ir.  187). 

abundance,  s.  abondance. 

abuse,  v.a.  (misuse)  abuser  de,  (ill- 
treat)  mnltraiter,  (revile)  dire  des 
injures. 

accept,  v.a.  a/^cepter,  agreer. 

accompany,  v.a.  nccnnpaqner. 

according  to,  prep,  selon,  couforme- 
meiit  d. 

accordingly,  adv.  d&ne,  c'est  pour- 
qtioi. 

account,  s.  compte,  m.,  (narrative) 
recit.,  rapport,  m.,  on  that  — , 
pour  cette  raison  ;  to  give  an  — , 
rendre  compte. 


account,    v.a.    compter;    — ,   v.n, 

rendre  compte  (de). 
accurate,  adj.  exact. 
accuse,  v.a.  accuser. 
ache,  8.  mal,  m.,  dovleur,  f. 
acknowledge,      v.a.      reconnaltre 

(avow)  aroucr. 
acquaintance,  s.  connats.'tance^  f. 
acquire,    v.a.    ftcf/u'rir    (ir.     1-87), 

unjustly  acquired,  in^d  acquit. 
acquirement,  s.  acquisitif/n,  f. 
acre,  s.  nj-pent,  m.,  demi-hectare,  m, 
across,  i)rep.  a  travers. 
act,  v.n.  agir. 
action,  s.  action,  f. 
active,  a&i.-^ctif. 
admirable,  adj.  admirable. 
admirably,  adv.    admirablement^  A 

merveiUe. 
admiral,  s.  amiral,  m. 
admire,  v.a.  admirer. 
admit,  v.a..  admettre  (ir.  180). 
adorn,  v.a.  oruer,  parer. 
advantage,  s,  avantage,  m. 
adversary,  s.  adceisaire,  ra. 
adversity,  s.  advcrsite,  f, 
advise,  v.a.n.  cnseiUer  (de  or  que). 
affable,  adj.  affuble,  grade U4C. 
affair,  s.  affair/",  t. 
attlict.  v.a.  affliger. 
afford,    v.a.    (to   give)  donner,  ac- 

corder,   (to  have  the  means)  acoif 

le  moyeu  (de). 
afraid,   adj.    effraye ;   to  be  —  o?, 

avoir  peuT  de,  craindre  (ir.    175, 

329). 
Africa,  s.  VAfrique,  f, 
after,  prep.  «pr^,  (-when  followed 


442 


VOCABULARY. 


by  a  verb)  aprh  que,  (in  imitation 

of)  d'dpres^  (according  to)   stlon^ 

»umird,  d,  hut. 
after,  adv.  ttprea^  ensuite. 
afternoon,  s.  apre.s-nddi^  in.f. 
afterwards,  adv.  apren,  ensuite. 
again,  adv.  (once  more)  de  rutuveau., 

encart^  encore  uue  fois^    (further) 

ensuite,  de  plus  ;  not  — ,  (not  any 

more)  ne .  .  .  plus ;   never — ,  ue 

.  .  .  plasjinmiis. 
against,     prep,    contre.,     (towards) 

imrs. 
age,  s.  age,  m.,  (old  age)  meiUesse,  f.  ; 

middle  — s.  moyea  age;  ten  years 

of  —  (252),  dix  (ins. 
aged,  adj.  age  (252). 
ago,  adv.  (147)  il  y  a. 
agree,  v.n.  s'accorder.,  (admit)  con- 

'cenir  de  (ir.  187),  (promise,  353) 

s'engager. 
agreeable,  adj.  agreahle. 
agreed,  adj.  d'accord^  (things)  can- 

mnu. 
agriculture,  s.  agriculture^  f. 
aid,  v.a.  aider,  assister. 
aim,  v.a.  viser  ; — ,  v.n.  tendre  (d). 
air,  s.  air^  m. ;  in  the  — ,  a  I' air. 
Alcibiades,  s.  Alcibiade,  m. 
Alexander,  s.  Alexandre^  m. 
Al,u;iers,  s.  Alger,  m. 
alike,  adj.  semblahle,  pareil. 
alive,  adj.  en  He,  tivant. 
all,  adj  s.  (70,  279)  t</ut,  Um\  pi.  ra.; 

—  that,   (127,   280)  tout  ce  qui, 

tout  ce  que. 
all,  adv.   t<nit.  entierenient ;  not  at 

— ,  pan  du  tout. 
allege,  v.a.  aUegaer. 
alley,  s.  aUee,  f. 
allow,  v.a.  pei-mettre  (de),  (ir.  180, 

327)  laiKser;  to  —  a  person  (...), 

qiermettre  d  quelqiCuib  (.  .  .). 
almost,    adv.    pre.sque^     (before  a 

numeral)  prh  de.  . 
aloud,  adv.  d  haute  voix. 
Alps,  s.  Alpcs,  f.  pi. 
already,  adv.  dejd. 
also,  adv.  aussi. 
although,  coDJ.   (103,  280,  381,  333) 

quoiqae^  bicn  que. 


altogether,  adv.  entterement,  tout 
dfait,  (at  the  same  time)  {tout)d 
laf4.s  (28(5). 

always,  adv.  toujours. 

ambassador,  s.  ambassadeur^  m. 

ambitious,  adj.  auibitieux. 

America,  s.  V Amerique,  f. 

amiable,  adj.  aiiiiable. 

among,  amongst,  prep,  parmi  (298), 
c/iez  (299),  entre. 

amuse,  v.a.  antuser. 

amusement,  s.  amusement. 

an,  art.      V.  a. 

ancestor,  s.  aieul^  m. ;  — s,  anceti'en, 
aleux,  m.  pi. 

ancient,  adj.  s.  ancien^  (old)  vie^x. 

and.  conj .  et. 

angel,  s.  ange,  m. 

anger,  s.  coLere,  f. 

angry,  adj.  fdche  ;  to  be  —  with, 
etrefdche  coat  re,  en  touhir  d. 

animal,  s.  a/timal,  m. 

animalcule,  s.  (uiimalcule. 

annexed,  adj.  (240)  ci-joint. 

annoy,  v.a.  ennvyer,  tourmenter. 

annual,  adj.  annuel. 

anoint,  v.a.  oindre  (ir.  175). 

another,  adj.  (270)  un  autre,  (after 
Vun)  Idylre^  (279),  (one  more) 
enco-re  un. 

answer,  v.a.n.  repondre  (107) ;  to  — 
my  purpose,  reniplir  niou  but. 

answer,  s.  're/^Hiny.e,  f. 

any,  adj.  qmlque,  (every)  tout, 
(anyone)  quelqifun,  (after  a 
doubt  expiessed,  or  neg.  275) 
aucnn.,  (some.  39)  du,  m.,  de  la, 
f.,  des.  pi.  (after  ]-as.  point,  or 
plus)  de,  (of  it,  of  them),  .en ; 
—  more,  encore,  (neg.)  plus. 

anybody.    ^V.  one  Tany  — ).' 

anything,-?!,  q ft elque  chose,  m.,  (neg. 
57,  275)  rien,,  m. ,  (whatever)  «7W</i 
que  ce  sait,  n^iviporte  quoi. 

apology,  s.  apologie,  f.  ;  to  make 
an  —  for,  faire  de^  excuses  de. 

appear,  v.n.  paraitre  (d),  appar- 
aitre  {a)  (ir.  178). 

appearance,  s.  a2ij)a7'en^e,i.j  air  (52), 

a])petite,  s.  ajriieh't,  m. 

applaud,  v.a.  aiyplaudir. 


VOCABULARY. 


443 


apple,  8,  pomme,  f. 

application,  s,  application^  f. 

ajipiy,  v.a.  ajtjiliquer  {d)\  — ,  v.n.r. 
ii'a'i'pliqvcr  (a),  is' adverser  {a). 

approach,  v. an.  a/pprocJier^  s^ap- 
procker. 

approach,  s,  approche,  f. 

approve,  v.a.  appro  aver  ^  recom- 
manlier. 

April,  s.  avril,  m. 

arch.  8  arche,  f. 

arm,  s.  arme,  f,  (limb)  bras ;  with 
open  — ,  d  hras  ouverts. 

army.  a.  annee^  f. 

around,  adv.  autour  de,  d  Ventour. 

around,  prep,  autour  de. 

arrest,  v.a,  arreter. 

arrive,  v.n.  arriter  {d)  (135),  (reach) 
paroeiiir  {d)  (ir,  187). 

arrow,  s.  Jleche. 

art,  8.  art,  ra. 

artist,  s.  artiste,  m. 

as,  conj.  adv.  comme^  (because) 
-parce  gue,  (since)  puisque.  (for) 
car^  (such  as)  tel  que.  (equally,  8G) 
«?/«.<<*, (after  a  comparative, 86)  que^ 
(as  much  as)  autaut  que,  (how- 
ever. 280)  tout . . .  que,  (when, 
aOS)  que. 

ashes,  s.  pi.  cendres,  f.  pi. 

ashamed,  adj.  honteux ;  to  be — , 
avoir  hontc. 

Asia.  s.  fAde.!  f. 

ask,  v.a.  dtmander  (376),  prier  {de)y 
i/iviter  {d).  (a  question)  /aire. 

asleep,  adj.  cndorini ;  to  be  — , 
dormir  (ir.  183) ;  to  fall  — ,  a'eri- 
dorniir. 

assent,  v.n.  coimeiitir  (a). 

assiduity,  s.  andduite^  f. 

assist,  v.a.n.  asaiMer. 

assistance,  s,  <M.si,staiice,  aide^  f., 
sccoum,  m. 

assure,  v.a.  iixsnrer. 

astonish,  v.a.  etoniier. 

at,  prep.  (45,  237,  296,  302)  d,  (in) 
en,  dans,  (of,  from)  de,  (by)  par, 
(on)  sur;  -  -  ...  's,  ^hez  (299). 

Atlantic,  adj.  atlantique. 

Atlautio,  8.  Atlantique,  nu 

attach,  r.a.  attacker,  s' attacker  (d). 


attack,  v.a.  attaqiier. 

attack,  s.  atlaque.  i. 

attain,  v.a.  atteindre  (ir.  175),  par- 

venir  d  (u-.  187). 
attempt,  v.a.    tenter,   essai/er  {de)^ 

chercher  (d),  vouloir  (ir.  191,  321). 
attend,    v.a.n.    faire    attention   <i, 

(be  present  at)   assister  d,    (turn 

one's  thoughts  to)  s'occuper  (de). 
attention,  s.  attention,  f. 
attentive,  adj.  attentif. 
attentively,  adv.  attentivement. 
attitude,  s.  attitude,  f. 
attract,  v.a.  attirer. 
attribute,  v.a.  ttttribuer 
August,  8.  aodt,  m. 
aunt,  8.  tante,  i. 
author,  -ess,  s.  avteur,  m. 
authority,  s.  autorite,  f. 
avarice,  s.  avarice,  f. 
avaricious,  adj.  avare. 
average,  s.  terme  nioyen. 
avoid,  v.a.  eciter,  fair  {it.  183) 
avow,  v.a.  avoner,  declarer. 
await,  v.a.  attendre. 
awake,     awaken,     v.a.n.     eveiUer^ 

s'evdller. 
aware,  adj.  infoi'me  {de) ;  to  become 

—  of,  s^ appercevoir  (de)  (ir.  189). 


B. 


back,  adv.  eii  arrih'e,   (returned)  de 

retour^  (again)  encore. 
bad,    adj.    mauvais    (corapar.    86), 

(pers  ;  wicked,  naughty)  rnechant, 

(ache)  fort,  violent. 
badly,  adv.  ma,l  (compar.  152). 
bake,  v.a.n.  cuir  (ir.  172). 
baker,  s.  btndanger,  m. 
ball.  8,  boule.  f.,    (of  thread)  pehte, 

f.,    (of  small  arms)   b(dl6,  f.,  (ol 

cannon)  botdet,  m.,  (play)  ballef  f., 

(dancing)  bal,  m. 
banker,  s.  banqaier,  in. 
banquet,  s.  banquet. 


444 


VOCABULARY. 


bare,  adj.  nu  (240). 

barefooted,  barefoot,  adj.  adv.  nu- 
pieds,  pieds  nvs. 

bark,  v.n.  ahoyer. 

barley,  s  orge,  t. 

barrenness,  s.  xtet'U/'te,  f. 

barricade,  v. a.  barrer. 

basket,  s.  pa/der,  m. 

bath,  8.  bdin,  m. 

battle,  8.  hataiUe.  f. 

bayonet,  s.  balonnette,  f, 

be,  v.n.  etre  (54, 58), (make,  60)/a«Ve 
(ir.  180),  (of  fueling  cold,  hot, 
hungry,  thirsty,  etc.,  51)  avoir ^ 
(of  one's  state  of  health.  142. 
285)  He  porter,  ne  trouver,  aller  (ir. 
194),  (of  one's  years  of  age, 
of  dimension.  252)  avoir^  (of 
weather,  daylight,  dark,  etc.,  if 
the  verb  is  imp.  with  '  ii,'  147) 
faire  (ir.  180).  (imp.  of  time  or 
distance,  140)  y  avoir;  it  is,  there 
is,  there  are,  il  y  a  ;  I  am  to  (203) 
je  doi.<< ;  it  is  you  (111)  c^est  vous  ; 
it  is  for  you  or  your  turn  (352) 
c'e.%t  di  TioUfH  ;  it  is  with  you  as,  il 
en  cut  de  vous  comme  de;  (in 
answers,  202;  idioms,  381). 

beard,  s,  bnrbe,  f. 

beat,  v.a.n   battre,  {\07)  f rapper. 

beautiful,  adj.  beau,  bel,  m.,  belle,  f. 
(79). 

beauty,  s.  beairte,  f. 

because,  conj.  par ce  que,  que;  — 
of,  a  canxe  de. 

become,  v.n.  decenir  (ir.  135,  187) 
[with  a  past  participle,  is  often 
rendered  by  the  reflective  voice  : 
as,  to  —  accustomed,  s'accou- 
tumer  ;  to —  animated,  s'animer, 
etc.] 

bed,  8.  lit,  m.  ;  out  of  — ,  leve  ;  to 
go  to  — ,  d!ler  se  coucher.  ae 
covcher  ;  —  -room.  s.  chambre  d 
coucher. 

bee.  8.  abeille,  f. 
beef,  8.  b<euf,  m. 
beer,  s.  biere.  f. 
befall,  v.n.  'irriver  {d). 

before,  prep.  (208)  (of  place)  rfc- 
vard^  (of  time,  order)  <ivaut. 


before,  adv.  (of  place")  devantj  (o£ 
time,  order)  avant,  aup<iravant. 

before,  conj.  avant  que  (333),  avant 
de,  que  .  .  .  ne,  (310),  (rather) 
plutot  que. 

beg,  v.a.n.  meiidier,  {ask)  demander 
prier  {de). 

beggar,  s.  mendiant.  m.f. 

begin,  v.a.n.  commemer,  (97,  351), 
(set  to)  se  mettre  (^)  (ir.  180)  ; 
to  —  again,  recommencer. 

beginning,  s.  commencement,  m. 

behave  one's  self,  v.n. r.  56  conduire 
(ir.  172). 

behavior,  a.  condiiite,  f. 

behead,  v.  a.  decapiter. 

behind,  prep,  derriere,  (late)  en 
retard  de. 

behind,  adv.  derriire,  (late)  en  re- 
tard. 

Belgium,  s.  la  Belgique,  f. 

believe,  v,a.iL   croire  (ir.  177,  376). 

bell,  s.  cloche,  f. 

belong,  v.n.  appartenir  (ir.  187), 
etre  (d). 

below,  prep,  nous,  au-dessous  de. 

below,  adv.  en  bas. 

bend,  v. a.  coitrber,  plier. 

beneficent,  adj.  bienfaisant. 

benefit,  8.  bienfait,  m. 

Berlin,  s.  Berlin,  va. 

beside,  besides,  prep,  (at  the  side 
of)  d  cote  de,  aupres  de,  (distinct 
from)  outre,  en  dehors  de,  (except) 
hors,  exc&i)te. 

beside,  besides,  adv.  d'ailleurs ;  — 
that,  conj.  outre  que. 

best,  adj.  s.  meiUeur,  le  meilleur,  le 
mieux. 

best,*  adv.  mieux,  le  mieux. 

betray,  v.  a.  trahir. 

better,  adj.  meilleur,  superieur, 
adv.  mieux.  (i^jore)  plus;  to  be 
— ,  (preferable,  of  superior  qual- 
ity) vidoi/r,  mieux  ;  to  get  the  — , 
(of  a  person)  prendre  le  dessus, 
malt  riser. 

between,  prep,  entre  (298),  dt,  d. 

beyond,  prep,  au-deld  de,  (above) 
ufi-dessus  de,  (besides)  outre. 

big.  adj.  gros,  grand. 


VOCABULAUY. 


445 


bill,  8.  (of  birds)  bee^  m,,  (account) 

hote,  f.,  compte^  m. 
bind,    v.a.   Uer^    aWicher,    (books) 

relier. 
bird.  s.  oUeav.,  m. 
birth,  s.  naiaannce^  f.  ; day,  s. 

jour  de  ?iainsance,  m. 
bite,  v.a.  mordre. 
bitter,  adj.  nmer. 
black,  adj.  fimr. 
blame,  v.a.  bltimftr. 
blend,  v.a.  (mix)  ineler. 
bless,  v.a.  benir. 
blind,   adj.    (inevgle ;    —   man.    r. 

arettflle,  m. 
blood,  8.  .'J////-/7,  m, 
blow,  s.  eov]>,  m. 
blue,  adj.  bleu. 
blush,  v.n,  roiigir  {dc). 
boarding-house,  s.  pem^'on,  t. 
boast.  8.  rnntene,  f.  ;  to  make  a  — 

of.  ne  canter  de. 
body.  8.  co/7).s,  m. 
bo\l,    v.n.     boiiUUr    (ir.    187),    v.a. 

faire  boidllir  (ir.  Ib7). 
bold,  adj.  hardi. 
bone,  8.  OH,  m.,  (of  fish)  arSte,  f. 
bonnet,  s.  chnpeau. 
book,  8   llvre,  m. 
bookseller,  s.  librnire,  m. 
boot,  s.    botte,  f..   (low)  bottine,  f.  ; 

maker,  s.  boftii'r,  ra. 

bom,  part,   ne,,  (by  birth)  de  vnis- 

mrtce ;   to  be  — ,  naitre  (ir.  181), 

etre  ne. 
both,   adj.    de?fx,   le^  deiix^  Cva   et 

r autre  (278) ;  —  of  us,  iy)U8  deux. 
^ottle,  8.  (2:58)  bonteille,  f. 
bow,    8.    (of  the  head)   »iilut,   (for 

shooting)   arc,    ra.,    (of    ribbon) 

Tta^ud,  m. 
box,  B.  boite,  f . ,  (for  packing)  caisxe, 

f.,   (for  money,   precious  things) 

cassette,  f.,  coffre,  m. 
boy,  8.  gar(^on,  ra. 
brandy,  s.  eau-de-vie.  f. 
brave,  adj.    (83)  i/-au^,  couragenx, 

valliant. 
brave,  v.a.  braver. 
bray,  v.n.  braire  (ir.  197). 
bread,  s.  patti^  m. 


break,  v.a.  eassej;  'asunder)  with 
an  effort,  and  fig.  isilence,  etc.) 
rompre  (107).  destroy,  briber. 

brer.kt'just,  s.  dejeuner,  m. 

breath,  s.  haleine.^  f.  ;  out  of  — , 
liorn  dlutleiiie. 

bridge,  s.  (230)  pont,  m 

bright,  adj.  brilUiht,  clair. 

bring,  v.a.  (by  carrying,  and  fig. 
news,  etc.)  a.j)j>orter,  (without 
carrying)  amener,  (fig.  lead)  coh- 
du'trc  (ir.  172).  (induce)  avieihcr. 

broad,  adj.  (2r)2)  large.,  de  largeur. 

broiher.  s.  frere,  m.;  —  -in-law, 
I      bedu-frere. 

Brassels.  a.  Bi'uxelles,  f. 

build,  v.a. n.  bdtir  {XO'Z),  comtruire 
(ir.  172). 

bunch,  s.  (of  flowers)  bouquet,  m. 

Burgundy,  s.  la  Binirgogue,  (wine) 
H)i  de  Itourgogue. 

burn.  v.a.n.  bn'd<r, 

business,  s.  a  [faire,  f.,  (>-•>' upation^ 
f..  ajfairej^,  f.  pi.,  con>merce,  m, 
(calling)  Hat.  metier,  m 

busy.  a*lj.  oec'upe,  actij. 

but,  conj.  mais  ;  — that  (JilO),  que. 

but,  adv.  prep,  (that,  than)  que, 
(only)  seulcment,  n"  .  .  .  gue^ 
(l')O.  307);  —  for,  sam. 

butter.  8  bevrre,  m. 

butterfly,  s.  papill^m,  m. 

biiy,  v.a.  acheter  {d)  (9()V 

by',  prep.  (135.  302).  par  (3(i0).  ds 
(2.">2>.  d.  en  (359).  »'.)t  measure)  a, 
(after  a  compar'.Tive,  and  after 
*•  too ' )  de,  (in  comparing  several 
dimensions),  sur. 


cabbage,  s.  chou,  m. 
Cajsar,  s.  Cesar,  m, 
cage.  s.  cage,  f. 
calculated,  adj.  propre  (d). 
calf,  8.  oeau.  m. 


446 


VOCABULARY. 


call,  sr.a.n.  appeler  (96).  rn/ppder ; 
—  on,  upon,  aller  or  venir  voir. 

called,  adj.  dit. 

cuinel,  8,  cfuimeau^  m, 

can,  v.n.  pouGoir  (ir.  196,  291), 
siixoir  (ir.  191,  291). 

candle,  s.  chandeUe^  f. 

cane,  s.  canue,  f. 

cap.  s.  cxifquette^  f. 

cjipa'.ile,  adj.  capable  {de). 

capacity,  s.  cfipacite,  f.,  qualite,  t. 

capital.  8   (town)  capitale^  t. 

cjiptaia,  f.  cnpit(tine„  m. 

card,  s.  carte,  t  ;  playing  — ,  carte 
djouer. 

care,  s  fioin,  m.  ;  to  take  — ,  (be- 
ware) prendre  garde  (291),  se 
garder  hien  (be  raiTxdfol,  52),  avoir 
or  prendre  hoiii  {de). 

careful,  adj.  aoigiieux. 

carele8.s.  adj.  negligent. 

carnival,  s.  carnaval.  m. 

carpenter,  s.  charpentier^  m, 

carricTfge,  n   voitare,  f. 

carry,  v.ii..n.  porter,  emporter ;  — 
on,  continuer. 

Carthaginian,  s.  adj.  (Jartliaginois^ 
e,  ra.f. 

cast,  v.a.  (thTow)  Jeter ;  — down, 
^lig. )  a  a  ait  re. 

castle,  8.  cliAteau,  m. 

cat,  8.  chat  ja.,  chatte,  f. 

catch,  v.a.  >i!,iraper,  saisir. 

Cato,  8.  Ca.'Ajn.  ra. 

cattle,  8.  66: ■;..•■.'.  -pi.  be-stianx,  pi. 

cause,  s.  n/i-c'c;,  f.,  ^//jet,  m. 

cause,  v.a.  C' tuner,  (before  an  infini- 
tive) faire. 

cautious,  adj.  prudf.nt. 

cavern,  s.  carer ne,  f. 

cease,  v.a.n.  (291)  cean&r. 

celebrated,  adj    celebre. 

certain,  adj   s.  certain,  ra. 

certainly,  adv   Cfi'tainenient. 

chain,  s.  chaiae,  f. 

chair,  s.  chaise,  t 

chalk,  8.  cntie,  f . ,  (draw)  crayon,  m, 

chamber,  8.  chambre^  t.  ; maid, 

Jille  de  chainbre,  f. 

change,  v.a.n.  changer,  changer  de. 

change,  s.  changeinent^  m.  I 


chapter,  s.  chapitre,  m. 

character,  s.  caractSre,  m. 

charge,  v.a.n.  charger,  demander, 

charity,  s.  charite,  f. 

chase,  s.  chasse,  f. 

chastise,  v.  a.  clidtier,  punir, 

cheap,  adj.  d  bon  marclie. 

cheese,  s.  fromage,  m. 

cherry,  s.  cerise,  f. 

chess,  s.  echecs,  m.  pL 

child,  8.  enfant,  m.f. 

China,  a.  la  Ghine,  f. 

choice,  8.  choix,  m. 

choose,  v.a.  ' cJwinr  (102);  — ,  v.n. 
vouloir  (ir.  191). 

Christian,  s.  adj.  chretien,  m. 

church,  s.  eglise,  f. 

Cicero,  s.  Ciceron,  m. 

cigar,  8.  cigare,  m. 

city.  8.  ville,  t. 

civilize,  v.a.  civiliser. 

claim,  v.a.  redanier,  exiger. 

class,  8.  classe,  f. 

clean,  adj.  propre. 

clean,  v.a.  nettoyer  (97). 

clear,  adj.  dair. 

clear,  adv.  clairement,  dair. 

clever,  adj.  habile,  adroit. 

clip.  v.a.  rogner. 

cloak,  s.  manteau,  m. 

clock,  8.  horl'.'ge,  ra..,  (for  apart- 
ments) pendicle,  f.,  o'clock  (73, 
244,  296),  heure,  f.  sing,,  heures^ 
t.  pi. 

close,  v.a.  dore  (ir.  def.  198),  fer- 
mer. 

cloth.  8.  drap.  m. 

clothe,  v.a.  oetir  (ir.  188). 

clothes,  8   habits,  m.  pi. 

cloud,  8.  Ullage,  m. 

cluster,  8.  (of  fruits)  grappe.,  L 

couch,  s.  voiture,  t. 

coast,  s.  cote,  f. 

coat.  s.  habit,  m. 

cock,  8.  cog,  m. 

coffee,  8.  cafe,  m. 

cold,  adj.  froid ;  to  be  — ,  a/coif 
froid  (;580) ;  it  is  — ,  ilfait  froid 
(147). 

color,. 8.  mideuT.  f. 

combatant,  s.  combattant^  m. 


VOCABULARY. 


447 


come,  v.n.  venir  (ir.  135,  187),  ap- 
procher;  — 4>ack,  revenir  (ir.  187); 

—  down,  descendre;  —  in,  entrer; 

—  in  again,    r entrer ;    —  near, 
8'a]yprocher. 

comedy,  s:  comedie^  f. 
comfort,  v.a.  consoler. 
comfort,    8.    bien-etre,    m.,     agi'e- 

ment^  m. 
comfortable,  adj.   comfortable^  com- 
mode. 
command,   v.a.    commander  (327), 

dominer. 
command,  a.  ordrcs^  m,  pi. 
commence.      V.  begin, 
commerce,  s.  commerce.,  m. 
commit,  v.a.  commettre  (ir.  180). 
communicate,  v.a.n.  communiqaer. 
company,  s.  compagnie^  f.,  aociete.  f. 
compel,  v.a.  contraiiidre  (ir.  17.1). 
complain,  v.n.  ae  plaindre  (ir.  175). 
comply,  V.  n.  se  conformer  {d). 
comrade,  s.  ctimarade.  m. 
conceal,  v.a.  cacher  ('from')"^, 
conceive,  v.a.  concevoir  (ir.  189). 
concert,  8.  concert,  m. 
conclude,    v.a.n.     conclnre     (107), 

(finish)  terminer,  Jinir  (100), 
condemn,  v.a  cr^ndnmner  {d  mort). 
condition,  s.   condition^  f.,    (state) 

et*it^  m.  ;  in  a  —  to,  en  etat  dc  ; 

on  — ,  d  condition. 
conduct,     v.a.    condidre   (ir.  172), 

mener  (1)6). 
conduct,  s.  conduite,  f. 
confess,  v.a.  confesser,  avouer. 
confidence,  s.  confinnce,  f. 
conflagration,  s.  incendie,  m, 
conformity,    s.    C(niformite ;    in  — 

with,  conformement  d. 
conquer,  v.a.  vdincre  (ir.  174),    (a 

country,  and  fig.  to  gain,  to  win) 

coii,(juerir  (ir.  188). 
conqueror,  s.  oainqneur^  m. 
coiKiuest,  8.  Citnqae.ie,  f. 
con.scnt,  v.n,  connentir  (d). 
consequence,  b.  comtequfiuce,  suite,  f. 
consider,  v.a.n.  Cf/miderer^    (think) 

rejlechir. 
consist,  v.n.  (in)  consister  (<?»,  da?is 

a),  (of)  se  conipoiter  (de). 


I  ronsole,  v.a.  consoler. 
I  constantly,  adv.  constamment. 
I  constrain,  v.a.  contraindre  (ir.  175). 
construct,  v.a.  constrtUre  (ir.  172). 
contain,  v.a.  contenir  (ir,  187),  ren' 

fermer. 
content,  adj.  content,  satitfait. 
content,    v.a.    contentir^   satisfaire 

(ir,  180). 
contented,  adj.    content  (de),  satis- 

fait  {de). 
contest,  v.a.n.  contester  (293), 
continually,  adv.  continuellement. 
continue,  v.a.  conlinuer  (351). 
contradict,  v.a.  contredire  {iv.  173). 
contrary,  adj.  contraire  {d). 
contrary,  s.  contraire,  m. ;    on  the 

— ,  an  contraire. 
conversation,  s.  conversation,  f . 
converse,  v.n  c-onmr-ter. 
convince,  v. a.  convitincre  (ir.  1 74) ; 
to    be    convinced,   se  conoaincre 

(33(;). 

cook,  v.a,  c/<^/•e(ir.  \72),  f aire cuire. 

cook,  s.  ciiidnier^  m.,  -idre,  f. 

cool,  adj. /yvtw,  m,  fralohe.  f. 

copy,  v.a.n.  copier. 

copy-book,  s.  cahier.,  m. 

corn,  8.  ble,  m,  ; market,  s.  halle 

au  ble,  f, 

correct,  v.a.  corriger. 

Corsica,  s,  la  Corse,  f. 

cost,  v.n. a,  couter. 

cost,  8.  prix,  m,,  (expense)  /raw, 
ra,  pi. 

cotton,  8.  coton,  m. 

count,  8.  comte,  m. 

countess,  s.  comtesse^  f, 

country,  s.  (in  general)  pays.,  m., 
(region)  contree,  f . ,  (native  land) 
patrie,  f . ,  (not  a  town)  campagne, 
f.  ;  —  -house,  s.  maison  de  cam- 
pagne,  f. 

countryman,  compatriote,  m.f. 

courage,  b.  courage,  m. 

courier,  s.  conrrier,  m, 

course,  s,  cour^,  m.  (race-)  course.,  t 

court,  8.  coar,  f. 

cousin,  s,  Gomin.,  e,  m.f. 

cover,  v.a.  couvrir  (de)  (ir,  185). 

cow,  s.  vache,  f. 


448 


VOCABULARY. 


coward,  s.  poltron^  m. 

cream,  s.  creme^  f, 

create,  v.  a.  creer,  produire. 

creation,  8.  creatw/i,  f. 

croalor.  s.  cre/iteur,  m. 

credit,  s.  eredU,  m. 

ciT'ditor.  8.  creiuicier^  in. 

crime,  8.  crime,  ra. 

criminal,  adj.  a  crirninel. 

Croesus,  8.  Cremut,  m. 

cross,    v.a.    trdveraer^    (again)    re- 

pa.HSf^r. 
crown,  s.  conronne,  f.,  (coin),  ecu,,  m. 
cruel,  adj.  cruel. 
cruelty,  s.  crmnite.  f. 
cry,  v.a.n.  crier  {^dl),{\\ee\>)f'leurer, 

(exclaim)  x"* eerier. 
cucumlier,  8.  cmcombre.,  m. 
cultivate,  v.a.  cnlticer. 
ca\K  8.  (2."3:^)  tnsne.  f. 
curse,  v.a   mundire  (ir.  17:^). 
custom,  s.  coiitiime.  hihittide,  t. 
cut,  v.a.  c<juper.,  (shape)  taiUer. 


D, 


daily,  adv.    jownellement,  tovs  les 

joiir>*. 
damp,  adj.  humide. 
dance,  v.a.n.  datiHeT. 
dancing,  s   dan.f<e,  f. ; master,  s. 

mail  re  de  da/t,f<e. 
dangt.'r,  a.  danger,  peril,  m. 
dangerous,  adj.  datigerenx. 
dare,  v.n.a.  oner  (291). 
dark.  adj.   ohxctir,  mrahre  ;   it  is — , 

Ufait  unit. 
daughter,  s.  jille.  i. 
day.  s.  joiu\  ra.,    (whole  day)  jovr- 

<iee ;  the  —  after,  le  lendemniii ; 

from  —  to  — ,    de  jour  en.  jour,, 

d'tni  jour  u  Va-uire; light,  s. 

jour.  m. 
dead.  adj.  inert. 
d»;ad,  8.  nvn-tx.  m.  pi, 
deaf,  adj.  sourd. 


deal,  a  great  — ,  beoucmip.  Men, 

dealer,  s.  mnrchand  {de  .  .  .),  ra. 

dear,  adj.  cher  (88 y 

death,  s.  mort.,  f. 

debt,  8.  dette,  f. 

deceive,  v.a.   tromper,,  abuser.,   d& 

cemir  (ir.  189). 
December,  s.  decembre,  m. 
decision,  s.  decision,  f, 
declare,  v.a.  declarer,  annoncer. 
deed,  8.  action,  f. 
deep,  adj.  profond  (83),  (in  depth) 

deprofondeur  (252). 
deer,  s.  f.  (stag)  cerf,  chevreuily  m. 
defect,  8.  defaut,  m. 
defend,  v.a.  defeiidre  (108). 
delay,   v.a.  retarder ;  — ,  v.n.  tar- 

der  (358). 
delicious,  adj.  delicieux. 
delight,  v.a.   (ir.  178)  enclianter,  86 

plaire  [d). 
delightful,  adj.  delicieux. 
demand,   v.a.   denainder,,    (require) 

exiyer  (827). 
demi,  adj.  demi,  d  demi. 
demolish,  v.a.  demolir. 
deny,  v.a.  nier  (298,  829). 
depart,  v.n.  partir  (ir.  183). 
departure,  s.  depart,  m. 
depend,   v.n.    (on.  upon)   dependre 

(de),  (rely  on)  compter  {sar). 
deprive,  v.a.  prioer. 
deputy,  8.  depute. 
describe,  v.a.  decrire  (ir.  176). 
desert,  v.n.a.  abandonner. 
deserve,  v.a.n.  meriter. 
desire,  v.a.  dedrer,  prier  (rf«). 
desire.  8.  dedr,,  m.,  enme. 
desirous,  adj.  dexireux  (de);  to  be 

—  (51),  acoir  envie. 
desperately,  adv.  en  desespere. 
despise,  v.a.  mepriser. 
dessert,  s.  desxei't,  m. 
destiny,  s.  desiin'e.  f.,  destin,  sort. 
destroy,  v.a.  (se)  detruire  {it.  172). 
destruction,  s.  destruction. 
determine,    v.a.n.    determiner^   ri- 

soudre  (ir.  175). 
devote,  v.a.  d^couer. 
diamond,  s.  diamant,  m. 
dictionary,  s.  dictionnairey  m. 


VOCABULARY. 


449 


die,  v.n.  mourir  (ir.  135,  186),  to 
be  dying  wit.h,  momir  or  >te  mou- 
rir ft^. 

diet,  8  diete,  (food)  iwurriture,  t 

different,  adj.  dlffet-eut,  dicers. 

dillimilt,  adj.  difficile. 

dlifioulty,  s.  difficidte,  L 

diligfwit,  adj.  dlligeut,  appUqiie. 

dine,  v.n.  dliur. 

diniujj-room,  s.  gaUe  d  rntiugftr,  t. 

dinner,  s.  dliter^  m.  ;  —  -time,  a, 
{heure  du)  dln^r.,  f. 

direct,  v. a.  adre^er. 

direction,  s.  (idre-tfe,  f. 

directly,  adv.  direeteinent.,  tout  de 
suite. 

disagree,  v.n.  dijferer,  ( —  in  opin- 
i(in  with),  n'etre  p((M  de  Cac^  (de). 

disappear,  v.n.  disjxinutre  (ir.  178). 

diKippointinent,  8.  return.,  m. 

di.sji.ster,  h.  desHAtre.,  m. 

dif?charg«,  v.a.n.  (dnties)  rempUr, 
x'iii'tfit.lttei'  (de). 

discontented,  adj.  tnecouUiU. 

discourse,  8.  ditC'turn. 

discover,  v.  a.  d^^omcrir  (ir.  185). 

discretion,  8.  di'^ciHUttc,  f. 

disea.se.  8.  mnladie.,  t. 

disembark,  v.a.n.  deborqtter. 

disgraceful,  adj.  Jufhtexx, 

dislocace,  v. a.  (/«?)  demeMre. 

diaobey,  v.a.  de.^oheir  d  (\02). 

display,  v.sl  depJ/fyer. 

displea-se.  v.a.  depbiire  d  (ir.  17S). 

disposed,  adj.  di^]x/!se  id)  ;  well  — , 
hieu  iiilfulwitue. 

dissatisfied,  adj   tnecoiiteiU. 

dissatisfy',  v.a.  meconteuter. 

dissolve,  v.a.  diwo'tdre  (ir.  175). 

distmjfuish,  v.a. u.  dintircguer. 

distress,  v.a.  nffiiyer. 

distribute,  v.a.  di-strifmer. 

distrust,  v.a.  fie  djejier,  ne  mefier  de. 

ditch,  8.  foHse.  ra. 

divert,  v.a   di-s/raire. 

divine.  a<lj.  ditnu. 

do,  v.a.  fmre  (ir  180),  (a  Bervioe) 
i-e/i-dre  (of  the  health.  ;{8l)  *e 
jHH-ter  idler  (ir.  IJM^);  —  with- 
out, ^e  {KtxHer  {de)  -^  (auxiliary, 
92,  aUl;  (Unvc,  l(i4;  idioms,  381). 

2y 


dog,  8.  chien.,  m. 

dollar,  8.  doUnr.^  m. 

dominion,  s.  ;  — s,  pi.  etats^  m.  pi. 

do<ir,  s.  parte.,  f.  ;  out  if — s,  ile/iors. 

loui)t.  v.u.a  douter  (293,329), 

doubtful,  adj.  doutetix. 

down.  adv.  en  b<is. 

dozen.  8.  douzaine.,  f . 

draw.    v.a.   tirer,   (attract)  attirer., 

(induce)    entralner,    (a  picture) 

def<!<tiier  ;  —  after,  entraifier. 
drawer,  s.  fo'mr,  ra. 
dream,  s.  songe.  reve,  m. 
dream,  v.a.n.  re^er.,  songer. 
dre.ss.    v.a.    habiUer,    vetir.,    (adorn) 

purer  ;  —  v.  n.  a'hahiUer. 
dress,  s.  habit,  m.  (gown)  robey  f. 
drink,  v.a.n.  bo  ire  {it.  177). 
drive,  v.a. n.   (ont)  clumser.,  (go  out) 

Hortir  en  voiture. 
droop,  v.n. a.  peiicher. 
drop,  8.  goutte.,  f. 
drown,  v.a.  noi/er. 
dry,  adj.  ^<?c. 
duchess.  8.  dnchess6.i  f. 
duck,  8   canard.,  m. 
due,  adj.  dH. 
duke,  8.  due,  ra. 
duration,  s.  dnree,  f. 
during,  prep,  pendant, 
dust,  a  pmissiere,  f. 
Dutch,    adj.    s.  holiandais  (ra.),  dk 

lloWtnde. 
duty,  8.  devoir,  ra, 
dye,  v.a,  tdndre  (ir.  175). 


each,  pron.  (every)  chaque.,  (every 
one,  27a)  cha^an,  e ;  —  other, 
Can,  C autre  (279). 

ear,  a.  oreille,  f.,  (of  com)  ^pi,  m.; 
—  -ache,  8.  nml  d'orciile,  ra. 

earlier,  adv.  (150)  de,  irieUleiireJieur6, 

early,  adv.  de  boiiiiG  fieurQ. 


450 


VOCABULARY. 


earth,  s.  terre,  t. 

easily,  adv.  auement,  facUeme  it. 

east,  s.  eat,  orient,  ra. 

easy,  adj.  facile,  nine. 

eat,  v.a.n.  manger  (97). 

educate,  v.  a.  elecer. 

education,  s.  education,  f. 

effect.  8.  effet,  m. 

effort,  s.  effort^  m. 

egg,  s.  QivJ\  in. 

Egypt,  s.  VEgypte,  t 

Egyptian,  s.  adj.  Egyptien,  m. 

eight,  adj.  huit. 

eighteen,  adj.  dix-hnit. 

eighth,  adj.  huitieine,  huit. 

eighty,  adj.  quatre-vingt)^. 

either,  pron.  Vun  ou  Vautre  (278), 
(with  a  neg.)  ni  Vun  ni  Vautre. 

either,  conj.  noit,  ou,  (negatively) 
ni  (289) ;  —  ...  or  ou  ...  ou. 

either,  adv.  non  plus. 

elder,  adj.  ai/ie. 

eldest,  adj.       V.  elder,  adj. 

elegant,  adj.  elegant. 

eleven,  adj.  OKze. 

Eliza,  s.  Elixe,  f. 

P^lizabeth,  8.  Elmaheth,  f. 

Ellen.  8.  Helene,  f. 

elm  (tree),  h.  or  me,  m. 

eloquence,  s."  eloquence,  f. 

else,  adj.  autre;  — adv.  autrement; 
elsewhere,  adv.  ailleurts. 

embark,  v.ii.  x''einbar<pifir  {pour). 

embarrass,  v.  a.  en}f>arra.<<ser. 

embellish,  v. a.  enibellir  (102). 

Emily,  s.  FJmilie,  i. 

emperor,  s.  einpereur.,  m. 

empire,  s.  empire,  m. 

employ,  v. a.  employer  (97);  — one- 
self, H'occuper. 

employment,  s.  erriploi.,  m.,  occu- 
pation, f. 

empty,  adj.  vide. 

enclosed,  adj.    inclns,  ci-joint  (246). 

encourage,  v. a.  enc(rurager. 

end,  s.  pi,  f.,  (extremity)  bout,  m., 
(aim)  but,  m. 

end,  v.a.n.  jinir  (100),  achover, 
cesser. 

endeavor,  v.n.  s'efforcer.,  tdcher  {de) 
(o52).  ■ 


endow,  v.  a.  doner  (de). 
endowment,    s.    dotation,    1 ;   — «, 

(231)  avajitagejf,  m.  pi. 
endure,  v.a.n.  snpixrrter,  souffnr. 
enemy,  s.  ennemi,  e. 
engagement,  a.  engagement. 
engine,  a.  machine,  f.  {d  vapetir). 
England,  s.  PAngleterre,  f. 
English,  adj.  angbm,  d* Angleterre. 
English,  8.  Aiiglaiis,  m. 
enjoy,  V. a.   aimer  d  fair e ;  — one- 
self, s'amv.ser,  se  rejouir. 
enjoyment,  s.  phiair,  m. 
enough,  adv.  (lo8,  231)  affsez. 
enrich,  v. a.  enrichir. 
enter,  v.  a.  entrer  {dam  or  d). 
enterprise,  8.  entreprise,  f. 
entertain,  v. a.   amuser,    (keep  up) 

enf  retell  ir. 
entertainment,    s.  fete,   f.,  amuse- 

Die  It  t.  m. 
entire,  adj.  entier,  complet. 
entirely,    adv.      eiiti^rem^nt,     tout 

(280). 
entrance,  8.  entree,  f. 
entreaty,  8.  fYi-iere,  f.  ;   by  much  — 

(H4())  a  f (tree  de  prier. 
environs,  s.  environs,  m.  pL 
envy.  s.  encie,  f. 
equal,  adj.  egal,  pareil. 
equality,  r.  egalite,  t. 
equally,  adv.  egalement. 
error,  s.  erreur,  faute,  f. 
escape,    v.a.n.     echajijyei'    d    (B70), 

eviter,  ii'eclnvp^ier,  se  saucer  (105), 

fuir  (ir.  183). 
esteem,  v.  a.  estimer. 
eternally,  adv.  eterneUement. 
Europe,  s.  VEiirope,  f. 
even,  adj.  (equal)  egid. 
even,  adv.  meine  (279). 
evening,  s.  soir,  m.,  (whole  evening) 

soiree,  f.  ;  in  the  — ,  le  xoir. 
event,  s.  ecencineiit,  m. 
ever.  adv.  (always,  57)  toujours,  (at 

any  time)  jamaij* ;  —  so.  qaelqud 

.  .  .  que,  Ki  .  :  .  que  (281). 
every,  adj.    chaque.    tt^vt   (76),   tous 

les  .  .  .  ;    — body,  tout  le  monde ; 

—  day,    Unis    Im  jiiura;    —one, 

chacun,   «,  (,275)  t^jut  le  vionde. 


VOOABULARY. 


451 


—  other  day,  — two  days,  to  an  les 

denxjourn. 
everything,  s.  tfrut^  m.  (271));  —  that, 

tout  ce  qvi^  tout  ce  qne  (280). 
everywhere,  adv  ptirPfuL 
evident,  adj.  evident  (381). 
evil,  s.  mal,  m. 
exact,  adj.  ea^act,  precis. 
examine,  v. a.  examiner. 
example,  s.  cxnnple,  m. 
except,  conj.  d  rtudas  qu(  (with  the 

subj.),  d  irudnxde  ^with  the  ii.f. ) 
except,    excepting,    prep,    excepts. 

(adj.  24(5)  hor.H. 
exception,  s.  exception,  f. 
excessive,  adj.  exrenaif. 
exclaim,  v.n.  x^ eerier. 
execute,  v. a.  ecrecuter,  sCacquitter. 
exercise,   s.  ex.evcir.e,   m.,    (transla- 
tion   from    «)ne'8    own    language 

into  another)  theme.,  m. 
exercise,  v.  a.  cxercer. 
exhaust,  v.  a  epuixer. 
exile,  8.  exit.  m. 
exist,  v.n.  exister. 
expect,   v.a.n.   attendre  (108),  a'at- 

tendre.  (demand)  vouUdr  (ir.  191), 

exiger  (oOT). 
expel,  v.a.  chtisser. 
expense,   s.    depense,  f.  ;  frais^   m, 

pi.,  depeivt,  m.  pi. 
experience,  s.  experience^  t. 
expose,  v.a.  expotter. 
extend,  v.a.   etendre ;  —  v.n,  s'e- 

tendre. 
extensive,  adj.  etendu. 
eye,  b.  mil^  m.,  pi.  ymix. 


fable,  3.  fahle,  t. 

face.    8.  fore,    f.,  (person)    visage^ 

(fam. )  fig  ore. 
face,  v.a.  affronter. 
fact,  s.  J'ait,  m. 


fail,  v.n.   faillir  (ir.  197),  manque? 

(:}52.  :577). 
faint,  v.n.  n'manrndr. 
faithful,  adj.  s  fidele. 
faithfully,  adv.  fidelement. 
fall.    v.n.   tomher.  choir,   eclwir  (ir. 

<189/ ;  —  down,  tomber  par  terre. 
fall.  s.  ehnte,  f. 
false,  adj  faox. 
falsehood,  s.  nienmnge^  m. 
fame.  s.  renommee^  f.,  glaire^  f. 
family,  s.  famille,  f. 
famous,  adj.  foineux. 
fan.  s   enentail,  m. 
faf,  adv.  l(dn,  (greatly)  Men  ;  ag  — 

as,  auasi  loin  que,  (t\\\)  jnxqu'd ; 

how  — ,  junqu'oti ;  —   from,    de 

h>in.. 
far,  adj.  ehigne.  Lointnin. 
fashion,  s.  focon,  in/>d^,,  f. 
f.-ist.  adj.  (swift)  oite. 
fast.  adv.  (swiftly)  vite. 
fat.  adj.  gros. 
fate.  s.  deMin,  .sort,  ra. 
father,    s.    pere,   m.  ;    —    -in-law, 

heao-pSre. 
fatigue,  v.a.  fatiguer. 
fault,  8.  faute^  f. ,  defaut.,  m. 
favor,  8.  fatenr,  grace,  i. 
favor,  v.a.  pmoriser  {de). 
fear,  v.a.n.  craindre  (ir.   175,  293, 

82G). 
fear.  s.  crninte,  f . ,  peur,  f .  ;  for  — • 

of,  de  peur  de,  de  crainte  de  (346). 
feather,  s.  plume,  f. 
February,  s.  fevrier,  m. 
feed,  v.a,  nourrir  (102). 
feel,  v.a.n.  sentir  (ir.  184). 
feeling,  s.  sentiment,  m. 
feign,  Y. a,.n.  feindre  (ir.  175). 
fell,  v.a.  couper. 
fellow,  8.  compagnon ;  —  -citizen, 

8.    concitoyen;    —   -traveller,   s. 

compagnon  de  voyage^  m. 
fertile,  adj.  fertile. 
fertiVity,  s.  fertilite,  f. 
festivity,  s.  fete,  f.  {^21),  joies,  f.  pL 
fetters,  s.  fers,  m.  pi. 
fever,  s.  Jiem^e,  f. 

few.  adj.   peu  (de),  (small  in  num- 
ber-), petit  nmndre,  (some)  quel- 


452 


VOCABULARY. 


a  — ,  qudques;  but  —  (57), 

ite  .  .  ,  gu^re. 
fickle,  adj.  inconstant. 
fiction,  s.Jietion,  i. 
field,  s.  champ,  m. 
fifth,  adj.  dnquUine,  cinq  ;  Charles- 

the- Fifth,  Charles- Quint. 
fiftieth,  adj.  cinquantieme. 
fifty,  adj.  cinqaante. 
fight,  v.a.n.  combattre. 
fill,  v.a.n.    rempUr  (102),   ('with,' 

de)  empUr,  ramisiei\  Gomhler. 
find,  v.a  n.  trouoer. 
fine,  adj.  (beautiful)  ^^aw. 
fing-er,  s.  d.oigt,  m. 
finish,  v.a.  finir  (100). 
fire,  8.  feu,  m.  ; arms,  8.  armeJ^  a 

fen,  f.  pi. 
firm,  a^.  ferme,  tiolide. 
first,  adj.  s.  /tre/nier. 
lir»t,  a(iv.  (Puhord  ;  at  — ,  d^ab(/rd. 
fish,  8.  jH)i.'4f(on,  m. 
fist.  8.  pfHtiy.  m. 
fit,  adj.  pr</>)re,  bon  (a), 
five,  adj.  8.  cinq. 
flag,   8.  drap&iu,  m. ,  (nav.)  pavil- 

hn,  m. 
flatter,  v.a.  pttter. 
flatterer,  8.  Ji/itteur,  m. 
flattery,  s.  pitlerle,  t. 
flee,  v.a.n.  //«';•  (ir.   183),  s'enfuir 

(ir.  183). 
flight,  8.  fnite,,  f. 
fling,  v.n.  H'eluncer. 
flock,  8  troupeau,  m. 
florin,  8.  florin,  m. 
flour,  8.  farine,  f. 
flourish,  v.n.  fleurir  (102). 
flower,  s.  ^dwr,  f .  ; pot,  s.  pot  d 

fleur,  m. 
fly,    v.n.    voler,   s'envoler;  —   out, 

s'envoler,  Hortir  (309). 
fly,  8.  rnovche.  f. 
fog.  8.  bnmiUnrd.  m. 
follow,  v.a.  Hulcre  (ir.  174). 
folly.  8.  y^^fo'e.  f«>Uise,  hotixp.,  f. 
fool,  8.  .w^  ra.,  -le,  f. ,  imbecile,  m. 

f. ,  /o^^,  m. 
foolish,     adj.     .sot,     bete,    ridicule, 

( thoughtless.  li<)fou. 
foolishness.      V   folly. 


foot,  8.  pied,  m. 

for,  prep,  pour,  (during)  pendant, 
(since)  depuis,  (to)  d  (250),  (be- 
cause of)  a  cause  de,  (for  the  sake 
of)  par;  but  —  (300)  sa/ts. 

for.  conj.  car. 

forbid,  v.a.  defendre  {de)  {\Q^,  327); 
God  — !  a.  Dieu  ne  pla>'se. 

force,  v.a.  forcer  {a). 

forced,  adj.  force. 

forehead,  .s.  front,  m. 

foreign,  adj.  etranger. 

foresee,  v.a.  preooir  (ir.  192). 

forest,  s.  foret,  f. 

foretell,  v.a.n.  predire  {\xAl^). 

forget,  v.a.  ouhlier. 

forgive,  van   pardonner. 

f.)rk,  s  f'fUrcJttttf,  f. 

former,  adj.  premier  ;  the  —  (119) 
rMn.i-hl,  m.,  relle-Ul,  f.,  ceux-ld, 
m    pi..  ceUe-^-hf,  f.  pi. 

fonnerly.  adv.  autrefois. 

forsake,  v.a.  ahaitdonner. 

fortnight,  .s.  quiiiz-  jours,  m.  pl.^ 
qulmaio,e,  i.  ;  to-day  — ,  d'axi' 
jourd'hui  en  quime. 

fortunate,  adj.  heureux,  fortune. 

fortune,  s.  fortune,  f. 

forty,  adj.  quarante. 

forward,  forwards,  adv.  en  avant. 

found,  v.  a.  f/ader. 

foundation,  s.  fondation,  f. ;  lay 
the  —  (340)  prepare. 

four,  adj.  quatre. 

fourteen,  adj.  quaprrze. 

fourteenth,  adj.  quatorzieme,  qudh 
torze 

fourth,  adj.  quatrieme,  quatre. 

fox,  8.  renard,  e. 

France,  s.  hi  France,  f. 

Francis,  s.   Wmnco^s,  m. 

Fraulcfort.  s.   Frankfort,  m. 

frankly,  adv.  frauvhenient. 

Frederick,  s     Frederic,  m. 

free.  adj.  lib  re,  exempt  (de)\  — 
-way.  s.  piUixuqe,  m. 

freedom,  s   Uherte.  f. 

freely,  adv.  fnmvJtement. 

freeze,  v.a.n.  gder  (97). 

French,  adj.  fnni.caU.  de.  France. 

Freuchman,  s.  Fran^ahi.,  lu. 


VOCABUIARY. 


453 


frequent,  v.  a.  freqii enter. 

frequently,  adv.  frequeiament^  sau- 
ve/d. 

fresh,  adj.  frais 

Friburg,  s.  Fribourg.^  m. 

Friday,  s.  oeudredi^  m. 

friend,  s.  ami,  e. 

friendly,  adj.  amical. 

friendship,  s.  amitie,  t. 

frig-hten,  v.  a.  effrayer  (97). 

from,  prep.  (2:^6,  250,  303)  de,  (far 
from)  U/iit,  de,  (of  time)  dejiulx, 
(commencing on)  d  pnrtir  de.  (out 
of)  par.  (at)  a.  (reason)  dciusede 
(237).  (on  the  part  of.  as  coming 
from,  of  messages,  etc. )  de  Ui  part 
dr;  —  under,  d^  dcM(/fis. 

fruit,  8.  fniit,  m. 

fruitful   adj.  fertile,  fecoud. 

fulfil,  v.a.  rempUr,  (satisfy)  satM- 
fmre{iT.  180). 

full.  adj.  piein. 

funeral,  a.  fniieraiUes,  f.  pi. 

furnish,  y.SL.  four/ur. 

furniture,  s.  meubles,  m.  pi. 

fuLure,  8.  ave/iir,  m.  ;  in  — ,  for  the 
-  ,  a  Vaceuir. 


G. 


gain,  v.a.n.  gngner,  (a  victory) 
remporter.  (make,  310)  Jaire  (ir. 
180). 

game,  s.jeit.  m.  (hunt.),  gibier,  m. 

garden,  B.jnrdin.  m. 

gardener,  s.  jdrdtnier,  m. 

garment,  s.  cetuinettt,  m 

gate,  8.  porte,  f. 

gather,  v.a.  r<ixseinbler,  reendUir 
(ir   184),  (fruiti  canUir  (ir.  184) 

general,  s.  geuend,  m. 

generally,  adv.  yen  err  dement. 

generous,  adj.  genereax. 

geut  rously,  adv.  genereuae^ment. 

Geneva,  b.  Ge/doe^  f. 


genius,  s.  gen\e,  ra. 

gentleman,  s.  (term  of  .courtesy) 
mo/uiieur,  m. ,  (man  of  rank)  gen- 
tUhomme,  gentlemen,  pi.  W€»- 
sienrs,  m.  pi. 

gentleness,  s.  donceur^  f. 

gently,  adv.  &>ucement. 

geography,  s.  geograpMe,  f. 

George,  s.  Georges,  m. 

German,  adj.  cdlemand,  d^AUemagne, 

German,  s.  Allemand,  m. 

Germany,  s.  VAUemagne,  f. 

get,  v.a.  obtertir  (ir.  187),  amasser 
(2GU) ;  —  v.n.  (become)  devenir 
(ir.  187),  He  f aire  (ir.  180) ;  —  in, 
eatrer  ;  —  over,  pasxer^  reiioncer 
{(i) ;  —  up  irise)  se  lecer. 

gift,  8.  d/?ii.  m. 

gigantic,  adj.  gigantesgue. 

girl,  s  Jiile,  f. 

give,  v.a.n.  donner  (d)  (89).  (plea- 
sure, pain,  etc.jfaire  (ir.  180); 
—  back,  rendre  {d) ;  (idioms, 
382). 

glad,  adj.  aife  (de),  content. 

gladly,  adv.  aveo  plai.sir. 

glass,  s.  verre^  m.  (233). 

glitter,  V  n.  briller,  reluire  (ir.  171). 

globe,  s.  gl^ibe,  m. 

glory.  8.  gl/nre,  f. 

glove.  8.  g<tnt,  m. 

go.  V.n.  nUer  (ir.  135,  194,  297), 
He  reiidre,  (walk)  marcher,  (de- 
part) partir  (ir.  183),  n'en  allt'r, 
(take)  prendre  (ir.  180),  (I  am 
going,  etc.,  203) ;  to  —  and  see, 
(filer  mir  ;  —  away,  n^en  alter  (ir. 
194),  partir  (ir.  183) ;  —back,  re- 
toarner,  x^en  retourner ;  —  for, 
aller  chercher  ;  —  in,  entrer ;  — 
far  from,  s' eloigner  de ;  —  on, 
cf)ntinuer  ;  —  out.  Hortiri^xr.  184), 
(of  tire,  light)  h' eteindre  {ir.  175). 

God.  s    IHt-a.  in. 

goddess,  s   dee.tse,  f. 

gold,  8.  'yr,  m. 

gohl,  adj.  (V&r. 

good,  adj  hon  (compar.  80).  sage; 
to  be  —  for  nothing,  ne  naldr  rien. 

{rood  s  bien,  m.  ;  — s,  pi.  (com.) 
mnrchandiaeis^  f.  pi. 


454 


VOCABULARY. 


goodness,  s.  bonte,  t. 

goose,  8.  me,  f. 

Grospel.  8.  Evnngile,  m. 

govern,  v.a.  n.  tjoumruer. 

governor,  s.  goaveriteur,  m. 

gown,  B.  robe,  t. 

grammar,  s.  graminaire,  f. 

granary,  a.  grenier,  m. 

grand,    adj.    gnind,  grnndioae ;  — 

-child,  8.  petit-JUs,  m. ,  petite-fiUe, 

f.  ;    —   -father,  grand-pere,   m.  ; 

—  mother,  s.  grand'mere^  f.  ;  — 

-aunt,  grand'tarite^  f.  ;  —  -son,  s. 

petit-JUfi,  m. 
grant,  v.a.  (iccm'der. 
grape,  s.  raisin,  m. 
grass,  s.  her  be,  verdure,  f. 
grateful,  adj.  reconnaissant   ('for,' 

de). 
gratitude,  8.  recnnrumKance. 
graze,  v.a.n.  pnUre  (ir.  178). 
great,  adj.  grand  (S2). 
greatly,  adv.  hieii,  beauc<)itp,fort. 
greatness,  s.  gran  dear,  f. 
Greece,  8.  la.  Grk;e.  f. 
greedy,  adj .  <iDlde  {de). 
Greek,  adj.  grec. 
green,  adj.  vert. 
grief,  8.  chagrin,  m. 
grind,  v.a.n.  rnoudre  (ir.  174). 
ground,  s.  terre,  f . ;  on  the  — ,  par 

terre. 
grow,  v.n.  croitre  (ir,  178) ;   —  old, 

rieillir. 
guide,  v.a.  guider,  conduire. 
guilty,  adj.  cmipable. 
gun,    s.  fusil,   m. ; powder,  s. 

poudre  d  canon,  f. 


H. 


habit,  8.  haMitide,  f.  ;  to  be  in  the 

—  of,  avdir  Cfii(htlude  d^ 
hair.  8.  che'^eu,  ni. 
half,    8.   moUie,  devue,  f. ;    —  adj. 

demi  (246;. 


hand,  s.  main,  f. 
handkerchief,  8.  mouchoir,  m. 
handsome.  Si&y  joli,  beau. 
happen,  v.n.  arricer,  se  passer. 
happily,  adv.  heurei/sement. 
happiness,  s.  bonheur,  m. 
happy,   adj.   heureax ;  most — ,  «» 

chante  (811). 
hard,  adj.  dur, 
hardly,  adv.      V.  scarcely, 
hardship,  s.  fatigue,  f. 
hare.  s.  lievre,  m. 
harvest,  s.  moisson,  recolte,  f. 
haste.  8.   hate,  f.  ;  to  make  — ,  se 

depecher. 
hasten,  v.a.  hater  ;  —  v.n.  se  hdter 

{de),  se  depecher,  s'empresser  (de), 
hat,  8.  chapeau,  m. 
hate,  v.a.  hair  (102). 
hatred,  s.  hnine.  f. 
have.  v.a.  am/*  (48),  posseder,  I  have 

just  (208)  je  mens   de ;   (in   an- 
swers, 182.  idioms,  380). 
hay,  8.  f'dii,  m. 
he.    pron.   adj.    il.   m.  (114),  lui,  m. 

(110.  255).  celui,  m.  (119,  270). 
head,  s.  tete,  f.  ;  —  -ache,  s.  7nal  de 

t^te,  m.   (280),   mal  d  la  tete,  m. 

(52). 
heal,  v.a.n.  gverir,  se guerir. 
health,  s.  sante,  f. 
heap,  v.a.  entasser,  amasser. 
hear,    v.a.n.    entendre  (108),   onlr 

(ir.  del  198),  (listen  to)  ecouter ; 

to  —  from  (a  person),  avoir  des 

nouvelles  de. 
heart,  s.  co>.ur,  m. 
heat,  8.  chaleur,  f. 
heaven,  s.  del,  m.,  cieitx,  pi. 
heavy,  adj.  l&urd,  pesant. 
heighten,  v.a.  relever. 
helm,  8.  gouvernail,  timon,  m. 
help,    v.a.n.    aider,   assister,    (for- 
bear) s*empecher  (de). 
help,  s.  aide,  f . ,  secours,  m.  ;  to  cry 

for  — ,  cner  au  secours. 
hen.  s.  fxnile.  f. 
hence,  adv    d'ici,  dans  (298). 
henceforth,  henceforward,  adv.  d^ 

sormau,  dorenavajnt. 
Henry,  a.  Henri^  m. 


VOCABULARY. 


455 


her,  pron.  pers.  (110, 114)  elle,  (obj. 

of  a  verb)   to,  (to  her)   Lui,  (pos- 
sessive, 64)  son,  m,  ses,    (demoa- 

strative)  cdle. 
here,  adv.  iei ;   —  is,  —  are,   vdci, 

voild. 
heretofore,  adv.  juxqui'ci,  autrefois. 
herew^ith,  adv.  d  joint. 
hers.   pron.    poss.    (12o)  le  xien,  ia 

sienne,  leu  nie/ut,  lesniennes,  (pron, 

pers, )  d  elle.  tVelle. 
herself,  pron.   (Ill)  eile-in^.me.  die, 

soi-imme  (257),  mi,  .(in  a  reliect. 

verb,  138)  se  ;  by  — ,  %e\ile. 
hesitate,  v.n.  hhiter. 
hide,  v.a.  cacher. 

high,  adj.  haut  (252),  eleT£,  grand. 
highway,  s.  grand  e/iemi/i,  rotUe,  f. 
hill,  8.  eoUi/ie,  I. 
him,  pron.  pers.  (1 10,  114)  le,  lui ; 

of  — ,  en  ;  to  — ,  lui,  (demonstra- 
tive) cehii. 
himself,  pron.  (Ill)   lui-mejne,    Ivi, 

noi-irveine  (2.">7),  tm,  (in  a  reliect. 

verb,  138)  •»«€. 
hinder,  v.a.  empecAer  {de)  (2!)4), 
his,  pron.,  poss.  ((>4,  125;  U  aien.  la 

sienne,  les  siens,  lea  siennen  (pron. 

pers. )  a  lui,  de  lui. 
history,  s.  /r'stoire,  t. 
hit,    v.a.n.  frapjier,    (a  mark)  at- 

teindre  (ir.  175). 
hoard,  v.a.  anuiHHer. 
hold,  v.a.  tenir  (ir.  187). 
holiday,  s.  jonr  de  fete,  m.^fite,  f. 
homage,  s.  liormnage,  m. 
home,  8.   cliez  soi,  m..   mavion,  f.  ; 

at  — ,  chez  soi,  (57)  d  la  mainon., 

(225)  par  nai-mfrne. 
Homer,  s.  Iloinere,  m. 
honest,  adj.  (H'6)  Ivonriete, 
honey,  s.  rniel,  m. 
honor,  v.a.  honorer  ('with.'  de). 
honor,   s.   honneur,  m.,   /lonneurs, 

pi. 
hope,  8.  esperanee,  f.,  enpoir,  m. 
hope,  v.a.n.  esperer  ;  — for,  esperer 

(97,  827). 
hor»j,  8.  cheval,  m. 
hot,  adj.    chaud;   it  is —  (147)  il 

fait  c/iuud. 


hour,  8.  heure,  f. 

house,  s.  movion,  f,,  in  or  sA,  or  Ui 

the   —   (dwelling)   of   (37,  299), 

ckez  ;  .  .  .  my,  his,  your  — ,  ehez 

vioi.  chez  Ini,  chez  voua,  etc. 
how,  adv.    cuinjuent,    {excla,m.)  que 

(307).  comme  :  — much,  — many, 

Minblen. 
however,  adv.  (yet)  cepeiidant  toute- 

fou<,    poartant,    (before  an   adj., 

281 )  qaelqiie .  .  .  que,  d .  . .  que. 
human,  humane,  adj.  humain. 
humiliate,  v.a.  hamilier. 
humming-bird.  s.  oiseaa-mouche^  m. 
hundred,  adj.  cent. 
hunger,  s.  faim,  f. 
hunger,  v.n.  amir  f aim. 
hungry,  adj .  affaine  ;  to  be  or  feel 

—  (51)  a  coir  f  aim. 
hunt,  8.  cliUHHe,  f. 
hunter,  s.  chaasear,  m. 
hunting,  s.  chauHe,  i.  (232). 
hurt.  v.a.  faire  inal.   (wrong)  nuirs 

d  (it.  172).  /aire  tort  a,   gdter ; 

to  —  oneself,  .  .  .,  se  faire  inaL 
hui-tful,  adj.  nuisible. 
husband,  s.  mnri. 
hypocrisy,  s.  /igpocriaie,  t. 


I,  pron.  je  (29, 114),  moi  (110,  255) ; 

it  is  — ,  c'estinoi  (111), 
idea,  s.  idee,  f. 

idle,  adj.  O'islf,  {Waj)  paresaeux. 
idleness,  s.  oisicite,  pareMe,  f. 
if,  conj.  si  (103,  310,  320,  322,  323). 
ignorance,  s.  igwrrance,  f. 
ignorant,  adj.  ignorant. 
ill.  adj.  (sick)  inalade. 
ill,  adv.  Tnal ;  —  -treat,  v.a.  wjoi 

traiter. 
illness,  s.  maladie,  f. 
illustrious,  adj.  iUiistre. 
iraj^finary,  adj.  imaginaire. 


456 


VOCABULARY. 


imagination,  b.  imagination. 
iraajj'iue,  v.a.n-  iniaginer^  se  figur- 

er. 
imitate,  v. a.  imiter. 
immediately,  a<jv.    immediateinent, 

toi/t  df  Kuite,  Unit  a  Vheare^  saiin 

delai  (256). 
immortal,  adj.  immortd. 
inipious,  adj.  imple. 
importune,  v  a.  imp&rtuner. 
impose,  v.  a.  imposer. 
impossible,  adj.  impoHHiUe. 
impregnable,  adj.  imprenahle. 
improperly,  adv.  irud  d  pnrpos. 
improve,  v.a.n.  anieliarer, /aire  des 

progres. 
in,  prep.  (304),  dans  (236,  297),  ea 

(45,  236,   21)7),  a  (45,  237,  250, 

296),    chez^    eutre,    (by)  par,   de 

(86.  230). 
in,  adv.  adj.  a.  en  dedans,  y. 
inauspicious,  adj.  fiuteate. 
incapable,  adj.  incapahle. 
inch,  8.  pouce,  m. 
inclined,  adj.  endin  {d),  parte  {d). 
inclosed.      V.  enclosed, 
inconsistent,  adj.  inconsequent. 
incorrect,  adj.  incorrect.. 
increase,    v.a.n.    accroltre,    croitre 

(IT.   178),  s'/iugnienter. 
incredible,  adj.  incroi/ahle. 
incur,  v.  a.  encourir  (ir.   184),  s'at- 

tirer. 
indeed,  adv.  vrniment,  en  effet. 
induce,  v.  a.  engager  {a). 
industrious,     adj.    lahnrieux,    dili- 
gent. 
industry,   s.    travail,   m.,    actimte, 

f. 
inexhaustible,  adj.  inepuisable. 
inform,  v.a.n.  informer. 
ingenious,  adj.  in.genieuux. 
inhabit,  v.  a.  hahiter. 
inhabitant,  s.  htbltant,  e. 
inherent,  adj.  inherent  (a). 
injure,  v. a.  nuire  a  (ir.  172). 
injury,  s.  injicre,  f.,  t//rt,  m. 
injustice,  s.  injustice,  f.,  tort,  m. 
ink,  8.  encre,  f. 
inkstand,  s.  encrier,  m. 


innocence,  s.  innocence,  t. 
inquire,  v.a.n    s'infornier  (}le),  ds 

mander  (376). 
insatiable,  adj.  insatiable. 
insect,  s.  insecte,  m. 
in.sensible.  adj.  inaensihle. 
instead  of,  adv.  an  lieu  de. 
instruct,  v. a.  inntraire  (ir.  172) 
instruction,  a.    instruction,   f.,  ui' 

seig nenient.,  m. 
instructive,  adj.  instruciif. 
instrument,  s.  instrument.,  m. 
intelligence,  s.  intdligence,t.,  (news) 

iwnidle.,  f. 
intemperance,  a.  intemperance,  f. 
intend,  v. a.   se  prt/poser  {de),  avoir 

V Intention  (de).  entendre. 
intention,  a.  intention,  i. 
interest,    v.  a.   inter e.Hser,   sHnteres- 

ser. 
interest,  a.  interet,  m. 
interrogate,  v.a.n.  interroger. 
internipt,  v.  a.  interrompre. 
into.   prep,   dans,   en.  a,  entre ;  — • 

it.  them  (things),  dedans,  y. 
introduce,  v. a.  mtrodaire  \^.  172). 
invent,  v. a.  inoenter. 
invention,  a.  invention,  f. 
invite,  v. a.  inviter  (d). 
Ireland,  s.  Vldande,  f. 
Irish,  adj.  irlandais,  d'Irlande. 
iron,  s.  fer,  m. 
iron,  v.a.  repasser. 
island,  s.  He.  f. 
it,  pron.  (nominative)  H,  m.,  elle,  t., 

(obj.  of  a  verb)  le.  m.,  Ui,  f.  (114, 

255,    260),     (dative)    lui,    m.  f.. 

(imp.)  il,   ce,   c'    (73,    111,  255) 

cela  ;  at  — ,  by  — ,  for  — ,  froa. 

— ,  of  — ,  en,  y;  to—,  y  (114, 

120,  258). 
Italian,  adj   it  alien. 
Italy,  8.  V  halie.  f. 
its.  pron.  po.ss.  (()4,  241)  son,  sa,  ses, 

le  .lien.      V.  his. 
it.self,  pron.  lui-meme,Ta.,  dle-meme^ 

t,   soi-meme,    m.  (257),   hd,    elU 

(258),    soi  (257),    (in  a    reliect. 

verb,  138)  se. 
ivory,  s.  iwire^  m. 


VOCABULARY. 


457 


J. 


jailer,  8.  ge/tUer,  m. 

James,  s.  Jfwgueji,  in. 

January,  s.  jnniner,  m. 

jealous,  adj.  jahux. 

jealousy,  s.  julm^ie,  f. 

jewel,  8.  bijou,  m. 

John,  8.  Jean.,  m, 

join,  v.a,.  jmndre  (ir.  175) 

journey,  a.  voyage,  m. 

joy,  s.  ^*w«,  f. 

judge,  v.Si.n  jiiger  (97). 

judge,  B.  jnge.,  m. 

judi,nnent,  8.  jngementy  m. 

Julius,  s.  Julex,  m. 

July,  8.  jviUet,  m. 

June,  8.  7?/m,  m. 

just,  adj.  jui^te. 

just,  adv.  jitste ;  —  as,  toi/f  comme, 
tel  qiie  (277) ;  I  have  — ,  je  vieiu<i 
de  (20;}),  je  ne  fain  que  '^204). 

justice,  B.  justice^  L 


K. 


keep,  v.a.  tmir{\T.  187),  gnrder,  (de- 
tain) reteuir,  (have  in  custody) 
CffttMfii'oer,  garder,  (observe)  oh- 
Hcrrer.,  (save  from  danger)  pre- 
aerter;  — ,  v.n.  setenir,  — (from) 
xe  girder  {de). 

key,  8.  def,  t 

kill,  v.a.  tuer. 

kind,  8.  genre,  m.,  sorts,  f. 

kind,  adj.  bon  ;  be  so  —  as  (191) 
veuiUez  {bien). 

kindly,  adv.  avec  bonte,  bien. 

kindness,  s.  bonte,  f. 

king,  8.  m,  m.  ; street,  la  rue 

royale. 

kingdom,  s.  royaume,  m. 

kitchen,  h.  cuviine,  f. 

knife,  9.  coiifeau,  m. 

knock,  v.a.n.  frappef  '  —  down, 
abatt/re  (303). 


know.  v.a.  (to  be  .icqnainted  with 
through  the  sense^s;  to  ha vg^  ex- 
perienced, viz.  seen,  heard,  slftelt, 
tasted  or  felt  before)  conaaitre 
(ir.  178),  (to  be  aware  or  con- 
scious of,  to  have  learnt  by  the 
application  of  the  mind,  by  heart 
etc.)  savoir  {it.  191,  291),  (recog- 
nize) reconnattre  (ir.  178). 

knowledge,  s.  savoir,  m.,  science, 
cfnuuiissance,  f.,  counaissanceSj 
f.  pL 


laborer,  h.  OKvrier,  m. 

laborious,  adj.  labor ieiix. 

labyrinth,  s.  lahyrinUte,  m. 

laconic,  adj.  lacohiqiie. 

lady,  8.  dame,  f . ,  (title)  lady;  jonng 

— ,  deniovselle.  j 

land,  8.  ferre,  f . ,  (country)  pays,  m. 
landlord,  s.  projirietaire,  (of  hotels 

and  inns)  aubei-giste,  m. 
language,  s.  langage,  m. 
large,  adj.  gr^i-s,  grand. 
hist,  adj.  deruier  (83) ;  at  — ,  enfin, 

din,  pi. 
last,  adv.  derni^rement,   (last  time) 

ia  derniire  foiH. 
late,  adj.  adv.    tard.,  (of  the  dead, 

247) /r?A,  (behind  time)  en  retard. 
lately,    adv.    derniereinent,    Vautre 

jour  (28()). 
latter,  adj.   dernier;   the  —  (119) 

celui-ci,  ceUe-ci,  ceux-ci,  cefles-ci. 
laugh,   v.n.    ni'e    (ir.    107,   194)   se 

nwquer  {de). 
launch,  v.a.  lancer. 
law,  8.  lot,  i. 
lawyer,  s.  avocat,  m. 
lay.  v.a.  mettre  (ir.  180).  pk^'Cer. 
lazy,  adj.  parensenx. 
lead,  8.  plomb,  m. 
lead,   v.a.n.  conduire  (ir.  172),  »w^, 

ner  (96),  indaire  {d)  (ir.  172). 
leaf,  B.feiMe,  t 


458 


VOCABULARY. 


lengne.  s.  (distance")  h'eite^  i. 

le.ui.  v.n.  (rest)  x''ft]yjmyer. 

learn,  v.a.u.  ajyjrreiidre  (ir.  181). 

learned,  adj.  fornut. 

learning.  ».  HcleiiCt-,  t. 

leant,    adv.    8    nttjins  (158);    at  — 

(minimum) '///  y/ifinx,  (in  moi/tjt. 
leave,  s.  )>ermi)*i(io/i,  f. ,  (of  absence) 

leave,  v.a.n.  quitter,  IniAtter,  (not  to 

take  away,  not  to  go  to)  Itiinser, 

(depart)  poitir 
left,   adj.    gniwhe ;    to  the  — ,    fi 

ytitiche. 
leg.  s.  prmbe.  f. 
lend.  v.a.  pretext: 

length,  s.  hmynrvr.  f.  ('jr»2.  30^. 
lest.  adj.  mtdmlrt.  pl^nx  petit. 
lesrt.    a«lv      moihx,  ^  (before  a  noun) 

nioihx  lie:  the  — ."^'*/#*. 
le^HOU.  s.  I'e^oh.  f.         ^\. 
lest,  «'onj.  'If-  penr  qin-  ox  <l5f  (iJ85). 
let.  v.a.    (allow)    UilK\ei\   ]>eKinettre 

(\r.  ISO),   (cuu.se  to  .  .  .)f<iire  (ir. 

1-^0).  {hiro)  louer ; —  hini  come 

(810,  88r>)  qiru  vienrie. 
letter,  s.  lettre,  f. 
liable,  adj.  xKJet  {d). 
liar,  s.  mtitleur.  m. 
liberal,  adj.  Uhenih  enrers. 
liberty,  8.  W^erte.  f. 
lie,    v.n.    (speak  false)   mentir  (ir. 

184). 
lie,   v.n.   etre  »itue ;  —  down,    se 

couch  er. 
life,  B.  vie,  f. 

lift  (up)  v.a.  lever  (96),  elecer. 
light.  8.  Ivmiere,  f . ,  (day)  ^"owr,  m. ; 

to  be  — ,  /aire  jour. 
light,  adj.  le(/er. 
lighten,  v.a   eclairer  ;  — ,  v.n.  f aire 

de^H  echtirs. 
like,  adj.  pardl  (iX) ;  to  be  or  look 

— ,    remtembler    (^),    atwir    Vair 

(de). 
like.  adv.  cmmne.,  tel  que. 
like,  v.a.n.  aimer  {d),  {yi\&h)  vmilmr 

(ir.  101)  ;  I  should  —  to,  je  vou- 

drais. 
lily,  B.  lis^  m. 


limit,  v.a.  Umiter^  horner^  restrei 

die  (ir.  175). 
line,  s.  llgne,  f. 
linen,  a.  toUe,  t. 
lion,  8.  li<m,  m. 
I  lip,  s.  lem^e,  f. 
i  listen,  v.a.  ectniter. 
lit»!rature,  s.  littentture,  f. 
little,  arij.  petit  icompar.  80). 
little,  adv.  peu  (compar.  152),  //«^7 

(before  a  noun)  ptv  de,  ipme  d 

but  —  (57)  n.e  .  .  .  yuere. 
live.  v.n.  vinre  (ir.  181),  (reside)  i 

ineurer. 
lively,  adj.  eif.  miime. 
load,   v.a.    charger,    (bestow)  cai 

hler. 
lock,  s  Vk.Tx.  fermer  (//  ci«). 
London,  s.  Lmidren,  m. 
loi:g,    adj.    hmg.   de  l^mgve'UT  (2- 

802) ;  a  —  time,  luigteinpx  iadv 
long.    adv.    loiigtempx.    (long  sine 

depitin  hugtr)/ip,s  ;    as  —  as.  so 

as,  taut  que;  how  —  V  comhien 

teuipg  ?  d-cpuifi  qwiiid  ? 
long,  v.n.  tarder  ;  1  —  to  (358)  il'i 

tin;de  de. 
look.  v.n.    regf^der,  (look  l\ke,  ."i 

247)  tivair  Vnir,  (seem)  po/rmi 

(ir.  178),  Henihkr ;   —  on,   upc 

rcgarder  ;  —  for,  (seek)  cherchi 
looking-glass,  8.  rniroir,  m.,  gku 

f. 
lord,  s.  malt  re,  m.,  (title)  seignen 

(God)  Seigneur,  m. 
lose,  v.a.n.  perdre{\07)  ('by,'  d). 
loss,  8.  per'te,  4. 
lot,"s.  aart.  m. 
lottery,  s.  loterie,  f. 
loud,  adj.  Jiaut.  fort. 
Louisa,  s.  Loniae,  f. 
love,  v.a  aimer  ;  —  dearly,  rJim" 
love,  s.  amour,  m. 
low,  adj.  hn». 
luck,  s.  chance,  f. ;  good — ,  bonheu 

m  ,  bonne  fort'U lie. 
Lucretius,  s.  Lvcvece,  m. 
lustre,  8,  In.^tre,  m. 
luxury,  8.  luxe,  m. 
Lyons,  s.  Lyon.,  m. 


VOCABILART. 


459 


M. 

machine,  s.  machitie,  f. 

mad.  iulj.  foil  (79),  iimenM,  (of  hy- 
drophobia) ninnje. 

maflum.  s.  iividmne^  f. 

m:i.yistrate,  s.  iiuKj'ialrtii. 

mag'nificent.  adj.  niitynififpie. 

mail.  8   (post)  uioUe^  poHe,  f. 

mumtaiu,  v.a.u.  luiiintenir  (ir.  187), 
noiirrir. 

miker  v.a.  faire  (ir.  ISO),  (render) 
reiidre  ;  to  —  oneself  understood, 
xefiiire  oniipreiuhe  (idioms,  881). 

man.  s.  Iinnune^  in.,  men,  pi. 
}unume.n,  (people)  (/f/i.^,  m    pi. 

mankind,  h.  leu  hninitex,  m.  pi. 

msumer,  k.  nuiniere,  f<i<^0)L^  i.  ;  — 8, 
pi.  iiKfurn.  f.  pi. 

fi)any.  adj.  [42)  hen uroi/p  {dfi).  bien 
{ih'ff) ;  —  a  (27()).  tri ;  a  great  — , 
very  — ,  bnniroiii)  idc).  hUu  \i1e.t)  ; 
a«  — ,  ivutiint,  (before  a  noun) 
iiiiUiiit  de  ;  iiH  —  as.  nntniit  fjiit, 
tit  lit  que, ;  how  —  V  comhicn  (d()f 
tO(>  — ,  trup^  (before  a  noun)  tr<tp 
de. 

map.  s.  airtc. 

fiLirnh.  s.  (month)  innrs.  m.,  (mil.) 
iiimrhe,  f. 

markft.  s.  (2'^'i^)nillrcJle,  m.,  haUe^  f. 

marriage,  s.  innrinyt.^  m. 

married,  adj.  innrle. 

marry,  v.a  <give  or  unite)  mnrier^ 
(take  to  oneself)  ppi/ii.si'.r  ;  —  v.n, 

Mary,  s    Afiwie,  f.  [ae  rnnrier. 

muster,  s.  mnltre^  m.  ;  —  -key,  a. 
piix'^e-partout^  m. ;  —  -piece,  s. 
cJii'f-d\eitrrr^  m. 

master,  v.n.  dtmi]>ter,  a' emparer  {d£) . 

niaLhematics,  s.  mo t/ie/nn liquet, f.pl. 

rintter.  a.  mntiere,  f.,  nffnire, 
ch'iae^  f. !  what  is  the  —  V  qirext-ce 
qtCil  y  n  f  what  is  the  —  with 
you  (52)!'  qiCei^i-ce  que  voils 
itrcz.  qti'eM-cc  qiCil  a. 

maxim,  a.  innxime,  f. 

may.  v.  auxil.  pourmr  (ir.  190, 
S'i^y) ;  you  -  have  seen,  voaa  avez 
pu  voir. 


May,  8.  (month)  moi,  m. 

me,  pron.  me  (114),  7noi  {IW). 

meadow,  s.  p?vnrie,  f.,  yi,''e,  m. 

meal,  s.  7-qvi.\,  m.,  (Aonx)  fa rirtt^  f, 

mean,  a.  mUieii.  m. ;  — s,  pi.  moyen^ 
m.  (pecuniary)  ynoyena^  m.  pi., 
resxouriu'ti,  f.  pi.  ;  by  — s  of,  au 
moyen  de. 

measure,  s.  memfre,  f. 

meat,  s.  vinnde,  f. 

medal,  s.  mednille,  f. 

meddle,  v.n   .*e  meler  (de). 


medicine,  a.  medecine^  f. 


meet,  v.a.  (i)er». )  rencoittftr. 
member,  a.  Incinhre,  ni. 
memory,  s.  me  moire,  f. 
mend.   v.a.    nrc^ymimoder.   reparer^ 

(a  pen)  talllir. 
mention,  v.a.  mention ner,  parler  de. 
merchant.    ».    ne(fj>ciiint.    (retailer) 

mnirJiiind  {de  .  .  .). 
merciful.  a<lj.  ii]bij<et'ir.ord,ieiix. 
merit,  s.  mei'itc..  m 
me.'<seJijj:er.  s   mexi^oger^  m. 
metal,  s.  laetid.,  m. 
middle,  adj.  dii  milieu. 
\  midst,  s.  milieu. 
mild,  adj    donx. 
mile,  B.  mille,  m. 
milk,    s    I'/it.    m.  ;    —   -woman,    8. 

liii/i^re,  f. 
milk.  v.a.  f/'irire{[T.  174). 
miller,  a.  men /tier.  m. 
mind.  8.   ej<prit.  m.,    (opinion)  amR^ 

m.  ;  to"  change  one's  — ,  changer 

d'atifi. 
mine,  pron.  poaa.  (12-~))  le  mien.,   la 

mii',iiii.e,    les    mienx,    Ip.s   mieri.ne'<^ 

mc.s.  (pron.  pers. )  i)  moi,  demoi; 

this   drawing    is  — ,    (belongs -to 

me)  ce  dexdn  est  n  moi ;   a  friead 

of  — ,  (fJo)  an  de  men  amis. 
mine,  a.  inine.,  f. 
minute,  8.  minute,  t 
mirror,  a.  miroir,  m. 
miser,  b.  avore,  m. 
miserable,  adj.  m/.terabie. 
misfortune,  s.  midJienr,  m. 
Miss.    a.    mademmdle,    L     deniair 

si'Ue.  f. 
miss,  v.a.n.  manqaefi' (^611). 


460 


VOCABULARY. 


mistake,  v.a.n.  se  tromper  (de,  mr). 

niistake,  s.  (taking  one  for  another) 
meprine,  f.,  (error)  errem\  f.,  (fail- 
ing)/rtt/te,  f. 

mistress,  8.  maitreftse,  f. 

mistrust,  v.  a.  se  mefier,  se  defier  de. 

mix  (up),  v.a.  meler. 

mock,  v.a.n.  se  moqner  de^  rire  de 
(ir.  194). 

modem,  adj.  s.  wodeime. 

modest,  adj.  modcste. 

modesty,  s.  onodestie,  f. 

moment,  s.  moment,  m. 

Monday,  s.  lundi,  m. 

money,  s.  argent,  m. 

monk,  8.  nwine,  m. 

month,  s.  mem,  m. 

monument,  s.  monume7it,  m. 

moon,  8.  Iu7ie,  f.  ;  —  -light,  8.  eUiir 
de  lune,  m. 

moral,  s.  morale,  f. 

more,  adv.  plux,  davantage  (287), 
(before  a  noun)  pLw<  de,  (again) 
encore,  du  or  de  la  or  den  ;  no  — , 
•pan  davantage,  ne  .  .  .  pliiit  (57, 
290) ;  once  — ,  encoi-e  une  J'olx  ; 
the  — ,  filuii. 

morning,  s.  matin,  m.,  (whole  morn- 
ing) matinee,  f .  ;  good  — ,  bonjoiir. 

mortal,  adj.  s.  mortel. 

most,  adj.  le  plus,  (most  part,  276) 
la  plujmrt. 

most,  adv.  s.  le  plus  (158),  plvs, 
(extremely,  highly)  tres^  /o-^-i, 
hien. 

mother,  s.  mh'e,  t. 

motive,  8.  motif,  ra. 

mountain,  s.  m/mtagne^  f. 

mouse,  8.  souris,  f. 

mouth,  8.  boiiche,  f, 

move,  V.  a.  (set  goin^f)  inminoir  (ir. 
1*35),  (shake)  ehraider,  (furniture) 
demenager,  (affect)  emouvoir  (ir. 

Mr,,  Mormeur,  M.,  Mr.  [190). 

Mrs.,  Madame,  Mme. 

much,   adv.  s,  heavMup,  Men,  {h 
fore  a  noun)   beaucoup  de,    bi^n 
du  or  de  la  or  des,   (very)  tn 
fort;  very  — ,  beavcoup.  Men  (2yi 
l^ow  —  ?  oomkiefri  f 

multitude,  8.  multitude^  f. 


murder,  v.a.  afisassiner. 
murder,  8.  meirtre,  m. 
murmur,  v.a.n.  viurrnvrer. 
music,  8.  JHUsique,  f. ; master,  b. 

maltre  de  vi'uitique. 
must,  v.n.  xmT^.  f(dl<nr  (\r.  148,  190, 

380),  deroir  (ir.  189);  we  — (103) 

on  doit ;  ilfaut. 
mutable,  adj.  irianiHtant,  tariable. 
mj'.  pron.  poss.  (()8)  mon,  ma,  mes. 
myself,  pron.  (Ill)  moi-mmie,  iru4^ 

(in  a  reflect,  verb,  188)  me. 


N. 


name,  s.  nom,  m. 

nai)kin,  s.  serviette,  f. 

narrow,  adj.  etroit. 

nation,  s.  nation,  f. 

native,  adj.  (of  a  place)  natal. 

natural,    adj.     naturd ;    —  philo- 

soplter,  natvraliste,  m. 
nature,  s.  nature,  t. 
naughty,  adj.  meckant. 
near.  adj.  pres  de,  voisin,  prochain. 
near.  prep.  adv.  pres,  pres  de;  —  it, 

them  (things),  aiipres. 
nearly,   adv.    de  pres,   d  peu  pres^ 

presyne,  jrves  de. 
neat,  adj.  prop7'e,  soignS. 
neatly,  adv.  propreme^it. 
necessary,  adj.  nece^saire  ;  to  be  — , 

falUnr  (ir.  147,  190). 
necessity,  8.  necessite,  f. 
need,  v.a.  avoir  besoin  de ;  v.n.  etre 

necessaire   (de)^   faUoir  (ir.   147, 

190). 
n§^dful,  adj.  necessaire. 

iglect,  v.a.  negliger. 
eglectfulness,  s.  negligence,  f. 
neighbor,  8.  voisin,  e. 
neither,   pron.  (279)  ni  Pun  [Vune^ 

t),  niV autre. 
neither,  conj.  (57,289)  ni,  nouplvs; 

—  ...  nor  (57)  id  .  .  .  ni. 


VOCABULARY. 


461 


Keio,  8.  Neron^  m. 

nest,  8.  ni(L  m. 

never,    adv.  jnmaU^   (with  a  verb, 

57)  ne  .  .  .  jnmai<i. 
nevertheless,  adv.  ivenutrunns^  cepen,- 

(I  I  lit. 
new,    adj.    neuf,    (different,    addi- 
tional, novel,   of  a  later  season, 

ryyiioenn  (7J)). 
New  Orleans,  s.  bi  Nouvelle-Orlmns. 
news,  a.  tioiiveUe,  f.,  noncdles,  f.  pi. 
newspaper,  s.^jonf/ud,  m. 
next.    adj.    (of    place)    vomn,    (of 

place    and     order)    .tuivont,    (of 

time  to  come,  coming)  proc/iairi. 
next,  adv.  apren,  en^aite. 
nice,  adj.  joU^  qeatil. 
niece,  s.  niece,  f. 
night,  8.  iiuit^  f.  ;  last — ,  cette  unit, 

III  nuit,  (ierimre^  hier  au  mir ;  to 

be  — ,  fa  ire  nuit. 
nine,  adj.  ?ieuf. 
nineteen,  adj.  dix-neuf. 
ninety,  adj.  quatre-vingt-dix. 
ninth,  adj.  neuvikne,  neaf. 
no,  adv.  /to/i,  pas  ;  O  — !  que  non 

(808). 
no,  adj.  (57,  76)  aucun,  nul,  pas, 

p(d/U,  pas  uii,  ne  .  .  .  pas,  ne .  .  . 

point  de  (I5i>) ;   —  more,   ne  .  .  . 

plus  {2S9). 
nobility,  s.  noblesse,  f. 
nobody,   s.   (57,   180)  personne,  ne 

.  .  .  personne,  personne  .  .  .  ne. 
noise,  s.  bruit,  m, 
noisily,  adv.  hruyamment. 
noisy,  adj.  bruyant. 
none,  adj.  pron.  aucun,  nid,  pas  un, 

aucun  ne,  pas  un  ne  (275) ;  I  have 

— ,  je  n'en  ai  pas. 
noon,  8.  midi,  m. 

nor,  couj.  ni,  ni .  .  .  ne,  et . .  .  ne. 
Normandy,  8.  la  Normanciey  f. 
nose,  8.  nez,  m. 
not,  adv.  (57,  58,  159,  289;  without 

pas  291),    ne  .   .   .  pas,    ne  .  .  . 

pmnt,  non,  pas. 
nothing,  s.  (57,   180)  rien,  ne .  .  . 

rien,  rn',n  .  .  .  ne  (adverb,  in  no 

way),  nuUement ;  —  but,  n^  .  .  . 

que. 


notice,  v. a.  remarquer,  s^ wper&emir 

de. 
notwithstanding,  prep,  malgre;  — 

adv.  neanmoins. 
nourish,  v^a.  imurnr  (103). 
novel,  s.  romaii.  m. 
November,  s.  novembre,  m. 
now.   adv.   inaintenant,  d  present^ 

&)nc. 
nowise,  adv.  nuUement. 
nowhere,  adv.  nulle  part. 
number,  s.    (quantity)  nombre,  m., 

(sign  of  distinction)  numero,  m. 
nut,  8.  (walnut)  noix,  f. 
nymph,  s.  nymphe,  f. 


o. 


o,  int.  o7i,  o! 
obedient,  adj.  obevisant. 
obey,  v. a.  obeir  (101). 
object,  8.  objet,  m.,  but,  m. 
obligation,  8.  obligation,  f.      * 
oblige,  V.  a.  obliger  {d),  (do  a  service) 

obliger  (de). 
Qbliged,  part.  adj.  (indebted,  in  duty 

bound)  oblige  ('to,'  a,  'for,'  de), 

(compelled)   oblige  ('to,'  de)\  to 

be  —yfaUoir  (ir.  148,  190). 
observation,  s.  observation,  f. 
observe,  v.  a.  observer,  remarquer. 
obtain,  v. a.  obtenir  (ir.  187),  acque- 

rir,  remporter. 
occasion,  v.  a.  causer. 
occupation,  s.  occupation,  f.,  emploi. 
occupy,  v.a.  occuper  ;   to  —  oneself 

in  or  with,  s'occuper  d  (352). 
ocean,  s.  ocean,  m. 
o'clock.      V.  clock.    ■ 
October,  s.  octobre,  m. 
odious,  adj.  odieax. 
of,   prep.    (42,  285,  250,  342)   de, 

(among)  entre  ;  a  brother —  mine, 

unfrere  d-moi. 
offence,  s.  offense,  injure,  f. 
offend,  v.a.  offenser,  mawjiuor  {d). 


462 


VOCABULARi^. 


offer,   v.a.   offrir  {d)  (ir.  184),  pro- 

jtoser  (a). 
officer,  8.  officirr,  m. 
oft,  often,  oftentimes,  adv.  Hovvent; 

as  —  as  (241 ),  toatea  let*  foin  qae. 
oh.  int.  oh !  6  I 
oil,  8.  huile^  f. 
old.  adj.   (68,  79,  252)   vieux,   vidl, 

dge  ;  to  be  ten  years  — ,  nvfyi.r  dix 

ans,  etre  age  de  dix  itjis  ;   how  — 

are  you  ?  quel  dge  avez-oous  f 
omen,  s.  augure^  ra. 
omit,  v.a.  omettre  (ir.  180). 
on,  prep.  (804)  >iur,    (at,  to,  about) 

rt,  (of,  from,  towards)  de. 
on,  adv.  denfms. 
once,  adv.  uiiefois  ;  —  more,  encare 

unefoifi;  at  — ,  t/nd  de  ftuite,  tout 

d  Cffup,  tout  d'yin  coup  (28()). 
one,  adj.  un^  nne,  un  neul,  uneseuie; 

not  —  (70)  aucuH,  md. 
one.  pron.  (man,  people,  they,  129) 

o/i,     (somebody)    f/veh/u^un,    m., 

(the  — )  celiii,  m.,  ceUe.  f.  ;  any — , 

quelqu'un  ;  (neg.  275)   persoii/w  ; 

some — ,    qiteLqn^un;    the — ,    V.  \ 

that ;  —  another,  V.  each  other.  . 
one's,  ffton.  soit^  m. ,  .sa,  f.,  .S'<5.<*,  pi.  | 
oneself,   pron.   soi-msine.,  soi,   (in  a 

reflect,  verb,  138)  xe. 
only,  adj.  ne^U^  unique. 
only,    adv.    -seulement,    ne  .  .  .  que, 

(57,  100.  •■507),  rien  qu<s. 
open,  v.a.  owcrir  (ir.  185). 
open,  adj.  ouvert. 
opera,  s.  opera,  m. 
opinion,  s.  opinio fi,  f. ,  avis,  m. ;  to 

be  of  — ,  etre  d'arU. 
opportunity,  s.  occaHion.  f. 
opposed,  adj.  oppo.se  ;  to  be  — ,  s^cp- 

po.ser. 
opposite,  adj.  prep.  adv.  oppose,  vis- 

d-iH.-i  {de). 
or,  conj.  OH  (205),   (negat. )  ni  ;    — 

else,  ou  bleti,  autreuietd.     V.  also 

either, 
orator,  s.  orateiir,  ra. 
orchard,  s.  verger^  m. 
order,  s.  ordre,  ra. ,  (rule)  r^gle  ;  In 

—  to,  (ifin  de  (81()).  pour;    in  — 

that,  a  Jill  que,  jjour  que. 


order,   v.a.    ord/ynner,  commander^ 

/aire  (ir.  180). 
oiigin.  8.  orlghie,  i. 
other,  adj.  (270)  pron.  autre  ;  — a, 

—  people,  les  autren,  \fafitres,  au- 

tru.i. 
otherwise,  adv.  autreinent. 
ought.  V.  def.    deonir  (ir.  189),  fnl- 

Mr  (ir.  148,  190). 
our,  pron.  po.ss.  (04)  notre,  nos,  pi. 
ours.    pron.    poss.    (125)  le  nntre,  la 

tintre,   les  notres,   (pron.   pers.  )d 

nouH,  de  nou^.      V.  for  examples, 

mine,  his,  hers,  yours, 
ourself,    pron.     (Ill)    nons-m^.me ; 

— ves.  pi.  nouH-memeA^ ;  tious,  (in 

a  reflect,  verb  lo8)  noiiA. 
out,  adv.   dehors,  hor-t ;  —  of  (299) 

hors  de,  (of  numbers)  de,  sur. 
outlive,  v.a.  survivre  d  (ir.  181). 
outside,  adj.  exterieur  ;  —  adv.  en 

dehorx,  dehorn. 
over.  prep.  (8();"\)  (on,  upon)  sur,  (a 

top  of,  more  than)  au-de-sHua  d^ 
over,  adv.  de-sHUJi,  par-dessuH,  (ended 

action)  pax-ne,  Jiid. 
overwhelm,  v.a.  accahler  (de). 
o\\»e,  v.a.  devoir  (ir.  189). 
owing,  adj.    die  {a),   d  cause  {de)^ 

grace  (d). 
own,  adj.   (241)  propre ;  one's  — , 

son,  propre.   son  {sa,  ses),  (when 

nob  used  before  a  noun)  le  sien,  d 

soi,  sien,  etc.  (coming  from)  de  soi, 

(relations),  les  siens. 
ox,  s.  boiuf,  m. 


pagan,  s.  adj.  paien,  m. 

pain,    8.    douleur.    f.,  mal,  m.  ;  to 

take  — s,  se  liontier  de  la  peine ; 

to  give  — ,  f I  lire  de  la  peine. 
painful,  adj.  douloureux. 
paint,  v.a.n.  peindre  (ir.  175). 
painter,  s.  pHntre,  m. 
painting,  r.  pelnture^  t. 


VOCABULARY. 


4()3 


pair  8.  paire,  f. 

palace,  s.  pnlois,  m. 

pale,  adj.  jyile. 

paper,  8.  ptipier,  m.,  (newspaper) 
jour II (il,  m. 

paradise,  8.  purndist.  m. 

pardon,  v.a.n.  pordonner. 

pardon,  8  pardrn,  m.  ;  T  beg  your 
— ,  je  voux  <iemnnde  pardon. 

parent,  s.  pere,  m.,  mere^  f.  ;  — s, 
pi.  parents,  m.  pi. 

park,  8.  parG,  m. 

part,  s.  pit.riie,  f. ,  (share)  jmrt,  par- 
lion.  f. 

particularly,  adv.  Hurtont. 

party,  8.  purti,  ra. 

pasB.  v.n.a.  poKHerAoccnr)  se passer. 

pjifisag-e,  8.  pnx.wye.  ni. 

piiswion.  R.  p'tsxiou.  f. 

passionate,  adj.  p(iii>»/mn.e.  etnpoi'te. 

pfwt.  prep,  mi-deld,  de,  (of  age) 
jtl'/x  de,  (of  time)  panne,  npren ; 
half-  —  two  (7;5)  deux  heures  et 
demie.. 

patience,  a.  pntience.  t. 

pafieut.  a  malade.,  m.f. 

pay.  v.a.  pat/er  (Ji7;,  (v-isits,  re- 
spects) rendre,  faire  (ir.  IbO). 

peace,  s.  puia'.  f. 

peach,  8  peche,  f. 

pear.  s.  ihdre,  f. 

peasant,  s.  pat/snn,  m. ,  -ne.  t. 

pe<ie.stal,  a  piedcjitnl,  m. 

pen,  8.  plume,  i.  ;  —  -holder.  8. 
porfe-pl'/nifi,  m. ;  —  -knife,  8. 
eitnij\  tn. 

pencil.  8.  Cray  an.  m. 

people.  8.  (nation)  pniple.,  m.,  r?/i- 
tu/u,  f.  (individuals:  anywhere) 
tje/vt  m.f.  pi.,  (307),  (considered 
together,  within  certain  limits) 
mt'/ai^,  m..  (if  a  number  is  nien- 
ti«)ii«'.d,  persons) /r/'.w>////i,'«,  f.  pi., 
(inhabitants)  haM/tan/n,  m.  pi., 
2)ff])djtitMm,  f.,  (common  folks, 
lower  class)  pevple,  m. ,  (they, 
one,  129,  274)  on;  — say,  on  dit. 

perceive,  v.a.n.  (see,  with  the  eye 
or  mind)  aperc.rvoir  (ir.  189i,  (find 
ou>t,  notice,  by  the  mind  only) 
^operottoir  de. 


perform,  v. ».  n.  fafW,  executer,  s^a^ 

quitter  de.  (theat.,  mu8.)^'0Mcr. 
perhaps,  adv.  peut-Hre. 
perish,  v.n.  penr^  deperir. 
I>ermit,  v.a.  permettre  (ir.  180). 
pernicious,  adj  perniaieux. 
{persecute,  v.a.  perxeeuter. 
Persian,  s.  a<ij.  Persan^    e. 
persist,  v.n.  pe};<iister,  s'obstiner. 
i  erson.    s.    perxonne,    1  ;    — s,    pL 

gens,  m.f.  pi. 
persuade,  v.a.  persuader. 
Peru.  8.  le  Ph'ou.^  m. 
perusal,  s.  lecture,  f. 
Peter,  a  Pierre,  m. 
Philip,  8.  Philii/pe.  m. 
philosopher,  a.  pJdlosophe,  m.  ;  na 

tural  — ,    mituraliste^    m. ;    — 'b 

stone,  8.  pierre  p?iilosop?taie,  t. 
physician,  s.  medecin.,  m. 
piano,  s.  piano.,  ra. 
pickle,    v.a.    mariner.,   confire    (ir 

172). 
picture,  s.  tableau,  m. 
pie.  8    (of  meat)  pdt£,  m.,(of  fruitj 

tarte,  f. 
piece,  8.  mm-ceau,  piece  f. 
pier,  s  pile,  f. 
pierce,  v.a.n.  percer. 
pin.  8.  epiuyle,  f. 
pink,  8.  inillct,  m. 

piruiacle.  a.  pinaele,   m.,   degre,  m. 
pious,  adj.  pieux. 
pitiless,  adj.  bnpitoyahle. 
pity,  8.  pitie  ;   it  is  a  —  (SJJO)  c^esi 

doinmage. 
pity.  V  a.n.  avoir  pitie  de.,  plaindre 

(ir.  17")). 
pi. ace,  8.  plice.  lieu. 
place,  v.a.  placer  (07). 
plain,    adj,     uni,    (simple)    simple^ 

(coinm(m)  ryrdinaire.  * 

f)lan.  8  plan.,  projet,  vu  /7  ^ 

plank,  8.  plafiche,  f.  1/ 

{)lant,  8.  plnnte,  f. 
plate,  8.  (a  dish)  asfdette.  f, 
play,    v.a.n.  jai\r   (377),    (idioms, 

play,  8.  jeu,  m. ,    (drama)  piMe.   f., 
(theatre)  .spectacle,  m.,  comedie,  1 
pleasant,  adj.  ayreaUe. 


464 


VOCABULARY. 


please,  v.a.n.  pMre  d,  faire  plniur 

d   (ir.  178) ;    if  yoii  — ,    k'U  ooiis 

plait. 
pleased,  adj.  content  {de), 
pleasure,  s.  pl(cisi}\  m. 
Pliny,  s.  Pline,  m. 
plum,  8.  prune,  f. 
plunder,  s.  butin,  m. 
pocket,  8.  poche,  t. 
poem,  8.  poetne,  ro. 
poot,  8.  poete.  m. 
poetry,  s.  poede^  f, 
point,    8.    point,    m.,    (sharp    end) 

jwinte,  i. ;  on  the  point  —  of,  sar 

le  point  de. 
poison,  8.  poison,  m. 
poison,  v.a.  empoisontier. 
polite,  adj.  poli. 
political,  adj.  politique. 
pond,  8.  etung,  m. 
poor,  adj.  pmicre  (83),    (bad)  mau- 
po[)e,  8.  pape,  m.  [vais. 

poplar,  8.  peuplier,  m. 
portal,  8.  portaii,  m. 
portion,  s.  portion,  part. 
post-office,  8.   bureau  de  poste^  m., 

poste,  f. 
pot,  8.  pot,  m.  (233). 
potato,  s.  pomme  de  terre,  f. 
pound,    8.    livre^    f.,    (coin)    Uvre 

sterling. 
poverty,  s.  pauvreU^  t. 
powder,  s.  poudre^  t. 
power,  8.  pouvoir,  m. 
powerful,  adj.  puissant. 
practise,  v.a.n.  pratiquer. 
praise,  v.a.  Umer  (l:.>3). 
praise,  s.  louange.  t,  eloge.,  m. 
pray,  v.a.n.  pri<r  (97). 
preach,  v.a.n.  prMher. 
precede,  v.a.  preceder. 
preceding,  adj.  precedent. 
preciuu.s,  adj.  pvedeux. 
precisely,  adv.  preciseinent,  an  juste. 
prei-'er.  v.a.  preferer  (97). 
prei)are.  v.a.  preparer. 
presence,  s.  pre.'<e/ice,  f. 
pre.sent,  adj.  present;  to  be  —  at, 

(LHsint^r  a. 
present,  s.  present.^  m.,  cadeau^  m.  ; 

»t  — ,  d  preMnL 


present,  v.a.  presenter,  (give)  fnire 

pre.'<ent  d^. 
preserve,  v.a.  (fro)n)  preserver  {de), 

(keep)  confer oer,    (in  sugar,  etc.^ 

confire,  (ir.  172).  (§nV^)  mmner. 
pretend,    v.a.n.  (feign)  feindre  (ir. 

175). 
pretty,  dA\.joli.  gentU. 
pretty,   adv.  (\Tt'S)  /^s•.^•«^  ;    —  much. 

—  near,  a  pen  pnls.  pre.\q'(e.  asxez. 
prevent,     v.a.     prenenir    (ir     187), 

(hinder)  einpecher  (de)  (294;."^ 
price,  8.  ])ria\  in. 
pride,  s.  oryueil,  m. 
prince,  s.  prince,  m. 
princess,  s.  princesse,  f. 
principle,  s.  priiLcipe,  m. 
printer,  .s.  iinprimeur,  m. 
prison,  s.  pri-<oii.  f. 
prisoner,  8.  prifounier^  m. 
prize,  8.  (capture)  pri^e,  f.,  (reward^ 

prix,  m. 
probable,  adj.  probable  (331). 
probity,  s.  probite,  f. 
pro(!ure.  v.a.  procurer. 
prodigious,  adj.  prodigieux. 
produce,  v.n.  produire  (ir.  172). 
product,  8.  produit,  m. 
professor,  s.  profesxeur,  m. 
profit,  v.n.  profiler;  to  —  hj^  pra^ 

fif.er  de. 
progress,  s.  progrh,  ra. 
project.  8.  prqjet. 
promise,  8.  proniesse,  f. 
promise,  v.a.n.  promettre  (ir.  ISO), 
prompt,  adj.  prompt. 
pro{)er,  adj.  propre,  convena,ble. 
property,  s.  propriete,  f.,  bieics,  m. 
proposal,  B.  proposition,  f. 
propose.  V.  a.  proj^oner. 
prosperity    s.  pmaperite,  f. 
protect.  V  a.  proteger. 
protector,  s.  protecteur,  m. 
pr  )ad.  adj.  fier.,  orgueilleux. 
prove,  v.a.  prouver. 
provide,  v.a.n.  pourvoir  (ir,  190), 
provided,  conj.  (338)  pourvu  que, 
providence,  s.  prooidence.,  f. 
prudence,  s.  j/rud^nce^  f. 
Prussia,  s.  la  Prusse,  f. 
public,  adj.  a.  public^  m. 


m 


VOCABULARY. 


465 


punctual,  adj.  ponetuel,  exact  (d). 

punctuality,  8.  exactitude,  f. 

punctually,  adv.  pouctueliement. 

punish,  v.a.  punir  (102). 

pupil,  8.  (of  the  eye)  pupiUe,  pru- 
ndle,  f. ,  (scholar)  eUve,  m  f. 

purchase,  v.a.  acheter  ('  of,'  <i). 

pure.  adj.  pur. 

purpose,   8.    but^   m,,  dessein,   m., 
linage,  m. 

purse,  8.  bourse,  f.,  porte-monnaie. 

pursue,  v.a.n.  poursuivre  (ir.  174). 

pursuer,  s.  persecuteur,  m. 

put,  v.a.n.  mettre  (ir.  180),  placet' 
(97) ;  —  ofE,  (postpone)  remettre 
(ir.  180),  differer,  r envoy er  ;  — 
on,  mettre  (ir.  IBOj  ;  —  out,  mettre 
deJu/rs^  (a  fire,  etc.)  eteiadre  (ir 
175). 

Pyrenees,  s.  pL  Pyreiiees^  m.  pL 


a. 


quantity,  s.  quaniite,  f. 
quarrel,  8.  quereUe,  diapuia^  f. 
quarter,   8.    qitart,    m.  ;  —   of    an 

hour  (73)  quart  d'heure,  m. 
queen,  s.  reine,  f. 
question,  s.  que,stio7i,  t. 
question,  v.a.n.  questionner^  douter 

de  (3-29). 
quick,  adj .  vif,  prompt. 
quick,  adv.  vite. 
quiet,  adj.  tranqniUe^  calme. 
quire,  s.  7nain,  f. 
quite,  adv.  tout  dfa.it,  tout  (380). 


R. 


railroad,  a.  chemin  defer,  m. 
rain,  v.n,  imp.  pleuvoir  (ir.  190). 
rain,  8.  phiie^  f. 


raise,  v.a.  lever   (90),   elever  v321), 

eufler. 
rapidly,  adv.  ra/pidement, 
rare,  adj.  r<ire. 
rather,  adv.  plutot  (286). 
read,   v.a.n.    lire  (ir.    177); — over 

again,  reiire  (ir.  177). 
ready,  adj.  pret  {d) ;  —  to  be,  avoir 

firvi. 
real,  adj.  red,  vrni. 
really,  adv.  reellement,  vraiment. 
reap,  v.a.n.  recoUer. 
reason,  s.  ravion,  f. 
recall,    v.a.    ro/pj^eler  (96),   (to   the 

mind,  remember)  se  raq)peler. 
receive,  v.a.   rectvoir  (ir.   189),  <zc- 

cueiilir  (ir.  184). 
recognize,  v.a.  reconnaiti'e  (ir.  178). 
recollecTi,  v.a.      V.  remember, 
recommend,  v  a.  recommander. 
recompense,  s.  recompense,  f. 
red.  adj.  rouge.  • 

redouble,  v.a.n.  redoubler. 
reduce,  v.a.  redaire  {ir.  172). 
reed.  s.  roneau,  ra.,  eanne,  f. 
re-enter,  v  a.  rentrer  {(hins). 
re-establish,  v.a.  retdblir. 
reflect,  v.a.  rejlechir. 
reflection,  s.  reflexion,  f. 
refuse,  v.a.n.  refu.ser. 
regard,  s.  egard,  m.,  consideration, 

f . ;  with  —  to,  a  V egard  de,  quant  d. 
region,  .s.  region.,  f. 
regret,  v.a.  regretter. 
regret,  s.  regret,  m. 
regular,  adj.  reguUer. 
reign,  v.n.  regn.er,  (prevail)  dominer. 
reign,  s.  regii.e.  m. 
rejoice,  v.a.  vejouir  ;  —  v.n.  serh- 

jwdr  (de)  (l:W). 
relate,  v.a.n.   rac/mter,  rapporter. 
relieve,    v.a.    isonl<iger,    sccourh  (ir. 

184).  suhoenir  a  (ir.  187). 
rely,   v.n.   crrmpler  [sur),   se  reposer 

(sur),  a'appuger,  sefo/ider. 
remain,  v.n.  re.sfer,  demeurer. 
remedy,  s.  reuiMe.  m. 
remember,  v.a.   xe  rajij)eler  (96),  M 

souoenir  de  (ir.  187). 
remonstrance,  s.  remon^strance^  t 
render,  v.a.  rmdre. 


46e^ 


VOCABULARY. 


renew,  v. a.  rennui  efpr  (dQ). 
repair,  v.a.n.  re/u>rer. 
repeat,  v.  a.    repefi^,/\    (by  heart)  re- 
nter. 
repent,  v.  n.a.  xe  repciitirde{iT.  184), 
reply,  v.a.n.  repondre,. 
report,  v.  a.  r<i'}yjiortci'. 
rei)ort,  s.  brnlt,  m. ,  novvelle,  f. 
repose,  v.a.n.  xe  re^yoxer. 
represent,  v.a.  reqrrexenter. 
reproach,  v.a.  i:epn)chei\  blamer. 
reproach,  s.  reproche,  m. 
repugnance,  s.  repin/imuce,  i. 
reputation,  s.  leputtitiou,  f. 
re'juest.  v.a.  demnnder,  prifT. 
ro'^uire,  v.a.  dentitnder,  (as  a  right) 

e.\i(f('r  (827), (want)  avoir  heAoin  de. 
resemble,  v.a.  ref<.\enihler  d. 
resolve,  v.a.   re.soudre   (ir.  175),    se 

remadre  {</). 
respect,  v.a.  reffpecter. 
respect,  s.   l-expect,  m.  ;    with  —  to, 

quant  a,  sur. 
respectful,  adj   rea^tectfieiix  {envers). 
rest,  v.n.  Herepofiei\  (lean)  ;i\i'p])uyer. 
rest,  8.  repos,  m. 
restless,  adj.  (anxious)  im/uiet 
restrain,  v.a.  reprimer,  restreindre 

(ir.  175).^ 
result,  s.  residtat^  m. 
retain,  v.a.  reteidr  (ir.  187). 
retire,  v.a.n.  {se)  retirer. 
retitrn,    v.n.    (go  back)    retovrner^ 

(come   back)    rcre.nir    (ir.    187)  ; 

—  v.a.  reiulre,    (send  back)  reu- 

Toye.r. 
return,  s.  retoiir.  m. 
rev<mge.  v.a.  x<-  renger  de. 
reward,  v.a    mv///Ayr/<.sY'/' (' for,' (/c). 
reward,  s.  remiii.peiixb^  t. 
Khine,  s.  Rhlu,  m. 
ribbon,  s.  ruhan.  m. 
ri,oh,  adj.  riche. 
riches,  s.  ric/texxes,  f.  pi. 
ride,  v. n.a.    (on  a  horse)  mouter  (a 

checal). 
ridiculous,  adj.  ridicule. 
right,    adj.    adv.    droit,   hon^    Men 

jiixte  ;  to  be  —  (pers. )  ax)oir  rai- 

Hun  {de,. 
right,  s.  droits  m. ,  raisa/t,  f.,  titre^ 


m. ;  to  the  — ,  d  droite  ;  to  be  in 

the  — ,  avoir  raison. 
ring,  8.  hagite.  f. 
ring,  v.n.  xonner. 
ripe,  adj.  mar. 
rise,  v.n.  (g^t  up)  xe  lever. 
risk,  v.a.  I'ij^quer,  hazarder. 
rival,  s.  rical,  e. 
river,  8.  riviere,  t. 
road,  8.  route,  f..   c.heinin,  in.,   voU^ 

f. ,  (of  streets)  cJiaiiHxee,  f. 
rob,  v.a.  r<>lev.  (deprive) /^mer  (tie). 
Roman,  adj    s.   roriudn. 
Rome.  8.  lioine,  f, 
roof,  s.  f/)it,  m. 
room.  8.  ehnmhre,  f. 
rose.  a.  roxe.,  f.  , 
round,  adj.  rond. 
round,  adv.       V.  around,  adv. 
roj-al.  fidj.  rofi<d. 

rubbish,  s.  deroihhrex.  diihrix,  m.  pi. 
rule,  v.a  n.  ijonctrnar.  (over;  regiicr. 
rale.  s.  rrijLt.  f. 
ruler,  s.  xthiveiuiin. ;  regie,  f. 
run.   v.n.  cotirir   (ir    184).    (to)   ac- 

coiirir.,    (HIJ))   nchever ;    —  away, 

xV nfiii r  {ir.  188),    —  oxer,  paxxe? 

x^ii\    (of    fluids)    debordcr,    (read 

cursorily)  porwurir  (ir.  184). 
Russia,  s.  la  liusxie,  f. 


s. 


sad.  adj.  trixfe. 

sadness,  s    tri^sle^se.  f. 

safety.  8.  Kl'utie.  f. 

St..   Helena,  s.  Salute- Helen  ft.  f. 

St.  Petersburg,  s.  St.  l'et<  rxlmurg,  t. 

sake.  K.  ;    I'oi    the  —  of,  d  luoixe  de, 

piir  egard  jionr,  pour  avoir. 
sale.  8.  rente.,  f. 
salt.  s.  xel.  m. 
same.   adj.    (279)  meme.,   (the  same 

thing  (la  mfnie  choxe)  ;  all  or  just 

the  — ,  tout  de  me  me. 
satisfied,  adj.  aatii^fait  {de\  content 

ide). 


VOCABULARY. 


4r>7 


satisfy,  v.a.n.  HollMfaire  (ir.    180), 

Satunlay.  s.  :<»iiii(i<li.  m. 

s.-iva^e.  atlj    s.  »tvucii<je.  m.f. 

wive,  v.a.  fumrer,  (spare)  epargner. 

save,  prep.  .v'<w/,  except e. 

F<iy.   v.a.   dire  (ir.    173);  it  is  said 

'374)  .  .  .  on  dit .  .  . 
scarce,  adj.  rare. 
scaicely,  adv.  d  peine. 
scholar,  s.  f--(>'liei\  elere,  m 
school.  8.  ea>it-^  f  ;  at  — ,  d  Vecole. 
pcieiioo,  8.  licience^  f. 
Scii)io  Afriiuiuns,  s.  Scipion  i' Afri- 
ca/n..  m. 
scissors.  8.  civfiitx,  m.  pi. 
scold,  v.a.u.  f/ro/idcr. 
scripture,  s.  Fcritiirenainte^  f. 
Bciilpt'ire.  8.  HCid/ptiire.  f. 
Scytliiaji,  adj    8.  acytke^  des  Scythes. 
sea.  s.  iii.er.  f. 
season,  8.  .viiton,  t. 
secoml.   adj.   xecond^   detixieine^    (of 

the  month)  deux. 
secret,  adj.  s.  secret.,  m. ;  to  keep  a 

—  (:543),  (se)  tnire  (ir.  178). 
security,  s.  surete.,  f.,  garaiitie. 
see,    v.a.u.   voir  (ir.    1^3),  (under- 

8tand)  ct/mpren-dre  (ir.  181). 
seek.  v.a.rL  chercher,  (ask)  deman- 

der.       % 
seem.  v.n.  Mmihler^  parmtre  (ir.  178). 
sei/ie,  V.  a.u.  .H/tmr  (103),  s'emparer. 
sfldom,  adv.  ntreinent. 
sell',  proa.  s.  (Ill,  3o7) 8oi-mSme, soi, 

xe,. 
sell,   v.a.  vendre  (105);  —  v.n.  se 

oendre  ;  to  be  sol<l,  d  vendre. 
seuil.    v.a.n.    entoyer  (ir.    194);    — 

away,  renooyer ;  —  for,  envoyer 

chtrclter.,  /aire  venir. 
sense,  s.  aeiis,  m 
gensil)le,  adj.    sensible  {d),  (common 

sense)  senate.  (<;on8cioua)  cn  pleine 

ett/t/iHisfttince. 
sentiment,  8.  Hentiment,  m. 
September,  s.  septenibre,  m. 
seriously,  adv.  serieusement. 
servant,    s.    serviteur^   domestique., 

m.,  servdnte,  f. 
serve,  v.a.n.  aeroir  (ir.  183). 


service,  s.  semce,  m. 

set.   v.a.  pMt'r^   pUicei    \{)7>,   niettre 

(ir.    180)  ;  —  off  (start) /w'v  p*ir- 

tir ;  —   out,  V.n.    (of  the   suu, 

etc. )  He  Goncher ;  —  off  oi   out, 

'piirtir  (ir.  18:J). 
seven,  adj.  sept. 
seventeen,  adj.  dix-sept. 
seventh,  adj.  sepli&jne.,  scqit. 
seventy,  adj.  soixnnte-dix. 
several,  adj.  phtsieicrs. 
sew.  v.a.n.  coudre  (ir.  174). 
shade,  shadow,  s.  onihre.,  f. 
shall       V.  p.  04.  90,  301. 
shame,  s.  hontt,  f. 
share,  s.  pdi't,  f. 
share,  v.a.n.  partager  (97). 
she,  pron.  adj    elle\nO,   114,  225), 

c^^fe  (110,  370). 
shed,  v.a   rerser.  repandre  (108). 
sheep,  8.  nioiiton.  ra. ,  brebis.,  f. 
sheet,  a.  (of  paper) /g/^i^e,  f. 
shepherd,  a.  bfrger. 
shine,  v.n.  Inirc.  (ir.  171),  briller. 
shining.  brill,(tnt,  beuu. 
ship,    s.   (chietiy   for  war)  vm.tf^fnn, 

(chiefly  for  trade)  nrivire.  (^cntTul 

terra)  bdtimenU  ra. 
shirt,  8.  chemise.,  f. 
shoe,   s.  Koulier.,  m.  ;   —    maker,  s. 

cordonnier.m.. 
shoot,  v.a.  (fire  arms)  tirer.,  (go  out 

shooting)  c/uf„sser. 
shop,  8.  >n>ijpisin,  boutiqite  {de .  .  .). 
short,  adj.    ov.rt.  petit  ;  to  be    — 

-sighted,  avoir  la  nne  basse. 
should.       V.  p.  54.  90  201,  3;J5. 
shoulder,  a.  epaule,  f. 
yhow,  v.a.  irymtrer. 
shun,  v.a.  eniter^fniy  (ir.  183), 
shut,  V  JI.U.  fenner;  -    in.  enfeimior 
shutter,  a.  cflet. 
Sicily,  s   In  Sicile,  f. 
sick,  adj    malnde. 
side.  8   (',<'>fe.  m. 
siege,  8.  siege,  m. 
sight,  s.  one,  f. 
si.nu.  a.  signe.  m. 
sign.  v.a.  signer. 
signify,  v.a.u.  signijior. 
silence,  s.  sileftce^  m. 


468 


VOCABULARY. 


silent,  adj.  sHen^auux ;  to  be  or 
keep  — ,  se  taire  (ir.  178). 

Biik,  s.  xoie,,  f. 

Bilk,  adj.  de  soie. 

silly,  adj.  niais,  ftot. 

silver,  8.  argent,  ra. 

silver,  adj.  cT argent 

simple,  adj.  s.  nimpk^  m. 

sin,  s.  ])eche,  ra. 

since,  conj.  dfi'puU  que  (292),  que 
(308),  (inasmuch  as)  puisqae. 

sincere,  adj.  ainrj/r. 

sinceritj',  s.  sincerite,  f 

sing,  v.a.n.  chanter. 

singer,  s.  ehantear,  m. 

single,  adj.  neal. 

sink.  v.n.  {H')eaf oncer ^  (decline)  d^- 
choir  (ir.  189). 

sir,  s.  monfiieitr,  m. 

sister,  s.  s(£ur^  f . ; in-law,  helle- 

smur. 

sit,  v.n.  (seat  oneself)  H^asseoir  (ir, 
192);  —  d.'jwn,  n'oHHe/dr  ;  (to  din- 
ner, to  table)  He  inettre  (ir.  180) 
a  table. 

situated,  adj.  dtm. 

situation,  s.  situalion.,  place^  f. 

six,  adj.  8.  dx. 

sixteen,  adj.  seize. 

sixteenth,  adj.  seizieme^  seize. 

sixth,  adj.  sixie/ne,  six. 

sixty,  adj.  s.  soixante. 

size,  8.  grandeur.,  f. 

skate,  8.  patin.,  ra. 

skate,  v.n   jxitiiier. 

skilful,  adj.  haMle,  adroit. 

skin,  8.  ]ieau,  f. 

sky,  s.  del,  m.  ;  skies,  pi.  (clouds) 
aaes.  f.  pi. 

slander,  v. a.  medire  de  (ir.  172). 

slate,  8.  ardoiKn,  f. 

slave.  8.  e^clare,  m  f . 

slavery,  s.  esclarage,  m. 

sleep,  v.n.  dor  mi  r  (ir.  183). 

sleep,  s.  sommeil,  ra. 

sleepy,  adj. ;  to  be  — .  avoir  sormneil. 

slow,  adj.  lent. 

slumber,  v.n.  somineiller. 
.small,  adj.  petit. 

smell,  v.a  a  sentir  ;  —  sweet  (285) 
9tntir  b(/n,. 


sraile,  v.n.  souHre  (ir.  107,  194), 
('at,'  pers.,  d  ;  things,  de). 

smoke,  s.  fnmee,  f. 

smoke,  v.  n.  a.  fmner. 

snow,  8.  neige,  f. 

snow,  v.n.  neiger  (146). 

snuffers,  s.  rnouchetteM,  f.  pi. 

so,  adv.  oinsi,  (therefore)  done,  (to 
such  a  degree)  si,  tellement,  tant^ 
au.m,  (used  after  an  adj.  &r  a 
verb)  le,  en.  que  oai,  (provided 
that)  pourvv  que  ;  —  that,  —  as 
to,  de  sorte  que,  de  maniere  que. 

soap.  8.  savon.  m. 

society,  s.  societe,  f. 

Socrates,  s.  Socrate,  ra. 

soft,  adj.  (yielding,  not  hard  in  sub- 
stance) 7nou,  mol,  (not  rough,  and 
fig.  not  hard  or  harsh  or  strong) 
donx,  dMicat. 

softly,  adv.  (gently)  doucement. 

soil,  v.a.  salir  {\02>),  souiO£r. 

soldier,  s.  soldat.,  m. 

solid,  adj.  so/Me,  (not  hollow)  massif. 

some,  adj.  art.  adv.  (some  or  other, 
a  small  amount  of,  a  short .  .  .,  a 
few),  quelqxe,  qnelques,  pi  ,  (an  in- 
definite quantity  or  number,  89) 
du,  ra.,  de  l^i,  f.,  des,  pi.,  (of  it, 
of  thera,  120)  en,  (about)  environ^ 
d  pea  pres  ;  pron.  qnelques-nns. 

somebody,  s.  pron.  (129)  quelqu'im., 
on. 

something,  s.  pron.  quelque  cJime^ 
m.  ;  —  else,  autre  chose,  m. 

sometimes,  adv.  quelquefois.,  (when 
repeated)  tantot. 

somewhere,  adv.  quelque  part. 

son,  8.  fils,  m. 

soon,  adv.  hientot,  tot,  (early)  cee 
bonne  heure,  tot ;  as  —  as,  ausd- 
tot  que,  des  que  (820). 

sooner,  adv.  plus  tH  (286). 

sore,  adj.  (tender)  douloureux,  sen- 
sible;  to  have  —  eyes,  throat 
(53)  avocr  nnii  aitx  yeux,  d  la 
gorge. 

sorrow,  s.  chagrin,  m.,  douleur. 

sorry,  adj.  fdcJie  ('for,'  'to,'  de)^ 
afflige. 

sort,  s.  sorte.  esp^e.^  f. 


VOCABULARY. 


4G9 


eoul,  8.  dme,  f. 

source,  a.  smiree,  t. 

Fouth,  8.  i^i/d,  midi.  m, 

pow,  v.a.n.  semer  {\)^). 

epaoious,  adj.  grand,  vaste. 

Spain,  8.  V  Rls^tngne,  f. 

Spanish,  adj.  e-^pf/gnoL  d'Espngne. 

sparrow,  s.  mm/teou,  m. 

speak,  v.n.a.  parlt^r,  dire  (ir.  172). 

8I)t'aker.  r.  oi'ntrirr,  m. 

Bpectacles,  s.  luHeUfx.  f.  pi. 

spell.   V  a.  D.   e'}>el.er.    (write)   ecrire, 

(is  spelt)  n'ecril  (ir.  Mu). 
6]>end;  v.a.n.  deyeiiner^  (tinie);ww.s-6?'. 
spirit,  8.  exj^rits  ni. 
spite.  8.  de}4f,.xr\.,  mnlke,  f .  ;  in  — 

of.  en  dr-jiit  de,  rmdgre. 
splendid,  adj.  sylendidf^  mcignifiqiie. 
ppoil,    v.a.    an'Ttnnyre  (107),  gdter^ 

(ibiiner,  detruire  (ir.  172). 
spoon.  8.  ci/iUer,  f.,   (for  salt  or  ice; 

pel/^,  f. 
Bj)read,   v.a.  etendj-e,  (scatter,  pxxh- 

liRh)repa/idre  (107). 
spring.  v.a.n.  (leap)  xtn/fer. 
spring.  8.   (season)   prlnte^npM.   m., 

(elastic  body)  retfsort,  ra. ;    in  the 

— ,  au  prill  IfDips. 
stair  8.  —  8,  pi. .  esc^die/r,  m.  ;   down 

— 8,  en  ban  ;  up  — s,  en  hnut. 
stand,  v.n.  ne  tenir  (dehout)  (ir  187), 

(be  placed)  etre  pl<ice,  etre  sitae  ; 

v.a.  (bear)  ^v/yporter. 
standard,  e.  drapeou,  m. 
star,  8.  efaile^  f. 

start,  v.n.  (set  out)  partir  (ir.  188). 
starve,  v.n,   viwiiir  de  ftUm.  (with 

oold)  monrir  defroid. 
state,  8.  et(tt,  ui.,  condition.,  f. 
stay,  v.n.  re.^ter,  d&ineurer. 
steal,  v.a.n.  poler. 
steam,  s.  xafeiir,  f. 
Btearaer,    steamship,    s.    bateau    ^ 

vapeur,  m. 
steel,  8.  acier.  m. 
step.  8.  pea.  m. 
stick.  8.  baton,  m. ,  canne,  f. 
still,  adj.  calme,  trampdlle. 
still,    adv.     encore,    (nevertheless) 

cefftendant,  neannioiim. 
stocking,  8.  hais^  m. 


Btone,  8.  pierre,  f. 

stop.  v.a.  nrreter  ;  —  v.n.  sfarreter. 

store.  8.    pi-oviHion,  f. ,  (warehouse, 

shop)  inognun^  m. 
storm.  8.  orage,  m. ,  tetnpete^  f. 
story.  8.  histoire.  f.,  coicte^  m. 
strange,  adj.  etrange. 
stranger,  s.  etranyer^  m, 
street,  a.  Tue,  f. 
strength,  8.  force,  f. 
strict,  adj    ittrict.  exaet. 
strike,   v.a.n.  f rapper^    (of  clocks, 

etc.)  Kouner. 
string.  8.  {tyf'me)  ficelle,  f.,  (of  shoes, 

etc.)  cord(jn.,  m.,  (of  mus.  instrs.) 

c^'/rde.  f. 
strong,  adj.  fort. 

studious,  adj.  .studieux^  attentif  (d). 
study.  8.  etode,  f. 
study,  v.a.n.  etiidier. 
stuff,  a.  (cloth)  etoffe.  f. 
style,  s.  Htyle..  gout.  m. 
suV)ject.  a.  Kiijct.  m. 
sublime.  :idj.  Huhlinie. 
submission,  a.  aouniixsion.,  f. 
submit,   v.a.n.   {se)  isoarnettre  d  (ir. 

180). 
succeed,  v.a.n.  (f oWow)  siicceder  (d,)^ 

xvivre.    (be    successful)    rewsir, 

parrenir  (ir.  185,  187). 
success.  8.  Hucces.  m. 
successively,  adv.  suecessivement.  de 

suite  (28()). 
such.  adj.   td  (276),  pareil.  (these, 

those)  ces ;   (adverb,  :    thus)    td,, 

ainni.   (so)  si ;  —  a  one,  un  id,, 

m. .   vne  teUe.  f .  ;  —  a  man,  un 

tel  hoimne  ;  —  as.  td  que. 
suddenly,  adv.    subitement,  tmit  d 

coup  (280). 
suffer,   v.a.n.  soujfrir  (ir.  185),  en,- 

diirer.  (undergo)  svbir. 
suffice,  v.n.  .siipre  (d)  (ir.  171,  348V 
sufficient,    adj.    svffisont.    (adverb) 

a.s.^ez  ;   to  be   — ,  sujjire  (a)   (ir. 

171.880,848). 
sufficiently,  adv.  svffisarnment^  as- 

xez. 
sugre,  8.  Sucre,  m. 
suit,  v.a.  coni:eidr  d{u:.  187). 
sum,  B.  sonrnie^  f. 


470 


VOCABULARY. 


Bummer.  b.  ete,  m. 

eun,  8.  noleil.  m. 

Sunday,  s.  (Umanche^  m. 

S.1}).  V. n.  tiouper  ('on,'  de^  ar.ec). 

superstitiou,  s.  Huper-stition,  f. 

«?u[);)licate.  v.a.n.  s//.]y}}lier. 

support.  V  a    Kup^'irier,  (help)  ap- 

puifHi',  souteuir  (ir.  187). 
suppose,  V  a.  HUjriioRer,  (fancy)  s'ma- 

(/iiwr. 
Bupposed.  part,  snppose  (246). 
Bure.  adj.  mlr. 
sure,    surely,    adv.  surement,   vrai- 

m.e)U. 
surprise,  s.  Hurprue,  f. 
purprisiug.  adj.  soirprenant. 
surrender,  v.a.u   ise)  reiidre,  livrer. 
surround,  v.  a   ent^ourer. 
survive   v.a.n.  .sirnuore  {d)  (ir.  181). 
suspect,  v.a.n.  aonpQonner. 
suspend,  v.  a.  .sicspendre. 
S'lstiain.  v. a  .sontenir  (ir.  187^ 
Sweden,  s.  la  Smde^  f. 
sweet,  adj.  doiix. 
swim,  v.a.n.  iicfjer,  {Aoa.t)  flatter. 
Switzerland,  s.  la  Suisse,  f. 
Bword.  s.  epee,  f. 
symbol,  s.  synibole,  m. 


T. 


table,  s.  ttihlfi,  f. 

tailor,  8.  tiiilJ.enr,  m. 

take,  v.a.  preiulvt  (ir  ISO),  (bring 
with  oneself,  :uid  without  carry- 
ing) coinliiire  (ir.  172),  metier 
(i)6).  (by  currying)  porter,  (oflF, 
away)  t'.iiiin.riiei  (9(5).  einftorter^ 
eiiiener  (iK»).  ntfii\  (a  prize)  rem- 
piivter,  (liire)  loner  ;  —  u{».  pren- 
dre (\x.  IHO).  (])iok  up)  riLninn.s('r; 

—  from,     d£iH)nUler    {}ni«fCn)\ 

—  charge  of.  .vc  cJu(r(/er  de ;  — 
part  in.  .v<?  iiieler ;  —  off,  otar. 

latent,  s.  Ud,eiit,  ra. 
talk,   v.n    purler,  caus&r  ('about,' 
*  ove7,'  de). 


talk,  8  conversation,  f. 

tart,  .s.  Umrie,  tarte,  f. 

task.  8.  in.ch.e,  (of  schools)  devoir,  m 

taste,  v.a.n.  godter. 

taste.  H.  grmt,  m. 

tasteful,  adj.  de  boii  go/lt. 

tea.   8.    the,   in.  ; cup,  s.  tasse  d 

the.  f. 

teach,  v.a.  enseigner,  a/pprendre 
{d)  (ir.  181).^ 

teacher,  s.  maitre,  m.,  -sse,  f.,  pro- 
fessear,  m. 

tear,  s.  larme,  f. ;  — s,  pi.  larmrs. 
f.  pi.,  pleurs^  xn.  pi.  ;  to  burst  into 
— ,  f'lndre  en  larmes. 

tear,  v.a.  decMrer. 

tedious,  adj.  ennnifeiUR. 

Telemachus.  s.   'reJemaque^  m. 

tell,  v.a.n.  dire  (a)  (ir.  172),  (re- 
late) ra,conter,  ■  {xniorxii)  fifyjiren- 
dre  (ir.  181).  informer  {de:) -^  I 
cannot  — ,  je  ne  ndls  pas,  je  ne 
xd.iintij*  ooujt  dire. 

temper,  s.  caraetere.  m.;  ou*-.  of  — , 
de  nidiicdise  hntneur  ;  to  lose  o.'s 
— ,  to  get  out  of  — ,  s'emjHirter, 
se  fdrJier. 

teinper.-ite,  adj.  Kohre,  mod^ere. 

ten,  adj.  s.  dix,  m. 

tend,  v.a.n.  garder,  avoir  soin  de  ; 
—  v.n.  tendre  (/?). 

tender,  adj    tendre  (8:i). 

tenth,  adj.  dirieme,  dix. 

terra,  s.  ternte,  in.,  condition,  f., 
(charge)  prix.  m. 

terminate,  v.  a.  n.  terminer,  finir(par). 

ten-ible.  adj.  terrihle. 

than.  adv.  ''/<te  (.S()),  de  (287),  f/iie 
'.    .  .    ne  (2S).")). 

thank,  v.a.  reniercier  (de)  ;  —  you  ! 
merci! 

thanks,  s.  remnchnenlH.  m.  pi., 
(owing  to)  gr'ii'e  idi  ;    —  !  mercif 

thankfiil,  adj.  riconntris-xa/U  ('for,' 
de). 

thit.  pron.  dem.  ce.  cet,  m..  cette,  f., 
ce  .  .  .  -III.  cet .  .  .  -i/i.  cette .  .  .  -Id 
(02),  celni.  in  .  celle.  f. .  (that one) 
celiri-id.  ni..  celle-lA.  f.  (11!)).  (that 
thing)  cela,  ^a.  lu.  (120),  (it.  80) 
le  ;  —  which  (what;  ce  yai  (uoulX 


VOflABULARY. 


471 


tt  que  (obj.)  or  te  (pC  (120,  12{>), 

(that  is  to  say)  c'ext-()-ttire  (oOS). 
that,  pron.   relat.      V.  who,  whom, 

and  which, 
that   (conj.,  103;    with   indicative, 

308;    with   subj.,    825)   que,    (in 

order  that)  nfin  que  (333),   'pour 

que.  que  (310). 
the,  art.   (28,  34,  218,  221)   le,    m., 

la,  f.,  len,  pi. 
theatre,  a.   theatre,  m. 
thee,  pron.  pers.  ^^*  (110),  te  (114). 
their,    pron.    posa.  leur,   leurs  ((54, 

241). 
theirs,  pron.  poss.   (125)  le  leiir,  la 

leur,  les  leurs. 
them,  pers.   pron.  eiix.  m.,  elles,  t. 

(110),    (obj.    of  a   verb)    les,   (to 

them)  leur{\\'i)\  at — ,  bj — ,  for 

—  (of  thin^)  y,  en  (120). 
theme,  h.  tJieme,  sujet,  m. 
themselves,    pron.    (Ill,  257)   eux- 

mernes,  eUeit-memeK.  evx,  eU,es,  (in  a 
reflect   verb)  ae  (138). 

then,  adv.  (at  that  time,  in  that 
case)  olfn'H.  (afterwards)  enaaite, 
puis,  (therefore)  ^fA/ic;  since — , 
(lepiiiK  r,e  te)np>i-l(i.  dqiuis. 

there,  adv.  (place  not  mentioned 
before)  Id,  y.  t  place  mentioned 
before)  y.  (emphatically)  W  /  — 
he  or  she  is  {or  goes)  le  or  la  voild; 

—  they  are,  les  voild  ;  —  is  or  are, 
V.  be. 

these,  pi.  of  this   (  V.  this),    pron. 

dem.  (62)  ce-i,  ces  .  .  .  -ci^  ceux-ci, 

celle.s-ci  (il-y-a.  147). 
Theseus,  s.  The..^ee,  m, 
they,    pron.    ;Z<<.  m.,  eUen,  f.    (114), 

eux,    m.,   eUes,    f.    (110),   (those) 

ceux.  m.,  ceUes,  f.  (119),  (people, 

anyone)  on  (119,  274). 
thick,  adj.  (252)  epaifi,  d'epameur. 
thief.  8   vof^ur.  m  ■ 
thine,    pron.  poss.   (125)  le  tien,  la 

tieniifi.  I,ej<  tiens.  l/'.s  tieaneti,  d  toi, 

di'  iol.      V.  mine, 
think,  v.a.  n.  peiixer,  (believe)  crytVe 

(V'/r*  (ir.  177,  327). 
tliird,  adj.  trouiem^.  trvis. 
thirst,  8.  8(jiJ\  I. 


thirsty,  adj. ;  to  be  or  feel  — ,  avoir 

""if. 
thirteen,  adj.  treize. 
thirty,  adj.  trente. 
this.  pron.  dem.  ce,.cet,  m.,  cette,  f., 

ce.  .  .  -ci.   cet . .  .  -ci,  cette  .  .  .  -ci 

(02),  (this  one)  Cfhii-ci.  m. ,  CtW  • 

ci,  f.  (119).  (this  thing)  ceci,  cela^ 

c^(120).      K  that, 
those,    pi.  of  that    (  V.  that),   pron. 

dem.    ((j2)   ces.    c.es .  .  . -Id,    cmx, 

celles.   ceux-ld.    eeUes-ld ;   —  are, 

ce  sont.  ce  nont  Id,  voild. 
thon,  pron.  tu  (114).  toi  {UO). 
though,    conj.    (1<>3,    333)   quoique^ 

hien  que  ;  quelque  .  .  .  que  (281). 
thought,  8.  pennee,  f. 
thouirhtlesa,  adj.  iicsou riant. 
thousand,    adj.    (08)  uiille,    (of  the 

(late)  inU. 
thread,  s.  fil.  m. 
threaten,  v.a.  meuacer. 
three,  adj    trois. 
throat    8.   yn-fje.  f.  ; "  a  sore  — ,   nn 

mat  (le  (/orqe  (230).  twd  d  la  qorge 

r>2). 

through,  prep,  d  ti-avem,  par,  (in 
the  middle,  in)  dMiitu,  (by  means 
of)  ]>ar. 

throughout,prep.  d^un  bout  dC autre. 

throw,  v.a.  jeter  (90) ;  —  off,  jeter  d 
baft, 

thunder,  v.a.n.  tonner. 

thunder,  s.  tonnerre,  m. ;  —  -storm, 
8.  oi'age,  m. 

Thursday,  a.jeudi,  m. 

thus,  adv.  ainsi. 

thy,  pron,  poss.  (05)  ton,  ta,  tea. 

thyself,  pron.  (Ill)  toi-meme,  toi, 
(in  a  reflect,  verb,  138)  te^  toi. 

tile,  8.  tuile,  i. 

till,  prep,  conj,     V.  until. 

time,  s.  temps,  m.,  (of  the  clock, 
keiire.  f. ,  (with  regard  to  repeti- 
tion, 100) />w,  f.  ;  a  long  — ,  long- 
ti'^rnps ;  at  one  —  (at  once, 
formerly)  antrefoU,  tout  d'?tn 
coup  (28<)) ;  at  the  same  — ,  en 
w/ine  teiupn ;  at  — s,  parfoin. 
quiiqiiea  fois ;  in"  good  ,  rt 
tempa  ;  it  is  — ,  i\  c^t  iempf  (;>30). 


472 


VOCABULARY. 


timely,  adv.  o  VTopos. 

timid,  adj.  tiinide. 

tire,  v.a.ii.  [sfi)  fatiguer. 

t-o,  (panicle  used  before  an  infini- 
tive) a  (847)  de  (842),  (in  order 
to)  poiir  (854),  (ijin  de  ;  (some- 
times untranslated). 

to,  prep,  a  (485,  282,  250),  en  (286), 
(into)  eii,  (towards,  of  behavior, 
u^ith  reg-ard  to.  250,  299)  envers, 
(towards,  of  direction)  rern  (299  >, 
(as  far  as,  till)  jii.s(/t''d,  (about, 
244)  vers,  (of  the  hour,  72,  244) 
nifd/is. 

to-day.  adv.  avjonrfPhni. 

tog-ether,  adv.  en-seinble. 

tolerably,  adv.  p/tf<,sifMem,e7d,  attftez. 

to-morrow,  adv.  denwin  ;  the  day 
after  — ,  aprh  deniiairh. 

ton,  s.  tonne,  f. 

too.  adv.  IrijqK  (also)  avunL  de  pluK. 

tooth,  8.   dents  f. ; ache,  b.  imd 

de  dent,  ni-  (380),  mal  aux  dents 
(52). 

touch.  V  a.n.  toucher  {d). 

towards,  adv.  (250,  299)  ters.,  en- 
vern,  pour. 

towel.  8.  essuie-tniiinfi^  m. 

town,  8.  viUe,  f.  ;  in  — ,  en  viUe. 

tradesman,  s.  marchmid,  m. 

traduce,  v.  a.       V.  slander. 

train,  s.  (rail)  train,  ra. 

tranquil  lit}',  s.  tranqiiiUite,  t. 

translate,  v. a.  tradf/ire  (ir.  .172). 

translation,  s.  trndu-ction^  version.,  f. 

travel,  v.n.  voi/ager. 

traveller,  s.  rfn/m/eur.,  m. 

treasure,  s.  tresor,  m. 

treat,  v.a.n.  trailer,  regaler.,  ('with,' 
'to,'  de). 

treatment,  s.  traitement,  m. 

tree,  s.  arbre,  m. 

tremble,  v.n.  trembler, 

tribute,  a.  tribut,  m. 

triumph,  v.n.  trioinpher  (de). 

troop,  8.  troupe,  f. 

trouble,  v. a.  trouMer.,  toiirmenter  ; 
to  —  oneself,  ae  dernnger,  (be 
uneasy  about)  xHnxpiU'ter  {de). 

trouble,  8.  trouble,  m..  (alUiction) 
peine.,  f.,  (auuoyauce)  ennuiy  in. 


Troy,  8.  Troie,  t. 

true,  adj.  vrai. 

truly,  adv.  waiment,  dncerement. 

trunk,  8.  malie,  f.,  coffre,  m.,  (of  ele 

phants,  insects)  trompe,  f. 
trust,  v.a.n.  (rely  on)  sejier  d,  avoir 

con  fiance  en,  (in  trust)  confier  d. 
trusty,  adj.^r/^fe,  constant. 
truth,  8.  veHie.,  f. 
truthful,  adj.  rrai. 
truthfulness,  s.  teracite,  f .,  verite.,  f. 
try,  v.a.n.  essay er,  (test)  eproiiver, 

(endeavor)  tdcJier  {de),  (tire)  fa- 

tiguer. 
Tuesday,  a.  mnrdi.,  m. 
tumult,  8.  tumnlte,  m. 
turn,      v.a.n.      tourner.,     (change) 

changer,  canveriir  {en),  (direction) 

{s(^    diriger   or     tourner    (vei's), 

(move  toward)  se  diriger  {vei's). 
turn,  8.    to7/r,   m.,  (service)  service, 

m. ;  by  — a.   in  — ,  tonir  a  tour. 
tutor,  a.  precept&ur,  maltre,  m. 
twelfth,  adj.  dovzUme,  dome. 
twelve,  adj.  a.  dovze ;    —   o'clock 

(noon)  midi,  m.,  (midnight)  m- 

nuit,  m. 
twenty,  adj.  (67)  tingt. 
twitter,  a.  gazouiUeinent,  rcu 
two,  adj.  deux. 
tyrant,  a.  tyran,  m. 
Tyre,  s.  Tyr,  f. 
Tyrian,  a.  Tyrien,  m. 
Tyrolese,    a,    adj.     Tyrolian,    adj. 

Tyrolien,,  m.,  -we,  f. 


u. 


ugly,  adj.  laid,  vilain. 

umbrella,  a.  parapluie,  m. 
unable,  adj.  incapable  {de). 
unanswerable,  adj.  santt  replique. 
uncertain,  adj.  s.  incertain,  m. 
uncle,  8.  onde.  ra. 

uncomfortable,  ad j    gene,  vuUdson 
mse,  (things)  incommode. 


V 


VOCABULARY. 


473 


nncommon,    adj.    rare^    extraordi- 
naire. 
under,  prep.  adv.  «<?««,  deswus.,  au- 

desHom  de. 
undergo,  v.  a.  nubir,  eprouver. 
understand,    v.a.n.    couiprendre  (ir. 

IHl),  (suppose,  to  mean)  eutendre^ 

(know)  s' entendre  d  or  en. 
undei-take.  v.a.n.    entrejn-endre  (ir. 

181).  se  charyer  de,  n'eugnyer  (a). 
undoubtedly,  adv.  aauif  d^mte. 
unexpectedly,  adv.   lout  d'un  coup 

(38G). 
unfit,  adj.  pen  propre  (d),  more  — 

{'17'\ )  moiiu  convenuhle^  inepte. 
unfortunate,  adj.  s.  infortuioe^  mal- 

hein-eifx. 
unfortunately,    adv.    mal/ieureuse- 

laent. 
ungrateful,  adj.  ingrat. 
unhappy,  adj.  mdUieureiix. 
unheard,  adj.  —  of,  irumi. 
unite,  v.a   nuir. 

United  States,  8.  EtuOt-  [ftm,  m.  pi. 
universal,  adj.  8.  v/dremei. 
universe,  s.  itnioer.f,  m. 
unjust,  adj.  injnxte. 
unjustly,  adv.  i/tjmtement,  mal. 
unknown,  adj    i/iC(mHU  (U). 
unless,  conj.  d^nAumque  ^292,  3:}3), 

(with  the  subj    and  tie)  que  .   .  . 

lie  (310),  d  nwins  d.e.    (before  an 

inf.),  erceple,  diutn,. 
unJikely.  adj.  innriiUemhlfihle. 
unnieritetl,  adj.  imiuerite. 
unplea.sant,   unpleasiug,   adj.   desa- 

(jretdtle. 
until,  prep.  juM/ti\}.  jusf/ue. 
until,    conj.    ju,sqad   ce  qvuo   (310, 

333,  334). 
up,  adj.  iem. 
up,  adv.  en  hant,  (standing)  (foftowt, 

(out  of  bed)  lece 
up.  prep,  e/i  hint  de. 
upon,  prep.      Y.  on. 
us,  prou.  w//'M(llO). 
use.  v.a.  (377)  itxev  de,  (employ)  «« 

Hnrrir   de  (ir.    \'^'.\),  employer  ;  — 

v.n.  (iKii's.')  (fcoir  CitntKiat  \(le\ 
ripe,  8.  WJrtTv/f',  rr       for  the  —  of,  d 

i'tuuiyc  dc  ;  v  be  of  — ,  Hurc^v  (ir. 


183)  or  etre  utile  {d') ;  to  make  — 
of,  ne  servir  (ir.  183),  user  (377). 

useful,  adj.  utile. 

useless,  adj.  inutile. 

usual,  adj.  usuel. 

usually,  adv.  ordinairement. 


V. 


vain,  adj.  vain  ;  in  — ,  en  vain;  to 

be  in  — ,  avoir  beau. 
valley,  a.  txdlee.,  f. 
valuable,  adj.  precieux. 
value,  8.  valear,  f. 
variety,  s.  variete.,  f .,  bien  des, 
various,  adj.  different. 
vegetable,  8.  legume,  m. 
verb,  8.  vei'be,  m. 
verse,  s.  vers,  m. 
very,  adj.  ineme,  {only) seid;  the  — 

thing,  la  chose  mime. 
very.  adv.  (286)  tren,  fort,  bien. 
vessel,  8.  vaisseau,  m.      V.  ship, 
vice,  s.  rAce,  m. 
vicinity,  s.  voisinage,  m.,  environSj 

m.  pi. 
victory,  s.  victoire,  f. 
Vienna,  s.    Vienne,  f. 
view,  8.   vue,  f.,  ooup  d^odl,  m.,  in- 

'tentum.,  f.,  (opinion)  idee. 
vigor.  8.  vigueur,  force^  t, 
village,  8.  village.,  m. 
vine,  8.  vigjie,  f. 
vinegar,  s.  vinaigre^  m. 
violet,  8.  violette,  f. 
violin,  8.  violon,  f. 
virtue,  s.  vertu,  t. 
virtuous,  adj.  vertueux. 
visit,  v.a.  visiter ;  —  v.n.  f aire  dei 

vititex. 
visit,  8.  visitey  f .  ;  on  a  — ,  «n  'nsiU 

{chez). 
voice.  8.  voix,  f. 
volume,  8.  volume,  tome.,  m. 
vote,  8.  cote,  m.,  WfcB,  f. 
vow,  8.  vteu,  m. 
vowel,  a.  ooydlty  I. 


474 


VOCABULARY. 


wait,    v.a.n.     nttendre    (107),     (at 

table,  etc.)  Hernr  (ir.  185). 
waiter,  s.  yart^on,  m. 
wake.  v.a.ii.      V.  awake, 
walk,  v.a.ii.    yiKircIier,  (g-o  on   foot) 

aller  <i  pled,  (come  on  foot)  venir 

d  pied,  (take  a  walk)  .ve  proiuener. 
walk,  s.    rh.arche,   f. ,   (for  pleasure) 

prmneudde,  f.,  (path)  (dlee  ;  to  go, 

to  take  a  — ,  aller  (ir.  194),  fairs 

"iine  prmnenade. 
wall.  s.  vrar,  ni. 
walnut,  s.  noiir.  f. 
want,    v.a.    arair    heHoin  de,  fnU/nr 

(ir.  14b,  100),  (be  destitute)  ?///;// - 

qaer  de,  (wish)   vonloiv  (ir.  101), 

d€,>^ire,r. 
want.  8  W((nqiie,,  (need)  bewin,  m.  ; 

for  —  (A,  ja/ite  de. 
war.  s.  (/1/rrre,  f. 
warm,   adj     chaud ;  to  be —  (51), 

tirolr  cjittud. 
warm,  v.a.n.  chauffer ,  iCechauff'er. 
warn,  v.a   ai-ertir  (de). 
wasp.  8.  yu^pe,  f. 
waste,  v.a  u.  (lose)  pei-dre. 
wat<-.h.  v.a.  t-eiUer  (Kur). 
watch,    s    (tiiue-{)iece)    in/nifre,    f., 

(at  night)  reiiU-,  f. ,  (guard)  y((ide, 

f.  ;   to    k«ep   a   strict    — ,    veiller 

avec  win  (nur)  ; maker,  s.  hor- 

ioyer,  in. 
water,  s   ean,  f. . 
water,  v.a.  arroner.    ^ 
way.  8.  cli<-m/in^  m.,  route,  f.,  voie^ 

f..     (direction,     side)    cote,     m., 

(means)   nioyen,  m.  ;   which  —  ? 

de  quel  cote  ?  par   od  ?  this  — , 

par-ci  ;  that  — ,  par-Ul. 
we,    pron.    nous    (110,    114,    255), 

(anyone)  on. 
weak,  adj.  fail)le,  deMe  (129,  274). 
weakness,  s.  ■faible.i<fie. 
wealth,  s.   richesse,  f.,  richesses,  f. 

pi.,  hie/hs,  m.  pi. 
Wear,    v.a.    user    (377),  (have  on) 

porter. 
Wear.  8.  ?*."<£t 


weather,  s.  tempn,  m.  ;  how  is  the 
—  ?  quel  teiaps  fait-il? 

Wednesday,  s.  laercredi,  m. 

week.  s.  xemaine,  f.,  huit  j'>'irH,  m. 
pi.  ;  this  day  — ,  d^itujonrdluil  en 
knit;  yesterday — ,  il  yen  hier 
huitjoiint. 
j  weep,  v.a.n.  pleurer  ;  to —  bitterly, 
yiVy'i^)  fniidre  en  Innne.'i. 

welfare,  s.  bien-elri\^  m. 

well,  adj.  hle.n.  f>oti,  bien  portant / 
to  be  — ,  xe  jxtrter  bien. 

well,  adv.  bien. 

West,  s,  oiteal ,  accident,  m. 

west.  adj.  de  I'mieM,  ouest,  occiden- 
tal. 

West  Indies,  lea  hideji  occidentales. 

Western,  adj.      K  west. 

wet,  adj.  inoidlle. 

what.  pron.  rol.  adj.  que,  y?///i(122, 
2(i5.  270).  qtCext-ce  qui,  qu'eMce 
qae  t2;»4).  qnel,  m..  qmlh,  f., 
qaelx,  m.pl.,  qaelle.t.  L  pi.  ((52),  (ex- 
clam.  )  qael .  .  .  qne  (^~>()7).  ce  qui.  ce 
que  (12o,  270),  (that  of  which, 
what  .  .  .  of)  re  (hnit.  (as)  coniiae, 
(how  much)  Cirmbien. 

whatever,  pron.  rel.  (7(),  2«2.  28:}) 
toot  ce  qui,  tout  ce  que,  quelque, 
quelctjuque.  quoi  que  ce  st/it.  quoi 
que.  (when  used  adjectivcly)  qneJ 
que.  quelle  que,  q'ieh  que.  qudicM 
que.,  Umt  ce  qui,  Omt  ce  que 
(2S0). 

when.  adv.  (28(),  'MYd)  quandhntqu^, 
\U8ed  for  in  or  <ui  or  at  whic/i) 
queod.,  (after  '  scarcely  '  or  '  hard- 
ly,' :M)H)  que,  (and  —  (;>09)  et  que. 

whence,  adv.  d^uil. 

whenever,  adv.  tauten  le^sfois  que. 

where,  adv.  <nl  ;  any — ,  partout/ 
from  — ,  d^/d. 

whei-eas,  adv.  tnndi.'<  que. 

whether,  conj.  (^{10)  mit  qne,  que, 
(with  the  subj. )  wv/V,  (if)  .vi. 

whicli,  pron  rel  adj  (122,  125, 
2i>:5.  2(>7)  qui  {noxw.).  que  (ohj), 
(after  a  prep.j  lequel,  in.,  laquelU, 
f. ,  lje^'<quel!<.  in.  pi.,  hw/urUt'.'i.  f.  pi., 
(which  oni;)  Uquel,  tu. ,  (the  one 
which  j  celui  (m.)  or  r,Mv  if.)  vatJ, 


VOCABULART. 


475 


(used  for  '  what,    before  a  noun) 

quel,  quelle,  quel ,   (/ncUea  ;    of  or 

from  — ,  dojtt.  duqnel.  eto.  ;  to  — , 

anqueU  <l  Inquelle  (oil,  270). 
whichever,    whichsoever,    pron.    le- 

qi/el.   UiqueUe,    Unqvehf,    knquellea. 

quel/] lie  .  .  .  que. 
while.  8.  ternps,  iu.staiit ;  a  little  — 

ago.  Unitnt  (280). 
while,  adv.  'pendnit  que,  tdndls  que. 
whisper  s.  ;  in  a  — ,  Umt  bius. 
white,  adj.  h.  blanCy  m. 
whither,  adv.  od. 
who,  pron.  rel.    (122.  125,  204,  207, 

27(1)  qui. 
wlioever,  pron.  rel,  (282)  quicanque, 

qui  que  ce  x(dt,  qui. 
whole,    adj.   eutier.   tout   (70,  280), 

tlie  —  town,  tftute  bi  vide. 
wholesome,  adj.  w////-.  milutuire. 
whom.  pron.  rel.  (125.204.  20.S)  qite, 

(after  a  i)rep.)  qui,  lequi-l.  hiqueU.e. 

leaqueL'*.  l.tsijueUcA  ;    (what  person) 

qui  ;  of  (n-  from  — ,  di:  qui,  duut. 
whose,    pnm.    rel.    (12;{.    204,  208) 

(followed  by  a  noun  uoiu.  of  the 

verb)  iUnit  le,  (Ui.  f. ,  Uf,  pi),  (fol- 

lov/ed  by  a  noun  obj.  of  the  verb) 

(bj/U  ;  —  book  is  this  ?  a  qui  est  oe 

linre. 
whosoever.      V.  whoever. 
why,     adv.    pourqutA,    (for   which) 

2Kmr  Uquel  or  Uiquelle ;  —  conj, 

mais  ;   —  not  ?  pourquoi  pas^  que 

.  .  .  ue  (292,  :J07). 
wicked,  adj.  niechnnt. 
wide,  axlj.  (252,  302)  large^  de  lar- 

yeui'. 
width,  8.  largeur,  f. 
wife.  8.  femme,  f. 
will,  v.a.  vou^dr  (ir.  191),  m'donnefr 

'827). 
wul,  V.  n,   auxil.    vouloir  (ir.    191). 

V.  also  p.  54.  90,  201. 
will.  8    luAo/cfe.    f.,  tef<tti7iient,  m.  ; 

^ood-  — .  hiencciWmce,  f. 
William,  m    Cuiiluurae,  m. 
willing,   adj.   i/iKpo-se  (d),  pret  {d)  ; 

tAj  bo  — ,  nnUiii'  lir.  191). 
williujfiy,  adv.  ixdontiers. 
win,  v.a.u.  yayicer. 


wind.  8.  verit.,  m. 

window,  8.  feiiHre.,  cnnnee,,  f. 

wine,  s.  tiit,  m. 

wing,  s   (lile,  f. 

winter,  s.  Idt^e.r,  m. 
J  wipe.  v.a.  e)<Hi(.)j<'.r  (97). 

wisdom,  s.  ftiiijt.^Ke,  f. 

wis'i,  adj    xtige. 

wish.  va.n.  dexirer  (»327).  vouloii 
(ir.  191),  so  ah  niter  ;  I  —  (197), 
je  Doudrnit. 

wish.  8.  de.sir,  souhait,,  m. 

wit.  8.  esprit,  m. 

with.  prep.  (H05)  avec.  (by)  par,  d 
(250),  (from,  of)  de  (250),  (in)  en^ 
diinH,  (among)  cJiez,  (in  the  esti- 
mation or  eyes  of  nupres  de,  de- 
cant.  (cook,  done  in.  mixed  with) 
'/'/,  m. ,  d  lit,  f.,  nux,  pi. 

within,  prep   dfuis,  en. 

within,  adv.  e/i.  dediUis,  dedans,  (at 
liouie)  d  III  miiixoii,  chiz  .wi. 

without,  prej)  stius  (300) ;  —  conj. 
(with  the  subj.)  sans  que.,  a  moitia 
que.  que  .  .  .  ue  (310,  333). 

woman,  8,  femme^  f. 

wonder,  s.  merveille^  f, 

wonderful,  adj   m&rveiUeux. 

wood.  8.  bois,  m. 

wooden,  adj.  de  bois. 

wool,  8.  liiiue,  f. 

word,  8.  (as  a  mere  sign  printed, 
written,  or  even  pronounced) 
mot^  m.,  (of  utterance  only) 
parole.,  f.,  (form  of  expression) 
tenne.,  m.,  (assurance,  promise, 
pledge)  parole,  f.  ;  to  keep  o.'s 
— ,  teuir  parole  or  sa  parole. 

work,  v.a.n.  travaUler. 

work,  s.  travail.,  m. ,  (thing  done  or 
to  be  done)  ouvrnge.,  (literary  or 
artistic  production)  mivre,  t 

world,  s.  monde,  m. 

worse,  adj.  plus  mauvais,  pire. 

worst,  adj.  le  pire.,  le  plus  'rnauvais. 

worth,  adj.  qui  vaut ;  to  be  — , 
riil^dr  dr.   191). 

worthy,  adj.  dii/>ie  [de),  brave  (83). 

won  Id  (sign  of  the  conditional).  K 
p   54,  90,  201,  235. 

wound,  v.u.  blesser. 


476 


VOCABULARY. 


wouad,  B.  hHrnre,  f.,  eoiip,  m. 

wretched,  adj.  miserable, 

wrist,  8.  poignet,  m. 

write,  v.a.n.  ecn^'e  (ir.  175). 

writing,  s.  ecritu7'e,  f.  ; master, 

maitre  (Vecriture^  m. 
wrong,    adj.  fanx^    mal ;  to  be  — 

(pers. )  avoir  tort  {de). 
wrong,    8.    mal,    m.,    injtistice,    f., 

tort,  m,  ;  to  be  in  the  — ,  avoir 

tort. 
wrong,  v.a.  faire  tort  d. 


yard,  s.  coitr,  f.,  (measure)  Wf^^r*?,  m. 

year,  a.  mmee,  f.,  an.,  m.  ;  last  — , 
ran/iee  (ieriilere  or  paasee  ;  next 
— ,  CdJiJiee  yrochaine ;  new  — , 
nouveUe  annee,  nouvel  an;  N^iw 
— 's  Day,  jour  de  Van,  m. ;  New 
— 's  gift,  etrennes,  f.  pi.  ;  to  wish 
a  happy  New  — ,  souhaiter  la 
bonne  annee. 

yellow,  adj.  s.  jaune,  m. 

yes,  adv.  oui,  ai  (201),  que  oui,  que 
si  (808). 

yesterday,  adv.  hier ;  the  day  be- 
fore — ,  avant  d'fiier. 

yet,  conj.  cependant,  que  .  .  .  ne 
(310). 


yet,  adv.  encore. 

yield,  v.a.n.  ceder  (d). 

yonder,  adj.  ce,  cet,  cettc,  MS,  ce .  .% 

1(1,  etc.  ;  adv.  Id-bas. 
yon,  pron.  (110,  114)  vous. 
young,  adj.  jeune  ;  —  men,  —  peo* 

p\e,jeunes  gens,  m.  pi.,  la  jeun- 

es.se,  f. 
younger,  adj.  plus  jeune. 
your,   pron.    posa.    (G4,   65)  votre, 

vos,  pi. 
yours,  pron.  posa.  (125)  le  votre,  la 

votre,   les  votres,  (pron.  pers.)  d 

vous,  de  vous  ;  a  friend  of  — ,  un 

de  -^os  amis  ;  —  truly,  sincerely, 

or  faithfully,  tout  d  vans,   votre 

tout  deooue. 
yourself,     pron.     (Ill)   wms-mime^ 

(in  a  retlect.  verb,  188)  vous. 
3'ourselvt!s,  pron.    (Ill)  oous-nienes^ 

(in  a  retlect.  verb,  188)  vou^. 
youth,   8.  jeunesse,  1,   (ladj  jeant 

lu/mme,  m. 


zeal,  8.  z^le,  m. 
zealously,  adv.  avec  aUt, 
zero,  8.  zero,  m. 
Bone,  &  zon^j  t 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN  INITIAL  FINE  OF  25  CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  50  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY  AND  TO  $1.00  ON  THE  SEVENTH  DAY 
OVERDUE. 


MAY   27  1036 


i-.iAY  29   1937 


SEP  i     183^ 


JlIN  25  1941 


iyApi'5CGB 


MV?^19S6l.U 


i/i&\^t4 


SEP  1  ^  1958 


gyp  ^     195H 


-24^ 


aoBl 


F^^C 


.IUN7    1960 


LD  21-100m-7,'33 


YB  01205 


/^ 


f  3(^3^  I 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  UBRARY 


